diff options
Diffstat (limited to '13287-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 13287-h/13287-h.htm | 23020 |
1 files changed, 23020 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/13287-h/13287-h.htm b/13287-h/13287-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e27ccb --- /dev/null +++ b/13287-h/13287-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,23020 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Voyages and Travels Volume 7</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content= +"text/html; charset=UTF-8"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +body {background: #ffffcc; margin:10%; text-align:justify} +h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {color:green; text-align:center} +blockquote {font-size: .9em} +p.poem {text-align:center} +p.external {font-weight: bold} +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 13287 ***</div> + +<h2>A</h2> + +<h2>GENERAL</h2> + +<h2>HISTORY AND COLLECTION</h2> + +<h2>OF</h2> + +<h1>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,</h1> + +<h2>ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:</h2> + +<h2>FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS</h2> + +<h2>OF NAVIGATION, DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE,</h2> + +<h2>BY SEA AND LAND,</h2> + +<h2>FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME.</h2> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2>BY</h2> + +<h2>ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.</h2> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2>ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.</h2> + +<h2>VOL. VII.</h2> + +<h3>WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:</h3> + +<h3>AND T. CADELL, LONDON.</h3> + +<h3>MDCCCXXIV.</h3> + +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<h2>CONTENTS OF VOLUME VII.</h2> + +<p><a href="#part2"><b>PART II.--(Continued.)</b></a></p> + +<p><a href="#book2-3"><b>BOOK III.--(Continued.)</b></a></p> + +<p><b>CONTINUATION OF THE DISCOVERIES AND CONQUESTS OF THE +PORTUGUESE IN THE EAST; TOGETHER WITH SOME ACCOUNT OF THE EARLY +VOYAGES OF OTHER EUROPEAN NATIONS TO INDIA.</b></p> + +<p><a href="#chapter3-4"><b><i>CHAPTER +IV.--(Continued.)</i></b></a></p> + +<p>Continuation of the Portuguese transactions in India, after +the return of Don Stefano de Gama from Suez in 1541, to the +Reduction of Portugal under the Dominion of Spain in 1581.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII. Account of an expedition of the Portuguese from +India to Madagascar in 1613.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIV. Continuation of the transactions of the +Portuguese in India, from 1617 to 1640: and the conclusion of the +Portuguese Asia of Manuel de Faria.</p> + +<p>SECTION XV. Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and +other places.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVI. A short account of the Portuguese possessions +between the Cape of Good Hope and China.</p> + +<p><a href="#chapter3-5"><b><i>CHAPTER V.</i></b></a></p> + +<p>Voyages and Travels in Egypt, Syria, Arabia, Persia, and +India.<br> +By Ludovico Verthema, in 1503.</p> + +<p>Introduction</p> + +<p>SECTION I. Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in +Egypt, and from thence to Damascus in Syria.</p> + +<p>SECTION II. Of the City of Damascus.</p> + +<p>SECTION III. Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the +Manners of the Arabians.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV. Observations of the Author during his residence at +Mecca.</p> + +<p>SECTION V. Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia +Felix, or Yemen.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI. Observations of the Author relative to some parts +of Persia.</p> + +<p>SECTION VII. Observations of the Author on various parts of +India.</p> + +<p>SECTION VIII. Account of the famous City and Kingdom of +Calicut.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX. Observations on various parts of India.</p> + +<p>SECTION X. Continuation of the Authors Adventures, after his +return to Calicut.</p> + +<p>SECTION XI. Account of a memorable Battle between the +Mahometan Navy of Calicut and the Portuguese.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII. Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return +to Europe by Sea.</p> + +<p><a href="#chapter3-6"><b><i>CHAPTER VI.</i></b></a></p> + +<p>Voyages and Travels of Cesar Frederick in India.</p> + +<p>Introduction</p> + +<p>SECTION I. Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor.</p> + +<p>SECTION II. Of Feluchia and Babylon.</p> + +<p>SECTION III. Of Basora.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV. Of Ormuz.</p> + +<p>SECTION V. Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI. Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other +places.</p> + +<p>SECTION VII. Of Goa.</p> + +<p>SECTION VIII. Of the City of Bijanagur.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX. Of Cochin.</p> + +<p>SECTION X. Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar.</p> + +<p>SECTION XI. Of the Island of Ceylon.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII. Of Negapatam.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII. Of Saint Thome and other places.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIV. Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of +Malacca.</p> + +<p>SECTION XV. Of the City of Siam.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVI. Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River +Ganges.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVII. Of Tanasserim and other places.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVIII. Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIX. Voyages of the Author to different parts of +India.</p> + +<p>SECTION XX. Some Account of the Commodities of India.</p> + +<p>SECTION XXI. Return of the Author to Europe.</p> + +<p><a href="#chapter3-7"><b><i>CHAPTER VII.</i></b></a></p> + +<p>Early English Voyages to Guinea, and other parts of the West +Coast of Africa.</p> + +<p>Introduction.</p> + +<p>SECTION I. Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the +year 1552, by Captain Thomas Windham.</p> + +<p>SECTION II. A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, +by Captain Windham and Antonio Anes Pinteado.</p> + +<p>SECTION III. Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John +Lok.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV. Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, +Merchant of London.</p> + +<p>SECTION V. Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William +Towerson.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI. Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea in +1558.</p> + +<p>SECTION VII. Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in +1561.</p> + +<p>SECTION VIII. Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William +Rutter.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX. Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage.</p> + +<p>SECTION X. Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker.</p> + +<p>SECTION XI. A Voyage to Guinea in 1564, by Captain David +Carlet.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII. A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands +in 1566, by George Fenner.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII. Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, +written by himself.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIV. Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to +Morocco, in 1585, written by himself.</p> + +<p>SECTION XV. Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James +Welsh.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVI. Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter +from Anthony Ingram the chief factor, written from Plymouth to +the Owners, dated 9th September, the day of arriving at +Plymouth.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVII. Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in +1590.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVIII. Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to +the Rivers Senegal and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591.</p> + +<p><a href="#chapter3-8"><b><i>CHAPTER VIII.</i></b></a></p> + +<p>Some miscellaneous early Voyages of the English.</p> + +<p>Introduction.</p> + +<p>SECTION I. Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in +Spain, in 1585.</p> + +<p>SECTION II. Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West +Indies.</p> + +<p>SECTION III. Cruising Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, +in 1586, written by John Evesham.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV. Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir +Francis Drake in 1587.</p> + +<p>SECTION V. Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish +Armada in 1588.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI. Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish +Armada, at Anstruther in Scotland, in 1588.</p> + +<p>SECTION VII. A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the +Earl of Cumberland.</p> + +<p>SECTION VIII. Valiant Sea Fight by Ten Merchant Ships of +London against Twelve Spanish Gallies, in the Straits of +Gibraltar, on the 24th April 1590.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX. A valiant Sea Fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, +in April 1591, by the Centurion of London, against five Spanish +Gallies.</p> + +<p>SECTION X. Sea-Fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man +of war, commanded by Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish +men of war, 31st August 1591. Written by Sir Walter Raleigh.</p> + +<p>SECTION XI. Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain +this year 1591; with the number that perished, according to the +examination of certain Spaniards, lately taken and brought to +England.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII. Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in +1581, by a fleet of London ships sent with supplies to the Lord +Thomas Howard. Written by Captain Robert Flicke.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII. Exploits of the English in several Expeditions +and cruizing Voyages from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John +Huighen van Linschoten.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIV. Cruising voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir +John Burrough, knight.</p> + +<p>SECTION XV. The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with +quicksilver and the Popes bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas +White.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVI. Narrative of the Destruction of a great East +India Carak in 1584, written by Captain Nicholas Downton.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVII. List of the Royal Navy of England at the demise +of Queen Elizabeth.</p> + +<p><a href="#chapter3-9"><b><i>CHAPTER IX.</i></b></a></p> + +<p>Early Voyages of the English to the East Indies, before the +establishment of an exclusive company.</p> + +<p>SECTION I. Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by +Thomas Stevens.</p> + +<p>Introduction.</p> + +<p>SECTION II. Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, +Merchant of London, and others, in 1583.</p> + +<p>SECTION III. Supplement to the Journey of Fitch</p> + +<p>No. 1.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt of +Oxford, Author of the Voyages, &c.</p> + +<p>No. 2,--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of +London.</p> + +<p>No. 3.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same.</p> + +<p>No. 4.--Letter from John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and +William Scales at Basora.</p> + +<p>No. 5.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Messrs Eldred and +Scales.</p> + +<p>No. 6.--Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore.</p> + +<p>No. 7.--Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard Poore.</p> + +<p>No. 8.--The Report of John Huighen, &c.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<h2>A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.</h2> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2><a name="part2" id="part2">PART II.--Continued</a></h2> + +<h2><a name="book2-3" id="book2-3">BOOK III.--Continued.</a></h2> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p><b>HISTORY OF THE DISCOVERY OF AMERICA, AND OF SOME OF THE +EARLY CONQUESTS IN THE NEW WORLD.</b></p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2><a name="chapter3-4" id="chapter3-4">CHAPTER IV. +CONTINUED.</a></h2> + +<p>CONTINUATION OF THE PORTUGUESE TRANSACTIONS IN INDIA, AFTER +THE RETURN OF DON STEPHANO DE GAMA FROM SUEZ IN 1541, TO THE +REDUCTION OF PORTUGAL UNDER THE DOMINION OF SPAIN IN 1581.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII.</p> + +<p><i>Account of an Expedition of the Portuguese from India to +Madagascar in 1613.</i></p> + +<p>Being anxious to find out a considerable number of Portuguese +who were reported to exist in the island of St. Lawrence or +Madagascar, having been cast away at different times on that +island, and also desirous of propagating the ever blessed gospel +among its inhabitants, and to exclude the Hollanders from that +island by establishing a friendly correspondence with the native +princes, the viceroy Don Jerome de Azevedo sent thither, in 1613, +a caravel from Goa commanded by Paul Rodrigues de Costa, +accompanied by two Jesuits, some interpreters, and a competent +number of soldiers. This island is about 260 leagues in length +and 600 in circumference[1], its greatest extent being from +N.N.E. to S.S.W. It is 80 leagues from E. to W. where widest, but +considerably less towards the north, where it ends in a point +named St Ignatius which is about 15 leagues from east to west[2]. +It may be considered as divided into three parts. The first or +northern portion is divided from the other two by an imaginary +line from east to west at Cape St Andrew[3]. The other two +divisions are formed by a chain of mountains running nearly south +from this line to Cape St Romanus, otherwise Cape St Mary, but +much nearer the east coast than the west. The island is divided +into a great number of kingdoms, but so confusedly and +ill-defined, that it were endless to enumerate them. It is very +populous, the inhabitants having many cities and towns of +different extent and grandeur[4]. The country is fertile and well +watered, and everywhere diversified with mountains, vallies, +rivers, bays, and ports. The natives have no general name for the +island, and are entirely ignorant of those of Madagascar and St +Lawrence, which are given to it by strangers. The general +population of the island consists of a nation called +<i>Buques</i>, who have no religion and consequently no priests +or places of worship, yet all their youth are circumcised at six +or seven years old, any one performing the operation. The natives +are not all of one colour; some being quite black with crisp or +curled hair like negroes; others not quite so black with lank +hair; others again resembling mulatoes; while some that live in +the interior are almost white, yet have hair of both kinds. They +are of large stature, strong and well made, of clear judgment, +and apt to learn. Every man has as many wives as he pleases or +can maintain, turning them off at pleasure, when they are sure to +find other husbands, all of whom buy their wives from their +fathers, by way of repaying the expence of their maintenance +before marriage. Their funeral obsequies consist chiefly in +feasting the guests; and their mourning in laying aside all +appearance of joy, and cutting off their hair or daubing their +faces and bodies with clay. Their government is monarchical, +their kings or chiefs being called <i>Andias</i>, <i>Anrias</i>, +and <i>Dias</i>, all independent of each other and almost +continually engaged in war, more for the purpose of plunder than +slaughter or conquest. On the Portuguese going among them, no +arms were found in their possession except a few guns they had +procured from the Moors and Hollanders, which they knew not how +to use, and were even fearful of handling. They have excellent +amber[5], white sandal, tortoises, ebony, sweet woods of various +kinds, and abundance of slaves, with plenty of cattle of all +kinds, the flesh of their goats being as sweet as mutton. The +island likewise produces abundance of sea cows, sea-horses, +monkeys, and some say tigers, with a great many snakes which are +not very venomous. It has no elephants, horses, asses, lions, +bears, deer, foxes, nor hares.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 1: Madagascar, between the latitudes of +12° 30' and 35° 45' S. and the longitudes of 44° and +53° W. from Greenwich, rather exceeds 1000 statute miles from +N.N.W to S.S.E. and is about 220 miles in mean width from east to +west. This island therefore, in a fine climate, capable of +growing all the tropical productions in perfection, and +excellently situated for trade, extends to about 200,000 square +miles, or 128 millions of acres, yet is abandoned entirely to +ignorant barbarians.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 2: The north end of Madagascar, called the +point of St Ignatius, is 70 miles from east to west, the eastern +headland being Cape Natal or de Ambro, and the western Cape St +Sebastian.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 3: Cape Antongil on the east coast is +probably here meant, in lat. 15° 45' S. as at this place the +deep bay of Antongil or Manghabei penetrates about 70 mile +inland, and the opposite coast also is deeply indented by port +Massali. It is proper to mention however, that Cape St Andrew is +on the west coast of Madagascar, in lat. 17° 12' +S.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 4: There may be numerous villages, or +collections of huts, in Madagascar, and some of these may +possibly be extensive and populous; but there certainly never was +in that island any place that merited the name of a +city.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 5: More probably Ambergris thrown on their +shores.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The first place visited by de Costa on this voyage of +discovery was a large bay near <i>Masilage</i>[6] in lat. 16° +S. in which there is an island half a league in circumference +containing a town of 8000 inhabitants, most of them weavers of an +excellent kind of stuff made of the palm-tree. At this place the +Moors used to purchase boys who were carried to Arabia and sold +for infamous uses. The king of this place, named <i>Samamo</i>, +received the Portuguese in a friendly manner, and granted leave +to preach the gospel among his subjects. Coasting about 40 +leagues south from this place, they came to the mouth of a large +river named <i>Balue</i> or <i>Baeli</i> in about 17° S. and +having doubled Cape St Andrew, they saw the river and kingdom of +<i>Casame</i>, between the latitudes of 17° and 18° S. +where they found little water and had much trouble[7]. Here also +amity was established with the king, whose name was Sampilla, a +discreet old man; but hitherto they could get no intelligence of +the Portuguese whom they were sent in search of. On Whitsunday, +which happened that year about the middle of May, mass was said +on shore and two crosses erected, at which the king appeared so +much pleased that he engaged to restore them if they happened to +fall or decay. During the holidays they discovered an island in +lat. 18° S. to which they gave the name of Espirito Santo[8], +and half a degree farther they were in some danger from a sand +bank 9 leagues long. On Trinity Sunday, still in danger from sand +banks, they anchored at the seven islands of <i>Cuerpo de +Dios</i> or <i>Corpus Christi</i>[9] in 19° S. near the +kingdom and river of <i>Sadia</i> to which they came on the 19th +of June, finding scarcely enough of water to float the caravel. +This kingdom is extensive, and its principal <i>city</i> on the +banks of the river has about 10,000 inhabitants. The people are +black, simple, and good-natured, having no trade, but have plenty +of flesh, maize, tar, tortoises, sandal, ebony, and sweet woods. +The name of the king was <i>Capilate</i>, who was an old man much +respected and very honest. He received the Portuguese kindly, and +even sent his son to guide them along the coast. All along this +coast from <i>Massalage</i> to <i>Sadia</i> the natives speak the +same language with the Kafrs on the opposite coast of Africa; +while in all the rest of the island the native language called +<i>Buqua</i> is spoken.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 6: On this bay is a town called New Massah +to distinguish it from Old Massah on the bay of Massali, somewhat +more than half a degree farther north. Masialege or Meselage is a +town at the bottom of the bay of Juan Mane de Cuna, about half a +degree farther south.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 7: They were here on the bank of Pracel, +which seems alluded to in the text from the shallowness of the +water; though the district named Casame in the text is not to be +found in modern maps--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 8: Probably the island of the bay of St +Andrew in 17° 30' is here meant; at any rate it must be +carefully distinguished from Spiritu Santo, St Esprit, or Holy +Ghost Island, one of the Comoros in lat. 15° +S.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 9: Perhaps those now called <i>barren +isles</i> on the west coast, between lat. 18° 40' and 19° +12' S. The river Sadia of the text may be that now called +<i>Santiano</i> in lat. 19° S.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Continuing towards the south they came to the country of the +<i>Buques</i>, a poor and barbarous people feeding on the spawn +of fish, who are much oppressed by the kings of the inland +tribes. Passing the river <i>Mane</i>[10], that of +<i>Saume</i>[11] in 20° 15'; <i>Manoputa</i> in 20° 30', +where they first heard of the Portuguese; <i>Isango</i> in +21°; <i>Terrir</i> in 21° 30'; the seven islands of +<i>Elizabeth</i> in 22°; they came on the 11th of July into +the port of <i>St Felix</i>[12] in 22°, where they heard +again of the Portuguese of whom they were in search, from +<i>Dissamuta</i> the king of that part of the country. On +offering a silver chain at this place for some provisions, the +natives gave it to an old woman to examine if it was genuine, and +she informed the Portuguese that at the distance of three days +journey there was an island inhabited a long while before by a +white people dressed like the Portuguese and wearing crosses +hanging from their necks, who lived by rapine and easily took +whatever they wanted, as they were armed with spears and guns, +with which information the Portuguese were much gratified. +Continuing their voyage past the bay of <i>St Bonaventura</i> and +the mouth of the river <i>Massimanga</i>, they entered the bay of +<i>Santa Clara</i>, where <i>Diamassuto</i> came to them and +entered into a treaty of friendship, worshipping the cross on his +knees. They were here told that white people frequented a +neighbouring port, and concluded that they were Hollanders. Going +onwards they found banks of sand not laid down in any chart, and +entered a port in lat. 24° S. The king of this place was +named <i>Diacomena</i>, and they here learnt that there were +Portuguese on the opposite coast who had been cast away, and now +herded cattle for their subsistence. They said likewise that the +Hollanders had been three times at their port, and had left them +four musketeers with whose assistance they had made war upon +their enemies. On some trees there were several inscriptions, +among which were the following. <i>Christophorus Neoportus Anglus +Cap</i>. and on another <i>Dominus Robertus Scherleius Comes, +Legatus Regis Persarum</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 10: It is singular that the large circular +bay of Mansitare in lat. 19° 30' S. is not named, although +probably meant by the river <i>Mane</i> in the +text.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 11: Now called Ranoumanthe, discharging its +waters into the bay of St Vincents.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 12: Now Port St James.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the latitude of 25° S. they entered a port which they +named St Augustine[13] in a kingdom called <i>Vavalinta</i>, of +which a <i>Buque</i> named <i>Diamacrinale</i> was king, who no +sooner saw the Portuguese than he asked if these were some of the +men from the other coast. This confirmed the stories they had +formerly heard respecting the Portuguese, and they were here +informed that the place at which they dwelt was only six days +sail from that place. In September they got sight of Cape +<i>Romain</i> or St <i>Mary</i> the most southern point of +Madagascar, where they spent 40 days in stormy weather, and on St +Lukes day, 18th October, they entered the port of that name in +the kingdom of Enseroe. The natives said that there were white +people who wore crosses, only at the distance of half a days +journey, who had a large town, and <i>Randumana</i> the king came +on board the caravel, and sent one of his subjects with a +Portuguese to shew him where these white people dwelt, but the +black ran away when only half way.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 13: In lat. 23° 30' or directly under +the tropic of Capricorn, is a bay now called St Augustine. If +that in the text, the latitude 1s erroneous a degree and a +half.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Among others of the natives who came to this place to trade +with the Portuguese, was a king named <i>Bruto Chembanga</i> with +above 500 fighting men. His sons were almost white, with long +hair, wearing gowns and breeches of cotton of several colours +with silver buttons and bracelets and several ornaments of gold, +set with pearls and coral. The territory of this king was named +<i>Matacassi</i>, bordering on <i>Enseroe</i> to the west. He +said that the Portuguese were all dead, who not far from that +place had built a town of stone houses, where they worshipped the +cross, on the foot or pedestal of which were unknown characters. +He drew representations of all these things on the sand, and +demanded a high reward for his intelligence. Some of his people +wore crosses, and informed the Portuguese that there were two +ships belonging to the Hollanders in port <i>St Lucia</i> or +<i>Mangascafe</i>. In a small island at this place there was +found a <i>square stone fort</i>[14], and at the foot of it the +arms of Portugal were carved on a piece of marble, with this +inscription</p> + +<p>REX PORTUGALENSIS O S.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 14: This is unintelligible as it stands in +the text. It may possibly have been a square stone pedestal for +one of the crosses of discovery, that used to be set up by the +Portuguese navigators as marks of possession.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Many conjectures were formed to account for the signification +of the circle between the two last letters of this inscription, +but nothing satisfactory could be discovered. King +<i>Chembanga</i> requested that a Portuguese might be sent along +with him to his residence, to treat upon some important affairs, +and left his nephew as an hostage for his safe return. +Accordingly the master, Antonio Gonzales, and one of the priests +named Pedro Freyre, were sent; who, at twelve leagues distance, +came to his residence called <i>Fansaria</i>, a very populous and +magnificent place. At first he treated them with much kindness, +after which he grew cold towards them, but on making him a +considerable present he became friendly, and even delivered to +them his eldest son to be carried to Goa, desiring that the two +Jesuits and four other Portuguese might be left as hostages, to +whom he offered the island of <i>Santa Cruz</i> to live in. These +people are descended from the Moors, and call themselves +<i>Zelimas</i>; they have the alcoran in Arabic, and have faquirs +who teach them to read and write; they are circumcised, eat no +bacon, and some of them have several wives. The king said that in +the time of his father a ship of the Portuguese was cast away on +this coast, from which about 100 men escaped on shore, some of +whom had their wives along with them, and the rest married there +and left a numerous progeny. He repeated several of their names, +and even showed a book in Portuguese and Latin which had belonged +to them, and some maps; and concluded by saying that there were +more Portuguese on that coast, seven days journey to the north. +On farther inquiry, a man 90 years of age was found, who had +known the Portuguese that were cast away there, and could still +remember a few detached words of their language.</p> + +<p>The Portuguese set all hands to work to build a house and +chapel for the two Jesuits and four Portuguese who were to +remain, and when the work was finished, mass was solemnly said on +shore, many of the natives coming to learn how to make the sign +of the cross. One day while the king was looking on, and saw +several men labouring hard to carry a cross that was meant to be +set upon a rock, he went half naked and bareheaded, and carried +it without assistance to the place appointed. The Portuguese +might well say they had found another emperor Heraclius; for +after this pious act of gigantic strength, he became very wicked; +for being ready to sail, De Costa demanded that the king's son +who had been promised should be sent, but he denied having ever +made any such promise, and offered a slave. On this the captain +sent the master and pilot with some men to enforce the demand, +and safe conduct for some Portuguese to go to port <i>St +Lucia</i> to see an inscription said by the natives to be at that +place. The peace was thus broken, and a party of Portuguese +soldiers was sent armed against the king, who endeavoured to +resist, and the king's son, a youth of eleven years of age was +brought away, the natives being unable to contend against +fire-arms. Several messages were sent offering a high ransom for +the boy; but on being told by the captain that he would lose his +head if he did not carry him to the viceroy, they went away much +grieved. This happened about the end of 1613; and towards the +middle of 1614, de Costa arrived safe at Goa with the boy, whom +the viceroy caused to be instructed in Christianity by the +jesuits, and stood god-father at his baptism on St Andrews day, +when he was named Andrew Azevedo.</p> + +<p>The viceroy treated him with much honour and magnificence, in +hopes that when he succeeded to his father, he might encourage +the propagation of the gospel in Madagascar; and when he was +supposed to be sufficiently instructed, he was sent away, +accompanied by four Jesuits. On this occasion a pink and caravel +were sent to Madagascar, commanded by Pedro de Almeyda Cabral, +and Juan Cardoso de Pina, who sailed from Goa on the 17th of +September 1616. On the 20th of March 1617, they discovered a most +delightful island, watered with pure springs, and producing many +unknown plants besides others already known, both aromatic and +medicinal. To this island, in which were two mountains which +overtopped the clouds, they gave the name of <i>Isola del +Cisne</i> or swan island, and on it the jesuits planted some +crosses and left inscriptions commemorative of the discovery[15]. +The wreck of two ships of the Hollanders were found on this +island. On the arrival of the two Portuguese ships in the port of +St Lucia in Madagascar, the king and queen of <i>Matacassi</i> +received their son with the strongest demonstrations of joy, and +gave back the hostages left on taking him away. The four jesuits +with six soldiers accompanied the young prince to his father's +court at <i>Fansaria</i>, where, and at every place through which +he passed, he was received with demonstrations of joy, which to +the Portuguese seemed ridiculous, as no doubt those used by the +Portuguese on similar occasions would have appeared to them. The +king made a similar agreement with the two commanders on this +voyage with that formerly made with De Costa, which was that the +fathers should inhabit the inland of Santa Cruz and have liberty +to preach the gospel in Madagascar. Upon this the fathers went to +the fort at Santa Cruz, where Don Andrew, the king's son, sent +them workmen and provisions.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 15: The text gives no indication by which +even to conjecture the situation of this island, unless that +being bound towards the southern part of the east coast of +Madagascar, it may possibly have been either the isle of France, +or that of Bourbon.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The captain, Pedro de Almeyda, had orders to bring another of +the king's sons to Goa, and if refused to carry one away by +force; but the king declared that he had only one other son, who +was too young for the voyage, on which Almeyda satisfied himself +with Anria Sambo, the king's nephew, who was carried to Goa, and +baptized by the name of Jerome. When sufficiently instructed in +the Christian religion, he was sent back to his country in a +pink, commanded by Emanuel de Andrada, together with two Jesuits, +100 soldiers, and presents for the king and prince, worth 4000 +ducats. They set out in the beginning of February 1618; and being +under the necessity of watering at the <i>Isola de Cisne</i>, +they found three ships sunk at the mouth of the river. On +landing, twenty Hollanders were found about two leagues from the +shore, guarding the goods they had saved from the wreck. They +made some opposition, but were forced to submit to superior +numbers, and were found to have a large quantity of cloves, +pepper, arms, ammunition, and provisions. Andrada carried the +prisoners, and as many of the valuable commodities on board his +pink as it could contain, and set fire to the rest, though the +Hollanders alleged that they had come from the Moluccas, with a +regular pass.</p> + +<p>When Andrada arrived in the port of St Lucia, the two Jesuits +came to him both sick, declaring that it was impossible to live +in that country, where all the men who had been left along with +them had died. Andrada sent the letters with which he was +intrusted to the king and prince, by the servants of Don Jerome; +and in return, the king sent 100 fat oxen, with a great quantity +of fowls and honey, and six slaves, but would not come himself, +and it was found that his son had reverted to Mahometanism. The +tribes in Madagascar called <i>Sadias</i> and <i>Fansayros</i> +are <i>Mahometan Kafrs</i>[16], and are attached to the liberty +allowed by the law of Mahomet, of having a plurality of wives. +The king was of the <i>Fansayro</i> tribe, and was now desirous +to destroy Andrada and the Portuguese by treachery; incited to +this change of disposition by a <i>Chingalese</i> slave belonging +to the Jesuits, who had run away, and persuaded the king, that +the Portuguese would deprive him of his kingdom, as they had +already done many of the princes in Ceylon and India. The Kafrs +came accordingly to the shore in great numbers, and began to +attack the Portuguese with stones and darts, but were soon put to +flight by the fire-arms, and some of them slain, whose bodies +were hung upon trees as a warning to the rest, and one of their +towns was burnt.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 16: In strict propriety, this expression is +a direct contradiction, is Kafr is an Arabic word signifying +<i>unbelievers</i>; but having been long employed as a generic +term for the natives of the eastern coast of Africa, from the +Hottentots to the Moors of Zeyla exclusively, we are obliged to +employ the ordinary language.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Andrada carried away with him Don Jerome, the king's nephew, +and a brother of his who was made prisoner in a skirmish with the +natives, who was converted, and died at Goa. All the Jesuits +agreed to desist from the mission of Madagascar, and departed +along with Andrada much against his inclination; and thus ended +the attempt to convert the natives of Madagascar to the Christian +religion.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIV.</p> + +<p><i>Continuation of the Transactions of the Portuguese in +India, from 1617 to 1640; and the conclusion of the Portuguese +Asia of Manuel de Faria.</i></p> + +<p>Towards the end of 1617, Don Juan Coutinno, count of Redondo, +came to Goa, as viceroy, to succeed Azevedo. During this year, +three ships and two fly-boats, going from Portugal for India, +were intercepted near the Cape of Good Hope by six English ships, +when the English admiral declared that he had orders from his +sovereign to seize effects of the Portuguese to the value of +70,000 crowns, in compensation for the injury done by the late +viceroy Azevedo to the four English ships at Surat. Christopher +de Noronha, who commanded the Portuguese ships, immediately paid +the sum demanded by the English admiral, together with 20,000 +crowns more to divide among his men. But Noronha, on his arrival +at Goa, was immediately put under an arrest by the viceroy, for +this pusillanimous behaviour, and was sent home prisoner to +Lisbon, to answer for his conduct.</p> + +<p>In the year 1618, the Moor who had been seen long before, at +the time when Nunno de Cunna took Diu, and was then upwards of +300 years old, died at Bengal now 60 years older, yet did not +appear more than 60 years old at his death. In 1619, a large +wooden cross, which stood on one of the hills which overlook Goa, +was seen by many of the inhabitants of that city, on the 23d of +February, to have the perfect figure of a crucified man upon it. +The truth of this having been ascertained by the archbishop, he +had it taken down, and got made from it a smaller cross, only two +spans long, on which was fixed a crucified Jesus of ivory, and +the whole surrounded by a golden glory; the rest of the cross +being distributed to the churches and persons of quality. Ten +days after this cross was removed, water gushed from the hole in +which it was formerly fixed, in which cloths being dipped wrought +many miraculous cures. A church was built on the spot to +commemorate the miracle. At this time it was considered, in an +assembly of the principal clergy, whether the threads, worn by +the bramins across their shoulders, were a heathenish +superstition or only a mark of their nobility, and, after a long +debate, it was determined to be merely an honourable distinction. +The reason of examining this matter was, that many of the bramins +refused to embrace the Christian faith, because obliged to +renounce these threads.</p> + +<p>In November 1619, the count of Redondo died; and, by virtue of +a patent of succession, Ferdinand de Albuquerque became +governor-general, being now 70 years of age, 40 of which he had +been an inhabitant of Goa, and consequently was well versed in +the affairs of India, but too slow in his motions for the +pressing occasions of the time. During his administration, the +Portuguese were expelled from Ormuz by the sultan of Shiras, +assisted by six English ships.</p> + +<p>In July 1620, the Hollanders were desirous of gaining +possession of the city of Macao in China, and appeared before it +in seventeen ships, or, as some say, twenty-three, having 2000 +soldiers on board, and were likewise in hopes of taking the fleet +at that place, which was bound for Japan, having already taken +several Portuguese and Chinese ships near the Philippine islands. +After battering the fort of St Francis for five days, the Dutch +admiral, Cornelius Regers, landed 800 men, with which he got +possession of a redoubt or entrenchment, with very little +opposition. He then marched to take possession of the city, not +then fortified, where he did not expect any resistance; but Juan +Suarez Vivas, taking post on some strong ground with only 160 +men, defeated the Hollanders and compelled them to return +precipitately to their ships, leaving 300 of their men slain, +seven only with the colours and one piece of cannon being taken, +and they threw away all their arms to enable them to swim off to +their ships. In the mean while, the ships continued to batter the +fort, but were so effectually answered that some of them were +sunk and sixty men slain. After this the enemy abandoned the +enterprise, and the citizens of Macao built a wall round the city +with six bastions; and, as the mountain of <i>our Lady of the +Guide</i> commanded the bastion of St Paul, a fort was +constructed on its summit armed with ten large guns.</p> + +<p>We have formerly mentioned the destruction of the Portuguese +cities of <i>Liampo</i> and <i>Chincheo</i>, in China, through +their own bad conduct. From that time, they lived in the island +of <i>Lampazau</i> till the year 1557, when they were permitted +to build the city <i>Macao</i>, the largest belonging to the +Portuguese in the east after Goa. They had been in use to resort +to the island of <i>Sanchuan</i>, on the coast of China, for +trade, where they lived in huts made of boughs of trees, and +covered with sails during their stay. At this time, the island of +Goaxama, eighteen leagues nearer the coast of China, being wild +and mountainous, was the resort of robbers who infested the +neighbouring part of the continent, and, as the Chinese +considered the Portuguese a more tolerable evil than these +outlaws, they offered them that island on condition of +extirpating the nest of thieves. The Portuguese undertook this +task, and succeeded without losing a man. Then every one began to +build where he liked best, as there were no proprietors to sell +the land, which now sells at a dear rate. The trade and +reputation of this city increasing, it soon became populous, +containing above 1000 Portuguese inhabitants all rich; and as the +merchants usually give large portions with their daughters, many +persons of quality used to resort thither in search of wives. +Besides these, there are a number of Chinese inhabitants who are +Christians, who are clothed and live after the manner of the +Portuguese; and about 6000 heathens, who are artificers, +shop-keepers, and merchants. The duties of ships trading from +thence to Japan, amount to 300,000 Xeraphins, at 10 <i>per +cent</i>, being about equal to as many pieces-of-eight, or +Spanish dollars[17]. The yearly expence of the garrison and +repairs of the fortifications is above 40,000 ducats. A similar +sum is paid yearly for duties at the fair of <i>Quantung</i>, or +Canton. The Japan voyage, including presents to the King and +<i>Tonos</i>, and the expence of the embassy, costs 25,000. The +Misericordia expends about 9000 in charity, as the city maintains +two hospitals, three parish churches, and five monasteries, +besides sending continual alms to the Christians in China, +Hainan, Japan, Tonkin, Cochin-china, Cambodia, and Siam.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 17: The xeraphin, as formerly mentioned, +being 5s. 9d., this yearly revenue amounted to L.52,250 sterling. +But the state of Macao, in the text, refers to what it was 150 +years ago. It is still inhabited by Portuguese, and remains a +useless dependence on Portugal, owing its principal support to +the residence of the British factory for the greater part of the +year.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Albuquerque governed India from the end of 1619, to the month +of September 1622, during all which time so little care was taken +in Spain of the affairs of Portuguese India that he did not +receive a single letter from the king. In every thing relating to +the civil government he was equal to any of his predecessors, but +was unfortunate in military affairs, especially in the loss of +Ormuz. In 1621, Don Alfonso de Noronna was nominated viceroy of +India; but sailing too late, was driven back to Lisbon, being the +last viceroy appointed by the pious Philip III. On the news +coming to Lisbon, of the shameful surrender of the city of +<i>Bahia</i>, in the Brazils, to the Hollanders, without +considering his age, quality, and rank, he listed as a private +soldier for that service, an instance of bravery and patriotism +deserving of eternal fame, and an example that had many +followers.</p> + +<p>Don Francisco de Gama, Count of Vidugueyra, who had been much +hated as viceroy of India, and sore affronted at his departure, +as formerly related, always endeavoured to obtain that command a +second time, not for revenge, as some asserted, but to satisfy +the world that he had been undeservedly ill used. At length he +obtained his desire, after twenty years solicitation, upon the +accession of Philip IV. of Spain. He sailed from Lisbon on the +18th of March 1622, with four ships. On the coast of Natal, a +flash of lightning struck his ship, and burnt his colours, but +killed no one. Under the line two of his ships left him, and +arrived at Goa in the end of August; another ship staid behind, +and it was thought they shunned his company designedly. At this +time six Dutch ships plied near the islands or Angoxa, or the +Comoros, one of which perished in pursuit of a Portuguese ship; +and while standing on for Mozambique, the viceroy encountered the +other five, on the 22d of June. <i>His other ships had now joined +him</i>, and a terrible battle ensued, which fell heaviest on the +vice-admiral, whose ship was entirely disabled, but the viceroy +and Francisco Lobo rescued and brought him off; yet the ship was +so much battered that it sunk, some men and part of the money on +board being saved, but some of the men fell into the hands of the +enemy. Night coming on, the ships of the viceroy and Lobo were +cast upon certain sands and lost, when they saved what goods, +rigging, ammunition, and cannon they were able, and burnt the +rest, to prevent them from falling into the hands of the enemy. +The viceroy shipped all the goods that were saved on board some +galliots, with what men they could contain, and went to Cochin, +whence he went to Goa in September. On seeing him replaced in the +dignity of viceroy, his enemies were terrified lest he might +revenge the affronts formerly given him, but he behaved with +unexpected moderation. He wished to have punished Simon de Melo, +and Luis de Brito, for the shameful loss of Ormuz. Melo had fled +to the Moors, and Brito was in prison; so that he only was +punished capitally, and the other was hung in effigy.</p> + +<p>About the year 1624, some of the Portuguese missionaries +penetrated into the country of Thibet, in which are the sources +of the river Ganges. The natives are well inclined, and of docile +dispositions; zealous of their salvation, and value much the +devotions enjoined them by their priests, called <i>Lamas</i>, +who profess poverty and celibacy, and are much given to prayer. +They have churches and convents like the most curious of those in +Europe, and have some knowledge of the Christian religion, but +mixed with many errors, and with strange customs and ceremonies; +yet it plainly appears that they had formerly the light of the +true gospel[18]; and they abhor the Mahometans and idolaters, +being easily converted to the Christian faith. The habit of the +Lamas is a red cassock, without sleeves, leaving their arms bare, +girt with a piece of red cloth, of which the ends hang down to +their feet. On their shoulders they wear a striped cloth, which +they say was the dress of the Son of God; and they have a bottle +of water hung at their girdle. They keep two fasts, during the +principal of which they eat but once a day, and do not speak a +word, using signs on all necessary occasions. During the other +fast they eat as often as they have a mind, but use flesh only at +one meal The people are called to prayers by the sound of +trumpets, some of which are made of dead men's bones; and they +use human skulls as drinking-vessels. Of other bones they make +beads, which they allege is to remind them of death. The churches +are only opened twice a year, when the votaries walk round the +outside three times in procession, and then go in to reverence +the images, some of which are of angels, called by them +<i>Las</i>, the greatest being the one who intercedes with God +for the souls of men. This being represented with the devil under +his feet, was supposed by the missionaries to be St Michael the +archangel. It is not unworthy of remark, that the word +<i>Lama</i>, signifying priest, begins with <i>La</i>, which +means an angel. The young Lamas go about the towns, dancing to +the sound of bells and other noisy instruments of music; which, +they say, is in imitation of the angels, who are painted by the +Christians as singing in choirs.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 18: Wherever any coincidence appears in the +ceremonies and externals of the heathen worship, the zealous +catholics are eager to conceive that these have been borrowed +from Christianity; unconscious that their own mummeries have all +been borrowed from heathen worship, and superadded to the +rational purity of primitive Christianity,--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>At the beginning of every month a procession is made in which +are carried black flags and the figures of devils, and attended +by drums and music, which they believe chases away the devils. +They use holy water, which is consecrated with many prayers, +having gold coral and rice put into it, and is used for driving +devils from their houses. The country people bring black horses, +cows and sheep, over which the Lamas say many prayers, as it is +alleged the devils endeavour to get into cattle of a black +colour. They cure the sick by blowing on the part affected. They +have three different kinds of funerals, according to the star +which rules at the time of death. In one the body is buried in a +tomb adorned with gilded pyramids. In another the body is burnt +and the ashes being mixed with clay are formed into images by +which they swear. In the last, which is reckoned the most +honourable, the body is exposed to be devoured by certain birds +resembling cranes. These three forms are used with such as have +spent good lives, but others are cut in pieces and thrown to the +dogs. They believe that the good go directly to heaven, and the +bad to hell; while such as are indifferent remain in an +intermediate state, whence their souls return to animate noble or +base creatures according to their deserts. They give their +children the names of filthy beasts, at the recommendation of +their priests, that the devil may be loth to meddle with them. +They believe in one God in Trinity; the son having become a man +and died, yet is now in heaven. God equal with the father, yet +man at the same time; and that his mother was a woman who is now +in heaven: And they compute the time of the death of the son +nearly as we do the appearance of the Redeemer on earth. They +believe in a hell as we do, and burn lamps that God may light +them in the right road in the other world: Yet do they use +divination after a ridiculous manner. The country of Thibet +produces several fruits of the same kinds with those grown in +Europe, together with rice and wheat, and has abundance of +cattle; but a great part of the land is barren.</p> + +<p>The Jesuit fathers Andrada and Marquez went from Delhi in the +country of the Great Mogul to Thibet along with a caravan of +pilgrims that were going to visit a famous pagoda. Passing +through the kingdom of <i>Lahore</i>, they came to the vast +mountains whence the Ganges flows into the lower plain country of +Hindostan, seeing many stately temples by the way full of idols. +At the kingdom of <i>Sirinagur</i> they saw the Ganges flowing +among snow, the whiteness of which is dazzling to the eyes of +travellers. At the end of 50 days journey they came to a pagoda +on the borders of <i>Sirinagur</i>, to which multitudes resort to +bathe in a spring, the water of which is so hot as to be hardly +sufferable, and which they imagine cleanses them from sin. The +people here feed on raw flesh and eat snow, yet are very healthy; +and the usual order of the sexes is reversed, as the women plough +and the men spin. Having rested at the town of <i>Mana</i> the +fathers pursued their journey, almost blinded by travelling +continually among snow, and came at length to the source of the +Ganges, which flows from a great lake. They soon afterwards +entered the kingdom of Thibet, and were honourably received by +officers sent on purpose from <i>Chaparangue</i>, the residence +of the king of Thibet. The king and queen listened to their +doctrines with much complacency, and even admitted their truths +without dispute, and would not allow them to return to India till +they promised an oath to come back, when the king not only +engaged to give them liberty to preach, but that he would build +them a church, and was greatly pleased with a picture they left +him of the Virgin and Child.</p> + +<p>The fathers returned according to promise, on which the king +built them a church and was afterwards baptised along with the +queen, in spite of every thing the Lamas could say to prevent +him. From merchants who traded to this place from China, the +fathers understood that it was 60 days journey from +<i>Chaparangue</i> to China, 40 of which was through the kingdom +of <i>Usangue</i>, and thence 20 days to China. They likewise +learnt that Cathay is not a kingdom, but a great city--the +metropolis of a province subject to the grand <i>Sopo</i>, very +near China, whence perhaps some give the name of Cathay to +China[19]. Perhaps this kingdom of Thibet is the empire of +Prester John, and not Ethiopia as some have believed.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 19: This is evidently erroneous, as we know +certainly from the travels of Marco Polo and other authorities, +that Cathay was the northern part of China, once a separate +kingdom.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After having governed five years, the Count of Vidugueyra was +ordered by the king to resign to Don Francisco de Mascarennas in +1628; but as that gentleman had left India for Europe, the +viceroy resigned the charge of government to Don Luis de Brito, +bishop of Cochin, and went home to Portugal. In this year the +king of Acheen made an attempt to gain possession of Malacca, +against which he sent a fleet of 250 sail, with 20,000 soldiers +and a great train of artillery. In this great fleet there were 47 +gallies of extraordinary strength, beauty, and size, all near 100 +feet long and of proportional breadth. The king embarked with his +wife, children, and treasure; but upon some ill omen the fleet +and army sailed without him, and came before Malacca in the +beginning of July 1629, the former under the command of +<i>Marraja</i>, and the latter of Lacsamana, an experienced +general who had made many conquests for his master. Having landed +the troops, they were attacked by Antonio Pinto de Fonseca with +only 200 men, who slew above 300 of the enemy without losing a +man, and then retreated into the city. Juan Suarez Vivas with 350 +Portuguese, who commanded at Iller, defended that post for some +time with great gallantry and did great execution among the +enemy; but at length, overpowered by numbers, was forced to +retire. Having gained an eminence called mount St Juan, the enemy +erected a battery there from which they played furiously against +the fort, which answered them with great spirit. The Capuchin +convent dedicated to the Mother of God, being considered as of +great importance for the defence of the fort, was gallantly +defended for 50 days by Diego Lopez de Fonseca, who on one +occasion made a sally with 200 Portuguese and defeated 2000 of +the enemy. On Lopez falling sick, Francisco Carvallo de Maya took +the command of that post, and defended it till the convent was +entirely ruined, so that he was obliged to withdraw into the +city, on which the enemy converted it into a strong post in which +<i>Lacsamana</i> took up his quarters with 3000 men. +<i>Marraja</i> occupied mount St Juan, on which he erected a +large fort; others were established at the convent of St +Lawrence, at <i>Iller</i> and other places, having strong +batteries and lines of communication, so that the city was +invested on all sides by land, while a number of armed boats +presented all access by sea for relief. Fonseca, who commanded in +the besieged city, sent out Vivas with 220 Portuguese troops to +dislodge Lacsamana from his head-quarters on the ruins of the +Capuchin convent, on which occasion Vivas gained possession of +the post by a night attack, killing 100 of the enemy, and retired +with several cannon. The King of <i>Pam</i>, who was in alliance +with the Portuguese, sent a fleet of <i>paraos</i> with 2000 men +to the assistance of the town; and Michael Pereyra Botello +brought five sail from the city of San Thome: Yet these +reinforcements were insufficient to induce the enemy to retire, +though they had lost above 4000 men during the siege, while 60 +were slain on the side of the defenders.</p> + +<p>Although the bishop of Cochin was informed in June of the +intended attack on Malacca and the weak state of its garrison, he +postponed sending any reinforcement, as it was then the dead of +winter on the Malabar coast, proposing to dispatch succours in +September. He died however about the end of July 1629, after +having governed India for nineteen or twenty months. Upon his +death the next patent of succession was opened, which named Don +Lorenzo de Cunna, the commander of Goa, to the civil government +of India, and Nunno Alvarez Pereyra to the military command. Of +this last name there happened to be two in India, or none. If Don +Nunno Alvarez Pereyra, a gentleman well known, were meant, the +title of <i>Don</i> was omitted in the patent; if Nunno Alvarez +Botello, the sirname teemed wrong. It was thought unlikely that +the title of Don could be omitted through mistake, as that in +Portugal is peculiar to certain families. The mistake of name in +regard to Nunno Alvarez Botello was more probable, as he had long +gone by the name of <i>Pereyra</i>, in memory of his grandfather +Alvarez Pereyra, and had dropped that name for <i>Botello</i> +when he inherited the estate of his father, whose name was +Botello; yet some continued to call him by the old name, and +others gave him the new one. The council of Goa, and the Count de +Linnares after his arrival in India, allowed the pretensions of +Botello.</p> + +<p>In the meantime, considering how dangerous delay might prove +to Malacca in its distress, Nunno Alvarez Botello undertook the +relief of that place, saying that he would postpone the decision +of the dispute till his return. By general consent however, he +went by the title of governor; and by direction of the council of +Goa, the Chancellor Gonzalo Pinto de Fonseca assumed the +administration of justice, so that the government was divided +between him, De Cunna, and Botello, who used such diligence in +preparing for his expedition to relieve Malacca, that, from the +2d of August, when the charge of governor was awarded to him, to +the beginning of September, he had collected 900 Portuguese +troops, a good train of artillery, a large supply of arms and +ammunition, and 30 vessels, and was ready to put to sea as soon +as the weather would allow. He set sail on the 22d of September, +rather too early, and encountered four several storms during his +voyage, two of which were so terrible that every one expected to +be lost. He at length reached <i>Pulobutum</i>, whence he sent +two vessels to give notice at Malacca of his approach, yet +arrived himself before them. At Pulobutum he found a vessel +belonging to Cochin and two from Negapatnam, being some addition +to his fleet He arrived at Malacca on the afternoon of the 22d +October 1629, to the great surprise of <i>Lacsamana</i>, as his +fleet was then in the river <i>Pongor</i>, a league from Malacca, +and so situated as to be unable to escape.</p> + +<p>Botello immediately landed and gave the necessary orders and +again embarking forced his way up the river through showers of +bullets, which he repaid with such interest that the enemy +abandoned their advanced works that same night, and retired to +that which they had constructed on the ruins of the Capuchin +monastery. As the river Pongor had not sufficient water for the +Portuguese ships, Botello embarked a strong detachment in 33 +<i>balones</i> or <i>balames</i>, being country-vessels of +lighter draught, with which he went in person to view the +strength and posture of the hostile fleet. Being anxious for the +safety of their gallies, the enemy abandoned their works at +<i>Madre de Dios</i> and <i>San Juan</i>, and threw up other +works with wonderful expedition for the protection of their +fleet. But having attacked these with much advantage, Botello +proposed to the enemy to surrender, on which <i>Marraja</i> +returned a civil but determined refusal. His situation being +desperate, Marraja endeavoured the night to escape with the +smaller vessels, leaving his large gallies at the mercy of the +Portuguese, but was prevented by the vigilance and bravery of +Vasquez de Evora, who cut off many of his men, not without some +loss on his own side, having one of his arms carried off. The +enemy now endeavoured to make use of their formidable gallies, +and the chief among them called the <i>Terror of the World</i> +was seen in motion; on which Botello sent the admiral of the +Portuguese gallies, Francisco Lopez to attack her, which he did +with great gallantry, passing through clouds of smoke, and a +tremendous fire of artillery, and after two hours hard fighting, +carried her by boarding, after killing 500 of her men out of 700, +with the loss only of seven of his own men.</p> + +<p>On the 25th of November, the enemy set fire to a galley that +was full of women whom they had brought to people Malacca, and +made a fresh attempt to break through the Portuguese fleet, but +without success, many of them being slain and taken, and great +numbers leapt into the water, and fled to the woods, where they +were devoured by wild beasts. Lacsamana then hung out a flag of +truce, and sent a deputation to treat with Botello, who answered +that he would listen to no proposals till they restored Pedro de +Abren the Portuguese ambassador, whom they kept prisoner; and as +they delayed compliance; the Portuguese cannon recommenced a +destructive fire. On the last day of November, Botello got notice +that <i>Marraja</i> the Acheen admiral was slain, and that the +king <i>Pam</i> was approaching to the assistance of the +Portuguese with 100 sail of vessels. Botello went immediately to +visit him, and was received with the customary ceremonies used by +the eastern princes to the Portuguese governors. After +interchanging presents and mutual compliments, Botello returned +to his post, where he found the Portuguese rather slackening +their efforts in consequence of a desperate cannonade from the +enemy. But on the 4th of December, the enemy sent fresh proposals +for an accommodation, accompanied by the ambassador Abreu, +requiring only to be allowed to withdraw with three of their +gallies and 4000 men, being all that remained of 20,000 with +which they had invested Malacca. In answer to this, they were +told they must surrender at discretion on promise of life; and as +Lacsamana hesitated to accept such humiliating terms, Botello +assaulted and forced all his works, where many of the enemy were +put to the sword; some throwing themselves into the river to swim +across were drowned, and others who fled to the woods were +devoured by beasts of prey. In fine, Botello obtained the most +glorious victory that was ever gained by the Portuguese in India; +as of all the fleet which came against Malacca, not a single +vessel got away, and of the large army, not one man escaped death +or captivity. So great was the booty, that the whole of the +Portuguese troops and mariners were enriched, Botello reserving +nothing to his own share but a <i>parrot</i> which had been much +valued by Lacsamana.</p> + +<p>On going to Malacca after this great victory, he entreated to +be allowed to walk barefooted and unaccompanied to church, that +he might humbly prostrate himself before the Lord of Hosts, in +acknowledgement that the victory was entirely due to God, and not +to the Portuguese valour; but he was constrained to enter the +city in triumph. The streets were crowded with men, and the +windows and house tops thronged with women, who sprinkled the +hero with sweet waters and strewed flowers in his path. The music +could not be heard for the noise of cannon, and all the city was +filled with extreme joy. At this time an embassy came from the +king of <i>Pera</i>, who was tributary to the king of +<i>Acheen</i>, offering to pay tribute to the king of Portugal, +and to deliver up a large treasure left in his custody belonging +to the king of Acheen and his general <i>Lacsamana</i>. Don +Jerome de Silveyra was sent with eleven ships to receive the +treasure, and establish a treaty with the king of <i>Pera</i>, +who performed his promise, and the treasure was applied to pay +the men and refit the fleet.</p> + +<p>About the middle of January 1630, Botello being off the +straits of Cincapura to secure the ships expected from China +against the Hollanders, <i>Lacsamana</i> and two other officers +who had fled to the woods were brought prisoners to him, having +been taken by the king of Pam. Owing to contrary winds, he was +unable to get up with five Dutch ships that were about <i>Pulo +Laer</i>, and which took a Portuguese galliot coming from China. +He returned therefore to Malacca to refit his ships, and resolved +to attempt the Dutch fort of <i>Jacatara</i>[20], the best which +was possessed by <i>these rebels</i> in all Asia. In the first +place, he sent Antonio de Sousa Coutinno in the admiral galley +lately belonging to <i>Lacsamana</i> called the <i>Terror of the +World</i>, in which Lacsamana was now prisoner, to Goa; directing +that Lacsamana should be sent to Portugal, and that this large +and magnificent galley should be given as a present to the city +of Goa. In this galley there was one cannon made of +<i>tombac</i>, a precious sort of metal, which was valued at +above 7000 ducats, and another cannon reckoned still more +valuable on account of its curious workmanship. Lacsamana died +before he could be carried to Portugal.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 20: In the neighbourhood of which was +afterwards built the city of Batavia, the emporium at the Dutch +trade in the east, now subject to Britain.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Learning that the Count de Linnares, now viceroy of India, had +arrived at Goa in October 1629, Botello transmitted to him an +account of all that he had done, and desired his assistance and +approbation to continue in these parts in order to carry on his +designs against the English and Hollanders. About the end of +April 1630, the viceroy not only sent him every thing he asked, +but gave him full power to act as governor general, without being +obliged to wait for orders from Goa. In the meantime Botello +sailed with 27 ships towards the straits of Cincapura, and put in +at <i>Jambo</i>[21], a place abounding in pepper, and on that +account much resorted to by the Dutch and English. At this place +he took two large ships after a stout resistance; and going +higher up the river he discovered another ship so large and +beautiful that he designed to make use of her for his entrance +into Goa; but a ball falling into her powder-room, blew her up. +After employing three weeks in working up the river, Botello +learnt that at a town about two leagues distant, two Dutch ships +had taken shelter, and being desirous of taking them, he manned +14 light vessels with which he went to view the place, on which +he was opposed by 26 sail of small vessels manned with Hollanders +and natives, whom he put to flight; but on viewing the place he +found it impracticable to attempt the two vessels, on account of +the strength of the works by which they were protected. He +destroyed therefore all the neighbourhood with tire and sword, +and then sailed down the river, intending to proceed against +<i>Jacatara</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 21: Probably <i>Jambee</i> on the N.E. side +of Sumatra, in about lat. 18 20' S. to the S.E. of the straits of +Cincapura.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>While on his way thither, a Dutch ship of 24 guns was met, +which was laden with powder for their forts, and on being +attacked and boarded by some of his ships she took fire. In this +situation, Botello gave orders for his ships to draw off from the +danger, and on going up in his galliot to bring off Antonio +Mascarennas, the Dutch ship blew up while Botello was passing her +stern, by which his galliot was instantly sunk. His body was +found and taken to Malacca, where it was honourably interred.</p> + +<p>Don Michael de Noronna, Count de Linnares, arrived at Goa as +viceroy of India in October 1629. About the commencement of his +administration, Constantine de Sa, who commanded in Ceylon, +marched from Columbo, which he left almost without any garrison, +meaning to reduce the interior provinces to subjection. His force +consisted of 400 Portuguese, with a considerable number of +Christian Chingalese, in whose fidelity he reposed too much +confidence, although a Franciscan friar who resided among the +enemy, and his own officers warned him of the danger to which he +was exposed. He penetrated to the city of <i>Uva</i> with very +little opposition, which he destroyed; but was met on his return +by the king of Candy with a considerable army, to whom the +greatest part of the Christian Chingalese immediately deserted, +and aided him in battle against the Portuguese, now reduced to +400 of their own troops and 200 Chingalese who remained faithful. +De Sa and his inconsiderable army fought against prodigious odds +during three entire days, but the general being slain, the +Portuguese troops fell into disorder, and were all slain or taken +prisoners.</p> + +<p>Immediately after this victory, the king of Candy laid siege +to Columbo with an army of 50,000 men, while the garrison under +Launcelot de Leixas did not exceed 400, even including the +priests and monks. The garrison was reduced to extreme distress, +and even threatened with famine, when a ship from Cochin brought +them a relief of provisions and ammunition; after which five +ships came from San Thome and one from Goa. Though not mentioned +by De Faria, it appears that the siege was now raised; as at a +subsequent period, after the natives had reduced almost the whole +of the island, the kings of Candy, Uva, and Matale again laid +siege to Columbo with an army of 20,000 men. At this time five +ships came from Goa to carry off the cinnamon to Portugal, on +which the enemy raised the siege, believing these ships had come +to relieve and reinforce the garrison.</p> + +<p>The viceroy now appointed Don George de Almeyda to the command +in Ceylon, who sailed from Goa for that place on the 19th of +February 1631, in the great galley taken by Botello when he +destroyed the fleet of Acheen: But encountering a storm off Cape +Comorin, the galley was ready to founder, on which Almeyda took +to the boat with 29 persons, and reached one of the Maldive +islands after four days of incredible distress. Going over from +thence to Cochin, he received a reinforcement of some Portuguese +troops, with 500 kafrs and 800 Canarin lascars, and a supply of +money, ammunition, and provisions. Having raised some more men at +Cochin, Almeyda sailed again for Ceylon, where he arrived on the +21st October 1631, and landed at Columbo. He marched immediately +against the enemy, though then the rainy season, and was soon +forced to desist, as the country was mostly overflowed, and at +this season the trees swarm with <i>leeches</i>, which drop down +upon the men as they pass, and bleed them to death.</p> + +<p>On the return of fine weather, Almeyda marched again on the +5th January 1632, though with much difficulty, as the waters were +still out, so that the men had often to wade up to their breasts. +Being opposed by the enemy near the fort of <i>Tranqueyra +Grande</i>, many of them were slain, as the general gave three or +four pistoles for every head that was brought him. At another +pass, the enemy were defended, to the number of 6000 men, by some +works, but on being attacked, and many of them killed, the rest +fled, destroying every thing they could not carry away. After +these successes, many of the natives came in, and submitted, and +were treated with kindness; but as others hid themselves in hopes +of getting away to join the enemy, Almeyda caused them to be +apprehended, and given as slaves among his officers. One was +delivered to the Kafrs, who, in sight of his wife and children, +cut him immediately in pieces, which they divided among them to +eat. At <i>Cardevola</i>, the enemy had two forts, which were +carried by escalade. The enemy fled in every quarter, making no +stand till they arrived at the foot of the mountains of Candy, +where they were defeated, and the forts of <i>Manicravare</i>, +<i>Safragam</i>, <i>Maluana</i>, and <i>Caliture</i>, were +immediately afterwards reduced, as was the district of Matura, of +which the commander of the Chingalese Christians, who deserted +from de Sa, had made himself king. At last the king of Candy sent +to implore peace, which was granted at the intercession of the +priests and monks. In fine, Almeyda not only restored the +reputation of the Portuguese arms in Ceylon, but increased it, +and established the government of the island in good order. He +was removed, however, by the succeeding viceroy, and returned to +Goa poor, and full of honour, where he died poor, more from grief +than age; and no sooner was he deprived of the command, than all +he had gained was speedily lost, though it was again recovered by +Diego de Melo y Castro in 1633.</p> + +<p>About the end of the year 1635, the Count de Linares resigned +the government of India to Pedro de Silva, who was usually called +<i>Mole</i> or the Soft, on account of the easiness of his +disposition. He disliked the government so much, that he was +often heard to exclaim, "God forgive those who appointed me +viceroy, as I am not fit for the office." He held the government, +however, nearly four years, and died in the end of June 1639, +when he was succeeded as governor by Antonio Tellez de Silva, +whose name was found in one of the royal patents, which was now +opened. Tellez happened to be absent from Goa at the time, for +which reason, the archbishop of Goa, who was next in nomination, +assumed the government in his name, and sent notice to him of his +appointment, and in the meantime, employed himself in fitting out +twelve ships of war for the relief of Malacca, then threatened by +the king of Acheen and the Hollanders. At this time nine Dutch +ships entered the river of Goa, and set on fire three Portuguese +galleons then lying at <i>Marmugam</i>, after which they retired +without loss or opposition, because the fort was destitute of men +and ammunition. Antonio Tellez arrived immediately after this +unfortunate accident, at which he was exceedingly enraged, not so +much for the actual loss, as that the enemy should be able to +insult the harbour of the Portuguese Indian capital without harm +or resistance. On the back of this misfortune, news came that the +Dutch fleet of 12 sail, and that of Acheen of 35 gallies, were in +sight of Malacca. While occupied in making great preparations to +relieve Malacca, and to remedy other disorders then subsisting in +Portuguese India, he was superseded in the government of India, +by the arrival of Juan de Silva Tello, as viceroy, towards the +end of 1640; on which Antonio Tellez, having resigned the sword +of command, immediately embarked for Portugal, not thinking +proper to serve as admiral where he had enjoyed the supreme +authority.</p> + +<p>Other authors will write the actions of the new viceroy, Juan +de Silva Tello, for he begins his task where I end mine.[22]</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 22: Manuel de Faria rightly thought proper +to close his work at this period, which was immediately followed +by the expulsion of the Portuguese from Malacca and Ceylon, and +many other of their Indian possessions; where, except a few +inconsiderable factories, they now only hold Goa, Diu, and Macao, +and even these possess very little trade, and no political +importance. From their subjection to the crown of Spain, the +Dutch, who had thrown off the iron yoke of the Austrian princes +of Spain, revenged their own injuries upon the Portuguese in +India: And in the present age, at the distance of 160 years, +having themselves fallen under the heavy yoke of the modern +French Caesar, they have been stripped by Britain of every +foreign possession in Asia, Africa, and America.--E]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XV.</p> + +<p><i>Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and other +places.</i>[23]</p> + +<p>We here propose to give some account of the exploits of the +<i>black</i> king of Siam, in whose character there was a strange +mixture of virtues and vices. In the year 1544, the king of the +<i>Birmans</i> [24] besieged the city of <i>Martavan</i> by sea +and land, being the metropolis of the great and flourishing +kingdom of that name, which had a revenue of three millions of +gold. <i>Chaubainaa</i> was then king of Martavan, and fell from +the height of fortune to the depth of misery. The Birman fleet, +on this occasion, consisted of 700 sail, 100 of which were large +gallies, in which were 700 Portuguese, commanded by one Juan +Cayero, who was reputed a commander of courage and conduct. After +a siege of some months, during which the Birmans lost 12,000 men +in five general assaults, <i>Chaubainaa</i> found himself unable +to withstand the power of his enemy, being reduced to such +extremity that the garrison had already eaten 3000 elephants. He +offered, therefore, to capitulate, but all terms were refused by +the enemy; on which he determined to make use of the Portuguese, +to whom he had always been just and friendly: But favours +received from a person in prosperity, are forgotten when the +benefactor falls into adversity. He sent therefore one Seixas, a +Portuguese in his service, to make an offer to Cayero, if he +would receive himself, his family, and treasures, into the four +ships which he commanded; that he would give half the treasure to +the king of Portugal, to whom he would become vassal, paying such +tribute as might be agreed on, being satisfied that he could +recover his kingdom with the assistance of 2000 Portuguese +troops, whom he proposed to take into his pay. Cayero consulted +with his principal officers on this proposition, and asked +Seixas, in their presence, what might be the amount of treasure +belonging to the king of Martavan. Seixas said, that he had not +seen the whole, but affirmed that he had seen enough in gold and +jewels to load two ships, and as much silver as would load four +or five. Envious of the prodigious fortune that Cayero might make +by accepting this offer, the Portuguese officers threatened to +delate him to the Birman sovereign, if he consented, and the +proposal was accordingly refused.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 23: De Faria, III. 347--364. Both as in a +great measure unconnected with the Portuguese transactions, and +as not improbably derived from the worse than suspicious source +of Fernand Mendez de Pinro, these very problematical occurrences +have been kept by themselves, which indeed they are in de Faria. +After this opinion respecting their more than doubtful +authenticity, it would be a waste of labour to attempt +illustrating their geographical obscurities. Indeed the geography +of India beyond the Ganges, is still involved in almost +impenetrable darkness, from the Bay of Bengal to the empire of +China.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 24: Called always the <i>Bramas</i> by De +Faria.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The king of Martavan was astonished at the rejection of his +proposals, and finding Seixas determined to withdraw from the +danger that menaced the city, made him a present of a pair of +bracelets, which were afterwards sold to the governor of +<i>Narsinga</i> for 80,000 ducats. Despairing of relief or +retreat, the king of Martavan now determined to set his capital +on fire, and sallying out at the head of the few men that +remained, to die honourably fighting against his enemies. But +that night, one of his principal officers deserted to the enemy, +and gave notice of his intention. Thus betrayed, he surrendered +on promise of having his own life, and those of his wife and +children spared, and being allowed to end his days in retirement. +These terms were readily granted, as the conqueror meant to +perform no part of his engagement.</p> + +<p>From the gate of the city to the tent of the Birman king, at +the distance of a league, a double lane of musketeers of sundry +nations was formed, the Portuguese under Cayero being stationed +nearest the gate, through which the captives were to march in +procession. In the first place, came the queen of Martavan in a +chair, her two sons and two daughters being carried in two other +chairs. These were surrounded by forty beautiful young ladies, +led by an equal number of old ladies, and attended by a great +number of <i>Talegrepos</i>, who are a kind of monks or religious +men, habited like Capuchins, who prayed with and comforted the +captives. Then followed the king of Martavan, seated on a small +she elephant, clothed in black velvet, having his head, beard, +and eyebrows shaved, and a rope about his neck. On seeing the +Portuguese, he refused to proceed till they were removed, after +which he went on. Being come into the presence of the king of the +Birmans, he cast himself at his feet; and being unable to speak +owing to grief, the <i>Raolim</i> of <i>Mounay</i>, +<i>Talaypor</i>, or chief priest of Martavan, who was esteemed a +saint, made a harangue in his behalf, which had been sufficient +to have moved compassion from any other than the obdurate tyrant +to whom it was addressed, who immediately ordered the miserable +king, with his wife, children, and attendant ladies, into +confinement. For the two following days, a number of men were +employed to remove the public treasure of Martavan, amounting to +100 millions in gold; and on the third day, the army was allowed +indiscriminate plunder, which lasted for four days, and was +estimated at 12 millions. Then the city was burnt, and above +60,000 persons were supposed to have perished by fire and sword, +an equal number being reduced to slavery. On this occasion, 2000 +temples and 40,000 houses were destroyed.</p> + +<p>On the morning after the destruction of the city, 21 gibbets +were erected on a neighbouring hill called Beydao, which were +surrounded by a strong guard of cavalry, and on which the queen, +with her children and attendants, to the number in all of 140 +persons, were all hung up by the feet. The king of Martavan, with +50 men of the highest quality, were flung into the sea with +stones about their necks. At this barbarous spectacle, the army +of the Birmans mutinied, and for some time the king was in +imminent danger. Leaving a sufficient number of people to rebuild +the ruined city, the Birman king returned to Pegu with the rest +of his army, accompanied by Juan Cayero, and his 700 Portuguese. +Four Portuguese remained at Martavan, among whom was Juan Falcam; +who, instead of assisting <i>Fernan Mendez Pinta</i>, sent by +Pedro de Faria, the commander of Malacca, to confirm the peace +which subsisted with the late king of Martavan, accused him to +the governor of the town as an enemy to the king of the Birmans. +On this false accusation, the governor seized the vessel +commanded by Pinto, in which were goods to the value of 100,000 +ducats, killed the master and some others, and sent the rest +prisoners to Pegu. This false dealing was not new in Falcam, who +had deserted from the late unfortunate king of Martavan, after +having received many benefits from him.</p> + +<p>Instead of being allowed to enjoy the fruits of his victories +in peace, the king of the Birmans was obliged to engage in a new +war with the king of Siam, who endeavoured to recover the kingdom +of Tangu, which had been wrested from him. For this purpose, in +March 1546, he embarked with 900,000 men in 12,000 vessels, on +the river <i>Ansedaa</i>, out of which he passed in the month of +April into the river <i>Pichau Malacoa</i>, and invested the city +of <i>Prom</i>. The king of this territory was recently dead, +leaving his successor, only thirteen years of age, who was +married to a daughter of the king of Ava, from whom he looked for +the assistance of 60,000 men. For this reason, the king of Siam +pressed the siege, that he might gain the city before the arrival +of the expected succours. After six days, the queen of Prom, who +administered the government, offered to become tributary if he +would grant a peace; but the king insisted that she should put +herself into his hands with all her treasure. She refused these +degrading terms, knowing his perfidious character, and resolved +to defend the city to the last extremity. The king of Siam +accordingly gave several assaults, in all of which he was +repulsed, and in a short time, lost above 80,000 of his men, +partly by the sword, and partly by a pestilential disease, which +raged in his army, 500 Portuguese who were in his service +perishing among the rest.</p> + +<p>Being unable to take the place by assault, the king of Siam +caused a great mount to be raised, which overlooked the city, and +was planted with a great number of cannon, by which the defenders +were prodigiously annoyed. Upon this, 5000 men sallied from the +city, and destroyed the mount, killing 16,000 of the enemy, and +carrying off 80 pieces of cannon. In this affair the king of Siam +was wounded; and being greatly enraged against a body of 2000 +Portuguese, who were in his pay, and had the guard of the mount, +he caused them all to be massacred. About the end of August, +<i>Xemin Maletay</i>, one of the four principal officers, who +commanded in Prom, treacherously betrayed the city to the king of +Siam, who ordered it to be utterly destroyed with fire and sword. +Two thousand children were cut in pieces, and given as food to +the elephants. The queen was publicly whipped, and given up to +the lust of the soldiers till she died. The young king was tied +to her dead body, and cast into the river; and above 300 +principal nobles were impaled. The king of Ava, who was marching +to the assistance of his sister, understood the unfortunate +events of Prom, but came to battle with the traitor <i>Zemin</i>, +who had betrayed her, who was at the head of a numerous army. In +this battle all the soldiers of Ava were slain except 800, after +making a prodigious slaughter among the enemy; after which the +king of Siam came up with a part of his army, and slew the +remaining 800 men of Ava, with the loss of 12,000 of his own men, +and then beheaded the traitor <i>Zemin</i>. He then went up the +river <i>Queytor</i>, with 60,000 men in 1000 boats, and coming +to the port of Ava, about the middle of October, he burnt above +2000 vessels, and several villages, with the loss of 8000 of his +men, among whom were 62 Portuguese. Understanding that the city +of Ava was defended by 20,000 men, 30,000 of which people had +slain 150,000 of his army at <i>Maletay</i>, and that the king of +<i>Pegu</i> was coming to their relief, he returned in all haste +to <i>Prom</i>, where he fortified himself, and sent an +ambassador to the emperor of <i>Calaminam</i>, with rich +presents, and the offer of an extensive territory, on condition +of sending him effectual succours.</p> + +<p>The empire of <i>Calaminam</i> is said to be 300 leagues in +length and as much in breadth, having been formerly divided into +27 kingdoms, all using the same language, beautified with many +cities and towns, and very fertile, containing abundance of all +the productions of Asia. The name of the metropolis is +<i>Timphan</i>, which is seated on the river <i>Pitni</i>, on +which there are innumerable boats. It is surrounded by two strong +and beautiful walls, contains 400,000 inhabitants, with many +stately palaces and fine gardens, having 2500 temples belonging +to 24 different sects. Some of these use bloody sacrifices. The +women are very beautiful, yet chaste, two qualities that seldom +go together. In their law-suits, O happy country! they employ no +attornies, solicitors, or proctors, and every dispute is decided +at one hearing. This kingdom maintains 1,700,000 soldiers, +400,000 of which are horse, and has 6000 elephants. On account of +their prodigious number, the emperor assumes the title of <i>Lord +of the Elephants</i>, his revenue exceeding 20 millions. There +are some remnants of Christianity among these people, as they +believe in the blessed Trinity, and make the sign of the cross +when they sneeze.</p> + +<p>Such was the great empire of <i>Calaminam</i> to which the +king of the Birmans[25], sent his ambassador. On his return, the +king sent 150,000 men in 1300 boats against the city of +<i>Sabadii</i>, 130 leagues distant to the north-east. The +general of this army, named <i>Chaunigrem</i>, lost many of his +men in several assaults, after which he raised two mounts whence +he did much harm to the city: But the besieged sallying out, +killed at one time 8000 and at another 5000 of his men. Leaving +this siege for a time and the affairs of the king of the +<i>Birmans</i>, we purpose to relate what was done at +<i>Siam</i>, in order to treat of them both together.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 25: Formerly this was attributed to the +king of <i>Siam</i>: But the whole story of this section is so +incredible and absurd as not to merit any observations. It is +merely retained from De Faria, as an instance of the fables of +Fernand Mendez de Pinto.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The king of <i>Chiammay</i>, after destroying 30,000 men that +had guarded the frontiers, besieged the city of <i>Guitivam</i> +belonging to the king of <i>Siam</i>, who immediately drew +together an army of 500,000 men, in which was a body of 120 +Portuguese in which he placed great reliance. This vast multitude +was conveyed along the river in 3000 boats, while 4000 elephants +and 200 pieces of cannon were sent by land. He found the enemy +had 300,000 men and 2000 boats. The king of Siam gave the command +of his vast army to three generals, two of whom were Turks, and +the third was Dominic Seixas a Portuguese. At first the +<i>Siamese</i> were worsted, but recovering their order they +gained a complete victory, in which 130,000 of the enemy were +slain, 40,000 of whom were excellent cavalry, with the loss of +50,000 Siamese, all of whom were the worst troops in their army. +After this victory the king of Siam marched against the queen of +<i>Guibem</i>, who had allowed the enemy to pass through her +country; and entering the city of <i>Fumbacar</i> spared neither +age nor sex. Being besieged in her capital of <i>Guirar</i>, the +queen agreed to pay an yearly tribute of 60,000 ducats, and gave +her son as an hostage. After this the king of Siam advanced to +the city of <i>Taysiram</i>, to which place he thought the king +of Chiammay had fled, destroying every thing in his course with +fire and sword, only sparing the women; but winter coming on he +returned to Siam.</p> + +<p>On his return to his court of <i>Odiaa</i> or <i>Odiaz</i>, he +was poisoned by his queen, then big with child by one of her +servants; but before he died he caused his eldest son, then +young, to be declared king. He left 30,000 ducats to the +Portuguese then in his service, and gave orders that they should +pay no duties in any of his ports for three years. The adulterous +queen, being near the time of her delivery, poisoned her lawful +son, married her servant, and caused him to be proclaimed king. +But in a short time they were both slain at a feast by the King +of <i>Cambodia</i> and <i>Oya Pansilaco</i>.</p> + +<p>There being no lawful heir to the kingdom of Siam, +<i>Pretiel</i> a religious <i>Talagrepo</i>, bastard brother to +him who was poisoned, was raised to the throne by common consent +in the beginning of the year 1549. Seeing the affairs of Siam in +confusion, the king of the Birmans, who was likewise king of +Pegu, resolved to conquer that kingdom. For this purpose he +raised an army of 800,000 men, of which 40,000 were horse, and +60,000 armed with muskets, 1000 being Portuguese. He had 20,000 +elephants, 1000 cannon drawn by oxen and <i>abadias</i>[26], and +1000 ammunition waggons drawn by buffaloes. The Portuguese troops +in his service, were commanded by Diego Suarez de Mello, commonly +called the Gallego, who went out to India in 1538. In 1542 this +man became a pirate in the neighbourhood of Mozambique. In 1547 +he was at the relief of Malacca: And now in 1549, being in the +service of the king of the Birmans, was worth four millions in +jewels and other valuables, had a pension of 200,000 ducats +yearly, was stiled the king's brother, and was supreme governor +of the kingdom and general in chief of the army. With this +prodigious army the king of the Birmans, after one repulse, took +the fort of <i>Tapuram</i> by assault, which was defended by 2000 +Siamese, all of whom he put to the sword in revenge for the loss +of 3000 of his own men in the two assaults. In the prosecution of +his march, the city of Juvopisam surrendered, after which he set +down before the city of Odiaa the capital of Siam. Diego Suarez +the commander in chief gave a general assault on the city, in +which he was repulsed with the loss of 10,000 men: Another +attempt was made by means of elephants, but with no better +success. The king offered 500,000 ducats to any one who would +betray one of the gates to him; which coming to the knowledge of +<i>Oya Pansiloco</i>, who commanded in the city, he opened a gate +and sent word to the king to bring the money as he waited to +receive it. After spending five months in the siege, during which +he lost 150,000 men, news came that <i>Xemindoo</i> had rebelled +at Pegu where he had slain 15,000 men that opposed him. When this +was known in the camp, 120,000 Peguers deserted, in hatred to the +king of the Birmans who oppressed them, and in revenge of the +insolence of Diego Suarez their general in chief.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 26: Rhinoceroses, which are so brutishly +ferocious as in no instance to have been tamed to labour, or to +have ever shewn the slightest degree of docility. Being of +enormous strength, the only way of preserving them when in +custody, is in a sling; so that on the first attempt to more +forwards, they are immediately raised from the +ground.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p><i>Xemindoo</i> was of the ancient blood royal of Pegu, and +being a priest was esteemed as a great saint. On one occasion he +preached so eloquently against the tyranny and oppression which +the Peguers suffered under the Birmans, that he was taken from +the pulpit and proclaimed king of Pegu. On this he slew 8000 +Birmans that guarded the palace, and seizing the royal treasure, +he got possession of all the strong-holds in a short time, and +the whole kingdom submitted to his authority. The armies of the +rival kings met within two leagues of the city of Pegu; that of +the Birmans amounting to 350,000 men, while <i>Xemindoo</i> had +600,000; yet Xemindoo was defeated with the loss of 300,000 men, +while the Birmans lost 60,000. The victorious king of the Birmans +immediately entered Pegu, where he slew a vast multitude of the +inhabitants, and recovered his treasure. Meanwhile the city of +<i>Martavan</i> declared for <i>Xemindoo</i>, and massacred the +garrison of 2000 Birmans. <i>Zemin</i> did the same in the city +of <i>Zatam</i> where he commanded. The king marched towards him, +but he contrived to have him murdered by the way; on which +<i>Zemin</i> was proclaimed king by his followers, and soon +raised an army of 30,000 men. <i>Chaumigrem</i>, brother to the +dead king, plundered the palace and city, and then fled to +<i>Tangu</i> where he was born. In four months <i>Zemin</i> +became so odious to his new subjects by his tyranny, that many of +them fled to <i>Xemindoo</i>, who was soon at the head of 60,000 +men.</p> + +<p>Some short time before this, as Diego Suarez was passing the +house of a rich merchant on the day of his daughter's intended +marriage, being struck by the great beauty of the bride, he +attempted to carry her off by force, killing the bridegroom and +others who came to her rescue, and the bride strangled herself to +avoid the dishonour. As the father expected no justice while that +king reigned, he shut himself up till <i>Zemin</i> got possession +of the throne, on which he so published his wrongs about the +city, that 50,000 of the people joined with him in demanding +justice. Fearing evil consequences, <i>Zemin</i> caused Suarez to +be apprehended and delivered up to the people, by whom he was +stoned to death. His house was plundered, and as much less +treasure was found than he was supposed to be worth, he was +believed to have buried the rest.</p> + +<p><i>Zemin</i> soon followed Suarez, for his subjects being +unable to endure his cruelty and avarice, fled in great numbers +to Xemindoo, who was now master of some considerable towns. +Xemindoo having gathered an army of 200,000 men and 5000 +elephants, marched to the city of Pegu, near which he was +encountered by Zemin at the head of 800,000 men. The battle was +long doubtful, but at last Gonzalo Neto, who served under +<i>Xemindoo</i> with 80 Portuguese, killed <i>Zemin</i> with a +musket ball, on which his army fled, and <i>Xemindoo</i> got +possession of the capital. This happened on the 3d of February +1550. Gonzalo was rewarded with a gift of 10,000 crowns, and 5000 +were divided among his companions.</p> + +<p><i>Chaumigrem</i>, who had fled the year before to +<i>Tangu</i>, hearing that <i>Xemindoo</i> had disbanded most of +his forces, marched against him and obtained a complete victory, +by which the kingdom of Pegu was again reduced under the +authority of the Birmans. Xemindoo was taken some time afterwards +and put to death. <i>Chaumigrem</i> being now king of the Birmans +and of Pegu, went to war against Siam, with an army of 1,700,000 +men, and 17,000 elephants, having a considerable body of +Portuguese in his service. All this army came to ruin, and the +kingdom of Pegu was soon afterwards reduced to subjection by the +king of Aracan, as formerly related.</p> + +<p>The kingdom of Siam, though much harassed by these invasions, +still held out, and, in 1627, was possessed by the <i>black</i> +king, so called because he really was of a black colour, though +all the inhabitants of that country are fair complexioned[27]. In +1621, this <i>black</i> king of Siam sent ambassadors to Goa, +desiring that some Franciscans might be sent to preach the gospel +in his dominions. Accordingly, father Andrew, of the convent of +the Holy Ghost, went to <i>Odiaa</i>[28], where he was received +honourably, and got leave to erect a church, which was done at +the king's expence. He likewise offered great riches to the +venerable father, who constantly refused his offers, to the great +admiration and astonishment of the king. This <i>black</i> king +of Siam was of small stature, of an evil presence, and an +extraordinarily compound character, of great wickedness, mixed +with great generosity. Although cruel men are for the most part +cowards, he was at the same time exceedingly cruel, and very +valiant; and though tyrants are generally covetous, he was +extremely liberal; being barbarous in some parts of his conduct, +and generous and benevolent in others. Not satisfied with putting +thieves and robbers to ordinary deaths, he was in use to have +them torn in pieces in his presence by tigers and crocodiles for +his amusement. Understanding that one of his vassal kings +intended to rebel, he had him shut up in a cage, and fed him with +morsels of his own flesh torn from his body, after which he had +him fried in a pan. On one occasion he slew seven ladies +belonging to the court, only because they walked too quick; and +on another occasion he cut off the legs of three others, because +they staid too long when sent by him for some money to give to +certain Portuguese. He even extended his severity to animals; +having cut off the paw of a favourite monkey for putting it into +a box containing some curiosities. A valuable horse was ordered +to be beheaded, in presence of his other horses, because he did +not stop when he checked him. A tiger that did not immediately +seize a criminal thrown to him, was ordered to be beheaded as a +coward. Yet had this cruel and capricious tyrant many estimable +virtues. He kept his word inviolable; was rigorous in the +execution of justice; liberal in his gifts; and often merciful to +those who offended him. Having at one time sent a Portuguese to +Malacca with money to purchase some commodities; this man, after +buying them lost them all at play, and yet had the boldness to +return to the king, who even received him kindly, saying that he +valued the confidence reposed in his generosity more than the +goods he ought to have brought. He shewed much respect to the +Christian priests and missionaries, and gave great encouragement +to the propagation of the gospel in his dominions. His valour was +without the smallest stain.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 27: De Faria seems now to drop the fables +of Fernan Mendez Pinto, and to relate real events in the +remainder of this section.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 28: More properly Ythia, vulgarly called +Siam.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The proper name of the kingdom we call <i>Siam</i>, is +<i>Sornace</i>[29]. It extends along the coast for 700 leagues, +and its width inland is 260. Most part of the country consists of +fertile plains, watered by many rivers, producing provisions of +all sorts in vast abundance. The hills are covered with a variety +of trees, among which there are abundance of ebony, brasilwood, +and <i>Angelin</i>. It contains many mines of sulphur, saltpetre, +tin, iron, silver, gold, sapphires, and rubies; and produces much +sweet-smelling wood, benzoin, wax, cinnamon, pepper, ginger, +cardamunis, sugar, honey, silk, and cotton. The royal revenue is +about thirteen millions. The kingdom contains 13,000 cities and +towns, besides innumerable villages. All the towns are walled; +but the people for the most part are weak timorous and unwarlike. +The coast is upon both seas; that which is on the sea of India, +or bay of Bengal, containing the sea ports of +<i>Junzalam</i>[30], and <i>Tanasserim</i>; while on the coast of +the China sea, are <i>Mompolocata</i>, <i>Cey</i>, <i>Lugor</i>, +<i>Chinbu</i>, and <i>Perdio</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 29: The oriental term <i>Shan</i>, probably +derived from the inhabitants of Pegu; but the Siamese call +themselves <i>Tai</i>, or freemen, and their country <i>Meuang +tai</i>, or the country of freemen--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 30: Otherwise called +Junkseylon.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XVI.</p> + +<p><i>A short Account of the Portuguese possessions between the +Cape of Good Hope and China</i>.[31]</p> + +<p>In the middle of the seventeenth century, the Portuguese +empire in the east, comprehended under the general name of India, +from beyond the Cape of Good Hope in Africa, to Cape Liampo in +China, extended for 4000 leagues along the sea-coast, not +including the shores of the Rea Sea and the Persian gulf, which +would add 1200 leagues more. Within these limits are half of +Africa, and all of eastern Asia, with innumerable islands +adjoining these two vast divisions of the world. This vast extent +may be conveniently divided into seven parts.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 31: De Faria, III. 115. This is to be +understood as about the year 1640, before the Dutch had begun to +conquer the Portuguese possessions. They are now few and +unimportant, containing only some remnant of dominion at +Mozambique, with the cities of Goa and Diu in India, and Macao in +China.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The <i>first</i> division, between the famous Cape of Good +Hope, and the mouth of the Red Sea, contains along the coast many +kingdoms of the <i>Kafrs</i>; as the vast dominions of the +Monomotapa, who is lord of all the gold mines of Africa, with +those of Sofala, Mozambique, Quiloa, Pemba, Melinda, Pate, Brava, +Magadoxa, and others. In this division the Portuguese have the +forts of Sofala and Mombaza, with the city and fort of +Mozambique.</p> + +<p>The <i>second</i> division, from the mouth of the Red Sea to +that of the Persian gulf, contains the coast of Arabia, in which +they have the impregnable fortress of Muskat.</p> + +<p>The <i>third</i> division, between Busrah, or Bazorah, at the +bottom of the Persian gulf, and India proper, contains the +kingdoms of Ormuz, Guadel, and Sinde, with part of Persia, and +Cambaya, on which they have the fort of Bandel, and the island of +Diu.</p> + +<p>The <i>fourth</i> division, from the gulph of Cambaya, to Cape +Comorin, contains what is properly called India, including part +of Cambaya, with the Decan, Canara, and Malabar, subject to +several princes. On this coast the Portuguese have, Damam, +Assarim, Danu, St Gens, Agazaim, Maim, Manora, Trapor, Bazaim, +Tana, Caranja, the city of Chaul, with the opposite fort of +Morro; the most noble city of GOA, the large, strong, and +populous metropolis of the Portuguese possessions in the east. +This is the see of an archbishop, who is primate of all the east, +and is the residence of their viceroys; and there are the courts +of inquisition, exchequer, and chancery, with a customhouse, +arsenal, and well-stored magazines. The city of Goa, which stands +in an island, is girt with a strong wall, and defended by six +mighty castles called Dauguim, San Blas, Bassoleco, Santiago de +Agazaim, Panguim, and Nuestra Sennora del Cabo. On the other side +of the bar is the castle of Bardes, and opposite to Dauguim is +the fort of Norva, with a considerable town. On one side of the +island of Goa is that of Salsete, in which is the fort of Rachol. +Then going along the coast are the forts of Onor, Barcelor, +Mongalor, Cananor Cranganor, Cochin, which is a bishopric; and +near Cape Comorin, the town and fort of Coulan.</p> + +<p>The <i>fifth</i> division, between Cape Comorin and the river +Ganges, contains the coasts of Coromandel and Orixa, on which +they have the fort of Negapatam, the fort and city of Meliapour, +which is a bishopric, formerly named after St Thomas, and the +fort of Masulipatan.</p> + +<p>The <i>sixth</i> division, between the Ganges and Cape +Cincapura, contains the vast kingdoms of Bengal, Pegu, +Tanasserim, and others of less note; where the Portuguese have +the city of Malacca, the seat of a bishop, and their last +possession on the continent.</p> + +<p>The <i>seventh</i> division, from Cape Cincapura to Cape +Liampo in China, contains the kingdoms of Pam, Lugor, Siam, +Cambodia, Tsiompa, Cochin China, and the vast empire of China. In +this vast extent the Portuguese have only the island and city of +Macao, yet trade all along these coasts.</p> + +<p>In the island of Ceylon, the Portuguese possess the city and +fort of Columbo, with those of Manaar, Gale, and others. Beyond +Malacca, a fort in the island of Timor. The number of our ports +in all this great track is above fifty, with twenty cities and +towns, and many dependent villages.</p> + +<p>Much might be said of Ceylon, but we can only make room for a +short account of that famous island[32]. About 500 years before +the time of our Saviour, the heathen king of <i>Tenacarii</i>, +who ruled over a great part of the east, banished his son and +heir <i>Vigia Rajah</i>, for the wickedness and depravity of his +conduct. The young man put to sea with 700 dissipated persons +like himself, and landed at the port of <i>Preature</i>, between +Trincomalee, and Jafnapatam, in the island of Ceylon, which was +not then inhabited, but abounded in delightful rivers, springs, +woods, and fruit-trees, with many fine birds, and numerous +animals. These new colonists were so delighted with the country, +that they gave it the name of <i>Lancao</i>, which signifies the +terrestrial paradise, and, indeed, it is still considered as the +delight of all the east. The first town they built was +<i>Montota</i>, opposite to <i>Manaar</i>, whence they traded +with <i>Cholca Rajah</i>, the nearest king on the continent, who +gave his daughter as wife to the prince, and supplied his +companions with women. He likewise sent them labourers and +artizans to forward the new plantation; and seeing his power +increase, the banished prince assumed the title of emperor of the +islands. By strangers these new come people were named +<i>Galas</i>, signifying banished men on account of their having +actually been banished by the king of <i>Tenacarii.</i> Vigia +Rajah died without children, and left the crown to his brother, +in whole lineage it continued for 900 years. The fertility of the +island, and the fame of its excellent cinnamon, drew thither the +<i>Chinese</i>, who intermarried with the <i>Galas</i>, from +which mixture arose a new race, called to this day the +<i>Chingalas</i>, or Chingalese, who are very powerful in the +island, being subtle, false, and cunning, and excellently adapted +for courtiers.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 32: This is supplied from a former portion +of the Portuguese Asia, Vol II. p. 507.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the extinction of the ancient royal family, the kingdom +fell to <i>Dambadine Pandar Pracura Mabago</i>, who was +treacherously taken prisoner by the Chinese, afterwards restored, +and then murdered by <i>Alagexere</i>, who usurped the crown. The +usurper dying ten years afterwards without issue, two sons of +<i>Dambadine</i> were sent for who had fled from the tyrant. +<i>Maha Pracura Mabago</i>, the eldest, was raised to the throne, +who settled his court at <i>Cota</i>, and gave the dominion of +the four <i>Corlas</i> to his brother. <i>Maha Pracura</i> was +succeeded by a grandson, the son of a daughter who was married to +the Rajah of <i>Cholca</i>. This line likewise failed, and +<i>Queta Permal</i>, king of Jafnapatam, was raised to the +throne, on which he assumed the name or title of +<i>Bocnegaboa</i>, or king by force of arms, having overcome his +brother, who was king of the four <i>corlas</i>. His son, +<i>Caypura Pandar</i>, succeeded, but was defeated and slain by +the king of the four <i>Corlas</i>, who mounted the throne, and +took the name of <i>Jauira Pracura Magabo</i>. These two kings +were of the royal lineage, and had received their dominions from +king <i>Maha Pracura</i>. After <i>Jauira</i>, his son <i>Drama +Pracura Magabo</i> succeeded, who reigned when Vasco de Gama +discovered the route by sea to India. Afterwards, about the year +1500, the empire of Ceylon was divided by three brothers, into +three separate kingdoms. <i>Bocnegababo Pandar</i> had +<i>Cota</i>; <i>Reigam Pandar</i> had <i>Reigam</i>; and +<i>Madure Pandar</i> had <i>Cheitavaca</i>.</p> + +<p>In the district of <i>Dinavaca</i> in the centre of the +island, there is a prodigiously high mountain called the <i>Peak +of Adam</i>, as some have conceived that our first parents lived +there, and that the print of a foot, still to be seen on a rock +on its summit, is his. The natives call this <i>Amala +Saripadi</i>, or the mountain of the footstep. Some springs +running down this mountain form a pool at the bottom, in which +pilgrims wash themselves, believing that it purifies them from +sin. The rock or stone on the top resembles a tomb-stone, and the +print of the foot seems not artificial, but as if it had been +made in the same manner as when a person treads upon wet clay, on +which account it is esteemed miraculous. Pilgrims of all sorts +resort thither from all the surrounding countries, even from +Persia and China; and having purified themselves by washing in +the pool below, they go to the top of the mountain, near which +hangs a bell, which they strike, and consider its sound as a +symbol of their having been purified; <i>as if any other bell, on +being struck, would not sound</i>. According to the natives, +<i>Drama Rajah</i>, the son of an ancient king of the island, +having done penance on the mountain along with many disciples, +and being about to go away, left the print of his foot on the +rock as a memorial. It is therefore respected as the relic of a +saint, and their common name for this person is <i>Budam</i>, +which signifies the <i>wise man</i>. Some believe this saint to +have been <i>St Jesaphat</i>, but it was more likely <i>St +Thomas</i>, who has left many memorials in the <i>east</i>, and +even in the <i>west</i>, both in Brasil and Paraguay.</p> + +<p>The natural woods of Ceylon are like the most curious orchards +and gardens of Europe, producing citrons, lemons, and many other +kinds of delicious fruit. It abounds in cinnamon, cardamums, +sugar-canes, honey, and hemp. It produces iron, of which the best +firelocks in the east are made. It abounds in precious stones, as +rubies, sapphires, cats-eyes, topazes, chrysolites, amythests, +and berils. It has many civet-cats, and produces, the noblest +elephants in all the east. Its rivers and shores abound in a +variety of excellent fish, and it has many excellent ports fit +for the largest ships.</p> + +<p><i>End of the Portuguese Asia</i>.</p> + +<h2><a name="chapter3-5" id="chapter3-5">CHAPTER V.</a></h2> + +<p>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS IN EGYPT, SYRIA, ARABIA, PERSIA, AND +INDIA. BY LUDOVICO VERTHEMA, IN 1503[33].</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>This ancient itinerary into the east, at the commencement of +the sixteenth century, together with the subsequent chapter, +containing the peregrinations of Cesar Frederick, about 80 years +later, form an appropriate supplement to the Portuguese +transactions in India, as furnishing a great number of +observations respecting the countries, people, manners, customs, +and commerce of the east at an early period. We learn from the +<i>Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages</i>. I. 264, that this +itinerary was originally published in Italian at Venice, in 1520. +The version followed on the present occasion was republished in +old English, in 1811, in an appendix to a reprint of HAKLUYT'S +EARLY VOYAGES, TRAVELS, AND DISCOVERIES; from which we learn that +it was translated from <i>Latine into Englishe, by Richarde +Eden</i>, and originally published in 1576. In both these English +versions, the author is named <i>Lewes Vertomannus</i>; but we +learn from the <i>Biol. Univ. des Voy.</i> that his real name was +<i>Ludovico Verthema</i>, which we have accordingly adopted on +the present occasion, in preference to the latinized denomination +used by Eden. Although, in the present version, we have strictly +adhered to the sense of that published by Eden 236 years ago, it +has appeared more useful, and more consonant to the plan of our +work, to render the antiquated language into modern English: Yet, +as on similar occasions, we leave the <i>Preface of the +Author</i> exactly in the language and orthography of Eden, the +original translator.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 33: Hakluyt, iv. App. pp. 547--612. Ed. +Lond. 1810-11.]</blockquote> + +<p>The itinerary is vaguely dated in the title as of the year +1503, but we learn from the text, that Verthema set out upon the +pilgrimage of Mecca from Damascus in the beginning of April 1503, +after having resided a considerable time at Damascus to acquire +the language, probably Arabic; and he appears to have left India +on his return to Europe, by way of the Cape of Good Hope and +Lisbon, in the end of 1508. From some circumstances in the text, +but which do not agree with the commencement, it would appear +that Verthema had been taken prisoner by the Mamelukes, when +fifteen years of age, and was admitted into that celebrated +military band at Cairo, after making profession of the Mahometan +religion. He went afterwards on pilgrimage to Mecca, from +Damascus in Syria, then under the dominion of the Mameluke Soldan +of Egypt, and contrived to escape or desert from Mecca. By some +unexplained means, he appears to have become the servant or slave +of a Persian merchant, though he calls himself his companion, and +along with whom he made various extensive peregrinations in +India. At length he contrived, when at Cananore, to desert again +to the Portuguese, through whose means he was enabled to return +to Europe.</p> + +<p>In this itinerary, as in all the ancient voyages and travels, +the names of persons, places, and things, are generally given in +an extremely vicious orthography, often almost utterly +unintelligible, as taken down orally, according to the vernacular +modes of the respective writers, without any intimate knowledge +of the native language, or the employment of any fixed general +standard. To avoid the multiplication of notes, we have +endeavoured to supply this defect, by subjoining those names +which are now almost universally adopted by Europeans, founded +upon a more intimate acquaintance with the eastern languages. +Thus the author, or his translator Eden, constantly uses +<i>Cayrus</i> and <i>Alcayr</i>, for the modern capital of Egypt, +now known either by the Arabic denomination Al Cahira, or the +European designation Cairo, probably formed by the Venetians from +the Arabic. The names used in this itinerary have probably been +farther disguised and vitiated, by a prevalent fancy or fashion +of giving <i>latin</i> terminations to all names of persons and +places in latin translations. Thus, even the author of this +itinerary has had his modern <i>Roman</i> name, <i>Verthema</i>, +latinized into <i>Vertomannus</i>, and probably the <i>Cairo</i>, +or <i>Cayro</i> of the Italian original, was corrupted by Eden +into <i>Cayrus</i>, by way of giving it a latin sound. Yet, while +we have endeavoured to give, often conjecturally, the better, or +at least more intelligible and now customary names, it seemed +proper to retain those of the original translation, which we +believe may be found useful to our readers, as a kind of +<i>geographical glossary</i> of middle-age terms.</p> + +<p>Of <i>Verthema</i> or <i>Vertomannus</i>, we only know, from +the title of the translation of his work by Eden, that he was a +<i>gentleman of Rome;</i> and we learn, at the close of his +itinerary, that he was knighted by the Portuguese viceroy of +India, and that his patent of knighthood was confirmed at Lisbon, +by the king of Portugal. The full title of this journal or +itinerary, as given by the original translator, is as follows; by +which, and the preface of the author, both left unaltered, the +language and orthography of England towards the end of the +sixteenth century, or in 1576, when Eden published his +translation, will be sufficiently illustrated.--Ed.</p> + +<blockquote>THE NAUIGATION AND VOYAGES<br> +OF<br> +LEWES VERTOMANNUS,<br> +GENTLEMAN OF THE CITIE OF ROME,<br> +TO THE<br> +REGIONS OF ARABIA, EGYPTE, PERSIA, SYRIA, ETHIOPIA<br> +AND EAST INDIA,<br> +BOTH WITHIN AND WITHOUT THE RYUER OF GANGES, ETC.<br> +IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1503.<br> +CONTEYNING<br> +MANY NOTABLE AND STRAUNGE THYNGES,<br> +BOTH HYSTORICALL AND NATURALL<br> +TRANSLATED OUT OF LATINE INTO ENGLYSHE,<br> +BY RICHARDE EDEN.<br> +IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1576.</blockquote> + +<p>THE PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.</p> + +<p>There haue been many before me, who, to know the miracles of +the worlde, haue with diligent studie read dyuers authours which +haue written of such thynges. But other giuing more credit to the +lyuely voyce, haue been more desirous to know the same, by +relation of such as haue traueyled in those countreys, and seene +such thinges whereof they make relation, for that in many bookes, +geathered of vncertaine aucthoritie, are myxt false thinges with +true. Other there are so greatly desirous to know the trueth of +these thinges, that they can in no wyse be satisfied vntyll, by +theyr owne experience they haue founde the trueth by vyages and +perigrinations into straunge countreys and people, to know theyr +maners, fashions, and customes, with dyuers thynges there to be +seene: wherein the only readyng of bookes could not satisfie +theyr thirst of such knowledge, but rather increased the same, in +so much, that they feared not with losse of theyr goods and +daunger of lyfe to attempte great vyages to dyuers countreys, +with witnesse of theyr eyes to see that they so greatly desired +to knowe. The whiche thyng among other chaunced vnto me also, for +as often as in the books of Hystories and Cosmographie, I read of +such marueylous thynges whereof they make mention [especially of +thynges in the east parts of the world], there was nothyng that +coulde pacifie my vnquiet mynde, vntyll I had with myne eyes +seene the trueth thereof.</p> + +<p>I know that some there are indued with hygh knowledge, +mountyng vnto the heauens, whiche will contempne these our +wrytinges as base and humble, by cause we do not here, after +theyr maner, with hygh and subtile inquisition intreate of the +motions and dispositions of the starres, and gyue reason of theyr +woorkyng on the earth, with theyr motions, retrogradations, +directions, mutations, epicicles, reuolutions, inclinations, +diuinations, reflexions, and suche other parteyning to the +science of Astrologie: whych certeynely we doe not contempne, but +greatly prayse. But measuryng vs with our owne foote, we will +leaue that heauie burden of heauven to the strong shoulders of +Atlas and Hercules: and only creepyng vpon the earth, in our owne +person beholde the situations of landes and regions, with the +maners and customes of men, and variable fourmes, shapes, +natures, and properties of beastes, fruites, and trees, +especially suche as are among the Arabians, Persians, Indians, +Ethiopians. And whereas in the searchyng of these thynges we have +[thanked be God], satisfied our desire, we thinke neuerthelesse +that we haue done little, excepte we should communicate to other, +such thynges as we haue seene and had experience of, that they +lykewyse by the readyng therof may take pleasure, for whose sakes +we have written this long and dangerous discourse, of thynges +whych we haue seene in dyvers regions and sectes of men, desiryng +nothyng more then that the trueth may be knowen to them that +desyre the same. But what incommodities and troubles chaunced +vnto me in these vyages, as hunger, thirst, colde, heate, warres, +captiuitie, terrours, and dyuers other suche daungers, I will +declare by the way in theyr due places.</p> + +<p>SECTION I.</p> + +<p><i>Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in Egypt, and +from thence to Damascus in Syria</i>[34].</p> + +<p>Should any one wish to know the cause of my engaging in this +voyage, I can give no better reason than the ardent desire of +knowledge, which hath moved me and many others to see the world +and the wonders of creation which it exhibits. And, as other +known parts of the world had been already sufficiently travelled +over by others, I was determined to wait and describe such parts +as were not sufficiently known. For which reason, with the grace +of God, and calling upon his holy name to prosper our enterprise, +we departed from Venice, and with prosperous winds we arrived in +few days at the city of Alexandria in Egypt. The desire we had to +know things more strange and farther off, did not permit us to +remain long at that place; wherefore, sailing up the river Nile, +we came to the city of new Babylon, commonly called <i>Cayrus</i> +or <i>Akayr</i>, <i>Cairo</i> or <i>Al-cahira</i>, called also +<i>Memphis</i> in ancient times.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 34: To accommodate this curious article to +our mode of arrangement, we have made a slight alteration of the +nomenclature of its subdivisions; calling those in this version +<i>Sections</i>, which in the original translation of Mr Eden are +denominated chapters; and have used the farther freedom of +sometimes throwing several of these chapters into one +section.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>On my first arrival at this place I was more astonished than I +can well express, yet on a more intimate observation it seemed +much inferior to the report of its fame, as in extent it seemed +not larger than Rome, though much more populous. But many have +been deceived in regard to its size by the extensive suburbs, +which are in reality numerous dispersed villages with fields +interspersed, which some persons have thought to belong to the +city, though they are from two to three miles distant, and +surround it on all sides. It is not needful to expatiate in this +place on the manners and religion of this city and its environs, +as it is well known that the inhabitants are Mahometans and +Mamelukes; these last being Christians who have forsaken the true +faith to serve the Turks and Mahometans. Those of that +description who used to serve the Soldan of Babylon in Egypt, or +Cairo, in former times before the Turkish conquest, used to be +called Mamelukes, while such of them as served the Turks were +denominated <i>Jenetzari</i> or Janisaries. The Mameluke +Mahometans are subject to the Soldan of Syria.</p> + +<p>As the riches and magnificence of Cairo, and the Mameluke +soldiers by whom it is occupied are well known, we do not deem it +necessary to say any thing respecting them in this place. +Wherefore departing from Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo, and +returning to Alexandria, we again put to sea and went to +<i>Berynto</i>, a city on the coast of Syria Phoenicia, inhabited +by Mahometans and abounding in all things, where we remained a +considerable time. This city is not encompassed with walls, +except on the west side where there are walls close to the sea. +We found nothing memorable at this place, except an old ruined +building where they say St. George delivered the kings daughter +from a cruel dragon which he slew, and then restated the lady to +her father. Departing from thence we went to Tripoli in Syria, +which is two days sail to the east of Berynto. It is inhabited by +Mahometans, who are subject to the lieutenant or governor of +Syria under the Soldan. The soil of the neighbouring country is +very fertile, and as it carries on great trade this city abounds +in all things. Departing from thence we came to the city of +<i>Comagene</i> of Syria, commonly called Aleppo, and named by +our men Antioch[35]. This is a goodly city, which is situated +under mount <i>Taurus</i> and is subject to the lieutenant of +Syria under the Soldan of Egypt. Here are the <i>scales</i> or +ladders as they are called of the Turks and Syrians, being near +mount Olympus. It is a famous mart of the Azamians and Persians. +The Azamians are a Mahometan people who inhabit Mesopotamia on +the confines of Persia.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 35: This is a gross error, as Aleppo is +above 80 English miles N.E. and island from Antioch. From the +sequel it is evident that Antioch is the place meant by +Vertomannus in the text, as the <i>scales</i>, mart, or staple of +the Syrian trade.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Departing from Antioch we went by land to Damascus, a journey +of ten days; but mid-way we came to a city named <i>Aman</i> in +the neighbourhood of which there grows a great quantity of +gossampine or cotton, and all manner of pleasant fruits. About +six miles from Damascus on the declivity of a mountain is a city +called <i>Menin</i>, inhabited by Greek christians who are +subject to the governor of Damascus. At that place there are two +fine churches, which the inhabitants allege were built by Helena +the mother of the emperor Constantine. This place produces all +kinds of fruit in great perfection, especially excellent grapes, +and the gardens are watered with perpetual fountains.</p> + +<p>SECTION II.</p> + +<p><i>Of the City of Damascus</i>.</p> + +<p>Departing from <i>Menin</i> we came to Damascus, a city so +beautiful as surpasses all belief, situated in a soil of +wonderful fertility. I was so much delighted by the marvellous +beauty of this city that I sojourned there a considerable time, +that by learning the language I might inquire into the manners of +the people. The inhabitants are Mahometans and Mamelukes, with a +great number of Christians who follow the Greek ritual. It may be +proper in this place to give some account of the +<i>Hexarchatus</i> or commander of Damascus, who is subject to +the lieutenant of Syria, which some call <i>sorya</i>. There is a +very strong castle or fortress, which was built by a certain +Etruscan or native of Florence in Tuscany, while he was +<i>exarch</i> or governor of Damascus, as appears by a flower of +the lily graven on marble, being the arms of Florence. This +castle is encompassed by a deep ditch and high walls with four +goodly high towers, and is entered by means of a drawbridge which +can be let down or taken up at pleasure. Within, this castle is +provided with all kinds of great artillery and warlike +ammunition, and has a constant guard of fifty Mamelukes, who wait +upon the captain of the castle and are paid by the viceroy of +Syria. The following story respecting the Florentine +<i>exarch</i> or governor of Damascus was related to me by the +inhabitants. One of the Soldans of Syria happened to have poison +administered to him, and when in search of a remedy he was cured +by that Florentine who belonged to the company of Mamelukes. +Owing to this great service he grew into high favour with the +Soldan, who in reward made him exarch or governor of Damascus in +which he built the before mentioned citadel. For saving the life +of their Soldan this man is still reputed among them as a saint, +and after his death the sovereignty of Damascus returned to the +Syrians.</p> + +<p>The Soldan is said to be much beloved by his princes and +lords, to whom he is ever ready to grant principalities and +governments, reserving always to himself the yearly payment of +many thousands of those pieces of gold called <i>saraphos</i> or +serafines, and any one who neglects payment of the stipulated +tribute is liable to be immediately put to death. Ten or twelve +of the chief noblemen or governors always reside with the Soldan +to assist him with their councils and to carry his orders into +execution. The Mameluke government is exceedingly oppressive to +the merchants and even to the other Mahometan inhabitants of +Damascus. When the Soldan thinks fit to extort a sum of money +from any of the nobles or merchants, he gives two letters to the +governor of the castle, in one of which is contained a list of +such as he thinks proper to be invited into the castle, and in +the other is set down what sum the Soldan is pleased to demand +from his subjects; and with these commands they immediately +comply. Sometimes however the nobles are of such power that they +refuse to attend at the castle when summoned; and knowing that +the tyrant will offer them violence, they often escape into the +dominions of the Turks. We have noticed that the watchmen who are +stationed in the towers do not give warning to the guard by +calling out as with us, but by means of drums each answering the +other; and if any of the centinels be asleep and do not answer +the beat of the patrole in a moment, he is immediately committed +to prison for a whole year.</p> + +<p>This city is well built and wonderfully populous, much +frequented and extremely rich, and abounds in all kinds of +commodities and provisions, such as flesh, corn, and fruits. It +has fresh damascene grapes all the year round, with pomegranates, +oranges, lemons, and excellent olive trees; likewise the finest +roses I ever saw, both red and white. The apples are excellent, +but the pears and peaches are unsavoury, owing as is said to too +much moisture. A fine clear river runs past the city, which is so +well supplied with water that almost every house has a fountain +of curious workmanship, many of them splendidly ornamented with +embossed or carved work. Outwardly their houses are very plain, +but the insides are beautifully adorned with various ornaments of +the stone called <i>oplus</i> or serpentine marble. The city +contains many temples which they call mosques, the most beautiful +of which is built after the manner of St Peters at Rome, and as +large, only that the middle has no roof being entirely open, all +the rest of the temple being vaulted. This temple has four great +double gates of brass, and has many splendid fountains on the +inside, in which they preserve the body of the prophet Zacharias, +whom they hold in great veneration. There are still to be seen +the ruins of many decayed canonical or Christian churches, having +much fine carved work. About a mile from the city the place is +pointed out where our Saviour spoke to St Paul, saying, "Paul! +Paul! why persecutest thou me!" at which place all the Christians +who die in the city are buried. The tower also is shewn in which +Paul was imprisoned, which joins the wall of the city; but even +the Mahometans do not attempt to shut up that part of the tower +through which St Paul was conducted by the angel, alleging that, +when they close it up over night is found open again next +morning. They likewise point out the houses in which they say +that Cain slew his brother Abel, which are in a certain valley +about a mile from the city, but on the side of a hill skirting +that valley.</p> + +<p>The Mamelukes or stranger soldiers who inhabit Damascus live +in a most licentious manner. They are all men who have forsaken +the Christian faith, and who have been purchased as slaves by the +governor of Syria. Being brought up both in learning and warlike +discipline, they are very active and brave; and all of them +whether high or low, receive regular wages from the governor, +being six of those pieces of gold called serafines monthly, +besides meat and drink for themselves and servants, and provender +for their horses; and as they shew themselves valiant and +faithful their wages are increased. They never walk singly about +the city, which would be deemed dishonourable, but always by two +or three together; and if they chance to meet with two or three +women in the streets, for whom even they are in use to wait in +the neighbourhood of such houses as the women frequent, licence +is granted to such as first meet them to carry them to certain +taverns where they abuse them. When the Mamelukes attempt to +uncover the faces of these women, they strive all they can to +prevent being known, and are generally allowed to go away without +having their veils lifted. Hence it sometimes happens, when they +think to have abused the daughter of some nobleman or person of +condition, that they have fallen in with their own wives, as +actually happened while I was there. The women of Damascus +beautify and adorn themselves with great attention, wearing silk +clothes, which they cover with an outer garment of cotton as fine +as silk. They wear white buskins, and red or purple shoes, having +their heads decorated with rich jewels and ear-rings, with rings +on their fingers and splendid bracelets on their arms. They marry +as often as they please, as when weary of, or dissatisfied with +their husbands, they apply to the chief of their religion, called +the <i>cady</i>, and request of him to divorce them, which +divorcement is called <i>talacare</i> in their language, after +which they are at liberty to contract a new marriage; and the +same liberty is allowed to the husbands. Some say that the +Mahometans have usually five or six wives, but as far as I could +learn they have only two or three. They eat openly in the markets +or fairs, and there they cook all their food, living on the +flesh, of horses, camels, buffaloes, goats, and other beasts, and +use great quantities of fresh cheese. Those who sell milk drive +flocks of forty or fifty she-goats through the streets, which +they bring to the doors of those who buy, driving them even into +their chambers, though three stories high, where the animals are +milked, so that every one gets their milk fresh and +unadulterated. These goats have their ears a span long, and are +very fruitful. They use many mushrooms, as there are often seen +at one time 20 or 30 camels loaded with mushrooms coming to +market, and yet all are sold in two or three days. These are +brought from the mountains of Armenia, and from Asia Minor, now +called Turkey, Natolia, or Anatolia. The Mahometans use long +loose vestures both of silk and cloth, most having hose or +trowsers of cotton, and white shoes or slippers. When any +Mahometan happens to meet a Mameluke, even though the worthier +person, he must give place and reverence to the Mameluke, who +would otherwise beat him with a staff. Though often ill used by +the Mahometans, the Christians have many warehouses in Damascus, +where they sell various kinds of silks and velvets, and other +commodities.</p> + +<p>SECT. III.</p> + +<p><i>Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the Manners +of the Arabians</i>.</p> + +<p>On the 8th of April 1503, having hired certain camels to go +with the caravan to Mecca, and being then ignorant of the manners +and customs of those with whom I was to travel, I entered into +familiarity and friendship with a certain Mameluke captain who +had forsaken our faith, with whom I agreed for the expences of my +journey, and who supplied me with apparel like that worn by the +Mamelukes, and gave me a good horse, so that I went in his +company along with other Mamelukes. This advantage cost me much +money and many gifts. Thus entering on our journey, we came in +three days to a place called <i>Mezaris</i>, where we tarried +other three days that the merchants might provide all necessaries +for the journey, and especially camels. There is a certain prince +called <i>Zambei</i>, of great power in Arabia, who had three +brothers and four sons. This prince possessed 40,000 horses, +10,000 mares, and 4000 camels, which he kept in a country two +days journey in extent. His power is so great, that he is at war +with the Soldan of Egypt, the governor of Damascus, and the +prince of Jerusalem all at once. His chief time of robbing and +plundering is in harvest, when, he often falls unexpectedly on +the Arabians, invading their lands and carrying away their wheat +and barley, employing himself continually in predatory +incursions. When his mares are weary with continual running, he +stops to rest them, and gives them camels milk to drink, to +refresh and cool them after their fatigue. These mares are of +most wonderful swiftness, and when I saw them they seemed rather +to fly than to run in riding, these Arabians only cover their +horses with cloths or mats, and their own clothing is confined to +a single vesture somewhat like a petticoat. Their weapons are +long lances or darts made of reeds, ten or twelve cubits long, +pointed with iron and fringed with silk. The men are despicable +looking people, of small stature, of a colour between black and +yellow, which we call olive, having voices like women, and long +black hair flowing on their shoulders. They are more numerous +than can well be believed, and are continually at war among +themselves. They inhabit the mountains, and have certain times +appointed for going out on predatory excursions, when they march +in troops in great order, carrying with them their wives and +children, and all their goods. Their houses or tents rather are +carried on camels, having no other houses, but dwelling always in +tents like soldiers. These tents are made of wool, and look black +and filthy.</p> + +<p>On the 11th of April we departed from Mezaris to the number of +40,000 men with 35,000 camels, having only sixty Mamelukes to +guide and guard us. We were regularly marshalled for the march +into a van and main body, with two wings, in which order the +caravans of pilgrims always travel in these regions. From +Damascus to Mecca is a journey of forty days and forty nights. +Departing from Mezaris we continued our journey that day till the +twenty-second hour of the day. Then our captain or +<i>Agmirus</i>[36], having given the appointed signal, the whole +caravan immediately halted and disburdened the camels, two hours +only being allowed for rest and refreshment for the men and +beasts. Then upon a new signal the camels were all reloaded, and +we resumed our march. Every camel has for one feed five barley +loaves, raw and not baked, as large as pomegranates. We continued +our second days journey like the first, all day and night, from +sun-rise to the twenty-second hour of the day, and this was the +constant regular order. Every eighth day they procure water by +digging the ground or sand, though sometimes we found wells and +cisterns. Likewise after every eight day, they rest two days, +that the camels and horses may recover strength. Every camel +bears an incredible load, being equal to that Which is borne by +two strong-mules.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 36: The Emir Haji, or captain of the +pilgrimage, which name of office is transposed in the text to +Haji-emir, corrupted <i>Agmir</i>, and latinized +Agmirus.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>At every resting-place at the waters, they are always obliged +to defend themselves against vast numbers of Arabians, but these +conflicts are hardly ever attended with bloodshed, insomuch that +though we often fought with them, we had only one man slain +during the whole journey, these Arabians are so weak and cowardly +that our threescore Mamelukes have often driven 60,000 Arabians +before them. Of these Mamelukes, I have often seen wonderful +instances of their expertness and activity. I once saw a Mameluke +place an apple on the head of his servant at the distance of 12 +or 14 paces, and strike it off from his head, another while +riding at full speed took the saddle from his horse, and carried +it some time on his head, and put it again on the horse without +checking his career.</p> + +<p>At the end of twelve days journey we came to the valley of +Sodom and Gomorra, which we found, as is said in the holy +scripture, to retain the ruins of the destroyed city as a lasting +memorial of God's wrath. I may affirm that there are three +cities, each situated on the declivity of three separate hills, +and the ruins do not seem above three or four cubits high, among +which is seen something like blood, or rather like red wax mixed +with earth. It is easy to believe that these people were addicted +to horrible vices, as testified by the barren, dry, filthy +unwholesome region, utterly destitute of water. These people were +once fed with manna sent from heaven, but abusing the gifts of +God they were utterly destroyed. Departing about twenty miles +from this place, about thirty of our company perished for want of +water, and several others were overwhelmed with sand. A little +farther on we found water at the foot of a little hill, and there +halted. Early next morning there came to us 24,000 Arabians, who +demanded money from us in payment of the water we had taken, and +as we refused them any money, saying that the water was the free +gift of God to all, we came to blows. We gathered ourselves +together on the mountain as the safest place, using our camels as +a bulwark, all the merchants and their goods being placed in the +middle of the camels while we fought manfully on every side. The +battle continued for two days, when water failed both with us and +our enemies, who encompassed the mountain all round, continually +calling out that they would break in among our camels. At length +our captain assembled all the merchants, whom he commanded to +gather twelve hundred pieces of gold to be given to the Arabians: +but on receiving that sum they said it was too little, and +demanded ten thousand pieces and more for the water we had taken. +Whereupon our captain gave orders that every man in the caravan +who could bear arms should prepare for battle. Next morning our +commander sent on the caravan with the unarmed pilgrims inclosed +by the camels, and made an attack upon the enemy with our small +army, which amounted to about three hundred in all. With the loss +only of one man and a woman on our side, we completely defeated +the Arabians of whom we slew 1500 men. This victory is not to be +wondered at, considering that the Arabians are almost entirely +unarmed being almost naked, and having only a thin loose vesture, +while their horses are very ill provided for battle, having no +saddles or other caparisons.</p> + +<p>Continuing our march after this victory, we came in eight days +to a mountain about ten or twelve miles in circuit, which was +inhabited by about 5000 Jews. These were of very small stature, +hardly exceeding five or six spans in height, and some much +less[37]. They have small shrill voices like women, and are of +very dark complexions, some blacker than the rest. Their only +food is the flesh of goats. They are all circumcised and follow +the Jewish law, and when any Mahometan falls into their hands +they flea him alive. We found a hole at the foot of the mountain +out of which there flowed an abundant source of water, at which +we laded 16,000 camels, giving great offence to the Jews. These +people wander about their mountain like so many goats or deer, +not daring to descend into the plain for fear of the Arabians. At +the bottom of the mountain we found a small grove of seven or +eight thorn trees, among which we found a pair of turtle doves, +which were to us a great rarity, as during our long journey +hitherto we had seen neither beast nor bird.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 37: This account of the stature of the +Jewish tribe cannot fail to be much exaggerated, otherwise the +text must have been corrupted at this place; as we cannot well +conceive of a tribe in Arabia not exceeding four feet two inches +in average height.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Proceeding two days journey from the mountain of the Jews, we +came to <i>Medinathalhabi</i>[38] or Medina. Four miles from this +city we found a well, where the caravan rested and remained for a +whole day, that we might wash ourselves and put on clean garments +to appear decently in the city. Medina contains about three +hundred houses of stone or brick, and is well peopled, being +surrounded by bulwarks of earth. The soil is utterly barren, +except at about two miles from the city there are about fifty +palm trees which bear dates. At that place, beside a garden, +there is a water-course which runs into a lower plain, where the +pilgrims are accustomed to water their camels. I had here an +opportunity to refute the vulgar opinion that the tomb or coffin +of the <i>wicked</i> Mahomet is at Mecca, and hangs in the air +without support. For I tarried here three days and saw with my +own eyes the place where Mahomet was buried, which is here at +Medina, and not at Mecca. On presenting ourselves to enter the +<i>Meschita</i> or mosque, which name they give to all their +churches or temples, we could not be allowed to enter unless +along with a companion[39] little or great, who takes us by the +hand and leads us to the place where they say that Mahomet is +buried. His temple is vaulted, being about 100 paces long by 80 +in breadth, and is entered by two gates. It consists of three +parallel vaults, which are supported by four hundred pillars of +white bricks, and within are suspended about three thousand +lamps. In the inner part of this mosque or temple is a kind of +tower five paces in circuit, vaulted on every side, and covered +with a large cloth of silk, which is borne up by a grate of +copper curiously wrought, and at the distance of two paces on +every side from the tower, so that this tower or tomb is only +seen as through a lattice by the devout pilgrims. This tomb is +situated in an inner building toward the left hand from the great +mosque, in a chapel to which you enter by a narrow gate. On every +side of these gates or doors are seen many books in the manner of +a library, twenty on one side, and twenty-five on the other, +which contain the vile traditions of Mahomet and his companions. +Within this chapel is seen a sepulchre in which they say that +Mahomet lies buried with his principal companions, <i>Nabi</i>, +<i>Bubacar</i>, <i>Othamar</i>, <i>Aumar</i>, and <i>Fatoma</i>. +Mahomet, who was a native Arabian, was their chief captain. +<i>Hali</i> or <i>Ali</i> was his son in-law, for he took to wife +his daughter <i>Fatima</i>. <i>Bubacar</i> or Abubeker, was as +they say exalted to be chief councillor and governor under +Mahomet, but was not honoured with the office of apostle or +prophet. <i>Othamar and Aumar</i>, Othoman and Omar, were chief +captains in the army of Mahomet. Every one of these have +particular books containing the acts and traditions which relate +to them, whence proceed great dissentions and discords of +religion and manners among these vile people, some of whom adhere +to one doctrine and some to another, so that they are divided +into various sects among themselves, and kill each other like +beasts, upon quarrels respecting their various opinions, all +equally false, having each their several patrons, doctors, and +saints, as they call them. This also is the chief cause of war +between the Sophy of Persia and the grand Turk, both of whom are +Mahometans, yet they live in continual and mortal hatred of each +other for the maintenance of their respective sects, saints, and +apostles, every one thinking their own the best.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 38: This name ought probably to have been +written Medinat-al-habi, and is assuredly the holy city of +Medina, in which Mahomet was buried.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 39: This seems to refer to some official +residents of Medina, who must accompany the pilgrims in their +visits to the holy places, probably for profit.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The first evening that we came to Medina, our captain, or Emir +of the pilgrimage, sent for the chief priest of the temple, and +declared that the sole object of his coming thither was to visit +the sepulchre and body of the <i>Nabi</i> or prophet, as they +usually call Mahomet, and that he understood the price generally +paid for being admitted to a sight of these mysteries was four +thousand gold <i>serafines</i>. He told him likewise that he had +no parents, neither brothers nor sisters, kindred, wife, nor +children; that he had not come hither to purchase any +merchandise, such as spices, <i>bacca</i>[40], spikenard, or +jewels, but merely for the salvation of his soul and from pure +zeal for religion, and was therefore exceedingly desirous to see +the body of the prophet. To this the priest answered in apparent +anger, "Darest thou, with those eyes with which thou hast +committed so many abominable sins, presume to look on him by whom +God created heaven and earth?" The captain replied that he spoke +true, yet prayed him that he might be permitted to see the +prophet, when he would instantly have his eyes thrust out. Then +answered the <i>Side</i> or chief priest, "Prince! I will freely +communicate all things to you. It is undeniable that our holy +prophet died at this place; but he was immediately borne away by +angels to heaven and there received among them as their equal." +Our captain then asked where was now Jesus Christ the son of +Mary, and the <i>Side</i> said that he was at the feet of +Mahomet: To which the captain replied that he was satisfied, and +wished for no more information. After this, coming out of the +temple, he said to us, "See I pray you for what stuff I would +have paid three thousand <i>serafines</i> of gold!"</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 40: This word is obviously <i>berries</i>, +and signifies coffee.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>That same evening at almost three o'clock of the night[41], +ten or twelve elders of the city came into the encampment of our +caravan, close by one of the gates of the city, where running +about like madmen, they continually cried out aloud, "Mahomet the +apostle of God shall rise again: O prophet of God thou shalt rise +again. God have mercy upon us!" Alarmed by these cries, our +captain and all of us seized our weapons in all haste, suspecting +that the Arabians had come to rob our caravan. On demanding the +reason of all this outcry, for they cried out as is done by the +Christians when any miraculous event occurs, the elders answered, +"Saw you not the light which shone from the sepulchre of the +prophet?" Then said one of the elders, "Are you slaves?" meaning +thereby bought men or Mamelukes; and when our captain answered +that we were Mamelukes, the elder replied, "You, my lords, being +new to the faith, and not yet fully confirmed in the religion of +our holy prophet, cannot see these heavenly things." To which our +captain answered, "O! you mad and insensate beasts! I thought to +have given you three thousand pieces of gold; but now I shall +give you nothing, you dogs and progeny of dogs?" Now, it is to be +understood that the pretended miraculous light which was seen to +proceed from the sepulchre, was merely occasioned by a flame made +by the priests in the open part of the tower formerly mentioned, +which they wished to impose on us as a miracle. After this our +commander gave orders that none of the caravan should enter into +the temple. Having thus seen with my own eyes, I can assuredly +declare that there is neither iron nor steel, nor magnet stone by +which the tomb of Mahomet is made to hang in the air, as some +have falsely imagined, neither is there any mountain nearer to +Medina than four miles. To this city of Medina corn and all other +kinds of victuals are brought from Arabia Felix, Babylon or Cairo +in Egypt, and from Ethiopia by way of the Red Sea, which is about +four days journey from the city.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 41: Counting from sunset after the manner +of the Italians.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Having remained three days in our encampment on the outside of +Medina to rest and refresh ourselves and our animals, and being +satisfied, or disgusted rather, by the vile and abominable +trumperies, deceits, and hypocritical trifles of the Mahometan +delusions, we determined to resume our journey; and procuring a +pilot or guide, who might direct our way by means of a chart and +mariners box or compass, as is used at sea, we bent our journey +towards the west, where we found a fair well or fountain whence +flowed an abundant stream of water, and where we and our beasts +were satisfied with drink. According to a tradition among the +inhabitants, this region was formerly burnt up with drought and +sterility, till the evangelist St Mark procured this fountain +from God by miracle. We came into the <i>sea of sand</i> before +our arrival at the mountain of the Jews, formerly mentioned, and +in it we journeyed three days and nights. This is a vast plain +covered all over by white sand as fine almost as flour; and if by +evil chance any one travels south while the wind blows to the +north, they are overwhelmed by drifted sand. Even with the wind +favourable, or blowing in the direction of their journey, the +pilgrims are apt to scatter and disperse, as they cannot see each +other at ten paces distance. For this reason those who travel +across the sea of sand are enclosed in wooden cages on the backs +of camels, and are guided by experienced pilots by chart and +compass, as mariners on the ocean. In this journey many perish by +thirst, and many by drinking with too much avidity when they fall +in with wells. Owing to this <i>Momia</i> is found in these +sands, bring the flesh of such as have been <i>drowned in the sea +of sand</i>, which is there dried up by the heat of the sun, and +the excessive dryness of the sand preventing putrefaction. This +<i>Momia</i> or dried flesh is esteemed medicinal; but there is +another and more precious kind of <i>Momia</i>, being the dried +and embalmed bodies of kings and princes, which have been +preserved in all times from corrupting.</p> + +<p>When the wind blows from the north-east, the sand rises, and +is driven against a certain mountain, which is a branch from +Mount Sinai; and in that place we found certain pillars +artificially wrought, which are called <i>Januan</i>. On the left +hand side of that mountain, and near the highest summit, there is +a cave or den, to which you enter by an iron gate, and into which +cave Mahomet is said to have retired for meditation. While +passing that mountain, we heard certain horrible cries and loud +noises, which put us in great fear. Departing therefore from the +fountain of St Mark, we continued our journey for ten days, and +twice in that time we had to fight against fifty thousand +Arabians. At length, however, we arrived at Mecca, where we found +every thing in confusion, in consequence of a civil war between +two brothers who contended for the kingdom of Mecca.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV.</p> + +<p><i>Observations of the Author during his residence at +Mecca</i>.</p> + +<p>The famous city of Mecha or Mecca is populous and well built, +in a round form, having six thousand houses as well built as +those in Rome, some of which have cost three or four thousand +pieces of gold. It has no walls, being protected or fortified as +it were on all sides by mountains, over one of which, about two +furlongs from the city, the road is cut by which we descended +into the plain below; but there are three other entries through +the mountains. It is under the dominion of a sultan, one of four +brethren of the progeny of Mahomet, who is subject to the Soldan +of Egypt, but his other three brothers are continually at war +with him. On the 18th day of May, descending from the +before-mentioned road obliquely into the plain, we came to Mecca +by the north side. On the south side of the city there are two +mountains very near each other, having a very narrow intervening +valley, which is the way leading to Mecca on that side. To the +east there in a similar valley between two other mountains, by +which is the road to a mountain where they sacrifice to the +patriarchs Abraham and Isaac, which hill or mount is ten or +twelve miles from Mecca, and is about three stone throws in +height, being all of a stone as hard as marble, yet is not +marble. On the top of this mount is a temple or mosque, built +after their manner, having three entrances. At the foot of the +mountain are two great cisterns, which preserve water free from +corruption: one of these is reserved for the camels belonging to +the caravan of Cairo, and the other for that of Damascus. These +cisterns are filled by rain water, which is brought from a great +way off. We shall speak afterwards of the sacrifices performed at +this mountain, and must now return to Mecca.</p> + +<p>On our arrival we found the caravan from Memphis, or Babylon +of Egypt, which had arrived eight days before us, coming by a +different way, and consisted of 64,000 camels, with a guard of an +hundred Mamelukes. This city of Mecca is assuredly cursed of God, +for it is situated in a most barren spot, destitute of all manner +of fruit or corn, and so burnt up with drought, that you cannot +have as much water for twelve pence as will satisfy one person +for a whole day. Most part of their provisions are brought from +Cairo in Egypt, by the Red Sea, or <i>Mare Erythreum</i> of the +ancients, and is landed at the port of <i>Gida</i>, Joddah or +Jiddah, which is about forty miles from Mecca. The rest of their +provisions are brought from the <i>Happy Arabia</i>, or <i>Arabia +Felix</i>, so named from its fruitfulness in comparison with the +other two divisions, called <i>Petrea</i> and <i>Deserta</i>, or +the Stoney and Desert Arabias. They also get much corn from +Ethiopia. At Mecca we found a prodigious multitude of strangers +who were <i>peregrines</i> or pilgrims; some from Syria, others +from Persia, and others from both the Indies, that is, from India +on this side the river Ganges, and also from the farther India +beyond that river. During my stay of twenty days at Mecca, I saw +a most prodigious number and variety of people, infinitely beyond +what I had ever before seen. This vast concourse of strangers of +many nations and countries resort thither from various causes, +but chiefly for trade, and to obtain pardon of their sins by +discharging a vow of pilgrimage.</p> + +<p>From India, both on this side and beyond the Ganges, they +bring for sale precious stones pearls and spices; and especially +from that city of the greater India, which is named +<i>Bangella</i>[42] they bring much <i>gossampyne</i> cloth[43] +and silk. They receive spices also from Ethiopia[44]; and, in +short, this city of Mecca is a most famous and plentiful mart of +many rich and valuable commodities. But the main object for which +pilgrims resort thither from so many countries and nations, is, +to purchase the pardon of their sins. In the middle of the city +there is a temple after the manner of the coliseum or +amphitheatre of Rome, yet not built of marble or hewn stone, +being only of burnt bricks. Like an amphitheatre, it has ninety +or an hundred gates, and is vaulted over. It is entered on every +side by a descent of twelve steps, and in its porch is the mart +for jewels and precious stones, all the walls of the entry being +gilt over in a most splendid manner. In the lower part of the +temple under the vaults, there is always to be seen a prodigious +multitude of men; as there are generally five or six thousand in +that place, who deal solely in sweet ointments and perfumes, +among which especially is a certain most odoriferous powder, with +which dead bodies are embalmed. From this place all manner of +delightful perfumes are carried to all the Mahometan countries, +for beyond any thing that can be found in the shops of our +apothecaries.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 42: This must necessarily be the kingdom or +province of Bengal.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 43: Fine cottons or muslins are here +evidently meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 44: This is inexplicable, as Ethiopia +possesses no spices, unless we may suppose the author to mean +here the sea of Ethiopia or Red Sea, as the track by which spices +were brought to Mecca.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the 23d day of May yearly, the pardons begin to be +distributed in the temple, after the following manner: The temple +is entirely open in the middle, and in its centre stands a turret +about six paces in circumference, and not exceeding the height of +a man, which is hung all round with silken tapestry. This turret +or cell is entered by a gate of silver, on each side of which are +vessels full of precious balsam, which the inhabitants told us +was part of the treasure belonging to the sultan of Mecca. <i>At +every vault of the turret is fastened a round circle of iron, +like the ring of a door</i>[45]. On the day of Pentecost, all men +are permitted to visit this holy place. On the 22d of May, a +great multitude of people began early in the morning, before day, +to walk seven times round the turret, every corner of which they +devoutly kissed and frequently handled. About ten or twelve paces +from this principal turret is another, which is built like a +Christian chapel, having three or four entries; and in the middle +is a well seventy cubits deep, the water of which is impregnated +with saltpetre. At this well eight men are stationed to draw +water for all the multitude. After the pilgrims have seven times +walked round the first turret, they come to this one, and +touching the mouth or brim of the well, they say these words: "Be +it to the honour of God, and may God pardon my sins." Then those +who draw water pour three buckets on the heads of every one that +stands around the well, washing or wetting them all over, even +should their garments be of silk; after which the deluded fools +fondly imagine that their sins are forgiven them. It is pretended +that the turret first spoken of was the first house that was +builded by Abraham; wherefore, while yet all over wet by the +drenching at the well, they go to the mountain already mentioned, +where the sacrifice is made to Abraham; and after remaining there +for two days, they make their sacrifice to the patriarch at the +foot of the mountain.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 45: This description is altogether +unintelligible.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When they intend to sacrifice, the pilgrims who are able to +afford it, kill some three, some four, or more sheep, even to +ten, so that in one sacrifice there are sometimes slain above +3000 sheep; and as they are all slaughtered at sun-rise, the +shambles then flow with blood. Shortly afterwards all the +carcasses are distributed for God's sake among the poor, of whom +I saw there at least to the number of 20,000. These poor people +dig many long ditches in the fields round Mecca, where they make +fires of camels' dung, at which they roast or seethe the +sacrificial flesh which has been distributed to them by the +richer pilgrims. In my opinion, these poor people flock to Mecca +more to satisfy their hunger, than from motives of devotion. +Great quantities of cucumbers are brought here for sale from +Arabia Felix, which are bought by those who have money; and as +the parings are thrown out from their tents, the half-famished +multitude gather these parings from among the mire or sand to +satisfy their hunger, and are so greedy of that vile food, that +they fight who shall gather most.</p> + +<p>On the day after the sacrifice to Abraham, the <i>cadi</i>, +who is to these people as the preachers of the word of God among +us, ascends to the top of a high mountain, whence he preaches to +the people who stand below. He harangued for the space of on +hour, principally inculcating that they should bewail their sins +with tears and sighs and lamentations, beating their breasts. At +one time he exclaimed with a loud voice, "O! Abraham the beloved +of God, O! Isaac the chosen of God and his friend, pray to God +for the people of the prophet." As these words were spoken, we +suddenly heard loud cries and lamentations, and a rumour was +spread that an army of 20,000 Arabians was approaching, on which +we all fled into the city, even those who were appointed to guard +the pilgrims being the first to make their escape. Mid-way +between the mountain of Abraham and the city of Mecca, there is a +mean wall, about four cubits broad, where the passengers had +strewed the whole way with stones, owing to the following +traditionary story: When Abraham was commanded to sacrifice his +son Isaac, he directed his son to follow him to the place where +he was to execute the divine command; and as Isaac was following +after his father, a devil met him in the way near this wall, in +the semblance of a fair and friendly person, and asked him +whither he went. Isaac answered that he was going to his father, +who waited for him. To this the arch enemy replied, that he had +better not go, as his father meant to sacrifice him. But Isaac +despising the warnings of the devil, continued his way, that his +father might execute the commandments of God respecting him. On +this the devil departed from him, but met him again as he went +forward, under the semblance of another friendly person, and +advised him as before not to go to his father. On this Isaac +threw a stone at the devil, and wounded him in the forehead; in +remembrance of which traditionary story it is that the people, on +passing this way, are accustomed to throw stones at the wall +before going to the city. As we went this way, the air was in a +manner darkened with prodigious multitudes of stock doves, all, +as they pretend, derived from the dove that spoke in the ear of +Mahomet, in likeness of the Holy Ghost. These doves are seen in +vast numbers in all parts about Mecca, as in the houses, +villages, inns, and granaries of corn and rice, and are so tame +that they can hardly be driven away. Indeed it is reckoned a +capital crime to kill or even take them, and there are certain +funds assigned for feeding them at the temple.</p> + +<p>Beyond the temple there are certain parks or inclosures, in +which there are two <i>unicorns</i> to be seen, called by the +Greeks <i>Monocerotae</i>, which are shewn to the people as +miracles of nature, and not without good reason, on account of +their scarcity and strange appearance. One of these, though much +higher than the other, is not unlike a colt of thirty months old, +and has a horn in its forehead, growing straight forwards and the +length of three cubits. The other is much younger, resembling a +colt of one year old, and its horn is only four hand breadths +long. These singular animals are of a weasel chesnut colour, +having a head like that of a hart, but the neck is not near so +long, with a thin mane, hanging all to one side. The legs are +thin and slender, like those of a fawn or hind, and the hoofs are +cleft much like those of a goat, the outer parts of the hind feet +being very full of hair. These animals seemed wild and fierce yet +exceedingly comely. They were sent out of Ethiopia by a king of +that country, as a rare and precious gift to the sultan of +Mecca[46].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 46: The unicorn is an unknown, or rather a +fabulous animal, and the most charitable interpretation that can +be made of the description in the text is, that Verthema was +mistaken, or that one of the horns of some species of antelope +had either been removed, or was wanting by a lusus naturae. The +only real <i>Monoceros</i>, or one horned animal, known to +naturalists, is the rhinoceros monoceros, or one-horned +rhinoceros, which bears its horn on the nose, a little way above +the muzzle, not on the forehead.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>It may seem proper to mention here certain things which +happened to me at Mecca, in which may be seen the sharpness of +wit in case of urgent necessity, which according to the proverb, +has no law; for I was driven to the extent of my wits how I might +contrive to escape privately from Mecca. One day, while in the +market purchasing some things by the direction of our captain, a +certain Mameluke knew me to be a Christian, and said to me in his +own language <i>inte mename</i>, which is to say, "Whence are +you?" To this I answered that I was a Mahometan, but he insisted +that I spoke falsely, on which I swore by the head of Mahomet +that I really was. Then he desired me to go home along with him, +which I willingly did; and when there he began to speak to me in +the Italian language, affirming that he was quite certain I was +not a Mahometan. He told me that he had been some time in Genoa +and Venice, and mentioned many circumstances which convinced me +that he spoke truth. On this I freely confessed myself A Roman, +but declared that I had become a Mahometan at Babylon in Egypt, +and had been there enrolled among the Mamelukes. He seemed much +pleased as this, and treated me honourably. Being very desirous +of proceeding farther in my travels, I asked him if this city of +Mecca was as famous as was reported in the world, and where the +vast abundance of pearls, precious stones, spices, and other rich +merchandise was to be seen, which was generally believed to be in +that city, wishing to know the reason why these things were not +now brought there as in former times; but to avoid all suspicion, +I durst not make any mention of the dominion acquired by the king +of Portugal over the Indian ocean and the gulfs of Persia and +Mecca. Then did he shew the cause why this mart of Mecca was not +so much frequented as it used to be, assigning the whole blame to +the King of Portugal. Thereupon I purposely detracted from the +fame of that king, lest the Mahometan might suspect me of +rejoicing that the Christians resorted to India for trade. +Finding me a professed enemy to the Christians, he conceived a +great esteem for me, and gave me a great deal of information. +Then said I to him in the language of Mahomet <i>Menaba +menalhabi</i>, or "I pray you to aid me." He asked me in what +circumstance I wished his assistance; upon which I told him that +I wished secretly to depart from Mecca, assuring him under the +most sacred oaths that I meant to visit those kings who were the +greatest enemies to the Christians, and that I possessed the +knowledge of certain estimable secrets, which if known to those +kings would certainly occasion them to send for me from Mecca. He +requested to know what these secrets were, on which I informed +him that I was thoroughly versant in the construction of all +manner of guns and artillery. He then praised Mahomet for having +directed me to these parts, as I might do infinite service to the +true believers; and he agreed to allow me to remain secretly in +his house along with his wife.</p> + +<p>Having thus cemented a friendship with the Mahometan, he +requested of me to obtain permission from the captain of our +caravan that he might lead fifteen camels from Mecca loaded with +spices under his name, by which means he might evade the duties, +as thirty gold seraphines are usually paid to the sultan of Mecca +for the custom of such a number of camels. I gave him great hopes +that his request might be complied with, even if he asked for an +hundred camels, as I alleged he was entitled to the privilege as +being a Mameluke. Then finding him in excellent good humour, I +again urged my desire of being concealed in his house; and having +entirely gained his confidence, he gave me many instructions for +the prosecution of my intended journey, and counselled me to +repair to the court of the king of <i>Decham</i>, or Deccan, a +realm in the greater India; of which I shall speak hereafter. +Wherefore, on the day before the caravan of Damascus was to +depart from Mecca, he concealed me in the most secret part of his +house; and next morning early the trumpeter of our caravan of +Syria gave warning to all the Mamelukes to prepare themselves and +their horses for the immediate prosecution of the journey, on +pain of death to all who should neglect the order. Upon hearing +this proclamation and penalty I was greatly troubled in mind; yet +committing myself by earnest prayer to the merciful protection of +God, I entreated the Mamelukes wife not to betray me. On the +Tuesday following, our caravan departed from Mecca and the +Mameluke went along with it, but I remained concealed in his +house. Before his departure, the friendly Mameluke gave orders to +his wife that she should procure me the means of going along with +the pilgrims who were to depart from <i>Zide</i> or Juddah the +port of Mecca for India. This port of Juddah is 40 miles from +Mecca. I cannot well express the kindness of the Mamelukes wife +to me during the time I lay hid in her house; and what +contributed mainly to my good entertainment was that a beautiful +young maid who dwelt in the house, being niece to the Mameluke, +was in love with me; but at that time I was so environed with +troubles and fear of danger, that the passion of love was almost +extinct in my bosom, yet I kept myself in her favour by kind +words and fair promises.</p> + +<p>On the Friday, three days after the departure of the caravan +of Syria, I departed about noon from Mecca along with the caravan +of India; and about midnight we came to an Arabian village, where +we rested all the rest of that night and the next day till noon. +From thence continuing our journey we arrived at Juddah on the +second night of our journey. The city of Juddah has no walls, but +the houses are well built, resembling those in the Italian +cities. At this place there is great abundance of all kinds of +merchandise, being in a manner the resort of all nations, except +that it is held unlawful for Jews or Christians to come there. As +soon as I entered Juddah I went to the mosque, where I saw a +prodigious number of poor people, not less than 25,000, who were +attending upon the different pilots, that they might go back to +their countries. Here I suffered much trouble and affliction, +being constrained to hide myself among these poor wretches and to +feign myself sick, that no one might be too inquisitive about who +I was, whence I came, or whether I was going. The city of Juddah +is under the dominion of the Soldan of Babylon or Cairo, the +Sultan of Mecca being his brother and his subject. The +inhabitants are all Mahometans; the soil around the town is very +unfruitful, as it wants water; yet this town, which stands on the +shore of the Red Sea, enjoys abundance of all necessaries which +are brought from Egypt, Arabia Felix, and various other places. +The heat is so excessive that the people are in a manner dried +up, and there is generally great sickness among the inhabitants. +This city contains about 500 houses. After sojourning here for +fifteen days, I at length agreed for a certain sum with a pilot +or ship-master, who engaged to convey me to Persia. At this time +there lay at anchor in the haven of Mecca near an hundred +brigantines and foists, with many barks and boats of various +kinds, some with oars and some with sails.</p> + +<p>Three days after I had agreed for my passage, we hoisted sail +and began our voyage down the Red Sea, called by the ancients +<i>Mare erythraeum</i>[47]. It is well known to learned men that +this sea is not red, as its name implies and as some have +imagined, for it has the same colour with other seas. We +continued our voyage till the going down of the sun, for this sea +cannot be navigated during the night, wherefore navigators only +sail in the day and always come to anchor every night. This is +owing <i>as they say</i>, to the many dangerous sands, rocks and +shelves, which require the ships way to be guided with great care +and diligent outlook from the <i>top castle</i>, that these +dangerous places may be seen and avoided: But after coming to the +island of <i>Chameran</i> or Kamaran, the navigation may be +continued with greater safety and freedom.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 47: The <i>Mare erythraeum</i> of the +ancients was of much more extended dimensions, comprising all the +sea of India from Arabia on the west to Guzerat and the Concan on +the east, with the coasts of Persia and Scindetic India on the +north; of which sea the Red Sea and the Persian gulfs were +considered branches or deep bays.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION V.</p> + +<p><i>Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia Felix, +or Yemen</i>.</p> + +<p>After six days sailing from Juddah we came to a city named +<i>Gezan</i>, which is well built and has a commodious port, in +which we found about 45 foists and brigantines belonging to +different countries. This city is close to the sea, and stands in +a fertile district resembling Italy, having plenty of +pomegranates, quinces, peaches, Assyrian apples, <i>pepons</i>? +melons, oranges, gourds, and various other fruits, also many of +the finest roses and other flowers that can be conceived, so that +it seemed an earthly paradise. It has also abundance of flesh, +with wheat and barley, and a grain like white millet or +<i>hirse</i>, which they call <i>dora</i>, of which they make a +very excellent bread. The prince of this town and all his +subjects are Mahometans, most of whom go nearly naked.</p> + +<p>After sailing five days from <i>Gezan</i>, having always the +coast on our left hand, we came in sight of some habitations +where 14 of us went on shore in hopes of procuring some +provisions from the inhabitants; but instead of giving us +victuals they threw stones at us from slings, so that we were +constrained to fight them in our own defence. There were about +100 of these inhospitable natives, who had no other weapons +except slings, and yet fought us for an hour; but 24 of them +being slain the rest fled, and we brought away from their houses +some poultry and calves, which we found very good. Soon +afterwards the natives returned, being reinforced by others to +the number of five or six hundred; but we departed with our prey +and reimbarked.</p> + +<p>Continuing our voyage, we arrived on the same day at an island +named <i>Kamaran</i>, which is ten miles in circuit. This island +has a town of two hundred houses, inhabited by Mahometans, and +has abundance of flesh and fresh water, and the fairest salt I +ever saw. The port of Kamaran is eight miles from the Arabian +coast, and is subject to the sultan of <i>Amanian</i> or +<i>Yaman</i>, a kingdom of Arabia Felix. Having remained here two +days, we again made sail for the mouth of the Red Sea, where we +arrived in other two days. From Kamaran to the mouth of the Red +Sea the navigation is safe both night and day; But from Juddah to +Kamsran the Red Sea can only be navigated by day, as already +stated, on account of shoals and rocks. On coming to the mouth of +the Red Sea, we seemed quite inclosed, as the strait is very +narrow, being only three miles across. On the right hand, or +Ethiopian coast, the shore of the continent is about ten paces in +height, and seems a rude uncultivated soil; and on the left hand, +or coast of Arabia, there rises a very high rocky hill. In the +middle of the strait is a small uninhabited island called +<i>Bebmendo</i>[48], and those who sail from the Red Sea towards +Zeyla, leave this island on the left hand. Such, on the contrary, +as go for Aden, must keep the north eastern passage, leaving this +island on the right.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 48: This word is an obvious corruption of +Bab-el-Mondub, the Arabic name of the straits, formerly explained +as signifying the gate or passage of lamentation. The island in +question is named <i>Prin</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We sailed for <i>Bab-al-Mondub</i> to <i>Aden</i>, in two days +and a half, always having the land of Arabia in sight on our +left. I do not remember to have seen any city better fortified +than Aden. It stands on a tolerably level plain, having walls on +two sides: all the rest being inclosed by mountains, on which +there are five fortresses. This city contains 6000 houses, and +only a stone's throw from the city there is a mountain having a +castle on its summit, the shipping being anchored at the foot of +the mountain. Aden is an excellent city, and the chief place in +all Arabia Felix, of which it is the principal mart, to which +merchants resort from India, Ethiopia, Persia, and the Red Sea; +but owing to the intolerable heat during the day, the whole +business of buying and selling takes place at night, beginning +two hours after sunset. As soon as our brigantines came to anchor +in the haven, the customers and searchers came off, demanding +what we were, whence we came, what commodities we had on board, +and how many men were in each vessel? After being satisfied on +these heads they took away our mast, sails, and other tackle, +that we might not depart without paying the customs.</p> + +<p>The day after our arrival at Aden, the Mahometans took me +prisoner, and put shackles on my legs in consequence of an +<i>idolater</i> calling after me that I was a Christian dog[49]. +Upon this the Mahometans laid hold of me, and carried me before +the lieutenant of the sultan, who assembled his council, to +consult with them if I should be put to death as a Christian spy. +The sultan happened to be absent from the city, and as the +lieutenant had not hitherto adjudged any one to death, he did not +think fit to give sentence against me till my case were reported +to the sultan. By this means I escaped the present danger, and +remained in prison 55 days, with an iron of eighteen pounds +weight fastened to my legs. On the second day of my confinement, +many Mahometans went in great rage to the lieutenant to demand +that I should be put to death as a Portuguese spy. Only a few +days before, these men had difficultly escaped from the hands of +the Portuguese by swimming, with the loss of their foists and +barks, and therefore greatly desired to be revenged of the +Christians, outrageously affirming that I was a Portuguese and a +spy. But God assisted me, for the master of the prison made fast +its gates, that these outrageous men might not offer me violence. +At the end of fifty-five days, the sultan sent for me into his +presence; so I was placed on the back of a camel with my +shackles, and at the end of eight days journey I was brought to +the city of <i>Rhada</i>, where the sultan then resided, and +where he had assembled an army of 30,000 men to make war upon the +sultan of <i>Sanaa</i>, a fair and populous city about three days +journey from <i>Rhada</i>, situated partly on the slope of a hill +and partly in a plain. When I was brought before the sultan, he +asked me what I was: on which I answered that I was a Roman, and +had professed myself a Mahometan and Mameluke at Babylon in +Egypt, or Cairo. That from motives of religion, and in discharge +of a vow, I had made the pilgrimage to <i>Medinathalhabi</i>, to +see the body of the <i>Nabi</i> or holy prophet, which was said +to be buried there; and that having heard in all the countries +and cities through which I passed, of the greatness, wisdom, and +virtue of the sultan of Rhada, I had continued my travels to his +dominions from an anxious desire to see his face, and I now gave +thanks to God and his prophet that I had attained my wish, +trusting that his wisdom and justice would see that I was no +Christian spy, but a true Mahometan, and his devoted slave. The +sultan then commanded me to say <i>Leila illala Mahumet +resullah</i>, which words I could never well pronounce, either +that it so pleased God, or because I durst not, from some fear or +scruple of conscience. Wherefore, seeing me silent, the sultan +committed me again to prison, commanding that I should be +carefully watched by sixteen men of the city, every day four in +their turns. After this, for the space of three months, I never +enjoyed the sight of the heavens, being every day allowed a loaf +of millet bread, so very small that seven of them would hardly +have satisfied my hunger for one day, yet I would have thought +myself happy if I could have had my fill of water.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 49: According to the monk Picade, +Christians are found in all regions except Arabia and Egypt, +where they are most hated.--<i>Eden</i>.]</blockquote> + +<p>Three days after I was committed to prison, the sultan marched +with his army to besiege the city of <i>Sanaa</i>, having, as I +said before, 30,000 footmen, besides 3000 horsemen, born of +Christian parents, who were black like the Ethiopians, and had +been brought while young from the kingdom of <i>Prester John</i>, +called in Latin <i>Presbyter Johannes</i>, or rather <i>Preciosus +Johannes</i>. These Christian Ethiopians are also called +Abyssinians, and are brought up in the discipline of war like the +Mamelukes and Janisaries of the Turks, and are held in high +estimation by this sultan for the guard of his own person. They +have high pay, and are in number four-score thousand[50]. Their +only dress is a <i>sindon</i> or cloak, out of which they put +forth one arm. In war they use round targets of buffaloe hide, +strengthened with some light bars of iron, having a wooden +handle, and short broad-swords. At other times they use vestures +of linen of divers colours, also of <i>gossampine</i> or +<i>xylon</i>, otherwise named <i>bomasine</i>[51]. In war every +man carries a sling, whence he casts stones, after having whirled +them frequently round his head. When they come to forty or fifty +years of age, they wreath their hair into the form of horns like +those of goats. When the army proceeds to the wars, it is +followed by 5000 camels, all laden with ropes of +bombasine[52].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 50: This is a ridiculous exaggeration, or +blunder in transcription, and may more readily be limited to four +thousand.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 51: These terms unquestionably refer to +cotton cloth. Perhaps we ought to read gossamopine <i>of</i> +Xylon, meaning cotton cloth from Ceylon.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 52: The use of this enormous quantity of +cotton ropes is unintelligible. Perhaps the author only meant to +express that the packs or bales on the camels were secured by +such ropes.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Hard by the prison to which I was committed, there was a long +court or entry in the manner of a cloister, where sometimes I and +other prisoners were permitted to walk, and which was overlooked +by a part of the sultan's palace. It happened that one of the +sultan's wives remained in the palace, having twelve young +maidens to wait upon her, who were all very comely, though +inclining to black. By their favour I was much aided, after the +following manner: There were two other men confined alone with me +in the same prison, and it was agreed among us that one of us +should counterfeit madness, by which we might derive some +advantage. Accordingly it fell to my lot to assume the appearance +of madness, which made greatly for my purpose, as they consider +mad men to be holy, and they therefore allowed me to go much more +at large than before, until such time as the hermits might +determine whether I were <i>holy mad</i>, or raging mad, as shall +be shewn hereafter. But the first three days of my assumed +madness wearied me so much, that I was never so tired with +labour, or grieved with pain; for the boys and vile people used +to run after me, sometimes to the number of forty or fifty, +calling me a mad man, and throwing stones at me, which usage I +sometimes repaid in their own coin. To give the better colour to +my madness, I always carried some stones in the lap of my shirt, +as I had no other clothing whatever. The queen hearing of my +madness, used oftentimes to look from her windows to see me, more +instigated by a secret love for my person than the pleasure she +derived from my mad pranks, as afterwards appeared. One time, +when some of the natives played the knave with me in view of the +queen, whose secret favour towards me I began to perceive, I +threw off my shirt, and went to a place near the windows, where +the queen might see me all naked, which I perceived gave her +great pleasure, as she always contrived some device to prevent me +going out of her sight, and would sometimes spend almost the +whole day in looking at me. In the mean time she often sent me +secretly abundance of good meat by her maids; and when she saw +the boys or others doing me harm or vexing me, she called to me +to kill them, reviling them also as dogs and beasts.</p> + +<p>There was a great fat sheep that was fed in the court of the +palace, of that kind whereof the tail only will sometimes weigh +eleven or twelve pounds. Under colour of my madness, I one day +laid hold of this sheep, repeating <i>Leila illala Mahumet +resullah</i>, the words which the Sultan desired me to repeat in +his presence, by way of proof whether I was a Mahometan or +professed Mameluke. As the sheep gave no answer, I asked him +whether he were Mahometan, Jew, or Christian. And willing to make +him a Mahometan, I repeated the formula as before, which +signifies, "There is but one God, and Mahomet is his prophet," +being the words the Mahometans rehearse as their profession of +faith. As the sheep answered never a word to all I could say, I +at length broke his leg with staff. The queen took much delight +in these my mad tricks, and commanded the carcass of this sheep +to be given me, and I never eat meat with more relish or better +appetite. Three days afterwards I killed an ass that used to +bring water to the palace, because he would not say these words +and be a Mahometan. One day I handled a Jew so very roughly, that +I had near killed him. On another occasion I threw many stones at +a person who called me a Christian clog, but he threw them back +at me with such vengeance, that he hurt me sore, on which I +returned to my prison, of which I barricadoed the door with +stones, and lay there for two days, in great pain, without meat +or drink, so that the queen and others thought me dead, but the +door was opened by command of the queen. Those Arabian dogs used +to deride me, giving me stones in place of bread, and pieces of +white marble, pretending that they were lumps of sugar, and +others gave me bunches of grapes all full of sand. That they +might not think I counterfeited madness, I used to eat the grapes +sand and all.</p> + +<p>When it was rumoured abroad that I had lived two days and +nights without meat or drink, some began to believe that I was a +holy madman, while others supposed me to be stark mad; wherefore +they consulted to send for certain men who dwell in the mountain, +who lead a contemplative life, and are esteemed holy as we do +hermits. When they came to give their judgment concerning me, and +were debating among themselves for upwards of an hour on my case, +I pissed in my hands, and threw the water in their faces, on +which they agreed I was no saint, but a mere madman. The queen +saw all this from her window, and laughed heartily at it among +her maids, saying, "By the head of Mahomet this is a good man." +Next morning I happened to find the man asleep who had so sore +hurt me with stones, and taking him by the hair of his head with +both hands, I so punched him in the stomach, and on the face with +my knees, that I left him all bloody and half dead. The queen +happening to see me, she called out, "Kill the beast, Kill the +dog." Upon which he ran away and came no more nigh me.</p> + +<p>When the president of the city heard that the queen took so +much delight in my mad frolics, he gave orders that I might go at +liberty about the palace, only wearing my shackles, and that I +should be immured every night in another prison in the lower part +of the palace. After I had remained in this manner for twenty +days, the queen took it into her head to carry me along with her +a hunting; but on my return, I feigned myself sick from fatigue, +and continued in my cell for eight days, the queen sending every +day to inquire how I was. After this I took an opportunity to +tell the queen that I had vowed to God and Mahomet to visit a +certain holy person at Aden, and begged her permission to perform +my vow. She consented to this, and immediately gave orders that a +camel and 25 gold seraphins should be given me. Accordingly I +immediately set off on my journey, and came to Aden at the end of +eight days, when I visited the man who was reputed as a saint, +merely because he had always lived in great poverty, and without +the company of women. There are many such in those parts, but +doubtless they lose their labour, not being in the faith of +Christ. Having thus performed my vow, I pretended to have +recovered my health by miracle performed by this holy person, of +which I sent notice to the queen, desiring permission to visit +certain other holy persons in that country who had great +reputation. I contrived these excuses because the fleet for India +was not to depart from Aden for the space of a month. I took the +opportunity to agree secretly with the captain of a ship to carry +me to India, making him many fair promises of reward. He told me +that he did not mean to go to India till after he had gone first +to Persia, and to this arrangement I agreed.</p> + +<p>To fill up the time, I mounted my camel and went a journey of +25 miles, to a certain populous city named <i>Lagi</i>, seated in +a great plain, in which are plenty of olives and corn, with many +cattle, but no vines, and very little wood. The inhabitants are a +gross and barbarous people of the vagabond Arabs, and very poor. +Going a days journey from thence, I came to another city named +<i>Aiaz</i>, which is built on two hills, having a large plain +between them, in which is a noted fountain, where various nations +resort as to a famous mart. The inhabitants are Mahometans, yet +greatly differ in opinion respecting their religion. All those +who inhabit the northern mount, maintain the faith of Mahomet and +his successors, of whom I have formerly spoken; but those of the +south mountain affirm that faith ought only to be given to +Mahomet and Ali, declaring the others to have been false +prophets. The country about <i>Aiaz</i> produces goodly fruits of +various kinds, among which are vines, together with silk and +cotton; and the city has great trade in spices and other +commodities. On the top of both of the hills there are strong +fortresses, and two days journey from thence is the city of +<i>Dante</i>, on the top of a very high mountain, well fortified +both by art and nature.</p> + +<p>Departing from <i>Dante</i>, I came in two days journey to the +city of <i>Almacharam</i>, on the top of a very high mountain of +very difficult ascent, by a way so narrow that only two men are +able to pass each other. On the top of this mountain is a plain +of wonderful size, and very fertile, which produces abundance of +every thing necessary to the use of man. It has also plenty of +water, insomuch that at one fountain only there is sufficient +water to supply a hundred thousand men. The Sultan is said to +have been born in this city, and to keep his treasure here, which +is so large as to be a sufficient load for an hundred camels all +in gold. Here also always resides one of his wives. The air of +this place is remarkably temperate and healthy, and the +inhabitants are inclining to white. Two days journey from +<i>Almacharam</i>, is the city of <i>Reame</i>, containing 2000 +houses. The inhabitants are black, and are much addicted to +commerce. The country around is fertile in all things, except +wood. On one side of this city is a mountain, on which is a +strong fortress. At this place I saw a kind of sheep without +horns, whose tails weigh forty or fifty pounds. The grapes of +this district have no stones or grains, and are remarkably sweet +and delicate, as are all the other fruits, which are in great +abundance and variety. This place is very temperate and +healthful, as may be conceived by the long life of its +inhabitants, for I have conversed with many of them that had +passed the age of an hundred and twenty-five years, and were +still vigorous and fresh-coloured. They go almost naked, wearing +only shirts, or other thin and loose raiment like mantles, having +one arm bare. Almost all the Arabs wreath their hair in the shape +of horns, which they think gives them a comely appearance.</p> + +<p>Departing from thence, I came in three days journey to the +city of <i>Sanaa</i> or <i>Zenan,</i> upon the top of a very high +mountain, and very strong both by art and nature. The Sultan had +besieged this place for three months with a great army, but was +unable to prevail against it by force, yet it was afterwards +yielded on composition. The walls of this city are eighteen +cubits high and twenty in thickness, insomuch that eight camels +may march abreast upon them. The region in which it stands is +very fertile, and resembles Italy, having abundance of water. The +city contains four thousand houses, all well built, and in no +respect inferior to those in Italy, but the city is so large in +circuit, that fields, gardens, and meadows are contained within +the walls. This city was governed by a Sultan, who had twelve +sons, one of whom named Mahomet, was four cubits high, and very +strong, of a complexion resembling ashes, and from some natural +madness or grossly tyrannical disposition he delighted in human +flesh, so that he used to kill men secretly to feed upon +them.</p> + +<p>Three days journey from thence I came to a city upon a +mountain, named <i>Taessa,</i> well built, and abounding in all +things necessary to man, and particularly celebrated for roses, +of which the inhabitants make rose water. This is an ancient +city, having many good houses, and still contains several +monuments of antiquity. Its temple or chief mosque is built much +like the church of Sancta Maria Rotunda at Rome. The inhabitants +are of an ash-colour, inclining to black, and dress much like +those already mentioned. Many merchants resort thither for trade. +Three days journey from thence I came to another city named +<i>Zioith</i> or <i>Zabid</i>, half a days journey from the Red +Sea. This is a well built city, abounding in many good things, +particularly in excellent white sugar and various kinds of +delicious fruits. It is situated in a very large plain between +two mountains, and has no walls, but is one of the principal +marts for all sorts of spices, and various other merchandise. One +days journey from thence I came to <i>Damar</i>, which is +situated in a fruitful soil, and carries on considerable trade. +All these cities are subject to a Sultan of Arabia-Felix, who is +called <i>Sechamir</i>, or the holy prince; <i>Secha</i> +signifying holy, and <i>Amir</i> prince, in the Arabian language. +He is so named, because he abhors to shed men's blood. While I +was there in prison, he nourished sixteen thousand poor, +including captives in prison, who had been condemned to death, +and he had as many black slaves in his palace.</p> + +<p>Departing from Damar I returned in three days journey to Aden, +passing in the mid way by an exceedingly large and high mountain, +on which there are many wild beasts, and in particular the whole +mountain is as it were covered with monkeys. There are also many +lions, so that it is by no means safe to travel that way unless +in large companies of at least a hundred men. I passed this way +along with a numerous company, yet we were in much danger from +the lions and other wild beasts which followed us, insomuch that +we were forced to fight them with darts, slings, and arrows, +using also the aid of dogs, and after all we escaped with some +difficulty. On arriving at Aden I feigned myself sick, lurking in +the mosque all day, and going only out under night to speak with +the pilot of the ship formerly mentioned, from whom I obtained a +bark in which I secretly left Aden.</p> + +<p>We at length began our voyage for Persia, to which we were to +go in the first place, our bark being laden with <i>rubricke</i>, +a certain red earth used for dying cloth, with which fifteen or +twenty vessels are yearly freighted from Arabia Felix. After +having sailed six days on our voyage, a sudden tempest of +contrary wind drove us back again and forced us to the coast of +Ethiopia, where we took shelter in the port of <i>Zeyla</i>. We +remained here five days to see the city, and to wait till the +tempest was over and the sea become quiet. The city of Zeyla is a +famous mart for many commodities, and has marvellous abundance of +gold and ivory, and a prodigious number of black slaves, which +are procured by the Mahometan or Moorish inhabitants, by means of +war, from Ethiopia in the country of Prester John, the Christian +king of the Jacobins or Abyssinians. These slaves are carried +hence into Persia, Arabia Felix, Cairo, and Mecca. In this city +justice and good laws are observed. The soil produces wheat and +other convenient things, as oil which is not procured from olives +but from something else that I do not know. It has likewise +plenty of honey and wax, and abundance of animals for food, among +which are sheep having tails of sixteen pounds weight, very fat +and good; their head and neck black, and all the rest of their +bodies white. There are also sheep all over white, whose tails +are a cubit long, and hang down like a large cluster of grapes, +with great flaps of skin hanging from their throats. The bulls +and cows likewise have dewlaps hanging down almost to the ground. +There are also certain kine having horns like to those of harts, +which are very wild, and when taken are given to the sultan of +the city as a gift worthy of a prince. I also saw other kine of a +bright red colour, having only one horn in the midst of the +forehead, about a span long, bending backwards, like the horn of +the unicorn. The walls of this city are greatly decayed, and the +haven bad and unsafe, yet it is resorted to by vast numbers of +merchants. The sultan of Zeyla is a Mahometan, and has a numerous +army both of horse and foot. The people, who are much addicted to +war, are of a dark ash-colour inclining to black, and wear loose +vestments like those spoken of in Arabia. After the weather had +become calm, we again put to sea, and soon afterwards arrived at +an island on the coast of Ethiopia named <i>Barbora</i>, which is +under the rule of a Mahometan prince. It is a small island, but +fertile and well peopled, its principal riches consisting in +herds of cattle, so that flesh is to be had in great plenty. We +remained here only one day, and sailing thence went to +Persia.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI.</p> + +<p><i>Observations of the Author relative to some parts of +Persia.</i></p> + +<p>When we had sailed twelve days we came to a city named +<i>Divobanderrumi</i>[53], which name signifies the holy port of +the <i>Rumes</i> or Turks. This place is only a little way from +the Continent, and when the tides rise high it is an island +environed on every side with water, but at ebb tides the passage +between it and the land is dry. This is a great mart of commerce, +and is governed by a person named <i>Menacheas</i>, being subject +to the sultan of Cambaia. It is well fortified with good walls, +and defended by a numerous artillery. The barks and brigantines +used at this place are smaller than ours of Italy. Departing +thence we came in three days to <i>Zoar</i>[54], which also is a +well frequented mart in a fertile country inhabited by +Mahometans. Near this place are two other good cities and ports +named <i>Gieulfar</i> and <i>Meschet</i> or <i>Maskat</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 53: From the context, this place appears to +have been on that part of the oceanic coast of Arabia called the +kingdom of Maskat, towards Cape Ras-al-gat and the entrance to +the Persian gulf. The name seems compounded of these words +<i>Div</i> or <i>Diu</i>, an island, <i>Bander</i> a port, and +<i>Rumi</i> the term in the east for the Turks as successors of +the Romans. It is said in the text to have been subject to the +sultan of Cambaia, but was more probably tributary to the king or +sultan of Ormuz.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 54: In the text of Hakluyt this place is +called <i>Goa</i>, assuredly by mistake, as it immediately +afterwards appears to have been in the neighbourhood of Maskat, +and in the direct voyage between Aden and Ormus, by creeping +along the coast from port to port.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Proceeding on our voyage we came to the fair city of +<i>Ormuz</i> or <i>Armusium</i>, second to none in excellence of +situation, and abundance of pearls. It stands in an island twelve +miles from the Continent, being in itself very scarce of water +and corn, so that all things required for the sustenance of the +inhabitants are brought from other places. At the distance of +three days sail from thence those muscles are procured which +produce the fairest and largest pearls. There are certain people +who gain their living by fishing for these muscles in the +following manner: Going in small boats to that part of the sea +where these are found, they cast a large stone into the sea on +each side of the boat fastened to strong ropes, by which they fix +their boat steadily in one place like a ship at anchor. Then +another stone with a cord fastened to it is cast into the sea, +and a man having a sack hung upon his shoulder both before and +behind, and a stone hung to his feet, leaps into the water, and +immediately sinks to the bottom to the depth of 15 paces or more, +where he remains gathering the pearl muscles and putting them +into his sack. He then casts off the stone that is tied to his +feet and comes up by means of the rope. At <i>Ormuz</i> there are +sometimes seen almost three hundred ships and vessels of various +sorts at one time, which come from many different places and +countries. The sultan of the city is a Mahometan. There are not +less than four hundred merchants and factors continually residing +here for the sake of trade in silks, pearls, precious stones, +spices, and the like. The principal article of their sustenance +at this place is rice.</p> + +<p>Departing from Ormuz I went into Persia, and after ten days +journey I came to <i>Eri</i>[55] a city in <i>Chorazani</i> which +also we may name <i>Flaminia</i>. This region is fertile, and +abounds in all good things, particularly in silk, so that one +might purchase enough in one day to load 3000 camels. Owing to +the fertility of this country corn is always cheap. Rhubarb is in +such abundance that six of our pounds of twelve ounces each may +be bought for one gold crown. This city, in which dwells the king +of that region, contains about seven thousand houses, all +inhabited by Mahometans. In twenty days journey from thence, I +noticed that the inland parts of Persia are well inhabited and +have many good towns and villages. In this journey I came to a +great river called by the inhabitants <i>Eufra</i>, which I +verily believe to be the Euphrates, both from the resemblance of +names and from its great size. Continuing my journey along this +river by the left hand, I came in three days journey to another +city named <i>Schyra</i>[56], subject to a prince who is a +Persian Mahometan, and is independent of any other prince. Here +are found all sorts of precious stones, especially that called +<i>Eranon</i>, which defends men against witchcraft, madness, and +fearfulness proceeding from melancholy. It is the stone commonly +called <i>Turquoise</i>, which is brought in great abundance from +a city named <i>Balascam</i>, where also great plenty of +<i>Castoreum</i> is procured and various kinds of colours. The +reason why so very little true <i>Castoreum</i> is found among us +is because it is adulterated by the Persians before it comes to +our hands[57]. The way to prove true castoreum is by smelling, +and if genuine and unadulterated it makes the nose bleed, as I +saw proved on four persons in succession. When genuine and +unadulterated, <i>castoreum</i> will preserve its flavour for ten +years. The Persians are a courteous and gentle people, liberal +and generous towards each other, and kind to strangers, as I +found by experience. While here, I met with a Persian merchant to +whom I was known in the year before when at Mecca. This man was +born in the city of <i>Eri</i> in Chorozani, and as soon as he +saw me he knew me again, and asked by what fortune I had come +into that country. To this I answered, "that I had come thither +from a great desire to see the world." "Praised be God, said he, +that I have now found a companion of the same mind with myself." +He exhorted me not to depart from him, and that I should +accompany him in his journeys, as he meant to go through the +chief parts of the world.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 55: In the rambling journey of Verthema, we +are often as here unable to discover the meaning of his strangely +corrupted names. Chorazani or Chorassan is in the very north of +Persia, at a vast distance from Ormuz, and he pays no attention +to the particulars of his ten days journey which could not have +been less than 400 miles. We are almost tempted to suspect the +author of romancing.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 56: Supposing that the place in the text +may possibly mean <i>Shiras</i>, the author makes a wonderful +skip in three days from the Euphrates to at least 230 miles +distance--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 57: What is named <i>Castoreum</i> in the +text was probably musk, yet Russia castor might in those days +have come along with rhubarb through Persia.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>I accordingly remained with him for fifteen days in a city +named <i>Squilaz</i>, whence we went in the first place to a city +named <i>Saint Bragant</i>[58], which is larger than Babylon of +Egypt and is subject to a Mahometan prince, who is said to be +able to take the field when occasion requires with 60,000 +horsemen. This I say only from the information of others, as we +could not safely pass farther in that direction, by reason of the +great wars carried on by the Sophy against those Mahometans who +follow the sect of <i>Omar</i>, who are abhorred by the Persians +as heretics and misbelievers, while they are of the sect of Ali +which they consider as the most perfect and true religion. At +this place my Persian friend, as a proof of his unfeigned +friendship, offered to give me in marriage his niece named +<i>Samis</i>, which in their language signifies the Sun, which +name she well deserved for her singular beauty. As we could not +travel any farther by reason of the wars, we returned to the city +of Eri, where he entertained me most honourably in his house, and +showing me his niece desired that she might immediately become my +wife. Being otherwise minded, yet not willing that I should +appear to despise so friendly an offer, I thanked him for his +goodness, yet begged the match might be delayed to a more +convenient time. Departing soon afterwards from Eri, we came in +eight days journey to <i>Ormuz</i>, where we took shipping for +India.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 58: Of Squilaz and Saint Bragant it is +impossible to make any thing, even by +conjecture--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION VII.</p> + +<p><i>Observations of the Author on various parts of +India.</i></p> + +<p>We arrived in India at a certain port named <i>Cheo</i>[59], +past which flows the great river Indus, not far from the city of +<i>Cambay</i>. It is situated[60] three miles within the land, so +that brigantines and foists can have no access to it except when +the tide rises higher than ordinary, when it sometimes overflows +the land for the space of four miles. At this place the tides +increase differently from what they do with us, as they increase +with the wane of the moon, whereas with us while the moon waxes +towards full. This city is walled after our manner, and abounds +in all kinds of necessaries, especially wheat and all manner of +wholesome and pleasant fruits. It has also abundance of +<i>gosampine</i> or <i>bombassine</i> (cotton) and some kinds of +spices of which I do not know the names. Merchants bring here +such quantities of cotton and silk, that sometimes forty or fifty +vessels are loaded with these commodities for other countries. In +this region there is a mountain in which the <i>onyx</i> commonly +called <i>carneola</i> is found, and not far from thence another +mountain which produces <i>calecdony</i> and diamonds. While I +was there, the sultan of Cambay was named Mahomet, and had +reigned forty years after having expelled the king of Guzerat. +The natives are not Mahometans, neither are they idolaters, +wherefore I believe if they were only baptised they would not be +far from the way of salvation, for they observe the pure rule of +justice, doing unto others as they would be done by. They deem it +unlawful to deprive any living creature of its life, and never +eat flesh. Some of them go entirely naked, or only cover the +parts of shame, wearing fillets of a purple colour round their +heads. Their complexion is a dark yellow, commonly called a +<i>leonell</i> colour.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 59: This name is inexplicably corrupted; +and nothing more can be said of it than is contained in the text, +which indeed is very vague.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 60: Verthema appears at this place to make +an abrupt transition to the city of Cambay, taking no farther +notice of Cheo.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The sultan of Cambay maintains a force of 20,000 horse. Every +morning fifty men riding on elephants repair to his palace to +reverence and salute the king, which is done likewise by the +elephants kneeling down. As soon as the king wakes in the morning +there is a prodigious noise of drums, trumpets, and other warlike +instruments of music, as if in token of joy that the sultan still +lives. The same is done while he is at dinner, when likewise the +elephants are again brought forward to do him reverence. We shall +afterwards have occasion to notice the customs, docility, and +wisdom of these beasts. The sultan has his upper lip so large and +gross that he sometimes beareth it up with a fillet as women do +their hair. His beard is white and hangs down below his girdle. +He has been accustomed to the use of poison even from his +infancy, and he daily eats some to keep him in use; by which +strange custom, although he feels no personal hurt therefrom, yet +is he so saturated with poison that he is a certain poison to +others. Insomuch that when he is disposed to put any noble to +death, he causes the victim to be brought into his presence and +to stand before him while he chews certain fruits called +<i>Chofolos</i>[61] resembling nutmegs, chewing at the same time +the leaves of a certain herb named <i>Tambolos</i>, to which is +added the powder of oyster shells. After chewing these things for +some time, he spits upon the person whom he wishes to kill, and +he is sure to die within half an hour, so powerful is the venom +of his body[62]. He keeps about four thousand concubines, and +whoever of them chances to sleep with him is sure to die next +day. When he changes his shirt or any other article of his dress, +no one dare wear it, or is sure to die. My companion learnt from +the merchants of Cambay that this wonderful venomous nature of +the sultan had been occasioned by his having been bred up by his +father from a child in the constant use of poison, beginning by +little and little, and taking preservatives at the same time.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 61: It is evident from the text that the +<i>areka</i> nut is here meant, which is chewed along with +<i>betel</i> leaf, called tambolos in the text, and strewed with +<i>chunam</i> or lime made of oyster shells.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 62: This ridiculous story can only be +understood as an eastern metaphor, expressive of the tyrannous +disposition of the sultan.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Such is the wonderful fertility of this country that it +surpasses all description. The people, as already said, go almost +entirely naked, or content themselves with a single garment, and +are a brave and warlike nation, being at the same time much given +to commerce, so that their city is frequented by traders of all +nations. From this city, and another to be named afterwards, +innumerable kinds and quantities of merchandise are transported +to almost every region and nation of the world; especially to the +Turks, Syrians, Arabians, Indians, and to divers regions of +Africa, Ethiopia, and Arabia; and more especially vast abundance +of silk and cotton, so that by means of this prodigious trade the +sultan is astonishingly rich. The sultan of Cambay is almost +continually at war with the king of <i>Joga</i>, whose realm is +fifteen days journey from Cambay, and extends very far in all +directions. This king of <i>Joga</i>[63] and all his people are +idolaters. He maintains an army always on foot of 30.000 men, and +is continually in the field travelling through his dominions with +a prodigious train of followers at the charge of his subject, his +camp containing at the least 4000 tents and pavilions. In this +perpetual progress he is accompanied by his wife, children, +concubines, and slaves, and by every apparatus for hunting and +amusement. His dress consists of two goat-skins with the hair +side outwards, one of which covers his breast and the other his +back and shoulders. His complexion is of a brown weasel colour +inclining to black, as are most of the native Indians, being +scorched by the heat of the sun. They wear ear-rings of precious +stones, and adorn themselves with jewels of various kinds; and +the king and principal people paint their faces and other parts +of their bodies with certain spices and sweet gums or ointments. +They are addicted to many vain superstitions; some professing +never to lie on the ground, while others keep a continual +silence, having two or three persons to minister to their wants +by signs. These devotees have horns hanging from their necks, +which they blow all at once when they come to any city or town to +make the inhabitants afraid, after which they demand victuals and +whatever else they are in need of from the people. When this king +remains stationary at any place, the greater part of his army +keeps guard about his pavilion, while five or six hundred men +range about the country collecting what they are able to procure. +They never tarry above three days in one place, but are +continually wandering about like vagabond Egyptians, Arabs, or +Tartars. The region through which they roam is not fertile, being +mostly composed of steep and craggy mountains. The city is +without walls, and its houses are despicable huts or hovels. This +king is an enemy to the sultan of <i>Machamir</i>? and vexes his +country with incessant predatory incursions.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 63: What sovereign of India is meant by the +<i>king of Joga</i> we cannot ascertain, unless perhaps some +Hindoo rajah in the hilly country to the north-east of Gujerat. +From some parts of the account of this king and his subjects, we +are apt to conceive that the relation in the text is founded on +some vague account of a chief or leader of a band of Hindoo +devotees. A king or chief of the <i>Jogues</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Departing from Cambay, I came in twelve days journey to the +city of <i>Ceull</i>[64], the land of Guzerat being interposed +between these two cities. The king of this city is an idolater. +His subjects are of a dark yellow colour, or lion tawny, and are +much addicted to war, in which they use swords, bows and arrows, +darts, slings, and round targets. They have engines to beat down +walls and to make a great slaughter in an army. The city is only +three miles from the sea on the banks of a fine river, by which a +great deal of merchandise is imported. The soil is fertile and +produces many different kinds of fruits, and in the district +great quantities of cotton cloth are made. The people are +idolaters like those of Calicut, of whom mention will be made +hereafter, yet there are many Mahometans in the city. The king +has but a small military force, and the government is +administered with justice. Two days journey from thence is a city +named <i>Dabuly</i>[65] on a great river and in a fertile +country. It is walled like the towns of Italy, and contains a +vast number of Mahometan merchants. The king is an idolater, +having an army of 30,000 men. Departing from thence I came to the +island of <i>Goga</i>[66], not above a mile from the continent, +which pays yearly a tribute of 1000 pieces of gold to the king of +<i>Deccan</i>, about the same value with the seraphins of +Babylon. These coins are impressed on one side with the image of +the <i>devil</i>[67], and on the other side are some unknown +characters. On the sea coast at one side of this island there is +a town much like those of Italy, in which resides the governor, +who is captain over a company of soldiers named <i>Savain</i>, +consisting of 400 Mamelukes, he being likewise a Mameluke. +Whenever he can procure any white man he takes them into his +service and gives them good entertainment, and if fit for +military service, of which he makes trial of their strength by +wrestling, he gives them a monthly allowance of 20 gold +seraphins; but if not found fit for war he employs them in +handicrafts. With this small force of only 400 men, he gives much +disturbance to the king of Narsinga.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 64: There is a district on the west of +Gujerat or Guzerat named <i>Chuwal</i>, on the river Butlass or +Banass which runs into the gulf of Cutch, which may be here +meant.--.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 65: No name having the least affinity to +that in the text is to be found in any modern map of India near +the coast of Gujerat. It would almost appear that the author had +now gone down the coast of India, and that his Chuwal and Dabuly +are Chaul and Dabul on the coast of the Concan.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 66: Nothing can possibly be made of this +island of Goga. There is a town on the coast of Gujerat and +western side of the gulf of Cambay called Gogo, but it is no +island, and could not possibly be subject to the king of the +Deccan; and besides Verthema is obviously now going down the +western coast of India.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 67: Of a Swammy or Hindoo +idol.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From the island of <i>Goga</i> I went to the city of +<i>Dechan</i>[68], of which the king or sultan is a Mahometan, +and to whom the before mentioned captain of the Mamelukes at +<i>Goga</i> is tributary. The city is beautiful, and stands in a +fertile country which abounds in all things necessary for man. +The king of this country is reckoned a Mameluke, and has 35,000 +horse and foot in his service. His palace is a sumptuous edifice, +containing numerous and splendid apartments, insomuch, that one +has to pass through 44 several rooms in a continued suite before +getting to the presence-chamber of the sultan, who lives with +wonderful pomp and magnificence, even those who wait upon him +having their shoes or <i>starpins</i> ornamented with rubies and +diamonds, and rich ear-rings of pearls and other precious stones. +Six miles from the city is a mountain from which they dig +diamonds, which mountain is surrounded by a wall, and guarded by +a band of soldiers. The inhabitants of the city are mostly +Mahometans, who are generally clad in silk, or at least have +their shirts or lower garments of that fabric; they wear also +thin buskin and hose or breeches like the Greek mariners, or what +are called trowsers. Their women, like those of Damascus, have +their faces veiled. The king of Deccan is almost in continual war +with the king of Nursinga; most of his soldiers being white men +from distant countries hired for war, whereas the natives are of +a dark colour like the other inhabitants of India. This king is +very rich and liberal, and has a large navy of ships, but he is a +great enemy to the Christians. Having visited this country, I +went in five days from thence to <i>Bathacala</i> or +<i>Batecolak</i>, the inhabitants of which are idolaters, except +some Mahometan merchants who resort thither for trade. It abounds +in rice, sugar, wheat, <i>walnuts</i>[69], figs, and many kinds +of fruits and roots unknown to us, and has plenty of beeves, +kine, buffaloes, sheep, goats, and other beasts, but no horses, +asses, or mules. From thence, at the distance of a days journey I +came to <i>Centacola?</i> the prince of which has no great +riches; but the district has plenty of flesh, rice, and such +fruits as grow in India; and to this place many Mahometans resort +for trade. The king is an idolater, and is subject to him of +Batecolah. Two days journey from thence I came to <i>Onore</i>, +the king of which is an idolater, subject to the king of +Narsinga. The prince or king of Onore has eight armed foists or +barks, which make excursions by sea, and subsist by piracy, yet +is he in friendship with the Portuguese. The district produces +plenty of rice, and has many kinds of wild beasts, as wild boars, +harts, wolves, <i>lions</i>[70], and many kinds of birds, such as +peacocks and parrots, besides others very different from ours. It +has likewise many cattle of a bright yellow colour, and fine fat +sheep. It has also abundance of flowers of all kinds. The air is +so temperate and healthy, that the natives live much longer than +we do in Italy. Not far from this place is another city named +Mangalore, whence about sixty ships depart yearly with cargoes of +rice. The inhabitants are partly idolaters, and part +Mahometans.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 68: Dechan, Deccan, or Dacshin, is the name +of a territory or kingdom, and properly signifies southern India, +or simply the south, in reference to Hindostan proper, on the +north of the Nerbuddah: But Verthema almost always names the +capital from the kingdom.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 69: By walnuts, I suspect that coca-nuts +are meant, and rendered walnuts by some mistaken +translation.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 70: There are no lions in India, and tigers +are certainly here meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Departing from thence we went to the city of <i>Cananore</i>, +where the king of Portugal has a strong garrison, though the king +of the city is an idolater and no great friend to the Portuguese. +At this port many horses are imported from Persia, which pay a +high duty. Departing from thence into the inland we came to the +city of <i>Narsinga</i>[71], which is frequented by many +Mahometan merchants. The soil in that country bears no wheat, so +that the inhabitants have no bread, neither hath it vines or any +other fruits except oranges and gourds, but they have plenty of +rice and such walnuts as that country <i>produces</i>[72]. It has +likewise plenty of spices, as pepper, ginger, mirabolans, +cardamum, cassia, and others, also many kinds of fruits unlike +ours, and much sweeter. The region is almost inaccessible, <i>for +many dens and ditches made by force</i>[73]. The king has an army +of 50,000 <i>gentlemen whom they call heroes</i>[74]. In war they +use swords and round targets, also lances, darts, bows, and +slings, and are now beginning to use fire arms. These men go +almost entirely naked, except when engaged in war. They use no +horses, mules, asses, or camels; only employing elephants, which +yet do not fight in battle. Great quantities of merchandise are +consumed in this city, insomuch that two hundred ships resort +thither yearly from various countries[75].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 71: Bijanagur was the capital of the +kingdom known by the name of Narsinga; but from the neighbourhood +of Cananore, it is possible that Verthema here means +Narsingapoor, about 25 miles S.S.W. from +Seringapatam.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 72: The walnuts of this author must have +been cocoa-nuts, perhaps converted to walnuts by erroneous +translation.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 73: This singular passage probably means, +that the country is defended by a great number of forts and +garrisons, as indeed we know that the interior table land of +southern India is thickly planted with <i>droogs</i> or hill +forts, which must then have been impregnable.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 74: Probably meaning Nairs or Rajputs, who +are reckoned of a high or noble cast, next to the +Bramins--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 75: This is a most astonishing error, as +Narsingapoor is above 100 miles from the nearest +coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Departing from Narsinga, and travelling 15 days to the +<i>east</i>[76], we came to the city of <i>Bisinagar</i>, or +Bijanagur, which is subject to the king of Narsinga. This city +stands upon the side of a hill, and is very large, and well +fortified, being surrounded by a triple wall, eight miles in +circuit. The district in which it stands is wonderfully fertile, +and produces every thing requisite for the necessities, and even +the delicacies and luxuries of man. It is likewise a most +convenient country for hunting and hawking, having many large +plains, and fine woods, so that altogether it is a kind of +earthly paradise. The king and people are idolaters; and the king +has great power and riches, maintaining an army of 4000 horsemen, +although it may be noted that a good horse in this country costs +four or five hundred gold coins called pardaos, and sometimes +eight hundred. The reason of this high price is, that these +horses are brought from other countries, whence they can procure +no mares, as the exportation of these is strictly prohibited by +the princes of the countries whence the horses are procured. He +has likewise 400 elephants to serve in his wars, and many of +those swift running camels which we commonly call +<i>dromedaries</i>[77].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 76: Bijanagur is 175 miles directly +<i>north</i> from Narsingapoor.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 77: In modern language the term dromedary +is very improperly applied to the Bactrian, or two-hunched camel, +a slow beast of burden. The word dromedary is formed from the +Greek <i>celer</i>, and only belongs to a peculiar breed of +camels of amazing swiftness.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>At this place I had an excellent opportunity of learning the +docility and almost reasoning wisdom of the elephant, which +certainly is the most sagacious and most docile of all animals, +approaching even to human reason, and far exceeding all other +beasts in strength. When used for war, the Indians fix great +pack-saddles on their backs, resembling those used in Italy for +mules of burden, but vastly larger. These saddles are girt round +their bellies with two iron chains, and on each side is placed a +small house, cage, or turret of wood, each of which contains +three men. Between the two turrets an Indian sits on the back of +the animal, and speaks to him in the language of the country, +which the creature understands and obeys. Seven men, therefore, +are that placed on the back of each elephant, all armed with +coats of mail, and having lances, bows, darts, and slings, and +targets for defence. Also the trunk, snout, or proboscis of the +elephant is armed with a sword fastened to it, two cubits long, +very strong, and a handbreadth in width. When necessary to +advance, to retreat, to turn to either side, to strike, or to +forbear, the governor or conductor of the elephant sitting on his +back, causes him to do whatever he wills, by speaking in such +language and expressions as he is accustomed to, all of which the +beast understands and obeys, without the use of bridle or spur. +But when fire is thrown at them, they are wonderfully afraid and +run away, on which occasions it is impossible to stop them; on +which account the Indians have many curious devices of fire-works +to frighten the elephants, and make them run away. I saw an +instance of the extraordinary strength of these animals while at +Cananore, where some Mahometans endeavoured to draw a ship on the +land, stem foremost, upon three rollers, on which occasion three +elephant, commodiously applied, drew with great force, and +bending their heads down to the ground, brought the ship on the +land. Many have believed that elephants have no joints in their +legs, which therefore they could not bend; but this notion is +utterly false, as they have joints like other beasts, but lower +down on their legs. The female elephants are fiercer than the +males, and much stronger for carrying burdens. Sometimes they are +seized by a kind of fury or madness, on which occasions they run +about in a disorderly manner. One elephant exceeds the size of +three buffaloes, to which latter animals their hair has some +resemblance. Their eyes resemble those of swine. Their snout or +trunk is very long, and by means of it they convey food and drink +to their mouths, so that the trunk may be called the hand of the +elephant. The mouth is under the trunk, and is much like the +mouth of a sow. The trunk is hollow, and so flexible, that the +animal can use it to lay hold of sticks, and wield them with it +as we do with the hand. I once saw the trunk of a tree overthrown +by one elephant, which 24 men had in vain attempted. It has two +great teeth or tusks in the upper jaw. Their ears are very broad, +above two spans even on the smallest elephants. Their feet are +round and as broad as the wooden trenchers which are in ordinary +use, and each foot has five round hoofs like large oyster shells. +The tail is about four spans long, like that of a buffaloe, and +is very thin of hair. Elephants are of various sizes, some 18 +spans or 14 spans high, and some have been seen as high as 16 +spans; but the females are larger than the males of the same age. +Their gait is slow and wallowing, so that those who are not used +to ride upon them are apt to become sick, as if they were at sea; +but it is pleasant to ride a young elephant, as their pace is +soft and gentle like an ambling mule. On mounting them, they +stoop and bend their knee to assist the rider to get up; but +their keepers use no bridles or halters to guide them. When they +engender they retire into the most secret recesses of the woods, +from natural modesty, though some pretend that they copulate +backwards.</p> + +<p>The king of Narsinga exceeds in riches and dominion, all the +princes I have ever seen or heard of. In beauty and situation the +city resembles Milan, only that being on the slope of a hill it +is not so level. Other subject kingdoms lie round about it, even +as Ausonia and Venice surround Milan. The bramins or priests +informed me that the king receives daily of tribute from that +city only the sum of 12,000 <i>pardaos</i>. He and his subjects +are idolaters, worshipping the devil like those of Calicut. He +maintains an army of many thousand men, and is continually at war +with his neighbours. The richer people wear a slender dress, +somewhat like a petticoat, not very long, and bind their heads +with a fillet or broad bandage, after the fashion of the +Mahometans, but the common people go almost entirely naked, +covering only the parts of shame. The king wears a cape or short +cloak of cloth of gold on his shoulders, only two spans long; and +when he goes to war he wears a close vest of cotton, over which +is a cloak adorned with plates of gold, richly bordered with all +kinds of jewels and precious stones. The horse he rides on, +including the furniture or caparisons, is estimated to equal one +of our cities in value, being all over ornamented with jewels of +great price. When be goes a hunting, he is attended by other +three kings, whose office it is to bear him company wherever he +goes. When he rides out or goes a journey he is attended by 6000 +horsemen; and from all that we have said, and various other +circumstances respecting his power, riches, and magnificence, he +certainly is to be accounted one of the greatest sovereigns in +the world. Besides the pieces already mentioned, named +<i>pardaos</i>, which are of gold, he coins silver money called +<i>fano</i>, or <i>fanams</i>, which are worth sixteen of our +smallest copper money. Such is the excellent government of this +country, that travellers may go through the whole of it in +safety, if they can avoid the danger of <i>lions</i>[78]. This +king is in amity with the king of Portugal, and is a great friend +to the Christians, so that the Portuguese are received and +treated in his dominions in a friendly and honourable manner.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 78: Wherever lions are mentioned by this +traveller in India, tigers are to be +understood.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When I had tarried many days in this great city, I returned to +Cananore, whence, after three days stay I went to a city twelve +miles from thence, named <i>Trempata</i>[79], a sea-port, +inhabited by idolaters, but frequented by many Mahometan +merchants. The only riches of this place consists in Indian nuts, +or cocoa-nuts, and timber for ship-building. Passing from thence, +by the cities of <i>Pandara</i> and <i>Capagot</i>[80], I came to +the famous city of Calicut. To avoid prolixity, I pass over many +other kingdoms and peoples, such as <i>Chianul</i>? <i>Dabul</i>, +<i>Onouè</i>? <i>Bangalore</i>, <i>Cananore</i>, +<i>Cochin</i>, <i>Cacilon</i>? and <i>Calonue</i>, or +<i>Coulan</i>[81]. I have so done on purpose to enable me to +treat more at large of Calicut, being in a manner the metropolis +of all the Indian cities, as the king thereof exceeds all the +kings of the east in royal majesty, and is therefore called +<i>Samoory</i> or <i>Zamorin</i>, which in their language +signifies <i>God on earth</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 79: About that distance south from Cananore +is Dermapatam.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 80: No names in the least respect similar +to these are to be found in the indicated route between Cananore +and Calicut.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 81: Of the three places marked with points +of interrogation, the names are so disfigured in the orthography +as to be unintelligible; <i>Cianul</i> may possibly be Chaul, +<i>Onouhè</i> Onore, and <i>Cacilon</i> +Cranganore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> + +<p><i>Account of the famous City and Kingdom of Calicut.</i></p> + +<p>The city of Calicut is situated on the continent or main land +of India, close upon the sea, having no port; but about a mile to +the south there is a river which runs into the ocean by a narrow +mouth. This river is divided into many branches among the fields +in the plain country, for the purpose of being distributed by +means of trenches to water the grounds, and one of these branches +not exceeding three or four feet deep runs into the city. Calicut +is not walled, and contains about 6000 houses, which are not +built close adjoining each other, as in European cities, but a +certain space is left between each, either to prevent the +communication of fire, or owing to the ignorance of the builders. +It is a mile in length, and its houses are only mean low huts, +not exceeding the height of a man on horseback, being mostly +covered with boughs of trees, instead of tiles or other covering. +It is said that on digging only five or six spans into the ground +they come immediately to water, on which account they cannot dig +foundations of any depth. Warehouses or lodgings for merchants +may be bought for 15 or 20 pieces of gold; but the common run of +houses cost only two pieces of gold or even less.</p> + +<p>The king and people of Calicut are idolaters, and worshippers +of the devil, though they acknowledge one supreme God, the +Creator of heaven and earth, the first chief cause of all things. +But they allege that God could have no pleasure in his +government, if he were to take it upon himself, and hath +therefore given it in charge to the devil, who was sent as they +say from heaven, to rule over and judge the world, rendering good +or evil to men according to their deserts. The great God they +call <i>Tamerani</i>, and this devil or subordinate deity +<i>Deumo</i>. The king has a chapel in his palace, where this +Deumo is worshipped. This chapel has an open vault or arch on all +the four sides, about two paces in breadth, and it is about three +paces high. The entrance is by a wooden gate, ornamented with +carved work of monstrous forms or shapes of devils. In the midst +of the chapel is a royal seat or throne of copper, on which sits +the figure or image of the devil, likewise of copper. On the head +of this image is a crown like that worn by the pope, but having +the addition of four horns, besides which he is represented with +a great gaping mouth, having four monstrous teeth. The nose is +horridly deformed, with grim lowering eyes, a threatening look, +and crooked hands, or talons like flesh-hooks, and feet somewhat +like those of a cock; forming on the whole, a monster terrible to +look at. In every corner of the chapel there are other figures of +devils of shining copper, as if flames of fire devouring +miserable souls. These souls are about the size of half a finger, +some of them larger, and each figure puts one of these souls into +his mouth with the right hand, while the left is on the ground +lifting up another. Every morning the priests, who are called +Bramins, wash the idol with rose water, and perfume him with +sweet savours, after which they pray to him prostrate on the +earth. Once every week they sacrifice to the idol after this +form. They have a little altar or cupboard, three spans high, +five spans long and four broad, on which they strew all manner of +flowers and sweet-smelling powders; then bringing a great silver +chafing-dish full of warming coals, they kill a cock with a +silver knife, throwing the blood into the fire, together with +many sweet perfumes, and even thrust the bloody blade of the +knife often into the fire that none of the blood may be lost; +then the priest maketh many strange gestures with the knife, like +a fencer, giving or defending thrusts. In the mean time other +priests with burning censers go round about the altar perfuming +it with incense, and ringing a small silver bell all the time of +the sacrifice. The priest who sacrifices the cock has his arms +and legs garnished with silver plates and pendants, which make a +noise when he moves like hawks-bells, and he wears a kind of boss +on his breast inscribed with I know not what signs, being perhaps +the secret character of some hidden mystery. When the sacrifice +is finished, he fills both his hands with wheat, and goes +backwards, keeping his eyes fixed on the altar till he comes to a +certain tree whereon he casts the wheat; then returning to the +altar he removes all that is upon it.</p> + +<p>The king never sits down to eat till four of his priests have +offered his meat in this manner to the idol; lifting their hands +above their heads with many fantastical gesticulations and +murmuring voices, they present the meat to the idol, and after +many foolish ceremonies bring back the meat to the king. The meat +is offered in a wooden tray, after which it is laid on the broad +leaves of a certain tree. The meat of the king consists of rice +and divers other things, such as fruits; and be eats sitting on +the ground without cloth or carpet. During his repast, the +priests stand round him at four or five paces distance, carefully +observing all his orders; and when he has done eating, they carry +away all the remains of his food, which they give to certain +crows, which being used to be thus fed, come upon a signal, and +being esteemed holy, it is not lawful for any one to take or even +hurt them. The chief priests of these idolaters are the bramins, +who are with them as bishops are among us, and are considered as +the order of highest dignity. The second order among them are the +nairs, who come in place of our gentlemen, and go out to war with +swords and bucklers, lancet, bows, and other weapons. The third +order consists of mechanics and handicrafts of all kinds. In the +fourth are victuallers, or those that make provision of fish and +flesh. Next to them are those who gather pepper, cocoa nuts, +grapes and other fruits. The baser sort are those who sow and +gather rice, who are kept under such subjection by the bramins +and nairs that they dare not approach nearer to them than 50 +paces under pain of death and are therefore obliged to lurk in +bye places and marshes; and when they go anywhere abroad they +call out continually in a loud voice, that they may be hoard of +the bramins and nairs otherwise if any of these were to come near +they would certainly put these low people to death.</p> + +<p>The dress of even the king and queen differ in little or +nothing from the other idolaters, all going naked, barefooted, +and bareheaded, except a small piece of silk or cotton to cover +their nakedness; but the Mahometans wear single garments in a +more seemly manner, their women being dressed like the men except +that their hair is very long. The king and nobles eat no kind of +flesh, except having first got permission of the priests; but the +common people may eat any flesh they please except that of cows. +Those of the basest sort, named <i>Nirani</i> and <i>Poliars</i>, +are only permitted to eat fish dried in the sun.</p> + +<p>When the king or zamorin dies, his male children, if any, or +his brothers by the fathers side, or the sons of these brothers, +do not succeed in the kingdom: For, by ancient law or custom, the +succession belongs to the sons of the kings sisters; and if there +be none such, it goes to the nearest male relation through the +female blood. The reason of this strange law of succession is, +that when the king takes a wife, she is always in the first place +deflowered by the chief bramin, for which he is paid fifty-pieces +of gold. When the king goes abroad, either in war or a-hunting, +the queen is left in charge of the priests, who keep company with +her till his return; wherefore the king may well think that her +children may not be his; and for this reason the children of his +sisters by the same mother are considered as his nearest in +blood, and the right inheritors of the throne. When the king +dies, all his subjects express their mourning by cutting their +beards and shaving their heads; and during the celebration of his +funerals, those who live by fishing abstain from their employment +during eight days. Similar rules are observed upon the death of +any of the kings wives. Sometimes the king abstains from the +company of women for the space of a year, when likewise he +forbears to chew <i>betel</i> and <i>areka</i>, which are +reckoned provocatives.</p> + +<p>The gentlemen and merchants of Calicut, when they wish to show +great friendship to each other, sometimes exchange wives, but on +these occasions the children remain with their reputed fathers. +It is likewise customary among these idolaters, for one woman to +have seven husbands at the same time, each of whom has his +appointed night to sleep with her; and when she has a child, she +fathers it upon any of the husbands she pleases. The people of +this country, when at their meals, lie upon the ground, and eat +their meat from copper trays, using certain leaves instead of +spoons; their food consisting for the most part of rice and fish +seasoned with spices, and of the ordinary fruits of the country. +The lowest people eat in a filthy manner, putting their dirty +hands into the dish, and thrusting their food by handfuls into +their mouths. The punishment of murder is by impalement; but +those who wound or hurt any one have to pay a fine to the king. +When any one is in debt, and refuses to pay, the creditor goes to +the judges, of whom there are said to be a hundred, and having +made due proof of the debt, he receives a certain stick or branch +of a tree, with authority to arrest his debtor, to whom, when he +is able to find him, he uses these words: "I charge you by the +heads of the Bramins, and by the head of the king, that you stir +not from the spot on which you stand till you pay me what you +owe." The debtor has now no resource but to pay immediately, or +to lose his life: for, if he escape after this ceremony, he is +adjudged a rebel, and it is lawful for any man to kill him.</p> + +<p>When they mean to pray to their idols, they resort before +sunrise to some pool or rivet where they wash themselves, after +which they resort to the idol-house, taking especial care not to +touch any thing by the way, and say their prayers prostrate on +the ground, making strange gesticulations and contortions, so +marvellously distorting their faces, eyes, and mouths, that it is +horrible to behold. The nairs or gentlemen may not begin to eat, +till one of them has dressed and set the food in order, with +certain ceremonies, but the lower orders are not bound to such +rules. The women also have no other care than to dress and +beautify themselves, as they take much pains to wash and purify +their persons, and to perfume their bodies with many sweet +savours. Likewise when they go abroad, they are singularly loaded +with jewels and ornaments on their ears, arms, and legs.</p> + +<p>In Calicut there are certain teachers of warlike exercises, +who train up the youth in the use of the sword, target, and +lance, and of such other weapons as they employ in war; and when +the king takes the field he has an army of 100,000 infantry, but +there are no cavalry in that country. On this occasion the king +rides upon an elephant, and elephants are used in their wars. +Those who are next in authority to the king wear fillets round +their heads of crimson or scarlet silk. Their arms are crooked +swords, lances, bows and arrows, and targets. The royal ensign is +an umbrella borne aloft on a spear, so as to shade the king from +the heat of the sun, which ensign in their language is called +<i>somber</i>. When both armies approach within three +arrow-flights, the king sends his bramins to the enemy by way of +heralds, to challenge an hundred of them to combat against an +hundred of his nairs, during which set combat both sides prepare +themselves for battle. In the mean time the two select parties +proceed to combat, mid-way between the two armies, always +striking with the edge of their swords at the heads of their +antagonists, and never thrusting with the point, or striking at +the legs. Usually when five or six are slain of either side, the +Bramins interpose to stop the fight, and a retreat is sounded at +their instance. After which the Bramins speak to the adverse +kings, and generally succeed to make up matters without any +battle or farther slaughter.</p> + +<p>The king sometimes rides on an elephant, but at other times is +carried by his nairs or nobles, and when he goes out is always +followed by a numerous band of minstrels, making a prodigious +noise with drums, timbrels, tambourets, and other such +instruments. The wages of the nairs are four <i>carlines</i> +each, monthly, in time of peace, and six during war. When any of +them are slain, their bodies are burned with great pomp and many +superstitious ceremonies, and their ashes are preserved; but the +common people are buried in their houses, gardens, fields, or +woods, without any ceremony. When I was in Calicut it was crowded +with merchants from almost every part of the east, especially a +prodigious number of Mahometans. There were many from Malacca and +Bengal, from Tanaserim, Pegu, and Coromandel, from the islands of +Ceylon and Sumatra, from all the cities and countries of Western +India, and various Persians, Arabians, Syrians, Turks, and +Ethiopians. As the idolaters do not sail on the sea, the +Mahometans are exclusively employed in navigation, so that there +are not less than 15,000 Mahometans resident in Calicut, mostly +born in that place. Their ships are seldom below the burden of +four or five hundred tons, yet all open and without decks. They +do not put any tow or oakum into the seams of their ships, yet +join the planks so artificially, that they hold out water +admirably, the seams being pitched and held together with iron +nails, and the wood of which their ships are built is better than +ours. Their sails are made of cotton cloth, doubled in the under +parts, by which they gather much wind and swell out like bags, +having only one sail to each vessel. Their anchors are of marble, +eight spans long, having two on each side of the ship, which are +hung by means of double ropes. Their voyages are all made at +certain appointed times and seasons, as one time of the year +answers for one coast, and another season for other voyages, +which must all be regulated according to the changes of the +weather. In the months of May, June, and July, when with us in +Italy every thing is almost burnt up with heat and drought, they +have prodigious rains. The best of their ships are built in the +island of <i>Porcai</i>, not far from Calicut. They have one kind +of vessel or canoe, made all of one piece of wood like a trough, +very long, narrow, and sharp, which is propelled either by oars +or sails, and goes with amazing swiftness, which is much used by +pirates.</p> + +<p>The palace of the king of Calicut exceeds a mile in +circumference, and is well constructed of beams and posts +artificially joined, and curiously carved all over with the +figures of devils. It is all however very low, for the reason +before-mentioned, as they cannot dig deep for secure foundations. +It is impossible to express in words the number and riches of the +pearls and precious stones which the king wears about him, which +exceed all estimate in regard to their value. Although, when I +was in that place, the king lived rather in a state of grief, +both on account of the war in which he was engaged with the +Portuguese, and because he was afflicted by the venereal disease +which had got into his throat, yet his ears, hands, legs, and +feet, were richly garnished with all sorts of jewels and precious +stones, absolutely beyond description. His treasure is so vast, +that it cannot be contained in two immense cellars or warehouses, +consisting of precious stones, plates of gold, and other rich +ornaments, besides as much, gold coin as might load an hundred +mules, as was reported by the Bramins, to whom these things are +best known. This treasure is said to have been hoarded up by +twelve kings, his predecessors. In this treasury there is said to +be a coffer three spans long and two broad, entirely full of +precious stones of inestimable value.</p> + +<p>Pepper is gathered in the fields around the suburbs of +Calicut, and even in some places within the city. It grows on a +weak and feeble plant, somewhat like vines, which is unable to +support itself without props or stakes. It much resembles ivy, +and in like manner creeps up and embraces such trees as it grows +near. This tree, or bush rather, throws out numerous branches of +two or three spans long, having leaves like those of the Syrian +apple, but somewhat thicker. On every twig there hang six +clusters about the size of dates, and of the colour of unripe +grapes, but thicker together. These are gathered in October, +while still inclining to green, and are spread out on mats in the +sun to dry, when in three days they become black, just as brought +to us. The fruitfulness of these plants proceeds entirely from +the goodness of the soil in which they grow, as they do not +require pruning or lopping like vines with us. This region also +produces ginger, some roots weighing twelve ounces, though they +do not penetrate the ground above three or four spans. When the +roots are dug up, the uppermost joint is again set in the ground, +as seed for next year's crop. It and the mirabolans are found in +a red-coloured soil, and the stalk much resembles a young +pear-tree.</p> + +<p>Were I to describe all the strange fruits that are produced in +this country, it would require a large volume for that alone; as +they not only have many quite different from ours in form, taste, +and flavour, but even those kinds which are the same with ours, +differ essentially in many particulars. Natural philosophers may +consider how it should so happen that things of the same kind +become so essentially different, according to the changes of soil +and climate; by which some fruits and seeds, by transplantation +to better soil, become more perfect in their kind, as larger, +fairer, sweeter, and more fruitful; while others are improved by +a worse soil and colder region. This diversity may not only be +seen in plants and herbs, but also in beasts, and even in man. It +is strange to observe how very differently some trees bear their +fruits and seeds, some in one part of the tree and some in other +parts. At Calicut there is a fruit named <i>Jaceros</i>, which +grows on a tree about the size of our pear trees. The fruit is +about two spans and a half long, and as thick as the thigh of a +man, growing out of the body of the tree under the branches, some +in the middle of the tree and others lower down. The colour of +this fruit is green, and its form and appearance resembles a pine +apple, but with smaller grains or knobs. When ripe it is black, +and is gathered in December. It has the taste of a <i>pepon</i> +with a flavour of musk, and in eating seems to give various +pleasant tastes, sometimes resembling a peach, sometimes like a +pomegranate, and leaves a rich sweet in the month like new +honeycombs. Under the skin it has a pulp like that of a peach, +and within that are other fruits like soft chesnuts, which when +roasted eat much like them. This is certainly one of the finest +fruits I ever met with. There is another fruit called +<i>Apolanda</i>, which is worthy of being mentioned. The tree +grows to the height of a man, having not above four or five +leaves hanging from certain slips, each leaf being so large that +it is sufficient to cover a man entirely from rain or the heat of +the sun. In the middle of each leaf rises a stalk like that of a +bean, which produces flowers followed by fruit a span long, and +as thick as a mans arm. These fruits are gathered unripe, as they +become ripe in keeping. Every slip bears about two hundred fruits +in a cluster. They are of a yellow colour with a very thin skin, +and are most delicate eating, and very wholesome. There are three +kinds of this fruit, one of which is not so pleasant or so much +esteemed as the others. This tree bears fruit only once and then +dies; but there rise from the ground all about the root fifty or +sixty young slips which renew the life of the parent tree. The +gardeners transplant these to other places, and in one year they +produce fruit This fruit is to be had in great abundance, almost +the whole year, and are so cheap that twenty of them may be had +for a penny. This country produces innumerable flowers of great +beauty and most pleasant flavour, all the year round, and +especially roses, both red, white, and yellow.</p> + +<p>The cocoa is another tree most worthy of being known, as in +fruitfulness and sweetness of fruit it surpasses all other trees. +Its fruit is a nut of large size; and taken altogether, this tree +produces ten different commodities of value: as it produces wood +most excellent for burning, nuts very pleasant to eat, cords or +ropes that answer well for ships, fine cloth, which when dyed +resembles silk. The wood is the best that can be found for making +charcoal, and it yields wine, odoriferous water, sugar, and oil. +The boughs or leaves serve to cover houses, instead of tiles or +thatch, as, by reason of their closeness and substance, they keep +out the rain admirably. One tree will produce about two hundred +large nuts. The outer rhind of these nuts is removed, and thrown +into the fire, where it burns quickly and with a strong flame. +The inner rhind is like cotton or flax, and can be wrought in the +same manner. From the finer part of this, a kind of cloth is made +resembling silk; and from the tow, or refuse, they make a coarser +cloth, or small ropes and twine; while the coarsest parts are +made into cables and large ropes for ships. The inner hard shell +of the nut incloses the kernel, which is excellent eating, and +lines the shell to the thickness of an inch or less. Within this +is found to the quantity of two or three cups of sweet water, +which is excellent to drink, and which, by boiling, produces good +oil. Only one side of the tree is allowed to produce fruit, as +they wound the other side every morning and evening in several +places, whence a juice or sap runs out into vessels placed to +receive it. Thus they procure at each wound, every night and +morning, a cupful of most precious liquor, which sometimes they +boil till it becomes strong as brandy, so as to make people drunk +like strong wine, which it resembles in taste and flavour. They +likewise procure sugar from this tree, but not very sweet. This +tree produces fruit continually, as at all times there are to be +seen upon it both old ripe fruit of the past season, and green +fruit of the present year. It does not begin bearing till five +years old, and only lives for twenty five years. It thrives best +in sandy ground, and is planted or set out like our walnuts; and +is so much valued, that it is to be found all over the country +for at least two hundred miles. This country also produces other +fruits, from which they make good oil.</p> + +<p>For the cultivation of rice they till the ground with oxen as +we do, and at the season for sowing they have a holiday, on which +they testify their joy by singing and dancing to the sound of all +kinds of instruments of music. To ensure, as they conceive, a +favourable produce, ten men are disguised like so many devils, +who dance to the noise of their music; and after the festivities +of the day, they pray to the devils to send them a plentiful +crop.</p> + +<p>When any merchant of these idolaters is sore afflicted with +disease and near death, then certain persons who are accounted +physicians among them ore called to visit the person in +extremity. These persons accordingly come to his house in the +dead of night, dressed like devils, and carrying burning sticks +in their mouth and hands. And there, with mad cries and boilings, +and with the jangling of certain instruments, they make such a +horrible noise in the ears of the sick man, as is enough to make +a healthy man sick. This is the only remedy these pretended +physicians offer to their sick persons, being merely to present +to him when at the point of death the resemblance of him whom, +worse than devils, they honour as the vicegerent of the deity. +When any one hath so engorged himself with eating as to be sick +at stomach, he takes the powder of ginger, mixed in some liquid +to the consistence of syrup, which he drinks, and in three days +he recovers his former health.</p> + +<p>Their bankers, brokers, and money-changers use weights and +scales of such small size, that the box containing the whole does +not exceed an ounce in weight, yet are they so delicate and just +that they will turn with the weight of a hair. For trying the +parity of gold, they use the touch-stone as with us, but with +this addition: having first rubbed the gold to be tried on the +touch-stone, they rub over the mark with a ball of some sort of +composition resembling wax, by which all that is not fine gold +disappears, and the marks or spots of gold remain, by which they +have an exact proof of the fineness of the gold. When the ball +becomes full of gold, they melt it in the fire, to recover the +gold which it contains; yet are these men very ignorant even of +the art which they profess. In buying or selling merchandise they +employ the agency of brokers; so that the buyer and seller each +employs a separate broker. The seller takes the buyer by the +hand, under cover of a scarf or veil, where, by means of the +fingers, counting from one to a hundred thousand privately, they +offer and bargain far the price till they are agreed, all of +which passes in profound silence.</p> + +<p>The women of this country suckle their children till three +months old, after which they feed them on goats milk. When in the +morning they have given them milk, they allow them to tumble +about on the sands all foul and dirty, leaving them all day in +the sun, so that they look more like buffaloe calves than human +infants; indeed I never saw such filthy creatures. In the evening +they get milk again. Yet by this manner of bringing up they +acquire marvellous dexterity in running, leaping, swimming, and +the like.</p> + +<p>There are many different kinds of beasts and birds in this +country, as <i>lions</i>, wild boars, harts, hinds, buffaloes, +cows, goats, and elephants; but these last are not all bred here, +being brought from other places. They have also parrots of sundry +colours, as green, purple, and other mixt colours, and they are +so numerous that the rice fields have to be watched to drive them +away. These birds make a wonderful chattering, and are sold so +low as a halfpenny each. There are many other kinds of birds +different from ours, which every morning and evening make most +sweet music, so that the country is like an earthly paradise, the +trees, herbs, and flowers being in a continual spring, and the +temperature of the air quite delightful, as never too hot nor too +cold. There are also monkeys, which are sold at a low price, and +are very hurtful to the husbandmen, as they climb the trees, and +rob them of their valuable fruits and nuts, and cast down the +vessels that are placed for collecting the sap from which wine is +made. There are serpents also of prodigious size, their bodies +being as thick as those of swine, with heads like those of boars; +these are four footed, and grow to the length of four cubits, and +breed in the marshes[82]. The inhabitants say that these have no +venom. There are three other kinds of serpents, some of which +have such deadly venom, that if they draw ever so little blood +death presently follows, as happened several times while I was in +the country. Of these some are no larger than asps, and some much +bigger, and they are very numerous. It is said that, from some +strange superstition, the king of Calicut holds them in such +veneration, that he has small houses or cottages made on purpose +for them, conceiving that they are of great virtue against an +over abundance of rain, and overflowing of the rivers. Hence they +are protected by law, and any person killing one would be +punished with death, so that they multiply exceedingly. They have +a strange notion that serpents come from heaven, and are actuated +by heavenly spirits, and they allege that only by touching them +instant death insues. These serpents know the idolaters from the +Mahometans, or other strangers, and are much more apt to attack +the former than the latter. Upon one occasion, I went into a +house where eight men lay dead, and greatly swollen, having been +killed the day before by these serpents; yet the natives deem it +fortunate to meet any of them in their way.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 82: From the description these must be +crocodiles--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The palace of the king of Calicut contains many mansions, and +a prodigious number of apartments, in all of which a prodigious +number of lamps are lighted up every evening. In the great hall +of the palace there are ten or twelve great and beautiful +candlesticks of <i>laton</i> or brass, of cunning workmanship, +much like goodly fountains, the height of a man. In each of these +are several vessels, and in every vessel are three burning +candles of two spans long, with great plenty of oil. In the first +vessel there are many lamps or wicks of cotton; the middle +vessel, which is narrower, is also full of lamps; and the lowest +vessel has also a great number of lights, maintained with oil and +cotton wicks. All the angles or corners of these candlesticks are +covered with figures of devils, which also hold lights in their +hands; and in a vessel on the top of all the candlesticks there +are innumerable cotton wicks kept constantly burning, and +supplied with oil. When any one of the royal blood dies, the king +sends for all the bramins or priests in his dominions, and +commands them to mourn for a whole year. On their arrival, he +feasts them for three days, and when they depart gives each of +them five pieces of gold.</p> + +<p>Not far from Calicut, there is a temple of the idolaters, +encompassed with water like an island, built in the ancient +manner, having a double row of pillars much like the church of +<i>St John de fonte</i> at Rome, and in the middle of this temple +is a stone altar, on which the people sacrifice to their idols. +High up between the rows of pillars there is a vessel like a +boat, two paces long, and filled with oil. Also, all round about +the temple there are many trees, on which are hung an incredible +number of lamps, and the temple itself is everywhere hung round +with lamps, constantly burning. Every year, on the 25th of +December, an infinite number of people resort to this temple, +even from fifteen days journey all round the country, together +with a vast number of priests, who sacrifice to the idols of the +temple, after having washed in the water by which it is +surrounded. Then the priests ascend to the boat which is filled +with oil, from which they anoint the heads of all the people, and +then proceed to the sacrifice. On one side of the altar, there is +a most horrible figure of a devil, to whom the people lay their +prayers, prostrate on the ground, and then depart each one to his +home, believing that all their sins are forgiven them. On this +occasion, the environs of the temple is considered a sanctuary, +where no person may be arrested or troubled on any cause or +pretence. I never saw so prodigious a number of people assembled +in any one place, except in the city of Mecca.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX.</p> + +<p><i>Observations on various parts of India</i>.</p> + +<p>As there was no convenience for trade at Calicut, on account +of war with the Portuguese, because the inhabitants in +conjunction with the Mahometans had murdered 48 Portuguese while +I was in that city, my faithful friend and companion +<i>Cociazenor</i> the Persian, formerly mentioned, thought it +best for us to depart from thence. Indeed, in revenge for that +cruel murder, the Portuguese have ever since waged cruel war upon +Calicut, doing infinite injury to the city and people. Wherefore, +departing from thence by way of a fine river, we came to a city +named <i>Caicolon</i>[83], which is fifty leagues from Calicut. +The inhabitants of this city are idolaters, but it is frequented +by many merchants from different places, as its district produces +excellent pepper. At this place we found certain merchants who +were Christians, calling themselves followers of the apostle St +Thomas. They observe lent, or the fast of forty days, as we do, +and believe in the death and resurrection of Christ, so that they +celebrate Easter after our manner, and observe the other +solemnities of the Christian religion after the manner of the +Greeks. They are commonly named John, James, Matthew, Thomas, and +so forth, after the names of the apostles. Departing thence, +after three days journey we came to another city named +<i>Coulan</i>, about twenty leagues from <i>Caicolon</i>. The +king of this place is an idolater, and has an army of 20,000 men +always on foot. Coulan has an excellent harbour, and the +surrounding country produces plenty of pepper, but no corn. By +reason of the wars, we made no stay here, and on our way farther +we saw people fishing for pearls, in the manner already mentioned +when treating of Ormuz.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 83: From the distance and direction of the +journey or voyage, this name may possibly be an error or +corruption for Cranganore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The <i>city of Coromandel</i> on the sea coast, is seven days +sail from Coulan. It is very large, but without walls, and is +subject to the king of Narsinga, being within sight of the island +of Ceylon[84]. After passing the southern point of Cape Comorin, +the eastern coast of India produces abundance of rice. This city +is resorted to by vast numbers of Mahometan merchants from many +distant countries, as from it they can travel to various great +regions and cities of India. At this place I met with certain +Christians, who affirm that the body of St Thomas the apostle is +buried in a certain place about twelve miles from the city, where +several Christians continually dwell to guard the body of the +saint. They told me that these Christians are evil intreated by +the natives, on account of the war carried on by the Portuguese +against the people of the country; and that the Christians are +often murdered in secret, that it may not be known to the king of +Narsinga, who is in amity with the Portuguese, and greatly +favours the Christians. Once on a time there was a conflict +between the Christians and Mahometans, in which one of the +Christians was sore wounded in the arm. He immediately repaired +to the sepulchre of St Thomas, where, making his prayers and +touching the holy shrine, he was immediately healed by miracle, +upon which, as it is said, the king of Narsinga has ever since +greatly favoured the Christians. At this place my companion sold +much of his merchandize; but on account of war raging in the +country, we determined to depart, and calling with much danger +over a gulf 20 leagues broad, we came to the large island of +<i>Zailon</i>, or Ceylon.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 84: From other circumstances in the text, +particularly the neighbourhood of the place where St Thomas lay +buried, the city here alluded to was probably Meliapour, which +formerly stood not far from Madras, or the famous +<i>Mahubulipoor</i>, the city of the great Bali, 16 or 18 miles +from the English settlement. The author, as on many other +occasions, gives the name of the country to the capital. As to +being in sight of Ceylon, this may be an error in transcription, +and we ought to read that on the voyage between Coulan and the +city of Coromandel; the author passed in sight of +Ceylon.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This island of Ceylon is 1000 miles in circumference, and is +divided among four powerful kings; and because of the wars which +then raged among them we could not remain long there to acquire +any minute knowledge of the country and manners of its +inhabitants. It contains many elephants. At the foot of a very +long and high mountain there are found many precious stones +called <i>piropi</i> or rubies, which are got in the following +manner. The adventurers purchase from the king a certain measure +of the ground where these rubies are found, being about a cubit +square, for which they pay five pieces of gold, yet under the +condition that there shall always be an officer belonging to the +king present while they are digging, that if any stone be found +beyond the weight of ten carats it may be reserved for the king, +all under that weight belonging to the adventurer. Not far from +that mountain they find other precious stones, as jacinths, +sapphires, and topazes, besides others. The soil of Ceylon +produces the sweetest fruits I ever saw, especially +<i>cloves</i>[85] and Assyrian apples of wonderful sweetness, and +its other productions are similar to those of Calicut. The +cinnamon-tree is much like our bay, only that the leaves are +smaller and somewhat white. The true cinnamon is the bark of this +tree, which is gathered every third year, and of which the island +produces great quantities. When first gathered, it is by no means +so sweet and fragrant as it becomes a month afterwards when +thoroughly dry. A Mahometan merchant assured my companion, that +on the top of a high mountain in the centre of this island, there +is a certain cave or den where the inhabitants resort for +devotion, in memory of our first parents, who, as they allege, +lived in that place in continual penitence, after breaking the +covenant with God, which is confirmed by the print of Adam's feet +being still to be seen there above two spans in length. The +inhabitants of this island are subject to the king of Narsinga, +to whom they pay tribute. The climate is temperate and healthy, +though situated so near the equinoctial line. The people are of a +dark tawny colour, and wear slight cotton dresses, having the +right arm bare, as is the universal custom of the Indians; the +men being by no means warlike, neither have they the use of iron. +In this island my companion sold the king a great deal of saffron +and coral.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 85: Cloves are certainly not found in +Ceylon.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In three days sail we came to a city named <i>Paleachet</i> or +Pullicat, belonging to the king of Narsinga, a famous mart for +rich commodities, and especially for jewels and precious stones +brought from Ceylon and Pegu, and where likewise abundance of +spices are sold. Many Mahometan merchants dwell in this city; and +being received into one of their houses, we told him whence we +came, and that we had brought saffron and coral for sale, with +other merchandise, of which he was very glad. At this city wheat +is scarce, but rice is to be had in great plenty; and in other +respects the productions of the neighbouring country are much the +same as at Calicut. But as the inhabitants were preparing for +war, we departed from thence, and after thirteen days sail we +arrived at the city of <i>Tarnasari</i> or Tanaserim, a hundred +miles distant.</p> + +<p>The city of Tanaserim is not far from the sea, well walled, +seated on a fine plain, and has a famous port on a fine river +that runs past its north side. The king is an idolater of great +power, and is constantly at war with the kings of Narsinga and +Bengal[86]. He is able to bring into the field an hundred +thousand foot and as many cavalry, together with a hundred of the +largest and finest elephants I ever saw. The weapons of his +troops are swords, round bucklers, <i>peltes</i>, bows and +arrows, and javelins or darts made of long reeds; they also use +for defence cotton jacks wrought very hard and close quilted. The +houses in their towns are built close together like those in +Italy. This country produces wheat, cotton, silk of various +kinds, Brazil wood, sundry kinds of fruit like those of Italy, +with Assyrian apples, oranges, lemons, citrons, gourds, +cucumbers, and many others. It has many animals both wild and +tame. Among the former are oxen and cows, sheep, goats, hogs, and +deer. The wild beasts are lions, wolves, catamountains, and musk +cats or civets. In the woods are many peacocks and falcons, with +popinjays or parrots, some of which are entirely white, while +others are of seven different colours. There are plenty of hares +and partridges, and several kinds of birds of prey larger than +eagles. These birds are black and purple, with several white +feathers intermixed, having yellow bills tipt beautifully with +crimson, which are so large that the handles of swords are +sometimes made of the upper mandible. Their cocks and hens are +the largest I ever saw, and both the natives and the Mahometans +who dwell there, take great delight in cock-fighting, on which +they venture large sums. I have seen them fight for six hours, +yet will they sometimes kill at the first stroke. Some of their +goats are much larger and handsomer than ours, and of these the +females have often four kids at one birth. So abundant are +animals in this country, that twelve sheep may be bought for a +single piece of gold worth about a pistole. Some of their rams +have horns like a buck, and are much bigger and fiercer than +ours. Their buffaloes are not so good as those of Italy. This +coast has abundance of fine large fish, which are sold very +cheap. The natives eat the flesh of all kinds of beasts except +cows, and feed sitting on the ground without cloth or carpet, +having their meat in wooden vessels artificially wrought. Their +drink is sugar and water. Their beds are raised from the ground +like ours. Their apparel is a cloak or mantle of cotton cloth, +leaving one arm bare, but some wear inner vests or shirts of silk +or cotton. All go bareheaded, except the priests, who have a kind +of caps of two spans long on their heads, with a knob on the top +about the size of an acorn, all sparkling with gold. They delight +in ear-rings, but have neither rings nor bracelets. The +complexion of the natives inclines towards fair, as the air is +more temperate than at Calicut. In their tillage and reaping +there is little difference from the manner of Italy.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 86: It is not easy to conceive by what +means this could be, as Pegu, Ava, Aracan, and Tipera, intervene +between Tanaserim and Bengal, and the bay of Bengal between +Tanaserim and Narsinga or the Carnatic, none of the powers +mentioned being possessed of any maritime +force.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When the king or any of the priests or great men die, their +bodies are burnt on a large pile of wood, and all the while the +assistants sacrifice to the devil. The ashes are then gathered +into earthen jars like those of <i>Samos</i>, and are preserved +or buried in their houses. While the bodies are burning, they +cast into the fire all manner of perfumes, as wood of aloes, +myrrh, frankincense, storax, sandal-wood, and many other sweet +gums, spices, and woods: In the mean time also, they make an +incessant noise with drums, trumpets, pipes, and other +instruments, much like what was done of old by the Greeks and +Romans, when deifying their departed great men. Likewise during +these obsequies, there are 15 or 20 persons disguised like +devils, continually walking round the fire with strange +gesticulations. All the while the wife of the deceased stands +alone beside the fire weeping and lamenting her loss. Fifteen +days afterwards she invites all the kindred of her husband to a +feast, when they go at night in a body to the place where the +husband was burnt, the widow being dressed in all her jewels and +richest attire, using on this occasion the help of her relations +to decorate her person to the utmost. At this place a pit of some +size is prepared and filled with dry reeds, covered over with a +silk cloth to conceal the pit. Then a fire of sweet woods is +kindled in the pit; and when all the guests have been heartily +feasted, the widow having eaten a great quantity of <i>betola</i> +so as to make her mad or drunk, a great company of their +musicians habited like devils, with burning sticks in their +mouths, dance around the fire, and then make a sacrifice to the +great devil <i>Deumo</i>. The widow then runs about like a person +bereaved of her senses, dancing and rejoicing after a strange +manner; then turning to the persons disguised like devils, she +commends herself to their prayers, desiring them to make +intercession for her with <i>Deumo</i>, that after this +transitory life she may be received among his angels. When all +the ceremonies are finished, she takes leave of all her kindred, +and then lifting up her hands, and with a sudden loud cry, she +leaps into the flaming pit, on which her kindred cover her up +with faggots of sweet wood, and great quantities of pitch or +bitumen, that she may be speedily consumed. If the widow refuses +thus to sacrifice herself, she would be ever afterwards esteemed +an evil woman, hated of all men, and even in danger of being +slain by her own and her husband's kindred. The king is generally +present at these ceremonies, which are not used at the death of +ordinary people, but only for kings, priests, and great men.</p> + +<p>Justice in strictly administered in this country. Whoever +kills a man is adjudged to die as at Calicut. Proof of giving or +receiving is taken by writings or by witnesses, the governor of +the city being chief judge. If any merchant stranger die there +without children, all his goods fall to the king. When the king +dies, he is succeeded in the throne by his children. The children +of the natives divide equally among them all the possessions of +their father. When any Mahometan merchant dies, their bodies are +embalmed with many sweet spices and gums, and being placed in +wooden coffins, they are buried with their faces towards Mecca. +In their manner of writing they use parchment as we do, and not +the leaves of trees as at Calicut. Their vessels are a kind of +shallow brigantines or barks with flat bottoms, which draw very +little water. Some also use foists having <i>double +foreparts</i>[87], and two masts, but these have no decks. They +have also some vessels of large burden, even carrying a thousand +tons, in which they have several boats, and these are used when +they go to Malacca for spices.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 87: This is not easily understood, unless +it may mean that they are so built that they may sail with either +end foremost.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Having finished our business at Tanaserim, we packed up all +our wares and embarked for Bengal, distant 700 miles from +Tanaserim, whither we arrived in twelve days sailing. In +fruitfulness and abundance of all things <i>this city</i>[88] may +contend for eminence with any city in the world. The kingdom +dependent upon this city is very large, rich, and populous, and +the king, who is a Mahometan, maintains an army of 200,000 men, +including cavalry and infantry, with which he keeps up almost +continual wars against the king of Narsinga. This country is so +fruitful, that it possesses every thing conducive to the use of +man, abounding in all kinds of beasts, wholesome fruits, and +corn. It has spices also of several kinds, and vast abundance of +cotton and silk. No other region in the world is comparable to +this, so that there are many rich merchants. Every year there +depart from hence fifty ships laden with cloths of cotton or +silk, bound for the cities of Turkey, Syria, Arabia, Persia, +Ethiopia, and India. There are also many merchant strangers, who +buy precious stones from the natives. We found here many +Christian merchants who were born, as they told us, in the city +of <i>Sarnau</i>. They had brought to this great mart wood of +aloes and <i>laser</i>, which latter yields the sweet gum called +<i>laserpitium</i>, commonly called <i>belzoi</i>, or benzoin, +which is a kind of myrrh. They bring also musk and several other +sweet perfumes. These Christian merchants told us, that in their +country were many Christian princes, subject to the great khan, +who dwells in the city of <i>Cathay</i>[89]. The dress of these +Christians was of camblet, very loose and full of plaits, and +lined with cotton; and they wore sharp pointed caps of a scarlet +colour, two spans high. They are white men, believing in one God +with a trinity of persons, and were baptized after our manner. +They believe in the doctrines of the evangelists and apostles, +and write from right to left like the Armenians. They celebrate +the birth and crucifixion of Christ, observe the forty days of +lent, and keep the days of several saints. They wear no shoes, +but have a kind of hose of silk on their legs, garnished with +jewels. On their fingers they wore rings with stones of wonderful +splendour. At their meat they use no tables, but eat lying on the +ground, feeding upon flesh of all kinds. They affirmed also that +there are certain Christian kings, whom they called <i>Rumi</i>, +bordering on the Turks. When these Christians had seen the +precious merchandise belonging to my companion, and particularly +a great branch of coral, they earnestly advised him to accompany +them to a certain city, whither they were bound, assuring him +that by their procurement he should sell this to very great +advantage, especially if he would take rubies in payment, by +means of which he might easily gain 10,000 pieces of gold, +assuring him that these stones were of much greater value in +Turkey than in the east. And as they were ready to depart the +very next day in a foist bound for the city of Pegu, where they +meant to go, my companion consented to go with them, more +especially as he expected to find there certain Persians his +countrymen. Wherefore departing with these men from Bengal, and +sailing across a great gulf to the south-east, we came at length +to the city of Pegu, which is 1000 miles from Bengal.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 88: Here, as usual, the name of the country +is given instead of the chief city, and we have no means even to +guess what place is indicated, unless perhaps the <i>Satigan</i> +of other ancient relations, which appears to have been a city on +the Hoogly river, or western branch of the +Ganges.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 89: The capital of Cathay or northern China +is Cambalu or Pekin, but it is difficult to make any thing of +these Christian natives of <i>Sarnau</i>, or of their many +Christian princes in Tartary; unless we may suppose Verthema to +have mistaken the followers of the Lama of Thibet for Christians, +as appears to have been done by some of the more ancient +travellers in our early volumes.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The city of Pegu is situated on the continent, not far from +the sea, and upon a large river, by which merchandise are +conveyed to or from the city very conveniently. The city is +walled, and the houses are well built. The king and his subjects +are idolaters, of a fairer complexion than those of Tanaserim, as +the climate is rather cooler, but in dress, manner of living, and +general appearance, in every respect resemble the inhabitants of +that other city. The king has a vast army both of horse and foot, +among whom are many native Christians, who have six pardaos of +monthly pay. The beasts and fowls are much the same as at +Calicut, so that they have abundance of animal food; and besides +these they have a few elephants. This country produces the best +timber I ever saw, either for building ships or houses; and has +many reeds or canes of vast size, as large in diameter as the +body of a man or a large barrel. Civet-cats or musk-cats are so +plenty that three may be bought for one piece of gold. This city +produces very little merchandise for purchase, except precious +stones, and especially rubies, which are brought thither from +another city named <i>Cassela</i>, thirty days journey towards +the east, where also they procure other precious stones called +<i>smaragdes</i> or emeralds. On our arrival at Pegu, the king +was at the distance of twenty-five days journey making war upon +the king of Ava; but returned shortly afterwards in great triumph +on account of a victory he had obtained over his enemy. Though +this king is very rich and powerful, he does not use such pompous +and magnificent ceremony as the king of Calicut, and is so +affable and accessible, that even a child may come into his +presence and speak to him; yet the rich jewels, pearls, and +precious stones, especially rubies, with which he is decorated +surpass all belief, and exceed the value of a great and +flourishing city. His fingers are full of rings, his arms all +covered with bracelets, and his legs and feet covered with +similar ornaments, all gloriously beset and sparkling with the +finest precious stones, and his ears so loaded with jewels that +they hang down half a span. With all these splendid jewels he +shines in a dark night as if with the sunbeams.</p> + +<p>At a favourable opportunity, the Christian merchants whom we +had accompanied to Pegu gave intimation to the king of the +valuable merchandise which my companion had brought for sale, and +accordingly he sent for us on the following day, desiring my +companion to bring the goods which he had to dispose of. Among +other things he had two great branches of coral so large and +beautiful as had not been seen before, which the king took great +pleasure to look upon, and being astonished at these things, he +asked the Christian merchants what men we were. They answered +that we were Persians. The king then desired to know if we would +sell these things. Upon this my companion desired the +interpreters to say to the king, that they were all his own, and +that he begged he would do him the honour to accept them freely. +The king then said that he had been two years continually at war +with the king of Ava, by which his treasure was consumed, but if +my companion would bargain for them by way of exchange for +precious stones, especially rubies, that he would content him for +the coral. Then said my companion to the interpreters, "I pray +you give the king to understand that I desire nothing else for my +goods than the good-will of his majesty, and therefore that I +humbly intreat he may take of my goods what pleases him best +without money or payment of my kind." When the king heard this, +he said that he had often been told the Persians were courteous +and liberal men, but that he had never known any one so generous +as this, and swore by the head of the devil, that he would try +whether he or the Persian were most liberal. Upon this he ordered +one of his attendants to bring him a casket of precious stones. +This casket was a span and a half square, entirely full of +rubies, the inside being divided into many compartments where the +stones were sorted in order according to their sizes. When he had +opened the casket, he ordered it to be placed before the Persian, +desiring him to take of these precious rubies as many as he +thought fit. But my companion, as if still more provoked to +generosity by the liberality of the king, spoke to him in these +words, "Most high and honourable sovereign! Such is my sense of +your generous conduct to me, that I swear by the head of Mahomet +and all the mysteries of his holy religion, that I freely and +gladly give you all my goods. I do not travel in search of gain, +but merely from a desire to see the world; in which I have not +hitherto found any thing that has given me so much delight as the +generous favour your majesty has now been pleased to shew me!" To +this the king answered, "Will you yet contend with me in +liberality?" Then selecting some rubies from all the compartments +in the casket, out of which he took as many as he could hold in +his hand, being two hundred rubies, he gave all these to the +Persian with most royal munificence, and commanded him not to +refuse. He gave also to each of the Christians two rubies worth +not less than a thousand crowns; but those he gave to the Persian +were reckoned worth a hundred thousand crowns. This king +therefore certainly exceeds all the kings of the earth in +munificence, both in manner and in richness of his gifts. About +this time news came to Pegu that the king of Ava was advancing +against him with a vast army, on which the king of Pegu went to +meet him with one almost innumerable.</p> + +<p>Two days after the departure of the king from Pegu, we sailed +towards the city of Malacca, where we arrived after a voyage of +eight days. Not far from this city is a famous river named +Gaza[90], the largest I ever saw, as it is 25 miles broad, and on +the other side of it is seen the very large island of +<i>Sumatra</i>, which by old writers was called <i>Taprobana</i>, +and which is said by the inhabitants to be 500 miles in +circuit[91]. Upon our arrival at <i>Malacca</i>, called by some +<i>Melcha</i>, we were commanded to appear before the sultan, who +is a Mahometan and tributary to the great sultan of +<i>Chini</i>[92], because as is said the city was built about 80 +years before on account of the convenience of its harbour, being +one of the best in the ocean, and to which doubtless many ships +resort for trade. This region is not everywhere fruitful, yet it +has a sufficiency of corn and cattle, although scarce of wood. +They have plenty of birds of the same kind with those at Calicut, +but the popinjays or parrots are more beautiful. It produces +sandal-wood and tin; likewise elephants, horses, sheep, kine, +<i>pardalles</i> or leopards, buffaloes, peacocks, and many other +beasts and birds. The country has but few products of value, so +that its only merchandise is spices and silk. The people are of a +blackish ash-colour, and are clothed like the Mahometans of +<i>Memphis</i>, otherwise called <i>Cayr</i>, <i>Alchayr</i>, or +<i>Babylon</i>, on the Nile. They have very large foreheads, +round eyes, and flat noses; and they are so much given to murder +and robbery that it is dangerous to go abroad in the night, for +they kill one another like dogs, and therefore merchants always +remain on board their ships in the night. The people are fierce, +barbarous, and unruly, insomuch that they will not submit to any +governor, being altogether addicted to sedition and rebellion, +and they always threaten to quit the country when their rulers +endeavour to enforce order; which threat they are certainly able +to execute, as their country is upon the sea-coast.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 90: It is obvious from the context, that +this famous river of Gaza refers to the Straits of +Malacca.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 91: The Taprobana of the ancients certainly +was Ceylon. Sumatra is about 977 statute miles in length, and 200 +in its greatest breadth, so that its circumference must exceed +2500 miles.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 92: By Chini in the text is probably meant +<i>Acheen</i> in Sumatra.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We stopt no time at Malacca, but hiring a brigantine we sailed +from thence for the island of Sumatra, and arrived at the city of +<i>Pyder</i> or Pedier about 80 miles from the mainland, where we +found an excellent harbour. The island of Sumatra is governed by +four kings, who with their people are all idolaters, and do not +differ much in fashions, apparel, and manner of life from the +inhabitants of Tanaserim. They are of a whitish colour with large +foreheads, round eyes; and of <i>brasyll</i>? colour. They wear +their hair long, have very broad and flat noses, and are of low +mean stature. Their money is of gold, silver, and tin. On one +side the gold coin has the head of a <i>devil</i>, and on the +other a waggon or chariot drawn by elephants. The silver coin is +similar, and ten of them passes for one of gold; but it requires +25 pieces of tin to equal one gold piece. In this country there +are a greater number and finer elephants than in any other place +I have been in. The people are by no means warlike, being +entirely devoted to merchandise and gain; they use strangers with +much kindness and hospitality, and justice is well administered. +They have in this island great abundance of long pepper, which in +their language is called <i>Molaga</i>, and is much longer and +whiter than any other, yet very light and strong; it is sold by +measure like corn, and is to be had in such plenty that twenty +ships are loaded with it every year for <i>Cathay</i>, or China, +where it is much in request on account of the coldness of the +climate. The tree which produces this pepper has a larger body, +with broader and flatter leaves than the pepper tree of Calicut. +This island produces plenty of silk, which is the work of worms +as with us; but there is another kind brought forth on the trees +spontaneously without any care or labour, which is worse than the +other. Here likewise grows the <i>laser</i> tree, which produces +the precious gum called <i>Laserpitium</i> or <i>Belzoe</i>[93], +as we were told by the inhabitants and merchants, but not having +myself seen it I am unable to give any distinct account of this +substance. Variety is always pleasing, and ingenious minds can +never be satiated with contemplating the marvellous and +diversified works of God in nature: Therefore, that the reader +may take the more pleasure in these my writings, or at least may +experience less tediousness in reading them, I have thought good +to set down such things as I have seen more at large. It is +therefore to be understood that the reason of no great quantity +of <i>aloes</i> or <i>Laserpitium</i> being brought to us is +because it comes from the farthest parts of the earth. There are +three kinds or sorts of <i>aloes</i>, differing greatly in point +of goodness. The most perfect is that called <i>Calampat</i>, +which is not found in Sumatra, but is brought from the city of +<i>Sarnau</i> near which it grows, as we were told by our +companions the Christian merchants formerly mentioned. There is +another kind of <i>aloes</i> called <i>Juba</i> or <i>Luba</i>, +brought to Sumatra by the before mentioned river or strait, but I +know not from what country. The third kind is called +<i>bochor</i>. These Christian merchants also told us that none +of the finest and best kind of aloes is brought to us, because it +comes from the kingdoms of <i>Cathay, Chini, Macym, Sarnau</i>, +and <i>Gravay</i>, countries much richer than ours and more +abounding in gold, having kings of great power and riches, who +take great delight in sweet savours and use them much more than +our western princes, owing to which circumstance the true and +best kind of <i>aloes</i> is worth ten crowns the pound even in +the city of <i>Sarnau</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 93: From similarity of names this appears +to be <i>Benzoin</i>, or <i>benzoe</i>, sometimes called <i>gum +benjamin</i>; yet from some circumstances in the sequel it may +possibly indicate <i>camphor</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We were taught by the said Christian merchants our companions, +how to know and distinguish the two kinds of the sweet gums +called <i>aloes</i> or <i>Laserpitium</i>. One of them had a +certain portion of them both, and about two ounces of the best +sort of aloes called <i>calampat</i>. Taking a piece of this in +his hand and holding it close for about as long as one might take +to rehearse the psalm <i>Miserere mei Deus</i> three times, the +aloes become hot, and on opening his hand gave out a savour of +incredible sweetness, such as I had never experienced from any +other substance. He took also about the size of a walnut of the +common <i>laserpitium</i> or <i>belzoe</i>, and half a pound of +that which comes from the city of <i>Sarnau</i>, and putting both +into different chaffing-dishes with burning coals in a close +chamber, the small quantity of <i>belzoe</i> far exceeded, in +sweetness of flavour, the other which weighed half a pound, and +would even have done so had it been two pounds weight[94]. In +this region also is found the substance called <i>lacca</i> from +which a bright red colour is procured. This is the gum of a tree +not much unlike our walnut tree[95]. In Pedier I saw in one +street not less than 500 bankers or exchangers of money; and at +this place they make many curious works, such as fine baskets +garnished with gold, which were sold for two crowns each[96]. +This is a famous mart to which innumerable merchants resort. The +inhabitants wear mantles of silk, and <i>syndones</i>? made of +cotton.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 94: It is impossible to determine from the +account in the text what is meant by these articles of sweet +scent under the names of <i>aloes, laserpitium, belzoe, calampat, +luba</i>, and <i>bochor</i>; all of which seem to be different +names of the same substance in different degrees of quality, and +assuredly not the drugs now known by the name of <i>aloes</i> and +<i>benzoin</i>. There is a sweet-scented wood in the east known +by the name of <i>lignum aloes</i>, and possibly the sweet gum +called <i>belzoe</i> may have been extracted from it, or from +that which produces the oil of rhodium.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 95: Gum lac, long believed the gum of a +tree, is now known to be the work of insects, serving as a nidus +for their young, in the same manner as bees wax is used by the +honey bee.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 96: Perhaps filagree +work?--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This country has plenty of wood fit for the construction of +ships. Those which they build are of a strange fashion, named +<i>gunchos</i> or junks, having three masts with two stems and +two sterns, having <i>gouvernals</i> or rudders on both. "When +sailing on the ocean and having given their sails to the wind, if +it be afterwards needful to have more sails, not changing the +first they go backwards without turning the ship and using only +one mast[97]." The natives are most expert swimmers, and have a +wonderful contrivance for producing fire in an instant. Their +houses are very low and built of stone, and instead of tiles or +thatch they are covered by the hide of a fish called +<i>tartaruca</i>! which is found in that part of the Indian sea, +which is so huge a monster that one of their skins which I saw +weighed 330 pounds. There are likewise serpents in this country +much larger than those at Calicut.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 97: This account of the mode of navigation +is inexplicable, or at least obscure. Perhaps it is meant to +express that they do not tack, but sail with either end foremost +as suits the change of wind or direction of the +ship.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>At this place our Christian friends, meaning to prosecute +their own affairs, proposed to take their leave of us, but my +Persian companion spoke to them in this manner; "Though my +friends I am not your countryman, yet being all brethren and the +children of Adam, I take God to witness that I love you as if you +were of my own blood, and children of the same parents, and +considering how long we have kept company together in a loving +manner, I cannot think of parting from you without much grief of +mind: Besides, even if you would leave me, I hope you will not +desert this my companion who is of the same faith with +yourselves." Then the Christians asked how I, being a Persian, +happened to be of the Christian faith? To which my companion +answered that I was no Persian, but had been bought at Jerusalem. +On hearing the holy name of Jerusalem pronounced, the Christians +lifted up their hands and eyes to heaven, and prostrating +themselves thrice kissed the ground; then rising up, they asked +what age I was of when brought from Jerusalem. Being told that I +was then fifteen years of age, they said I might well remember my +country; to which my companion answered that I did so assuredly, +and had often given him much pleasure by the things I had told +him concerning it. Then the merchants said that although they had +long desired to return into their own country, which was far from +thence, they would still bear us company to those places to which +we proposed going. Preparing ourselves therefore for a voyage, we +took shipping and in fifteen days we came to the island of +<i>Bandan</i> or Banda, whence nutmegs and mace are procured.</p> + +<p>In this voyage to the isle of Banda, we passed about twenty +islands, some of them inhabited and some desert. This island of +Banda is very low, savage, and barren, being about 100 miles in +circuit. It has neither king nor governor, but is inhabited by a +savage and brutal people, who live without law, order, or +government, dwelling in low huts scarcely rising above the +ground, and having a scanty shirt for their whole clothing. Their +complexion inclines towards white, and they are of low stature: +They go bareheaded and barefooted, with their hair hanging down, +having broad round foreheads. They are idolaters, and worse even +than the <i>Poliars</i> and <i>Hyrana</i>[98] of Calicut, being +of dull apprehension, little strength, and altogether barbarous +in their manners. The soil bears no fruits except nutmegs, which +grow on a tree very much like the peach in its branches and +leaves. Before the nut becomes ripe, the mace expands round like +a red rose; but when the nut ripens the mace closes and embraces +the nut, and both are gathered together, which the natives do +without rule or order, catch who catch may, all things being +there in common. The tree yields fruit of its own nature without +grafting or pruning, and it is so common and plentiful that +twenty-six pound weight is sold for three <i>souses</i> or half a +<i>carline</i> of the money which is current at Calicut. These +islanders have no other order of justice than the law of nature, +and live therefore without lawsuits or any of those contentions +proceeding from <i>thine and mine</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 98: These are named on a former occasion +<i>Nirani</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Having tarried three days in Banda, my companion asked the +Christian merchants where was the region which produces cloves, +and they told him that these were found in an island named +<i>Monoch</i> or Molucca, six days sail from Banda. We therefore +resumed our voyage, and came there in seven days. This island[99] +is very narrow, yet is longer than Banda, and the inhabitants are +even more barbarous than those of Banda, for if it were not for +the human shape, they differ in nothing from brutes. Their colour +is whiter, owing to the air being colder. This island produces +cloves, which likewise grow on several small and desolate islands +on its coast. The body of the tree resembles the box-tree, and +has leaves almost like the bay tree. When the cloves are ripe, +the inhabitants beat them off the tree with long canes, having +previously laid matts under the tree to receive them. The soil is +sandy, and so low under the horizon that the north star cannot be +seen[100]. The price of cloves is about double that formerly +mentioned for nutmegs, but they are sold by measure, as the +natives are entirely ignorant of the use of weights.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 99: Instead of one island, the Moluccas are +a group of islands, the largest of which, Gilolo, is about 200 +miles from N. to S. On its western side are several small +islands, the most important of which for the produce of cloves +are Ternate and Tidore. Gilolo was probably the island visited by +Verthema.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 100: A strange mode of expressing that +Gilolo is immediately under the line.--E]</blockquote> + +<p>As we were conversing together respecting our voyages, the +Christian merchants addressed me as follows: "Dearly beloved +friend, as by the grace of God we are come thus far in safety, we +will, if it so please you go to visit one of the finest islands +in the world, and so rich as we believe you have never seen. But +we must go in the first place to another island named +<i>Borneo</i>, where we shall procure a larger vessel, as we have +to cross a deep and rough sea." My companion then desired them to +do as they thought proper. Therefore hiring a larger foist, we +directed our voyage to that island, sailing to the southward both +by day and night, and passing our time in much pleasant +conversation. The merchants, among other things, asked me many +questions respecting the ceremonies and solemnities of the +Christian religion as used among us in Europe. And when I made +mention of the <i>Veronica</i> or <i>Vernacle</i> of the face of +Christ[101], and of the heads of St Peter and St Paul, the +chiefest of the apostles, they told me secretly that if I would +go with them, I should become a great man in their country by my +knowledge of these divine things. But being deterred by the +length of the journey, and fearful that I might never be able to +get home, I refused to accompany them. At length we came to +Borneo, which is 200 miles from Molucca and is somewhat +bigger[102] and as low under the horizon. The inhabitant are +idolaters of a sharp wit and decent manner of life. Their +complexion inclines towards fair. They do not all dress alike, as +some wear cotton shirts, while others have camblet mantles, and +others wear pointed caps of a red colour. They are under regular +government and submit to laws, which are righteously +administered. This island yields great quantities of +<i>camphor</i>, which I was told was the gum of a tree; but I +dare not affirm this for fact, as I have never seen the way in +which it is procured.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 101: The Veronica among the Catholics, is +the handkerchief with which our Saviour is supposed to have wiped +his face during his passion, which they allege took from his +bloody sweat a miraculous impression or portrait of his +countenance.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 102: Instead of being only <i>somewhat</i> +larger than Gilolo, Borneo is perhaps the largest island in the +world, except New Holland, being about 880 English miles in its +greatest diameter from S.W. to N.E. and 550 in the opposite +direction at the widest.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>At Borneo my companion hired a light bark for 100 pieces of +gold, and having laid in provisions for the voyage, we directed +our course for the great island of <i>Gyava</i>, or Java, to +which we came in five days, sailing towards the south. Our pilot +used the mariners compass with loadstone, and the sea chart as +ours do. Observing that the north star could not be seen, my +companion asked the Christian merchants in what manner they +guided their course in those seas. To this the pilot made answer, +that in navigating these southern seas, they were particularly +guided by five stars, and one other particular star which was +directly opposite thee north star, and that they also used the +loadstone, which always points to the north. He said moreover, +that beyond the island of Java there was a certain people who +were antipodes to them of European Sarmatia, inhabiting a cold +climate, and as near to the antarctic pole as Sarmatia is to the +arctic, as was evident by the shortness of their day, which was +only four hours long in winter[103], in which conversation we +took much delight.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 103: This pilot must have been acquainted +with the southern extremity of South America, or must have built +this information on hypothesis, as there is no known inhabited +land of this description to the South of Java--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Proceeding on our voyage for five days, we came to the great +island of Java, in which there are many kingdoms and peoples, all +idolaters, but of sundry manners and customs. Some worship the +sun, others the moon, some consider cows as their gods, while +others worship all day whatever they first meet in the morning. +This island produces silk, which grows spontaneously in the +woods, and has the finest emeralds in the world, as also great +plenty of gold and copper. The soil is as productive of corn and +fruits as that of Calicut, and has an abundance of flesh. The +inhabitants are an honest and fair-dealing people, much of the +same stature and colour with Europeans, but with larger +foreheads, very large eyes of a brazil or red colour, with flat +noses, and wear their hair long. It has a great number of birds +different from ours, except peacocks, turtle-doves, and crows, +which are the same as we have. In their dress, the natives wear +mantles or cloaks of cotton, silk, or camblet, always having one +arm bare. They have no defensive armour, as they are hardly ever +at war; but when they go to sea they use bows and arrows, and +likewise poisoned arrows made of reeds, which they blow from long +hollow canes, and the poison with which these arrows are infected +is so virulent that death certainly follows from the slightest +wound. They have no kind of fire-arms. They eat all kinds of +flesh, fish, or fruit, as they please or can procure.</p> + +<p>Some of the natives of this island are so very barbarous, that +when their parents become feeble from age, so as to be useless to +themselves and others, they bring them into the public market and +sell them to the cannibals who eat human flesh, who immediately +upon buying them, kill and eat them. Likewise when any young +person falls into disease of which they do not expect he shall +recover, his kinsmen sell him in the same manner to the +cannibals. When my companion expressed his horror at this +barbarous and savage practice, a certain native merchant +observed, "That no sacrifice could redeem the sins of the +Persians, who gave the flesh of their dead to be eaten by the +worms." Abhorring these savage manners, we returned to our ship +not willing to tarry longer in that island. While we were there, +the Christian merchants, who were ever desirous to shew us +strange things which we might relate at our return to our own +country, made us remark that the sun at noon-day was to the north +of us, which as they said is always the case in the month of +July. I must acknowledge however, that I hardly remember these +things distinctly, as I had then almost forgot the names of our +months. At this island my companion bought two fine emeralds for +1000 pieces of gold, and likewise two children who were eunuchs, +for two hundred pieces, as there are in that country certain +merchants who deal solely in these young eunuchs.</p> + +<p>After remaining fifteen days in Java, being weary of the +barbarous manners of the inhabitants, and of the coldness of the +country at that season of the year, we determined to prosecute +our voyage back to India, as there were no other regions in these +eastern parts worth seeing. Wherefore, hiring a light bark, we +departed from thence, and having sailed fifteen days to the +north-west, we came to the city of Malacca, where we remained +three days. At this place we took our leave of the Christian +merchants, with sorrowful minds and many friendly embraces. Of +this separation I was sore grieved, and had I been a single man +without wife and children[104], I certainly would never have +separated from such dear friends. Leaving them therefore at +Malacca, they remained at that place, whence they said they meant +shortly to return to the city of <i>Sana</i>[105]. My Persian +companion and I went on board a foist, in which we returned to +Coromandel. While on this voyage the pilot informed us that there +were about seven thousand small islands in the eastern sea, +beyond Sumatra and Java. While at Malacca my companion bought as +much spices, perfumes of various kinds, and silk, as cost him +5000 pieces of gold. We were fifteen days on our voyage to +Coromandel, and remained there twenty days. Hiring another foist +we sailed thence to the city of Coulan, where we found twenty-two +Portuguese Christians. Fearing they might seize me as a spy, I +began to contrive how I might make my escape from thence; but as +there were many Mahometans there who knew that I had been on the +pilgrimage to Mecca, I changed my purpose, and we soon afterwards +went to Calicut by way of the river, which took us twelve +days.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 104: This oblique insinuation of having a +wife and children, is rather contradictory to several +circumstances in the early part of the itinerary of +Verthema.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 105: This is probably a mistake for +<i>Sarnau</i>, whence the Christians are said to have +come.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION X.</p> + +<p><i>Continuation of the Author's Adventures, after his Return +to Calicut.</i></p> + +<p>After so many long and dangerous voyages and peregrinations, +in which we had partly satisfied our desire of travel, and were +partly wearied by the many inconveniencies we had undergone, we +began to consider of the best means for returning to our native +country. I will therefore briefly relate what happened to me by +the way, that other men, taking example by my travels, may know +better how to conduct themselves in like situations, if similar +inclinations should move them to undertake such voyages. In +Calicut we found two Christians of Milan in Italy, who had come +to India with licence from the king of Portugal, on purpose to +buy precious stones. The names of these men were John Maria and +Peter Anthony. I was more rejoiced at the sight of these men than +I can express, and knowing them to be Christians by their fair +complexions, though they could not know me as I was naked like +the natives, I immediately spoke to them, informing them that I +also was a Christian, and their countryman. Then, taking me +kindly by the hand, they brought me to their house, where, for +joy of this unexpected meeting, we could scarcely satisfy +ourselves with tears, embraces, and kisses, for it seemed a +strange thing to me thus to find men who spoke my own language, +and even to speak it myself. They told me that they were in great +favour with the king of Calicut, yet anxiously wished to get hack +to their native country, but knew not how, as they had fled from +the Portuguese, and durst not run the risk of falling into their +hands, having made many pieces of great cannon and other ordnance +for the king of Calicut, and that now the Portuguese fleet would +shortly be there. When I proposed to endeavour to go to Cananore, +and solicit their pardon from the Portuguese admiral, they said +that could not be looked for, as they were well known to many of +the kings and princes between Calicut and Cananore, who were +friendly to the Portuguese, and who would certainly intercept +them, as they had made above 400 guns, great and small, and could +never hope for pardon. By this I could perceive how fearful a +thing it is to have an evil conscience, and called to remembrance +the saying of the poet:--</p> + +<p>"Multa male timeo, qui feci multa proterve."</p> + +<p>That is to say, "I fear much evil because I have done much." +These men had not only made many pieces of artillery for the +infidels, to the great injury of the Christians, in contempt of +Christ and his holy religion, but had also taught the idolaters +both how to make and use them. While I remained in Calicut, I saw +them give a mould to the idolaters, by which they might cast +brass cannon of sufficient bigness to receive a charge of 105 +<i>cantaros</i> or measures of powder. At this time also there +was a Jew in Calicut who had built a handsome brigantine, in +which were four large iron cannons; but Providence soon after +gave him his due reward, as he was drowned while bathing in the +river. To return to the two Italians: God knows how earnestly I +endeavoured to persuade them never to make any more guns or +artillery for the infidels, in contempt of God, and to the great +detriment of our most holy faith. At my words, tears fell from +the eyes of Peter Anthony; but John Maria, who perhaps was not so +anxious to return home, said it was all one to him whether he +died in India or Italy, and that God only knew what was decreed +for him. Within two days after I returned to my companion, who +had wondered what was become of me, fearing that I was either +sick, or had died, or run away. I told him that I had been all +night in the temple, that he might not suspect my great intimacy +with the Christians.</p> + +<p>While I remained in the lodging of my companion, there came to +him two Persian merchants from the city of Cananore, saying that +they had bad news to tell him, as there had arrived twelve +Portuguese ships, which they had actually seen. Then asked he +what manner of men were these Portuguese? To this the Persians +answered, that they were Christians, armed in cuirasses of bright +iron, and had built an impregnable fortress at Cananore. Then +turning to me, my companion asked what kind of people these were. +To this I answered, that they were a nation of wicked people, +entirely given up to robbery and piracy on the seas: And I can +truly say, that he was not so sorry for these news as I was +rejoiced at their arrival. After the rumour spread of the arrival +of the Portuguese, I began to be in fear for myself, and to +consider what was best to be done to ensure my safety; and +considering that nothing could be easier among these ignorant +people than to gain a reputation of holiness by hypocrisy, I used +to lurk about the temple all day without meat, as all the people +thought, but in the night I had my fill in the house of the two +Milanese. By this device, every one took me for a saint or holy +person, so that in a few days I could go about all the city +without being suspected. To help me in this assumed character, a +rich Mahometan merchant of Calicut happened to fall sick, having +his belly so constipated that he could get no ease; and as he was +a friend of my Persian companion, and the disease daily +increased, he at last asked me if I had any skill in physic. To +this I answered, that my father was a physician, and that I had +learnt many things from him. He then took me along with him to +see his friend the sick merchant, and being told that he was very +sick at the head and stomach, and sore constipated, and having +before learnt that he was a great eater and drinker, I felt his +pulse, and said that he was filled with choler or black bile, +owing to surfeiting, and that it was necessary he should have a +glyster. Then I made a glyster of eggs, salt, and sugar, together +with butter and such herbs as I could think of upon a sudden; and +in the space of a day and a night I gave him five such glysters, +but all in vain, for his pains and sickness increased, and I +began to repent me of my enterprise. But it was now necessary to +put a good face on the matter, and to attempt some other way, yet +my last error seemed worse than ever. Endeavouring to inspire him +with confidence, I made him lie grovelling on his belly, and, by +cords tied to his feet, I raised up the hinder part of his body, +so that he rested only on his breast and hands; and in this +posture I administered to him another glyster, allowing him to +remain in that position for half an hour. On beholding this +strange mode of practice, my Persian friend asked me, if that was +the manner of treating sick people in my country, to which I +answered that it was, but only in cases of extremity; on which he +observed with a smile, that he believed it would certainly +relieve him one way or other. In the mean time, the sick man +cried out in his own language, "It is enough, it is enough, for +my soul now departeth." We comforted him as well as we could, +desiring him to have patience yet a little longer; and almost +immediately his belly was loosened, and he voided like a gutter. +We then let him down, and he continued to discharge a prodigious +quantity, so that shortly the pain of his head and stomach left +him, and his fever was assuaged, which gave us all great joy. By +this adventurous cure, and my counterfeit holiness, I grew into +great credit, and when my patient offered me ten pieces of gold +as my reward, I would only accept two, which I gave away +immediately among the poor.</p> + +<p>These silly people believed implicitly in my hypocrisy, which +I shewed in a constrained gravity of countenance and deportment, +and by forbearing openly from eating flesh, insomuch that all +thought themselves happy to have me at their houses, or to kiss +my hands and feet. The report also of my companion, that he had +met with me first at Mecca, where I had gone to see the body of +the holy prophet Mahomet, greatly increased among the Mahometans +the opinion of my sanctity. But all this while, I used to resort +secretly in the night to the house of the Milanese Christians; +and learning from them that the twelve Portuguese ships were +arrived at Cananore, I thought that it was now a favourable +opportunity for me to escape. I remained, however, for seven days +more, learning every thing I could respecting the preparations +that were making by the king of Calicut and his people against +the Portuguese, in regard to their army, artillery, and every +thing relative to the war. But, before I speak of the manner of +my departure, it may be proper to say something of the religious +practices of the Mahometans.</p> + +<p>For calling the people to the mosque, their priests and other +ministers, of whom there are a great number, ascend to the +highest tower of the temple, where they sound three or four brass +trumpets instead of bells, and then call to the people in a loud +voice to come to prayers. Then stopping one ear with their +finger, they call out in their own language, <i>Alla u eccubar, +etc.</i> That is to say, "God is great! God is great! Come to the +temple of the great God! Come pray to the great God! God is +great! God is great! God was! God is! Mahomet, the messenger of +God, shall arise!" They even invited me to the mosque, and +desired me to pray to God for the Mahometans; and this I did +outwardly, but with quite a different meaning from them. They +have certain daily and stated prayers as we have, in which they +call upon God as their father, and they even vouchsafe to name +the blessed Virgin Mary; but they always wash before prayers. +Standing all in order, after the priest has prayed, the whole +people pray in their own language.</p> + +<p>At this time I feigned myself sick, and finding some occasion +or pretext for going to Cananore, I advertised my companion +thereof, who gave me his consent, saying that he would shortly +follow me to that place, and in the meantime gave me letters +recommending me to a friend and countryman of his, a rich +merchant at that place, desiring him to give me kind +entertainment for his sake. The day before my departure, I made +the before-mentioned Milanese Christians privy to my intentions, +and my companion made me join company with two other Persian +merchants who were going to Cananore, as there were then in +Calicut many merchants of Persia, Syria, and Turkey. Therefore, +on the 1st of December, having hired a light bark, I and my two +companions set sail; but had hardly got from shore an +arrow-flight, when four of the <i>nairs</i> of the king's guard +called to the pilot of our vessel, and ordered him, in the king's +name, to come to land. When the nairs understood who we were, +they asked the Persians why they carried me along with them, +without licence from the king? Then the Persians said, that this +was a holy man, who meant to accompany them to Cananore. The +nairs answered, that they knew I was a person who had wrought +miracles; but as I could speak the language of the Portuguese, it +was to be feared that I might betray their secrets to the enemy, +and give them notice of the navy and army which had been prepared +at Calicut against them, and therefore they strictly enjoined the +pilot to carry us no farther. He accordingly obeyed their orders, +and left us on the shore. It was then proposed by one of the +Persians that we should return to Calicut, on which I advised him +to take heed how he did so, as he would be in danger of losing +all his silks, if it should be discovered that he had not paid +the king's custom. Then he asked my advice as to what I thought +was best for us to do in the present exigency, and I advised that +we should travel along the shore, in hopes of finding some other +bark for our purpose. They agreed to this proposal, and we +accordingly travelled twelve miles along the shore, our slaves +carrying our baggage; and I leave any judicious person to +conceive the terror I was in, during this time, of being stopt by +the servants of the king of Calicut. At length, by good +providence, we found a poor fisherman, who agreed to carry us in +his boat to Cananore, where we arrived in safety late at night. +We went immediately to wait upon the Persian merchant, to whom I +had letters of recommendation from my companion. Their tenor was +as follows: That he should receive me into his house, and +entertain me in a friendly manner, till his own arrival, and that +whatever friendship was shewn me should be considered as done to +himself, as I was a holy man, and united with him in the +strictest friendship. Immediately on reading this letter, the +merchant laid his hand on his head, and bid me welcome, swearing +by his head that I was in safety, and caused a good supper to be +set before us. After supper, the Persians and I took a walk by +the sea side, and we soon came to where the Portuguese ships were +lying at anchor. I am utterly unable to express the joy I felt on +seeing these ships, but which I took care should not be observed +by my companions. In our walk, I observed where the Portuguese +had built their fortress, and determined within myself to go +there as soon as possible.</p> + +<p>Next day, finding a fit opportunity, I went towards the +Portuguese fortress, which is not above four furlongs from the +city of Cananore, and chanced to meet two Portuguese by the way, +at whom I inquired in Spanish if that were the fortress of the +Portuguese. They asked if I were a Christian? and having answered +that I was, they demanded to know whence I came? I told them that +I was from Calicut, on which they said they would immediately +shew me the way to their governor, whose name was Lorenzo[106], +son to the viceroy. They accordingly brought me before him, and +when I was come into his presence, I fell down on my knees, and +entreated him in all humility, for the sake of Christ, to whom I +was consecrated in baptism, that he would have compassion upon +me, and deliver me out of the hands of these infidel dogs. When +it was noised about in the city that I had escaped to the +Christians, there began a stir and mutiny among the people, upon +which the governor commanded his officers and men to put their +artillery and all things in readiness, lest the people in their +sudden rage should make any attempt against the fortress; but +every thing was speedily pacified. After this, the governor took +me by the hand into a hall or room by ourselves, and demanded to +know what the king and people of Calicut were preparing to do +against the Christians. I informed him of all things as far as I +knew, having diligently inquired into all their preparations and +designs. When I had thus informed the governor of all I knew, he +appointed a galley commanded by one Joam Serano to carry me to +the viceroy, who was then at Cochin.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 106: Don Francisco de Almeyda was viceroy +of Portuguese India from 1507 to 1510, both inclusive, and his +son Lorenzo made a conspicuous figure on several occasions under +his father. It is true that Verthema appears in the present +journal to have returned from India to Europe in the end of 1506 +or beginning of 1507; but the dates of the present journal are +exceedingly few and vague, and the incidents which it relates +could hardly have occurred in so short a period as between the +commencement of 1503 and close of 1506.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The viceroy received me very favourably, and then I gave him +an account of all the warlike preparations at Calicut. After this +I humbly implored pardon for the two Italians, Peter Anthony and +John Maria, who had made artillery for the infidel princes, +declaring that they were desirous to return to the Christians, +and would do them good service, for that all they had hitherto +done at Calicut was by constraint, and that all they asked was a +safe conduct and money to defray their charges. The viceroy +listened to my petition, and three days afterwards he sent me +back to Cananore with letters to his son, commanding him to +deliver me as much money as might suffice for the Christian spies +at Calicut. At Cananore, I procured an idolater, who from poverty +had been forced to pawn his wife and children, and engaged him to +carry a letter from me to the two Milanese at Calicut, informing +them that the viceroy had granted their pardon and safe conduct, +with money for their charges. I desired them to make no one privy +to their intended departure, and particularly not to let it be +known to their slaves or concubines, each of them having a +concubine, a child, and a slave, and to leave all their goods +behind, except things of great value, such as gold coin and +precious stones. They had a very fine diamond of 32 carats, +reckoned to be worth 35,000 crowns; a pearl of 24 carats; 2000 +rubies, some of which weighed one carat, and others a carat and +half; upwards of 60 bracelets, garnished with many fine jewels; +and about 1500 pieces of gold coin. But in consequence of their +covetousness, while they sought to save all they lost all, and +their lives to boot; for, not content with carrying off all these +riches, they would needs carry along with them, in spite of the +advice I sent, four guns, three monkeys, two musquets, and two of +those wheels on which precious stones are polished. The attempt +to carry off these bulky articles was the cause of their +destruction, as one of their slaves gave notice to the zamorin or +king of Calicut of what was going on. The zamorin would not at +first believe the information, having conceived a good opinion of +their fidelity, yet sent four of his nairs to examine into the +truth of the information. But the slave, perceiving that the +zamorin seemed inclined to deal favourably with them, went to the +cady or chief priest of the Mahometans, and told him all that he +had said to the zamorin, adding that the two Christians had +disclosed all their secrets to the Portuguese. The eddy +immediately convened a council of all the Mahometan merchants, +willing them to give an hundred pieces of gold to the <i>king of +Gioghi</i>[107], who was then at Calicut, and to speak to him in +the following terms: "It is not unknown to you, most noble +prince, that when your majesty came to this place some years ago, +we received you in a more honourable manner than we are now +enabled to do. The change in our behaviour is not owing to any +want of good will towards you, but is occasioned by the great and +manifold injuries which we have sustained, and are daily +suffering from our mortal enemies the Christians. We have at the +present moment a notable example of this in two Christian +traitors now residing in this city, who have disclosed all our +secrets to the Portuguese; and therefore we most humbly petition +that you would be pleased to accept from us an hundred pieces of +gold, and to issue your commands that these traitorous Christians +shall be slain."</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 107: This king of <i>Gioghi</i> was +probably the chief bramin in the southern part of India, a +species of patriarch or pope of the braminical idolatry, similar +to the king of <i>Joga</i>, formerly mentioned, in Guzerat, in +these travels of Verthema. In a future part of our collection we +shall have a more favourable opportunity of explaining the +hierarchy of the Hindoos.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When this oration was repeated to the <i>king of Gioghi</i>, +he immediately accepted the gift, and consented to the prayer of +the petition, and appointed two hundred of his followers to put +the Milanese to death. These men, that they might not be +suspected by the devoted Christians, came in small bodies to +their house, only ten at a time, as if to demand their customary +reward. But on seeing so great a number of men assembled about +their house, the Christians began to suspect that they were in +search of something beyond their usual reward or offering, +wherefore taking to their arms, they so bravely defended +themselves, that they slew six of the assailants and wounded +forty: But at length some of the <i>Gioghi</i> or Jogues, shot +them both with arrows from cross-bows, one being sore wounded in +the head and the other in the body; and as soon as they saw them +fall, they broke into the house and cut their throats. Then +taking the warm blood into the palms of their hands, they drank +it up, using the most contumelious expressions against the +Christians. After this murder, the concubine of John Maria came +to Cananore with her young son, whom I bought of her for eight +pieces of gold, and had him baptized by the name of Lorenzo, as +he was christened on the festival of St Laurence. But he died +within a year afterwards of the lues venerea, which disease has +been spread over almost the whole world, as I have seen many +infected with it 400 miles beyond Calicut. It is there called +<i>pua</i>, and they affirm that it was not seen there till about +seventeen years before; yet it is there more grievous and +destructive than with us in Italy.</p> + +<p>SECTION XI.</p> + +<p><i>Account of a memorable Battle between the Mahometan Navy of +Calicut and the Portuguese</i>.</p> + +<p>On the 4th of March 1506, intelligence was received at +Cananore of the death of the two Milanese Christians at Calicut, +and on the same day the Calicut fleet set sail from the cities of +<i>Pavan? Capagot? Pandaram</i>? and <i>Trompatam</i>? It +consisted of 208 vessels [108], of which 84 were ships of +considerable size and burden, and the rest were rowing vessels +which are called <i>paraos</i>. This great fleet was manned with +a prodigious number of Mahometans richly dressed in purple silk +and cotton, also with high pointed caps after their fashion of +the same colour, lined with silk, having their arms decked with +many bracelets, and embroidered gloves on their hands. For +weapons, they had Turkish bows, swords, lances, +<i>peltes</i>[109], and all kind of guns made in our manner. When +we saw their fleet proceeding in order and well appointed, it +seemed afar off like a great wood, so numerous were the masts, +yet were we in sure belief that God would give us the victory +over the blasphemers of his holy name, and that we should prevail +against the idolaters and Saracens, the ancient enemies of the +religion of the blessed Jesus. Therefore the valiant knight our +governor, Don Lorenzo, the son of Don Francisco de Almeyda, +viceroy of India, who had the supreme command of twelve +Portuguese ships, with the assistance of the admiral, assembled +all the Portuguese soldiers and mariners by sound of trumpet, and +spoke to them after this manner: "Dear friends, and brethren in +one God and in one faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, it is now time +for us to consider that our Lord spared not to give his precious +body unto death for our sakes; wherefore it is our bounden duty +to spend our lives in defence of his glory and of our holy faith, +assuring ourselves of victory over these infidel dogs, who are +hated of God, being the progeny of the devil. Now, therefore, +fighting in his holy name and under the banner of his cross, shew +yourselves valiant, as you have now a fair opportunity to gain +eternal fame in defending the glorious cause of your Lord and +Saviour. Therefore, along with me, raising our hearts to God, and +our arms with force and courage against the enemy, in the name of +the Lord, let us manfully give the onset." When Don Lorenzo had +spoken these words, the priest went up to the highest part of the +ship, holding in his hands the picture of Christ nailed to the +cross, which he exposed to the view of all the soldiers, and +earnestly exhorted them to remember the commands of God, and the +holy faith in which they were consecrated by baptism, having no +doubt that all their sins should be forgiven to those who fell in +the cause of God. Then blessing them in the name of the Lord, he +pronounced the absolution and forgivenness of their sins. This +exhortation of the priest so moved all our hearts, that tears of +joy ran from our eyes, and we were all animated with a desire of +dying in the holy cause.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 108: According to the account of this great +armament formerly given in the History of the Portuguese +Transactions in India, the fleet of the Mahometans and Zamorin on +this occasion consisted of 260 paraos, 60 of which exceeded the +size of the armed ships then used in India by the Portuguese. The +action between the Portuguese and their enemies is there stated +to have been in 1508.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 109: Perhaps cross-bows, or it may probably +signify leathern targets, or shields made of <i>pelts</i> or +skins.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the mean time the Mahometan fleet made sail towards us, and +on the same day our admiral went to reconnoitre their fleet with +two foists, and passing between two of their largest ships +discharged his ordnance on both sides, on purpose to try the +strength of those ships in which they placed the greatest +confidence. But nothing of any importance occurred this day. Next +day the enemy made sail towards Cananore, and sent a message to +our commanders, saying, that if they were permitted to pursue +their voyage they would not attack us. To this it was answered, +that the Christians had not forgotten the perjury and violated +faith of the Mahometans, when they prevented the Christians from +passing that way on a former occasion, and had slain 47 +Portuguese, and robbed them of 4000 pieces of gold: Wherefore, +they might proceed at their peril, and should learn of what +spirit and reputation in arms the Christians were composed. Then +said the Mahometans, "Mahomet will defend us and confound the +Christians." Then with great fury they assaulted us all at once, +thinking to have forced their way through our fleet, as they were +only 10 miles from Cananore. Our admiral intentionally allowed +them to draw near until they were right over-against Cananore, +when he intended to set upon them with all his force, that the +rajah or king of Cananore might be a witness of the valour of the +Christians. When the trumpeter of the admiral sounded the charge +as a signal of battle, the admiral immediately assaulted two of +the largest ships of the enemy, casting his grappling irons and +chains, that he might fight them hand to hand. After throwing our +grapplings three times in vain, they caught hold the fourth time, +on which the Christians boarded the greatest ship, and made such +havoc that the whole crew of 600 Mahometans were slain, not one +escaping or being made prisoner. Encouraged by this success, the +admiral immediately grappled another large ship which had chained +itself to one of the Christian foists; this ship was likewise +taken and sunk, with the loss of 500 Mahometans. Discouraged by +this defeat, the Mahometans assailed our twelve foists with all +their force, <i>and carried them away</i>. On this emergency the +captain of the galley, Joam Serano, shewed the utmost gallantry, +as he fiercely assaulted in his single galley those ships of the +enemy which had <i>carried away</i> our foists, and made such +prodigious slaughter among the Mahometans as seemed quite +incredible, so that he recovered all the foists, and sunk two +other Mahometan ships. The conflict continued with unabated fury +from morning till the darkness of the night parted the +combatants, and God so favoured the Christians that few of them +were slain, though many were wounded.</p> + +<p>I must not omit to notice the zeal and courage displayed by +Simon Martin, the captain of one of our ships, on the following +occasion in this battle. It so happened that the brigantine in +which I was, was at one time somewhat parted from the rest of our +ships, on which four ships of the enemy assailed us all at once; +and 150 of the Mahometans having boarded our vessel, constrained +us to flee to the poop for safety. While we were in this extreme +danger, Simon Martin leapt on board our vessel, invoking the name +of Jesus to aid him, and fought with such desperate valour that +he slew six of the enemy with his own bond. Encouraged by his +gallantry, we came down from the poop to his assistance, and so +handled the Mahometans that they leapt overboard for safety, when +some of them were drowned and others escaped by swimming. Upon +this our success, the enemy sent down four other foists to help +those who were already engaged against us. But our captain took +several empty casks in which gunpowder had been kept before, and +placed them in such a manner on the side of our brigantine, that +they seemed like large pieces of artillery, standing beside them +with a <i>fire-stick</i> or lighted match, as if about to +discharge them. This device put the enemy in such fear that they +departed from us.</p> + +<p>Our admiral continued to pursue the enemy, and gave them +another great overthrow, taking seven of their foists laden with +various kinds of merchandise, and sank ten others by the shot of +his artillery, one of which was laden with elephants. Hie enemy, +seeing the ocean almost covered with the bodies of their slain, +their principal ships taken, sunk, or much injured, and having +lost all hope of victory, endeavoured to save themselves by +flight. But the Portuguese determined to follow up their success, +and again brought them to battle, which continued a whole day and +night, to the utter discomfiture of the Mahometans, most of whose +vessels were sunk. At this time some of our foists saw a large +ship belonging to the enemy at some distance, and made sail +towards her; but as the enemy saw themselves overmatched, they +hurled all their carriages into the sea [110], after which they +leapt overboard themselves, in hopes to swim on shore, as they +are most expert swimmers. But our men followed them even to the +shore with lances, cross-bows, and stones, killing them while +swimming, so that the sea was coloured with their blood. Yet +about 200 of them escaped on shore, after swimming about 20 +miles. These Mahometans are all exceedingly expert swimmers, +being accustomed to it from their early youth; and while we +pursued them, they often dived and remained so long under water, +that we thought they had sunk outright, and when they came up +again and floated on the water, we thought we had been deceived +by phantoms. They were however mostly all destroyed afterwards by +one mischance or another, so that on this occasion the enemy lost +a prodigious number of men. After the battle and pursuit ceased, +our admiral sent some boats on shore in sundry places to number +the dead bodies, which had been cast up by the sea, when about +3000 were found, besides many that had been carried away by the +sea.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 110: Perhaps they threw their guns +overboard to lighten their vessel and facilitate their +escape.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The king of Cananore beheld this great victory from the shore, +and gave great commendations to the Portuguese for their valour, +and very deservedly; for, though I have been in many hard-fought +battles, I never saw greater valour than was displayed on this +occasion by the Portuguese. After this great victory, we thought +to have enjoyed peace and security, but worse events ensued; for +the king of Cananore, who was a great friend to the Portuguese, +died a few days afterwards, and was succeeded by a mortal enemy +to the Christians, and a great friend to the zamorin, by whole +interest he had been advanced to the kingdom of Cananore. This +new king assembled his forces to make war against the Portuguese +in all haste, believing that much of their ammunition had been +expended in the late naval battle, and that their men were much +wearied, and for the most part wounded, so that they would be +unable to make any great resistance. To aid him on this occasion, +the zamorin sent him 24 pieces of great cannon. This war began on +the 7th of April, and continued to the 20th of August [111], +before peace was restored. It were too long to recount all the +brave actions performed by the Christians in this war against the +Mahometans [112], who never encountered them with less than +twenty-five or twenty-six thousand men and 140 pieces of +artillery. The enemy on this occasion were armed in the manner +already mentioned respecting the weapons of the inhabitants of +Calicut, and the Christians in the harness and with the weapons +then used by us in Europe[113].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 111: From the context, combined with the +date of the late naval action, as given from the History of the +Portuguese Transactions, this land-war with the rajah of Cananore +must have been in 1509.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 112: In the naval battle the principal +force at least must have been Mahometans, as the Hindoos do not +use the sea; but, in this land-war with the new rajah of +Cananore, the nairs would constitute the main force of the enemy, +though there might be some Mahometan +auxiliaries.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 113: The European soldiers then wore +defensive armour and shields. And besides matchlocks, their +offensive arms were pikes, swords, and +cross-bows.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In their wars, the infidels divide their army into many +<i>wings</i>, or brigades, of two or three thousand men each, +only one of which proceeds to battle at a time, all the rest +waiting the result of this charge before they proceed to join +battle. While marching to give battle, it passes all imagination +to conceive the prodigious noise made by innumerable musical +instruments after their fashion, which fill the ears of their +soldiers and encourage them to fight; while in the mean time a +great number of men run before with artificial fireworks[114]. At +last they give the onset with such fury and outcry, that two or +three thousand of them are often able to put to flight 10,000 men +who are unused to this mode of warfare. But God in his merciful +providence never forsakes those who believe in his holy religion, +as was now exemplified in our distress. For, while the Portuguese +were in a manner overwhelmed with the multitude of their enemies, +the joyful news arrived that a new fleet had come from Portugal +to Cananore, under the valiant knight Don Tristan de Cunna, who +was immediately informed of the straits to which we were reduced. +He immediately sent us a reinforcement of 300 valiant soldiers, +well provided with defensive armour, and weapons of offence, +after the manner of the Christians. On the arrival of these +succours, we were so encouraged that we would have burnt the city +of Cananore, if our admiral had permitted us. But on learning the +arrival of this reinforcement, the enemy were so cast down that +they sought to make peace with us by every means they could think +of, and appointed one <i>Mamalmaricar</i>, a man of great riches +and wisdom, to be their ambassador, with full powers to conclude +peace. This man accordingly waited on our admiral, who told him +that he could not make peace without the authority of the +viceroy, who was then at Cochin: Yet it was thought best not to +reject the proffered peace, as, during war, the Portuguese could +not send home their ships with the commodities of India, and for +this reason the viceroy agreed to the conclusion of peace.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 114: Probably alluding to a kind of +javelins armed with a species of rockets, which have long been +used in the wars of India, and often produce great disorder among +the crowded masses of their ill-disciplined +troops.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>To mingle some pleasure with these tragedies, I shall now +rehearse a pleasant story, worthy of being remembered. One day +after the peace was settled, I happened to walk in the city of +Cananore with some merchant idolaters, with whom I was acquainted +before the war. They asked me to show them a certain Christian, +much taller and stronger than any of the others, who used every +day to slay about twenty of the Mahometans, and who at one time, +when assailed by fifty of the nairs, escaped unhurt. At first I +answered, that this valiant Christian had gone to Cochin to the +viceroy: But after some farther consideration, I told them that +this soldier was the God of the Portuguese, the great God who had +created the world. Then answered they, that the Mahometans had +said as much to them already, and therefore they were inclined to +believe that the God of the Christians was better and more +powerful than theirs. Thus it came to be rumoured all over the +country that the Portuguese had overcome more by the assistance +of God, than by the strength of man. These people are wonderfully +simple and ignorant, and are easily astonished at very trifling +matters; for when they saw one of our company ring a small +hand-bell, and that it ceased to make a noise when set down, they +took it for a miracle, saying one to another, "Doubtless the God +of these men is greater than ours, for when they touch that +little instrument it speaks, and when they touch it not it is +silent." They took much delight in seeing the celebration of +mass; and when the priest lifted up the holy bread, or host, I +said unto them, "Behold the God of the Christians and of all the +world." To which they answered, "You say truly, but we see him +not." I repeat this that it may be seen how ignorant these people +are. Yet are they great sorcerers, and can enchant the most +venomous serpents, so as to do no harm, though their venom is so +powerful as to kill only by touching. They are likewise of +wonderful agility, and are astonishingly expert in vaulting, +running, leaping, swimming, tumbling, walking on ropes, and such +other feats of activity.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII.</p> + +<p><i>Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe +by Sea.</i></p> + +<p>Those who engage to write any history, ought to keep in mind +what they have promised, lest after all their pains and trouble +they only reap shame and reproach. Wherefore, having in the +beginning of this performance engaged to write concerning the +navigation of Ethiopia, I shall now make an end of my long +travels and peregrinations, by a description of this voyage, in +which I shall speak of such things as I saw by the way, on my +return from India to my long wished-for country, along with the +Portuguese.</p> + +<p>Leaving India on the 7th of December[115], we directed our +course to Ethiopia[116]; and having sailed across the great gulf +we came to the island of <i>Monzambrick</i>, or Mozambique, which +is under the dominion of the king of Portugal. But before our +arrival there, we saw many towns and fortresses by the way, +belonging to the Portuguese, in the kingdoms of Melinda and +Mombaza. They have also some strong fortresses in Mozambique and +Sofala. Were I to enlarge upon the memorable deeds of the valiant +Tristran de Cunna, on his return from India, I should enter upon +a subject far beyond my powers, being such as would rather +require the pen of a Homer or a Virgil: For he invaded and +subdued the great cities of <i>Gogia, Pati</i>, and +<i>Crava[117]</i>, and also the goodly island of <i>Sacutara</i>, +[Socotoro,] where a fortress was erected by order of the king of +Portugal. I omit also to speak of many islands which we saw by +the way, such as the island of <i>Cumeris</i>, or Curia Muria, +and six others, which produce plenty of ginger, sugar, and other +goodly fruits, and the most fruitful island of <i>Penda</i>, +which is likewise subject to the Portuguese.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 115: Probably of the year +1508.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 116: It is hardly necessary to remark, that +the term Ethiopia is here applied to the western coast of Africa +on the ocean.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 117: The Gogia of the text is probably Oja, +on the coast of Africa, 17 leagues from Melinda, and Pati may +possibly be some corruption of Paniany, both of these places +having been reduced by de Cunna. Crava may be an error for Brava, +on the western coast of Africa.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From the island of Mozambique, which belongs to Portugal, it +brought much gold and ivory, but these come from the continent of +Ethiopia. This island is not large, but has a commodious port, +and is inhabited by black Mahometans[118], who are in great want +of all the necessaries of life, having no corn or provisions but +what are brought from the continent. We landed on the continental +part of Ethiopia to see the country, where we saw a barbarous +Vagabond people of blacks, both men and women going entirely +naked, except covering their parts of shame with leaves of trees. +Their lips are two fingers thick, their foreheads very large, and +they have great teeth as white as snow. They are exceedingly +timorous and fearful of armed men; wherefore six of us, well +armed with muskets, and accompanied by a black slave who knew the +country, went a considerable way inland to view the country. When +we had gone forwards a days journey, we came to many herds of +elephants, and our guide recommended to us to carry burning +firebrands in our hands, as these beasts are afraid of fire above +all things; but we chanced to fall in with three female elephants +that had lately calved, and they could not be scared by our fire, +but followed us so far that we were obliged to save ourselves by +scrambling up a steep mountain.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 118: Perhaps this expression ought to have +been black-a-moors, the old name for negroes.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When we were about ten miles inland, we came to a cave on the +side of a mountain inhabited by some of the black natives, whose +manner of speech was so strange and chattering, like so many +apes, that I am unable to express the manner of their language, +which comes near the strange jargon used by the muleteers of +Sicily, when they drive their mules[119]. Our pilot asked us if +we were inclined to purchase any cattle from these people, saying +that we might have them at a very low price; but suspecting that +he either mocked us, or meant, in concert with the natives, to +impose upon us, we said that we had no money. Then he told us +that these people wanted no money, having already gold in greater +plenty than we, which they procure not far from where we were. On +asking him what articles they were desirous of in payment for +their cattle, he said they preferred things of small value, such +as pins, knives, scissars, looking-glasses, hawks-bells, bags, or +boxes, to contain their gold, copper rings, <i>janglings</i> to +hang at their timbrils, bosses, laces, broaches, copper-chains, +caskanets, bracelets, and such like baubles to deck their wives +and children. We then said that we would willingly give them such +things for their cattle if they would bring them to us at the +shore; but the pilot said the natives would drive them to the +next mountain, but no farther on any condition. Then one of our +companions said that he had a boss of engraven copper, and a +small bell; and as I had none of such merchandise, and yet was +desirous of eating fresh meat, I said I would give one of my +shirts to buy cattle. The pilot engaged to make our purchases to +the best advantage, and calling five or six of the natives about +him, he shewed them our <i>goodly jewels,</i> and demanded from +them <i>three hundred</i> head of cattle. The natives, not +differing much from beasts, answered by signs that they would +only give fifteen. At length we made a bargain, though we still +suspected some deceit; yet they kept their promise, and sent us +fifteen beasts by two of their companions. We had scarcely gone +when we heard a noise and tumult among them, and were in some +fear lest these <i>troglodites</i> might follow to do us some +injury, wherefore leaving the cattle we took to our weapons. But +they made signs to us to fear nothing, and the pilot told us they +were quarrelling who should have the copper boss. Then recovering +our cattle, we drove them forward to the top of the mountain, +where we dismissed the two natives, and continued our journey +towards the coast. While driving our cattle past a little wood, +we again fell in with the elephants, which put us in such fear +that we abandoned our cattle and trusted to our feet, making the +best of our way to the island.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 119: Perhaps alluding to the <i>cluck</i>, +which occurs perpetually in the language of the Hottentots, +resembling the sound used in some parts to urge on a horse, and +which is inexpressible in orthography.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Having made provision for our voyage of such things as could +be procured at Mozambique, we sailed for the Cape of Good Hope, +passing the island of St Lawrence, otherwise called Madagascar, +which is 80 leagues from the nearest part of the continent. I +suppose that in a short time the Portuguese will be masters of +this island, as they have burned and destroyed many of its towns +and villages, and are much feared by the natives. So far as I +conjecture by my peregrinations, especially those in India and +Ethiopia, it is my opinion that the king of Portugal is likely to +be the richest king in the world, if he continue as he has begun; +and certainly his dignity and godly zeal is not unworthy of such +high fortune, as by his means the knowledge of the Christian +faith is greatly extended. In Cochin, where the viceroy of India +resides, every holiday ten or twelve Mahometans or idolaters are +professed to our religion; so that we may have good hope that in +time our faith may greatly spread with the blessing of God, who +hath given such miraculous victories to the Christians; wherefore +all who profess to believe in the holy name of Christ, ought +incessantly to pray to God to assist the king of Portugal in so +godly an enterprise.</p> + +<p>When we had sailed about two hundred miles beyond the Cape of +Good Hope, there arose a sudden tempest of contrary wind, which +towed us to and fro for seven days in great danger, but we +escaped by the blessing of God. After the cessation of this +tempest, and when we had again proceeded other two hundred miles +on our voyage, a new tempest arose, which scattered all our ships +during six days that it continued, so that we did not all meet +again till our arrival at Lisbon in Portugal. I was in a ship +called the St Vincent, belonging to one Bartholomew a Florentine, +who was a citizen of Lisbon. She was a vessel of great size, and +carried seven hundred tons of spices of all kinds. We passed the +island of St Helena, near which we saw certain fishes of such +enormous bigness that one of them was as large as a great house. +When they rise above water, or gape or yawn, the upper jaw covers +all the forehead, as it were a soldier in shining armour, and +when they swim along the surface of the deep, the forehead seems +three paces broad. As they swam about near the ships, they raised +such a commotion in the sea that we discharged all our artillery +to drive them away. We soon afterwards came to an island named +<i>Ascension,</i> where we saw many birds about the size of +ducks, which were so stupid that we took them with our hands, yet +immediately afterwards they shewed wonderful fierceness. In that +island we saw no outer living creatures besides these birds, +which seemed as if they had never seen mankind before, and there +were prodigious quantities of fish around its shores.</p> + +<p>Having sailed many days beyond that island, we seemed to have +returned again into our own world, as the north star, the guide +of mariners, appeared to us. Here we have a good opportunity of +refuting the opinion of those who think that it is impossible to +sail in the regions of the antartic pole by the guidance of the +north star; for it is undeniable that the Portuguese sail by the +aid of the north polar star, although entirely hidden from their +sight in the antartic region of the sea. Yet they frequently +refresh the virtue of the needle by means of that stone which +ever naturally points towards the north. A few days afterwards we +arrived at a fair region, in which are seen many islands called +the <i>Astures</i> Açores, so named from the multitude of +that species of eagles or hawks which are called açores or +<i>azores</i>. These islands are variously named, as <i>Pico</i>, +<i>Martii</i>, <i>Corvo</i>, <i>Flores</i>, <i>St George</i>, +<i>Gratiosa</i> and <i>Fyal</i>. From thence we went to the +island of <i>Tercera</i>, where we remained two days. All these +are very fertile, and have abundance of all the necessaries of +life.</p> + +<p>Departing from thence, we came in seven days sailing to +<i>Luxburne</i> or <i>Ulisbona</i>, [<i>Lisbon</i>] in Portugal. +On my arrival I was carried to the presence of the king, whose +hand I had the honour to kiss, and with most humble reverence I +thanked his majesty for the great favour I had found with his +officers and subjects in India. He entertained me very graciously +at his court, until I had informed him fully of all that I had +observed in my peregrinations in various parts of India. Some +days afterwards, I shewed his majesty the letters-patent by which +his viceroy in India had honoured me with the order of +knighthood, and humbly requested of his majesty to confirm the +same under his great seal, which he was graciously pleased to +grant. Then departing from Lisbon, with the passport and safe +conduct of the king, I returned at length, after these my long +and perilous travels, to my long-desired native home, the city of +Rome, by the blessing of God, to whom be all honour and +glory.</p> + +<p><i>End of the Voyages of Verthema.</i></p> + +<h2><a name="chapter3-6" id="chapter3-6">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2> + +<p>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS OF CESAR FREDERICK IN INDIA[120].</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>This article has been adopted from the Collection of Hakluyt, +and, with that immediately preceding, may serve as a supplement +to the Portuguese Transactions in India. The entire title, as +given in that early and curious Collection, is "<i>The Voyage and +Travel of M. Cesar Fredericke, Merchant of Venice, into the East +India and beyond the Indies: Wherein are contained the Customes +and Rites of these Countries, the Merchandise and Commodities, as +well of Golde as Silver, as Spices, Drugges, Pearles, and other +Jewels. Translated out of Italian by M. Thomas Hickocke</i>."</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 120: Hakluyt, II. pp. 359--375. Ed. Lond. +1810.]</blockquote> + +<p>In adapting the present chapter to the purposes of our +Collection, the only liberty we have taken with the ancient +translation exhibited by Hakluyt, has been to employ the modern +orthography in the names of places, persons, and things, and to +modernise the language throughout. As in the itinerary of +Verthema, to avoid the multiplication of notes unnecessarily we +have corrected the frequently vicious orthography of these names +as given by Cesar Frederick and his original translator, either +by substituting the true names or more generally received modern +orthography, or by subjoining the right name in the text +immediately after that employed by the author. When the names +employed in the original translation of this Journal are so +corrupt as to be beyond our power to rectify, or where we are +doubtful of our correction, we have marked them with a point of +interrogation, as doubtful or unknown, as has likewise been done +in our version of the Itinerary of Verthema. These two journals, +besides that they coincide with the plan of our arrangement of +giving as many appropriate original journals of voyages and +travels as we can procure, contain a great number of curious +particulars, nowhere else to be met with, respecting the manners +and customs of various parts of India, between the years 1503 and +1581, with many intersecting notices respecting its history, +production, and trade.</p> + +<p>We learn from the following journal, that Cesar Frederick +began his peregrination in 1563; and, as he informs us in his +preface, that he was continually employed in coasting and +travelling for eighteen years, he could not have returned to +Venice before the year 1581. In the publication of this journal +in the Collection of Hakluyt, it is very irregularly divided into +fragments, upon no apparent principles of regular distribution; +but on the present occasion it has been arranged in sections, so +as to suit the general plan of the present work.--E.</p> + +<p><i>Cesar Frederick to the Reader.</i></p> + +<p>Having for the space of eighteen years continually coasted and +travelled over almost all the East Indies, and many other +countries beyond the Indies, both with good and bad success; and +having seen and learned many things worthy of notice, which have +never been before communicated to the world; I have thought it +right, since the Almighty hath graciously been pleased to return +me to my native country, the noble city of Venice, to write and +publish this account of the perils I have encountered during my +long and arduous peregrinations by sea and land, together with +the many wonderful things I have seen in the Indies; the mighty +princes that govern these countries; the religion or faith in +which they live; their rites and customs; the various successes I +experienced; and which of these countries abound in drugs and +jewels: All of which may be profitable to such as desire to make +a similar voyage: Therefore, that the world may be benefited by +my experience, I have caused my voyages and travels to be +printed, which I now present to you, gentle and loving readers, +in hopes that the variety of things contained in this book may +give you delight.</p> + +<p>SECTION I.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor.</i></p> + +<p>In the year 1563, while residing at Venice, being desirous to +see the eastern parts of the world, I embarked in a ship called +the <i>Gradaige</i> of Venice, commanded by Jacomo Vatica, bound +for Cyprus, taking with me certain merchandise. On arriving at +Cyprus, I left that ship, and went in a lesser to Tripoli in +Syria, where I made a short stay. I then travelled by land to +Aleppo, where I became acquainted with some Armenian and Moorish +merchants, and agreed to accompany them to Ormuz. We accordingly +departed together from Aleppo, and came to the city of <i>Bir</i> +in two days journey and a-half.</p> + +<p>Bir is a small city in which provisions are very scarce, +situated in Asia Minor, [in lat. 37° 5' N. long. 38° E. +from Greenwich], the river Euphrates running near its walls. In +this city, the merchants who intend to descend the Euphrates form +themselves into companies or associations, according to the +quantities of merchandise they possess, and either build or buy a +boat to carry themselves and their goods down the Euphrates to +Babylon[121], under the care of a master and mariners hired to +conduct the boat. These boats are almost flat-bottomed and very +strong, yet serve only for one voyage, as it is impossible to +navigate them upwards. They are fitted for the shallowness of the +river, which in many places is full of great stones which greatly +obstruct the navigation. At <i>Feluchia</i> a small city on the +Euphrates, the merchants pull their boats to pieces or sell them +for a small price; as a boat that cost forty or fifty chequins at +Bir sells only at Feluchia for seven or eight chequins. When the +merchants return back from Babylon, if they have merchandise or +goods that pay custom, they travel through the wilderness in +forty days, passing that way at much less expence than the other. +If they have no such merchandise, they then go by the way of +Mosul in Mesopotamia, which is attended with great charges both +for the caravan and company. From Bir to <i>Feluchia</i>. on the +Euphrates, over against Babylon, which is on the Tigris, if the +river have sufficient water, the voyage down the river may be +made in fifteen or eighteen days; but when the water is low in +consequence of long previous drought, the voyage is attended with +much trouble, and will sometimes require forty or fifty days to +get down. In this case the boats often strike on the stones in +the river, when it becomes necessary to unlade and repair them, +which is attended with much trouble and delay; and on this +account the merchants have always one or two spare boats, that if +one happen to split or be lost by striking on the shoals, they +may have another ready to take in their goods till they have +repaired the broken boat If they were to draw the broken boat on +the land for repair, it would be difficult to defend it in the +night from the great numbers of Arabs that would come to rob and +plunder them. Every night, when it is necessary to make fast the +boat to the bank, good watch must be kept against the Arabs, who +are great thieves and as numerous as ants; yet are they not given +to murder on these occasions, but steal what they can and run +away. Arquebuses are excellent weapons for keeping off these +Arabs, as they are in great fear of the shot. In passing down the +river from Bir to Feluchia, there are certain towns and villages +on the Euphrates belonging to <i>the son of Aborise</i>, king of +the Arabs and of the desert, at some of which the merchants have +to pay so many <i>medins</i> of custom on each bale.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 121: It is obvious that Bagdat is here +meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION II.</p> + +<p><i>Of Feluchia and Babylon.</i></p> + +<p>Feluchia is a village on the Euphrates, where they who come +from Bir for Babylon disembark with their goods, and go thence by +land to Babylon, a journey of a day and a half. Babylon is no +great city, but is very populous and is greatly resorted to by +strangers, being the great thoroughfare for Persia, Turkey and +Arabia, and from this place there are frequent caravans to +different countries. Babylon is abundantly supplied with +provisions, which are brought down the river Tigris on certain +rafts or <i>zattores</i> called Vtrij, the river Tigris running +past the walls of Babylon. The blown-up hides of which these +rafts are composed, are bound fast together, on which boards are +laid, and on these boards the commodities are loaded. When +unladed at Babylon, the air is let out of the skins, which are +then laid on the backs of camels and carried back to serve for +another voyage. The city of Babylon is properly speaking in the +kingdom of Persia, but is now under the dominion of the Turks. On +the other side of the river towards Arabia, over against Babylon, +there is a handsome town in which is an extensive Bazar for the +merchants, with many lodging rooms, in which the greater part of +the stranger merchants that go to Babylon expose their goods for +sale. The passage across the river between Babylon and this town +is by a long bridge of boats chained together with great chains: +And when the river is swollen by the great rains, this bridge is +opened in the middle, one half falling alongside of the walls of +Babylon, and the other half along the opposite bank of the +borough. So long as the bridge remains open, the people cross +from side to side in small boats with much danger, by reason of +their smallness, and that they are usually overladen, so that +they are very liable to be overset by the swiftness of the +current, or to be carried away and wrecked on the banks. In this +manner-many people are lost and drowned, as I have often +witnessed.</p> + +<p>The tower of Nimrod, or Babel, is situated on the Arabian side +of the Tigris, in a great plain, seven or eight miles from +Babylon. Being ruined on every side, it has formed a great +mountain, yet a considerable part of the tower is still standing, +compassed and almost covered up by these ruins. It has been built +of square bricks dried in the sun, and constructed in the +following manner. In the first place a course of bricks was laid, +then a mat made of canes squared like the bricks, and daubed with +earth instead of lime mortar; and these mats still remain so +strong that it is wonderful considering their great antiquity. I +have gone all round it without being able to discover any place +where there had been a door or entrance, and in my opinion it may +be about a mile in circumference or rather less. Contrary to all +other things, which appear small at a distance and become larger +the nearer they are approached, this tower appears largest when +seen from afar, and seems less as you come nearer. This may be +accounted for, as the tower stands in a very large plain, and +with its surrounding ruins forms the only perceptible object; so +that from a distance the tower and the mountains formed of its +ruins make a greater shew than it is found to be on coming +near.</p> + +<p>SECTION III.</p> + +<p><i>Of Basora.</i></p> + +<p>From Babylon I embarked in one of those small vessels which +ply upon the Tigris between Babylon and Basora, which are built +after the manner of foists or galliots, having a +<i>speron</i>[122] and a covered poop. They use no pumps, being +so well daubed with pitch as effectually to exclude the water. +This pitch they have from a great plain near the city of +<i>Heit</i> on the Euphrates, two days journey from Babylon. This +plain full of pitch is marvellous to behold, and a thing almost +incredible, as from a hole in the earth the pitch is continually +thrown into the air with a constant great smoke; and being hot it +falls as it were sprinkled all over the plain, in such abundance +that the plain is always full of pitch[123]. The Moors and Arabs +of the neighbourhood allege that this hole is the mouth of Hell; +and in truth it is a very memorable object From this native pitch +or bitumen the whole people of that country derive great benefit, +as with it they pay or serve their barks, which they call +<i>Daneck</i> and <i>Saffin</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 122: In imitation of the original +translator Hickocke and Hakluyt, this word must be left +untranslated and unexplained.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 123: This account of the hole which +discharges pitch or native bitumen mixed with water is most true; +the water and pitch running into the valley <i>or island</i>, +where the pitch remains, and the water runs into the Euphrates, +when it occasions the water for a long way to have a brackish +taste with the smell of pitch and brimstone.--Hakl.]</blockquote> + +<p>When the river Tigris is well replenished with water, the +passage from Babylon or Bagdat to Basora may be made in eight or +nine days, less or more according to circumstances; we were +fourteen or fifteen days, because the water was low, and when the +waters are at the lowest it requires eighteen days. Having no +rocks or shoals in the river, the voyage may be continued day and +night. There are some places by the way at which you have to pay +so many medins for each bale, as toll or custom. Basora, Bussora, +or Busrah, [in lat. 30° 20' N. long. 47° 40' E.] is a +city on the Arabian side of the united rivers Euphrates and +Tigris, which was governed of old by those Arabs called +<i>Zizarij</i>, but is now under the dominion of the grand Turk, +who keeps an army there at great charge. The tribe of Arabs +called Zizarij still have possession of a large extent of +country, and cannot be overcome by the Turks, as the sea divides +their country into islands by many channels, so that the Turks +are unable to bring an army against them either by land or sea, +and likewise because the inhabitants are brave and warlike. A +days sail before coming to Basora, we pass a small castle or fort +called <i>Corna</i>, on the point of land where the Euphrates and +Tigris join; whence the united waters of these two rivers form a +very large river that runs into the gulf of Persia.</p> + +<p>Basora is fifty miles from the sea, and it a place of great +trade in spices and drugs, which are brought from Ormuz. It is +abundantly supplied with corn, rice, and dates, from the +surrounding country. At Basora I shipped myself for Ormuz, to +which I sailed through the Persian gulf 600 miles, which is the +distance between Basora and Ormuz. We sailed in small ships built +of board fastened together with small ropes or cords, and, +instead of caulking, a certain kind of straw is laid between the +boards at their junctions, and they are sewed together; owing to +which imperfect construction, these vessels are very dangerous, +and take in much water. On departing from Basora we sailed 200 +miles along the left shore of the gulf, having the open sea on +our right hand, till we came to an island called <i>Carichij</i> +or <i>Karak</i>, whence we continued our voyage to Ormuz, always +keeping the Persian shore in sight on our left, and seeing many +islands on our right hand towards Arabia.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV.</p> + +<p><i>Of Ormuz.</i></p> + +<p>The island of Ormuz is twenty-five or thirty miles in circuit, +being the driest and most barren island in the world, producing +nothing but salt-water and wood. All things necessary for the +life of man are brought here from Persia, which is twelve miles +off, and from islands adjoining to Persia, and in such abundance +that the city has always a great store of every necessary. Near +the shore there stands a fair castle, in which resides the +commander appointed by the king of Portugal, with a good band of +Portuguese soldiers. The married men belonging to the garrison +dwell in the city, in which there are merchants of almost every +nation, among whom are many Moors and Gentiles. This city has a +vast trade for all kinds of spices, drugs, silk, cloth of silk, +brocades, and various kinds of merchandise from Persia. The trade +in horses is very great, being transported from hence to India. +The island has a Mahometan or Moorish king of the Persian race, +who is created and set up by the Portuguese commander in the name +of the king of Portugal. Being present on one of these occasions, +I shall set down the ceremonies as I saw them.</p> + +<p>The old king being dead, the Portuguese commander proceeds +with much pomp and ceremony to elect a new one in the castle; and +when he is chosen from the blood-royal, the new king is sworn to +be true and faithful to the king of Portugal, as his +lord-paramount, after which the captain presents him with the +royal sceptre. The newly elected king is then conducted in great +pomp to the royal palace, amid great feasts and rejoicings, and +attended by a numerous and splendid retinue. The king keeps a +good train of attendants, and has sufficient revenues to maintain +his state and dignity, with very little of the cares of royalty, +as the captain of the castle defends the kingdom. When the king +and captain ride out together, the king is treated with much +ceremony and respect, yet cannot ride abroad with his train +without having first received permission of the captain, which +precaution is necessary because of the great trade carried on at +this place. The native language in this island is the Persian. I +embarked at Ormuz for Goa in India, in a ship on board of which +were fourscore horses. All merchants proceeding from Ormuz for +Goa ought to go in ships carrying horses, because every ship +carrying twenty horses or upwards is privileged from the payment +of customs on all their other goods, whereas all ships having no +horses have to pay eight per centum on their goods and +commodities.</p> + +<p>SECTION V.</p> + +<p><i>Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya.</i></p> + +<p>Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which +reside the viceroy and his court, being many officers of the +crown of Portugal. From Ormuz it is 990 miles to Goa, on which +passage the first city you come to in India is Diu, situated in a +small island of the kingdom of Cambaia; and, though a small city, +is the strongest fortified of any of those possessed by the +Portuguese in India, having great trade, and loading many great +ships with merchandise for Ormuz and the Red Sea. These ships +belong both to Moors and Christians; but the Moors can neither +trade nor navigate in these seas, unless they have a pass or +licence from the Portuguese viceroy, without which they we liable +to be captured. The merchandise loaded at Diu comes from +<i>Cambaietta</i>, a port in the kingdom of Cambaia, about 180 +miles up a strait or gulf called <i>Macareo</i>, which signifies +<i>a race of the tide</i>, because the water runs there with +immense rapidity, such as is not to be seen anywhere else, except +in the kingdom of Pegu, where there is another <i>Macareo</i> or +race of the tide still more violent. On this account, and because +no large vessels can go to <i>Cambaietta</i> or <i>Cambay</i>, by +reason of the shallowness of the water in the gulf for 80 or 100 +miles, the principal city of Cambaia or Guzerat is +<i>Amadaver</i> or <i>Amedabad</i>, a day and a half journey from +Cambay, being a great and populous city, and for a city of the +Gentiles it is well built with handsome houses and wide streets. +In it there is a fine bason or canul, having many ships, so that +it resembles Cairo, but not so large.</p> + +<p>Cambay is situated on the sea at the head of the gulf of the +same name, and is a handsome city. While I was there it was +suffering great calamity, owing to a scarcity, insomuch that the +Gentiles offered their sons and daughters for sale to the +Portuguese, and I have seen them sold for 8 or 10 <i>larines</i> +each, which is of our money about 10s. or 13s. 4d.[124]. Yet if I +had not actually seen it, I could not have believed that Cambay +had so great a trade. Every new and full moon, when the tides are +at the highest, the small barks that come in and go out are quite +innumerable. These barks are laden with all kinds of spices, with +silks of China, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, velvets of +<i>Vercini</i>, great quantities of <i>Pannina</i>, which comes +from Mecca, <i>chequins</i> or gold coins worth 7s. each +sterling, and various other commodities. These barks carry out an +infinite quantity of cloth of all sorts made of <i>bumbast</i> or +cotton, some white, others stamped or painted; large quantities +of indigo, dried and preserved ginger, dry and confected +myrabolans, <i>boraso</i> or borax in paste, vast quantities of +sugar, cotton, opium, asafoetida, <i>puchio?</i> and many other +kinds of drugs, turbans made at Delhi, great quantities of +carnelians, garnets, agates, jaspers, calcedonies, +<i>hematitis</i>, or bloodstones, and some natural diamonds.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 124: This comparison seems made by the +translator between <i>larines</i> and sterling +money.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>It is customary at Cambay, though no one is obliged, to employ +brokers, of whom there are great numbers at this place, all +Gentiles and of great repute, every one of whom keeps fifteen or +twenty servants. All the Portuguese, and more other merchants who +frequent this place, employ these brokers, who purchase and tell +for them; and such as come there for the first time are informed +by their friends of this custom, and what broker they ought to +employ. Every fifteen days, when the great fleet of barks comes +into port, these brokers come to the water side, and the +merchants immediately on landing give charge of their cargoes to +the broker who transacts their business, with the marks of all +their bales and packages. After this the merchant carries on +shore all the furniture for his dwelling, it being necessary for +every one who trades to India to carry a sufficient provision of +household staff for his use, as none such are to be procured. +Then the broker who takes charge of his cargo, makes his servants +carry the merchant's furniture to some empty house in the city, +every broker having several such for the accommodation of their +merchants, where there are only bedsteads, tables, chairs, and +empty water jars. Then the broker says to the merchant, go and +repose yourself and take your rest in the city. The broker +remains at the water-side in charge of the cargo, causes all the +goods to be discharged from the bark, pays the customs, and +causes every thing to be carried to the house in which the +merchant has taken up his residence, the merchant having no +trouble with any thing. After this, the broker inquires if the +merchant is disposed to sell his goods at the rate then current; +and if he desires it, the broker sells the goods immediately, and +informs the merchant how much money comes to him after payment of +all charges. If the merchant is disposed to lay out his money in +the purchase of other commodities, the broker informs him at what +rate the different articles may be put free on board, all charges +paid. Being thus properly instructed, the merchant makes his +calculations, and if he is satisfied to buy or sell at the +current prices he directs the broker accordingly; so that if he +have even to the value of 20,000 ducats or more, every thing will +be sold off or bartered in fifteen days, without giving himself +any trouble or concern about the matter. Should the merchant not +be disposed to sell the goods at the then current prices, he may +tarry as long as he pleases, but the goods cannot be sold for him +by any other person than the broker who has taken them in hand, +and has paid the duties. Sometimes, by delaying the sale of their +commodities for a time, the merchants make good profit, and at +other times they lose; but those articles which do not ordinarily +come every fifteen days, frequently produce great profit by +delaying to sell till the prices rise.</p> + +<p>The barks that lade at Cambay go to Diu to supply the ships at +that port which are taking in goods for the Red Sea and Ormuz, +and some go to Chaul and Goa. These ships are either well armed, +or are protected by Portuguese ships of war, as there are many +corsairs or pirates continually cruizing along that coast, +robbing and plundering whatever they are able to master. The +kingdom of Cambaia or Guzerat has great trade, though it has long +been in the hands of tyrants and usurpers, ever since the lawful +sovereign, then 75 years of age, named Sultan Badur, was slain, +at the assault of Diu, at which time four or five principal +officers of his army divided the kingdom among themselves, all +tyrannizing in their several shares as in emulation of each +other. Twelve years before my coming, the great Mogul, who is the +Mahometan king of Delhi and Agra, 40 days journey inland from +Amedabad, reduced all the provinces of Guzerat under his +authority without resistance, his power being so great that none +of the usurpers dared to oppose him. While I dwelt in Cambay, I +saw many curious things. There were a prodigious number of +artificers who made ivory bracelets called mannij, of, various +colours, with which the Gentile women are in use to decorate +their arms, some covering their arms entirely over with them. In +this single article there are many thousand crowns expended +yearly, owing to this singular custom, that, when any of their +kindred die, they break all their bracelets in token of grief and +mourning, so that they have immediately to purchase new ones, as +they would rather go without meat as not have these +ornaments.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI.</p> + +<p><i>Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other +places</i>.</p> + +<p>Leaving Diu, I went on to Damann, the second city belonging to +the Portuguese in the territory of Guzerat, and distant from Diu +120 miles. This place has no trade of any importance, except in +rice and wheat, and has many dependent villages, where in time of +peace the Portuguese enjoy the pleasure of a country retirement, +but in time of war they are all spoiled and plundered by the +enemy, so that then they derive very small benefit from them. The +next place is Bassen, a small dirty place in comparison with +Damann, which supplies Goa with rice and wheat, besides timber +for the construction of ships and gallies. At a small distance +from Bassen is a small island named Tana, well peopled with +Portuguese, Moors, and Gentiles. This place affords nothing but +rice, but contains many manufacturers of <i>armesies</i>? and +weavers of girdles made of wool and cotton, black and red like +<i>moocharie</i>?</p> + +<p>Beyond this is Chaul on the continent, where there are two +cities, one belonging to the Portuguese, and the other to the +Moors; that which belongs to the Portuguese is lower than the +other, commands the mouth of the harbour, and is very strongly +fortified. About a mile and a half from this city is that of the +Moors, belonging to their king <i>Zamaluco</i>, or Nizam-al-mulk. +In time of war no large ships can go to the city of the Moors, as +they must necessarily pass under the guns of the Portuguese +castles, which would sink them. Both cities of Chaul are +sea-ports, and have great trade in all kinds of spices, drugs, +raw silk, manufactures of silk, sandal-wood, <i>Marsine, +Versine</i>[125], porcelain of China, velvets and scarlets, both +from Portugal and Mecca[126], with many other valuable +commodities. Every year there arrive ten or fifteen large ships, +laden with great nuts called <i>Giagra</i>[127], which are cured +or dried, and with sugar made from these nuts. The tree on which +these nuts grow is called the <i>Palmer</i> tree, and is to be +found in great abundance over all India, especially between this +place and Goa. This tree very much resembles that which produces +dates, and no tree in the world is more profitable or more useful +to man; no part of it but serves for some useful purpose, neither +is any part of it so worthless as to be burnt. Of its timber they +build ships, and with the leaves they make sails. Its fruit, or +nuts, produce wine, and from the wine they make sugar and +<i>placetto</i>[128]. This wine is gathered in the spring of the +year from the middle of the tree, where there is then a continual +stream of clear liquor like water, which they gather in vessels +placed on purpose under each tree, and take them away full every +morning and evening. This liquor being distilled by means of +fire, is converted into a very strong liquor, which is then put +into buts with a quantity of white or black <i>Zibibs</i>, and in +a short time it becomes a perfect wine. Of the nuts they make +great quantities of oil. The tree is made into boards and timbers +for building houses. Of the bark cables and other ropes are made +for ships which are said to be better than those made of hemp. +The branches are made into bed-steads after the Indian fashion, +and into <i>Sanasches</i>? for merchandise. The leaves being cut +into thin slips are woven into sails for all kinds of ships, or +into thin mats. The outer rhind of the nut stamped serves as +oakum for caulking ships, and the hard inner shell serves for +spoons and other utensils for holding food or drink. Thus no +portion whatever of this <i>Palmer</i> tree is so worthless as to +be thrown away or cast into the fire. When the nuts are green, +they are full of a sweet water, excellent to drink, and the +liquor contained in one nut is sufficient to satisfy a thirsty +person. As the nut ripens, this liquor turns all into kernel.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 125: Formerly noticed as a species of +velvet; but the words marsine and versine were inexplicable in +the days of Hakluyt, and must so remain.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 126: The velvets and scarlet cloths from +Mecca were probably Italian manufactures, brought through Egypt +and the Red Sea.--E.]</blockquote> + +. + +<blockquote>[Footnote 127: These great nuts must necessarily be +the cocoa nuts, and the palmer tree, on which they grow, the +cocoa palm.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 128: Possibly molasses are here +meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Chaul, an infinite quantity of goods are exported for +other parts of India, Macao, Portugal, the coast of Melinda, +Ormuz, and other parts; such as cloth of <i>bumbast</i> or +cotton, white, painted, and printed, indigo, opium, silk of all +kinds, borax in paste, asafoetida, iron, corn, and other things. +Nizam-al-Mulk, the Moorish king, has great power, being able to +take the field with 200,000 men, and a great store of artillery, +some of which are made in pieces[129], and are so large that they +are difficultly removed, yet are they very commodiously used, and +discharge enormous stone bullets, some of which have been sent to +the king of Portugal as rarities. The city of +<i>Abnezer[130]</i>, in which Nizam-al-Mulk resides, is seven or +eight days journey inland from Chaul. Seventy miles[131] from +Chaul toward the Indies, or south, is Dabul, a haven belonging to +Nizam-al-Mulk, from whence to Goa is 150 miles[132].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 129: Probably meaning that they were formed +of bars hooped or welded together, in the way in which the famous +<i>Mons meg</i>, long in Edinburgh Castle, and now in the tower +of London, was certainly made.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 130: Perhaps that now called Assodnagur in +the Mahratta country, about 125 miles nearly east from +Chaul.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 131: In fact only about half that +distance.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 132: About 165 English +miles--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION VII.</p> + +<p><i>Of Goa.</i></p> + +<p>Goa, the principal city of the Portuguese in India, in which +the viceroy resides with a splendid court, stands in an island +about 25 or 30 miles in circuit. The city, with its boroughs or +suburbs, is moderately large, and is sufficiently handsome for an +Indian city; but the island is very beautiful, being full of fine +gardens, and adorned with many trees, among which are the +<i>Palmer</i>, or cocoa-nut trees, formerly mentioned. Goa trades +largely in all kinds of merchandise usual in these parts, and +every year five or six large ships come directly thither from +Portugal, usually arriving about the 6th or 10th of September. +They remain there 40 or 50 days, and go from thence to Cochin, +where they finish their lading for Portugal; though they often +load one ship at Goa and the other at Cochin for Portugal. Cochin +is 420 miles from Goa. The city of Goa stands in the kingdom of +<i>Dial-can</i>, or Adel Khan, a Moorish or Mahometan king, whose +capital, called Bejapour or Visiapour, is eight days journey +inland from Goa[133]. This sovereign has great power; for, when I +was at Goa in 1570, he came to attack that city, encamping with +200,000 men at a river side in the neighbourhood, where he +remained fourteen months, at the end of which a peace was +concluded. It was reported in Goa that a great mortality +prevailed in his army during the winter, which also killed many +of his elephants. When I went in 1567 from Goa to +<i>Bezenegur</i> or Bijanagur, the capital city of the kingdom of +<i>Narsinga,</i> eight days journey inland from Goa[134], I +travelled in company with two other merchants, who carried with +them 300 Arabian horses for sale to that king; the horses of the +country being of small stature, occasioning Arabian horses to +sell at high prices in that part of India. Indeed it is necessary +that the merchants should get good prices, as they are at great +charges in bringing them from Persia to Ormuz and thence to Goa. +At going out of Goa, 42 pagodas are paid of duty for each horse; +the pagoda being a small gold coin worth about 6s. 8d. sterling. +In the inland country of Narsinga, the Arabian horses sell for +300, 400, and 500 ducats each, and some very superior horses sell +as high as 1000 ducats.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 133: About 175, N.E. from Goa. In the +original it is called Bisapor.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 134: The ruins of the royal city of +Bijanagur are 190 English miles nearly due east from +Goa.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> + +<p><i>Of the City of Bijanagur.</i></p> + +<p>In the year 1565, the city of Bijanagur was sacked by four +Moorish kings of great power: Adel-Khan, Nizam-al-Mulk, +Cotub-al-Mulk, and Viriday-Khan; yet with all their power they +were unable to overcome this city and its king but by means of +treachery. The king of Bijanagur was a Gentile, and among the +captains of his numerous army had two famous Moors, each of whom +commanded over seventy or eighty thousand men. These two captains +being of the same religion with the four Moorish kings, +treacherously combined with them to betray their own sovereign. +Accordingly, when the king of Bijanagur, despising the power of +his enemies, boldly faced them in the field, the battle had +scarcely lasted four hours, when the two treacherous captains, in +the very heat of the battle, turned with their followers against +their own sovereign, and threw his army into such disorder that +it broke and fled in the utmost confusion.</p> + +<p>This kingdom of Bijanagur had been governed for thirty years +by the usurpation of three brothers, keeping the lawful king a +state prisoner, and ruling according to their own pleasure, +shewing the king only once a year to his subjects. They had been +principal officers under the father of the king whom they now +held a prisoner, who was very young when his father died, and +they assumed the government. The eldest brother was called <i>Ram +rajah</i>, who sat in the royal throne and was called king; the +second was named <i>Temi rajah</i>, who held charge of the civil +government of the country; and the third, <i>Bengatre</i>, was +general in chief of the army. In the great battle against the +four Mahometan kings all the three brothers were present, but the +first and the last were never heard of more, neither dead nor +alive. Temi rajah alone escaped from the battle, with the loss of +one eye. On the news of this great defeat coming to the city of +Bijanagur, the wives and children of the three tyrants fled with +the imprisoned king, and the four Mahometan kings entered the +city in great triumph, where they remained for six months, +searching everywhere for money and valuable effects that had been +hidden. After this they departed, being unable to retain +possession of so extensive a dominion at such a distance from +their own territory[135].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 135: The reason in the text for evacuating +the kingdom of Narsinga, or Bijanagur, is very unsatisfactory, as +it in fact bordered on their dominions. More probably they could +not agree on the partition, each being afraid of the others +acquiring an ascendancy, and they satisfied themselves with the +enormous spoils of the capital. This event has been before +mentioned from De Faria.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After the retreat of the four kings, Temi rajah returned to +Bijanagur, which he repeopled, and sent word to the merchants of +Goa to bring all the horses to him that they had for sale, +promising good prices; and it was on this occasion that the two +merchants went up with their horses, whom I accompanied. This +tyrant also issued a proclamation, that if any merchant happened +to have any of the horses which were taken in the late battle, +even although they happened to have the Bijanagur mark upon them, +that he would pay for them their full values, and give safe +conduct for all who had such to come to his capital. When by this +means he had procured a great number of horses, he put off the +merchants with fair promises, till he saw that no more horses +were likely to come, and he then ordered the merchants to depart +without giving them any thing for the horses. I remained in +Bijanagur seven months, though I might have concluded my whole +business in one; but it was necessary for me to remain until the +ways were cleared of thieves and robbers, who ranged up and down +in whole troops.</p> + +<p>While I rested there I saw many strange and barbarous deeds +done among these Gentiles. When any noble man or woman dies, the +dead body is burned. If a married man die, his widow must burn +herself alive for the love of her husband, and along with his +body; but she may have the respite of a month, or even of two or +three, if she will. When the appointed day arrives on which she +is to be burnt, she goeth out from her house very early in the +morning, either on horseback or on an elephant, or on a stage +carried by eight men, apparelled like a bride, and is carried in +triumph all round the city, having her hair hanging down about +her shoulders, garnished with jewels and flowers, according to +her circumstances, and seemingly as joyful as a bride in Venice +going to her nuptials. On this occasion, she carries a mirror in +her left hand, and an arrow in her right, and sings during the +procession, saying, that she is going to sleep with her dear +husband. In this manner she continues, surrounded by her kindred +and friends till about one or two in the afternoon, when the +procession goes out of the city to the side of the river called +<i>Nigondin</i> or <i>Toombuddra</i>, which runs past the walls +of the city, to a certain spot where this ceremony is usually +performed, where there is prepared a large square pit full of +dried wood, having a little pinnacle or scaffold close to one +side four or five steps up. On her arrival, a great banquet is +prepared, where the victim eats with as much apparent joy as if +it were her wedding-day; and at the end of the feast there is +dancing and singing so long as she thinks fit. At length she +gives orders of her own accord to kindle the dry wood in the +square pit; and when told that the fire is kindled, she takes the +nearest kinsman of her husband by the hand, who leads her to the +bank of the river, where she puts off her jewels and all her +clothes, distributing them among her parents or relations; when, +putting on a cloth, that she may not be seen naked by the people, +she throweth herself into the river, saying, O! wretches wash +away your sins. Coming out of the water, she rolls herself up in +a yellow cloth, fourteen yards long, and again taking the nearest +kinsman of her husband by the hand, they go together to the +pinnacle at the funeral pile. From this place she addresses the +people, to whom she recommends her children and relations. Before +the pinnacle it is usual to place a mat, that she may not see the +fierce fire; yet there are many who order this to be removed, as +not afraid of the sight. When the silly woman has reasoned with +the people for some time, another woman takes a pot of oil, part +of which she pours on the head of the devoted victim, anointing +also her whole body with the same, and then throws the pot into +the fire, which the widow immediately follows, leaping into the +fiercest of the fire. Then those who stand around the pile throw +after her many great pieces of wood, by the blows from which, and +the fierce fire in which she is enveloped, she quickly dies and +is consumed. Immediately the mirth of the people is changed to +sorrow and weeping, and such howling and lamentation is set up as +one is hardly able to bear. I have seen many burnt in this +manner, as my house was near the gate where they go out to the +place of burning; and when a great man dies, not only his widow, +but all the female slaves with whom he has had connection, are +burnt along with his body. Also when the baser sort of people +die, I have seen the dead husband carried to the place of +sepulchre, where he is placed upright; then cometh his widow, +and, placing herself on her knees before him, she clasps her arms +about his neck, till the masons have built a wall around both as +high us their necks. Then a person from behind strangles the +widow, and the workmen finish the building over their heads, and +thus they remain immured in one tomb. Inquiring the reason of +this barbarous custom, I was told that this law had been +established in ancient times as a provision against the +slaughters which the women were in use to make of their husbands, +poisoning them on every slight cause of displeasure; but that +since the promulgation of this law they have been more faithful +to their husbands, reckoning their lives as dear to them as their +own, because after the death of their husband their own is sure +soon to follow. There are many other abominable customs among +these people, but of which I have no desire to write.</p> + +<p>In consideration of the injury done to Bijanagur by the four +Mahometan kings, the king with his court removed from that city +in 1567, and went to dwell in a castle named <i>Penegonde</i>, +eight days journey inland from Bijanagur. Six days journey from +Bijanagur is the place where diamonds are got[136]. I was not +there, but was told that it is a great place encompassed by a +wall, and that the ground within is sold to the adventurers at so +much per square measure, and that they are even limited as to the +depth they may dig. All diamonds found of a certain size and +above belong to the king, and all below that size to the +adventurers. It is a long time since any diamonds have been got +there, owing to the troubles that have distracted the kingdom of +Narsinga: For the son of Temi rajah having put the imprisoned +king to death, the nobles and great men of the kingdom refused to +acknowledge authority of the tyrant, so that the kingdom has +fallen into anarchy, every one setting up for themselves.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 136: The diamond mines of Raolconda are +about 90 miles direct north from the ruins of Bijanagur, on the +Kisma. The castle of Penegonde is not now to be found in the maps +of Indostan; but indeed the names of this ingenious traveller an +often unintelligible, and almost always extremely +corrupt.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The city of Bijanagur is not altogether destroyed, as the +houses are said to be still standing, but entirely void of +population, and become the dwellings of tigers, and other wild +beasts. The circuit of this great city is twenty-four miles round +the walls, within which are several hills. The ordinary dwellings +are of earthen walls, and sufficiently mean, but the three +palaces of the tyrant brothers, and the pagodas or idol temples, +are built of fine marble, cemented with lime. I have seen many +kings courts, yet have never seen any thing to compare with the +greatness of the royal palace of Bijanagur, which hath nine +gates. First, when you go into that part where the king lodged, +there are five great gates kept by captains and soldiers: Within +these are four lesser gates, which are kept by porters. On the +outer side of the first gate is a small porch or lodge, where +there is a captain and twenty-five soldiers, who keep watch day +and night; and within that another, with a similar guard. Through +this you enter into a very fair court, at the end of which is +another porch like the first, with a similar guard, and within +that another court. Thus the first five gates are each guarded by +their respective captains. Then each of the lesser gates within +are kept by a separate guard of porters. These gates stand open +the greatest part of the night, as it is the custom of the +Gentiles to transact business and make their feasts during the +night, rather than in the day. This city is very safe from +thieves, insomuch that the Portuguese merchants sleep under +porches open to the street, and yet never meet with any +injury.</p> + +<p>At the end of two months, I determined to go for Goa, in +company with two Portuguese merchants, who were making ready to +depart in two palankins or small litters, which are very +convenient vehicles for travelling, being carried by eight +<i>falchines</i>, or bearers, four at a time, and other four as +reliefs. For my own use I bought two bullocks, one to ride upon +and the other to carry my provisions. In that country they ride +upon bullocks, having pannels fastened with girths, and guide +them with bridles. In summer, the journey from Bijanagur to Goa +takes only eight days; but we went in July, which is the middle +of winter in that country, and were fifteen days in going to +<i>Ancola</i>, on the sea coast. On the eighth day of the journey +I lost both my bullocks. That which carried my provisions was +weak, and could not proceed; and on passing a river by means of a +small foot bridge, I made my other bullock swim across, but he +stopt on a small island in the middle of the river where he found +pasture, and we could devise no means to get him out. I was under +the necessity therefore to leave him, and was forced to go on +foot for seven days, during which it rained almost incessantly, +and I suffered great fatigue. By good fortune I met some +<i>falchines</i>[137] by the way, whom I hired to carry my +clothes and provisions. In this journey we suffered great +troubles, being every day made prisoners, and had every morning +at our departure to pay four or five <i>pagies?</i> a man as +ransom. Likewise, as we came almost every day into the country of +a new governor, though all tributary to the king of Bijanagur, we +found that every one of them had their own copper coin, so that +the money we got in change one day was not current on the next. +At length, by the mercy of God, we got safe to <i>Ancola</i>, +which is in the country of the queen of <i>Gargopam</i>[138], a +tributary to the king of Bijanagur.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 137: These <i>falchines</i> of Cesar +Frederick are now denominated <i>coolies</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 138: These names of Ancola and Gargopam are +so unintelligibly corrupted, as not be even conjecturally +referable to any places or districts in our best +maps.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The merchandise sent every year from Goa to Bijanagur consists +of Arabian horses, velvets, damasks, satins, armoisins of +Portugal, porcelain of China, saffron, and scarlet cloth; and at +Bijanagur, they received in exchange or barter, jewels and +pagodas, which are the gold ducats of the country. At Bijanagur, +according to the state and condition of the wearers, the apparel +is of velvet, satin, damask, scarlet cloth, or white cotton; and +they wear long hats on their heads, called <i>colae</i>, made of +similar materials; having girdles round their bodies of fine +cotton cloth. They wear breeches made like those used by the +Turks; having on their feet plain high things called +<i>aspergh</i>. In their ears they wear great quantities of +golden ornaments.</p> + +<p>Returning to my journey. When we got to <i>Ancola</i>, one of +my companions having nothing to lose, took a guide and set out +for Goa, which is only at the distance of four days journey; but +as the other Portuguese was not inclined to travel any farther at +this season, he and I remained there for the winter[139], which +beginning on the 15th of May, lasts to the end of October. While +we tarried there, another horse-merchant arrived in a palanquin, +together with two Portuguese soldiers from Ceylon, and two +letter-carriers, who were Christians born in India. All these +persons agreed to go in company to Goa, and I resolved to go with +them; for which purpose, I got a sorry palanquin made for me of +canes, and in the hollow of one of these I concealed all my +jewels. According to the usual custom, I hired eight +<i>falchines</i> or bearers, and we set off one day about eleven +o'clock. About two o'clock the same day, as we were passing a +mountain which separates the territory of <i>Ancola</i> from that +belonging to Abel Khan, and while I was a little way behind the +rest of the company, I was assaulted by eight robbers, four of +whom were armed with swords and targets, and the others with bows +and arrows. My bearers immediately let fall the palanquin and ran +off, leaving me alone on the ground wrapped up in my clothes. The +robbers instantly came up and rifled me of every thing I had, +leaving me stark naked. I pretended to be sick and would not quit +the palanquin, in which I had made a kind of bed of my spare +clothes. After searching with great industry, the thieves found +two purses in which I had tied up some copper money I had got in +change for four pagodas at Ancola; and thinking this treasure +consisted of gold coin, they searched no farther, and went away, +throwing all my clothes into a bush. Fortunately at their +departure they dropped a handkerchief which I noticed, and +getting up I wrapped it up in my palaquin[140]. In this forlorn +condition, I had resolved to pluck the hollow cane from my +palanquin in which my jewels were hid, and to have endeavoured to +make my own way on foot to Goa, using the cane as a walking +stick. But my bearers were so faithful that they returned to look +for me after the robbers departed, which indeed I did not expect, +as they were paid before hand, according to the custom of India. +We got to Goa in four days, during which I fared very badly, as +the robbers had left me no money of any kind, and all I had to +eat was given me by my bearers for God's sake; but after my +arrival in Goa, I paid them royally for what they gave me.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 139: This winter of our author, on the +coast of Canara, in about the lat. of 15° N. when the sun is +nearly vertical, must be understood as the rainy +season.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 140: This incident in the text is given as +fortunate, and perhaps it ought to have been expressed, "He +wrapped it about his loins and returned to his +palanquin."--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Goa I departed for Cochin, a voyage of 300 miles, there +being several strong-holds belonging to the Portuguese between +these two cities, as Onore, Barcelore, Mangalore, and Cananore. +Onore, the first of these, is in the dominions of the queen of +<i>Battacella</i>, or <i>Batecolah</i>, who is tributary to the +king of Bijanagur. There is no trade at this place, which is only +a military post held by a captain with a company of soldiers. +After this you go to another small castle of the Portuguese +called Mangalore, in which there is only a small trade in rice. +Thence you go to a little fort called Bazelore[141], whence a +great deal of rice is transported to Goa. From thence you go to a +city named Cananore, which is within a musket-shot of the capital +of the king of Cananore who is a Gentile[142]. He and his people +are wicked and malicious, delighting in going to war with the +Portuguese; yet when at peace they find their interest in trading +with them. From this kingdom of Cananore is procured great store +of cardomums, pepper, ginger, honey, cocoa-nuts, and <i>archa</i> +or <i>areka</i>. This is a fruit about the size of a nutmeg, +which is chewed in all the Indies, and even beyond them, along +with the leaf of a plant resembling ivy called <i>betel</i>. The +nut is wrapped up in a leaf of the betel along with some lime +made of oyster shells, and through all the Indies they spend a +great deal of money; on this composition, which they use daily, a +thing I could not have believed if I had not seen it continually +practised. A great revenue is drawn from this herb, as it pays +custom. When they chew this in their mouths, it makes their +spittle as red as blood, and it is said to produce a good +appetite and a sweet breath; but in my opinion, they eat it +rather to satisfy their filthy lusts, for this herb is moist and +hot, and causes a strong expulsion.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 141: This must be Barcelore, and ought to +have been named before Managalore, as above 50 miles to the +north, between Goa and Managalore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 142: This passage ought to have stood thus +"The fort of Cananore belonging to the Portuguese, only a +musket-shot from the city of that name, the capital of" +&c.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Cananore you go Cranganore, which is a small fort of the +Portuguese in the country of the king of Cranganore, another king +of the Gentiles. This is a country of small importance of about a +hundred miles extent, full of thieves, subject to the king of +Calicut, who is another king of the Gentiles and a great enemy to +the Portuguese, with whom he is continually engaged in war. This +country is a receptacle of foreign thieves, and especially of +those Moors called <i>Carposa</i>, on account of their wearing +long red caps. These thieves divide the spoil they get with the +king of Calicut, who gives them leave to go a-roving; so that +there are so many thieves all along this coast, that there is no +sailing in those seas except in large ships well armed, or under +convoy of Portuguese ships of war. From Cranganore to Cochin is +15 miles[143].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 143: The direct distance is twenty +geographical miles.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION IX.</p> + +<p><i>Of Cochin.</i></p> + +<p>Cochin, next to Goa, is the chief place in India belonging to +the Portuguese, and has a great trade in spices, drugs, and all +other kinds of merchandise for Portugal. Inland from that place +is the pepper country, which pepper is loaded by the Portuguese +in bulk not in sacks. The pepper which is sent to Portugal is not +so good as that which goes up the Red Sea; because in times past +the officers of the king of Portugal made a contract with the +king of Cochin for all the pepper, to be delivered at a fixed +price, which is very low; and for which reason the country people +deliver it to the Portuguese unripe and full of dirt. As the +Moors of Mecca give a better price, they get it clean and dry and +in much better condition; but all the spices and drugs which they +carry to Mecca and the Red Sea are contraband and stolen or +smuggled. There are two cities at Cochin, one of which belongs to +the Portuguese and the other to the native king; that of the +Portuguese being nearer the sea, while the native city is a mile +and a half farther up the same river. They are both on the banks +of the same large river, which comes from the mountains in the +pepper country[144], in which are many Christians of the order of +St Thomas. The king of Cochin is a Gentile and a steadfast friend +to the king of Portugal, and to all the Portuguese who are +married and have become citizens of Cochin. By the name of +Portuguese, all the Christians are known in India who come from +Europe, whether they be Italians, Frenchmen, or Germans. All +those who marry and settle at Cochin get some office according to +the trades they are off, by which they have great privileges. The +two principal commodities in which they deal are silk which comes +in great quantities from China, and large quantities of sugar, +which comes from Bengal. The married citizens pay no customs for +these two commodities; but pay 4s. per centum for all other goods +to the king of Cochin, rating their own goods almost at their own +valuation. Those who are not married pay to the king of Portugal +8s. per centum for all kinds of commodities. While I was in +Cochin, the viceroy used his endeavours to break the privileges +of these married citizens, that they might pay the same rates of +customs with others. On this occasion the citizens were glad to +weigh their pepper in the night to evade the customs. When this +came to the knowledge of the king of Cochin, he put a stop to the +delivery of pepper, so that the viceroy was glad to allow the +merchants to do as formerly.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 144: In the version of Cesar Frederick in +Hakluyt, it is said "to come from the mountains of the king of +the pepper country, who is a Gentile, and in whose dominions +there are many Christians," &c. as in the text. This king of +the pepper country is probably meant for the rajah of Travancore. +The great river of the text is merely a sound, which reaches +along the coast from Cochin to beyond Coulan, a distance of above +90 miles, forming a long range of low islands on the sea-coast, +and receiving numerous small rivers from the southern +gauts.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The king of Cochin has small power in comparison with the +other sovereigns of India as he is unable to send above 70,000 +men into the field. He has a great number of gentlemen, some of +whom are called <i>Amochi</i>[145] and others <i>Nairs</i>. These +two sorts of men do not value their lives in any thing which +tends to the honour of their king, and will run freely into any +danger in his service, even if sure to lose their lives in the +attempt. These men go naked from the waist upwards, and +barefooted, having only a cloth wrapped about their thighs. Their +hair is long and rolled up on the top of their heads, and they go +always armed, carrying bucklers and naked swords. The Nairs have +their wives in common among themselves, and when any of them goes +into the house of one of these women, he leaves his sword and +buckler at the door, and while he is within no other dare enter +the house. The king's children never inherit the kingdom after +their fathers, lest perchance they may have been begotten by some +other man; wherefore the son of the king's sisters, or of some +female of the royal-blood succeeds, that they may be sure of +having a king of the royal family. Those Naires and their wives +have great holes in their ears by way of ornament, so large and +wide as is hardly credible, holding that the larger these holes +are, so much the more noble are they. I had leave from one of +them to measure the circumference of the hole in one of his ears +with a thread; and within that circumference I put my arm up to +the shoulder with my clothes on, so that in fact they are +monstrously large. This is begun when they are very young, at +which time a hole is made in each ear, to which they hang a piece +of gold or a lump of lead, putting a certain leaf into the hole +which causes the hole to increase prodigiously. They load ships +at Cochin both for Portugal and Ormuz: but all the pepper that is +carried to Ormuz is smuggled. Cinnamon and all other spices and +drugs are permitted to be exported to Ormuz or Cambaia, as +likewise all other kinds of merchandise from other parts of +India. From Cochin there are sent yearly to Portugal great +quantities of pepper, dry and preserved ginger, wild cinnamon, +areka nuts and large store of cordage made of <i>cayro</i>, that +is from the bark of the cocoa-nut tree, which is reckoned better +than that made of hemp. The ships for Portugal depart every +season between the 5th of December and the 5th of January.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 145: On former occasions these +<i>amochi</i> have been explained as devoted naires, under a vow +to revenge the death of their sovereign.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Cochin I went to Coulan, at which is a small fort +belonging to the Portuguese, 72 miles from Cochin. This is a +place of small trade, as every year a ship gets only half a +lading of pepper here, and then goes to Cochin to be filled up. +From Cochin to Cape Comorin is 72 miles, and here ends the Indian +coast. Along this coast, and also at Cape Comorin, and down to +the low lands of <i>Chialon</i>[146], which is about 200 miles, +there are great numbers of the natives converted to the Christian +faith, and among them are many churches of the order of St Paul, +the friars of which order do much good in these places, and take +great pains to instruct the natives in the Christian faith.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 146: These geographical notices are +inexplicable, unless by <i>Chialon</i> is meant the low or +maritime parts of Ceylon, which Cesar Frederick afterwards calls +Zeilan.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION X.</p> + +<p><i>Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar</i>.</p> + +<p>The men along the coast which extends from Cape Comorin to the +low land of <i>Chioal</i>[147], and the island of <i>Zeilan</i> +or Ceylon, is called the pearl-fishery. This fishery is made +every year, beginning in March or April, and lasts fifty days. +The fishery is by no means made every year at one place, but one +year at one place, and another year at another place; all however +in the same sea. When the fishing season approaches, some good +divers are sent to discover where the greatest quantities of +oysters are to be found under water; and then directly facing +that place which is chosen for the fishery, a village with a +number of houses, and a bazar all of stone, is built, which +stands as long as the fishery lasts, and is amply supplied with +all necessaries. Sometimes it happens near places already +inhabited, and at other times at a distance from any habitations. +The fishers or divers are all Christians of the country, and all +are permitted to engage in this fishery, on payment of certain +duties to the king of Portugal, and to the churches of the friars +of St Paul on that coast. Happening to be there one year in my +peregrinations, I saw the order used in fishing, which is as +follows.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 147: This word is unintelligible, having no +similar name in modern geography. From the context, it seems to +signify the maritime coast of Tinnevelly and Marwar, or the most +southern part of the Carnatic, opposite to Ceylon; and may +possibly be that called <i>Chialon</i> immediately +before--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>During the continuance of the fishery, there are always three +or four armed foists or galliots stationed to defend the +fishermen from pirates. Usually the fishing-boats unite in +companies of three or four together. These boats resemble our +pilot boats at Venice, but are somewhat smaller, having seven or +eight men in each. I have seen of a morning a great number of +these boats go out to fish, anchoring in 15 or 18 fathoms water, +which it the ordinary depth all along this coast. When at anchor, +they cast a rope into the sea, having a great stone at one end. +Then a man, having his ears well stopped, and his body anointed +with oil, and a basket hanging to his neck or under his left arm, +goes down to the bottom of the sea along the rope, and fills his +basket with oysters as fast as he can. When that is full, he +shakes the rope, and his companions draw him up with the basket. +The divers follow each other in succession in this manner, till +the boat is loaded with oysters, and they return at evening to +the fishing village. Then each boat or company makes their heap +of oysters at some distance from each other, so that a long row +of great heaps of oysters are seen piled along the shore. These +are not touched till the fishing is over, when each company sits +down beside its own heap, and fails to opening the oysters, which +is now easy, as the fish within are all dead and dry. If every +oyster had pearls in them, it would be a profitable occupation, +but there are many which have none. There are certain persons +called <i>Chitini</i>, who are learned in pearls, and are +employed to sort and value them, according to their weight, +beauty, and goodness, dividing them into four sorts. The +<i>first</i> sort, which are round, are named <i>aia</i> of +Portugal, as they are bought by the Portuguese: The +<i>second</i>, which are not round, are named <i>aia</i> of +Bengal: The <i>third</i>, which are inferior to the second, are +called <i>aia</i> of Canara, which is the name of the kingdom of +Bijanagur or Narsinga, into which they are sold: And the +<i>fourth</i>, or lowest kind, is called <i>aia</i> of Cambaia, +being sold into that country[148]. Thus sorted, and prices +affixed to each, there are merchants from all countries ready +with their money, so that in a few days all the pearls are bought +up, according to their goodness and weight.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 148: Pearls are weighed by <i>carats</i>, +each of which is four grains. The men who sort and price them +have a copper instrument with holes of various sizes, by which +they estimate their several +values.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote> + +<p>In this sea of the pearl-fishery there is an island called +<i>Manaar</i>, over-against Ceylon, inhabited by Christians who +were formerly Gentiles, and in which island there is a small fort +belonging to the Portuguese. Between this island and Ceylon there +is a narrow channel with a small depth of water, through which +only small ships can pass at the full and change of the moon, +when the tides are high, and even then they must put their +cargoes into lighters to enable them to pass the shoals, after +which they take in their goods again, and proceed on their +voyage. But large ships going for the eastern coast of India pass +by the coast of Coromandel, on the other side of this gulf, +beside the land of <i>Chilao</i>[149], which is between the firm +land and the isle of Manaar. On this voyage ships are sometimes +lost, but they are empty, as ships going this way discharge their +cargoes at <i>Periapatam</i> into small flat-bottomed boats named +<i>Tane</i>, which can run over any shoal without danger, as they +always wait at Periapatam for fine weather. On departing from +Periapatam, the small ships and flat-bottomed boats go always +together, and on arriving at the shoals about thirty-six miles +from that place, they are forced through by the winds, which +always blow so forcibly that they have no means of taking shelter +during the passage. The flat boats go through safely; but if the +small ships happen to miss the proper channel, they get fast on +the shoals, by which many of them are lost. In coming back from +the Indies, instead of this passage, they take the channel of +Manaar, which has an ouze bottom, so that even in case of +grounding they are generally got off again without damage. The +reason of not using this passage on the outward voyage is, that +the prevailing winds between Ceylon and Manaar frequently +occasion that channel to have so little water that it cannot be +navigated. From Cape Comorin to the island of Ceylon, the +distance is 120 miles.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 149: By this account of the matter, the +land of <i>Chilao</i> appears to be the island of Ramiseram, +between which and the island of Manaar extends a reef of rocks +called <i>Adams Bridge</i>. The deep channel is between Ramiseram +and the point of <i>Tanitory</i> on the Coromandel +coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XI.</p> + +<p><i>Of the Island of Ceylon</i></p> + +<p>In my judgment, the island of Ceylon is a great deal larger +than Cyprus. On the west side, facing India, is the city of +Columba, the principal hold of the Portuguese, but without walls +or enemies. In this city, which has a free port, dwells the +lawful king of the whole island, who has become a Christian, and +is maintained by the king of Portugal, having been deprived of +his kingdom. The heathen king to whom this island formerly +belonged was named <i>Madoni</i>, who had two sons named +<i>Barbinas</i> and <i>Ragine</i>. By acquiring the favour of the +soldiers, the younger son Ragine usurped the kingdom, in +prejudice of his father and elder brother, and became a great +warrior. Formerly there were three kingdoms in this island. Those +were, the kingdom of Cotta, with other dependent or conquered +provinces: The kingdom of Candy, which had considerable power, +and was allied to the Portuguese, the king being supposed a +secret Christian: The third was the kingdom of +<i>Gianisampatam</i>, or Jafnapatam. During thirteen years that +<i>Ragine</i> ruled over this island, he became a great +tyrant.</p> + +<p>The island of Ceylon produces fine cinnamon and abundance of +pepper, with great quantities of <i>nuts</i> and +<i>aroche</i>[150]. They here make great quantities of +<i>cayre</i> of which ropes are manufactured, as formerly +noticed. It likewise produces great store of that kind of crystal +called <i>ochi de gati</i> or cats eyes, and it is said to +produce some rubies; but on my return thither from Pegu, I sold +some rubies here for a good price, which I had bought in that +country. Being desirous to see how the cinnamon is gathered from +the trees, and happening to be there during the season when it is +gathered, which is in the month of April; at this time the +Portuguese were in the field making war on the king of the +country, yet to satisfy my curiosity, I took a guide and went out +into a wood about three miles from the city, where there grew +great numbers of cinnamon trees intermixed among other wild +trees. The cinnamon is a small tree not very high, and has leaves +resembling those of the bay tree. In March or April, when the sap +rises, the cinnamon or bark is taken from the trees. They cut the +bark of the trees round about in lengths, from knot to knot, or +from joint to joint, both above and below, and then easily strip +it off with their hands, after which it is laid in the sun to +dry. Yet for all this the tree does not die, but recovers a new +bark by the next year. That which is gathered every year is the +best cinnamon, as what remains upon the trees for two or three +years becomes thick and coarse, and not so good as the other. In +these woods there grows much pepper.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 150: The author probably here means +cocoa-nuts and areka.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XII.</p> + +<p><i>Of Negapatam.</i></p> + +<p>From the island of Ceylon a trade is carried on in small ships +to Negapatam on the continent, and 72 miles off is a very great +and populous city, full of Portuguese and native Christians, with +many Gentiles.[151] Almost the only trade here is for rice and +cotton cloth, which is carried to various countries. It formerly +abounded in victuals, on which account many Portuguese resorted +thither and built houses, as they could live there at small +expense, but provisions have now become scarcer and dearer. This +city belongs to a Gentile nobleman of the kingdom of Bijanagur, +yet the Portuguese and other Christians are well treated, and +have built churches, together with a monastery of the +Franciscans. They live with great devotion, and are well +accommodated with houses; yet are they among tyrants who may +always do them much harm at their pleasure, as in reality +happened to them in the year 1565. At that time the <i>nayer</i> +or lord of the city sent to demand from the citizens certain +Arabian horses, which they refused; whereupon this lord gave out +that he proposed to take a view of the sea, so that the poor +citizens doubted some evil was meant against them by this unusual +circumstance, dreading that he would plunder the city. +Accordingly they embarked as fast as they could with all their +goods and moveables, merchandise, jewels, and money, and put off +from the shore. But to their great misfortune, a great storm +arose next night, by which all their ships were driven on shore +and wrecked, and all their goods which came to land were seized +by the troops of this great lord, who had come down with his army +to see the sea.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 151: It is not easy to say whether the +author means to express that Negapatam is this great city 72 +miles from Ceylon, or if he refers to another city 72 miles from +Negapatam.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XIII.</p> + +<p><i>Of Saint Thome and other places.</i></p> + +<p>Following my voyage from Negapatam 150 miles towards the east, +I came to the house of the blessed apostle St Thomas[152], which +is a church held in great devotion, and is even much reverenced +by the Gentiles, for the great miracles which they have heard +were performed by that holy apostle. Near to this church the +Portuguese have built a city, which stands in the country that is +subject to the king of Bijanagur. Though not large, this city, in +my judgment, is the handsomest in all that part of India, having +many good houses with fine gardens in the environs. The streets +are large and in straight lines, with many well frequented +churches; and the houses are built contiguous, each having a +small door, so that every house is sufficiently defensible by the +Portuguese against the natives. The Portuguese have no other +property here beyond their houses and gardens, as the +sovereignty, together with the customs on trade, belong to the +king of Bijanagur. These customs are small and easy, and the +country is very rich and has great trade. Every year there come +to this port two or three very large and rich ships, besides many +other small ships. One of these great ships goes to Pegu and the +other to Malacca, laden with fine <i>bumbast</i> or cotton cloth +of all kinds, many of them being beautifully painted, and as it +were <i>gilded</i> with various colours, which grow the livelier +the oftener they are washed. There is also other cotton cloth +that is woven of divers colours and is of great value. They also +make at St Thome a great quantity of red yarn, dyed with a root +called <i>saia</i>, which never fades in its colour, but grows +the redder the oftener it is washed. Most of this red yarn is +sent to Pegu, where it is woven into cloth according to their own +fashion, and at less cost than can be done at St Thome.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 152: St Thome, about 5 miles south from +Madras, is about 160 English miles nearly north from +Negapatam.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The shipping and landing of men and merchandise at St Thome is +very wonderful to those who have not seen it before. The place is +so dangerous that ordinary small barks or ships boats cannot be +used, as these would be beaten to pieces; but they have certain +high barks made on purpose, which they call <i>Masadie</i> or +<i>Mussolah</i>, made of small boards sewed together with small +cords, in which the owners will embark either men or goods. They +are laden upon dry land, after which the boatmen thrust the +loaded boat into the stream, when with the utmost speed they +exert themselves to row her out against the huge waves of the sea +which continually best on that shore, and so carry them out to +the ships. In like manner these <i>Masadies</i> are laden at the +ships with men and merchandise; and when they come near the +shore, the men leap out into the sea to keep the bark right, that +she may not cast athwart the shore, and keeping her right stem +on, the surf of the sea sets her with her lading high and dry on +the land without hurt or danger. Yet sometimes these boats are +overset; but there can be but small loss on such occasions, as +they lade but little at a time. All the goods carried outwards in +this manner are securely covered with ox hides, to prevent any +injury from wetting.</p> + +<p>In my return voyage in 1566, I went from Goa to Malacca in a +ship or galleon belonging to the king of Portugal, which was +bound for Banda to lade nutmegs and mace. From Goa to Malacca it +is 1800 miles. We passed without the island of Ceylon and went +through the channel of <i>Nicobar</i>, and then through the +channel of <i>Sombrero</i>, past the island of Sumatra, called in +old times <i>Taprobana</i>.[153] Nicobar, off the coast of Pegu, +consists of a great multitude of islands, many of which are +inhabited by a wild people. These islands are likewise called +<i>Andemaon</i> or Andaman.[154] The natives are savages who eat +each other, and are continually engaged in war, which they carry +on in small boats, chiefly to make prisoners for their cannibal +feasts. When by any chance a ship happens to be cast away on +those islands, as many have been, the men are sure to be slain +and devoured. These savages have no trade or intercourse with any +other people, but live entirely on the productions of their own +islands. In my voyage from Malacca through the channel of +Sombrero, two boats came off from these islands to our ship laden +with fruit, such as <i>Mouces</i> which we call Adams apples, +with fresh cocoa nuts, and another fruit named <i>Inani</i>, much +like our turnips, but very sweet and good to eat. These people +could not be prevailed on to come on board our ship, neither +would they accept payment for their fruit in money, but bartered +them for old shirts or old trowsers. These rags were let down +from the ship into their boats by a rope, and when they had +considered what they were worth in their estimation, they tied as +much fruit as they thought proper to give in exchange to the +rope, which they allowed us to hale up. I was told that sometimes +a man may get a valuable piece of amber for an old shirt.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 153: The Taprobana or Sielendive of the +ancients certainly was Ceylon, not Sumatra.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 154: The Andaman and Nicobar islands, in +long. 93° East from Greenwich, reach from the lat. of 6° +45' to 15° N.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XIV.</p> + +<p><i>Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of Malacca</i>.</p> + +<p>The island of Sumatra is very large and is governed by many +kings, being divided by many channels through which there is a +passage[155]. Towards the west end is the kingdom of <i>Assi</i> +or <i>Acheen</i>, under a Mahometan king who has great military +power, besides a great number of <i>foists</i>[156] and gallies. +This kingdom produces large quantities of pepper, besides ginger +and benzoin. The king is a bitter enemy to the Portuguese, and +has frequently gone against Malacca, doing great injury to its +dependent towns, but was always bravely resisted by the citizens, +with great injury to his camp and navy, done by their artillery +from the walls and batteries.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 155: This assertion is unintelligible, +unless the author means to include a number of small islands off +the coast as belonging to Sumatra.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 156: Foists are described as a kind of +brigantines, rather larger than half gallies, and much used by +the Turks and other eastern nations in those days for war. +<i>Maons</i>, formerly mentioned among the ships of Soliman Pacha +in the siege of Diu, are said to have been large flat-bottomed +vessels or hulks, of 700 or 800 tons burden, having sometimes +<i>seven</i> mizen sails.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote> + +<p>Leaving Sumatra on the right hand, I came to Malacca, which is +a city of wonderful trade in all kinds of merchandise from +various parts, as all ships frequenting those seas whether large +or small must stop at Malacca to pay customs, even though they do +not load or unload any part of their cargoes at that place, just +as all ships in Europe frequenting the Baltic must do at +Elsineur. Should any pass under night without paying the dues at +Malacca, they fall into great danger afterwards, if found any +where in India without the <i>seal of Malacca</i>, having in that +case to pay double duties.</p> + +<p>I have not gone beyond Malacca during my Indian +peregrinations. Indeed the trade to the east of Malacca, +particularly to China and Japan, is not free for all, being +reserved by the king of Portugal to himself and his nobles, or to +those who have special leave for this purpose from the king, who +expects to know what voyages are made from Malacca eastwards. The +royal voyages from Malacca eastwards are as follow. Every year +two galleons belonging to the king depart from Malacca, one of +which is bound for the Moluccas to lade cloves, and the other +goes to Banda for nutmegs and mace. These two are entirely laden +on the kings account, and do not take any goods belonging to +individuals, saving only the privilege of the mariners and +soldiers. Hence these voyages are not frequented by merchants, +who would have no means of transporting their return goods, and +besides the captains of these ships are not permitted to carry +any merchants thither. There go however to these places some +small ships belonging to the Moors from the coast of Java, who +exchange or barter their commodities in the kingdom of Acheen. +These are mace, cloves, and nutmegs, which are sent from Acheen +to the Red Sea. The voyages which the king of Portugal grants to +his nobles, are those from China to Japan and back to China, from +China to India, and those of Bengal, the Moluccas, and Sunda, +with fine cloth and all kinds of cotton goods.</p> + +<p>Sunda is an island of the Moors near the coast of Java, whence +pepper is curried to China. The ship which goes yearly from India +to China is called the <i>drug ship</i>, because she carries +various drugs of Cambaia, but her principal lading consists of +silver. From Malacca to China the distance is 1800 miles; and +from China there goes every year a large ship to Japan laden with +silk, in return for which she brings back bars of silver which +are bartered in China for goods. The distance between Japan and +China is 2400 miles, in which sea there are several islands of no +great size, in which the friars of St Paul, by the blessing of +God, have made many Christians <i>like themselves</i>: But from +these islands the seas have not been fully explored and +discovered, on account of the great numbers of shoals and sand +banks [157].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 157: The text in this place it erroneous or +obscure. The indicated distance between China and Japan is +enormously exaggerated, and probably ought to have been stated as +between Malacca and Japan. The undiscovered islands and shoals +seem to refer to the various islands between Java and Japan, to +the east and north.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The Portuguese have a small city named Macao on an island near +the coast of China, in which the church and houses are built of +wood. This is a bishopric, but the customs belong to the king of +China, and are payable at the city of Canton, two days journey +and a half from Macao, and a place of great importance. The +people of China are heathens, and are so fearful and jealous that +they are unwilling to permit any strangers to enter their +country. Hence when the Portuguese go there to pay their customs +and to buy goods, they are not allowed to lodge within the city, +but are sent out to the suburbs. This country of China, which +adjoins to great Tartary, is of vast size and importance, as may +be judged by the rich and precious merchandise which comes from +thence, than which I believe there are none better or more +abundant in quantity in all the world besides. In the first place +it affords great quantities of gold, which is carried thence to +the Indies made into small plates <i>like little ships</i>, and +in value 23 <i>carats</i> each[158]; large quantities of fine +silk, with damasks and taffetas; large quantities of musk and of +<i>occam</i>[159] in bars, quicksilver, cinabar, camphor, +porcelain in vessels of divers sorts, painted cloth, and squares, +and the drug called Chinaroot. Every year two or three large +ships go from China to India laden with these rich and precious +commodities. Rhubarb goes from thence over land by way of Persia, +as there is a caravan every year from Persia to China, which +takes six months to go there and as long to return. This caravan +arrives at a place called <i>Lanchin</i>, where the king and his +court reside. I conversed with a Persian who had been three years +in that city of <i>Lanchin</i>, and told me that it was a city of +great size and wealth.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 158: Perhaps the author may have expressed +<i>of 23 carats fine</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 159: Perhaps the mixed metal called tutenag +may be here meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The voyages which are under the jurisdiction of the captain of +Malacca are the following. Every year he sends a small ship to +Timor to load white sandal wood, the best being to be had in that +island. He also sends another small ship yearly to Cochin-China +for aloes wood, which is only to be procured in that country, +which is on the continent adjoining to China. I could never learn +in what manner that wood grows, as the people of Cochin-China +will not allow the Portuguese to go into the land except for wood +and water, bringing provisions and merchandise and all other +things they want to their ships in small barks, so that a market +is held daily on the deck of the ship till she is laden. Another +ship goes yearly from Malacca for Siam to lade +<i>Verzino</i>[160]. All these voyages belong exclusively to the +captain of Malacca, and when he is not disposed to make them on +his own account he sells them to others.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 160: From another part of this voyage it +appears that this is some species of seed from which oil was +expressed.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XV.</p> + +<p><i>Of the City of Siam</i>.</p> + +<p>Siam was the imperial seat of the kingdom of that name and a +great city, till the year 1567, when it was taken by the king of +Pegu, who came by land with a prodigious army of 1,400,000 men, +marching for four months, and besieged Siam for twenty-two +mouths, during which he lost a vast number of men, and at lost +won the city. I happened to be in the city of Pegu about six +months after his departure on this expedition, and saw the +governors left by him in the command of Pegu send off 500,000 +men, to supply the places of those who were slain in this siege. +Yet after all he would not have won the place unless for +treachery, in consequence of which one of the gates was left +open, through which he forced his way with great trouble into the +city. When the king of Siam found that he was betrayed and that +his enemy had gained possession of the city, he poisoned himself. +His wives and children, and all his nobles that were not slain +during the siege, were carried captives to Pegu. I was there at +the return of the king in triumph from this conquest, and his +entry into Pegu was a goodly sight, especially the vast number of +elephants laden with gold, silver, and jewels, and carrying the +noblemen and women who were made captives at Siam.</p> + +<p>To return to my voyage. I departed from Malacca in a great +ship bound for St Thome on the coast of Coromandel, and as at +that time the captain of Malacca had intelligence that the king +of Acheen meant to come against Malacca with a great fleet and +army, he refused to allow any ships to depart. On this account we +departed from Malacca under night without having made any +provision of water; and being upwards of 400 persons on board, we +proposed to have gone to a certain island for water, but by +contrary winds we were unable to accomplish this, and were driven +about by the tempests for forty-two days, the mountains of +<i>Zerzerline</i> near the kingdom of <i>Orissa</i>, 500 miles +beyond St Thome, being the first land we got sight of. So we came +to Orissa with many sick, and had lost a great number for want of +water. The sick generally died in four days illness. For the +space of a year after, my throat continued sore and hoarse, and I +could never satisfy my insatiable thirst. I judged the reason of +this hoarseness to be from the continual use of sippets dipped in +vinegar and oil, on which I sustained my life for many days. We +had no scarcity of bread or wine; but the wines of that country +are so hot that they cannot be drank without water, or they +produce death. When we began to want water, I saw certain Moors +who were officers in the ship who sold a small dish of water for +a ducat, and I have afterwards seen a <i>bar</i> of pepper, which +is two quintals and a half, offered for a small measure, and it +could not be had even at that price. I verily believe I must have +died, together with my slave, whom I had bought at a high price, +had I not sold him for half his value, that I might save his +drink to supply my own urgent wants, and save my own life.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVI.</p> + +<p><i>Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River Ganges</i>.</p> + +<p>This was a fair and well regulated kingdom, through which a +man might have travelled with gold in his hand without danger, so +long as it was governed by its native sovereign who was a +Gentile, and resided in the city of <i>Catecha</i>[161] six days +journey inland. This king loved strangers, especially merchants +who traded in his dominions, insomuch that he took no customs +from them, neither did he vex them with any grievous impositions, +only that each ship that came thither paid some small affair in +proportion to her tonnage. Owing to this good treatment +twenty-five ships, great and small, used to lade yearly in the +port of Orissa, mostly with rice and with different kinds of +white cotton cloths, oil of <i>zerzerline</i> or <i>verzino</i> +which is made from a seed, and answers well for eating or frying +fish, lac, long pepper, ginger, dry and candied mirabolans, and +great store of cloth made from a kind of silk which grows on +trees requiring no labour or cultivation, as when the <i>bole</i> +or round pod is grown to the size of an orange, all they have to +do is to gather it. About sixteen years before this, the Pagan +king of Orissa was defeated and slain and his kingdom conquered, +by the king of <i>Patane</i>[162], who was also king of the +greatest part of Bengal. After the conquest of Orissa, this king +imposed a duty of 20 per centum on all trade, as had been +formerly paid in his other dominions. But this king did not enjoy +his acquisitions long, being soon conquered by another tyrant, +who was the great Mogul of Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia, against whom +the king of Patane made very little resistance.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 161: Cuttack, at the head of the Delta of +the Mahamuddy or Gongah river, in lat. 20° 32' N. lon. +86° 9' E. is probably here meant, It is only about 45 miles +from the sea, but might have been six days journey from the port +where the author took shelter, which probably was +Balasore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 162: Probably so called from residing at +Patna, called Patane in the text.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Departing from Orissa I went to the harbour of <i>Piqueno</i> +in Bengal, 170 miles to the east from Orissa. We went in the +first place along the coast for 54 miles when we entered the +river Ganges. From the mouth of this river to a place called +<i>Satagan</i>, where the merchants assemble with their +commodities, are 100 miles, to which place they row up the river +along with the flood tide in <i>eighteen</i> hours. This river +ebbs and flows as it does in the Thames, and when the ebb begins, +although their barks are light and propelled with oars like +foists, they cannot row against the ebb tide, but must make fast +to one of the banks of the river and wait for next flood. These +boats are called <i>bazaras</i> and <i>patuas</i>, and row as +well as a galliot or any vessel I have ever seen. At the distance +of a good tide rowing before reaching <i>Satagan</i> we come to a +place called <i>Buttor</i>, which ships do not go beyond, as the +river is very shallow upwards. At <i>Buttore</i> a village is +constructed every year, in which all the houses and shops are +made of straw, and have every necessary convenience for the use +of the merchants. This village continues as long as the ships +remain there; but when they depart for the Indies, every man goes +to his plot of houses and sets them on fire. This circumstance +seemed very strange to me; for as I passed up the river to +<i>Satagan</i>, I saw this village standing, having a great +multitude of people with many ships and bazars; and at my return +along with the captain of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I +was amazed to see no remains of the village except the appearance +of the burnt houses, all having been razed and burnt.</p> + +<p>Small ships go up to <i>Satagan</i> where they load and unload +their cargoes. In this port of <i>Satagan</i> twenty-five or +thirty ships great and small are loaded yearly with rice, cotton +cloths of various kinds, lac, great quantities of sugar, dried +and preserved mirabolans, long pepper, oil of <i>Verzino</i>, and +many other kinds of merchandise. The city of Satagan is tolerably +handsome as a city of the Moors, abounding in every thing, and +belonged formerly to the king of <i>Patane</i> or <i>Patna</i>, +but is now subject to the great Mogul. I was in this kingdom four +months, where many merchants bought or hired boats for their +convenience and great advantage, as there is a fair every day in +one town or city of the country. I also hired a bark and went up +and down the river in the prosecution of my business, in the +course of which I saw many strange things.</p> + +<p>The kingdom of Bengal has been long under the power of the +Mahomedans, yet there are many Gentile inhabitants. Wherever I +speak of Gentiles I am to be understood as signifying idolaters, +and by Moors I mean the followers of Mahomet. The inhabitants of +the inland country do greatly worship the river Ganges; for if +any one is sick, he is brought from the country to the banks of +the river, where they build for him a cottage of straw, and every +day they bathe him in the river. Thus many die at the side of the +Ganges, and after their death they make a heap of boughs and +sticks on which they lay the dead body and then set the pile on +fire. When the dead body is half roasted, it is taken from the +fire, and having an empty jar tied about its neck is thrown into +the river. I saw this done every night for two months as I passed +up and down the river in my way to the fairs to purchase +commodities from the merchants. On account of this practice the +Portuguese do not drink the water of the Ganges, although it +appears to the eye much better and clearer than that of the +Nile.</p> + +<p>"Of <i>Satagan, Buttor</i>, and <i>Piqueno</i>, in the kingdom +of Bengal, no notices are to be found in the best modern maps of +that country, so that we can only approximate their situation by +guess. Setting out from what the author calls the port of +<i>Orissa</i>, which has already been conjectured to be Balasore, +the author coasted to the river Ganges, at the distance of 54 +miles. This necessarily implies the western branch of the Ganges, +or <i>Hoogly</i> river, on which the English Indian capital, +<i>Calcutta</i>, now stands. <i>Satagan</i> is said to have been +100 miles up the river, which would carry us up almost to the +city of <i>Sautipoor</i>, which may possibly have been +<i>Satagan</i>. The two first syllables of the name are almost +exactly the same, and the final syllable in Sauti<i>poor</i> is a +Persian word signifying town, which may have been <i>gan</i> in +some other dialect. The entire distance from <i>Balasore</i>, or +the port of Orissa, to <i>Piqueno</i> is stated at 170 miles, of +which 154 have been already accounted for, so that Piqueno must +have been only about 16 miles above Satagan, and upon the +Ganges[163]."--ED.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 163: These observations, distinguished by +inverted commas, are placed in the text, as too long for a +note.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XVII.</p> + +<p><i>Of Tanasserim and other Places</i>.</p> + +<p>In continuation of my peregrinations, I sailed from the port +of <i>Piqueno</i> to Cochin, from whence I went to Malacca, and +afterwards to Pegu, being 800 miles distant. That voyage is +ordinarily performed in twenty-five or thirty days; but we were +four months on the way, and at the end of three months we were +destitute of provisions. The pilot alleged that, according to the +latitude by his observation, we could not be far from +<i>Tanassery</i>, or <i>Tanasserim</i>, a city in the kingdom of +Pegu. In this he was mistaken, as we found ourselves in the +middle of many islands and uninhabited rocks, yet some Portuguese +who were on board affirmed that they knew the land, and could +even point out where the city of Tanasserim stood. This city +belongs of right to Siam, and is situated on the side of a great +river, which comes from the kingdom of Siam. At the month of this +river there is a village called <i>Mirgim, Merghi</i>, or +<i>Morgui</i>, at which some ships load every year with +<i>Verzino</i>, <i>Nypa</i>, and Benzoin, with a few cloves, +nutmegs, and mace, that come from Siam; but the principal +merchandise are <i>Verzino</i> and <i>Nypa</i>. This last is an +excellent wine, which is made from the flower of a tree called +<i>Nyper</i>. They distil the liquor prepared from the +<i>Nyper</i>, and make therewith an excellent drink, as clear as +crystal, which is pleasant to the taste, and still better to the +stomach, as it has most excellent virtues, insomuch that if a +person were rotten with the lues, and drinks abundantly of this +wine, he shall be made whole, as I have seen proved: For when I +was in Cochin, the nose of a friend of mine began to drop off +with that disease, on which he was advised by the physicians to +go to Tanasserim at the season of the new wines, and to drink the +<i>Nyper</i> wine day and night, as much as he was able. He was +ordered to use it before being distilled, when it is most +delicate; for after distillation it become much stronger, and is +apt to produce drunkenness. He went accordingly, and did as he +was directed, and I have seen him since perfectly sound and +well-coloured. It is very cheap in Pegu, where a great quantity +is made every year; but being in great repute in the Indies, it +is dear when carried to a distance.</p> + +<p>I now return to my unfortunate voyage, where we were among the +uninhabited rocks and islands far from Tanasserim, and in great +straits for victuals. From what was said by the pilot and two +Portuguese, that we were directly opposite the harbour of +Tanasserim, we determined to go thither in out boat to bring +provisions, leaving orders to the ship to await our return. +Accordingly, twenty-eight of us went into the boat, and left the +ship about noon one day, expecting to get into the harbour before +night; but, after rowing all that day and the next night, and all +the ensuing day, we could find no harbour nor any fit place to +land; for, trusting to the ignorant counsel of the pilot and the +two Portuguese, we had overshot the harbour and left it behind +us. In this way we twenty-eight unfortunate persons in the boat +lost both our ship and the inhabited land, and were reduced to +the utmost extremity, having no victuals along with us. By the +good providence of God, one of the mariners in the boat had +brought a small quantity of rice along with him, intending to +barter it for some other thing, though the whole was so little +that three or four men might have eaten it all at one meal. I +took charge of this small store, engaging, with God's blessing, +that it should serve to keep us all in life, till it might please +God to send us to some inhabited place, and when I slept I +secured it in my bosom, that I might not be robbed of my precious +deposit. We were nine days rowing along the coast, finding +nothing but an uninhabited country and desert islands, where even +grass would have been esteemed a luxury in our miserable state. +We found indeed some leaves of trees, but so hard that we could +not chew them. We had wood and water enough, and could only row +along with the flood tide, as when it ebbed we had to make fast +our boat to one of the desert islands. On one of these days, it +pleased God that we discovered a nest or hole, in which were 144 +tortoise eggs, which proved a wonderful help to us, as they were +as large as hens eggs, covered only by a tender skin, instead of +a shell. Every day we boiled a kettle full of these eggs, mixing +a handful of rice among the broth. At the end of nine days, it +pleased God that we discovered some fishermen in small barks, +employed in catching fish. We rowed immediately towards them with +much delight and thankfulness, for never were men more glad than +we, being so much reduced by famine that we could hardly stand on +our legs; yet, according to the allotment we had made of our +rice, we still had as much as would have served four days. The +first village we came to was in the gulf of <i>Tavay</i>, on the +coast of Tanasserim, in the dominions of Pegu, where we found +plenty of provisions; yet for two or three days after our arrival +none of us could eat much, and most of us were at the point of +death. From Tavay to <i>Martaban</i>, in the kingdom of Pegu, the +distance is 72 miles[164]. We loaded our boat at Tavay with +provisions sufficient for six months, and then went in our boat +to the city and port of Martaban, in the kingdom of Pegu, and +arrived there in a short time. But not finding our ship there as +we hoped, we dispatched two barks in search of her. They found +her in great calamity at an anchor, with a contrary wind, which +was exceedingly unfortunate for the people, especially as they +had been a whole month without a boat, which prevented them from +making any provision of wood and water. The ship, however, +arrived safe, by the blessing of God, in the harbour of +Martaban.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 164: On the coast of Tanasserim, in lat. +13° N. is an island called <i>Tavay</i>, so that the gulf of +Tavay in the text was probably in that neighbourhood. Martaban is +in lat. 16° 40' N. So that the difference of latitude is +8° 40', and the distance cannot be less than 250 +miles.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XVIII</p> + +<p><i>Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu.</i></p> + +<p>On our arrival at Martaban we found about ninety Portuguese +there, including merchants and lower people, who had fallen at +variance with the governor of the city, because certain vagabond +Portuguese had slain five <i>falchines,</i> or porters, belonging +to the king of Pegu. According to the custom of that country, +when the king of Pegu happens to be at a distance from his +capital, a caravan, or company of <i>falchines</i>, is dispatched +every fifteen days, each of them having a basket on his head full +of fruit or some other delicacy, or clean clothes for the king's +use. It accordingly happened, about a month after the king of +Pegu had gone against Siam, with 1,400,000 men, that one of these +caravans stopt at Martaban, to rest for the night. On this +occasion a quarrel ensued between them and some Portuguese, which +ended in blows, and the Portuguese being worsted, returned upon +the <i>falchines</i> in the night, while they were asleep, and +cut off five of their heads. There is a law in Pegu, that +whosoever sheds the blood of a man, shall pay the price of blood +according to the rank of the person slain: but as these +<i>falchines</i> were the servants of the king, the governor of +Martaban durst not do any thing in the matter without the king's +orders. The king was accordingly informed of the affair, and gave +orders that the malefactors should be kept in custody till his +return, when he would duly administer justice, but the captain of +the Portuguese refused to deliver up these men to the governor, +and even armed himself and the other Portuguese, marching every +day about the city, with drums beating and displayed colours, as +in despite of the governor, who was unable to enforce his +authority, as the city was almost empty of men, all who were fit +for war having gone with the vast army against Siam.</p> + +<p>We arrived at Martaban in the midst of this difference, and I +thought it a very strange thing to see the Portuguese behave +themselves with such insolence in the city of a sovereign prince. +Being very doubtful of the consequences, I did not think proper +to land my goods, which I considered in greater safety on board +ship than on shore. Most part of the goods on board belonged to +the owner, who was at Malacca; but there were several merchants +in the ship who had goods, though none of them had to any great +value, and all of them declared they would not land any of their +goods unless I landed mine; yet they afterwards neglected my +advice and example, and landed their goods, all of which were +accordingly lost. The governor and intendant of the custom-house +sent for me, and demanded to know why I did not land my goods, +and pay the duties like the rest; on which I said that I was a +stranger, only new to the country, and observing so much disorder +among the Portuguese, I was afraid to lose my goods, which I was +determined not to bring on shore, unless the governor would +promise me in the king's name that no harm should come to me or +my goods, whatever might happen to the Portuguese, with whom I +had taken no part in the late tumult. As what I said seemed +reasonable, the governor sent for the <i>Bargits</i>, who are the +councillors of the city, who engaged, in the name of the king, +that neither I nor my goods should meet with any injury, and of +which they made a notarial entry or memorandum. I then sent for +my goods, and paid the customs, which is ten per centum of the +value at that port; and for my greater security I hired a house +for myself and my goods, directly facing the house of the +governor.</p> + +<p>In the sequel, the captain of the Portuguese and all the +merchants of that nation, were driven out of the city, in which I +remained, along with twenty-one poor men, who were officers in +the ship I came in from Malacca. The Gentiles had determined on +being revenged of the Portuguese for their insolence, but had +delayed till all the goods were landed from our ship; and the +very next night there arrived four thousand soldiers from Pegu, +with some war elephants. Before these made any stir in the city, +the governor issued orders to all the Portuguese, in case of +hearing any noise or clamour in the city, not to stir from their +houses on pain of death. About four hours after sunset, I heard a +prodigious noise and tumult of men and elephants, who were +bursting open the doors of the Portuguese warehouses, and +overturning their houses of wood and straw, in which tumult some +of the Portuguese were wounded, and one of them slain. Many of +those who had before boasted of their courage, now fled on board +some small vessels in the harbour, some of them fleeing naked +from their beds. That night the Peguers carried all the goods +belonging to the Portuguese from the suburbs into the city, and +many of the Portuguese were likewise arrested. After this, the +Portuguese who had fled to the ships resumed courage, and, +landing in a body, set fire to the houses in the suburbs, and as +these were entirely composed of boards covered with straw, and +the wind blew fresh at the time, the entire suburbs were speedily +consumed, and half of the city had like to have been destroyed. +After this exploit, the Portuguese had no hopes of recovering any +part of their goods, which might amount to the value of 16,000 +ducats, all of which they might assuredly have got back if they +had not set the town on fire.</p> + +<p>Understanding that the late seizure of their goods had been +done by the sole authority of the governor of Martaban, without +authority from the king of Pegu, they were sensible of the folly +of their proceedings in setting the town on fire; yet next +morning they began to discharge their cannon against the town, +and continued their cannonade for four days, yet all in vain, as +their balls were intercepted by the top of a small hill or rising +ground which intervened, and did no harm to the city. At this +time the governor arrested the twenty-one Portuguese who were in +the city, and sent them to a place four miles up the country, +where they were detained till such time as the other Portuguese +departed with their ships, after which they were allowed to go +where they pleased, having no farther harm done them. During all +these turmoils I remained quietly in my house, under the +protection of a strong guard appointed by the governor, to +prevent any one from doing harm to me or my goods. In this manner +he effectually performed the promise he had made me in the king's +name; but he would on no account permit me to depart till the +king returned from Siam to Pegu, which was greatly to my +hindrance, as I remained twenty-one months under sequestration, +during all which time I could neither buy nor sell any kind of +goods whatever. Those commodities which I had brought with me +were pepper, sandal wood, and porcelain of China. At length, when +the king came back to Pegu, I made my supplication to him, and +had liberty to go when and where I pleased. Accordingly, I +immediately departed from Martaban for Pegu, the capital city of +the kingdom of that name, being a voyage by sea of three or four +days. We may likewise go by land between these two places, but it +is much better and cheaper for anyone that has goods to +transport, as I had, to go by sea.</p> + +<p>In this short voyage we meet with the <i>Macareo</i>, or +<i>bore</i> of the sea, which is one of the most marvellous of +the works of nature, and one of these hardest to be believed if +not seen. This consists in the prodigious increase and diminution +of the water of the sea all at one push or instant, and the +horrible noise and earthquake which this Macareo produces when it +makes its approach. We went from Martaban in barks like our pilot +boats, taking the flood tide along with us, and they went with +the most astonishing rapidity, as swift as an arrow from a bow as +long as the flow lasts. Whenever the water is at the highest, +these barks are carried out of the mid-channel to one or other +bank of the river, where they anchor out of the way of the stream +of the ebb, remaining dry at low water; and when the ebb is +completely run out, then are the barks left on high above the +water in the mid-channel, as far as the top of a house is from +the foundation. The reason of thus anchoring so far from the +mid-stream or channel is, that when the first of the flood, +Macareo or bore, comes in, any ship or vessel riding in the fair +way or mid-channel would surely be overthrown and destroyed. And +even with this precaution of anchoring so far above the channel, +so that the bore has lost much of its force before rising so high +as to float them, yet they always moor with their bows to the +stream, which still is often so powerful as to put them in great +fear; for if the anchor did not hold good, they would be in the +utmost danger of being lost. When the water begins to increase, +it comes on with a prodigious noise as if it were an earthquake. +In its first great approach it makes three great waves. The first +wave washes over the bark from stem to stem: The second is not so +strong; at the third they raise the anchor and resume their +voyage up the river, rowing with such swiftness that they seem to +fly for the space of six hours, while the flood lasts. In these +tides there must be no time lost, for if you arrive not at the +proper station before the flood is spent, you must turn back from +whence you came, as there is no staying at any place except at +these stations, some of which are more dangerous than others, +according as they happen to be higher or lower. On returning from +Pegu to Martaban they never continue more than half ebb, that +they may have it in their power to lay their barks high upon the +bank, for the reason already given. I could never learn any +reason for the prodigious noise made by the water in this +extraordinary rise of the tide. There is another Macareo in the +gulf of Cambay, as formerly mentioned, but it is nothing in +comparison of this in the river of Pegu.</p> + +<p>With the blessing of God we arrived safe at Pegu, which +consists of two cities, the old and the new, all the merchants of +the country and stranger merchants residing in the old city, in +which is far the greatest trade. The city itself is not very +large, but it has very great suburbs. The houses are all built of +canes, and covered with leaves or straw; but every merchant has +one house or magazine, called <i>Godown</i>, built of bricks, in +which they secure their most valuable commodities, to save them +from fire, which frequently happens to houses built of such +combustible materials.</p> + +<p>In the new city is the royal palace, in which the king dwells, +with all his nobles and officers of state, and attendants. While +I was there the building of the new city was completed. It is of +considerable size, built perfectly square upon an uniform level, +and walled round, having a wet ditch on the outside, filled with +crocodiles, but there are no draw-bridges. Each side of the +square has five gates, being twenty in all; and there are many +places on the walls for centinels, built of wood, and gilded over +with gold. The streets are all perfectly straight, so that from +any of the gates you can see clear through to the opposite gate, +and they are so broad that 10 or 12 horsemen may ride abreast +with ease. The cross streets are all equally broad and straight, +and on each side of all the streets close to the houses there is +a row of cocoa-nut trees, making a most agreeable shade. The +houses are all of wood, covered with a kind of tiles, in the form +of cups, very necessary and useful in that country. The palace is +in the middle of the city, walled round like a castle, the +lodgings within being built of wood, all over gilded, and richly +adorned with pinnacles of costly work, covered all over with +gold, so that it may truly be called a king's house. Within the +gate is a large handsome court, in which are lodges for the +strongest and largest elephants, which are reserved for the +king's use, among which are four that are entirely white, a +rarity that no other king can boast of; and were the king of Pegu +to hear that any other king had white elephants, he would send +and demand them as a gift. While I was there two such were +brought out of a far distant country, which cost me something for +a sight of them, as the merchants were commanded to go to see +them, and every one was obliged to give something to the keepers. +The brokers gave for every merchant half a ducat, which they call +a <i>tansa</i>, and this produced a considerable sum, as there +were a great many merchants in the city. After paying the +<i>tansa</i>, they may either visit the elephants or not as they +please, as after they are put into the king's stalls, every one +may see them whenever they will. But before this, every one mast +go to see them, such being the royal pleasure. Among his other +titles, this king is called <i>King of the White Elephants</i>; +and it is reported that if he knew of any other king having any +white elephants who would not resign them to him, he would hazard +his whole kingdom to conquer them. These white elephants are so +highly esteemed that each of them has a house gilded all over, +and they are served with extraordinary care and attention in +vessels of gold and silver. Besides these white elephants, there +is a black one of most extraordinary size, being <i>nine cubits +high</i>. It is reported that this king has four thousand war +elephants, all of which have teeth. They are accustomed to put +upon their uppermost teeth certain sharp spikes of iron, fastened +on with rings, because these animals fight with their teeth. He +has also great numbers of young elephants, whose teeth are not +yet grown.</p> + +<p>In this country they have a curious device for hunting or +taking elephants, which is erected about two miles from the +capital. At that place there is a fine palace gilded all over, +within which is a sumptuous court, and all round the outside +there are a great number of places for people to stand upon to +see the hunting. Near this place is a very large wood or forest, +through which a great number of the king's huntsmen ride on the +backs of female elephants trained on purpose, each huntsman +having five or six of these females, and it is said that their +parts are anointed with a certain composition, the smell of which +so powerfully attracts the wild males that they cannot leave +them, but follow them wheresoever they go. When the huntsmen find +any of the wild elephants so entangled, they guide the females +towards the palace, which is called a <i>tambell</i>, in which +there is a door which opens and shuts by machinery, before which +door there is a long straight passage having trees on both sides, +so that it is very close and dark. When the wild elephant comes +to this avenue, he thinks himself still in the woods. At the end +of this avenue there is a large field, and when the hunters have +enticed their prey into this field, they immediately send notice +to the city, whence come immediately fifty or sixty horsemen, who +beset the field all round. Then the females which are bred to +this business go directly to the entry of the dark avenue, and +when the wild male elephant has entered therein, the horsemen +shout aloud and make as much noise as possible to drive the wild +elephant forward to the gate of the palace, which is then open, +and as soon as he is gone in, the gate is shut without any noise. +The hunters, with the female elephants and the wild one, are all +now within the court of the palace, and the females now withdraw +one by one from the court, leaving the wild elephant alone, +finding himself thus alone and entrapped, he is so madly enraged +for two or three hours, that it is wonderful to behold. He +weepeth, he flingeth, he runneth, he jostleth, he thrusteth under +the galleries where the people stand to look at him, endeavouring +all he can to kill some of them, but the posts and timbers are +all so strong that he cannot do harm to any one, yet he sometimes +breaks his teeth in his rage. At length, wearied with violent +exertions, and all over in a sweat, he thrusts his trunk into his +mouth, and sucks it full of water from his stomach, which he then +blows at the lookers on. When he is seen to be much exhausted, +certain people go into the court, having long sharp-pointed canes +in their hands, with which they goad him that he may enter into +one of the stalls made for the purpose in the court, which are +long and narrow, so that he cannot turn when once in. These men +must be very wary and agile, for though their canes are long, the +elephants would kill them if they were not swift to save +themselves. When they have got him into one of the stalls, they +let down ropes from a loft above, which they pass under his +belly, about his neck, and round his legs, to bind him fast, and +leave him there for four or five days without meat or drink. At +the end of that time, they loosen all the cords, put one of the +females in beside him, giving them meat and drink, and in eight +days after he is quite tame and tractable. In my opinion, there +is not any animal so intelligent as the elephant, nor of so much +capacity and understanding, for he will do every thing that his +keeper desires, and seems to lack nothing of human reason except +speech.</p> + +<p>It is reported that the great military power of the king of +Pegu mainly depends on his elephants; as, when he goes to battle, +each elephant has a castle set on his back, bound securely with +bands under his belly, and in every castle four men are placed, +who fight securely with arquebusses, bows and arrows, darts, and +pikes, or other missile weapons; and it is alleged that the skin +of the elephant is so hard and thick as not to be pierced by the +ball of an arquebuss, except under the eyes, on the temples, or +in some other tender part of the body. Besides this, the +elephants are of great strength, and have a very excellent order +in time of battle, as I have seen in their festivals, which they +make every year, which is a rare sight worth mention, that among +so barbarous a people there should be such goodly discipline as +they have in their armies; which are drawn up in distinct and +orderly squares, of elephants, horsemen, pikemen, and +arquebuseers, the number of which is infinite and beyond +reckoning; but their armour and weapons are worthless and weak. +Their pikes are very bad, and their swords worse, being like long +knives without points; yet their arquebusses are very good, the +king having 80,000 men armed with that weapon, and the number is +continually increasing. They are ordained to practise daily in +shooting at a mark, so that by continual exercise they are +wonderfully expert. The king of Pegu has also great cannon made +of very good metal; and, in fine, there is not a king in the +world who has more power or strength than he, having twenty-six +crowned kings under his command, and he is able to take the field +against his enemies with a million and a half of soldiers. The +state and splendour of this kingdom, and the provisions necessary +for so vast a multitude of soldiers, is a thing incredible, +except by those who know the nature and quality of the people and +government. I have seen with my own eyes these people, both the +commons and soldiers, feed upon all kinds of beasts or animals, +however filthy or unclean, everything that hath life serving them +for food: Yea, I have even seen them eat scorpions and serpents, +and all kinds of herbs, even grass. Hence, if their vast armies +can only get enough of water, they can maintain themselves long +even in the forests, on roots, flowers, and leaves of trees; but +they always carry rice with them in their marches, which is their +main support.</p> + +<p>The king of Pegu has no naval force; but for extent of +dominion, number of people, and treasure of gold and silver, he +far exceeds the Grand Turk in power and riches. He has various +magazines full of treasure in gold and silver, which is daily +increased, and is never diminished. He is also lord of the mines +of rubies, sapphires, and spinels. Near the royal palace there is +an inestimable treasure, of which he seems to make no account, as +it stands open to universal inspection. It is contained in a +large court surrounded by a stone wall, in which are two gates +that stand continually open. Within this court there are four +gilded houses covered with lead, in each of which houses are +certain heathen idols of very great value. The first house +contains an image of a man of vast size all of gold, having a +crown of gold on his head enriched with most rare rubies and +sapphires, and round about him are the images of four little +children, all likewise of gold. In the second house is the statue +of a man in massy silver, which seems to sit on heaps of money. +This enormous idol, though sitting, is as lofty as the roof of a +house. I measured his feet, which I found exceeded that of my own +stature; and the head of this statue bears a crown similar to +that of the former golden image. The third house has a brazen +image of equal size, having a similar crown on its head. In the +fourth house is another statue as large as the others, made of +gansa, or mixed metal of copper and lead, of which the current +money of the country is composed, and this idol has a crown on +its head as rich and splendid as the others. All this valuable +treasure is freely seen by all who please to go in and look at +it, as the gates are always open, and the keepers do not refuse +admission to any one.</p> + +<p>Every year the king of Pegu makes a public triumph after the +following manner. He rides out on a triumphal car or great +waggon, richly gilded all over, and of great height, covered by a +splendid canopy, and drawn by sixteen horses, richly caparisoned. +Behind the car walk twenty of his nobles or chief officers, each +of whom holds the end of a rope, the other end being fastened to +the car to keep it upright and prevent it from falling over. The +king sits on high in the middle of the car, and on the same are +four of his most favoured nobles surrounding him. Before the car +the whole army marches in order, and the whole nobles of the +kingdom are round about the car; so that it is wonderful to +behold so many people and so much riches all in such good order, +especially considering how barbarous are the people. The king of +Pegu has one principal wife, who lives in a seraglio along with +300 concubines, and he is said to have 90 children. He sits every +day in person to hear the suits of his people, yet he nor they +never speak together. The king sits up aloft on a high seat or +tribunal in a great hall, and lower down sit all his barons round +about. Those that demand audience enter into the great court or +hall in presence of the king, and sit down on the ground at forty +paces from the king, holding their supplications in their hands, +written on the leaves of a tree three quarters of a yard long and +two fingers broad, on which the letters are written or inscribed +by means of a sharp stile or pointed iron. On these occasions +there is no respect of persons, all of every degree or quality +being equally admitted to audience. All suitors hold up their +supplication in writing, and in their hands a present or gift, +according to the importance of their affairs. Then come the +secretaries, who take the supplications from the petitioners and +read them to the king; and if he thinks good to grant the favour +or justice which they desire, he commands to have the gifts taken +from their hands; but if he considers their request not just or +reasonable, he commands them to depart without receiving their +presents.</p> + +<p>There is no commodity in the Indies worth bringing to Pegu, +except sometimes the opium of Cambay, and if any one bring money +he is sure to lose by it. The only merchandise for this market is +the fine painted calicos of San Thome, of that kind which, on +being washed, becomes more lively in its colours. This is so much +in request, that a small bale of it will sell for 1000 or even +2000 ducats. Also from San Thome they send great store of cotton +yarn, dyed red by means of a root called <i>saia</i>, which +colour never washes out. Every year there goes a great ship from +San Thome to Pegu laden with a valuable cargo of these +commodities. If this ship depart from San Thome by the 6th of +September, the voyage is sure to be prosperous; but if they delay +sailing till the 12th, it is a great chance if they are not +forced to return; for in these parts the winds blow firmly for +certain times, so as to sail for Pegu with the wind astern; and +if they arrive not and get to anchor before the wind change, they +must perforce return back again, as the wind blows three or four +months with great force always one way. If they once get to +anchor on the coast, they may save their voyage with great +labour. There also goes a large ship from Bengal every year, +laden with all kinds of fine cotton cloth, and which usually +arrives in the river of Pegu when the ship of San Thome is about +to depart. The harbour which these two ships go to is called +<i>Cosmin</i>. From Malacca there go every year to Martaban, +which is a port of Pegu, many ships, both large and small, with +pepper, sandal-wood, porcelain of China, camphor, +<i>bruneo</i>[165], and other commodities. The ships that come +from the Red Sea frequent the ports of Pegu and Ciriam, bringing +woollen cloths, scarlets, velvets, opium, and chequins, by which +last they incur loss, yet they necessarily bring them wherewith +to make their purchases, and they afterwards make great profit of +the commodities which they take back with them, from Pegu. +Likewise the ships of the king of Acheen bring pepper to the same +ports.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 165: Perhaps we ought to read in the text +<i>camphor of Perneo</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From San Thome or Bengal, <i>out of the sea of Bara</i>? to +Pegu, the voyage is 300 miles, and they go up the river, with the +tide of flood in four days to the city of <i>Cosmin</i>, where +they discharge their cargoes, and thither the <i>customers</i> of +Pegu come and take notes of all the goods of every one, and of +their several marks; after which they transport the goods to Pegu +to the royal warehouses, where the customs of all the goods are +taken. When the <i>customers</i> have taken charge of the goods, +and laden them in barks for conveyance to Pegu, the governor of +the city gives licences to the merchants to accompany their +goods, when three or four of them club together to hire a bark +for their passage to Pegu. Should any one attempt to give in a +wrong note or entry of his goods, for the purpose of stealing any +custom, he is utterly undone, as the king considers it a most +unpardonable offence to attempt depriving him of any part of his +customs, and for this reason the goods are all most scrupulously +searched, and examined three several times. This search is +particularly rigid in regard to diamonds, pearls, and other +articles of small bulk and great value, as all things, in Pegu +that are not of its own productions pay custom both in or out. +But rubies, sapphires, and spinels, being productions of the +country, pay no duties. As formerly mentioned respecting other +parts of India, all merchants going to Pegu or other places, must +carry with them all sorts of household furniture of which they +may be in need, as there are no inns or lodging-houses in which +they can he accommodated, but every man must hire a house when he +comes to a city, for a month or a year, according to the time he +means to remain. In Pegu it is customary to hire a house for six +months.</p> + +<p>From Cosmin to Pegu they go up the river with the flood in six +hours[166]; but if the tide of ebb begin it is necessary to +fasten the bark to the river side, and to remain there till the +next flood. This is a commodious and pleasant passage, as there +are many large villages on both sides of the river which might +even be called cities, and in which poultry, eggs, pigeons, milk, +rice, and other things may be had on very reasonable terms. The +country is all level and fertile, and in eight days we get up to +<i>Macceo</i> which is twelve miles from. Pegu, and the goods are +there landed from the barks, being carried thence to Pegu in +carts or wains drawn by oxen. The merchants are conveyed from +<i>Macceo</i> to Pegu in close palanquins, called <i>delings</i> +or <i>doolies</i>, in each of which one man is well accommodated, +having cushions to rest upon, and a secure covering from the sun +or rain, so that he may sleep if he will. His four +<i>falchines</i> or bearers carry him along at a great rate, +running all the way, changing at intervals, two and two at a +time. The freight and customs at Pegu may amount to 20, 22, or 23 +per centum, according as there may be more or less stolen of the +goods on paying the customs. It is necessary therefore for one to +be very watchful and to have many friends; for when the goods are +examined for the customs in the great hall of the king, many of +the Pegu gentlemen go in accompanied by their slaves, and these +gentlemen are not ashamed when their slaves rob strangers, +whether of cloth or any other thing, and only laugh at it when +detected; and though the merchants assist each other to watch the +safety of their goods, they cannot look so narrowly but some will +steal more or less according to the nature or quality of the +goods. Even if fortunate enough to escape being robbed by the +slaves, it is impossible to prevent pilfering by the officers of +the customs; for as they take the customs in kind, they +oftentimes take the best, and do not rate each sort as they ought +separately, so that the merchant is often, made to pay much more +than he ought. After undergoing this search and deduction of the +customs, the merchant causes his goods to be carried home to his +house, where he may do with them what he pleases.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 166: From subsequent circumstances the text +is obviously here incorrect, and ought to have been translated, +that the flood tides run six hours; as it will be afterwards seen +that the voyage to a place 12 miles short of Pegu requires eight +days of these tide trips of six]</blockquote> + +<p>In Pegu there are eight brokers licenced by the king, named +<i>tareghe</i>, who are bound to sell all the merchandise which +comes there at the current prices; and if the merchants are +willing to sell their goods at these rates they sell them out of +hand, the brokers having <i>two per centum</i> for their trouble, +and for which they are bound to make good all debts incurred for +the goods sold by them, and often the merchant does not know to +whom his goods are sold. The merchants may indeed sell their own +goods if they will; but in that case the broker is equally +intitled to his two per centum, and the merchant must run his own +risk of recovering his money. This however seldom happens, as the +wife, children, and slaves of the debtor are all liable in +payment. When the agreed time of payment arrives, if the debt is +not cleared, the creditor may seize the person of the debtor and +carry him home to his house, and if not immediately satisfied, he +may take the wife, children, and slaves of the debtor and sell +them. The current money through all Pegu is made of <i>ganza</i>, +which is a composition of copper and lead, and which every one +may stamp at his pleasure, as they pass by weight; yet are they +sometimes falsified by putting in too much lead, on which +occasions no one will receive them in payment. As there is no +other money current, you may purchase gold, silver, rubies, musk, +and all other things with this money. Gold and silver, like other +commodities, vary in their price, being sometimes cheaper and +sometimes dearer. This <i>ganza</i> money is reckoned by +<i>byzas</i>, each <i>byza</i> being 100 <i>ganzas</i>, and is +worth about half a ducat of our money, more or less according as +gold is cheap or dear.</p> + +<p>When any one goes to Pegu to buy jewels, he will do well to +remain there a whole year; for if he would return by the same +ship, he can do very little to purpose in so short a time. Those +who come from San Thome usually have their goods customed about +Christmas, after which they must sell their goods, giving credit +for a month or two, and the ships depart about the beginning of +March. The merchants of San Thome generally take payment for +their goods in gold and silver, which are always plentiful in +Pegu. Eight or ten days before their departure they are satisfied +for their goods. They may indeed have rubies in payment, but they +make no account of them. Such as propose to winter in the country +ought to stipulate in selling their goods for payment in two or +three months, and that they are to be paid in so many +<i>ganzas</i>, not in gold or silver, as every thing is most +advantageously bought and sold by means of this <i>ganza</i> +money. It is needful to specify very precisely both the time of +payment, and in what weight of ganzas they are to be paid, as an +inexperienced person may be much imposed upon both in the weight +and fineness of the <i>ganza</i> money; for the weight rises and +falls greatly from place to place, and he may be likewise +deceived by false <i>ganzas</i> or too much alloyed with lead. +For this reason, when any one is to receive payment he ought to +have along with him a public weigher of money, engaged a day or +two before he commences that business, whom he pays two +<i>byzas</i> a-month, for which he is bound to make good all your +money and to maintain it good, as he receives it and seals the +bags with his own seal, and when he has collected any +considerable sum he causes it to be delivered to the merchant to +whom it belongs. This money is very weighty, as forty +<i>byzas</i> make a porters burden. As in receiving, so in paying +money, a public weigher of money must be employed.</p> + +<p>The merchandises exported from Pegu are gold, silver, rubies, +sapphires, spinels, great quantities of benzoin, long-pepper, +lead, lac, rice, wine, and some sugar. There might be large +quantities of sugar made in Pegu, as they have great abundance of +sugar-canes, but they are given as food to the elephants, and the +people consume large quantities of them in their diet. They +likewise spend many of these sugar-canes[167] in constructing +houses and tents for their idols, which they call <i>varely</i> +and we name pagodas. There are many of these idol houses, both +large and small, which are ordinarily constructed in a +pyramidical form, like little hills, sugar-loaves or bells, some +of them being as high as an ordinary steeple. They are very large +at the bottom, some being a quarter of a mile in compass. The +inside of these temples are all built of bricks laid in clay +mortar instead of lime, and filled up with earth, without any +form or comeliness from top to bottom; afterwards they are +covered with a frame of canes plastered all over with lime to +preserve them from the great rains which fall in this country. +Also about these <i>varely</i> or idol-houses they consume a +prodigious quantity of leaf gold, as all their roofs are gilded +over, and sometimes the entire structure is covered from top to +bottom; and as they require to be newly gilded every ten years, a +prodigious quantity of gold is wasted on this vanity, which +occasions gold to be vastly dearer in Pegu than it would be +otherwise.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 167: This is certainly an error, and Cesar +Frederick has mistaken the bamboo cane used in such erections for +the sugar-cane.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>It may be proper to mention, that in buying jewels or precious +stones in Pegu, he who has no knowledge or experience is sure to +get as good and as cheap articles as the most experienced in the +trade. There are four men at Pegu called <i>tareghe</i> or +jewel-brokers, who have all the jewels or rubies in their hands; +and when any person wants to make a purchase he goes to one of +these brokers, and tells him that he wants to lay out so much +money on rubies; for these brokers have such prodigious +quantities always on hand, that they know not what to do with +them, and therefore sell them at a very low price. Then the +broker carries the merchant along with him to one of their shops, +where he may have what jewels he wants according to the sum of +money he is disposed to lay out. According to the custom of the +city, when the merchant has bargained for a quantity of jewels, +whatever may be the amount of their value, he is allowed to carry +them home to his house, where he may consider them for two or +three days; and if he have not himself sufficient knowledge or +experience in such things, he may always find other merchants who +are experienced, with whom he may confer and take counsel, as he +is at liberty to shew them to any person be pleases; and if he +find that he has not laid out his money to advantage, he may +return them back to the person from whom he had them without loss +or deduction. It is reckoned so great a shame to the +<i>tareghe</i> or jewel-broker to have his jewels returned, that +he would rather have a blow on the face than have it believed +that he had sold his jewels too dear and have them returned on +his hands; for which reason they are sure to give good bargains, +especially to those who have no experience, that they may not +lose their credit. When such merchants as are experienced in +jewels purchase too dear it is their own fault, and is not laid +to the charge of the brokers; yet it is good to have knowledge in +jewels, as it may sometimes enable one to procure them at a lower +price. On the occasions of making these bargains, as there are +generally many other merchants present at the bargain, the broker +and the purchaser have their hands under a cloth, and by certain +signals, made by touching the fingers and nipping the different +joints, they know what is bidden, what is asked, and what is +settled, without the lookers-on knowing any thing of the matter, +although the bargain may be for a thousand or ten thousand +ducats. This is an admirable institution, as, if the lookers-on +should understand what is going on, it might occasion +contention.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIX.</p> + +<p><i>Voyages of the Author to different parts of India.</i></p> + +<p>When I was at Pegu in August 1569, having got a considerable +profit by my endeavours, I was desirous to return to my own +country by way of St Thome, but in that case I should have been +obliged to wait till next March; I was therefore advised to go by +way of Bengal, for which country there was a ship ready to sail +to the great harbour of Chittagong, whence there go small ships +to Cochin in sufficient time to arrive there before the departure +of the Portuguese ships for Lisbon, in which I was determined to +return to Europe. I went accordingly on board the Bengal ship; +but this happened to be the year of the <i>Tyffon</i>, which will +require some explanation. It is therefore to be understood that +in India they have, once every ten or twelve years, such +prodigious storms and tempests as are almost incredible, except +to such as have seen them, neither do they know with any +certainty on what years they may be expected, but unfortunate are +they who happen to be at sea when this tempest or <i>tyffon</i> +takes place, as few escape the dreadful danger. In this year it +was our evil fortune to be at sea in one of these terrible +storms; and well it was for us that our ship was newly +<i>over-planked</i>, and had no loading save victuals and +ballast, with some gold and silver for Bengal, as no other +merchandise is carried to Bengal from Pegu. The tyffon +accordingly assailed us and lasted three days, carrying away our +sails, yards, and rudder; and as the ship laboured excessively, +we cut away our mast, yet she continued to labour more heavily +than before, so that the sea broke over her every moment, and +almost filled her with water. For the space of three days and +three nights, sixty men who were on board did nothing else than +bale out the water continually, twenty at one place, twenty in +another, and twenty at a third place; yet during all this storm +so good was the hull of our ship that she took not in a single +drop of water at her sides or bottom, all coming in at the +hatches. Thus driving about at the mercy of the winds and waves, +we were during the darkness of the third night at about four +o'clock after sunset cast upon a shoal. When day appeared next +morning we could see no land on any side of us, so that we knew +not where we were. It pleased the divine goodness that a great +wave of the sea came and floated us off from the shoal into deep +water, upon which we all felt as men reprieved from immediate +death, as the sea was calm and the water smooth. Casting the lead +we found twelve fathoms water, and bye and bye we had only six +fathoms, when we let go a small anchor which still hung at the +stern, all the others having been lost during the storm. Our +anchor parted next night, and our ship again grounded, when we +shored her up the best we could, to prevent her from over-setting +at the side of ebb.</p> + +<p>When it was day, we found our ship high and dry on a +sand-bank, a full mile from the sea. When the <i>tyffon</i> +entirely ceased, we discovered an island not far from us, to +which we walked on the sand, that we might learn where we were. +We found it inhabited, and in my opinion the most fertile island +I had ever seen. It is divided into two parts by a channel or +water-course, which is full at high tides. With much ado we +brought our ship into that channel; and when the people of the +island saw our ship, and that we were coming to land, they +immediately erected a bazar or market-place with shops right +over-against the ship, to which they brought every kind of +provisions for our supply, and sold them at wonderfully +reasonable rates. I bought many salted kine as provision for the +ship at half a <i>larine</i> each, being all excellent meat and +very fat, and four wild hogs ready dressed for a larine. The +larine is worth about twelve shillings and sixpence. Good fat +hens were bought for a <i>byza</i> each, which does not exceed a +penny; and yet some of our people said that we were imposed upon, +as we ought to have got every thing for half the money. We got +excellent rice at an excessively low price, and indeed every +article of food was at this place in the most wonderful +abundance. The name of this island is <i>Sondiva</i> or Sundeep, +and belongs to the kingdom of Bengal, being 120 miles from +Chittagong, to which place we were bound. The people are Moors or +Mahometans, and the king or chief was a very good kind of man for +a Mahometan; for if he had been a tyrant like others, he might +have robbed us of all we had, as the Portuguese captain at +Chittagong was in arms against the native chief of that place, +and every day there were some persons slain. On receiving this +intelligence, we were in no small fear for our safety, keeping +good watch and ward every night, according to the custom of the +sea; but the governor of the town gave us assurance that we had +nothing to fear, for although the Portuguese had slain the +governor or chief at Chittagong, we were not to blame, and indeed +he every day did us every service and civility in his power, +which we had no reason to expect, considering that the people of +Sundeep and those of Chittagong were subjects of the same +sovereign.</p> + +<p>Departing from Sundeep we came to Chittagong, by which time a +peace or truce had been agreed upon between the Portuguese and +the chiefs of the city, under condition that the Portuguese +captain should depart with his ship without any lading. At this +time there were 18 Portuguese ships of different sizes at that +port, and the captain being a gentleman and a brave man, was +contented to depart in this manner, to his material injury, +rather than hinder so many of his friends and countrymen who were +there, and likewise because, the season for going to Western +India was now past. During the night before his departure, every +ship that was in the port, and had any part of their lading on +board, transshipped it to this captain to help to lessen his loss +and bear his charges, in reward for his courteous behaviour on +this occasion. At this time there came a messenger from the king +of <i>Rachim</i> or Aracan to this Portuguese captain, saying +that his master had heard tidings of his great valour and +prowess, and requesting him to bring his ship to the port of +Aracan where he would be well received. The captain went thither +accordingly, and was exceedingly well satisfied with his +reception.</p> + +<p>The kingdom of Aracan is in the mid-way between Bengal and +Pegu, and the king of Pegu is continually devising means of +reducing the king of Aracan under subjection, which hitherto he +has not been able to effect, as he has no maritime force, whereas +the king of Aracan can arm two hundred galleys or foists; besides +which he has the command of certain sluices or flood-gates in his +country, by which he can drown a great part of his country when +he thinks proper, when at any time the king of Pegu endeavours to +invade his dominions, by which be cuts off the way by which alone +the king of Pegu can have access.</p> + +<p>From the great port of Chittagong they export for India great +quantities of rice, large assortments of cotton cloth of all +sorts, with sugar, corn, money, and other articles of +merchandise. In consequence of the war in Chittagong, the +Portuguese ships were so long detained there, that they were +unable to arrive at Cochin at the usual time; for which reason +the fleet from Cochin was departed for Portugal before their +arrival. Being in one of the smaller ships, which was somewhat in +advance of our fleet from Chittagong, I came in sight of Cochin +just as the very last of the homeward-bound fleet was under sail. +This gave me much dissatisfaction, as there would be no +opportunity of going to Portugal for a whole year; wherefore, on +my arrival at Cochin, I was fully determined to go for Venice by +way of Ormuz. At that time Goa was besieged by the troops of +<i>Dialcan</i> [Adel-khan,] but the citizens made light of this +attack, as they believed it would not continue long. In the +prosecution of my design, I embarked at Cochin in a galley bound +for Goa; but on my arrival there the viceroy would not permit any +Portuguese ship to sail for Ormuz on account of the war then +subsisting, so that I was constrained to remain there.</p> + +<p>Soon after my arrival at Goa I fell into a severe sickness, +which held me four months; and as my physic and diet in that time +cost me 800 ducats, I was under the necessity to sell some part +of my rubies, for which I only got 500 ducats, though well worth +1000. When I began to recover my health and strength, very little +of my money remained, every thing was so scarce and dear. Every +chicken, and these not good, cost me seven or eight livres, or +from six shillings to six and eightpence, and all other things in +proportion; besides which the apothecaries, with their medicines, +were a heavy charge upon me. At the end of six months the siege +of Goa was raised, and as jewels rose materially in their price, +<i>I began to work</i>[168]; and as before I had only sold a +small quantity of inferior rubies to serve my necessities, I now +determined to sell all the jewels I had, and to make another +voyage to Pegu; and as opium was in great request at Pegu when I +was there before, I went from Goa to Cambay, where I laid out +2100 ducats in the purchase of 60 parcels of opium, the ducat +being worth 4s. 2d. I likewise bought three bales of cotton +cloth, which cost me 800 ducats, that commodity selling well in +Pegu. When I had bought these things, I understood the viceroy +had issued orders that the custom on opium should be paid at Goa, +after which it might be carried anywhere else. I shipped +therefore my three bales of cotton cloth at Chaul, in a vessel +bound for Cochin, and went myself to Goa to pay the duty for my +opium.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 168: From this expression it may be +inferred, that besides his mercantile speculations in jewels, +Cesar Frederick was a lapidary.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Goa I went to Cochin, in a ship that was bound for Pegu, +and intended to winter at San Thome; but on my arrival at Cochin +I learnt that the ship with my three bales of cotton cloth was +cast away, so that I lost my 800 seraphins or ducats. On our +voyage from Cochin to San Thome, while endeavouring to weather +the south point of Ceylon, which lies far out to sea, the pilot +was out in his reckoning, and laying-to in the night, thinking +that he had passed hard by the Cape of Ceylon; when morning came +we were far within the Cape, and fallen to leeward, by which it +became now impossible to weather the island, as the wind was +strong and contrary. Thus we lost our voyage for the season, and +we were constrained to go to Manaar to winter there, the ship +having lost all her masts, and being saved from entire wreck with +great difficulty. Besides the delay and disappointment to the +passengers, this was a heavy loss to the captain of the ship, as +he was under the necessity of hiring another vessel at San Thome +at a heavy charge, to carry us and our goods to Pegu. My +companions and I, with all the rest of the merchants, hired a +bark at Manaar to carry us to San Thome, where I received +intelligence by way of Bengal, that opium was very scarce and +dear in Pegu; and as there was no other opium but mine then at +San Thome, for the Pegu market, all the merchants considered me +as a very fortunate man, as I would make great profit, which +indeed I certainly should have done, if my adverse fortune had +not thwarted my well-grounded expectations, in the following +manner: A large ship from Cambaya, bound for <i>Assi</i> +[Acheen?] with a large quantity of opium, and to lade pepper in +return, being forced to lay-to in crossing the mouth of the bay +of Bengal, was obliged to go <i>roomer</i>[169] for 800 miles, by +which means it went to Pegu, and arrived there one day before me. +Owing to this circumstance, opium, which had been very dear in +Pegu, fell to a very low price, the quantity which had sold +before for 50 <i>bizze</i> having fallen to 2-1/2, so large was +the quantity brought by this ship. Owing to this unfortunate +circumstance, I was forced to remain two years in Pegu, otherwise +I must have given away my opium for much less than it cost me, +and even at the end of that time I only made 1000 ducats by what +had cost me 2100 in Cambaya.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 169: The meaning of this ancient nautical +term is here clearly expressed, as drifting to leeward while +laying-to.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After this I went from Pegu to the Indies[170] and Ormuz, with +a quantity of <i>lac</i>. From Ormuz I returned to Chaul, and +thence to Cochin, from which place I went again to Pegu. Once +more I lost the opportunity of becoming rich, as on this voyage I +only took a small quantity of opium, while I might have sold a +large quantity to great advantage, being afraid of meeting a +similar disappointment with that which happened to me before. +Being now again resolved to return into my native country, I went +from Pegu to Cochin, where I wintered, and then sailed for +Ormuz.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 170: Here, and in various other parts of +these early voyages, India and the Indies seem confined to the +western coast of the peninsula, as it is called, or the Malabar +coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XX.</p> + +<p><i>Some Account of the Commodities of India</i>.</p> + +<p>Before concluding this relation of my peregrinations, it seems +proper that I should give some account of the productions of +India.</p> + +<p>In all parts of India, both of the western and eastern +regions, there is pepper and ginger, and in some parts the +greatest quantity of pepper is found wild in the woods, where it +grows without any care or cultivation, except the trouble of +gathering it when ripe. The tree on which the pepper grows is not +unlike our ivy, and runs in the same manner up to the top of such +trees as grow in its neighbourhood, for if it were not to get +hold of some tree it would lie flat on the ground and perish. Its +flower and berry in all things resemble the ivy, and its berries +or grains are the pepper, which are green when gathered, but by +drying in the sun they become black. Ginger requires cultivation, +and its seeds are sown on land previously tilled. The herb +resembles that called <i>panizzo</i>, and the root is the spice +we call ginger. Cloves all come from the Moluccas, where they +grow in two small islands, Ternate and Tidore, on a tree +resembling the laurel. Nutmegs and mace come from the island of +Banda, where they grow together on one tree, which resembles our +walnut tree, but not so large. Long pepper grows in Bengal, Pegu, +and Java.</p> + +<p>All the good sandal-wood comes from the island of Timor. +Camphor, being compounded, or having to undergo a preparation, +comes all from China. That which grows in canes[171] comes from +Borneo, and I think none of that kind is brought to Europe, as +they consume large quantities of it in India, and it is there +very dear. Good aloes wood comes from Cochin-China; and benjamin +from the kingdoms of <i>Assi</i>, Acheen? and Siam. Musk is +brought from Tartary, where it is made, as I have been told, in +the following manner. There is in Tartary a beast as large and +fierce as a wolf, which they catch alive, and beat to death with +small staves, that his blood may spread through his whole body. +This they then cut in pieces, taking out all the bones, and +having pounded the flesh and blood very fine in a mortar, they +dry it and put it into purses made of the skin, and these purses +with their contents are the cods of musk[172].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 171: This is an error, as camphor is a +species of essential oil, grossly sublimed at first from a tree +of the laurel family, and afterwards purified by farther +processes.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 172: The whole of this story is a gross +fabrication imposed by ignorance on credulity. The cods of musk +are natural bags or emunctories, found near the genitals on the +males of an animal named <i>Moschus Moschiferus</i>, or Thibet +Musk. It is found through the whole of Central Asia, except its +most northern parts, but the best musk comes from Thibet.--E. + +<p>"The Jewes doe counterfeit and take out the halfe of the goode +muske, beating it up with an equal quantity of the flesh of an +asse, and put this mixture in the bag or purse, which they sell +for true muske."--<i>Hackluyt</i>.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>I know not whereof amber is made[173], and there are divers +opinions respecting it; but this much is certain, that it is cast +out from the sea, and is found on the shores and banks left dry +by the recess of the tides. Rubies, sapphires, and spinells are +got in Pegu. Diamonds come from different places, and I know but +three kinds of them. The kind which is called <i>Chiappe</i> +comes from <i>Bezeneger</i>, Bijanagur? Those that are naturally +pointed come from the land of Delly and the island of Java, but +those of Java are heavier than the others. I could never learn +whence the precious stones called <i>Balassi</i> are procured. +Pearls are fished for in different places, as has been already +mentioned. The substance called Spodium, which is found concreted +in certain canes, is procured in <i>Cambaza</i>, Cambaya? Of this +concrete I found many pieces in Pegu, when building myself a +house there, as in that country they construct their houses of +canes woven together like mats or basket-work, as formerly +related.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 173: Ambergris is probably meant in the +text under the name of Amber, as the former came formerly from +India, while the latter is principally found in the maritime +parts of Prussia.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The Portuguese trade all the way from Chaul along the coast of +India, and to Melinda in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, on +which coast are many good ports belonging to the Moors. To these +the Portuguese carry a very low-priced cotton cloth, and many +<i>paternosters</i>, or beads made of paultry glass, which are +manufactured at Chaul; and from thence they carry back to India +many elephants teeth, slaves, called Kafrs or Caffers, with some +<i>amber</i> and gold. On this coast the king of Portugal has a +castle at Mozambique, which is of as great importance as any of +his fortresses, in the Indies. The captain or governor of this +castle has certain privileged voyages assigned to him, where only +his agents may trade. In their dealings with the Kafrs along this +coast, to which they go in small vessels, their purchases and +sales are singularly conducted without any conversation or words +on either side. While sailing along the coast, the Portuguese +stop in many places, and going on shore they lay down a small +quantity of their goods, which they leave, going back to the +ship. Then the Kafr merchant comes to look at the goods, and +having estimated them in his own way, he puts down as much gold +as he thinks the goods are worth, leaving both the gold and the +goods, and then withdraws. If on the return of the Portuguese +trader he thinks the quantity of gold sufficient, he taketh it +away and goes back to his ship, after which the Kafr takes away +the goods, and the transaction is finished. But if he find the +gold still left, it indicates that the Portuguese merchant is not +contented with the quantity, and if he thinks proper he adds a +little more. The Portuguese must not, however, be too strict with +them, as they are apt to be affronted and to give over traffic, +being a peevish people. By means of this trade, the Portuguese +exchange their commodities for gold, which they carry to the +castle of Mozambique, standing in an island near the Continental +coast of Cafraria, on the coast of Ethiopia, 2800 miles distant +from India.</p> + +<p>SECTION XXI.</p> + +<p><i>Return of the Author to Europe</i>.</p> + +<p>To return to my voyage. On my arrival at Ormuz, I found there +M. Francis Berettin of Venice, and we freighted a bark in +conjunction to carry us to Bussora, for which we paid 70 ducats; +but as other merchants went along with us, they eased our +freight. We arrived safely at Bussora, where we tarried 40 days, +to provide a caravan of boats to go up the river to +<i>Babylon</i> [Bagdat], as it is very unsafe to go this voyage +with only two or three barks together, because they cannot +proceed during the night, and have to make fast to the sides of +the river, when it is necessary to be vigilant and well provided +with weapons, both for personal safety and the protection of the +goods, as there are numerous thieves who lie in wait to rob the +merchants: Wherefore it is customary and proper always to go in +fleets of not less than 25 or 30 boats, for mutual protection. In +going up the river the voyage is generally 38 or 40 days, +according as the wind happens to be favourable or otherwise, but +we took 50 days. We remained four months at Babylon, until the +caravan was ready to pass the desert to Aleppo. In this city six +European merchants of us consorted together to pass the desert, +five of whom were Venetians and one a Portuguese. The Venetians +were <i>Messer Florinasca</i>, and one of his kinsmen, <i>Messer +Andrea de Polo, Messer Francis Berettin</i>, and I. So we bought +horses and mules for our own use, which are very cheap there, +insomuch that I bought a horse for myself for eleven +<i>akens</i>, and sold him afterwards in Aleppo for 30 ducats. We +bought likewise a tent, which was of very great convenience and +comfort to us, and we furnished ourselves with sufficient +provisions, and beans for the horses, to serve 40 days. We had +also among us 33 camels laden with merchandise, paying two ducats +for every camels load, and, according to the custom of the +country, they furnish 11 camels for every 10 bargained and paid +for. We likewise had with us three men to serve us during the +journey, <i>which are used to go for five Dd.</i>[174] a man, and +are bound to serve for that sum all the way to Aleppo.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 174: Such is the manner in which the hire +of these servants is expressed in Hakluyt. Perhaps meaning 500 +pence; and as the Venetian <i>sol</i> is about a halfpenny, this +will amount to about a guinea, but it does not appear whether +this is the sum for each person, or for all +three.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>By these precautions we made the journey over the desert +without any trouble, as, whenever the camels stopt for rest, our +tent was always the first erected. The caravan makes but small +journeys of about 20 miles a-day, setting out every morning two +hours before day, and stopping about two hours after noon. We had +good fortune on our journey as it rained, so that we were never +in want of water; yet we always carried one camel load of water +for our party for whatever might happen in the desert, so that we +were in no want of any thing whatever that this country affords. +Among other things we had fresh mutton every day, as we had many +shepherds along with us taking care of the sheep we had bought at +Babylon, each merchant having his own marked with a +distinguishing mark. We gave each shepherd a <i>medin</i>, which +is twopence of our money, for keeping and feeding our sheep by +the way, and for killing them; besides which the shepherds got +the heads, skins, and entrails of all the sheep for themselves. +We six bought 20 sheep, and 7 of them remained alive when we came +to Aleppo. While on our journey through the desert, we used to +lend flesh to each other, so as never to carry any from station +to station, being repaid next day by those to whom we lent the +day before.</p> + +<p>From Babylon to Aleppo is 40 days journey, of which 36 days +are through the desert or wilderness, in which neither trees, +houses, nor inhabitants are anywhere to be seen, being all an +uniform extended plain or dreary waste, with no object whatever +to relieve the eye. On the journey, the pilots or guides go +always in front, followed by the caravan in regular order. When +the guides stop, all the caravan does the same, and unloads the +camels, as the guides know where wells are to be found. I have +said that the caravan takes 36 days to travel across the +wilderness; besides these, for the two first days after leaving +Babylon we go past inhabited villages, till such time as we cross +the Euphrates; and then we have two days journey through among +inhabited villages before reaching Aleppo. Along with each +caravan there is a captain, who dispenses justice to all men, and +every night there is a guard appointed to keep watch for the +security of the whole. From Aleppo we went to Tripoli, in Syria, +where M. Florinasca, M. Andrea Polo, and I, with a friar in +company, hired a bark to carry us towards Jerusalem. We +accordingly sailed from Tripoli to Jaffa, from which place we +travelled in a day and a half to Jerusalem, leaving orders that +the bark should wait for our return. We remained 14 days at +Jerusalem visiting the holy places, whence we returned to Jaffa, +and thence back to Tripoli, and there we embarked in a ship +belonging to Venice, called the Bajazzana; and, by the aid of the +divine goodness, we safely arrived in Venice on the 5th of +November 1581.</p> + +<p>Should any one incline to travel into those parts of India to +which I went, let him not be astonished or deterred by the +troubles, entanglements, and long delays which I underwent, owing +to my poverty. On leaving Venice, I had 1200 ducats invested in +merchandise; but while at Tripoli in my way out I fell sick in +the house of M. Regaly Oratio, who sent away my goods with a +small caravan to Aleppo. This caravan was robbed, and all my +goods lost, except four chests of glasses, which cost me 200 +ducats. Even of my glasses many were broken, as the thieves had +broken up the boxes in hopes of getting goods more suitable for +their purpose. Even with this small remaining stock I adventured +to proceed for the Indies, where, by exchange and re-exchange, +with much patient diligence, and with the blessing of God, I at +length acquired a respectable stock.</p> + +<p>It may be proper to mention, for the sake of others who may +follow my example, by what means they may secure their goods and +effects to their heirs, in case of their death. In all the cities +belonging to the Portuguese in India, there is a house or +establishment called the school of the <i>Santa Misericordia +comissaria</i>, the governors of which, on payment of a certain +fee, take a copy of your testament, which you ought always to +carry along with you when travelling in the Indies. There always +goes into the different countries of the Gentiles and Mahometans +a captain or consul, to administer justice to the Portuguese, and +other Christians connected with them, and this captain has +authority to recover the goods of all merchants who chance to die +on these voyages. Should any of these not have their wills along +with them, or not have them registered in one of the +before-mentioned schools, these captains are sure to consume +their goods in such a way that little or nothing will remain for +their heirs. There are always also on such voyages some merchants +who are commissaries of the <i>Sancta Misericardia</i>, who take +charge of the goods of those who have registered their wills in +that office, and having sold them the money is remitted to the +head office of the Misericordia at Lisbon, whence intelligence is +sent to any part of Christendom whence the deceased may have +come, so that on the heirs of such persons going to Lisbon with +satisfactory testimonials, they will receive the full value of +what was left by their relation. It is to be noted, however, that +when any merchant happens to die in the kingdom of Pegu, +one-third of all that belongs to him goes, by ancient law and +custom, to the king and his officers, but the other two-thirds +are honourably restored to those having authority to receive +them. On this account, I have known many rich men who dwelt in +Pegu, who have desired to go thence into their own country in +their old age to die there, that they might save the third of +their property to their heirs, and these have always been allowed +freely to depart without trouble or molestation.</p> + +<p>In Pegu the fashion in dress is uniformly the same for the +high and low, the rich and the poor, the only difference being in +the quality or fineness, of the materials, which is cloth of +cotton, of various qualities. In the first place, they have an +inner garment of white cotton cloth which serves for a shirt, +over which they gird another garment of painted cotton cloth of +fourteen <i>brasses</i> or yards, which is bound or tucked up +between the legs. On their heads they wear a <i>tuck</i> or +turban of three yards long, bound round the head somewhat like a +mitre; but some, instead of this, have a kind of cap like a +bee-hive, which does not fall below the bottom of the ear. They +are all barefooted; but the nobles never walk a-foot, being +carried by men on a seat of some elegance, having a hat made of +leaves to keep-off the rain and sun; or else they ride on +horseback, having their bare feet in the stirrups. All women, of +whatever degree, wear a shift or smock down to the girdle, and +from thence down to their feet a cloth of three yards long, +forming a kind of petticoat which is open before, and so strait +that at every step they shew their legs and more, so that in +walking they have to hide themselves as it were very imperfectly +with their hand. It is reported that this was contrived by one of +the queens of this country, as a means of winning the men from +certain unnatural practices to which they were unhappily +addicted. The women go all barefooted like the men, and have +their arms loaded with hoops of gold adorned with jewels, and +their fingers all filled with precious rings. They wear their +long hair rolled up and fastened on the crown of their heads, and +a cloth thrown over their shoulders, by way of a cloak.</p> + +<p>By way of concluding this long account of my peregrinations, I +have this to say, that those parts of the Indies in which I have +been are very good for a man who has little, and wishes by +diligent industry to make rich: <i>providing always that he +conducts himself so as to preserve the reputation of honesty</i>. +Such, persons will never fail to receive assistance to advance +their fortunes. But, for those who are vicious, dishonest, or +indolent, they had better stay at home; for they shall always +remain poor, and die beggars.</p> + +<p><i>End of the Peregrinations of Cesar Frederick</i>.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2><a name="chapter3-7" id="chapter3-7">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2> + +<p>EARLY ENGLISH VOYAGES TO GUINEA, AND OTHER PARTS OF THE WEST +COAST OF AFRICA.</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>On the present occasion we are principally guided in our +selection by chronological order, owing to which this +<i>Chapter</i> may have an anomalous appearance, as containing +the early voyages of the English to the Western or Atlantic coast +of Africa, while the title of the <i>Book</i> to which it belongs +was confined to the Discoveries and Conquests of the Portuguese, +and other European Nations, in India; yet the arrangement has +been formed on what we have considered as sufficient grounds, +more especially as resembling the steps by which the Portuguese +were led to their grand discovery of the route by sea to India. +Our collection forms a periodical work, in the conduct of which +it would be obviously improper to tie ourselves too rigidly, in +these introductory discourses, to any absolute rules of minute +arrangement, which might prevent us from availing ourselves of +such valuable sources of information as may occur in the course +of our researches. We have derived the principal materials of +this and the next succeeding chapter, from Hakluyt's Collection +of the Early Voyages, Travels, and Discoveries of the English +Nation, using the late edition published at London in 1810, and +availing ourselves of the previous labours of the Editor of +Astleys Collection, published in 1745. Mr John Green, the +intelligent editor of that former collection, has combined the +substance of the present and succeeding chapters of our work in +the second book of his first volume, under the title of The First +Voyages of the English to Guinea and the East Indies; and as our +present views are almost solely confined to the period which he +embraces, we have thought it right to insert his introduction to +that book, as containing a clear historical view of the +subject[175]. It is proper to mention, however, that, while we +follow his steps, we have uniformly had recourse to the originals +from which he drew his materials; and, for reasons formerly +assigned, wherever any difference may occur between our +collection and that of Astley, we shall subjoin our remarks and +references, at the place or places to which they belong.--E.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 175: Astley's Collection, Vol. I. p. 138, +140.]</blockquote> + +<p>"Although the Portuguese were the first who set on foot +discoveries by sea, and carried them on for many years before any +other European nation attempted to follow their example; yet, as +soon as these voyages appeared to be attended with commercial +gain, the English were ready to put in for a share. The +Portuguese discovered Guinea about the year 1471; and only ten +years afterwards we find the English making preparations to visit +the newly discovered coast[176]. In the year 1481, John Tintam +and William Fabian were busy in fitting out a fleet for the coast +of Guinea; but whether on their own account in whole or in part, +or solely for the Duke of <i>Medina Sidonia</i> in Spain, by +whose command they are said to have done this, cannot be now +determined. It is possible, as the Spaniards were excluded by the +Papal grant in favour of the Portuguese from trading to the East +Indies, that they might endeavour to elude this authority by +employing Englishmen in that navigation. However this may have +been, <i>Joam</i> or John II. king of Portugal, sent two persons +on an embassy to Edward king of England, to renew the ancient +league of friendship between the crowns, and to move him to +hinder that fleet from putting to sea. The Portuguese ambassadors +had orders to acquaint the king of England with the title which +the king of Portugal derived from the Pope, to the exclusive +sovereignty and navigation of Guinea, and to demand that Edward +should prohibit his subjects from sending any ships to that +country. This was accordingly done, and the purposes of that +intended voyage were frustrated. This is an authentic testimony +of the early attempts of the English, which is related at length +by <i>Garcia de Resende</i>, in the life of Joam II. Ch. 33[177]. +To this, or some similar circumstance, it may have been owing +that the English desisted so long from sailing to the southwards, +and turned their endeavours to the discovery of a passage to +India by some other way.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 176: The French pretend to have traded with +Guinea from 1364 till 1413, being 107 years before it was +discovered by the Portuguese.--Astl. I. 138, a.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 177: Cited by Hakluyt, Vol. II. Part 2. p. +2]</blockquote> + +<p>"It appears by a memorandum or letter of <i>Nicholas +Thorn</i>, senior, a considerable merchant in Bristol, of which +Hakluyt gives the contents[178], that in 1526, and from +circumstances for a long time previous, certain English +merchants, among whom were <i>Nicholas Thorn</i> and <i>Thomas +Spacheford</i>, had frequently traded to the Canary islands. In +that letter or memorandum, notice was given to <i>Thomas +Midnal</i> his factor and <i>William Ballard</i> his servant; +residing in St Lucar in Andalusia, that the Christopher of Cadiz +bound for the West Indies, had taken on board several packs of +cloth of different fineness and colours, together with +packthread, soap, and other goods, to be landed at Santa Cruz in +Teneriffe. They are directed to sell these goods, and to send +back returns in Orchil[179], sugar, and kid skins.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 178: Id. ib. p. 3.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 179: A species of moss growing on high +rocks, much used in these days in dying.--Astl. I. 138. +d.]</blockquote> + +<p>"At length, about the middle of the <i>sixteenth</i> century, +the English spirit of trade, meeting with favourable +circumstances, began to exert itself, and to extend its +adventures to the south as well as the north. About the year +1551, Captain Thomas Windham sailed in the ship Lion for Morocco, +whither he carried two Moors of the blood-royal. This was the +first voyage to the western coast of Africa of which we have any +account, and these are all the particulars to be found respecting +it; except that one Thomas Alday, a servant to Sebastian Cabot, +in a letter inserted in Hakluyt's Collection[180], represents +himself as the first promoter of this trade to Barbary, and +observes that he would have performed this voyage himself, with +the sole command of the ship and goods, had it not been that Sir +John Lutterel, John Fletcher, Henry Ostrich, and others with whom +he was connected, died of the sweating sickness, and he himself, +after escaping that disease, was seized by a violent fever, so +that Thomas Windham sailed from Portsmouth before he recovered, +by which he lost eighty pounds.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 180: Vol. II. p. 7.]</blockquote> + +<p>"In the next year, 1552, Windham made a second voyage to +<i>Zafin</i> or <i>Saffi</i> and Santa Cruz without the straits, +which gave so much offence to the Portuguese, that they +threatened to treat the English as enemies if found in these +seas. Yet in the year following, the same Thomas Windham, with a +Portuguese named Antonio Yanez Pinteado, who appears to have been +the chief promoter of the attempt, undertook a voyage to Guinea, +with three ships having an hundred and forty men; and having +traded for some time on the coast for gold, they went to Benin to +load pepper: But both the commanders and most of the men dying of +sickness, occasioned by the climate, the rest returned to +Plymouth with one ship only, having burnt the other two for want +of hands, and brought back no great riches. In 1554, Mr John Lok +made a voyage with three ships to the coast of Guinea, whence he +brought back a considerable quantity of gold and ivory. These +voyages appear to have been succeeded by others almost every +year. At length, upon application to Queen Elizabeth, two patents +were granted to certain merchants. One in 1585, for the Barbary +or Morocco trade, and the other in 1588, for the trade to Guinea +between the rivers Senegal and Gambia[181]. In 1592, a third +patent was granted to other persons, taking in the coast from the +river <i>Nonnia</i> to the south of Sierra Leona, for the space +of 100 leagues, which patents gave rise to the African company. +In all their voyages to the coast of Africa they had disputes +with the Portuguese. Several of these voyages have been preserved +by Hakluyt, and will be found inserted in this chapter, as +forerunners to the English voyages to the East Indies.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 181: The former for twelve years, was +granted to the Earls of Leicester and Warwick, and certain +merchants of London, to the number of 32 in all. The other for +ten years to eight persons of Exeter, London, and other places. +By this latter patent, it appears that this trade was advised by +the Portuguese residing in London, and one voyage had been made +before the grant. See Hakluyt, II. part 2. pp. 114 and +123.--Astl. I. 139. a.]</blockquote> + +<p>"The views of the English extending with experience and +success, and finding the long attempted north-east and north-west +passages to India impracticable, they at length determined to +proceed for that distant region round Africa by the same course +with the Portuguese. In 1591, that voyage was undertaken for the +first time by three large ships under the command of Captain +Raymond; and in 1596, another fleet of three ships set out on the +same design under Captain Wood, but with bad success. In the mean +time several navigators were employed to discover this course to +the East Indies. At length in 1600, a charter was obtained from +Queen Elizabeth by a body of merchants, to the number of 216, +having George Earl of Cumberland at their head, under the name of +the <i>Company of Merchant Adventurers</i>, for carrying on a +trade to the East Indies. From this period ships were sent there +regularly every two or three years; and thus were laid the +foundations of the English East India commerce, which has +subsisted ever since under exclusive chartered companies.</p> + +<p>"Long before the English sailed to India in their own ships, +several English merchants and others had gone to India from time +to time in the Portuguese ships, and some overland; from a desire +to pry into and to participate in the advantages of that gainful +commerce. Of those who went by land, several letters and +relations remain which will be found in the sequel: But of all +who performed the voyage as passengers in the Portuguese vessels, +we know of only one who left any account of his adventures, or at +least whose account has been published; viz. Thomas Stephens. To +this may be added the account by <i>Captain Davis</i> of a voyage +in the Dutch ship called the <i>Middleburgh Merchants</i> in +1598, of which he served as pilot, for the purpose of making +himself acquainted with the maritime route to India, and the +posture of the Portuguese affairs in that country. Both of these +journals contain very useful remarks for the time in which they +were made, and both will be found in our collection.</p> + +<p>"Although the first voyages of the English to the East Indies +are full of variety, yet the reader is not to expect such a +continued series of new discoveries, great actions, battles, +sieges, and conquests, as are to be met with in the history of +the Portuguese expeditions: For it must be considered that we +made few or no discoveries, as these had been already made +before; that our voyages were for the most part strictly +commercial; that our settlements were generally made by the +consent of the natives; that we made no conquests; and that the +undertakings were set on foot and carried on entirely by our +merchants[182]. On this account it is, probably, that we have no +regular history extant of the English Voyages, Discoveries, and +Transactions in the East Indies, as we find there are many such +of the Portuguese and Spanish. It may be presumed, however, that +as the East India Company has kept regular journals of their +affairs, and is furnished with letters and other memorials from +their agents, that a satisfactory account of all the English +Transactions in India might be collected, if the Company thought +proper to give orders for its +execution[183]."--<i>Astley</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 182: These observations are to be +considered as applying entirely to the earlier connection of the +English with India. In more modern days there has been a +sufficiently copious series of great actions, battles, sieges, +and conquests; but these belong to a different and more modern +period than that now under review, and are more connected with +the province of political military and naval history, than with a +Collection of Voyages and Travels. Yet these likewise will +require to be noticed in an after division of this +work.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 183: A commencement towards this great +desideratum in English History has been lately made, by the +publication of the early History of the English East India +Company, by John Bruce, Esquire, Historiographer to the +Company.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION I.</p> + +<p><i>Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552, +by Captain Thomas Windham</i>[184].</p> + +<p>Of the first voyage to Barbary without the straits, made by +the same Captain Thomas Wyndham, the only remaining record is in +a letter from James Aldaie to Michael Locke, already mentioned in +the Introduction to this Chapter, and preserved in Hakluyt's +Collection, II. 462. According to Hakluyt, the account of this +second voyage was written by James Thomas, then page to Captain +Thomas Windham, chief captain of the voyage, which was set forth +by Sir John Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir Thomas Wroth, +Messieurs Frances Lambert, Cole, and others.--E.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 184: Hakluyt, II. 463. Astley, I. +140.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>The ships employed on this voyage were three, of which two +belonged to the River Thames. These were the Lion of London of +about 150 tons, of which Thomas Windham was captain and part +owner; and the Buttolfe of about 80 tons. The third was a +Portuguese caravel of about 60 tons, bought from some Portuguese +at Newport in Wales, and freighted for the voyage. The number of +men in the three ships was 120. The master of the Lion was John +Kerry of Minehead in Somersetshire, and his mate was David +Landman. Thomas Windham, the chief captain of the Adventure, was +a gentleman, born in the county of Norfolk, but resident at +Marshfield Park in Somersetshire.</p> + +<p>The fleet set sail from King-road near Bristol about the +beginning of May 1552, being on a Monday morning; and on the +evening of the Monday fortnight we came to anchor in the port of +Zafia or Asafi on the coast of Barbary, in 32° N. where we +landed part of our cargo to be conveyed by land to the city of +Marocco. Having refreshed at this port, we went thence to the +port of Santa-Cruz, where we landed the rest of our goods, being +a considerable quantity of linen and woollen cloth, with coral, +amber, jet, and divers other goods esteemed by the Moors. We +found a French ship in the road of Santa-Cruz, the people on +board which being uncertain whether France and England were then +at peace or engaged in war, drew her as near as possible to the +walls of the town, from which they demanded assistance for their +defence in case of need; and on seeing our vessels draw near, +they shot off a piece of ordnance from the walls, the ball +passing through between the main and fore masts of the Lion. We +came immediately to anchor, and presently a pinnace came off to +inquire who we were; and on learning that we had been there the +year before, and had the licence of their king for trade, they +were fully satisfied, giving us leave to bring our goods +peaceably on shore, where the viceroy, Sibill Manache came +shortly to visit us, and treated us with all civility. Owing to +various delays, we were nearly three months at this place before +we could get our lading, which consisted of sugar, dates, +almonds, and molasses, or the syrup of sugar. Although we were at +this place for so long a time during the heat of summer, yet none +of our company perished of sickness.</p> + +<p>When our ships were all loaded, we drew out to sea in waiting +for a western wind to carry us to England. But while at sea a +great leak broke out in the Lion, on which we bore away for the +island of Lançerota, between which and Fuertaventura we +came to anchor in a safe road-stead, whence we landed 70 chests +of sugar upon the island of Lançerota, with a dozen or +sixteen of our men. Conceiving that we had come wrongfully by the +caraval, the inhabitants came by surprise upon us and took all +who were on shore prisoners, among whom I was one, and destroyed +our sugars. On this transaction being perceived from our ships, +they sent on shore three boats filled with armed men to our +rescue; and our people landing, put the Spaniards to flight, of +whom they slew eighteen, and made the governor of the island +prisoner, who was an old gentleman about 70 years of age. Our +party continued to chase the Spaniards so far for our rescue, +that they exhausted all their powder and arrows, on which the +Spaniards rallied and returned upon them, and slew six of our men +in the retreat. After this our people and the Spaniards came to a +parley, in which it was agreed that we the prisoners should be +restored in exchange for the old governor, who gave us a +certificate under his hand of the damages we had sustained by the +spoil of our sugars, that we might be compensated upon our return +to England, by the merchants belonging to the king of Spain.</p> + +<p>Having found and repaired the leak, and all our people being +returned on board, we made sail; and while passing one side of +the island, the Cacafuego and other ships of the Portuguese navy +entered by the other side to the same roadstead whence we had +just departed, and shot off their ordnance in our hearing. It is +proper to mention that the Portuguese were greatly offended at +this our new trade to Barbary, and both this year and the former, +they gave out through their merchants in England, with great +threats and menaces, that they would treat us as mortal enemies, +if they found us in these seas: But by the good providence of God +we escaped their hands. We were seven or eight weeks in making +our passage from Lançerota for the coast of England, where +the first port we made was Plymouth; and from thence sailed for +the Thames, where we landed our merchandise at London about the +end of October 1552.</p> + +<p>SECTION II.</p> + +<p><i>A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, by +Captain Windham and Antonio Anes Pinteado</i>[185].</p> + +<p>PREVIOUS REMARKS.</p> + +<p>This and the following voyage to Africa were first published +by Richard Eden in a small collection, which was afterwards +reprinted in 4to, by Richard Willes in 1577[186]. Hakluyt has +inserted both these in his Collection, with Eden's preamble as if +it were his own; only that he ascribes the account of Africa to +the right owner[187].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 185: Astley, I. 141. Hakluyt, II. 464.--The +editor of Astley's Collection says <i>Thomas</i> Windham; but we +have no evidence in Hakluyt, copying from Eden, that such was his +Christian name, or that he was the same person who had gone twice +before to the coast of Morocco. In Hakluyt, the Voyage is said to +have been at the charge of certain merchant adventurers of +London.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 186: Hist. of Travayle in the West and East +Indies, &c. by Eden and Willes, 4to, p. 336.--Astl. I. 141. +b.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 187: So far the editor of Astley's +Collection: The remainder of these previous remarks contains the +preamble by Eden, as reprinted by Hakluyt, II. +464.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>"I was desired by certain friends to make some mention of this +voyage, that some memory of it might remain to posterity, being +the first enterprised by the English to parts that may become of +great consequence to our merchants, if not hindered by the +ambition of such as conceive themselves lords of half the world, +by having conquered some forty or fifty miles here and there, +erecting certain fortresses, envying that others should enjoy the +commodities which they themselves cannot wholly possess. And, +although such as have been at charges in the discovering and +conquering of such lands, ought in good reason to have certain +privileges, pre-eminences and tributes for the same; yet, under +correction, it may seem somewhat rigorous and unreasonable, or +rather contrary to the charity that ought to subsist among +Christians, that such as invade the dominions of others, should +not allow other friendly nations to trade in places nearer and +seldom frequented by themselves, by which their own trade is not +hindered in such other places as they have chosen for themselves +as staples or marts of their trade[188]. But as I do not propose +either to accuse or defend, I shall cease to speak any farther on +this subject, and proceed to the account of the first voyage to +those parts, as briefly and faithfully as I was advertised of the +same, by information of such credible persons as made diligent +inquiry respecting it, omitting many minute particulars, not +greatly necessary to be known; but which, with the exact course +of the navigation, shall be more fully related in the second +voyage. If some may think that certain persons have been rather +sharply reflected on, I have this to say, that favour and +friendship ought always to give way before truth, that honest men +may receive the praise of well-doing, and bad men be justly +reproved; that the good may be encouraged to proceed in honest +enterprizes, and the bad deterred from following evil +example.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 188: Richard Eden here obviously endeavours +to combat the monopoly of trade to the Portuguese discoveries, +arrogated by that nation; although the entire colonial system of +all the European nations has always been conducted upon the same +exclusive principles, down to the present day.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>That these voyages may be the better understood, I have +thought proper to premise a brief description of Africa, on the +west coast of which great division of the world, the coast of +Guinea begins at Cape Verd in about lat. 12° N. and about two +degrees in longitude <i>from the measuring line</i>[189]; whence +running from north to south, and in some places by east, within +5, 4, and 3-1/2 degrees into the equinoctial, and so forth in +manner directly east and north, for the space of about 36 degrees +in longitude from west to east, as shall more plainly appear in +the second voyage[190].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 189: Evidently meaning the first meridian +passing through the island of Ferro, one of the Canaries, from +which Cape Verd is about 2° W.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 190: These geographical indications +respecting the coast of Guinea, are extremely obscure, so as to +be almost unintelligible.--E.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p><i>Brief Description of Africa, by Richard Eden</i>[191].</p> + +<p>In the lesser Africa are the kingdoms of Tunis and +Constantina, which latter is at this day subject to Tunis, and +also the regions of Bugia, Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of +Africa is very barren, by reason of the great deserts of Numidia +and Barca. The principal ports of the kingdom of Tunis are, +Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia, Bona, and Stora. Tunis and +Constantina are the chief cities, with several others. To this +kingdom belong the following islands, Zerbi, Lampadola, +Pantalarea, Limoso, Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta; in which the +grand-master of the knights of Rhodes now resides. To the south +of this kingdom are the great deserts of Lybia. All the nations +of this lesser Africa are of the sect of Mahomet, a rustical +people living scattered in villages.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 191: This brief description of Africa is +preserved, rather for the purpose of shewing what were the ideas +of the English on this subject towards the end of the sixteenth +century, than for any excellence.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The best of this part of Africa is Mauritania, now called +Barbary, on the coast of the Mediterranean. Mauritania is divided +into two parts, Tingitana and Cesariensis. Mauritania Tingitana +is now called the kingdoms of Fez and Marocco, of which the +capitals bear the same names. Mauritania, Cesariensis is now +called the kingdom of Tremessan, the capital of which is named +Tremessan or Telensin. This region is full of deserts, and +reaches to the Mediterranean, to the city of Oran with the port +of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fez reaches to the ocean, from +the west to the city of Arzilla, and Sala or Salee is the port of +this kingdom. The kingdom of Marocco also extends to the ocean, +on which it has the cities of Azamor and Azafi. Near to Fez and +Marocco in the ocean are the Canary islands, anciently called the +Fortunate islands.</p> + +<p>To the south is the kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Jalofo, +Gambra, and many other regions of <i>the black Moors</i>, called +Ethiopians or Negroes, all of which regions are watered by the +river Negro, called anciently the Niger[192]. In these regions +there are no cities, but only villages of low cottages made of +boughs of trees, plastered over with chalk and covered with +straw; and in these regions there are great deserts.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 192: In the text the Senegal river is to be +understood by the Negro, or river of the Blacks. But the ancient +Niger is now well known to run eastwards in the interior of +Nigritia, having no connection whatever with the Senegal or with +the sea.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The kingdom of Marocco includes seven subordinate kingdoms, +named Hea, Sus, Guzula, Marocco proper, Duccula, Hazchora, and +Tedle. Fez has an equal number, as Fez, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, +Errif, Garet, and Elcair. Tremessan has only three, being +Tremessan, Tenez, and Elgazair; all the inhabitants of all these +regions being Mahometans. But all the regions of Guinea are +peopled by Gentiles and idolaters, having no religion or +knowledge of God except from the law of nature.</p> + +<p>Africa, one of the three great divisions of the world known to +the ancients, is separated from Asia on the east by the river +Nile, and on the west from Europe by the Pillars of Hercules or +the Straits of Gibraltar. The entire northern coast along the +Mediterranean is now called Barbary, and is inhabited by the +Moors. The inner part is called Lybia and Ethiopia. Lesser +Africa, in which stood the noble city of Carthage, has Numidia on +the west and Cyrenaica on the east.</p> + +<p>On the east side of Africa, to the west of the Red Sea, are +the dominions of the great and mighty Christian king or emperor +Prester John, well known to the Portuguese in their voyages to +Calicut. His dominions reach very far on every side, and he has +many other kings under his authority who pay him tribute, both +Christian and Pagan. This mighty prince is named David emperor of +Ethiopia, and it is said that the Portuguese send him every year +eight ships laden with merchandise. His dominions are bounded on +one side by the Red Sea, and stretch far into Africa towards +Egypt and Barbary. To the southwards they adjoin with the great +sea or ocean towards the Cape of Good Hope, and to the north are +bounded by the great and dangerous <i>Sea of Sand</i>, lying +between the great city of Cairo in Egypt and the country of +Ethiopia; in which are many uninhabitable deserts continuing for +the space of five days journey. It is affirmed, if the Christian +emperor were not hindered by the deserts, in which there is great +want of provisions and especially of water, that he would ere now +have invaded Egypt. The chief city of Ethiopia, in which this +great emperor resides, is called <i>Amacaiz</i>, being a city of +some importance, the inhabitants of which are of an olive +complexion. There are many other cities, such as the city of +<i>Sava</i> on the Nile, where the emperor ordinarily resides +during the summer. There is likewise a great city named +<i>Barbaregaf</i> and <i>Ascon</i>, whence the queen of Saba is +supposed to have gone for Jerusalem to hear the wisdom of +Solomon[193]. This last city though little is very fair, and one +of the principal cities of Ethiopia. In this province there are +many very high mountains, on which the terrestrial paradise is +supposed to have been situated; and some say that the trees of +the sun and moon which are mentioned by the ancients, are to be +found there, but no one has ever been able to go to them, on +account of great deserts extending to an hundred days journey. +Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of Good Hope.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 193: The names of places are so corruptly +given as hardly even to be guessed at. Amacaiz may possibly be +meant for Amba Keshem, Sava for Shoa, Barbaregaf for the +Baharnagash, and Ascon for Assab.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p><i>Journal of the Voyage</i>.</p> + +<p>On the 12th of August 1553, there sailed from Portsmouth two +goodly ships, the Primrose and the Lion, with a pinnace called +the Moon, all well furnished with 140 able bodied men, and with +ordnance and victuals fitting for the voyage. They were commanded +by two captains; one of whom was a foreigner named Antonio Anes +Pinteado, a native of Oporto in Portugal, a wise, discreet, and +sober man, who, for his skill in navigation both as an +experienced pilot and prudent commander, was at one time in such +favour with the king of Portugal, that the coasts of Brazil and +Guinea were committed to his care against the French, to whom he +was a terror in these seas. He had been likewise a gentleman of +the household to the king. But as fortune ever flatters when it +favours, ever deceives when it promises, and ever casts down whom +it raises, so great wealth and high favour are always accompanied +by emulation and envy; in like manner was he, after many +adversities and malicious accusations, forced to take refuge in +England. In this golden voyage Pinteado was ill-matched with an +evil companion, his own various good qualities being coupled with +one who had few or no virtues. Thus did these noble ships depart +on their voyage; but previously captain Windham put out of his +ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head merchants, +shewing in this a sample of the bad intention of his mind, which +grew from this small beginning to a monstrous enormity; yet happy +was that young man for being left behind.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the island of Madeira, they took in some wine for +the use of the ships. At this island was a great galleon +belonging to the king of Portugal, full of men and ordnance, +which had been expressly fitted out to interrupt our ships in +their intended voyage, or any others that might intend a similar +expedition; for the king of Portugal had been secretly informed +that our ships were armed to attack his castle of Mina, though no +such thing was intended; yet did not that galleon attempt to stay +our ships, nor could she have been able to withstand them if that +had been tried.</p> + +<p>After their departure from Madeira the worthy captain Pinteado +began to experience affliction from Captain Windham, who had +hitherto carried a fair appearance of good will, but now assumed +to himself the sole command, setting both captain Pinteado and +the merchants factors at nought, giving them opprobrious words +and sometimes abusing them most shamefully with threats of +personal ill-treatment. He even proceeded to deprive captain +Pinteado of the service of the boys and others who had been +assigned him by order of the merchant adventurers, reducing him +to the rank of a common mariner, which is the greatest affront +that can be put upon a Portuguese or Spaniard, who prize their +honour above all things. Passing the Canaries, they came to the +island of St Nicholas, one of the Cape Verds, where they procured +abundance of the flesh of wild goats, being almost its only +produce. Following their voyage from thence, they tarried by the +way at certain desert islands, not willing to arrive too early on +the coast of Guinea on account of the heat. But being under an +arbitrary rule, they tarried too long, and came at length to the +first land of Guinea at the river <i>Cesto</i>[194], where they +might have exchanged their merchandise for a full lading of the +<i>grains</i>, or spice of that country, which is a very hot +fruit and much like figs; the fruit being full of grains which +are loose within the pod[195]. This kind of spice is much used in +cold countries, and may be sold there to great advantage in +exchange for other commodities. But, by the persuasion or command +rather of our tyrannical captain, our people made light of this +commodity in comparison with the fine gold for which they +thirsted, wherefore they made sail an hundred leagues farther +till they came to the golden land or gold coast.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 194: Or Sestre, a river on the Grain coast +or Malaguette.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 195: This is the Guinea pepper, called +grains of Paradise by the Italians, whence this part of Guinea +was named the grain coast. The text describes the pods as having +a hole on each side, which, it was afterwards learnt, were for +putting thongs, strings or twigs on which to dry the pods. These +pods grow on a humble plant, not above a foot and a half or two +feet from the ground, and are bright red when first +gathered,--Astl.]</blockquote> + +<p>At this part of the coast, not venturing to come near the +castle of St George del Mina belonging to the king of Portugal, +they made sale of their goods only on this side and beyond that +place, receiving the gold of the country in exchange to the +extent of 150 pounds weight[196], and they might have bartered +all their merchandise for gold at that place, if the pride of +Windham had allowed him to listen to the counsel and experience +of Pinteado: but not satisfied with what he had got or might +still have procured, if he had remained in the neighbourhood of +Mina, he commanded Pinteado to navigate the ships to Benin under +the equinoctial, 150 leagues beyond the Mina, where he expected +to have laden the ships with pepper. When Pinteado urged the +lateness of the season, and advised that instead of going farther +they should continue to dispose of their wares for gold, by which +great profit would have been gained, Windham flew into a passion, +called Pinteado a Jew, and gave him much opprobrious language, +saying, "This rascally Jew promised to conduct us to places that +either do not exist or to which he knows not the way, but if he +does not I will cut off his ears and nail them to the mast." The +advice given by Pinteado, not to go farther, was for the safety +of the mens lives, which would have been in great danger at that +late season, during their winter or <i>rossia</i>, not so called +on account of cold, but from the heat accompanied with close and +cloudy air, alternating with great tempests, during which the air +was of so putrifying a quality as to rot the clothes on their +backs. He had formerly lingered by the way, to prevent them +arriving too soon on the coast, when the heat of the sun is +scorching and unbearable.</p> + +<p>Thus constrained contrary to his wish, he brought the ships to +anchor off the mouth of the river Benin, whence the pinnace was +sent 50 or 60 leagues up the river. They then landed, and +Pinteado, with Francisco another Portuguese, Nicholas Lambert a +gentleman, and other merchants were conducted to the kings court, +ten leagues from the river, where they were brought into the +kings presence by a great company. The king was a <i>black +Moor</i> or negro, though not quite so black as the rest, and sat +in a long wide hall having earthen walls without windows, roofed +with thin planks open in many parts to let in air. These people +give wonderful reverence to their king, even the highest of his +officers when in his presence never daring to look him in the +face, but sit cowering on their buttocks with their elbows on +their knees, and their hands on their faces, never looking up +till the king commands them. When coming towards the king they +shew him the utmost reverence from as far off as they can see +him; and when they depart they never turn their backs towards +him. In the communication of our men with the king, he used the +Portuguese language, which he had learnt when a child. Commanding +our men to stand up, he inquired the reason of their coming into +his country; on which he was answered by Pinteado, that we were +merchants who had come from a distant country into his dominions, +to procure the commodities of the country in exchange for wares +which we had brought from our own country, to the mutual +convenience of both countries. The king had then 30 or 40 +quintals or hundred weights of pepper, which had long lain in a +store-house, which he desired our people to look at, and that +they should exhibit to him such commodities as they had brought +for sale. He likewise sent some of his officers to conduct our +people to the water-side, and to carry our wares from the pinnace +to his residence. These things being done, the king engaged to +our merchants that in 30 days he would provide a sufficiency of +pepper to load all our ships, and in case our merchandise might +not amount to the whole value of the pepper, he promised to give +credit till next season, and immediately sent orders over all the +country to gather pepper, so that in 30 days 80 tons of pepper +were procured.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 196: Or 1800 ounces, which at L.3, 17s. 6d. +per ounce, is equal to L.6975 sterling, a large sum in those +days.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the meantime our men lived without any rule, eating without +measure of the fruit of the country, drinking the palm wine which +runs in the night from the cut branches of that tree, and +continually running into the water to assuage the extreme heat of +the season; and not being used to these sudden transitions, which +are excessively dangerous, they fell into swellings and agues, by +which about the end of the year they were dying sometimes 3, 4, +or 5 in a day. When the 30 days were expired, and Windham saw his +men dying so fast, he sent orders to Pinteado and the rest to +come away without any more delay. Pinteado and the others wrote +back to inform him of the large quantity of pepper already +gathered, and that they looked daily for more, desiring him to +consider the great praise they would all get on their return if +the voyage turned out profitable, and the shame that must attend +returning without a full loading. Not satisfied with this answer, +more especially as the men continued to die in great numbers, +Windham sent a second message ordering them to return +immediately, or that he would go away and leave them. Thinking to +prevail upon him by reasonable means, Pinteado returned to the +ships under an escort provided by the negro king.</p> + +<p>In the mean time Windham, enraged at Pinteado, broke open his +cabin and all his chests, spoiled all the cordials and sweetmeats +he had provided for his health, and left him nothing either of +his cloaths or nautical instruments; after which strange +procedure he fell sick and died. When he came on board, Pinteado +lamented as much for the death of Windham as if he had been his +dearest friend; but several of the mariners and officers spit in +his face, calling him Jew, and asserted that he had brought them +to this place on purpose that they should die; and some even drew +their swords, threatening to slay him. They insisted that he +should leave the coast immediately, and though he only requested +them to wait till those who were left at the court of the king of +Benin could be sent for, they would by no means consent. He then +prayed them to give him a boat, and as much of an old sail as +might serve to fit her out, in which he proposed to bring +Nicholas Lambert[197] and the rest to England, but even this they +would not consent to. Finding all his representations in vain, he +wrote a letter to the merchants at court, informing them of all +that had happened at the ships, promising, if God spared his +life, that he would return as soon as possible for them.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 197: This Lambert was a Londoner born, his +father having been Lord Mayor of London.--Hakluyt.]</blockquote> + +<p>Pinteado, thus kept on board against his will, was thrust +among the cabin-boys, and worse used than any of them, insomuch +that he was forced to depend on the favour of the cook for +subsistence. Having sunk one of their ships for want of hands to +navigate her, the people departed from the coast with the other. +Within six or seven days, Pinteado died broken-hearted, from the +cruel and undeserved usage he had met with,--a man worthy to have +served any prince, and most vilely used. Of 140 men who had +sailed originally from Portsmouth on this unfortunate and +ill-conducted voyage, scarcely 40 got back to Plymouth, and many +even of those died soon afterwards.</p> + +<p>That no one may suspect that I have written in commendation of +Pinteado from partiality or favour, otherwise than as warranted +by truth, I have thought good to add copies of the letters which +the king of Portugal and the infant his brother wrote to induce +him to return to Portugal, at the time when, by the king's +displeasure, and not owing to any crime or offence, he was +enforced by poverty to come to England, where he first induced +our merchants to engage in voyages to Guinea. All these writings +I saw under seal in the house of my friend Nicholas Lieze, with +whom Pinteado left them when he departed on his unfortunate +voyage to Guinea. But, notwithstanding these friendly letters and +fair promises, Pinteado durst not venture to return to Portugal, +neither indeed durst he trust himself in company with any of his +own countrymen, unless in the presence of other persons, as he +had secret intimation that they meant to have assassinated him, +when time and place might serve their wicked purpose.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>The papers alluded to in this concluding paragraph by Richard +Eden, do not seem necessary to be inserted. They consist of, a +commission or patent dated 22d September 1551, appointing +Pinteado one of the knights of the royal household, with 700 +<i>rees</i>, or ten shillings a month, and half a bushel of +barley every day so long as he should keep a horse; but with an +injunction not to marry for six years, lest he might have +children to succeed in this allowance. The second document is +merely a certificate of registration of the first. The third is a +letter from the infant, Don Luis, brother to the king of +Portugal, dated 8th December 1552, urging Pinteado to return to +Lisbon, and intimating that Peter Gonzalvo, the bearer of the +letter, had a safe conduct for him in due form. From the +introduction to these papers, it appears that Pinteado had +suffered long disgrace and imprisonment, proceeding upon false +charges, and had been at last set free by means of the king's +confessor, a grey friar, who had manifested his +innocence.--E.</p> + +<p>SECTION III.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John +Lok</i>[198].</p> + +<p>As in the first voyage of the English to Guinea, I have given +rather the order of the history than the course of navigation, of +which I had then no perfect information; so in this second voyage +my chief purpose has been to shew the course pursued, according +to the ordinary custom and observation of mariners, and as I +received it from the hands of an expert pilot, who was one of the +chiefest in this voyage[199], who with his own hand wrote a brief +journal of the whole, as he had found and tried in all things, +not conjecturally, but by the art of navigation, and by means of +instruments fitted for nautical use[200]. Not assuming therefore +to myself the commendations due to another, neither having +presumed in any part to change the substance or order of this +journal, so well observed by art and experience, I have thought +fit to publish it in the language commonly used by mariners, +exactly as I received it from that pilot[201].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 198: Hakluyt, II. 470. Astl 1.114. In the +first edition of Hakluyt's collection, this voyage is given under +the name of Robert Gainsh, who was master of the John Evangelist, +as we learn by a marginal note at the beginning of the voyage in +both editions.--Astl. I. 144. a.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 199: Perhaps this might be Robert Gainsh, +in whose name the voyage was first published.--Astl. I. 144. +b.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 200: Yet the latitudes he gives, if +observed, are by no means exact.--Astl. + +<p>In this version we have added the true latitudes and +longitudes in the text between brackets; the longitude from +Greenwich always understood.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 201: This is the exordium, written by +Richard Eden, from whose work it was adopted by Hakluyt, yet +without acknowledgement. In the title, it appears that this +expedition was fitted out as the joint adventure of Sir George +Barne, Sir John York, Thomas Lok, Anthony Hickman, and Edward +Castelin.--E.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> + +<p>On the 11th October 1554, we departed from the river Thames +with three good ships. One of these named the Trinity, was of 140 +tons burden; the second, called the Bartholomew, was 90 tons; and +the third, called the John Evangelist, was 140 tons. With these +three ships and two pinnaces, one of which was lost on the coast +of England, we staid fourteen days at Dover, and three or four +days at Rye, and lastly we touched at Dartmouth. Departing on the +1st November, at 9 o'clock at night, from the coast of England, +off the Start point, and steering due south-west all that night, +all next day, and the next night after, till noon of the 3d, we +made our way good, running 60 leagues. The morning of the 17th we +had sight of the island of Madeira, which to those who approach +from N.N.E. seems to rise very high, and almost perpendicular in +the west. To the S.S.E. is a long low land, and a long point with +a saddle through the midst of it, standing in 32° N. [lat. +32° 30' N. long. 16° 12' W.]</p> + +<p>And in the west part are many springs of water running down from +the mountain, with many white fields like fields of corn, and +some white houses in the S.E. part. Also in this part is a rock +at a small distance from the shore, over which a great gap or +opening is seen in the mountain. + +<p>The 19th at noon we had sight of the isles of Palma, +Teneriffe, and Grand Canarea. The isle of Palma rises round, and +stretches from S.E. to N.W. the north-west part being lowest. In +the south is a round hill over the head-land, with another round +hill behind and farther inland. Between the S.E. end of Madeira +and the N.W. part of the island of Palma, the distance is 57 +leagues[202], Palma being in 28°. [lat. 28° 45' N. long +17° 45' W.] Our course between the S.E. end of Madeira and +the N.W. part of Palma was S. and S. by W. so that we had sight +of Teneriffe and the Grand Canary. The S.E. part of Palma and +N.N.E. of Teneriffe lie S.E. and N.W. [rather E. and W.] distance +20 leagues [33 leagues.] Teneriffe and Grand Canarea, with the +west part of Fuertaventura, stand in 27° 30'[203]. Gomera is +a fair island, but very rugged, W.S.W. from Teneriffe, the +passage between running from N. by W. to S. by E. In the south +part of Gomera is a town and good road-stead, in lat. 28° N. +Teneriffe is a mountainous island, with a great high peak like a +sugar-loaf, on which there is snow all the year, and by that peak +it may be known from all other islands. On the 20th November we +were there becalmed from six in the morning till four in the +afternoon. On the 22d November, being then under the tropic of +Cancer, the sun set W. and by S. On the coast of Barbary, 25 +leagues N. of Cape Blanco, at 3 leagues from shore, we had 15 +fathoms water on a good shelly bottom mixed with sand, and no +currents, having two small islands in lat. 22° 20' N.[7] From +Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is 100 leagues, [116] the course +being S. by E. That cape is in lat. 22° 30, [22° 15'] all +the coast thereabout being flat, and having 16 and 17 fathoms off +shore. All the way from the river del Oro to Cape Barbas, at 7 or +8 leagues off shore, many Spaniards and Portuguese employ +themselves in fishing during the month of November, the whole of +that coast consisting of very low lands. From Cape Barbas we held +a course S.S.W. and S.W. by S. till we came into lat. 20° +30', reckoning ourselves 7 leagues off shore, and we there came +to the least shoals of Cape Blanco. We then sailed to the lat. of +13° N. reckoning ourselves 20 leagues off; and in 15° +<i>we did rear the crossiers</i>, or cross stars, and might have +done so sooner if we had looked for them. They are not right +across in the month of November, as the nights are short there, +but we had sight of them on the 29th of that month at night. The +1st of December, being in lat. 13° N. we set our course S. by +E. till the 4th at noon, when we were in 9° 20' reckoning +ourselves 30 leagues W.S.W. from the shoals of the Rio Grande, +which extend for 30 leagues. On the 4th, being in 6° 30', we +set our course S.E. The 9th we changed our course E.S.E. The +14th, being in lat. 5° 30' and reckoning ourselves 36 leagues +from the coast of Guinea, we set our course due E. The 19th, +reckoning ourselves 17 leagues from Cape Mensurado, we set our +course E. by N. the said cape being E.N.E. of us, and the river +Sesto E. The 20th we fell in with Cape Mensurado or Mesurado, +which bore S.E. 2 leagues distant. This cape may be easily known, +as it rises into a hummock like the head of a porpoise. Also +towards the S.E. there are three trees, the eastmost being the +highest, the middle one resembling a hay-stack, and that to the +southward like a gibbet. Likewise on the main there are four or +five high hills, one after the other, like round hummocks. The +south-east of the three trees is <i>brandiernaure?</i> and all +the coast is a white sand. The said cape stands within a little +of six degrees [lat. 6° 20' N. long. 10° 30' W.]</p> + +The 22d we came to the river Sesto or Sesters, where we remained +till the 29th, and we thought it best to send our pinnace before +us to the Rio Dulce, that they might begin the market before the +arrival of the John Evangelist. At the river Sesto, which is in +six degrees less one terce, or 5° 40', we got a ton of +grains[205]. From Rio Sesto to Rio Dulce the distance is 25 +leagues, Rio Dulce being in 5° 30' N. The Rio Sesto is easily +known by a ledge of rocks to the S.E. of the road[206], and at +the mouth of the river are five or six trees without leaves. It +is a good harbour, but the entrance of the river is very narrow, +and has a rock right in the mouth. All that coast, between Cape +Mount and Cape Palmas, lies S.E. by E. and N.W. by N. being three +leagues offshore[207], and there are rocks in some places two +leagues off, especially between the river Sesto and Cape Palmas. + +<blockquote>[Footnote 202: The real distance is 84 marine +leagues, 20 to the degree.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 203: The parallel of lat. 28° N. goes +through the centre of Grand Canarea, touching the southern point +of Teneriffe, and just keeping free of the S.W. point of +Fuertaventura.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>[204]</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 204: 7 Cape Blanco is in lat. 20° 50' +N. 25 leagues to the north, would only reach to lat. 22° 5'; +exactly almost in 22° is the small island of Pedro de +Agale.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 205: In the preceding voyage grains have +been explained as Guinea pepper, a species of +capsicum.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 206: Rock Sesters is in long. 9° 20' +W.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 207: This is not intelligible, unless meant +that ships may anchor for three leagues from the +shore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Between the river Sesto and the river Dulce are 25 leagues. +Between them and 8 leagues from Sesto river is a high land called +<i>Cakeado</i>, and S.E. from it a place called <i>Shawgro</i>, +and another called <i>Shyawe</i> or <i>Shavo</i>, where fresh +water may be had. Off Shyawe lies a ledge of rocks, and to the +S.E. is a headland named <i>Croke</i>, which is 9 or 10 leagues +from Cakeado. To the S.E. is a harbour called St Vincent, right +over against which is a rock under water, two and a half leagues +from shore. To the S.E. of this rock is an island 3 or 4 leagues +off, and not above a league from shore, and to the S.E. of the +island is a rock above water, and past that rock is the entrance +of the river Dulce, which may be known by that rock. The N.W. +side of the haven is flat sand, and the S.E. side is like an +island, being a bare spot without any trees, which is not the +case in any other place. In the road ships ride in 13 or 14 +fathoms, the bottom good ouse and sand. The marks for entering +this road are to bring the island and the north-east land in one. +We anchored there on the last day of December 1554, and on the 3d +of January 1555 we came from the Rio Dulce. <i>Cape Palmas</i> is +a fair high land, some low parts of which by the waterside seem +red cliffs, with white streaks like highways, a cables length +each, which is on the east side of the Cape. This is the most +southerly land on the coast of Guinea, and is in lat. 4° 25' +N. From Cape Palmas to Cape <i>Three-points</i> or <i>Tres +puntas</i>, the whole coast is perfectly safe and clear, without +rock or other danger. About 25 leagues to the eastward of Cape +Palmas the land is higher than in any other place till we come to +Cape Three-points, and about ten leagues westward from that Cape +the land begins to rise, and grows higher all the way to the +point. Also about 5 leagues west from that Cape there is some +broken ground with two great rocks, within which, in the bight of +a bay, there is a castle called <i>Arra</i> belonging to the king +of Portugal, which is readily known by these rocks, as there are +none other between Cape Palmas and Cape Three-points. The coast +trends E. by N. and W. by S. From Cape Palmas to Arra castle is +95 leagues, and from thence to the western point of Cape +Three-points it is S.E. by S. and N.W. by N. This western point +of Cape Three-points is low land, stretching half a mile out to +sea, and on the neck nearest the land is a tuft of trees.</p> + +<p>We arrived at Cape Three-points on the 11th January, and came +next day to a town called <i>Samma</i> or <i>Samua</i>, 8 leagues +beyond, towards E.N.E. there being a great ledge of rocks a great +way out to sea between Cape Three-points and that town. We +remained four days off that town, the captain of which desired to +have a pledge on shore, but on receiving one he kept him, and +refused to continue trade, even shooting his ordnance at us, of +which he only had two or three pieces[208]. On the 16th of the +month we came to a place called Cape <i>Corea</i>[209], where +dwelt Don John, and where we were well received by his people. +This Cape Corea is 4 leagues eastward from the castle of +<i>Mina</i>. We arrived there on the 18th of the month, making +sale of all our cloth except two or three packs. On the 26th we +weighed anchor and went to join the Trinity, which was 7 leagues +to the eastwards of us, and had sold most of her wares. Then the +people of the Trinity willed us to go 8 or 9 leagues farther to +the east, to sell part of their wares at a place called +<i>Perecow</i>, and another called <i>Perecow-grande</i>, still +farther east, which is known by a great hill near it called +<i>Monte Rodondo</i> lying to the westwards, and many palm trees +by the water side. From thence we began our voyage homewards on +the 13th of February, and plied along the coast till we came +within 7 or 8 leagues of Cape Three-points. About 8 in the +afternoon of the 15th we cast about to seawards. Whoever shall +come from the coast of Mina homewards, ought to beware of the +currents, and should be sure of making his way good as far west +as Cape Palmas, where the current sets always to the eastwards. +About 20 leagues east of Cape Palmas is a river called <i>De los +Potos</i>, where abundance of fresh water and ballast may be had, +and plenty of ivory or elephants teeth, which river is in four +degrees and almost two terces, or 4° 40' N. When you reckon +to be as far west as Cape Palmas, being in lat. 1° or 1° +30' N. you may then stand W. or W. by N. till in lat. 3° N. +Then you may go W. or N.W. by W. till in lat. 5° N. and then +N.W. In lat. 6° N. we met northerly winds and great ruffling +tides, and as far as we could judge the current set N.N.W. +Likewise between Cape Mount and Cape Verd there are great +currents, which are very apt to deceive.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 208: The pledge was nephew to Sir John +Yorke.--<i>Eden</i>.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 209: From the context, this seems to have +been the place now called Cape Coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the 22d of April we were in lat. 8° 40' N. and +continued our course to the north-west, having the wind at N.E. +and E.N.E. sometimes at E. till the first of May, when we were in +lat. 18° 20' N. Thence we had the wind at E. and E.N.E. +sometimes E.S.E. when we reckoned the Cape Verd islands E.S.E. +from us, and by estimation 48 leagues distant. In 20° and +21° N. we had the wind more to the east and south than +before; and so we ran N.W. and N.N.W. sometimes N. by W. and N. +till we came into lat. 31° N. when we reckoned ourselves 180 +leagues S.W. by S. of the island of Flores. Here we had the wind +S.S.E. and shaped our course N.E. In 23° we had the wind at +S. and S.W. and made our course N.N.E. in which direction we went +to 40°, and then set our course N.E. having the wind at S.W. +and the isle of Flores E. of us, 17 leagues distant. In 41° +we had the wind N.E. and lay a course N.W. Then we met the wind +at W.N.W. and at W. within 6 leagues, when we went N.W. We then +altered to N.E. till in 42° where we shaped our course E.N.E. +judging the isle of <i>Corvo</i> to be W. of us, 36 leagues +distant. On the 21st of May we communed with John Rafe who judged +us to be in lat. 39° 30' N. 25 leagues E. of Flora, and +recommended to steer N.E.</p> + +<p>It is to be noted that in lat. 9° N. on the 4th of +September, we lost sight of the north star. In lat. 45° N. +the compass varied 8° to the W. of N. In 40° N. it varied +15°. And in 30° 30' N. its variation was 5° W.</p> + +<p>It is also to be noted that two or three days before we came +to Cape Three-points, the pinnace went along shore endeavouring +to sell some of our wares, and then we came to anchor three or +four leagues west by south of that cape, where we left the +Trinity. Then our pinnace came on board and took in more wares, +telling us that they would go to a place where the Primrose[210] +was, and had received much gold in the first voyage to these +parts; but being in fear of a brigantine that was then on the +coast, we weighed anchor and followed them, leaving the Trinity +about four leagues from us. We accordingly rode at anchor +opposite that town, where Martine, by his own desire and with the +assent of some of the commissioners in the pinnace, went on shore +to the town, and thence John Berin went to trade at another town +three miles father on. The town is called Samma or Samua, which +and Sammaterra are the two first towns to the N.E. of Cape +Three-points, where we traded for gold.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 210: This was one of the ships in the +former voyage under Windham.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Having continued the course of the voyage as described by the +before-mentioned pilot, I will now say something of the country +and people, and of such things as are brought from +thence[211].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 211: These subsequent notices seem +subjoined by Richard Eden, the original +publisher.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>They brought home in this voyage, 400 pounds weight and odd of +gold[212], twenty-two carats and one grain fine. Also 36 buts of +<i>grains</i>, or Guinea pepper, and about 250 elephants teeth of +different sizes. Some of these I saw and measured, which were +nine spans in length measured along the crook, and some were as +thick as a mans thigh above the knee, weighing 90 pounds each, +though some are said to have been seen weighing 125 pounds. There +were some called the teeth of calves, of one, two, or three years +old, measuring one and a-half, two, or three feet, according to +the age of the beast. These great teeth or tusks grow in the +upper jaw downwards, and not upwards from the lower jaw, as +erroneously represented by some painters and <i>arras</i> +workers. In this voyage they brought home the head of an elephant +of such huge bigness that the bones or cranium only, without the +tusks or lower jaw, weighed about two hundred pounds, and was as +much as I could well lift from the ground. So that, considering +also the weight of the two great tusks and the under jaw, with +the lesser teeth, the tongue, the great hanging ears, the long +big snout or trunk, with all the flesh, brains, and skin, and +other parts belonging to the head, it could not in my opinion +weigh less than five hundred weight. This head has been seen by +many in the house of the worthy merchant Sir Andrew Judde, where +I saw it with my bodily eyes, and contemplated with those of my +mind, admiring the cunning and wisdom of the work-master, without +which consideration such strange and wonderful things are only +curiosities, not profitable subjects of contemplation.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 212: Or 4800 ounces, worth, L.18,600 +sterling at the old price of L.3 17s. 6d. per ounce; and perhaps +worth in those days as much as ninety or an hundred thousand +pounds in the present day.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The elephant, by some called oliphant, is the largest of all +four-footed beasts. The fore-legs are longer than those behind; +in the lower part or ancles of which he has joints. The feet have +each five toes, but undivided. The trunk or snout is so long and +of such form that it serves him as a hand, for he both eats and +drinks by bringing his food and drink to his mouth by its means, +and by it he helps up his master or keeper, and also overturns +trees by its strength. Besides his two great tusks, he has four +teeth on each side of his mouth, by which he eats or grinds his +food, each of these teeth being almost a span long, as they lie +along the jaw, by two inches high and about as much in breadth. +The tusks of the male are larger than those of the female. The +tongue is very small, and so far within the mouth that it cannot +be seen. This is the gentlest and most tractable of all beasts, +and understands and is taught many things, so that it is even +taught to do reverence to kings, being of acute sense and great +judgment. When the female is once seasoned, the male never +touches her afterwards. The male lives two hundred years, or at +least 120, and the female almost as long; but the flower of their +age is reckoned 60 years. They cannot endure our winter or cold +weather; but they love to go into rivers, in which they will +often wade up to their trunk, snuffing and blowing the water +about in sport; but they cannot swim, owing to the weight of +their bodies. If they happen to meet a man wandering in the +wilderness, they will go gently before him and lead him into the +right way. In battle they pay much respect to those who are +wounded, bringing such as are hurt or weary into the middle of +the army where they may be defended. They are made tame by +drinking the juice of barley[213].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 213: The meaning of this expression is by +no means obvious. It is known that in India, arrack, or a +spirituous liquor distilled from rice, is given regularly to +elephants, which may be here alluded to.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>They have continual war with dragons, which desire their blood +because it is very cold; wherefore the dragon lies in wait for +the passing of an elephant, winding its tail of vast length round +the hind legs of the elephant, then thrusts his head into his +trunk and sucks out his breath, or bites him in the ears where he +cannot reach with his trunk. When the elephant becomes faint with +the loss of blood, he falls down upon the serpent, now gorged +with blood, and with the weight of his body crushes the dragon to +death. Thus his own blood and that of the elephant run out of the +serpent now mingled together, which cooling is congealed into +that substance which the apothecaries call <i>sanguis +draconis</i> or cinnabar[214]. But there are other kinds of +cinnabar, commonly called <i>cinoper</i> or vermillion, which the +painters use in certain colours.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 214: It is surely needless to say that this +is a mere fable.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>There are three kinds of elephants, as of the marshes, the +plains, and the mountains, differing essentially from each other. +Philostratus writes, that by how much the elephants of Lybia +exceed in bigness the horses of Nysea, so much do the elephants +of India exceed those of Lybia, for some of the elephants of +India have been seen nine cubits high; and these are so greatly +feared by the others, that they dare not abide to look upon them. +Only the males among the Indian elephants have tusks; but in +Ethiopia and Lybia, both males and females are provided with +them. They are of divers heights, as of 12, 13, or 14 +<i>dodrants</i>, the dodrant being a measure of 9 inches; and +some say that an elephant is bigger than three wild oxen or +buffaloes. Those of India are black, or mouse-coloured; but those +of Ethiopia or Guinea are brown. The hide or skin of them all is +very hard, and without hair or bristles. Their ears are two +dodrants, or 18 inches in breadth, and their eyes are very small. +Our men saw one drinking at a river in Guinea as they sailed +along the coast. Those who wish to know more of the properties of +the elephant, as of their wonderful docility, of their use in +war, of their chastity and generation, when they were first seen +in the triumphs and amphitheatres of the Romans, how they are +taken and tamed, when they cast their tusks, and of their use in +medicine, and many other particulars, will find all these things +described in the eighth book of Natural History, as written by +Pliny. He also says in his twelfth book, that the ancients made +many goodly works of ivory or elephants teeth; such as tables, +tressels or couches, posts of houses, rails, lattices for +windows, idols of their gods, and many other things of ivory, +either coloured or uncoloured, and intermixed with various kinds +of precious woods; in which manner at this day are made chairs, +lutes, virginals, and the like. They had such plenty of it in +ancient times, that one of the gates of Jerusalem was called the +ivory gate, as Josephus reports. The whiteness of ivory was so +much admired, that it was anciently thought to represent the +fairness of the human skin; insomuch that those who endeavoured +to improve, or rather to corrupt, the natural beauty by painting, +were said reproachfully, <i>ebur atramento candefacere</i>, to +whiten ivory with ink. Poets also, in describing the fair necks +of beautiful virgins, call them <i>eburnea colla</i>, or ivory +necks. Thus much may suffice of elephants and ivory, and I shall +now say somewhat of the people, and their manners, and mode of +living, with another brief description of Africa.</p> + +<p>The people who now inhabit the regions of the coast of Guinea +and the middle parts of Africa, as inner Lybia, Nubia, and +various other extensive regions in that quarter, were anciently +called Ethiopians and <i>Nigritae</i>, which we now call Moors, +Moorens, or Negroes; a beastly living people, without God, law, +religion, or government, and so scorched by the heat of the sun, +that in many places they curse it when it rises. Of the people +about Lybia interior, Gemma Phrysius thus writes: Libia interior +is large and desolate, containing many horrible wildernesses, +replenished with various kinds of monstrous beasts and serpents. +To the south of Mauritania or Barbary is Getulia, a rough and +savage region, inhabited by a wild and wandering people. After +these follow the <i>Melanogetuli</i>, or black Getulians, and +Phransii, who wander in the wilderness, carrying with them great +gourds filled with water. Then the Ethiopians, called Nigritae, +occupy a great part of Africa, extending to the western ocean or +Atlantic. Southwards also they reach to the river Nigritis or +Niger, which agrees in its nature with the Nile, as it increases +and diminishes like the Nile, and contains crocodiles. Therefore, +I believe this to be the river called the Senegal by the +Portuguese. It is farther said of the Niger, that the inhabitants +on one side were all black and of goodly stature, while on the +other side they were brown or tawny and of low stature, which +also is the case with the Senegal.[215] There are other people of +Lybia, called <i>Garamantes</i>, whose women are in common, +having no marriages or any respect to chastity. After these are +the nations called <i>Pyrei, Sathiodaphintae, Odrangi, Mimaces, +Lynxamator, Dolones, Agangince, Leuci Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopes, +Calcei Ethiopes</i>, and <i>Nubi</i>. These last have the same +situation in Ptolemy, which is now given to the kingdom of Nubia, +where there are certain Christians under the dominion of the +great emperor of Ethiopia, called Prester John. From these +towards the west was a great nation called <i>Aphricerones</i>, +inhabiting, as far as we can conjecture, what is now called the +<i>Regnum Orguene</i>, bordering on the eastern or interior parts +of Guinea. From hence westwards and towards the north, are the +kingdoms of <i>Gambra</i> and <i>Budamel</i>, not far from the +river Senegal; and from thence toward the inland region and along +the coast are the regions of <i>Ginoia</i> or Guinea. On the west +side of this region is Cabo Verde, <i>caput viride</i>, Cap Verd, +or the Green Cape, to which the Portuguese first direct their +course when they sail to the land of Brazil in America, on which +occasion they turn to the right hand towards the quarter of the +wind called <i>Garbino</i>, which is between the west and +south.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 215: It may be proper to mention in this +place, that the Niger and the Senegal, though agreeing in these +particulars, are totally different rivers in the same parallel. +The Senegal runs into the sea from the east; while the Niger +running to the east, loses itself in an interior lake, as the +Wolga does in the Caspian, having no connection whatever with the +ocean. According to some accounts, this lake only exists as such +during the rainy season, drying up in the other part of the year, +probably however leaving an extensive marsh, called the +<i>Wangara</i>. If so, the environs of that lake and marsh must +be unhealthy in the utmost extreme.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>To speak somewhat more of Ethiopia, although there are many +nations called Ethiopians, yet is Ethiopia chiefly divided into +two parts, one of which being a great and rich region, is called +<i>Ethiopia sub Egypto</i>, or Ethiopia to the south of Egypt. To +this belongs the island of Meroe, which is environed by the +streams of the Nile. In this island women reigned in ancient +times, and, according to Josephus, it was some time called +<i>Sabea</i>, whence the queen of Saba went to Jerusalem to +listen to the wisdom of Solomon. From thence, towards the east +and south, reigneth the Christian emperor called Prester John, by +some named Papa Johannes, or as others say <i>Pean Juan</i>, +signifying Great John, whose empire reaches far beyond the Nile, +and extends to the coasts of the Red Sea and of the Indian ocean. +The middle of this region is almost in 66 degrees of E. +longitude, and 12 degrees of N. lat.[216] About this region dwell +the people called <i>Clodi, Risophagi, Axiuntiae, Babylonii, +Molili</i>, and <i>Molibae</i>. After these is the region called +<i>Trogloditica</i>, the inhabitants of which dwell in caves and +dens, instead of houses, and feed upon the flesh of serpents, as +is reported by Pliny and Diodorus Siculus, who allege, that +instead of language, they have only a kind of grinning and +chattering. There are also people without heads, called +<i>Blemines</i>, having their eyes and mouths in their breast. +Likewise <i>Strucophagi</i>, and naked <i>Gamphasantes</i>; +<i>satyrs</i> also, who have nothing of human nature except the +shape. <i>Oripei</i> likewise, who are great hunters, and +<i>Mennones</i>. Here also is <i>Smyrnophora</i>, or the region +of myrrh; after which is <i>Azania</i>, producing many +elephants.[217] A great portion of the eastern part of Africa +beyond the equinoctial line is in the kingdom of <i>Melinda</i>, +the inhabitants of which have long been in use to trade with the +nations of Arabia, and whose king is now allied to the king of +Portugal, and pays tribute to Prester John.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 216: Reckoning the longitude from the +island of Ferro, the middle of Abyssinia is only in about 52° +30' E. and as Ferro is 18° W. from Greenwich, that coincides +with 34° 30' E. as the longitude is now reckoned by British +geographers.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 217: It is impossible, in the compass of a +note, to enter into any commentary on this slight sketch of the +ancient geography of eastern Africa.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The other, or interior Ethiopia, being a region of vast +extent, is now only somewhat known upon the sea-coast, but may be +described as follows. In the first place, towards the south of +the equator, is a great region of Ethiopians, in which are white +elephants, <i>tigers</i>, (lions) and rhinoceroses. Also a region +producing plenty of cinnamon, which lies between the branches of +the Nile. Also the kingdom of Habesch or Habasia,[218] a region +inhabited by Christians, on both sides of the Nile. Likewise +those Ethiopians called <i>Ichthyophagi</i>, or who live only on +fish, who were subdued in the wars of Alexander the Great[219]. +Also the Ethiopians called <i>Rapsii</i> and +<i>Anthropophagi</i>, who are in use to eat human flesh, and +inhabit the regions near the mountains of the moon. +<i>Gazatia</i> is under the tropic of Capricorn; after which +comes the <i>front</i> of Africa, and the Cape of Good Hope, past +which they sail from Lisbon to Calicut: But as the capes and +gulfs, with their names, are to be found on every globe and +chart, it were superfluous to enumerate them here.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 218: It is strange that Habasia or +Abyssinia, inhabited by Christians, should thus be divided from +the empire of Prester John.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 219: The Icthyophagi of Alexander dwelt on +the oceanic coast of Persia, now Mekran, between the river Indus +and the Persian gulf, not in Ethiopia.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Some allege that Africa was so named by the Greeks, as being +without cold; the Greek letter <i>alpha</i> signifying privation, +void of, or without, and <i>phrice</i> signifying cold; as, +although it has a cloudy and tempestuous season instead of +winter, it is yet never cold, but rather smothering hot, with hot +showers, and such scorching winds, that at certain times the +inhabitants seem as if living in furnaces, and in a manner half +ready for purgatory or hell. According to Gemma Phrisius, in +certain parts of Africa, as in the greater Atlas, the air in the +night is seen shining with many strange fires and flames, rising +as it were as high as the moon, and strange noises are heard in +the air, as of pipes, trumpets, and drums, which are caused +perhaps by the vehement motions of these fiery exhalations, as we +see in many experiments wrought by fire, air, and wind. The +hollowness also, and various reflections and breakings of the +clouds, may be great causes thereof, besides the great coldness +of the middle region of the air, by which these fiery +exhalations, when they ascend there, are suddenly driven back +with great force. Daily experience teaches us, by the whizzing of +a burning torch, what a noise fire occasions in the air, and much +more so when it strives and is inclosed with air, as seen in +guns; and even when air alone is inclosed, as in organ pipes and +other wind instruments: For wind, according to philosophers, is +nothing but air vehemently moved, as when propelled by a pair of +bellows, and the like.</p> + +<p>Some credible persons affirm that, in this voyage to Guinea, +they felt a sensible heat in the night from the beams of the +moon; which, though it seem strange to us who inhabit a cold +region, may yet reasonably have been the case, as Pliny writes +that the nature of stars and planets consists of fire, containing +a spirit of life, and cannot therefore be without heat. That the +moon gives heat to the earth seems confirmed by David, in the +121st psalm, where, speaking of such men as are defended from +evils by the protection of God, he says, "The sun shall not burn +thee by day, neither the moon by night[220]." They said likewise, +that in some parts of the sea they saw streams of water, which +they call <i>spouts</i>, falling out of the air into the sea, +some of them being as large as the pillars of churches; insomuch +that, when these fall into ships, they are in great danger of +being sunk. Some allege these to be the cataracts of heaven, +which were all opened at Noah's flood: But I rather consider them +to be those fluxions and eruptions said by Aristotle, in his book +de Mundo, to happen in the sea. For, speaking of such strange +things as are often seen in the sea, he writes thus: "Oftentimes +also, even in the sea are seen evaporations of fire, and such +eruptions and breaking forth of springs, that the mouths of +rivers are opened. Whirlpools and fluxions are caused of such +other vehement motions, not only in the midst of the sea, but +also in creeks and straits. At certain times also, a great +quantity of water is suddenly lifted up and carried about by the +moon," &c. From these words of Aristotle it appears, that +such waters are lifted up at one time in one place, and suddenly +fall down again in another place at another time. To this also +may be referred what Richard Chancellor told me, as having heard +from Sebastian Cabot, as far as I remember, either on the coast +of Brazil or of the Rio de la Plata, that his ship or pinnace was +suddenly lifted from the sea and cast upon the land, I know not +how far. Which, and other strange and wonderful works of nature +considered, and calling to remembrance the narrowness of human +knowledge and understanding, compared with her mighty power, I +can never cease to wonder, and to confess with Pliny, that +nothing is impossible to nature, whose smallest power is still +unknown to man.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 220: In our present version the word +<i>smite</i> is used instead of burn. But the quotation in the +text is a literal translation from the Latin vulgate, and agrees +with the older English version, still used in the Book of Common +Prayer.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Our people saw and considered many things in this voyage that +are worthy of notice, and some of which I have thought fit to +record, that the reader may take pleasure, both in the variety of +these things, and in the narrative of the voyage. Among other +matters respecting the manners and customs of these people, this +may seem strange, that their princes and nobles are in use to +pierce and wound their skins in such way as to form curious +figures upon it, like flowered damask, which they consider as +very ornamental[221]. Although they go in a manner naked, yet +many of them, and the women especially, are almost loaded with +collars, bracelets, rings, and chains, of gold, copper, or ivory. +I have seen one of their ivory armlets weighing 38 ounces, which +was worn by one of their women on her arm. It was made of one +piece of the largest part of an elephant's tooth, turned and +somewhat carved, having a hole through which to pass the hand. +Some have one on each arm and one on each leg, and though often +so galled by them as to be almost lame, they still persist to use +them. Some wear great shackles on their legs of bright copper, +and they wear collars, bracelets, garlands, and girdles of +certain blue stones, resembling beads. Some also of their women +wear upon their arms a kind of <i>fore-sleeves</i>[222], made of +plates of beaten gold. They wear likewise rings on their fingers +made of gold wire, having a knot or wreath, like those which +children make on rush rings. Among other golden articles bought +by our men, were some dog-collars and chains.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 221: Now well known under the name of +tatooing.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 222: Sleeves for the fore-arms, or from the +elbow to the wrist.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>These natives of Guinea are very wary in driving bargains, and +will not willingly lose the smallest particle of their gold, +using weights and measures for the same with great +circumspection. In dealing with them, it is necessary to behave +with civility and gentleness, as they will not trade with any who +use them ill. During the first voyage of our people to that +country, on departing from the place where they had first traded, +one of them either stole a musk-cat or took her away by force, +not suspecting that this could have any effect to prevent trading +at the next station: But although they went there in full sail, +the news had got there before them, and the people refused to +deal with them until the cat were either restored or paid for at +a fixed price. Their houses are made of four posts or trees set +in the ground, and are covered with boughs; and their ordinary +food is roots, with such fish as they take, which are in great +plenty. Among these are flying fishes, similar to those seen in +the West India seas. Our people endeavoured to salt some of the +fish which they caught on the coast of Africa, but some said that +they would not take salt, and must therefore be eaten +immediately; while others alleged that, if salted immediately +when taken, they would keep good for ten or twelve days. Part of +the salt meat taken by our people from England became putrid +while on the coast of Africa, yet turned sweet again after their +return to a temperate region. They have a strange method of +making bread, which is as follows: They grind, with their hands, +between two stones, as much corn into meal as they think may +suffice the family, and making this flour into a paste with +water, they knead it into thin cakes, which are stuck upon the +posts of their houses and baked or dried by the heat of the sun; +so that when the master of the house or any of the family are in +want of bread, they take it down from the post and eat.</p> + +<p>They have very fair wheat, the ear of which is two +hand-breadths long and as big as a great bulrush, the stem or +straw being almost as thick as a man's little finger. The grains +are white and round, shining like pearls that have lost their +lustre, and about the size of our pease. Almost their whole +substance turns to flour, leaving very little bran. The ear is +inclosed in three blades, each about two inches broad, and longer +than the ear; and in one of them I counted 260 grains of corn. By +this fruitfulness, the sun seems in some measure to compensate +for the trouble and distress produced by its excessive heat. +Their drink is either water, or the juice which drops from cut +branches of the palmito, a barren palm or date tree; to collect +which they hang great gourds to the cut branches every evening, +or set them on the ground under the trees, to receive the juice +which issues during the night. Our people said that this juice +tasted like whey, but sweeter and more pleasant. The branches of +the palmito are cut every evening to obtain this juice, as the +heat of the sun during the day dries up and sears over the wound. +They have likewise large beans, as big as chesnuts, and very +hard, having shells instead of husks or pods. While formerly +describing the fruit containing the <i>grains</i> or Guinea +pepper, called by the physicians <i>grana paradisi</i>, I +remarked that they have holes through them, as in effect they +have when brought to us; but I have been since informed, that +these holes are made on purpose to put strings or twigs through, +for hanging up the fruit to dry in the sun. This fruit grows on a +plant which does not rise above eighteen inches or two feet above +the ground.</p> + +<p>At their coming home, the keels and bottoms of the ships were +strangely overgrown with certain shells, two inches or more in +length, as thick as they could stand, and so large that a man +might put his thumb into their mouths. It is affirmed that a +certain slimy substance grows in these shells, which falls +afterwards into the sea, and is changed into the bird called +barnacles[223]. Similar shells have been seen on ships coming +from Ireland, but these Irish barnacles do not exceed half an +inch long. I saw the Primrose in dock, after her return from +Guinea, having her bottom entirely covered over with these +shells, which in my judgment must have greatly impeded her +sailing. Their ships also were in many places eaten into by the +worms called <i>Bromas</i> or <i>Bissas</i>, which are mentioned +in the Decades[224]. These worms creep between the planks, which +they eat through in many places.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 223: This is an old fable not worth +confuting. The Barnacle goose or clakis of Willoughby, anas +erythropus of Linnaeus, called likewise tree-goose, anciently +supposed to be generated from drift wood, or rather from the +<i>lepas anatifera</i> or multivalve shell, called barnacle, +which is often found on the bottoms of ships.--See Pennant's +Brit. Zool. 4to. 1776. V. II. 488, and Vol. IV. +64.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 224: Meaning the Decades of Peter Martyr, +part of which book was translated and published by Richard +Eden.--Astl I. 149. b.]</blockquote> + +<p>In this voyage, though they sailed to Guinea in seven weeks, +they took twenty to return; owing to this cause, as they +reported, that about the coast at Cape Verd the wind was +continually east, so that they were obliged to stand far out into +the ocean, in search of a western wind to bring them home. In +this last voyage about twenty-four of the men died, many of them +between the Azores and England, after their return into the cold +or temperate region. They brought with them several black +slaves[225], some of whom were tall strong men, who could well +agree with our meats and drinks. The cold and moist air of +England somewhat offended them; yet men who are born in hot +regions can much better endure cold, than those of cold regions +can bear heat; because violent heat dissolves the radical +moisture of the human body, while cold concentrates and preserves +it. It is to be considered as among the secrets of nature, that +while all parts of Africa under the equator, and for some way on +both sides, are excessively hot, and inhabited by black people, +such regions in the West Indies [America], under the same +parallels, are very temperate, and the natives are neither black, +nor have they short curled wool on their heads like the Africans; +but are of an olive colour, with long black hair. The cause of +this difference is explained in various places of the +<i>Decades</i>. Some of those who were upon this voyage told me +that on the 14th of March they had the sun to the north of them +at noon.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 225: In a side note, <i>five blacke +moors</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION IV.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, Merchant of +London</i>[226].</p> + +<p>On Monday the 30th of September 1555, we sailed from the +harbour of Newport, in the Isle of Wight, with two good ships, +the Hart and the Hind, both belonging to London, of which John +Ralph and William Carters were masters, bound on a voyage for the +river Sestos, in Guinea, and other harbours in that +neighbourhood. Owing to variable winds, we could not reach +Dartmouth before the 14th of October; and having continued there +till the 20th of that month, we warpt out of the harbour, and set +sail to the S.W. and by next morning had run 30 leagues. On the +1st November, by the reckoning of our master, we were in lat. +31° N. and that day we ran 40 leagues. The 2d we ran 36 +leagues; and on the 3d we had sight of Porto Santo, a small +island about three leagues long and one and a-half broad, +belonging to the Portuguese, and lying in the ocean. As we came +towards it from the N.N.W. it seemed like two small hills near +each other. The east end of the island is a high land like a +saddle, having a valley which gives it that appearance; while the +west end is lower, with several small round hillocks[227]. Porto +Santo is in about lat. 33° N. The same day at 11 o'clock A.M. +we raised the island of Madeira, which is 12 leagues S.W. from +Porto Santo. Madeira is a fine and fertile island belonging to +the Portuguese, and rises from afar like one great high mountain. +By 3 P.M. being athwart of Porto Santo, we set our course to the +S.W. leaving both Madeira and Porto Santo to the eastwards, being +the first land we had seen after leaving England. About three +next morning we were abreast of Madeira, within three leagues of +its west end, and were becalmed under its high land. We estimated +having run 30 leagues in the past day and night. The 4th we +remained becalmed under the west end of Madeira till 1 P.M. when +the wind sprung up at east, and we continued our course S.W. +making in the rest of that day 15 leagues. The 5th we ran 15 +leagues.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 226: Hakluyt, II. 480, Astl. I. 150.--From +several passages in this journal it appears that Towerson had +been on the former voyage to Guinea with Captain Lock; but in the +present voyage he appears to have acted as captain or chief +director, and seems to have been the author of the journal here +adopted from Hakluyt.--Astl. I. 150, 2.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 227: The saddle-backed hills of old +navigators, are to be considered in reference to the old +demipique or war-saddle, having high abrupt peaks, or hummocks, +at each end, with a flattish hollow between.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 6th in the morning we got sight of <i>Teneriffe</i>, +otherwise called the Peak, being very high land, with a peak on +the top like a sugar loaf; and the same night we got sight of +<i>Palma</i>, which also is high land and W. from Teneriffe +[W.N.W.] The 7th we saw <i>Gomera</i>, an island about 12 leagues +S.E. from Palma, and eight W.S.W. from Teneriffe; and lest we +might have been becalmed under Teneriffe, we left both it and +Gomera to the east, and passed between Palma and Gomera. This day +and night our course was 30 leagues. These islands, called the +Canaries, are 60 leagues from Madeira, and there are other three +islands in the group to the eastward of Teneriffe, named <i>Gran +Canarea</i>, <i>Fuertaventura</i>, and <i>Lancerota</i>, none of +which we saw. All these islands are inhabited by Spaniards. On +this day likewise we got sight of the Isle of <i>Ferro</i>, which +is 13 leagues south from Gomera, and belongs to the Spaniards +like the others. We were unable all this day or the following +night to get beyond Ferro, unless we had chosen to go to the +westwards, which had been much out of our proper course; +wherefore we put about, and stood back five hours E.N.E. in hope +of being able to clear it next tack, the wind keeping always S.E. +which is not often met with in that latitude by navigators, as it +generally keeps in the N.E. and E.N.E. Next morning, being on the +other tack, we were nearly close in with the island, but had room +enough to get clear past.</p> + +<p>The 8th, our due course to fetch the Barbary coast being S.E. +by E. we were unable to keep it by reason of the wind being +scant, but lay as near it as we could, running that day and night +25 leagues. The 9th we ran 30 leagues; the 10th 25; and 11th, 24 +leagues. The 12th we saw a sail under our lee, which we thought +to be a fishing bark, and stood down to speak with her; but in an +hour there came on so thick a fog that we could neither see that +vessel nor our consort the Hind. We accordingly shot off several +guns to give notice to the Hind of our situation, but she did not +hear or answer us. In the afternoon the Hind fired a gun, which +we heard and answered with another gun. About half an hour +afterwards the fog cleared away, and we were within four leagues +of the Barbary coast, when sounding we had 14 fathoms water. The +bark also had come <i>room</i>[228] with us, and anchored here +likewise, the wind being contrary for going down the coast, or to +the southwards. On falling in with the land, we could not judge +precisely whereabout we were, most of that coast being low, the +forepart of the coast being white like chalk or sand, <i>and very +deep unto the hard shore</i>[229]. Immediately on coming to +anchor we began to fish, and got abundance of that kind which the +Portuguese call <i>Pergosses</i>, the French <i>saders</i>, and +our men salt-water <i>breams</i>. Before the fog entirely cleared +away, the vessel we had followed shaped such a course that we +lost sight of her, chiefly because we had bore up to find the +Hind again. Our pilot reckoned that we were upon that part of the +coast which is 16 leagues eastwards[230] from the Rio del +Oro.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 228: This antiquated nautical word, which +occurred before in the journal of Don Juan de Castro, is here +obviously going down the wind, large, or to +leeward.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 229: The meaning of this passage is not +obvious, and seems to want some words to make out the meaning: It +may be that the shore is very steep, or that the water continues +deep close to the shore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 230: Eastwards from Rio del Oro is directly +into the land; so that they must either have been N.N.E. or +S.S.W. probably the former.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the afternoon of the 13th we spied a sail coming towards +us, which we judged to be that we had seen the day before, and we +immediately caused the Hind to weigh anchor and go towards her, +manning likewise our own skiff, to lay her on board or to learn +what she was, and within half an hour we weighed also. When the +vessel noticed us, she put about and sailed from us; and soon +after there came on so heavy a fog that we could not see her, and +as the fog continued the whole night we had to quit the chase. In +the afternoon the wind came about fair, so that we were able to +shape a course S.W. by W. to keep clear of the coast, and ran +that night 16 leagues. The 14th in the morning was very foggy, +but the fog cleared away about noon, when we espied a caravel of +60 tons fishing, and sent our skiff on board with five men +unarmed. For haste the caravel slipped her anchors and set sail, +yet our unarmed boat overtook her and made her strike sail, and +brought her away, though she had fourteen or fifteen men on +board, all armed, but they had not the heart to resist. On coming +to us they anchored, as we were likewise, because the wind had +become foul; on which I made our skiff come for me, and I went on +board the caravel, to take care that no harm was offered, and to +see if they would spare us any thing for our money. Accordingly +we got from them three <i>tapnets</i> of figs, two small jars of +oil, two pipes of water, and four hogsheads of salt fish, which +they had taken on the coast, besides some fresh fish, which they +held of no value, as they are so plentiful on that coast that one +man may often take as many in an hour or less as will serve +twenty men a whole day. For these things, some wine we drank +while on board their ship, and three or four great cans which +they sent on board our ships, I paid them 27 pistoles, being +twice as much as they would willingly have taken. We then let +them go to their anchor and cable which they had slipped, and +assisted them to recover. After this we made sail, but the wind +obliged us to come to anchor again about 12 leagues from the Rio +del Oro, as we were informed by the Portuguese. There were five +other caravels in this place, but immediately on our appearance +they all made away for fear of us.</p> + +<p>The 15th we continued at anchor, as the wind was still foul. +The 16th we set sail and run our course 40 leagues, being this +day, according to our pilots, right under the Tropic of Cancer, +in lat. 23° 30' N. The 17th we ran 25 leagues, mostly in +sight of the coast of Barbary. The 18th we ran 30 leagues, and at +noon, by the reckoning of our pilots, were abreast of Cape +Blanco. The 22d they reckoned we were abreast of Cape Verd. The +12th of December we got sight of the coast of Guinea, towards +which we immediately hauled, standing to the N.E. and about 12 at +night, being less than two leagues from the shore, we lay to and +sounded, finding 18 fathoms water. We soon afterwards saw a light +between us and the shore, which we thought might have been a +ship, from which circumstance we judged ourselves off the river +Sestro, and we immediately came to anchor, armed our tops, and +made all clear for action, suspecting it might be some Portuguese +or French ship. In the morning we saw no ship whatever, but +espied four rocks about two English miles from us, one being a +large rock and the other three small; whence we concluded that +the light seen during the night had been on shore. We then +weighed and stood E.S.E. along shore, because the master did not +rightly know the place, but thought we were still to the westward +of Sestro river. All along this coast the land is low, and full +of high trees close to the shore, so that no one can know what +place he falls in with, except by means of the latitude. I think +we ran 16 leagues that day, as we had all night a stiff gale, +with much thunder and lightning.</p> + +<p>For most port of the 13th we ran E.S.E. along the coast, +within two leagues of the land, finding the shore all covered +with tall trees to the water's edge, and great rocks hard by the +beach, on which the billows continually broke in white foam, so +high that the surf might easily be seen at four leagues distance, +and in such a manner that no boat could possibly go to land. At +noon our masters and pilots took the altitude of the sun, by +which they judged that we were 24 leagues beyond the river Sestro +to the eastwards, wherefore we hauled in towards the shore and +came to anchor within two English miles of the land in 15 +fathoms, the water being so smooth that we might have rode with a +hawser. We employed the afternoon to rig out our boat with a +sail, for the purpose of sending her along shore in search of a +place to take in water, as we could not go back to the river +Sestro, because the wind is always contrary and the current sets +continually to the eastwards. The 14th we weighed anchor and +plied up along the coast to the W.N.W. sending our boats close in +shore to seek a watering-place, which they found about noon. At +this time, being far out to sea, we fell in with several small +long and narrow boats or canoes of the natives, in each of which +was one man only. We gave them bread, which they accepted and eat +readily. About 4 P.M. our boats came off to us with fresh water; +and at night we anchored off the mouth of a river. The 15th we +weighed and stood near the shore, sounding all the way, finding +sometimes a rocky bottom, at other times good ground, and never +less than seven fathoms. Finally, we cast anchor within an +English mile of the shore, in seven and a half fathoms, directly +over against the mouth of the river, and then sent our boats for +water, which they got very good after rowing a mile up the river. +This river, called St Vincent in the chart, is by estimation +about eight leagues beyond the river Sestro, but is so hard to +find that a boat may be within half a mile of it without being +able to discover any river, as a ledge of rocks of greater extent +than its breadth lies directly before its mouth, so that the +boats had to go a considerable way between that ledge and the +shore before coming to its mouth. When once in, it is a great +river, having several others that fall into it. The entrance is +somewhat difficult, as the surf is rather high, but after getting +in it is as smooth as the Thames.[231] Upon this river, near the +sea, the inhabitants are tall large men, going entirely naked, +except a clout about a quarter of a yard long before their +middle, made of the bark of trees, yet resembling cloth, as the +bark used for this purpose can be spun like flax. Some also wear +a similar cloth on their heads, painted with sundry colours, but +most of them go bareheaded, having their heads clipped and shorn +in sundry ways, and most of them have their bodies punctured or +slashed in various figures like a leathern jerkin. The men and +women go so much alike, that a woman is only to be known from a +man by her breasts, which are mostly long and hanging down like +the udder of a milch goat.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 231: Sestro river, in the Complete Neptune +of the Rev. James Stanier Clarke, chart. 2, is called Sesters, in +lat. 5° 30' N. long. 9° 10' W. from Greenwich. The river +St Vincent of the text does not appear in that chart, but nearly +at the indicated distance to the E.S.E. is one named +Sangwin.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Soon after coming to anchor on the 15th December, we went up +the river in our skiff, carrying with us certain basons, +<i>manels</i>, &c. for sale. We procured that day one +hogshead and 100 pounds weight of grains,[232] and two elephants +teeth, getting both at an easy rate. We sold the natives basons, +<i>maneilios</i>, and <i>margarits</i>,[233] but basons were most +in request, and for most of these we got thirty pounds of +<i>grains</i> in exchange for each, and gave for an elephants +tooth of thirty pounds weight six basons. We went again up the +river on the 16th, in the morning, taking some of every kind of +merchandise along with us in our boat, and shewed them to the +negroes, but they made light of every thing, even of the basons, +manellios, and margarite which they had bought the day before; +yet they would have given us some grains for our basons, but so +very little that we did not that day get above 100 pounds weight, +through their chief or captain, who would not suffer any one to +sell but through his mediation and at his price. He was so +cunning that he would not give above 15 pounds of grains for a +bason, and would sometimes offer us a small dishful, whereas we +had a basket full for each the day before. Seeing that we would +not accept what he offered, the captain of the negroes went away, +and caused all the boats to depart likewise, thinking perhaps +that we would have followed and agreed to his terms; but on +perceiving his drift, we hauled up our grapnel and went away +likewise. We landed at a small town, to see the manners of the +people, and about 60 of them came about us, being at first shy, +and seemingly afraid of us; but seeing we did them no harm, they +came up in a familiar manner, and took us by the hand. We then +went into their town, which consisted of about twenty small +hovels, covered over with large leaves. All the sides were open, +and the floor was raised like a scaffold about a yard high, where +they work many ingenious things of the barks of trees, and there +also they sleep. In some of these hovels they work in iron, +making very pretty heads for javelins, tools for making their +boats, and various other things, the women working as well as the +men.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 232: That is grains of paradise, so the +Italians called Guinea pepper when they first saw it, not knowing +what it was. We took the name from them, and hence came the name +of the Grain Coast--Astl. I. 152, a.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 233: Margarits may possibly have been mock +pearl beads; the manels or manellios were bracelets of some +kind.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>While we were among them, several of the women danced and sung +after their manner, by way of amusing us, but the sound was by no +means agreeable to our ears. Their song was continually,</p> + +<p>Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!<br> +Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!</p> + +<p>And with these words they kept leaping, dancing and clapping +their hands. The only animals we saw among them were two goats, a +few small dogs, and some hens. Having seen these things, we went +on board our ships; and on seeing us depart, the chief of the +other town sent two of his servants after us with a basket of +grains, making signs to us that when we had slept, or next day, +we should have plenty of grains if we came for them: Then shewing +us his grains, he went away. Accordingly, next morning being the +17th, thinking that some business might be done with the negroes +as the captain sent for us, I sent the master with the rest of +the merchants on shore, remaining myself on board, because they +had esteemed our goods so lightly the day before. The captain +accordingly came to our people after they went up the river, +bringing grains with him, but not seeing me he made signs to know +where I was, and was answered in the same manner that I was on +board ship. He then inquired by signs who was captain, or Diago +as they call it, and the master of the ship being pointed out to +him, he began to shew his grains, but held them so unreasonably +dear that no profit could be made of them; on which, and because +they seemed to have no store, the master came away with only +about 50 pounds of grains. Going on shore at the small town on +their way back to the ships, some one of our people plucked a +gourd which gave great offence to the negroes, on which many of +them came with their darts and large targets, making signs for +our men to depart; which our men did, as they had only one bow +and two or three swords among them. As soon as they were on board +we weighed and set sail, but the wind was from the sea, so that +we could not clear certain rocks, for which reason we came again +to anchor.</p> + +<p>This river called St Vincent is in lat. 4° 30' N[234]. The +tide at this place ebbs and flows every twelve hours, but while +we were there the rise and fall did not exceed 9 feet. So far as +we could see, the whole country was altogether covered with wood, +all the kinds of trees being unknown to us, and of many different +sorts, some having large leaves like gigantic docks, so high that +a tall man is unable to reach their tops. By the sea-side there +grow certain pease upon great and long stalks, one of which I +measured and it was 27 paces long. These grow on the sand like +trees, and so very near the sea that we could distinctly perceive +by the water marks that the sea sometimes flows into the woods. +All the trees and other plants of this country are continually +green. Some of the women have exceedingly long breasts, but they +are not all so. All day the wind blows from the sea, and all +night from the land, though we found this to differ sometimes, at +which our master was much surprised.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 234: This latitude would bring us to a +river about half way between the Grand Sesters and Cape Palmas; +but which does not agree with the former circumstances, as they +could hardly have been so far to the S.E. without seeing Cape +Palmas. The river Sangwin, which we have before supposed might be +the St Vincent, is in lat. 5° 20' N. almost a degree farther +north.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This night at 9 o'clock the wind came to east, which used +ordinarily to be at N.N.W. off shore[235]; yet we weighed and +hauled off south to seawards, and next morning stood in again +towards the land, whence we took in 6 tons of water for our ship, +the Hind probably taking as much. On this part of the coast I +could not find that the natives had any gold or other valuable +article of trade, for indeed they are so savage and idle that +they give not themselves the trouble to seek for any thing, for +if they would take pains they might easily gather large +quantities of grains, yet I do not believe there were two tons to +be had in all that river. They have many fowls likewise in their +woods, but the people are not at the trouble to catch them. While +here I collected the following words of their language, all of +which they speak very thick, often repeating one word three times +successively, and always the last time longer than the two +former.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 235: The text here is probably corrupt. The +direct off-shore wind on the grain coast of Africa is N.E. The +wind at N.N.W. certainly is in some degree off-shore, but very +obliquely; and the wind at east is more direct from +shore.--E.]</blockquote> + +<pre> + Bezow! bezow! Is their salutation. + Manegete afoye,[236], Grains enough. + Crocow afoye, Hens enough. + Zeramme afoye, Have you enough? + Begge sacke, Give me a knife. + Begge come, Give me bread. + Borke, Silence! + Contrecke, You lie! + Veede, Put forth, or empty. + Brekeke, Row! + Diago, or dabo, Captain, or chief. +</pre> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 236: In some maps the grain coast is named +Malaguete, probably from this word, and consequently synonimous +with the ordinary name. It is likewise called the Windward +coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Towards night on the 18th, while sailing along the coast, we +fell in with some boats or canoes, when the natives expressed by +signs that we were abreast of a river where we might have grains, +but we did not think it right to stop there, lest other ships +might get before us. This river has three great rocks and five +small ones lying before it, with one great tree and a small one +close by the river, which exceed all the rest in height. This +night we proceeded 10 leagues along the coast. About noon of the +19th, while proceeding along shore, three boats came off to tell +us we might have grains, and brought some to shew, but we did not +choose to stop. Continuing our course we anchored at night, +having run this day 10 leagues. On the 20th as the Hind had come +to anchor near us among some rocks and foul ground, she lost a +small anchor. While passing along shore about noon a negro came +off to us as before, offering grains if we would go on shore, and +where we anchored at night another brought us a similar +intimation, besides which a fire was kindled on shore, as if +indicating where we might land, which was likewise done on other +parts of the coast when they saw us anchored. Wherever we +happened to anchor on this coast from our first watering place, +we always found the tide [of flood?] running to the westwards, +and saw many rocks close along shore, many others being a league +out to sea. This day we ran 12 leagues. The 21st though we sailed +all day with a brisk gale, yet so strong were the tides against +us that we were only able to make out 6 leagues. This day +likewise some negroes came off to us, offering to deal in grains +if we would land. The 22d we ran all day and night to a double +point called Cabo das Palmas[237].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 237: Reckoning the course run as expressed +in the text, the distance measured back from Cape Palmas brings +us very nearly to Sangwin for the river St Vincent of Towerson, +as formerly conjectured.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 23d about 3 o'clock we were abreast of the point, and +before we came to the western part of it we saw a great ledge of +rocks which lie out to the west of it about 3 leagues, and a +league or more from the shore. We soon after got sight of the +eastern side of this cape, which is 4 leagues from the west side. +Upon both corners of this cape there are two green spots like +meadows, and to the westwards of this cape the land forms a bay, +by which it may be easily known. Four leagues farther on there is +a head-land jutting out to sea, and about two leagues farther on +there is a great bay, seemingly the entrance to a river, before +which we anchored all that night, lest we should overshoot a +river where, in the voyage of last year, 1554, they got all their +elephants teeth. Cape Palmas is in lat. 4° 30' N. between +which and the river Sestro the greatest abundance of grains is to +be had, while beyond this cape very little is got. Where we +anchored this night, we found that the tide now ran to the +eastwards, while on the other side of the cape it went to the +N.W. This day we ran about 16 leagues.</p> + +<p>While continuing our course on the 24th about 8 o'clock, some +boats came off to us bringing small soft eggs without shells, and +made signs that we might have fresh water and goats by going on +shore. As the master judged this might be the river of which we +were in search, we cast anchor and sent our boat on shore with a +person who knew the river. On coming near the shore he perceived +that it was not the river, and came therefore back again, and +went along shore by the help of sails and oars, upon which we +weighed and sailed likewise along shore. Being now 13 leagues +past the cape, the master observed a place which he believed +might be the river, when we were in fact two miles past it. At +this time the boat came off to the ship, reporting that there was +no river; yet we came to anchor, after which the master and I +went in the boat with five men, and on coming near the shore he +saw that it was the river for which he sought. We then rowed in +with much difficulty, the entrance being very much obstructed by +a heavy surf. After entering, several boats came off to us, +informing us by signs that they had elephants teeth, and brought +us one of 8 pounds and a small one only one pound weight, both of +which we bought. Then they brought some other teeth to the river +side, giving us to understand by signs that they would sell them +to us if we came next day. We then gave a <i>manillio</i> each to +two chiefs, and departed to the ships. We sent another boat to a +different place on shore, where some of the natives in the canoes +at sea made signs that fresh water was to be had; and on going +there they found a town but no river, yet the people brought them +fresh water and shewed an elephants tooth, making signs that they +would sell them such next day. This river lies 13 leagues beyond +Cape Palmas, having a rock to the westwards about a league out to +sea, and there juts out from the river a point of land on which +grow five trees which may be discerned two or three leagues off +when coming from the westwards; but the river itself cannot be +seen till close upon it, and then a small town may be seen on +either side, each of which has a <i>diago</i> or captain. The +river is small, but the water is fresh and good[238]. Two miles +beyond the river, where the other town lies, another point runs +oat to sea, which is green like a meadow, having only six trees +growing upon it, all distant from each other, which is a good +mark to know it by, as I have not seen as much bare land on the +whole coast[239]. In this place, and three or four leagues to the +westwards, there grow many palm trees, from which the natives +have their palm wine, all along shore. These trees are easily +known almost two leagues off, as they are very straight, tall and +white bodied, and thickest in the middle, having no limbs or +boughs, but only a round bush of leaves at the top. In this top +the natives bore a hole, to which they hang a bottle or empty +gourd, and in this they receive the juice that runs from the +tree, which is their wine.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 238: From the indicated distance eastwards +from Cape Palmas, and the description in the text, the river and +point in question seem those called Tabou, in long. 7° 10' W. +from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 239: It is hardly necessary to observe that +these are very bad land-marks, being subject to alteration from +many causes; besides that this description is above 250 years +old.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Cape Palmas to Cape <i>Tres-puntas</i> or Three-points, +the distance is 100 leagues east[240]; and from Cape Three-points +to the port where we proposed to sell our cloth are other 40 +leagues[241]. The language here, as far as I could judge, seemed +to differ little from that formerly mentioned. The people +likewise dress much in the same manner, or almost naked, but they +were gentler in their manners and better looking. They chiefly +coveted manillios and margarites, and cared very little for the +rest of our wares. About 9 o'clock A.M. some boats came off to us +from both towns, bringing with them some elephants teeth, and +having made me swear by the water of the sea that I would do them +no harm, three or four of them came on board, and we entertained +them with such things as we had, of which they eat and drank as +freely as ourselves. We then bought all their teeth, of which +they had 14, 10 being small. On going away, they desired us to +come to their towns next day. Not wishing to trifle our time at +this place, I desired the master to go on the 26th with two of +our merchants to one of the towns, while I went with one merchant +to the other town, the two towns being three miles asunder. +Taking with us to both places some of every kind of merchandise +that we had, the master got nine rather small teeth at one town, +while at the other I got eleven not large. Leaving on board with +the [other] master an assortment of manillios, he bought 12 teeth +in our absence from people who came to the ships. I bought +likewise a small goat, and the master bought five small hens at +the other town. Finding that nothing more was to be done here, as +they had no more teeth, we went on board by one o'clock, P.M. and +immediately weighed anchor, continuing our progress eastward, +always within sight of land.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 240: Between these two points is what is +called the ivory coast of Guinea: After which is the gold coast +to Cape St Pauls; and then the slave coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 241: Forty leagues E.N.E. along the gold +coast bring us to Saccoom or Accra, in the country called +Aquamboo.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 28th, the wind turning contrary, we stood out to sea, and +when the wind changed from the seaward we again stood for the +land, which we fell in with at a great round red cliff, not very +high, having to the eastwards a smaller red cliff, and right +above that towards the inland a round green hummock, which we +took to be covered with trees. In the last 24 hours we only made +good about 4 leagues. The 29th coming near the shore, we noticed +the before mentioned red cliff to have a large tuft of trees on +its summit. All to the westwards as far as we could see was full +of red cliffs, and all along the shore, both on the tops of these +cliffs, and in the low intervals between them, was everywhere +full of wood. Within a mile of the great cliff to the eastwards +there was a river, and no cliffs that we could see beyond it, +except one small cliff very near its eastern side. At this place +we had the wind in the night at north off the land, and in the +day south from the sea, which was not usual, as we were assured +by such of our people as had been there before, being commonly +N.W. and S.W. We ran this day and night 12 leagues. The 31st we +went our course by the shore, which was everywhere low and +covered with wood, with no rocks. This morning many boats of the +negroes came out to fish, being larger than those we had seen +hitherto but of similar make, some of them having five men. In +the afternoon, about 3 o'clock we had sight of a town by the +sea-side, which our pilots judged to be 25 leagues west from Cape +Three-points.</p> + +<p>On the morning of the 3d January 1556, we fell in with Cape +Three-points, having passed during the night one of the +Portuguese castles, which is 8 leagues west from this point[242]. +This is a very high land all grown over with trees, and on coming +nearer we perceived three head-lands, having a kind of two bays +between them, which open directly westwards. The farthest out to +sea is the eastern cape. The middle cape is not above a league +from the western cape, though the chart we had laid them down as +3 leagues asunder. Right before the point of the middle cape +there is a small rock near it, which cannot be seen from the cape +itself, except one be near the shore, and on the top of this cape +there is a great tuft of trees. When abreast of this cape there +is seen close beside it a round green hummock rising from the +main-land. The eastern cape is about a league from the middle +one, and is high land like the other two, and between these there +is a little head or point of land, and several rocks close in +shore. About 8 leagues before we came to cape Three-points the +coast trends S.E. by E., and after passing the cape it runs N.E. +by E. About two leagues after passing Cape Three-points there is +a low glade for about two miles in length, after which the land +becomes again high, with several successive points or headlands, +the first of which has several rocks out to sea. The middle of +the three capes runs farthest out to sea southwards, so that it +can be seen a great way off from the coast, when it appears to +rise with two small rocks. We ran this day 8 leagues, and +anchored before night, lest we might overshoot a town named St +Johns[243]. In the afternoon a boat with five men came off from +the shore and ranged alongside of us, as if looking at our flags, +but would not come near, and after looking at us for some time +went back to the land. In the morning of the 4th, while sailing +along the coast, we espied a ledge of rocks close to the shore, +to the westwards of which were two green hills joining together, +with a hollow between them resembling a saddle; and, as the +master thought the town we were looking for stood within these +rocks, we manned our boats, taking with us a quantity of cloth +and other goods, with which we rowed on shore; but after going +some way along the shore without finding any town, we returned +again on board. About two leagues to the eastwards from the two +saddle hills, a ledge of rocks stretches almost two miles out to +sea, beyond which is a great bay running N.N.W. while the general +stretch of the coast at this place is from S.W. by W. to N.E. by +E. Having with a gentle gale run past that uttermost headland, we +saw a great red cliff, which the master again judged to be near +the town of St Johns, on which we again took our boat and +merchandise and rowed to the shore. We actually found a town on +the top of a hill to which we directed our course, and on seeing +us a considerable number of the inhabitants collected together +and waved a piece of cloth as a signal for us to come in, on +which we rowed into an excellent bay to eastward of the cliff on +which the town stands, and on getting fairly into the bay we let +drop our grapnel. After remaining some time, a boat or canoe came +off to us and one of the men in her shewed us a piece of gold +about half a crown weight, requiring us to give them our measure +and weight that they might shew them to their captain. We +accordingly gave them a measure of two ells, and a weight of two +<i>angels</i>, as the principles on which we meant to deal. He +took these on shore to their captain; and then brought us back a +measure of two ells one quarter and a half, and one +<i>crusado</i> weight of gold, making signs that they would give +so much weight of gold for that measure of cloth and no more; but +this we refused. After staying about an hour, and finding that +they would not deal on our principles, besides understanding that +the best places for trade were all before us, we returned to our +ships, weighed anchor, and stood along shore, going before in the +boat.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 242: This was probably Fort St Antonio, at +the mouth of the river Aximer or Ashim.--Astl. I. 155. +a.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 243: St Johns river is about 12 leagues +E.N.E. of Cape Three-points, nearly in lat. 5° N. long 2° +10' W.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Having sailed about a league, we came to a point of land +having a long ledge of rocks running out from it to seawards like +the others; and on passing the ledge our master noticed a place +which he said was assuredly the town of Don John[244]. As the +night approached we could not see it very distinctly, wherefore +we came to anchor as near as possible. On the morning of the 5th +it was recognized to be the town we wanted, wherefore we manned +our boats and went towards the shore; but knowing that the +Portuguese had taken away a man from that place the year before, +and had afterwards shot at them with great <i>bases</i>[245], +driving them from the place, we let go our grapnel almost a +<i>base</i> shot from shore, and lay there near two hours without +any boat coming off to us. At this time some of our men who had +gone in the Hinds boat into the bay to the eastward of the town, +where they found a fine fresh river, waved to us to join them, +because the negroes were seen coming down to that place, which we +did. Immediately afterwards the negroes came down to the shore, +and gave us to know by signs that they had gold, but none of them +would come to our boats, neither indeed did we see that they had +any canoes to come in, so that we suspected the Portuguese had +spoiled their boats, as we saw half their town in ruins. +Wherefore, having tarried a good while, and seeing that they did +not come to us, and as we were well armed, we run the heads of +both boats on shore. Upon this the captain of the town came +towards us with his dart in his hand, followed by six tall men +each of whom had a dart and target. Their darts were all headed +with iron well-fashioned and sharp. After this party came another +negro carrying the captains stool. We all saluted the captain +respectfully, pulling off our caps and bowing to him; but he, +seeming to consider himself as a man of consequence, did not move +his cap in return, and gravely sat down on his stool, hardly +inclining his body in return to our salute: All his attendants +however, took off their caps and bowed to us.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 244: Called St Johns twice before; and we +shall see that they came to another town afterwards called Don +Johns, more to the east, whence it appears that the Don John of +the text here is an error for St John.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 245: Probably musketoons or blunderbusses, +and certainly some species of gun or fire-arm.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This chief was clothed from the loins downwards, with a cloth +of the country manufacture, wrapped about him and made fast with +a girdle round his waist, having a cap of the country cloth on +his head, all his body above the loins with his legs and feet +being bare. Some of his attendants had cloths about their loins, +while others had only a clout between their legs, fastened before +and behind to their girdles; having likewise caps on their heads +of their own making, some made of basket-work, and others like a +large wide purse of wild beast skins. All their cloth, girdles, +fishing lines, and other such things, are made from the bark of +certain trees, very neatly manufactured. They fabricate likewise +all such iron implements as they use very artificially; such as +the heads of their darts, fish-hooks, <i>hooking</i> irons, +<i>ironheads</i>, and great daggers, some of these last being as +long as a bill hook, or woodcutters knife, very sharp on both +sides and bent like a Turkish cymeter, and most of the men have +such a dagger hanging on their left side. Their targets are made +of the same materials with their cloths, very closely wrought, +very large and of an oblong square form, somewhat longer than +broad, so that when they kneel on the ground the target entirely +covers their whole body. Their bows are short and tolerably +strong, as much as a man is able to draw with one finger, and the +string is made of the bark of a tree, made flat, and a quarter of +an inch broad. I have not seen any of their arrows, as they were +all close wrapped up, and I was so busily engaged in traffic that +I had not leisure to get them opened out for my inspection. They +have also the art to work up their gold into very pretty +ornaments.</p> + +<p>When the captain had taken his seat on the stool, I sent him +as a present two ells of cloth and two basins, and he sent back +for our weight and measure, on which I sent him a weight of two +angels, and informed him that such was our price in gold for two +ells, or the measure I had already sent him. This rule of traffic +he absolutely refused, and would not suffer his people to buy any +thing but basins of brass or latten; so that we sold that day 74 +brass basins for about half an angel weight each, and nine white +basins for about a quarter of an angel each. We shewed them some +of all our other wares, but they did not care for any of them. +About two o'clock, P.M. the chief returned again, and presented +me a hen and two great roots, which I accepted, and he then made +me understand by signs, that many people would come from the +country that night to trade with me, who would bring great store +of gold. Accordingly about 4 o'clock there came about 100 men +under 3 chiefs, all well equipped with darts and bows; and when +they came to us, every man stuck his dart into the ground in +token of peace, all the chiefs having their stools with them, sat +down, after which they sent a youth on board our boat who brought +a measure of an ell, a quarter and a sixteenth, making us +understand that they would have four times that measure in cloth +for the weight in gold of an angel and 12 grains. I offered him +two ells for that weight, for which I had before demanded two +angels; but this he despised, and stuck to the four measures, +being 5-1/4 ells. When it grew late and I motioned to go away, he +came to four ells for the above weight, and as he and I could not +agree we went back to the ships. This day we took for basins 6 +ounces a half and an eighth of gold.</p> + +<p>In the morning of the 6th, we well manned our boats and the +skiff, being in some fear of the Portuguese, who had taken away a +man from the ships in the year before; and as the negroes had not +canoes, we went near the shore to them. The young man who had +been with us the night before was again sent to us, and he seemed +to have had intercourse with the Portuguese, as he could speak a +little of that language, and was quite expert in weights and +measures. At his coming he offered us, as before, an angel and 12 +grains for four ells, giving us to understand, if we would not +deal on these terms, we might go away, which we did accordingly; +but before going away, I offered him three ells of rotten cloth +for his weight, which he would not accept. We then went on board +our ships, which lay a league off, after which we went back in +the boats for sand ballast. When the chiefs saw that our boats +had now no merchandise, but came only for water and sand, they at +last agreed to give the weight for three ells. Therefore, when +the boats returned to the ships, we put wares into both, and, for +greater expedition, I and John Saville went in one boat, while +the master, John Makeworth, and Richard Curligin, went in the +other. That night I took for my part 52 ounces of gold, and those +in the other boat took 8-1/4 ounces, all by the above weight and +measure. When it grew late we returned to the ships, having taken +that day in all 5 pounds of gold.</p> + +<p>We went on shore again on the 7th, and that day I took in our +boat 3 pounds 19 ounces[246], so that we had sold most of the +cloth we carried in the boat before noon, by which time many of +the negroes were gone, and the rest seemed to have very little +gold remaining; yet they made signs to us to bring them more +latten basins, which I was not inclined to, not wishing to spend +any more time there, but to push forwards for Don Johns town. But +as John Saville and John Makeworth were anxious to go again, I +consented, but did not go myself. They bartered goods for +eighteen ounces of gold and came away, all the natives having +departed at a certain cry or signal. While they were on shore, a +young negroe who could speak a little Portuguese came on board +with three others, and to him I sold 39 basins and two small +white saucers, for three ounces of gold. From what I could pick +out, this young fellow had been in the castle of Mina among the +Portuguese, and had got away from them, for he told us that the +Portuguese were bad men, who made the negroes slaves when they +could take them, and put irons on their legs. He said also that +the Portuguese used to hang all the French or English they could +lay hold of. According to his account, the garrison in the castle +consisted of 60 men, and that there came thither every year two +ships, one large and the other a small caravel. He told me +farther that Don John was at war with the Portuguese, which +encouraged me to go to his town, which is only four leagues from +the castle, and from which our men had been driven in the +preceding year. This fellow came fearlessly on board, and +immediately demanded why we had not brought back the men we took +away the year before, for he knew that the English had taken away +five negroes. We answered that they were in England, where they +were well received, and remained there till they could speak the +language, after which they were to be brought back to serve as +interpreters between the English and the natives; with which +answer he seemed quite satisfied, as he spoke no more of that +matter.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 246: This is surely an error, as the troy +or bullion pound contains only 12 ounces. We ought therefore to +read 3 pounds 9 ounces--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Our boats being come on board, we weighed and set sail, and +soon afterwards noticed a great fire on the shore, by the light +of which we could discern a large white object, which was +supposed to be the Portuguese castle of St George del Mina; and +as it is very difficult to ply up to windward on this coast, in +case of passing any place, we came to anchor for the night two +leagues from the shore, lest we might overshoot the town of Don +John in the night. This town lies in a great bay which is very +deep[247], and there the people were chiefly desirous to procure +basins and cloth, though they bought a few other trifles, as +knives, horse-tails, and horns; and some of our people who were +on shore sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, and other such articles. +They shewed us a coarse kind of cloth, which I believe was of +French manufacture: The wool was very coarse, and the stuff was +striped with various colours, as green, white, yellow, &c. +Several of the negroes at this place wore necklaces of large +glass beads of various colours. At this place I picked up a few +words of their language, of which the following is a short +specimen:</p> + +<pre> + Mattea! Mattea! Is their salutation. + Dassee! Dassee! I thank you. + Sheke, Gold. + Cowrte, Cut. + Cracca, Knives. + Bassina, Basins. + Foco, foco, Cloth. + Molta, Much, or great plenty[248] +</pre> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 247: This abrupt account of a town, &c. +seems to refer back to that of St John, which they had just +left.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 248: This language seems partly +corrupted.--<i>Hakluyt</i>. + +<p>Two of the words in this short specimen have been evidently +adopted from the Portuguese, <i>bassina</i> and +<i>molta</i>.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of the Portuguese +castle of Mina, but the morning being misty we could not see it +distinctly till we were almost at Don Johns town, when the +weather cleared up and we had a full view of the fort, beside +which we noticed a white house on a hill, which seemed to be a +chapel. We stood in towards the shore, within two English miles +of Don Johns town, where we anchored in seven fathoms. We here +found, as in many places before, that the current followed the +course of the wind. At this place the land by the sea is in some +places low, and in others high, everywhere covered with wood. +This town of Don John[249] is but small, having only about twenty +huts of the negroes, and is mostly surrounded by a fence about +the height of a man, made of reeds or sedge, or some such +material. After being at anchor two or three hours, without any +person coming off to us, we manned our boats and put some +merchandize into them, and then went with our boats very near the +shore, where we anchored. They then sent off a man to us, who +told us by signs that this was the town belonging to Don John, +who was then in the interior, but would be home at sunset. He +then demanded a reward, as most of these people do on first +coming aboard, and on giving him an ell of cloth he went away, +and we saw no more of him that night. In the morning of the 9th +we went again near the shore with our boats, when a canoe came +off to us, from the people in which we were informed by signs +that Don John was not yet come home, but was expected that day. +There came also a man in a canoe from another town a mile from +this, called Don Devis[250], who shewed us gold, and made signs +for us to go there. I then left John Saville and John Makeworth +at the town of Don John, and went in the Hind to the other town, +where we anchored, after which I went in the boat close to the +shore near the town. Boats or canoes soon came off to us, shewing +a measure of 4-1/2 yards, and a weight of an angel and 12 grains, +as their rule of traffic, so that I could make no bargain. All +this day our people lay off Don Johns town and did nothing, being +told that he was still absent.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 249: Or Don <i>Juan</i>. This place stands +at Cape Korea or Cors.--Astl. I. 158. a. + +<p>Cape Cors or Korea is now corruptly called Cape coast, at +which there is an English fort or castle of the same name, in +lat. 5° 10' N. long. 1° 16' W.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 250: Called afterwards the town of John De +Viso.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We went on the 10th to the shore, when a canoe came off with a +considerable quantity of gold; and after long haggling we at +length reduced their measure to a nail less than three ells, and +brought up their weight to an angel and twenty grains, after +which, in about a quarter of an hour, I sold cloth for a pound +and a quarter of an ounce of gold. They then made signs for me to +tarry till they had parted their cloth among them on shore, after +their custom, and away they went and spread all their cloth on +the sand. At this time a man came running from the town and spoke +with them, and immediately they all hastened away into the woods +to hide their cloth and gold. We suspected some treachery, and +though invited by signs to land we would not, but returned on +board the Hind, whence we could see 30 men on the hill, whom we +judged to be Portuguese, who went up to the top of the hill, +where they drew up with a flag. Being desirous to know what the +people of the Hart were about, I went to her in the Hind's boat, +and on nearing her was surprised on seeing her shoot off two +pieces of ordnance. I then made as much haste as possible, and +met her boat and skiff coming with all speed from the shore. We +all met on board the Hart, when they told me that they had been +on shore all day, where they had given 3-1/2 yards of cloth to +each of Don Johns two sons, and three basins between them, and +had delivered 3 yards more cloth at the agreed weight of an angel +and 12 grains. That while remaining on shore for an answer, some +Portuguese had come running down the hill upon them, of which the +negroes had given them warning shortly before, but they +understood them not. The sons of Don John had conspired with the +Portuguese against them, so that they were almost taken by +surprise; yet they recovered their boat and pushed off from the +shore, on which the Portuguese discharged their calivers or +muskets at them, but hurt none of them; in revenge for which +hostility, the people in the ship had fired off the two guns +formerly mentioned. We now laid <i>bases[251]</i> into both the +boats and the skiff, manning and arming them all, and went again +towards the shore; but being unable to land on account of the +wind, we lay off at the distance of about 200 yards, whence we +fired against the Portuguese, but could not injure them as they +were sheltered by the hill. They fired upon us in return from the +hills and rocks, the negroes standing by to help them, more from +fear than love. Seeing the negroes in such subjection that they +durst not deal with us, we returned on board; and as the wind +kept at east all night, we were unable to fetch the Hind, but I +took the boat and went on board in the night, to see if any thing +could be done there; and as in the morning we could perceive that +the town was overawed by the Portuguese like the other, we +weighed anchor and went along the coast to the eastwards.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 251: Formerly conjectured to be +musquetoons, or wall-pieces.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This town of John de Viso stands on a hill like that of Don +John, but had been recently burnt, so that there did not remain +above six houses standing. Most of the gold on this part of the +coast comes from the interior country, and doubtless, if the +people durst bring their gold, which they are prevented from +doing by the Portuguese, we might have got abundance; but they +are under such subjection to the Portuguese, that they dare not +trade with others.</p> + +<p>While coasting along on the 11th, we saw a small town about 4 +leagues to the east of that we last came from. About half a +league farther was another town upon a hill, and half a league +beyond that another large town on the coast, to which we went to +try what could be done in the way of trade, meaning, if +unsuccessful, to return to the towns we had left behind, in hopes +that the Portuguese would leave them on our departure. All the +way from the castle of Mina to this place, there were very high +hills to be seen rising above other hills, all covered with wood, +and the coast was lined with great red cliffs close to the sea. +The boats of this coast are larger than those we had seen +hitherto, as one of them could carry 12 men, but they were still +of the same form with all the boats along the coast. About these +towns there seemed few rivers, and their language seemed the same +with that at Don Johns town, every person being able to speak a +few words of Portuguese, which they constantly used to us. About +five o'clock P.M. we saw 22 of the native boats or canoes going +along shore to the westwards, on which we suspected some +treachery; wherefore on the 12th we made sail farther along the +coast eastwards, and descried more towns, in which there were +some larger houses than any we had hitherto seen, and from these +the people came out to look at us, but we could see no boats on +the shore. Two miles beyond the eastermost town there are black +rocks, which continue to the uttermost cape or point of the land +for the space of a league, after which the land runs E.N.E. Some +negroes came down to these black rocks, whence they waved a white +flag for us to land; but as we were near the principal town, we +continued our course along shore, and when we had opened the +point of land we perceived another head-land about a league +farther on, having a rock lying off to sea, which was thought to +be the place of which were in search. On coming abreast of the +town it was recognized, and having anchored within half a mile of +the shore in five fathoms, with good ground, we put wares into +our boat, and went near the shore to endeavour to open trade. +Anchoring close to the shore, about 10 A.M. we saw many canoes on +the beach, and some came past us, but no one would draw near, +being, as we supposed, afraid of us, as four men had been +forcibly taken away from thence the year before. Seeing that no +one came off to us, we went again on board, expecting to make no +sales; but towards evening a great number of people came to the +shore and waved a white flag, as inviting us to land, after which +their chief or captain came down with many men along with him, +and sat down under a tree near the shore. On seeing this I took +some things with me in the boat to present to him, and at length +he sent off a boat to us which would not come near, but made +signs for us to return next day. At length, by offering things +for their captain, I enticed them into our boat, and gave them +two ells of cloth, a latten basin, a white basin, a bottle, a +large piece of beef, and six biscuits, which they received and +made signs for us to come back next day, saying that their chief +was <i>grand captain</i>, which indeed appeared by his numerous +attendants, who were armed with darts, targets, and other +weapons. This town is very large, and stands upon a hill among +trees, so that it cannot well be seen except when one is near. To +the eastwards of it there are two very high trees on a hill close +to the town[27]; and under the town is another and lower hill +washed by the sea, where it is all composed of great black rocks. +Beyond this town there is another considerably smaller on a +bay.</p> + +<p>[252]</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 252: 27 It is added, <i>which is a good +mark to know the town</i>. But at this distance of time, above +250 years, such marks cannot be supposed to +remain.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the morning of the 13th we took our boat and went close to +the shore, where we remained till ten o'clock, but no one came +near us. We prepared therefore to return on board, on seeing +which some negroes came running down and waved us back with a +white flag, so we anchored again and they made us to understand +by signs that the chief would soon come down. In the meantime we +saw a sail pass by us, but being small we regarded it not. As the +sun was high, we made a tilt with our oars and sails. There now +came off to us a canoe with five men, who brought back our +bottle, and gave me a hen, making signs by the sun that within +two hours the merchants of the country would come and buy all we +had. I gave them six <i>manillios</i> to present to their +captain; and as they signified by signs that they would leave a +man with us if we gave them a pledge, we put one of our men into +their boat; but as they would not give us one of their men, we +took back our man again, and remained in expectation of the +merchants. Shortly afterwards there came down one of the natives +to the shore, arrayed like their captain, attended by a numerous +train, who saluted us in a friendly manner, and then sat down +under a tree where the captain used to sit in the former year. +Soon afterwards we perceived a great number of natives standing +at the end of a hollow way, and behind them the Portuguese had +planted a base, which they suddenly discharged, but its ball +overshot us, though we were very near. Before we could ship our +oars to get away, they shot at us again, but did us no harm; the +negroes came to the rocks close beside us, whence they discharged +calivers at us, and the Portuguese shot off their base twice +more. On this our ship made some shots at them, but they were +protected by the rocks and hills.</p> + +<p>We now went on board to leave this place, as the negroes were +bent against us, because in the former year Robert Gainsh had +taken away the captains son from this place, with three others, +and all their gold and every thing else they had about them; +owing to which they had become friends to the Portuguese, whom +they hated before, as appeared in the former year when the +Trinity was there; when the chief came on board and brought them +to his town, trading with them largely, and offering them ground +on which to build a fort[253]. The 14th we plied back to meet the +Hind, which we met in the morning, and then both ships sailed +eastwards to try what could be done at the place where the +Trinity sold her friezes in the preceding year. The day after we +parted, the Hind had taken eighteen and a half ounces of gold +from some negroes in exchange for wares. This day, about one P.M. +we saw some canoes on the coast, with men standing beside them, +and going to them with merchandise, we took three ounces of gold +for eighteen <i>fuffs</i> of cloth, each <i>fuffe</i> being three +and a half yards, at the rate of one angel twelve grains the +<i>fuffe</i>. These people made us understand by signs that if we +waited till next day we might have plenty of gold. For this +reason I sent off the master with the Hind, accompanied by John +Saville and John Makeworth, to seek the other place, while I and +Richard Pakeman remained here to try our fortunes next day. When +the negroes perceived the Hind going away they feared the other +ship would follow, wherefore they sent off four men in two +canoes, asking us to remain, and offering two men to remain with +us, if we would give one as a pledge or hostage for his safety. +Accordingly, one Edward, who was servant to Mr Morley, seeing +them so much in earnest, offered himself as a pledge, and we let +him go for two of them who staid with us, one of whom had his +weights and scales, with a chain of gold about his neck and +another round his arm. These men eat readily of such things as we +had to give them, and seemed quite contented. During the night, +the negroes kept a light on shore over against us; and about one +o'clock, A.M. we saw the flash of a <i>base</i>, which was twice +shot off at the light, and then two <i>calivers</i> were +discharged, which in the end we perceived came from a Portuguese +brigantine that followed us from place to place, to warn the +natives to have no dealings with us.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 253: In the margin, Hakluyt sets down the +voyage of Robert Gainsh to Guinea as in 1554; yet does not +mention where that voyage is to be found, or that it is the same +voyage published in his second edition, under the name of Lok, +instead of Gainsh to whom it was ascribed in his first edition. +All the light we have into the matter from the second edition, is +from a marginal note at the beginning of Loks voyage, in which +Robert Gainsh is said to have been master of the John Evangelist; +neither is there any mention of this villainous transaction in +the relation of that voyage. Such crimes deserve severe +punishment; since a whole community may suffer for the fault of +one bad man.--Astl. I. 160, a.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the morning of the 15th, the negro chief came down to the +coast attended by 100 men, bringing his wife along with him, and +many others brought their wives also, as they meant to remain by +the sea side till they had bought what they wanted, and their +town was eight miles up the country. Immediately on his arrival, +the chief sent our man on board, and offered to come himself if +we would give two of our men in pledge for him. I accordingly +sent him two, but he only retained one, and came on board +accompanied by his wife and several friends, bringing me a goat +and two great roots, for which I gave him in return a latten +basin, a white basin, six <i>manillios</i> and a bottle of +<i>Malmsey</i>, and to his wife a small casket. After this we +began to adjust our measure and weight. He had a weight of his +own, equal to an angel and 14 grains, and required a measure of +4-1/2 ells. In fine we concluded the 8th part[254], for an angel +and 20 grains; and before we had done he took my own weight and +measure. The 16th I took 8 libs. 1 oz. of gold. Since the +departure of the Hind I had not heard of her; but when our pledge +went into the country the first night he said that he saw her at +anchor about 5 leagues from us. The 17th I sold about 17 pieces +of cloth, for which I got 4 libs. 4-1/2 oz. of gold. The 18th the +chief desired to purchase some of our wine, offering half a gold +ducat for a bottle; but I gave him one freely, and made him and +his train drink besides. This day I took 5 libs. 5 oz. of gold. +The 19th I sold about 18 pieces of cloth, and took 4 libs. 4-1/2 +oz. of gold. The 20th 3 libs. 6-1/4 oz; the 21st 8 libs. 7-1/4 +oz; the 22d 3 libs. 8-1/4 oz: And about 4 o'clock this night[255] +the chief and all his people went away. The 23d we were waved on +shore by other negroes, and sold them cloth, caskets, knives, and +a dozen bells, for 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold. The 24th we sold bells, +sheets[256], and thimbles, for 2 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold. The +25th we sold 7 doz. of small bells and other things, and finding +their gold all gone, we weighed and sailed to leewards in search +of the Hind, which we found about 5 o'clock, P.M. and understood +she had made some sales.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 254: The meaning is here obscure; perhaps +the word <i>less</i> is omitted, and the bargain was for a +measure an eighth part less than that originally +proposed.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 255: Perhaps we should rather understand 4 +o'clock next morning?--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 256: Perhaps this ought to be sheers or +scissars?--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 26th we received from the Hind 48 libs. 3-1/8 oz. of gold, +which they had taken while we were asunder; and this day, on the +request of a negro sent us by the chief, we went on shore with +our merchandise and took 7 libs, 1 oz. of gold. At this place +they required no pledges from us, yet sent every night a man to +sleep on board, as an assurance that they would come to us next +day. The 27th in both ships we took 8 libs. 1-7/8 oz. of gold. +The 28th we made sales to the amount of 1 lib. 1/3 oz. for the +company. The 29th in the morning we heard two caliver shots on +shore, which we judged might either be the Portuguese or some of +their negroes, and we accordingly manned our boats, armed +ourselves and our men, and went on shore, but they were gone off. +The 30th we made more sales both for the company and the masters. +The 31st we sent our boats on shore to take in sand for ballast; +and our men met the negroes with whom they had dealt the day +before, who were now employed fishing, and helped them to fill +sand; and having now no gold, sold fish to our men for their +handkerchiefs and neckerchiefs. The 1st of February we weighed +and went to another place, where we took 1 lib. 9 1/3 oz. of +gold. The 2d we made more sales; but on taking a survey of our +provisions, we resolved not to stay much longer on the coast, +most of our drink being spent, and what remained turning sour. +The 3d and 4th we made some sales though not great; and finding +the wind on this last day come off shore, we set sail and went +along the coast to the westwards. Upon this coast, we found by +experience that ordinarily, about 2 o'clock in the night[257] the +wind came off shore from N.N.E., and continued in that direction +till 8 o'clock in the morning, blowing all the rest of the day +and night at S.W. The tide or current on this shore goes +continually with the wind.[258] We continued our course along +shore on the 5th, expecting to have met some English ships, but +found none.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 257: It is hard to say whether this means 2 +hours after sunset, or after midnight--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 258: Apparently running from the east +during the land breeze, and from the west with the sea +breeze--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 6th February 1556, we altered our course S.W. leaving the +coast, to fetch under the line, and ran 24 leagues by estimation. +By the 13th we reckoned ourselves off Cape Palmas, and by the 22d +we were by our reckoning abreast of Cape Mount, 30 leagues west +from the river Sestos or Sestro. The 1st March we lost sight of +the Hind in a tornado; on which we set up a light and fired a +gun, but saw nothing of her, wherefore we struck sail and lay by +for her, and in the morning had sight of her 3 leagues astern. +This day we found ourselves in the latitude of Cape Verd which is +in 14° 30' [14° 50' N.] Continuing our course till the +29th, we were then in 22°, on which day one of our men named +William King died in his sleep, having been long sick. His +clothes were distributed among those of the crew who were in want +of such things, and his money was kept to be delivered to his +friends at home. The 30th we found ourselves under the tropic. On +the 1st April we were in the latitude of the Azores, and on the +7th of May we fell in with the south of Ireland, where we sent +our boat on shore for fresh water, and where we bought two sheep +and such other victuals as we needed from the country people, who +are wild <i>kernes</i>. The 14th of the same month we went into +the port of Bristol called Hungrode[259], where we cast anchor in +safety, giving God thanks for our happy arrival.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 259: Probably that now called +King-road?--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION V.</p> + +<p><i>Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William +Towerson</i>[260].</p> + +<p>On the 14th September 1556, we set sail from Harwich bound for +the coast of Guinea, in the Tiger of London of 120 tons, +directing our coarse for Scilly, where we expected to meet the +Hart of London of 60 tons and a pinnace of 16 tons, both of which +had been fitted out and victualled at Bristol. We arrived at +Scilly on the 28th, and having lain to some time for our consorts +to no purpose, we sailed back to Plymouth on the 12th October. +They there joined us, and we sailed together from that port on +the 15th November.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 260: Hakluyt, II. 496. Astl. I. 162. + +<p>Hitherto we have given these voyages to Guinea at full length, +as they are found in the collection of Hakluyt; but in this and +the subsequent early English voyages to Guinea, we have thought +proper to abbreviate such matters as seemed of small +importance.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>We made the coast of Guinea on the 30th December, where we got +sight of three ships and two pinnaces which were to windward of +us, on which we made ourselves ready for action and gave them +chase, hauling to the wind as near as we could to gain the +weather-gage. At first they made sail from us, but having cleared +for fighting they put about and came towards us in brave order, +their streamers, pennants and ensigns displayed, and trumpets, +sounding. When we met they still had the weather-gage of us, yet +were we firmly determined to have fought them if they had been +Portuguese, and hailed them to come under our lee, which they +stoutly refused. On demanding whence they were, they said from +France; and we then told them we were from London in England. +They then told us there were certain Portuguese ships gone to +Mina to protect that place, and that they had already burnt a +Portuguese ship of 200 tons at the river Sestro. The captain of +the admiral ship and several other Frenchmen came on board of us +in a friendly manner, and proposed that we should join company +because of the Portuguese, and go together to Mina. We told them +that we had not yet watered, having just fallen in with the +coast. They said we were 50 leagues to leeward of Sestro river, +but still water might be had, and they would assist us in +watering with their boats for the sake of our company. They told +us farther that they had been six weeks on the coast, and had +only got 3 tons of grains among them all[261].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 261: These ships were the Espoir of +Harfleur, the admiral, of which Denis Blundel was captain; the +Levriere of Rouen, vice-admiral, commanded by Jerome Baudet; and +a ship of Houfleur, commanded by Jean de +Orleans.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After hearing what they had to say, we considered that even if +Mina were clear of Portuguese ships, yet if the Frenchmen went +before us they would spoil our market: That if there were +Portuguese ships at Mina, and they took the French ships, they +would learn that we were behind, and would wait to take us +likewise: And finally, if we went along with them and found the +coast clear, we would do as well as they; but if the Portuguese +remained on the coast we should be stronger in their company. +Wherefore, having thus considered their friendly offers, we told +them that we would confer more largely of the matter next day; +upon which they invited me to dine with them next day, and to +bring with me the masters of our ships and such merchants as I +thought proper, offering to supply us with water from their own +ships if we would, or else to remain with us and help us to water +with their boats and pinnaces. In the morning of the 31st, the +French admiral sent his boat for me, and I went on board his ship +accompanied by our masters and some of our merchants. He had +provided a noble banquet for us, and treated us excellently, +requesting us to keep him company, promising to part with us what +victuals were in his ship, or any other things that could serve +us, even offering to strike his flag and obey my commands in all +things. Not being able to find water at that place, we set sail +on the 1st January 1557, and anchored off the mouth of a river, +where on the two following days we procured water, and bought a +few small elephants teeth.</p> + +<p>On the 4th of January we landed with 30 men, well armed with +arquebuses, pikes, long-bows, cross-bows, partizans, long swords, +and swords and bucklers, meaning to seek for elephants. We found +two, which we wounded several times with our fire-arms and +arrows, but they both got away from us and hurt one of our men. +We sailed on the 5th, and next day fell in with the river St +Andrew, [in long. 6° 4' W.] The land is somewhat high to the +westward of this river, having a fine bay likewise to the +westward, but to the east the land is low. This is a great river, +having 7 fathoms water in some places at its mouth. On the 7th we +went into the river, where we found no village, and only some +wild negroes not used to trade. Having filled our water casks +here, we set sail to the eastward. On the 10th we had a +conference with Captain Blondel, the admiral of the French ships, +Jerome Baudet his vice-admiral, and Jean de Orleans, master of +the ship of 70 tons. We agreed to traffic in friendly accord, so +as not to hurt each others market, certain persons being +appointed to make a price for the whole, and then one boat from +every ship to make sales on the agreed terms. On the 11th, at a +place called <i>Allow</i>[262], we got only half an angel weight +and 4 grains of gold, which was taken by hand, the natives having +no weights.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 262: Rather Lu how or La hu.--Astl. I 163. +b.--The river called Jack Lahows river, in Long. 4° 14' +W.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the 14th we came within <i>Saker</i> shot of the castle of +Mina, whence an Almadia was sent out to see what we were, but +seeing that we were not Portuguese, she went immediately back to +the large negroe town of <i>Dondou</i> close by the castle. +Without this there lie two great rocks like islands, and the +castle stands on a point resembling an island. At some distance +to the westwards the land for 5 or 6 leagues was high, but for 7 +leagues from thence to the castle the land is low, after which it +becomes high again. The castle of Mina is about 5 leagues east +from Cape Three-points[263]. Here I took the boat with our +negroes, and, went along the coast till I came to the cape, where +I found two small towns having no canoes, neither could we have +any trade. At these places our negroes understood the natives +perfectly, and one of them went on shore at all the places, where +he was well received by his countrymen. At a place called +<i>Bulle</i>, about 3 leagues east from the eastermost point of +Cape Three-points, we learnt from the natives by means of our +negro George, that about a month before there had been an +engagement at this place, in which two ships had put one to +flight; and that some time before, one French ship had put to +flight four Portuguese ships at the castle of Mina.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 263: Mina is in Long. 1° 60', Cape +Three points in 2 40' both west, the difference of Longitude +therefore is about 50 minutes, or nearly 17 +leagues.--E]</blockquote> + +<p>On the 16th we went to a place called <i>Hanta</i>, 12 leagues +beyond the cape, but did no good, as the natives held their gold +too dear. We went thence to <i>Shamma</i>[264], where we landed +with 5 boats well armed with men and ordnance, making a great +noise with our drums and trumpets, suspecting we might have found +Portuguese here, but there were none. We sent our negroes first +on shore, after which we followed and were well received. The +18th we agreed to give the negroes 2 yards and 3 nails of cloth, +as a <i>fuffe</i>, to exchange for an angel-ducat weight; so we +took in all 70 ducats, of which the Frenchmen had 40 and we 30. +The 19th I took 4 libs. 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and the boat of the +Hart had 21 oz. This night we were informed by the negroes that +the Portuguese meant to attack us next day either by sea or land, +and as we were about to return on board we heard several shots in +the woods, but they durst not come near us. The 20th we went on +shore well armed, but heard no more of the Portuguese, and this +day the negroes informed us there were some ships come to +<i>Hanta</i>, a town about 2 leagues to the west. The 21st we +went in our boats to a town a league to the west, where we found +many negroes under another chief, with whom we dealt on the same +terms as at Shamma. The 22d we went again on shore, and I got 1 +lib. 4 oz. of gold. The 23d the negroes told as that the +Portuguese ships had departed from the Mina, intending to ply to +windward and then come down to fight us, giving us warning to be +on our guard. The 24th we went again on shore to trade, and I +invited the chief of the town to dinner. While we were ashore on +the 25th, our ships descried 5 sail of ships belonging to the +king of Portugal, and fired several shots to recall us on board. +So we went to the ships, but by the time that every thing was in +order and we had weighed anchor it was night, so that nothing +could be done. We set sail however and tried all night to gain +the wind of the Portuguese, some of which were very near during +the night. One of them, which we judged was their admiral, fired +a shot, as we supposed to call the others to come and speak with +him. The 26th we came in with the shore, and got sight of the +Portuguese at anchor, on which we made sail towards them, giving +all our men white scarfs, that the French and we might know each +other in case of boarding: But night coming on before we could +fetch the Portuguese, we anchored within demi-culverine shot of +them.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 264: Called Chama in modern maps, near the +mouth of St Johns river, about 6 leagues east from +Mina.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the morning of the 27th, both we and the Portuguese weighed +anchor, and by 11 o'clock, A.M. we had gained the weather-gage, +on which we went room with them[265]: on this they bore away +towards the shore, and we after them, and when they were near +shore they put about again to seawards. We put about likewise, +and gained a head of them, on which we took in our topsails and +waited for them. The first that came up was a small bark, which +sailed so well that she cared not for any of us, and had good +ordnance. As soon as she came up she discharged her guns at us +and shot past with ease, after which she fired at the French +admiral and struck his ship in several places; and as we were in +our fighting sails, she soon got beyond our reach. Then another +caravel came up under our lee, discharging her ordnance at us and +at the French admiral, wounding two of his men and shooting +through his main-mast. After him came up the Portuguese admiral +also under our lee, but was not able to do us so much harm as the +small ships had done, as he carried his ordnance higher than +they; neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them, +because our ship was so weak in the side that she laid all her +ordnance in the sea[266]. We determined therefore to lay the +Portuguese admiral on board; but on making the attempt, the +French admiral fell to leeward and could not fetch him, after +which he fell to leeward of two other caravels, and was unable to +fetch any of them. Being thus to leeward, the French admiral kept +on towards the shore and left us. We hoisted our topsails and +gave chase to the enemy, but both the other French ships kept +their wind and would not come near us, and our own consort was so +much astern that she could not get up to our assistance. When we +had followed them to seaward about two hours, the enemy put about +towards the land, thinking to pay us as they went past, and to +gain the wind of the French admiral which had gone in shore; but +we put about likewise keeping still the weather gage, expecting +our consort and the rest to have followed our example. But when +the Portuguese had passed our consort and the two French ships, +firing as they went along, all of these ships and our own pinnace +continued to seawards, leaving us in the <i>laps</i>, (lurch.) We +continued our course after the enemy, keeping the weather gage, +that we might succour the French admiral who was to leeward of +them all; and on coming up with him, all the enemies ships bore +down and gave him their broadsides, after which they put about +again, but durst not board him as we were still to wind-wind of +them, otherwise they had certainly taken or sunk him. Three of +their smallest vessels were such prime sailors that it was quite +impossible for any of our ships to have boarded them, and they +carried such ordnance that they would have sore troubled any +three of our ships; if they had been able to gain the +weather-gage. Their other ships, the admiral and vice-admiral, +were both notably appointed.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 265: Bore down upon them.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 266: Meaning apparently that she lay too +much over to leeward.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When the French admiral was clear of them, he lay as near the +wind as possible and ran to seaward after the rest, while we +followed the enemy to leeward. Then seeing us alone and in chase, +they put about, which we did likewise to keep the wind of them, +and in this situation we sailed within <i>base</i> shot of them, +but they shot not at us, because we had the weather gage and they +could not therefore harm us. We continued in this course till +night, when we lost sight of them. All the rest of our ships made +to seawards with all the sail they could carry; and, as they +confessed themselves afterwards, they gave us their prayers, and +no other help had we at their hands.</p> + +<p>Next day, the 28th, we rejoined our own consort and pinnace, +and two of the French ships, but the third, which was a ship of +80 tons belonging to Rouen, had fled. I took my skiff and went to +them to know why they, had deserted me. John Kire said his ship +would neither rear nor stear[267]. John Davis said the pinnace +had broke her rudder, so that she could sail no farther, and had +been taken in tow by the Hart. I found the French admiral to be a +man of resolution, but half his crew was sick or dead. The other +Frenchman said his ship could bear no sail, and 16 of his men +were sick or dead, so that he could do nothing. After this the +French ships durst not come to anchor for fear of the +Portuguese.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 267: Meaning perhaps, would neither wear +nor tack?--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 29th, on finding our pinnace incapable of farther use, we +took out her four bases, anchor, and every thing of value, and +set her on fire, after which we ran along the coast. On the 3d +February we anchored about 4 leagues from a town, which we +saluted with two guns, on which the chief came to the shore, to +whom I sent Thomas Rippon who knew him. After some conference, +the chief came off to me; as it was become late, he did not enter +into bargain for any price, but exchanged pledges and, returned +on shore. Next day I went on shore, and though some French ships +had been there and spoiled the market, I took 5-1/2 oz. of gold. +The 5th I took 8-1/2 oz. but could perceive that the negroes +thought the French cloth better and broader than ours; wherefore +I told Captain Blundel that I would go to leeward, as where he +was I should do no good. The 6th there came an Almadie or canoe +to us with some negroes, inviting me to their town, where they +had plenty of gold and many merchants. I did so, but could do no +good that night, as the merchants were not come from the +interior. On the 7th our negro George came to us, having followed +us at least 30 leagues in a small canoe, and soon after his +arrival we settled the terms of dealing with the natives. George +had been left in Shamma at the time of the fight, which he saw +from the shore, and told us that the Portuguese had gone +afterwards into that river, when they said that two of their men +had been slain by a shot, which was from our ship. This day I +took 5 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold; the 8th 19 libs. 3-1/2 oz.; the +9th 2 libs. 6-1/2 oz.; the 10th 3 libs. The 11th. Jerome Baudet, +the French vice-admiral, came to us in his pinnace, saying that +they could do no good where they were, and that he meant to go to +the eastwards: But we told him this could not be allowed, and +desired him to return to his comrades, which he refused; till we +shot three or four pieces at his pinnace; on which his ship put +about and ran out to sea followed by the pinnace. This day I took +1 lib. 5 oz.</p> + +<p>The 12th one of the French pinnaces came with cloth, but we +would not allow them to trade, and made them remain all day close +to our ship. This day we took 5 lib. 6-1/2 oz. The 17th we went +to another town, where we understood that three of the Portuguese +ships were at the castle, and the other two at Shamma. Though the +Portuguese were so near that they might have been with us in +three hours, we yet resolved to remain and make sales if we +could. The chief of this town was absent at the principal town of +the district visiting the king, but came soon back with a weight +and measure. The 18th some of the kings servants came to us, and +we took 1 lib. 2-1/8 oz. of gold. The 19th we took 5 libs. 1 oz. +the 20th 1 lib. 4 oz; the 21st 4 libs. 1 oz; the 22d 3-1/2 +oz.</p> + +<p>Having sent one of our merchants with a present to the king, +he returned on the 23d, saying that he had been received in a +friendly manner by <i>Abaan</i>, who had little gold but promised +if we would stay that he would send all over his country in +search of gold for us, and desired our people to request our king +to send men to his country to build a fort, and to bring tailors +with them to make them apparel, and to send good wares and we +should be sure to sell them; but that the French had for the +present filled the market with cloth. This town where the king +Abaan resides, is about 4 leagues up the country, and in the +opinion of our people who were there is as large in circumference +as London, though all built like those we had already seen. +Around the town there was great abundance of the wheat of the +country, insomuch that on one side of it they saw 1000 ricks of +wheat and of another sort of grain called <i>mill</i> or millet, +which is much used in Spain. All round this town there is kept a +good nightly watch, and across all the roads or paths they have +cords stretched and connected with certain bells; so that if any +one touch the cords the bells, immediately ring to alarm the +watchmen, on which they run out to see what is the matter. In +case of any enemies, they have nets suspended over the paths +ready to let fall and entangle them. It is impossible to get to +the town except by the regular paths, as it is every where +environed with trees and thick underwood; besides which the town +is surrounded by a fence of sedge bound with thick ropes made of +the bark of trees[268].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 268: It is hard to discover what place this +was. Perhaps it was <i>Great Commendo</i> or <i>Guaffo</i>, which +stands on a river that runs by the town of the <i>Mina</i>, and +is still the residence of a negro king; in which case the port +they put in at might have been little <i>Commendo.</i> But the +royal city is very far from being as large as London was in 1556, +not having above 400 houses. The contrivance for apprizing the +watchmen of the approach of an enemy, and for taking them +prisoners, seems a notable invention of our countrymen; for +surely an enemy might easily destroy these net-traps to catch +soldiers, these pack-thread fortifications.--Astl. 1. 167. +a.]</blockquote> + +<p>As in this country it is necessary to travel in the night to +avoid the heat of the day, our men came to the town about five in +the morning. About nine the king sent for them, as no one must go +to him unless sent for, and they proposed carrying their present, +but were told they must be brought before him three times, before +their gift could be offered. They then waited upon him and were +graciously received. And having been sent for three several +times, they carried their present the last time, which was +thankfully accepted; and calling for a pot of Palm wine, the king +made them drink. Before drinking they use the following +ceremonies: On bringing out the pot of wine, a hole is made in +the ground into which a small quantity of the wine is poured, +after which the hole is filled up, and the pot set on the place. +Then with a small cup made of a gourd shell, they take out a +little of the wine, which is poured on the ground in three +several places. They set up likewise some branches of the Palm +tree in different parts of the ground, where they shed some of +the wine, doing reverence to the palms. All these ceremonies +being gone through, the king took a gold cup full of wine which +he drank off, all the people calling out Abaan! Abaan! together +with certain words, as is usual in Flanders on twelfth night, +<i>the king drinks.</i> When he had drank, then the wine was +served round to every one, and the king allowed them to depart. +Then every one bowed three times, waving his hands, and so +departed. The king has usually sitting beside him, eight or ten +old men with grey beards.</p> + +<p>On the 23d we took 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold; the 24th 3 lib. 7 +oz.; the 25th 3-1/4 oz.; the 26th 2 libs. 10 oz.; the 27th 2 +libs. 5 oz.; the 28th 4 libs. Then seeing that there was no more +gold to be had, we weighed anchor and continued along the coast. +The 1st of March we came to a town called <i>Moure</i>, where we +found neither boats nor people; but when about to depart there +came some people to us in two canoes from another town, from whom +we took 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and who told us that the inhabitants +had removed from Mowre to <i>Lagoua.</i>[269]. The 2d we were +abreast the castle of Mina, where we saw all the five Portuguese +ships at anchor, and by night we were off Shamma or Chama, where +we meant to water. But next day we saw a tall ship of about 200 +tons to windward within two leagues, and then two more astern of +her, one a ship of 500 tons or more and the other a pinnace. Upon +this we weighed anchor, and made a shirt to stand out to sea, the +wind being S.S.W., but the Hart fell three leagues to leeward of +us. These ships chased us from 9 A.M. till 5 P.M. but could not +make up with us. At night, when we joined the Hart, on asking why +she fell to leeward, they pretended that they durst not make sail +to windward, lest they had carried away their fore-top-mast. +Having been thus obliged to abandon our watering-place, we were +under the necessity of boiling our meat-in sea-water, and to +reduce our allowance of drink to make it hold out, as we now +shaped our course homewards.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 269: Mowree is 4-1/2 leagues east from the +castle of Minas, and Lagoua or Laguy is 9 leagues east from the +same place.--Astl. I. 168. a.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the 16th of March we fell in with the land, which I judged +to be Cape Misurado, about which there is much high land. The +18th we lost sight of the Hart, and I think the master wilfully +went in shore on purpose to lose us, being offended that I had +reproved him for his folly when chased by the Portuguese. The +27th we fell in with two small islands about 6 leagues off Cape +Sierra Leona; and before we saw them we reckoned ourselves at +least 30 or 40 leagues from them. Therefore all who sail this way +must allow for the current which sets N.N.W. or they will be much +deceived. The 14th April we met two large Portuguese ships, which +we supposed were bound to Calicut. The 23d we saw a French ship +of 90 tons to windward of us, which came down upon us as if to +lay us on board, sending up some of his men in armour into the +tops, and calling out to us to strike. Upon this we saluted him +with some cross-bars, chain-shot, and arrows, so thick that we +made their upper works fly about their ears, and tore his ship so +miserably, that he fell astern and made sail. Our trumpeter was a +Frenchman, at this time ill in bed; yet he blew his trumpet till +he could sound no more, and so died. The 29th we arrived at +Plymouth, and gave thanks to God for our safety.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI.</p> + +<p><i>Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea, in +1558</i>[270].</p> + +<p>On the 30th of January of the above year, we set sail from +Plymouth with three ships and a pinnace, bound by the grace of +God for the Canaries and the coast of Guinea. Our ships were the +Minion, admiral; the Christopher, vice-admiral; the Tiger, and a +pinnace called the Unicorn. Next day we fell in with two +hulks[271] of Dantziek, one called the Rose of 400 tons, and the +other the Unicorn of 150, both laden at Bourdeaux, mostly with +wine. We caused them to hoist out their boats and come on board, +when we examined them separately as to what goods they had on +board belonging to Frenchmen[272]. At first they denied having +any; but by their contradictory stories, we suspected the +falsehood of their charter parties, and ordered them to produce +their bills of lading. They denied having any, but we sent +certain persons to the place where they were hid, and thus +confronted their falsehood. At length they confessed that there +were 32 tons and a hogshead of wine in the Unicorn belonging to a +Frenchman, and 128 tons in the Rose belonging to the, same +person; but insisted that all the rest was laden by Peter Lewgues +of Hamburgh, and consigned to Henry Summer of Campvere. After a +long consultation, considering that to capture or detain them +might lose our voyage, already too late, we agreed that each of +our ships should take out as much as they could stow for +necessaries, and that we should consider next morning what was +farther to be done. We accordingly took out many tuns of wine, +some aquavitae, cordage, rosin, and other things, giving them the +rest of the Frenchmans wines to pay for what we had taken of +their own, and took a certificate under their hands of the +quantity of French goods they had confessed to, and then allowed +them to continue their voyage.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 270: Hakluyt, II. 504. Astley, I. 169.--In +the last London edition of Hakluyt, 1810, it is dated erroneously +in 1577, but we learn from the editor of Astley's Collection that +in the edition 1589, it is dated in 1557. Yet, notwithstanding +that authority, we may be assured that the date of this voyage +could not have been earlier than January 1558, as Towerson did +not return from his former voyage till the 29th of April +1557.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 271: Probably meaning large unwieldy +ships.--E]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 272: It is to be noted, that at this time +there was war between England and France.--This observation is a +side note of Hakluyt: And it may be worth while to notice that, +so early as 1557, free bottoms were not considered by the English +as making free goods.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 10th January we had sight of the grand Canary, and on the +12th we anchored in the road, a league from the town, where we +were well received. We went to the town with two English +merchants who resided there, and remained that day at their +house. The second day following we returned on board to get our +pinnace repaired, which had broken her rudder, and to deliver our +merchandize. The 14th there came nineteen sail of Spanish ships +into the road, bound for the West Indies, six of them being of +400 or 500 tons each, and the rest of 200, 150, and 100 tons. On +coming to anchor they saluted us, which we returned. The Spanish +admiral, who was a knight, sent a boat for me, and received me in +a friendly manner, desiring to learn the news of England and +Flanders. After partaking of a banquet, I departed; and when I +was in the boat, he desired my interpreter to say that he +expected I should strike my flag to him, as general of the +Emperors fleet. When I was come on board my own ship this was +told me by the interpreter, and as I refused compliance and +continued to display my ensign, some Spanish soldiers began to +discharge their arquebusses at us. At this time some Spanish +gentlemen came on board to see our ship, to whom I said that if +they did not order their men to cease firing, I would fire my +cannon through their ships. They accordingly went away and made +their soldiers give over firing, and coming back said that they +had punished their men. I then shewed them our ship, and gave +them such cheer as I had, which they were well pleased with. Next +day they sent for me to dine with them, saying their general was +sorry any one should have desired me to strike my flag, which had +been done without his orders.</p> + +<p>The 17th we set sail, and got sight of the coast of Africa, +and running along shore came off Rio del Oro which is almost +under the tropic of Cancer. The 25th we got sight of the land in +the bay to the north of Cape Verd[273]. The 26th taking our +interpreter Francisco and Francis Castelin along with me in the +pinnace, I went to the Tiger, which was nearer shore than the +other ships. With her and the other ships we ran W. by S. and +W.S.W, till about 4 o'clock, P.M. when we were close on board the +cape. Then going about 4 leagues beyond the cape S.W. we found a +fair island, and beside that two or three islands of high rocks, +full of various kinds of sea fowl and pigeons, with other kinds +of land birds, and so numerous that the whole island was covered +with their dung, and as white as if the whole had been covered by +chalk. Within these islands was a fine bay; and close by the +rocks we had 18 fathoms and good ground[274]. The 27th, as no +negroes came to us, we went along shore in the pinnace, and going +beyond the point of the bay (Cape Emanuel) we found a fair island +(<i>Goree</i>) with a goodly bay, and saw some negroes on the +main who waved us on shore. Going a-land, they told us that they +had elephants teeth, musk[275], and hides for traffic; but as the +captain of the Christopher was not willing to stop, we went on +board and made sail, On inquiry, some of the negroes said there +had been no ships there for 8 months, others said six, and some +only four, and that they were French ships.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 273: The bay of Yof, in lat. 15° N. +long. 17° 20' W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 274: Obviously the Bird isles, which are +4-1/2 leagues E.S.E. from Cape Verd, not W.S.W. as in the +text.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 275: What is here called musk must have +either been civet or ambergris.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 10th of March we fell in with the coast of Guinea, 5 +leagues east of Cape <i>Monte</i>, beside a river called Rio das +Palmas. At this place I got 19 elephants teeth, and 2 1/2oz. of +gold. The 13th we came to Rio Sestro, and next day sent our boats +for water, and delivered such wares to the Christopher and Tiger +as they needed. The 15th we sent the Tiger to another river for +water, and to try what she could do for grains. We here learnt +that three French ships had been at this river two months before, +two six weeks ago, and one only a fortnight past, all of which +had gone eastwards to the Mina. Getting few grains, and many of +our men falling sick at this unwholesome place, and considering +that the French ships were before us, we left the Rio Sestro on +the 19th, and made all sail for the Mina[276]. The 21st we came +to Rio de Potos, where our boats went for water, and where I got +12 small elephants teeth. The 31st we came to <i>Hanta</i>, where +I sold some <i>Manillios</i>.</p> + +<p>On the 1st of April we had sight of 5 Portuguese ships, on +which we stood out to sea to gain the wind of them, which we had +done if the wind had kept its ordinary course at S.W. and W.S.W. +but this day it kept with a <i>flow</i> always at E. and E.S.E. +so that they had the wind of us and chased us to leeward till +near night, when all but one that sailed badly were within shot +of us. It then fell calm, and the wind came round to S.W. at +which time the Christopher was about 4 leagues to leeward of us. +We tacked in the Minion, and gained the wind of the Portuguese +admiral and other three of his ships; when he cast about and +fired at us, which we returned, shooting him four or five times +through. Several of their shots went through our sails, but none +of our men were hurt. The Christopher was still to leeward, +though the Tiger and the pinnace had joined us; but as it was +night we did not think it adviseable to lay him on board; +wherefore, after firing two hours or more, we three stood out to +sea, and fired a gun to give notice to the Christopher. We joined +the Christopher on the 2d, which had exchanged shots with the +Portuguese the night before about midnight, and we agreed to seek +the Portuguese, keeping however to windward of the place where we +meant to trade. We accordingly ran all day on the 3d to the S.W. +in search of the Portuguese ships, but could not see them, and +stood towards the shore at night. When we made the shore on the +4th, we found ourselves off Lagua, 30 leagues to the eastwards of +our reckoning, owing to the currents setting east. Going on shore +with our negro interpreter, we learned that there were four +French ships on the coast: One at <i>Perinnen</i>, 6 leagues west +of Lagua; one at <i>Weamba[277]</i>, 4 leagues east of Lagua; a +third at <i>Perecow[278]</i>, 4 leagues east of Weamba; and the +fourth at <i>Egrand[279]</i>, 4 leagues east of Perecow. We +accordingly proceeded toward Weamba, where we saw one of the +French ships under sail to which we gave chase; and lest we +should over-shoot her in the night, the Minion was brought to +anchor, and the Tiger and Christopher followed the chase all +night.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 276: The Mina is here to be considered as +the gold coast of Guinea, called Mina or the mines on account of +its great produce in gold dust. The castle of St George del Mina, +is usually called in these early voyages <i>the +castle.</i>--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 277: Or Wiamba, where the English had +afterwards a fort.--Astl. I. 172. d.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 278: This seems to have been little +Barakhow, or Berow.--Astl. I. 172. c.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 279: Probably Akkara, where the English, +Dutch, and Danes had afterwards separate forts--Astl. 1.172. +d.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 5th we found three French ships at anchor: One called +<i>La Foi</i> of Harfleur of 200 tons, the second the +<i>Venturuse</i> of Harfleur of 100, and third the <i>Mulet de +Batville</i> of Rouen of 120 tons. On nearing them, we in the +Minion were determined to lay the admiral on board, while the +Christopher boarded the vice-admiral, and the Tiger the smallest. +But they weighed and got under sail, on which the Christopher, +being our headmost ship, bore down on La Foi, and we in the +Minion on the Mulet, which we took; but the Venturuse sailed so +swift that we could not take her. The one we took was the richest +except the admiral, which had taken 80 libs, of gold, the +Venturuse having only 22 libs.; while our prise had 50. They had +been above two months on the coast; but three others had been +there before them, and had departed a month before our arrival, +having swept the coast of 700 pounds of gold. Having continued +the chase all that day and night, and the next day till 3 P.M. +and being unable to get up with them, we were afraid of falling +too far to leewards, and made sail back to the shore. On the 7th, +I convened the captains masters and merchants of all our three +ships, when we weighed the gold taken in the prize, being 50 +libs. 5 oz., after which we put men out of all our ships into the +prize to keep her. On the 12th, on coming to <i>Egrand</i>, +having taken all the goods out of the prize, we offered to sell +the ship to the Frenchmen; but she was so leaky that they would +not have her, and begged us to save their lives by taking them +into our ships. So we agreed to take out all the victuals and +sink the ship, dividing the men among us.</p> + +<p>On the 15th, it was proposed to proceed to Benin, but most of +our people refused; wherefore it was agreed to remain as long as +we could on the coast of Mina, leaving the Minion at Egrand, +sending the Tiger to Perecow 4 leagues, west, and the Christopher +to Weamba 10 leagues west, with directions in case of seeing any +force they were unable to cope with, to come to leewards to us in +the Minion at Egrand. We remained here till the last of April, by +which time many of our men fell sick and six of them died, and we +could only trade with the natives three or four days of the week, +as on the other days they could not come off to us. The 3d May, +as the pinnace had not come to us with cloth from the other +ships, as promised, we sold French cloth, giving only three yards +for every <i>fuffe</i>. The 5th the negroes left us, saying they +would be back in four days. The 8th all our own cloth being sold, +I called the people together, to ask them whether they chose to +remain till the prize cloth was all sold. They answered, that as +several of our men were dead, and twenty now sick, they would not +tarry, but desired that we should repair to the other two ships. +On the 10th we accordingly sailed in quest of the other ships, +meaning to try what we could do at Don Johns town. The 11th we +joined the Christopher, which had done little. The 13th the Tiger +was sent down to Egrand, as we found no trade worth while at +Perinnen. The 14th the pinnace was sent with cloth to Weamba, +where she had before got 10 libs. of gold.</p> + +<p>The 21st we anchored before Don Johns town; and on the 22d we +manned our boats and went close in shore, but the negroes would +not come to us. The 24th our pinnace came to us from Cormantine, +where they had taken 2 libs. 5 oz. of gold. The 25th the master +of the Christopher sent his boat on shore at Mowre for ballast, +when the negroes attempted to drive them off with stones; but our +men slew and hurt several of them, then burnt their town and +stove all their canoes. The 27th we went to Cormantine, where we +were joined next day by the Christopher. The 2d June the Tiger +came to us from Egrand and the pinnace from Weamba, the two +having procured 50 libs. of gold. The 4th we made sail and plied +to windward for Chama, not being able to remain longer for want +of victuals, and especially as our drink ran short. The 7th we +saw five Portuguese ships at anchor beside the castle. The 8th +George and Binny came off to us, and brought about 2 libs. of +gold. The 21st we put 25 Frenchmen into our pinnace with such +victuals as we could spare, and sent them away. The 25th we put +to sea on our homeward voyage. The 30th we fell in again with the +land, 18 leagues to leeward of the place whence we had taken our +departure, having been deceived by the current which sets +continually towards the east. The 7th July we fell in with the +island of San Thome [280], where we wished to come to anchor; but +the wind coming about we again made sail. From that time till the +13th we were tossed about by baffling winds, and that day fell in +again with San Thome.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 280: They must have fallen far to leeward, +as San Thome is to the east of the Bight of Benin, almost 8 +degrees or 160 leagues to the east of St George del +Mina.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This is a very high island, and being on the west side of it, +we had sight of a very high small and upright peak, like the +steeple of a church, which peak is directly under the equator, +and to the westward of the south end of the island there is a +small islet about a mile from the larger one. The 3d of August we +set sail from San Thome with the wind at S.W. The 22d we fell in +with the island of <i>Salt</i>, one of the Cape Verds; and being +told by a Scotsman whom we had taken among the French on the +coast of Guinea, that there were fresh provisions to be had at +this place, we came to anchor. The 24th we went on shore, where +we found no houses, and only saw four men who would not come near +us. We found plenty of goats, but so wild that we could only take +three or four of them; but we got plenty of fish, and great +quantities of sea-fowl on a small isle close to the larger one. +At night the Christopher broke her cable and lost an anchor, so +that we were all obliged to weigh and put to sea. On this +occasion the Scotsman was left on shore, by what means we could +not tell, unless that he had been found asleep by the inhabitants +and carried off-prisoner.</p> + +<p>The 25th the master of the Tiger came on board, and reported +his ship to be in so leaky a condition and his men so weak, that +he was unable to keep her afloat, and requested therefore that we +would return to the island to take every thing out of her, that +she might be abandoned: This day on mustering the companies of +all the three ships, we had not above 30 sound men +altogether[281]. The 25th we had sight of St Nicholas, and the +day following of St Lucia, St Vincent, and St Anthony, four of +the Cape Verd islands, which range with each other from N.W. by +W. to S. E by E. The 26th we were unable to weather the Cape of +St Anthony, and this day Philip Jones the master of the +Christopher came on board and reported that they were not able to +keep the Tiger from sinking as she was so leaky, and the master +and crew were very weak. The 3d September I went on board the +Tiger, accompanied by the masters and merchants to survey her, +and we found her in a very leaky condition with only six men fit +for duty, one of whom was master gunner. It was agreed +accordingly to take all the men into the other ships, with all +the goods we could save, and then to abandon her. We began +discharging her on the 5th, and having taken out her guns, +victuals, gold, and every thing we could by the 8th, we set her +adrift in lat. 25° N.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 281: At this place Hakluyt observes in a +note, the great inconvenience of staying late on the coast of +Guinea. He ought rather to have said, the impropriety of sailing +too late for that coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the 6th October, the ships companies both of the Minion and +Christopher being very weak, so as to be scarce able to keep the +sea, we agreed to make for Vigo, which is frequented by many +English ships; but having a fair wind for England on the 10th, we +fired two shots to give notice to the Christopher of our +intention, and immediately shaped our course homewards. She +followed us, and we carried a light to direct her way; but it was +so thick next morning that we could not see her, and as she was +not seen all that day we concluded she had either shot ahead of +us in the night or had bore up for Spain, for which reason we +hoisted our top-sails and continued our course, being then 120 +leagues from England and 45 leagues N.W. by W. from Cape +Finister, having then only six mariners and six merchants in +health. The 16th we had a great storm at W.S.W. by W. which came +on about 6 P.M. and our men being very weak and unable to hand +our sails, we that night lost our mainsail, foresail, and +spritsail, and were obliged to <i>lie hulling</i> till the 18th, +when we got up an old foresail; and finding ourselves now in the +Channel, we bore up for the coast of England. In less than two +hours the old foresail was blown from the yard by a spurt of +wind, and we were again forced to lie to till the morning of the +19th, when we got up an old bonnet, or topsail, on the fore-yard, +which by the blessing of God brought us to the Isle of Wight in +the afternoon of the 20th.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p><i>Commodities most in request in Guinea, between Sierra Leone +and the farthest extremity of the Mine or Gold +Coast[282].</i></p> + +<pre> + MANILS of brass, and some of lead. + Basins of various sorts, but chiefly of latten. + Pots holding a quart or more, of coarse tin. + Some wedges of iron. + Margarites, and other low priced beads. + Some blue coral. + Some horse nails. + Linen cloth, principally. + Basins of Flanders. + Some low priced red cloth, and kersies. + Dutch kettles with brass handles. + Some large engraved brass basins, like those usually set upon. + their cupboards in Flanders. + Some large pewter basins and ewers, graven. + Some lavers for holding water. + Large low priced knives. + Slight Flemish caskets. + Low priced Rouen chests, or any other chests. + Large pins. + Coarse French coverlets. + Good store of packing sheets. +</pre> + +<p>Swords, daggers, prize-mantles and gowns, cloaks, hats, red +cans, Spanish blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of iron, +slight bells, low priced gloves, leather bags, and any other +trifling articles you will.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 282: This list is appended in Hakluyt's +Collection, II.513. to the present voyage, and is therefore here +retained, though several of the articles are scarcely +intelligible.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION VII.</p> + +<p><i>Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in +1561[283].</i></p> + +<p>In 1561, a voyage was projected to Guinea by Sir William +Gerard, knight, in conjunction with Messrs William Hunter, +Benjamin Gonson, Anthony Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Only one +ship, the Minion, was to have gone, and seems to have been +intended to assist and bring home the Primrose and Flower de +Luce, then on the coast. The command of the Minion was to have +been given to John Lok, probably the same person who made the +Guinea voyage in 1554, already inserted. The adventurers sent the +following articles of instruction to Mr Lok, dated 8th September +1561. But Lok declined undertaking the voyage for the following +reasons, dated Bristol, 11th December 1561. 1. The Minion was so +spent and rotten, as to be incapable of being put into a fit and +safe condition for the voyage. 2. The season was too far gone to +perform the voyage in safety. 3. He understood that four large +Portuguese ships were in readiness to intercept him. 4. It was +quite uncertain that he should meet the Primrose, which would +have completed her voyage before he could get to the coast, or +would have been obliged to quit the coast by that time for want +of provisions. It will be seen in the succeeding section, that +the Minion actually proceeded on her voyage; on the 25th February +1562, and the unsuccessful events of that voyage fully justify +the refusal of Lok.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 283: Hakluyt, II. 514. Astl I. 176.--As +this voyage did not take place, it is principally inserted here +for the sake of the instructions devised by the adventurers, for +the conduct of the intended expedition--E.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p><i>Remembrance for Mr Lok, at his Arrival on the Coast of +Guinea.</i></p> + +<p>When God shall bring you upon the coast of Guinea, you are to +make yourself acquainted, as you proceed along the coast, with +all its rivers, havens and harbours or roadsteads, making a plat +or chart of the same, in which you are to insert every place that +you think material, all in their true elevations. You will also +diligently inquire what are the commodities to be procured it the +several places you visit, and what wares are best calculated for +their markets.</p> + +<p>As it is believed that a fort on the coast of Mina or the Gold +Coast of Guinea, in the King of <i>Habaan's</i> country, might be +extremely useful, you are especially desired to consider where +such a fort could be best placed, in which you will carefully +note the following circumstances.</p> + +<p>1. That the situation be adjoining to the sea on one side, so +that ships and boats may conveniently load and unload--2. What is +the nature of the soil in its neighbourhood?--3. What wood or +timber may be had, and in what manner it may be carried?--4. What +victuals are to be procured in the country, and what kinds of our +victuals are best calculated for keeping there?--5. The place +must be strong by nature, or capable of being made strong at +small expence, and of being afterwards defended by a small number +of men.--6. How water is to be procured, if none is to be had on +the ground where the fort is to stand, or at least near it?--7. +What help may be expected from the natives, either in building +the fort, or in defending it afterwards?</p> + +<p>You are to sound the King of Habaan at a distance as to the +erection of a fort in his country, taking notice how he relishes +the proposal; yet you will so manage your communication with him +that he may not understand your meaning, although there may seem +good cause for its erection.</p> + +<p>You will search the country as far as you can, both along the +coast and into the interior. You will likewise use your +endeavours to learn what became of the merchants who were left at +Benin. In all other important matters worthy of notice, we have +no doubt that you will diligently inquire and report to us, which +we leave to your good discretion. We also request, that you will +aid and assist our factors on all occasions, both with your +advice and otherwise; and thus God send you safely to return.</p> + +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William +Rutter</i>[284].</p> + +<p>This relation is said by Hakluyt to have been written by +<i>one</i> William Rutter, to his master Anthony Hickman, being +an account of a voyage to Guinea in 1562, fitted out by Sir +William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Thomas Lodge, Anthony +Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Three of these are named in the +preceding section as adventurers in the voyage proposed to have +gone under John Lok, and two of those former adventurers are here +omitted, while two others seem now to have supplied their places, +yet it appears to have been the same adventure, as the Minion was +the ship employed, notwithstanding the unfavourable report made +of her by Lok. But it would appear that the Primrose was likewise +of this voyage, as this relation is contained in a letter from +Rutter to his master, dated on board the Primrose, 16th of August +1563.--E.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 284: Hakluyt, II. 516. Astley, I. +177.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Worshipful Sir,--My duty remembered, this shall serve to +inform you of our voyage, since our departure from Dartmouth on +the 25th February 1562, of which I then gave you notice. Having +prosperous wind, we arrived at Cape Verd on the 20th of March, +whence we sailed along the coast, to our first appointed port at +Rio de Sestos, where we arrived on the morning of the 3d April. +We here saw a French ship, which immediately made sail to +leeward, and we came to anchor in the road. While we merchants +were on shore engaged in traffic, the French ship returned and +hailed [<i>saluted</i>] our ship with his ordnance. We were +informed by the negroes that the Frenchman had been trading there +for three days before our arrival, and we concluded, if he sent +his boat on shore again for trade, that we would not suffer him +till we had conferred with his captain and merchants. Accordingly +his pinnace came on shore in the afternoon, but we desired them +not to trade till we had spoken with their captain and merchants, +whom we desired might come that night on board our admiral for +that purpose. They did so accordingly, when Mr Burton and John +Munt went on board the Minion, where the Frenchmen were, and it +was determined that they should wait eight days beside us, +allowing us to trade quietly the while. They were much +dissatisfied with this arrangement, and sailed next morning +eastwards to the Rio de Potos, on purpose to hinder our trade on +the coast.</p> + +<p>In consequence of this the merchants, both of the Minion and +our ship, determined to go on before them, understanding that no +other ships had gone that way before this season, and that our +trade might not be interrupted by the French ship. We did so +accordingly, and found the Frenchman trading to the westward at +Rio de Potos, on which we passed them, and came to Rio de Potos +on the 12th of April, where we remained trading till the 15th, +when we departed with the Primrose for the river St Andrew, where +we agreed to wait for the Minion. We arrived at that river on the +17th, and the Minion came to us that same day, saying that they +had met with a great ship and a caravel, belonging to the king of +Portugal, off cape Palmas, bound for the Mina, which had chased +them, and shot many guns at them, which the Minion had returned +in her defence. God be praised the Minion had no harm at that +time. We then concluded to hasten to cape Three-points, to +endeavour to intercept them on their way to the castle. We lay to +off the cape for two days and a night, and suspecting they were +past, the Minion went in shore and sent her boats to a place +called <i>Anta</i>, where we had formerly traded. Next morning, +the 21st of April, we again saw the ship and caravel to seaward, +when we immediately made sail, endeavouring to get between them +and the castle, but to our great grief they got to the castle +before us, when they shot freely at us and we at them, but as +they had the aid of the castle against us we profited little.</p> + +<p>We set sail in the afternoon, and came to the town of Don +Juan, called <i>Equi</i>, where, on the morning of the 22d, we +went ashore to trade: But the negroes refused till they should +hear from Don Luis the son of Don Juan, who was now dead. On the +23d Don Luis and Pacheco came to Equi, intending to trade with +us; but two gallies came rowing along shore from the castle of +Mina, meaning to interrupt our trade. We made sail on the 24th, +and chased the gallies back to the castle, at which the negroes +were much pleased; but they desired us to proceed to +<i>Mowre</i>, about three leagues farther on, where they promised +to follow us, being in fear of the Portuguese. We did so, and +remained there waiting for the merchants who were coming with +gold from the country, but Antonio, the son of Don Luis, and +Pacheco were on board the Minion. In the morning of the 25th the +two gallies came again from the castle, the weather being very +calm, and shot at us, hitting us three times. Shortly after the +land-wind sprung up, at which time we observed the great ship and +the caravel making towards us, on which we weighed and made sail +to attack them; but it was night before we could get up with +them, and we lost sight of them in the night. While returning +towards the coast next night we agreed to proceed to Cormantin; +and next morning, the 28th, we found ourselves very near the +large ship and the two gallies, the caravel being close in-shore. +It being very calm, the two gallies rowed towards the stern of +the Minion, and fought with her most part of the forenoon. During +the engagement a barrel of powder blew up in the steward room of +the Minion, by which misfortune the master-gunner, the steward, +and most of the gunners were sore hurt. On perceiving this, the +gallies became more fierce, and with one shot cut half through +the Minions foremast, so that she could bear no sail till that +were repaired. Soon after this, the great ship sent her boat to +the gallies, which suddenly withdrew.</p> + +<p>After their departure we went on board the Minion to consult +what was best to be done: As the Minion was sore discomfited by +the accident, and as we knew the negroes durst not trade with us +so long as the gallies were upon the coast, it was agreed to +return to the Rio Sestos. In the morning of the 14th of May we +fell in with the land, and being uncertain whereabout we were, +the boats were sent on shore to learn the truth, when it was +found to be the Rio Barbas. We remained there taking in water +till the 21st, and lost five of our men by the Hack pinnace +over-setting. Departing on the 22d, we came to the Rio Sestos on +the 2d of June. We again set sail on the 4th, and arrived this +day, the 6th of August, within sight of the Start Point in the +west of England, for which God be praised. We are very side and +weak, not having above twenty men in both ships, able for duty. +Of our men 21 have died, and many more are sore hurt or sick. Mr +Burton has been sick for six weeks, and is now so very weak that, +unless God strengthen him, I fear he will hardly escape. Your +worship will find inclosed an abstract of all the goods we have +sold, and also of what commodities we have received for them; +reserving all things else till our meeting, and to the bearer of +this letter.</p> + +<p>In this voyage there were brought home, in 1563, 166 elephants +teeth, weighing 1758 libs, and 22 buts full of grains, or Guinea +pepper.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX.</p> + +<p><i>Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage</i> [285]</p> + +<p>An account of the preceding voyage to Guinea in 1563, of which +this section is an abstract, was written in verse by Robert +Baker, who appears to have been one of the factors employed by +the adventurers. It is said to have been written in prison in +France, where he had been carried on his subsequent voyage, which +forms the subject of the next section, and was composed at the +importunity of his fellow traveller and fellow-prisoner, Mr +George Gage, the son of Sir Edward Gage. Of this voyage he +relates nothing material, except a conflict which happened with +the negroes at a certain river, the name of which is not +mentioned; neither does the foregoing relation by Rutter give any +light into the matter. But from the circumstance of the ship +commencing her return for England immediately after this +adventure, it must have happened at the river Sestos or Sestre, +which was the last place they touched at, and where they staid +three days, as stated both in this and the proceeding +narratives.--Astl. I. 179.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 285: Astley, I. 179. Hakluyt, II. +518.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the versified relation, which is to be found at large in +the last edition of Hakluyts Collection, London, 1810, Vol. II. +p.518-523, he complains of being detained in a French prison, +against all law and right, as the war between England and France +was concluded by a peace. The account given of this conflict with +the negroes is to the following effect--E.</p> + +<p>One day while the ship was at anchor on the coast of Guinea, +Baker ordered out the small pinnace or boat, with nine men well +armed, to go on shore to traffic. At length, having entered a +river, he saw a great number of negroes, whose captain came to +him stark naked, sitting in a canoe made of a log, <i>like a +trough to feed hogs in</i>. Stopping, at some distance, the negro +chief put water on his cheek, not caring to trust himself nearer +till Baker did the like. This signal of friendship being +answered, and some tempting merchandize being shewn him, the +chief came forward and intimated by signs, that he would stand +their friend if some of these things were given him. He was +gratified, and many things given to others of the natives. After +trading all day with the negroes, Baker returned at night to the +ship, carrying the chief along with him, where he clothed him and +treated him kindly. In return the chief promised by signs to +freight them in a day or two. While on board, Baker observed that +the chief took much notice of the boat which was left astern, of +the ship loaded with goods; yet not suspecting he had any ill +design, no farther care or precaution was taken of the boat.</p> + +<p>Next morning the chief was carried on shore, and trade or +barter went on with the negroes as on the day before; and at the +return of Baker to the ship, the boat was fastened to the stern, +and the goods left in her as usual. In the night the negro +captain came with two or three canoes, and was noticed by the +watch to be very busy about the boat. On giving the alarm, the +negroes fled; but on hoisting up the boat, all the goods were +carried of. Vexed at being so tricked, the English went next +morning up the river to the negro town, in order to recover their +goods; but all their signs were to no purpose, as the negroes +would neither understand them nor acknowledge the theft. On the +contrary, as if wronged by the charge, and resolved to revenge +the affront, they followed the English down the river in 100 +canoes, while as many appeared farther down ready to intercept +their passage. In each canoe were two men armed with targets and +darts, most of which had long strings to draw them back again +after they were thrown.</p> + +<p>Being hard pressed, they discharged their arquebuses upon the +negroes, who leapt into the water to avoid the shot. The English +then rowed with all their might to get to sea; but the negroes +getting again into their canoes, pursued and overtook them. Then +drawing near, poured in their darts with accurate aim. The +English kept them off with their pikes and halberts, and many of +the negroes being slain or wounded by the English arrows and +hail-shot from the arquebuses, they retreated. But when the +English had expended all their arrows, the negroes came on again, +and made many attempts to board the boat. The negro chief, who +was a large tall man, advanced in his canoe under cover of his +target, with a poisoned dart in his hand, in order to board; and +as he pressed forward, the masters-mate thrust a pike through his +target and throat, which dispatched him. While the mate was +striving to disengage his pike, which stuck fast in the shield, +he was wounded by a dart; yet drew the dart from his flesh and +killed with it the negro who had wounded him. The enemy continued +the fight closer than ever, and did great mischief with their +darts, which made wide and grievous wounds. The gunner received +two desperate wounds, and lost a great deal of blood, and the +brave masters-mate, while standing firmly in his post, was struck +through the ribs by a dart, on pulling out which his bowels +followed, and he fell down dead. On perceiving this, the negroes +gave a great shout, and pressed to enter the boat where the mate +had stood, imagining as so many of the English were wounded they +would now soon yield. But four of those remaining in the pinnace +kept them off with their pikes, while the other four at the oars +made the best of their way to sea.</p> + +<p>At length they got out of the river, and the negroes retired +having expended all their darts. This was fortunate for the +English, as six of the remaining eight were desperately wounded, +one of whom was Robert Baker, the author of this narrative, and +only two remained who were able to handle the oars, so that they +made very slow progress to the ship, which appears to have been +four leagues from the shore. When they got on board they were all +so faint that none of them were able to stand. After having their +wounds dressed they refreshed themselves; but as Robert Baker had +more occasion for rest than food he went to bed, and when he +awoke in the morning the ship was under sail for England.</p> + +<p>SECTION X.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker</i>[286]</p> + +<p>This relation, like the former, is written in verse, and only +contains a description of two adventures that happened in the +voyage, one of which proved extremely calamitous to those +concerned in it, among whom was the author. From the title or +preamble, we learn that the adventurers in this voyage were Sir +William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Sir Thomas Lodge, Benjamin +Gonson, William Winter, Lionel Ducket, Anthony Hickman, and +Edward Castelin. There were two ships employed, one called the +John Baptist, of which Lawrence Rondell was master, and the other +the Merlin, Robert Revell master. The factors were Robert Baker, +the author, Justinian Goodwine, James Gliedell, and George Gage. +They set out on their voyage in November 1563, bound for Guinea +and the river Sestos, but the port whence they fitted out is +nowhere mentioned. After the unlucky disaster that befel him in +Guinea in the year before, Baker had made a kind of poetical vow +not to go near that country any more; but after his return to +England, and recovery from his wounds, he soon forgot past +sorrows; and being invited to undertake the voyage in quality of +factor, he consented.--Astley.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 286: Astley I. 180. Hakluyt, II. 523-531. +The prose abstract here inserted is chiefly taken from Astleys +collection, carefully compared with the original versified +narrative in Hakluyt.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After we had been at sea two days and a night, the man from +the main-top descried a sail or two, the tallest of which they +immediately made up to, judging her to be the most valuable; and, +as captains are in use to do[287], I hailed her to know whence +she was. She answered from France, on which we <i>waved</i> her, +but she nothing dismayed, <i>waved</i> us in return. I +immediately ordered armed men aloft into the main and fore-tops, +and caused powder to be laid on the poop to blow up the enemy if +they should board us that way. At the sound of trumpets we began +the fight, discharging both chain and bar-shot from our brazen +artillery; while the Frenchmen, flourishing their swords from the +main-yard, called out to us to board their ship. Willing to +accept their invitation, we plied them warmly with our cannon, +and poured in flights of arrows, while our arquebuses plied them +from loop-holes, and we endeavoured to set their sails on fire by +means of arrows and pikes carrying wildfire. I encouraged, the +men to board, by handing spiced wine liberally among them, which +they did with lime-pots, after breaking their nets with stones, +while those of our men who were aloft entered the enemys tops, +after killing those who defended them. Then cutting the ropes, +they brought down the yard by the board, and those who entered +the ship plied the enemy so well with their swords, that at +length the remaining Frenchmen ran below deck and cried out for +quarter. Having thus become masters of the ship, we carried her +to the <i>Groin</i> in Spain, or Corunna, where we sold the ship +and cargo for ready money.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 287: In these early trading voyages, the +chief factor, who here appears to have been Baker, seems to have +had the supreme command--Astl. I. 180. b.]</blockquote> + +<p>After this we proceeded on our voyage and arrived in Guinea. +One day about noon, I went with eight more in a boat towards the +shore to trade, meaning to dispatch my business and be back +before night. But when we had got near the shore, a furious +tempest sprung up, accompanied with rain and thunder, which drove +the ships from their anchors out to sea; while we in the boat +were forced to run along the coast in search of some place for +shelter from the storm, but meeting none, had to remain all night +near the shore, exposed to the thunder, rain, and wind in great +jeopardy. We learnt afterwards that the ships returned next day +in search of us, while we rowed forward along the coast, +supposing the ships were before us, and always anxiously looked +out for them; but the mist was so great that we could never see +them nor they us. The ships continued, as we were told +afterwards, looking out for us for two or three days; after +which, concluding that we had inevitably perished in the storm, +they made the best of their way for England.</p> + +<p>Having been three days in great distress for want of food, we +at length landed on the coast and exchanged some of our wares +with the negroes for roots and such other provisions as they had, +and then put to sea again in search of the ships, which we still +supposed were before us or to leeward, wherefore we went down the +coast to the eastwards. We continued in this manner ranging along +shore for twelve days, seeing nothing but thick woods and +deserts, full of wild beasts, which often appeared and came in +crowds at sunset to the sea shore, where they lay down or played +on the sand, sometimes plunging into the water to cool +themselves. At any other time it would have been diverting to see +how archly the elephants would fill their trucks with water, +which they spouted out upon the rest. Besides deer, wild boars, +and antelopes, we saw many other wild beasts, such as I had never +seen before.</p> + +<p>We often saw a man or two on the shore, who on seeing us used +to come off in their almadias or canoes; when casting anchor we +offered such wares as we had in the boat for fish and fresh +water, or provisions of their cooking, and in this way we +procured from them roots and the fruit of the palm tree, and some +of their wine, which is the juice of a tree and is of the colour +of whey. Sometimes we got wild honeycombs; and by means of these +and other things we relieved our hunger; but nothing could +relieve our grief, fatigue and want of sleep, and we were so sore +depressed by the dreadful situation in which we were placed, that +we were ready to die, and were reduced to extreme weakness. +Having lost all hope of rejoining the ships, which we now +concluded were either lost or gone homewards, we knew not how to +conduct ourselves. We were in a strange and distant country, +inhabited by a people whose manners and customs were entirely +different from ours; and to attempt getting home in an open boat +destitute of every necessary was utterly impossible. By this time +we found we had passed to leeward of <i>Melegete</i> or the grain +coast, and had got to the Mina or gold coast of Guinea, as the +negroes who now came on board spoke some Portuguese, and brought +off their weights and scales for the purpose of trade, asking +where were our ships. To this we answered, in hopes of being the +better treated, that we had two ships at sea, which would be with +them in a day or two.</p> + +<p>We now consulted together how they should best proceed. If we +continued at sea in our boat, exposed by day to the burning heat +of the sun which sensibly consumed us by copious perspiration, +and to the frequent tornadoes or hurricanes by night, accompanied +with thunder, lightning and rain; which deprived us of all rest, +we could not possibly long hold out. We were often three days +without a morsel of food; and having sat for twenty days +continually in our boat, we were in danger of losing the use of +our limbs for want of exercise, and our joints were so swollen by +the scurvy, that we could hardly stand upright. It was not +possible for us to remain much longer in the boat in our present +condition, so that it was necessary to come to some resolution, +and we had only three things to choose. The first was to repair +to the castle of St George del Mina, which was not far off, and +give ourselves up to the Portuguese who were Christians, if we +durst trust them or expect the more humanity on that account. +Even the worst that could happen to us from them was to be hanged +out of our misery; yet possibly they might have some mercy on us, +as nine young men such as we were might be serviceable in their +gallies, and if made galley slaves for life we should have +victuals enough to enable us to tug at the oar, whereas now we +had both to row and starve.</p> + +<p>The next alternative was to throw ourselves upon the mercy of +the negroes, which I stated was very hopeless and discouraging, +as I did not see what favour could be expected from a beastly +savage people, whose condition was worse than that of slaves, and +who possibly might be cannibals. It was likewise difficult for us +to conform ourselves to their customs, so opposite to ours; and, +we could not be expected, having always lived on animal food, to +confine ourselves to roots and herbs like the negroes, which are +the food of wild beasts. Besides, having been always accustomed +to the use of clothes, we could not for shame go naked. Even if +we could get the better of that prejudice, our bodies would be +grievously tormented and emaciated by the scorching heat of the +sun, for want of that covering and defence to which we had been +accustomed. The only other course was to stay at sea in the boat, +and die miserably. Being determined to run any risk at land, +rather than to continue pent up in a narrow boat, exposed to all +the inclemencies of the weather day and night, and liable to be +famished for want of victuals, I gave it as my opinion that we +had better place confidence in the Christian Portuguese than in +the negroes who lived like so many brutes. We how determined to +throw ourselves on the mercy of the Portuguese, and hoisting sail +shaped our course for the castle of St George del Mina; which was +not above 20 leagues distant. We went on all day without stopping +till late at night, when we perceived a light on shore. +Concluding that this might be a place of trade, our boatswain +proposed to cast anchor at this place, in hopes that we might be +able to procure provisions next morning in exchange for some of +our wares. This was agreed upon, and on going next morning near +the shore we saw a watchhouse upon a rock, in the place whence +the light had proceeded during the night, and near the watchhouse +a large black cross was erected. This made us doubtful whereabout +we were, and on looking farther we perceived a castle which +perplexed us still more[288].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 288: It appears in the sequel that this +fort or castle had been recently erected by the Portuguese at the +western point or head-land of Cape Three-points, and of which +there are no notices in any of the preceding voyages on this part +of the coast.--Astley, I. 132, a.]</blockquote> + +<p>Our doubts were quickly solved by the appearance of some +Portuguese, one of whom held a white flag in his hand which he +waved as inviting us to come on shore. Though we were actually +bound in quest of the Portuguese, yet our hearts now failed us, +and we tacked about to make from the shore. On being seen from +the castle, a gun was fired at us by a negro, the ball from which +fell within a yard of our boat. At length we turned towards the +shore to which we rowed, meaning to yield ourselves up; but to +our great surprise, the nearer we came to the shore the more did +the Portuguese fire at us; and though the bullets fell thick +about us we continued to advance till we got close under the +castle wall, when we were out of danger from their cannon. We now +determined to land in order to try the courtesy of the +Portuguese, but were presently assailed by showers of stones from +the castle: wall, and saw a number of negroes marching down to +the beach with their darts and targets, some of them having bows +and poisoned arrows. Their attack was very furious, partly from +heavy stones falling into the boat which threatened to break +holes in her bottom, as well as from flights of arrows which came +whizzing about our ears, and even wounded some of us: Therefore +being in desperation, we pushed off from the shore to return to +sea, setting four of our men to row, while the other five +determined to repay some part of the civility we had received, +and immediately handled our fire-arms and bows. We employed these +at first against the negroes on the beach, some of whom soon +dropped; and then against the Portuguese who stood on the walls +dressed in long white-shirts and linstocks in their hands, many +of which were dyed red by means of the English arrows. We thus +maintained our ground a long while, fighting at our leisure, +regardless of the threats of the enemy, as we saw they had no +gallies to send out to make us prisoners. When we had +sufficiently revenged their want of hospitality, we rowed off, +and though we knew that we must pass through another storm of +bullets from the castle, we escaped without damage.</p> + +<p>When we got out to sea, we saw three negroes rowing after us +in an almadia, who came to inquire to what country we belonged, +speaking good Portuguese. We told them we were Englishmen, and +said we had brought wares to trade with them if they had not used +us so ill. As the negroes inquired where our ship was, we said we +had two at sea well equipped, which would soon come to the coast +to trade for gold, and that we only waited their return. The +negroes then pretended to be sorry for what had happened, and +intreated us to remain where we were for that day, and promised +to bring us whatever we were in want of. But placing no +confidence in their words, we asked what place that was, and +being answered that it was a Portuguese castle at the western +head-land of Cape Three-points, we hoisted sail and put to sea, +to look out for some more friendly place.</p> + +<p>We now resolved to have no more reliance on the kindness of +the Portuguese, of which we had thus sufficient experience, and +to make trial of the hospitality of the negroes; for which +purpose we sailed back about 30 leagues along the coast, and +coming to anchor, some natives came off to the boat, to all of +whom we gave presents. By this we won their hearts, and the news +of such generous strangers being on the coast soon brought the +kings son to our boat. On his arrival, I explained our sad case +to him as well as I could by signs, endeavouring to make him +understand that we were quite forlorn, having been abandoned by +our ships, and being almost famished for want of food, offering +him all the goods in our boat if he would take us under his +protection and relieve our great distress. The negro chief was +moved even to tears, and bid us be comforted. He went then on +shore to know his fathers pleasure regarding us, and returning +presently invited us to land. This was joyful news to us all, and +we considered him as a bountiful benefactor raised up to us by +the goodness of Providence. We accordingly fell to our oars in +all haste to pull on shore, where at least 500 negroes were +waiting our arrival; but on coming near shore the surf ran so +high that the boat overset, on which the negroes plunged +immediately into the water and brought us all safe on shore. They +even preserved the boat and all that was in her, some swimming +after the oars, and others diving for the goods that had sunk. +After this they hauled the boat on shore and brought every thing +that belonged to us, not daring to detain the most trifling +article, so much were they in awe of the kings son, who was a +stout and valiant man, and having many excellent endowments.</p> + +<p>They now brought us such provisions as they used themselves, +and being very hungry we fed heartily, the negroes all the while +staring at us with much astonishment, as the common people are +used to do in England at strange outlandish creatures. +Notwithstanding all this apparent humanity and kindness, we were +still under great apprehensions of the negroes, all of whom were +armed with darts. That night we lay upon the ground among the +negroes, but never once closed our eyes, tearing they might kill +us while asleep. Yet we received no hurt from them, and for two +days fared well; but finding the ships did not come for us, as +they expected would soon have been the case, when likewise they +looked to have had a large quantity of goods distributed among +them in reward for their hospitality, they soon became weary of +us; and after lessening our allowance from day to day, they at +length left us to shift for ourselves. In this forlorn state, we +had to range about the woods in search of fruits and roots, which +last we had to dig from the ground with our fingers for want of +any instruments. Hunger had quite abated the nicety of our +palates, and we were glad to feed on every thing we could find +that was eatable. Necessity soon reconciled us to going naked, +for our clothes becoming rotten with our sweat fell from our +backs by degrees, so that at length we had scarcely rags left to +cover our nakedness. We were not only forced to provide ourselves +in food, but had to find fuel and utensils to dress it. We made a +pot of clay dried in the sun, in which we boiled our roots, and +roasted the berries in the embers, feasting every evening on +these varieties. At night we slept on the bare ground, making a +great fire round us to scare away the wild beasts.</p> + +<p>What with the entire change in our manner of living, and the +heat and unhealthiness of the climate, our people sickened apace; +and in a short time our original number of nine was reduced to +three. To those who died it was a release from misery, but we who +remained were rendered more forlorn and helpless than before. At +length, when we had abandoned all hopes of relief, a French ship +arrived on the coast, which took us on board and carried us to +France, which was then at war with England, where we were +detained prisoners.</p> + +<pre> + A prisner therefore I remaine, + And hence I cannot slip + Till that my ransome be + Agreed upon and paid: + Which being levied yet so hie, + No agreement can be made. + And such is lo my chance, + The meane time to abide; + A prisner for ransome in France, + Till God send time and tide. + From whence this idle rime + To England I do send: + And thus, till I have further time, + This tragedie I end. +</pre> + +<p>SECTION XI.</p> + +<p><i>A Voyage to Guinea, in 1564:, by Captain David +Carlet</i>[289].</p> + +<p>At a meeting of merchant adventurers, held at the house of Sir +William Gerard, on the 11th July 1564, for setting forth a voyage +to Guinea, the following chief adventurers were present, Sir +William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Sir Thomas Lodge, Anthony +Hickman, and John Castelin. It was then agreed that Francis +Ashbie should be sent to Deptford for his letters to Peter Pet, +to go about rigging of the Minion at the charges of the queens +majesty, after which Francis Ashbie was to repair with these +letters to Gillingham, with money to supply our charges +there.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 289: Hakluyt, II. 531. Astley, I. +134.]</blockquote> + +<p>It was also agreed that every one of the five partners shall +forthwith call upon their partners to supply, towards this new +rigging and victualling L.29, 10s. 6d., for every L.100 value. +Also that every one of the five partners shall forthwith bring in +L.50, towards the furniture of the premises. Likewise, if Mr +Gonson give his consent that the Merlin shall be brought round +from Bristol to Hampton, that a letter shall be drawn under his +hand, before order be given in the same.</p> + +<p>The ships employed in this voyage were, the Minion belonging +to the queen, David Carlet, captain, the John Baptist of London, +and the Merlin belonging to Mr Gonson. The success of this voyage +in part appears by certain brief relations extracted out of the +second voyage of Sir John Hawkins to the West Indies, made in the +year 1564, which I have thought good to set down for want of more +direct information, which hitherto I have not been able to +procure notwithstanding every possible endeavour[290].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 290: This is the substance of Hakluyt's +introduction to the following brief relation of the present +voyage.--E.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Sir John, then only Mr Hawkins, departed from Plymouth with a +prosperous wind for the West Indies, on the 18th of October 1564, +having under his command the Jesus of Lubec of 700 tons, the +Salomon of 140 tons, a bark named the Tiger of 50 tons, and a +pinnace called the Swallow of 30 tons, having in all 170 men, +well supplied with ordnance and provisions for such a voyage. +While casting loose the foresail, one of the officers in the +Jesus was killed by the fall of a block, giving a sorrowful +beginning to the expedition. After getting ten leagues out to +sea, they fell in with the Minion, a ship belonging to the queen, +of which David Carlet was captain, and her consort the John +Baptist of London; which two ships were bound for Guinea. The two +squadrons, as they may be called, saluted each other with some +pieces of ordnance, after the custom of the sea; after which the +Minion parted company to seek her other consort the Merlin of +London, which was out of sight astern, leaving the John Baptist +in company with Hawkins.</p> + +<p>Continuing their voyage with a prosperous wind until the 21st, +a great storm arose at N.E. about 9 o'clock at night, which +continued 23 hours, in which storm Hawkins lost sight of the John +Baptist and of his pinnace called the Swallow, the other three +ships being sore tossed by the tempest. To his great joy the +Swallow joined company again in the night, 10 leagues to the +north of Cape Finister, having been obliged to go <i>roomer</i>, +as she was unable to weather that cape against a strong contrary +wind at S.W. On the 25th, the wind still continuing contrary, he +put into Ferol in Galicia, where he remained five days, and gave +out proper instructions to the masters of the other ships for +keeping company during the rest of the voyage.</p> + +<p>On the 26th of the month the Minion came into Ferol, on which +Mr Hawkins saluted her with some guns, according to the custom of +the sea, as a welcome for her safe arrival: But the people of the +Minion were not in the humour of rejoicing, on account of the +misfortune which had happened to their consort the Merlin, whom +they had gone to seek on the coast of England when they parted +from Mr Hawkins. Having met with her, they kept company for two +days; when, by the negligence of one of the gunners of the +Merlin, the powder in her gun-room took fire, by which her stern +was blown out and three of her men lost, besides many sore hurt, +who saved their lives in consequence of their brigantine being at +her stern; for the Merlin immediately sunk, to the heavy loss of +the owners and great grief of the beholders.</p> + +<p>On the 30th of the month, Mr Hawkins and his ships, together +with the Minion and her remaining consort the John Baptist, set +sail in the prosecution of their voyage with a prosperous gale, +the Minion having both brigantines at her stern. The 4th of +November they had sight of Madeira, and the 6th of Tenerife, +which they thought to have been grand Canary, as they reckoned +themselves to the east of Tenerife, but were not. The Minion and +her consort, being 3 or 4 leagues a head of the ships of Mr +Hawkins, kept the course for Tenerife, of which they had a better +view than the other ships, and by that means they parted +company.</p> + +<p>Hawkins and his ships continued his voyage by Cape Verd and +Sierra Leone, after which he crossed the Atlantic ocean and came +to the town of Burboroata on the coast of the Terra Firma in the +West Indies, or South America; where he afterwards received +information of the unfortunate issue of the Guinea voyage, in the +following manner. While at anchor in the outer road on the 29th +of April 1565, a French ship came in called the Green Dragon of +Newhaven, of which one Bon-temps was captain, which saluted the +English squadron after the custom of the sea, and was saluted in +return. This ship had been at the Mina, or Gold coast of Guinea, +whence she had been driven off by the Portuguese gallies, and +obliged to make for the Terra Firma to endeavour to sell her +wares. She informed that the Minion had been treated in the same +manner; and that the captain, David Carlet, with a merchant or +factor and twelve mariners, had been treacherously made prisoners +by the negroes on their arrival on that coast, and remained in +the hands of the Portuguese; besides which they had lost others +of their men through the want of <i>fresh water</i>, and were in +great doubts of being able to get home the ships[291].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 291: Hakluyt might have said whether they +did come home or not, which he certainly might have known; but he +often leaves us in the dark as to such matters.--Astl. I. 185. +a.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p><i>Note</i>.--It may not be improper to state in this place, +that no ship need be reduced to utter distress for want of +<i>fresh water</i> at sea; as distilled sea water is perfectly +fresh and wholesome. For this purpose, all ships bound on voyages +of any length, ought to have a still head worm and cooler adapted +to the cooking kettle, to be used when needed, by which abundance +of fresh water may always be secured while cooking the ships +provisions, sufficient to preserve the lives of the crew. In +default of that useful appendage, a still may be easily +constructed for the occasion, by means of the pitch kettle, a +reversed tea kettle for a head, and a gun barrel fixed to the +spout of the tea kettle, the breach pin being screwed out, and +the barrel either soldered to the spout, or fixed by a paste of +flour, soap and water, tied round with rags and twine. The tea +kettle and gun barrel are to be kept continually wet by means of +swabs and sea water, to cool and condense the steam. This +distilled water is at first vapid and nauseous, both to the taste +and the stomach; but by standing open for some time, especially +if agitated in contact with air, or by pumping air through it, as +is commonly done to sweeten putrid water, this unpleasant and +nauseous vapidness is soon removed.</p> + +<p>The nautical world owes this excellent discovery, of distilled +sea water being perfectly fresh, to the late excellent and +ingenious Dr James Lino, first physician to the general hospital +of the navy at Haslar near Portsmouth during the American war, +the author of two admirable works, on the Scurvy, and the Means +of Preserving the Health of Seamen during long voyages, to which +the British navy, and seamen in general, owe inestimable +advantages. The editor, while giving this useful hint to seamen +engaged on long voyages, is happy in having an opportunity of +bearing this feeble testimony of honourable respect to the friend +of his youth, under whom he had the happiness and advantage of +serving, in that magnificent asylum of the brave defenders of the +glory and prosperity of our king and country, for the last three +years of the American war. Besides being an eminent and +experienced physician, Dr Lind was a man of exemplary humanity, +and of uncommon urbanity and singleness of manners: He was truly +the seaman's friend. The rules and expedients which he devised +and proposed, founded on the solid basis, of observation and +experience, for Preserving the Health of Seamen on long voyages, +were afterwards employed and perfected by the great navigator and +discoverer COOK, and by his pupils and followers; and are now +universally established in our glorious navy, to the incalculable +advantage of the service.</p> + +<p>In high northern or southern latitudes, solid clear ice melted +affords good fresh water, the first runnings being thrown away as +contaminated by adhering sea water. White cellular ice is quite +unfit for the purpose, being strongly impregnated with salt. In +future articles of our work, several opportunities will occur in +which these two expedients for supplying ships with fresh water +will be amply detailed. But on the present opportunity, it seemed +proper to mention these easy and effectual expedients for +preserving the health and lives of seamen, when in want of fresh +water by the ordinary means.--Ed.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII.</p> + +<p><i>A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566, by +George Fenner</i>[292]</p> + +<p>Three ships were employed on this voyage, the admiral, called +the Castle of Comfort, George Fenner general[293] of the +expedition, and William Bats master; the May-Flower, +vice-admiral, William Courtise master; the George, John Heiwood +captain, and John Smith of Hampton master; besides a small +pinnace. Walter Wren, the writer of the narrative, belonged to +the George.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 292: Hakluyt, II. 533. Astley, I. +185.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 293: This general was probably head +factor--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We departed from Plymouth on the 10th December 1566, and were +abreast of Ushant on the 12th. On the 15th we got sight of Cape +Finister, and lost company of our admiral that night, for which +reason we sailed along the coast of Portugal, hoping our admiral +might be before us. Meeting a French ship on the 18th and getting +no intelligence of our admiral, we made sail for the Canaries, +and fell in with the island of Tenerife on the 28th, where we +came to anchor in a small bay, at which there were three or four +small houses, about a league from the town of Santa Cruz. In this +island there is a marvellous high hill called the Peak, and +although it is in lat. 28° N. where the air is as warm in +January as it is in England at midsummer, the top of this hill, +to which no man has ever been known to ascend, is seldom free +from snow even in the middle of summer. On the 3d January 1567, +we departed from this place, going round the western point of the +island, about 12 or 14 leagues from Santa Cruz, and came into a +bay right over against the house of one Pedro de Souza, where we +came to anchor on the 5th, and heard that our admiral had been +there at anchor seven days before us, and had gone thence to the +island of Gomera, to which place we followed him, and coming to +anchor on the 6th over against the town of Gomera, we found our +admiral at anchor to our great mutual satisfaction. We found here +Edward Cooke in a tall ship, and a ship of the coppersmiths of +London, which had been treacherously seized by the Portuguese in +the bay of Santa Cruz on the coast of Barbary, or Morocco, which +ship we left there all spoiled. At this place we bought 14 buts +of wine for sea stores, at 15 ducats a but, which had been +offered to us at Santa Cruz for 8, 9, or 10 ducats. The 9th we +went to another bay about three leagues off, where we took in +fresh water; and on the 10th we sailed for Cape Blanco on the +coast of Africa.</p> + +<p>The 12th we came to a bay to eastwards of Cape Pargos, +(<i>Barbas?</i>) which is 35 leagues from Cape Blanco, but being +unacquainted with that part of the coast, we proceeded to Cape +Blanco, off which we had 16 fathoms two leagues from shore, the +land being very low and all white sand. At this place it is +necessary to beware of going too near shore, as when in 12 or 10 +fathoms you may be aground within two or three casts of the lead. +Directing our course on the 17th S. and S. by E. we fell into a +bay about 16 leagues east of Cape Verd, where the land seemed +like a great number of ships under sail, owing to its being +composed of a great number of hummocks, some high some low, with +high trees upon them. When within three leagues of the land we +sounded and had 28 fathoms over a ground of black ouze. This day +we saw much fish in sundry <i>sculs</i> or shoals, swimming with +their noses at the surface. Passing along this coast we saw two +small round hills about a league from the other, forming a cape, +and between them great store of trees, and in all our sailing we +never saw such high land as these two hills. The 19th we came to +anchor at the cape in a road, fast by the western side of two +hills[294], where we rode in 10 fathoms, though we might safely +have gone into five or six fathoms, as the ground is good and the +wind always blows from the shore.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 294: The paps of Cape Verd are about a +League S.S.E. from the extreme west point of the +Cape.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>At this place some of our officers and merchants went on shore +with the boat unarmed, to the number of about 20 persons, among +whom were Mr George Fenner the general, his brother Edward +Fenner, Thomas Valentine, John Worme, and Francis Leigh, +merchants, John Haward, William Bats, Nicholas Day, John Thomson, +and several others. At their coming on shore they were met by +above 100 negroes armed with bows and arrows. After some talk +pledges were interchanged, five of the English being delivered +into their hands, and three negroes taken on board the admirals +skiff. Our people mentioned the merchandize they had brought, +being linen and woolen cloth, iron, cheese, and other articles; +on which the negroes said that they had civet, musk, gold, and +grains to give in exchange, with which our people were well +pleased. The negroes desired to see our merchandize, on which one +of the boats was sent back to the ships, while our general and +merchants remained in the other with the three negroe pledges, +our five men walking about on shore among the negroes. On the +return of the boat from the ship with goods, bread, wine, and +cheese were distributed among the natives. At this time two of +the negroe pledges, on pretence of sickness, were allowed to go +on shore, promising to send two others in their stead. On +perceiving this, Captain Haiward began to dread some perfidy, and +retreated towards the boat, followed by two or three negroes, who +stopped him from going on board, and made signs for him to bring +them more bread and wine, and when he would have stepped into the +boat, one of them caught him by the breeches, but he sprung from +him and leapt into the boat. As soon as he was in, one of the +negroes on shore began to blow a pipe, on which the negroe pledge +who remained in the boat, suddenly drew Mr Wormes sword, cast +himself into the sea and swam on shore. The negroes immediately +laid hands on our men that were on shore, and seized three of +them with great violence, tore their clothes from their backs, +and left them nothing to cover them. Then many of them shot so +thick at our men in the boats that they could scarcely handle +their oars, yet by God's help they got the boats away, though +many of them were hurt by the poisoned arrows. This poison is +incurable, if the arrow pierce the skin so as to draw blood, +except the poison be immediately sucked out, or the part hurt be +cut out forthwith; otherwise the wounded man inevitably dies in +four days. Within three hours after any part of the body is hurt, +or even slightly pricked, although it be the little toe, the +poison reaches the heart, and affects the stomach with excessive +vomiting, so that the person can take neither meat nor drink.</p> + +<p>The persons seized in this treacherous manner by the negroes +were Nicholas Day, William Bats, and John Thomson, who were led +away to a town about a mile from the shore. The 20th we sent a +boat on shore with eight persons, among whom was the +before-mentioned John Thomson[295] and our interpreter, who was a +Frenchman, as one of the negroes spoke good French. They carried +with them two arquebuses, two targets, and a <i>mantell?</i> and +were directed to learn what ransom the negroes demanded for Bats +and Day whom they detained. On coming to the shore and telling +the negroes the nature of their errand, Bats and Day were brought +from among some trees quite loose, but surrounded by some 40 or +50 negroes. When within a stone's throw of the beach, Bats broke +suddenly from them and ran as fast as he could into the sea +towards the boat; but immediately on getting into the water he +fell, so that the negroes retook him, violently tearing off his +clothes. After this some of the negroes carried our two men back +to the town, while the rest began to shoot at our people in the +boat with their poisoned arrows, and wounded one of our men in +the small of the leg, who had nearly died in spite of every thing +our surgeons could do for him. Notwithstanding this unjustifiable +conduct, our general sent another message to the negroes, +offering any terms they pleased to demand as ransom for our men. +But they gave for answer, that three weeks before we came an +English ship had forcibly carried off three of their people, and +unless we brought or sent them back we should not have our men, +though we gave our three ships and all their lading. On the 21st +a French ship, of 80 tons came to the place where we were, +intending to trade with the negroes, and seeing that the +Frenchmen were well received by the natives, our general told +them of our two men being detained, and wished them to endeavour +to procure their release, promising L.100 to the Frenchmen if +they succeeded. We then committed this affair to the management +of the Frenchmen, and departed. Of our men who were hurt by the +poisoned arrows, four died, and one had to have his arm cut off +to save his life. Andrews, who was last hurt, lay long lame and +unable to help himself, and only two recovered.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 295: It is not said how he had got away +from the negroes.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>While between Cape Verd and Bonavista on the 26th, we saw many +flying fishes of the size of herrings, two of which fell into the +boat which we towed at our stern. The 28th we fell in with +Bonavista, one of the Cape de Verd islands, which is 86 leagues +from that cape. The north side of that island is full of white +sandy hills and dales, being somewhat high land. That day we came +to anchor about a league within the western point, in ten fathoms +upon fine sand, but it is quite safe to go nearer in five or six +fathoms, as the ground is every where good. The 30th we went into +a bay within a small island about a league from our first +anchorage, where we took plenty of various kinds of fish. Whoever +means to anchor in this bay may safely do so in four or five +fathoms off the south point of the small island; but must beware +of the middle of the bay, where there is a ledge of rocks on +which the sea breaks at low water, although then they are covered +by three fathoms water. The last day of January, our general went +on shore in the bay to some houses, where he found twelve +Portuguese, the whole island not having more than 30 inhabitants, +who were all banished men, some condemned to more years of exile +and some to less, and among them was a simple man who was their +captain. They live on goat's flesh, cocks and hens, with fresh +water, having no other food except fish, which they do not care +for, neither indeed have they any boats wherewith to catch them. +They told us that this island had been granted by the king of +Portugal to one of his gentlemen, who had let it at 100 ducats of +yearly rent, which was paid by the profit on goats skins, of +which 40,000 had been sent from that island to Portugal in one +year. These men made us very welcome, entertaining us as well as +they could, giving us the carcasses of as many he-goats as we +pleased, and even aided us in taking them, bringing them down for +us from the mountains on their asses. They have great store of +oil procured from tortoises, which are <i>fishes</i> that swim in +the sea, having shells on their backs as large as targets. It +only rains in this island for three months in every year, from +the middle of July to the middle of October; and the climate is +always very hot. Cows have been brought here, but owing to the +heat and drought they always died.</p> + +<p>We left Bonavista, or Buenavista, on the 3d February, and fell +in the same day with another island called Mayo, 14 leagues +distant; there being a danger midway between the two islands, but +it is always seen and easily avoided. We anchored in a fine bay +on the N.W. side of Mayo, in eight fathoms on a good sandy +bottom; but weighed next day and went to another island called St +Jago, about five leagues E. by S. from Mayo. At the westermost +point of this island, we saw a good road-stead, having a small +town by the waterside, close to which was a fort or battery. We +here proposed to have anchored on purpose to trade; but before we +were within shot, they let fly two pieces at us, on which we went +to leeward along shore two or three leagues, where we found a +small bay and two or three houses, off which we anchored in 14 +fathoms upon good ground. Within an hour after we had anchored, +several persons both on foot and horseback were seen passing and +repassing opposite the ships. Next day a considerable force of +horse and foot was seen, and our general sent a message to know +whether they were disposed to trade with us. They answered that +we were made welcome as merchants, and should have every thing we +could reasonably demand. On this our general ordered all the +boats to be made ready, but doubting the good faith of the +Portuguese, caused the boats to be well armed, putting a +<i>double base</i> in the head of his pinnace and two <i>single +bases</i> in the skiff, directing the boats of the May-flower and +George to be similarly armed. On rowing towards the shore with +all the boats, the general was surprised to see above 60 horsemen +and 200 foot all armed to receive us, for which reason he sent a +flag of truce to learn their intentions. Their answer was fair +and smooth, declaring that they meant to treat us like gentlemen +and merchants, and desired that our general might come on shore +to converse with their captain. When our general approached the +shore in his skiff, they came towards him in great numbers, with +much seeming politeness, bowing and taking off their bonnets, and +earnestly requesting our general and the merchants to come on +shore. He declined this however, unless they would give +sufficient hostages for our security. At length they promised to +send two satisfactory hostages, and to give us water, provisions, +money, and negroes in exchange for our merchandize, and desired a +list of our wares might be sent on shore; all of which our +general promised to do forthwith, and withdraw from the shore, +causing our <i>bases, curriers</i>[296], and arquebuses to be +fired off in compliment to the Portuguese, while at the same time +our ships saluted them with five or six cannon shot. Most of the +Portuguese now left the shore, except a few who remained to +receive the list of our commodities; but, while we meant honestly +and fairly to trade with them as friends, their intentions were +treacherously to betray us to our destruction, as will appear in +the sequel.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 296: Bases and curriers must have been some +small species of ordnance, capable of being used in boats; +arquebuses were matchlock muskets.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>About two leagues to the west of where we lay, there was a +town behind a point of land, where the Portuguese had several +caravels, and two brigantines or row barges like gallies. With +all haste the Portuguese fitted out four caravels and these two +brigantines, furnishing them with as many men and cannon as they +could carry; and as soon as it was night these vessels made +towards us with sails and oars, and as the land was high, and the +weather somewhat dark and misty, we did not see them till they +were almost close on board the May-flower, which lay at anchor +about a gun-shot nearer them than our other ships. When within +gun-shot of the May-flower, one of the watch chanced to see a +light, and then looking out espied the four ships and gave the +alarm. The Portuguese, finding themselves discovered, began +immediately to fire their cannon, <i>curriers</i>, and +arquebuses; then lighted up certain tubes of wild fire, and all +their people both on shore and in their ships set up great +shouts, while they continued to bear down on the May-flower. With +all the haste we could, one of our guns was got ready and fired +at them, on which they seemed to hesitate a little; But they +recharged their ordnance, and again fired at us very briskly. In +the mean time we got three guns ready which we fired at them, +when they were so near that we could have shot an arrow on board. +Having a fine breeze of wind from the shore, we hoisted our +foresail and cut our cable, making sail to join our admiral to +leeward, while they followed firing sometimes at us and sometimes +at our admiral. At length one shot from our admiral had the +effect to make them retire, when they made away from us like +cowardly traitors. During all this time, though they continually +fired all their guns at us, not a man or boy among us was hurt; +but we know not what were the effects of our shot among them.</p> + +<p>Seeing the villany of these men, we set sail immediately for +an island named <i>Fuego</i>, or the Fire island, twelve leagues +from St Jago, where we came to anchor on the 11th February, +opposite a white chapel at the west end of the island, half a +league from a small town, and about a league from the western +extremity of the island. In this island, there is a remarkably +high hill which burns continually, and the inhabitants told us, +that about three years before, the whole island had like to have +been destroyed by the prodigious quantity of fire which it +discharged. About a league west from the chapel we found a fine +spring of fresh water, whence we supplied our ships. They have no +wheat in this island, instead of which they grow millet, which +makes good bread, and they likewise cultivate peas like those of +Guinea. The inhabitants are Portuguese, and are forbidden by +their king to trade either with the English or French, or even to +supply them with provisions, or any other thing unless forced. +Off this island is another named Brava, or St John, not exceeding +two leagues over, which has abundance of goats and many trees, +but not above three or four inhabitants.</p> + +<p>On the 25th of February we set sail for the Azores, and on the +23d of March we got sight of one of these islands called Flores, +to the north of which we could see another called Cuervo, about +two leagues distant. The 27th we came to anchor at Cuervo, +opposite a village of about a dozen mean houses; but dragging our +anchors in the night during a gale of wind, we went to Flores, +where we saw strange streams of water pouring from its high +cliffs, occasioned by a prodigious rain. The 18th April we took +in water at Flores, and sailed for Fayal, which we had sight of +on the 28th, and of three other islands, Pico, St George, and +Graciosa, which are round about Fayal. The 29th we anchored in 22 +fathoms water in a fine bay on the S.W. side of Fayal, over +against a small town, where we got fresh water and fresh +provisions. In this island, according to the report of the +inhabitants, there grows green woad, which they allege is far +better than the woad of St Michael or of Tercera.</p> + +<p>The 8th of May we came to Tercera, where we found a Portuguese +ship, and next morning we saw bearing down, upon us, a great ship +and two caravels, which we judged to belong to the royal navy of +Portugal, as they really were, and therefore made ready for our +defence. The large ship was a galliass, of about 400 tons and 300 +men, well appointed with brass guns both large and small, some of +their shot being as large as a mans head; and the two caravels +were both well appointed in men and ammunition of war. As soon as +they were within shot of us, they waved us amain with their +swords as if in defiance, and as we kept our course they fired at +us briskly, while we prepared as well as we could for our +defence. The great ship gave us a whole broadside, besides firing +four of her greatest guns which were in her stern, by which some +of our men were hurt, while we did our best to answer their fire. +At this time two other caravels came from shore to join them, and +two pinnaces or boats full of men, whom they put on board the +great ship, and then returned to the shore with only two men in +each. The ship and caravels gave us three attacks the first day, +and when night came they ceased firing, yet kept hard by us all +night, during which we were busily employed knotting and spicing +our ropes and strengthening our bulwarks.</p> + +<p>Next day the Portuguese were joined by four great caravels or +armadas, three of which were not less than 100 tons each, the +fourth being smaller, but all well armed and full of men. All +these came up against us, in the admiral or Castle of Comfort, +and we judged that one of the caravels meant to lay us on board, +as we could see them preparing their false nettings and all other +things for that purpose, for which the galliasse came up on our +larboard side, and the caravel on our starboard. Perceiving their +intention, we got all our guns ready with bar-shot, chain-shot, +and grape; and as soon as they came up, and had fired off their +guns at us, thinking to lay us on board, we gave them such a +hearty salutation on both sides of us, that they were both glad +to fall astern, where they continued for two or three hours, +there being very little wind. Then our small bark the George came +up to confer with us, and as the Portuguese ships and caravels +were coming up again to attack us, the George, while endeavouring +to get astern of us, fell to leeward, and was so long of filling +her sails for want of wind, that the enemy got up to us, and she +got into the middle of them, being unable to fetch us. Then five +of the caravels assailed her all round about, yet she defended +herself bravely against them all. The great ship and one caravel +came to us and fought us all day. The May-flower being well to +windward, took the benefit of that circumstance, and kept close +hauled all that day, but would not come near us. When night came, +the enemy ceased firing, yet followed us all night. During these +repeated attacks we had some men slain and several wounded, and +our tackle much injured; yet we did our best endeavour to repair +all things, resolving to defend ourselves manfully, putting our +trust in God. In the night the May-flower came up to us, on which +our captain requested they would spare us half a dozen fresh men, +but they would not, and bore away again.</p> + +<p>Next morning, the enemy seeing us at a distance from one +another, came up against us with a great noise of hooping and +hallooing, as if resolved to board or sink us; yet although our +company was small, lest they might think us any way dismayed, we +answered their shouts, and waved upon them to board us if they +durst, but they did not venture. This day they gave us four +several assaults; but at night they forsook us, desisting with +shame from the fight which they had begun with pride. We had some +leaks in our ship from shot holes, which we stopped with all +speed, after which we took some rest after our long hard labour. +In the morning the Mayflower joined, and sent six of her men on +board us, which gave us much relief, and we sent them four of our +wounded men.</p> + +<p>We now directed our course for England, and by the 2d of June +came into soundings off the Lizard. On the 3d we fell in with a +Portuguese ship, the captain of which came on board our admiral, +saying that he was laden with sugar and cotton. Our merchants +shewed him five negroes we had, asking him to buy them, which he +agreed to do for 40 chests of sugar, which were very small, not +containing above 26 loaves each. While they were delivering the +sugar, we saw a large ship and a small one bearing down upon us, +which our captain supposed to be men of war or rovers, on which +he desired the Portuguese to take back their sugars, meaning to +prepare for defence. But the Portuguese earnestly entreated our +captain not to forsake him, and promised to give him ten chests +of sugar in addition to the bargain, if we would defend him. To +this our captain consented, and the rovers seeing that we were +not afraid of them, let us alone. Next morning two others came +up, but on seeing that we did not attempt to avoid them, they +left us also. The 5th of June we got sight of the Start, and +about noon were abreast of Lyme bay, where we sounded in 35 +fathoms water. Next day we came in at the Needles, and anchored +at a place called Meadhole, under the isle of Wight; from whence +we sailed to Southampton, where our voyage ended.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII.</p> + +<p><i>Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, written by +himself</i>.[297]</p> + +<p>Though not exactly belonging to the subject of the present +chapter, yet as given by Hakluyt along with the early voyages to +Guinea, it has been thought proper to be inserted in this place. +According to Hakluyt, Mr Hogan was one of the sworn esquires of +the person to Queen Elizabeth, by whom he was sent ambassador to +Muley Abdulmeleck, emperor of Morocco and king of +Fez.--<i>Hakl</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 297: Hakluyt, II. 541.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>I Edmund Hogan, being appointed ambassador from her majesty +the queen to the emperor and king Muley Abdulmeleck, departed +from London with my company and servants on the 22d of April +1577; and embarking in the good ship called the Gallion of +London, I arrived at Azafi, a port in Barbary, on the 21st of +May. I immediately sent Leonell Edgerton on shore, with my +letters to the care of John Williams and John Bampton, who +dispatched a <i>trottero</i> or courier to Morocco, to learn the +emperors pleasure respecting my repair to his court. They with +all speed gave the king notice of it[298]; who, being much +satisfied with the intelligence, sent next day some of his +officers and soldiers to Azafi, with tents and other necessaries, +so that these captains, together with John Bampton, Robert +Washborne, and Robert Lion, came late on Whitsunday night to +Azafi. Having written in my letter, that I would not land till I +knew the kings pleasure, I remained on board till their arrival; +but I caused some of the goods to be landed to lighten the +ship.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 298: It would appear that Williams and +Bampton were resident at the city of Morocco.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 22d of May the Make-speed arrived in the road: and on the +27th, being Whitsunday, John Bampton came on board the Gallion +with others in his company, giving me to understand that the king +was rejoiced at my safe arrival from the queen of England, and +that for my safe conduct he had sent four captains and 100 +soldiers, together with a horse and furniture on which the king +was in use to ride. I accordingly landed with my suite consisting +of ten persons, three of whom were trumpeters. The four English +ships in the harbour were dressed up to the best advantage, and +shot off all their ordnance, to the value of twenty marks in +powder. On coming ashore, I found all the soldiers drawn up on +horseback, the captains and the governor of the town standing +close to the water side to receive me, with a jennet belonging to +the king for my use. They expressed the great satisfaction of +their sovereign, at my arrival from the queen my mistress, and +that they were appointed by the king to attend upon me, it being +his pleasure that I should remain five or six days on shore, to +refresh myself before commencing my journey. Having mounted the +jennet, they conducted me through the town to a fair field, where +a tent was provided for me, having the ground spread with Turkey +carpets. The castle discharged a peal of ordnance, and every +thing necessary was brought to my tent, where I had convenient +table and lodging, and had other tents for the accommodation of +my servants. The soldiers environed the tents, and kept watch as +long as I remained there.</p> + +<p>Although I sought a speedier dispatch, I could not be +permitted to begin my journey till Wednesday the 2d of June, when +I mounted towards evening, and travelled about ten miles to the +first place on the road where water was to be had, and there +pitched our tents till next morning[299]. The 3d we began our +journey early, and travelled till ten o'clock, when we halted +till four, at which time we resumed our journey, travelling as +long as we had light, making about 26 miles in all that day. The +4th being Friday, we travelled in the same manner about 28 miles, +and pitched our tents beside a river, about six wiles from the +city of Morocco. Immediately afterwards, all the English and +French merchants came on horseback to visit me, and before night +there came an <i>alcayde</i> from the king, with 50 men and +several mules laden with provisions, to make a banquet for my +supper, bringing a message from the king, expressing how glad he +was to hear from the queen of England, and that it was his +intention to receive me more honourably than ever Christian had +been before at the court of Morocco. He desired also to know at +what time I proposed to come next day into his city, as he was +resolved that all the Christians, and also his own nobles should +meet me. He desired likewise that John Bampton should wait upon +him early next morning, which he did accordingly.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 299: Having no inns in Barbary, travellers +have to encamp or lodge in the open fields where they can find +water.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote> + +<p>About seven o'clock the next morning, I moved towards the +city, accompanied by the English and French merchants, and a +great number of soldiers; and by the time I had gone about two +miles, I was met by all the Spanish and Portuguese Christians, +which I knew was more owing to the kings commands than of their +own good will,[300] for some of them, though they spoke me fair, +hung down their heads like dogs, especially the Portuguese, and I +behaved to them accordingly. When I had arrived within two miles +of the city, John Bampton rejoined me, expressing that the king +was so glad of my arrival, that he knew not how sufficiently to +shew his good will towards the queen and her realm. His +counsellors met me without the gates; and on entering the city +some of the kings footmen and guards were placed on both sides of +my horse, and in this manner I was conducted to the palace. The +king sat in his chair of state, having his counsellors about him, +both Moors and <i>Elchies</i>; and, according to his order +previously given me, I declared my message to him in the Spanish +language, and delivered her majestys letters. All that I spoke at +this time in Spanish, he caused one of his <i>Elchies</i> to +interpret to the Moors who were present in the <i>Larbe</i> +tongue. When this was done, he answered me in Spanish, returning +great thanks to the queen my mistress, for my mission, and +offering himself and country to be at her majesty's disposal; +after which he commanded some of his counsellors to conduct me to +my lodging, which was at no great distance from the court. The +house appointed for me was very good according to the fashion of +the country, and was every day furnished with all kinds of +provisions at the kings charge.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 300: The Spaniards and Portuguese were +commanded by the king, on pain of death, to meet the English +ambassador.--Hakluyt.]</blockquote> + +<p>I was sent for again to court that same night, and had a +conference with the king for the space of about two hours, when I +declared to him the particulars of what had been given me in +charge by the queen, and found him perfectly willing to oblige +her majesty, and not to urge her with any demands that might not +conveniently be complied with, well knowing that his country +might be better supplied from England with such things as it +stood in need of, than England from his country. He likewise +informed me, that the king of Spain had sent demanding a licence +to send an ambassador to him, and had strongly urged him not to +give credence or entertainment to any ambassador that might come +from the queen of England: "Yet," said he, "I know well what the +king of Spain is, and what the queen of England and her realm; +for I neither like him nor his religion, being so governed by the +inquisition that he can do nothing of himself; wherefore, when +his ambassador comes upon the licence I have given, he will see +how little account I make of him and Spain, and how greatly I +shall honour you for the sake of the queen of England. He shall +not come into my presence, as you have done and shall daily; for +I mean to accept of you as a companion and one of my household, +whereas he shall wait twenty days after he has delivered his +message."</p> + +<p>At the end of this speech I delivered him the letters of Sir +Thomas Gresham; upon which he took me by the hand, and led me +down a long court to a palace, past which there ran a fair +fountain of water, and sitting down in a chair, he commanded me +to sit upon another, and sent for such simple musicians as he had +to entertain me. I then presented him with a great bass lute, +which he thankfully accepted, and expressed a desire to hear when +he might expect the musicians: I told him great care had been +taken to provide them, and I did not doubt that they would come +out in the first ship after my return. He is willing to give them +good entertainment, with lodgings and provisions, and to let them +live according to their own law and conscience, as indeed he +urges, no one to the contrary. He conducts himself greatly by the +fear of God, and I found him well read in the scriptures both of +the old and new testament, bearing a greater affection for our +nation than any other, because that our religion forbids the +worship of images; and indeed the Moors call him the Christian +king. That same night[301] I continued with him till twelve +o'clock, and he seemed to have taken a great liking for me, as he +took from his girdle a short dagger set with 200 stones, rubies +and turquoises, which he presented to me, after which I was +conducted back to my lodgings.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 301: In the original this is said to have +been the 1st of June; but from what has gone before, that date +must necessarily be erroneous; it could not be before the 5th of +June, on which day he appears to have entered Morocco in he +morning.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Next day being Sunday, which he knew was our Sabbath, he +allowed me to remain at home; but he sent for me on the afternoon +of Monday, when I had a conference with him, and was entertained +with music. He likewise sent for me on Tuesday by three o'clock, +when I found him in his garden laid upon a silk bed, as he +complained of a sore leg. Yet after a long conference, he walked +with me into another orchard, having a fine banqueting-house and +a large piece of water, in which was a new galley. He took me on +board the galley, and for the space of two or three hours, shewed +me what great experience he had in the management of gallies, in +which he said he had exercised himself for eighteen years of his +youth. After supper he shewed me his horses, and other matters +about his house. From that time I did not see him, as he was +confined with his sore leg, yet he sent messages to me every day. +I was sent for to him again on the 13th of June, about six in the +evening, and continued with him till midnight, conferring about +her majestys commission, and with regard to the good usage of our +merchants trading in his dominions. He said that he would even do +more than was asked for the queen and her subjects, who might all +come to his ports in perfect security, and trade in every part of +his dominions, likewise that they should at all times freely have +water and provisions, and in times of war might bring in the +ships taken from our enemies, and either sell them there, or +freely depart at their pleasure. Likewise that all English ships, +either passing along his coast of Barbary, or going through the +straits into the Mediterranean or Levant sea, should have safe +conducts to pass freely to the dominions of the Turks or of +Algiers, as well as to his own. And he engaged to write to the +great Turk and the king of Algiers to use our ships and goods in +a friendly manner. Also, that if any Englishmen should be +hereafter made captives and brought into his dominions, that they +should on no account be sold as slaves. Whereupon, declaring the +acceptance by her majesty of these conditions, to confirm the +intercourse of trade between our merchants and his dominions, I +engaged to satisfy him with such commodities as he stood in need +of, to furnish the wants of his country in all kinds of +merchandize, so that he might not require any thing from her +majesty contrary to her honour and law, or in breach of league +and amity with the Christian princes her neighbours. That same +night I presented him with a case of combs[302], and requested +his majesty to give orders for the lading of the ships back +again, as I found there was very little saltpetre in the hands of +John Bampton. He answered that I should have all the aid in his +power, as he expected there was some store in his house at +<i>Sus,</i> and that the mountaineers had much in readiness. On +my request that he would send orders for that to be brought, he +promised to do so.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 302: This seems rather a singular present +to the emperor of Morocco.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 18th day I was with him again and continued till night, +when he shewed me his house, with the amusement of duck-hunting +with water spaniels, and bull-baiting with English dogs. At this +time I reminded him of sending to <i>Sus</i> about the saltpetre, +which he engaged to do; and on the 21st the Alcayde Mammie +departed on that errand, accompanied by Lionel Edgerton and +Rowland Guy, carrying with them, on our account and the king's, +letters to his brother Muley Hamet, the Alcayde Shavan, and the +viceroy. The 23d the king sent me out of Morocco with a guard, +and accompanied by the Alcayde Mahomet, to see his garden called +Shersbonare; and at night of the 24th I was sent for to court to +see a Morris dance, and a play acted by his <i>Elchies.</i> He +promised me an audience on the next day being Tuesday, but put it +off till Thursday, when he sent for me after supper, when the +Alcaydes Rodwan and Gowry were appointed to confer with me; but +after a short conversation, I requested to be admitted to the +king to receive my dispatch. On being admitted, I preferred two +bills, or requests, of John Bampton respecting the provision of +saltpetre, also two other petitions for the quiet trade of our +English merchants, together with petitions or requests for the +sugars which had been agreed to be made by the Jews, both for the +debts they had already incurred to our merchants, and those they +might incur hereafter, as likewise for the proper regulation of +the ingenios. I also moved him to give orders for the saltpetre +and other affairs that had been before agreed upon, which he +referred me to be settled by the two alcaydes. But on Friday the +alcaydes could not attend to my affairs, and on Saturday Rodwan +fell sick. So on Sunday I again made application to the king, and +that afternoon I was sent for to confer upon the bargain with the +alcaydes and others, but we could not agree.</p> + +<p>Upon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the king for my dispatch, and +was called again to court that afternoon, when I referred all +things to the king, accepting his offer of saltpetre. That night +the king took me again into his galley, when the water spaniels +hunted the duck. On Thursday I was appointed to weigh the 300 +gross quintals of saltpetre; and that afternoon the <i>tabybe</i> +came to my lodging, to inform me that the king was offended with +John Bampton for various reasons. Late on Sunday night, being the +7th of July, I got the king to forgive all to John Bampton, and +he promised to give me another audience on Monday. Upon Tuesday I +wrote to the king for my dispatch, when he sent <i>Fray Lewes</i> +to me, who said he had orders to write them out. Upon Wednesday I +wrote again, and the king sent me word that I should come on +Thursday to receive my dispatches, so that I might depart without +fail on Friday the 12th of July.</p> + +<p>According to the kings appointment I went to court on Friday, +when all the demands I had made were granted, and all the +privileges which had been requested on behalf of the English +merchants were yielded to with great favour and readiness. As the +Jews resident in Morocco were indebted in large sums to our men, +the emperor issued orders that all these should be paid in full +without delay or excuse. Thus at length I was dismissed with +great honour and special favour, such as had not ordinarily been +shewn to other Christian ambassadors. Respecting the private +affairs treated on between her majesty and the emperor, I had +letters to satisfy her highness in the same. To conclude, having +the same honourable escort for my return from court that I had on +my way there, I embarked with my suite, and arrived soon after in +England, when I repaired to court, and ended my embassy to her +majestys satisfaction, by giving a relation of my services.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIV.</p> + +<p><i>Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco in +1585, written by himself</i>[303].</p> + +<p>Like the former ambassador, Edmund Hogan, Mr Henry Roberts was +one of the sworn esquires of the person to Elizabeth queen of +England, and the following brief relation of his embassy, +according to Hakluyt, was written by himself. This, like the +former, does not properly belong to the present portion of our +arrangement, but seemed necessary to be inserted in this place, +however anomalous, as an early record of the attentions of the +English government to extend the commerce and navigation of +England, the sinews of our strength, and the bulwark of our +glorious constitution. Mr Roberts appears to have spent three +years and five months on this embassy, leaving London on the 14th +August 1585, and returning to the same place on the 12th January +1589, having, in the words of Hakluyt, remained at Morocco as +<i>lieger</i>, or resident, during upwards of three years.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 303: Hakluyt, II 602.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the commencement of this brief notice, Mr Roberts mentions +the occasion of his embassy as proceeding from the incorporation +of a company of merchants, for carrying on an exclusive trade +from England to Barbary; upon which event he was appointed her +majestys messenger and agent to the emperor of Morocco, for the +furtherance of the affairs of that company. It is not our +intention to load our work with copies of formal patents and +diplomatic papers; yet in the present instance it may not be +amiss to give an abridgment of the patent to the Barbary company, +as an instance of the mistaken principles of policy on which the +early foundations of English commerce were attempted.--E.</p> + +<p><i>Letters Patent and Privileges granted in 1585 by Queen +Elizabeth, to certain Noblemen and Merchants of London, for a +Trade to Barbary.[304]</i></p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 304: Hakluyt, II. 599.]</blockquote> + +<p>Elizabeth, &c.--Whereas our right trusty and well beloved +counsellors, Ambrose earl of Warwick, and Robert earl of +Leicester, and also our loving and natural subjects Thomas +Starkie, &c.[305] all merchants of London, now trading into +the country of Barbary, in the parts of Africa under the +government of Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor of Morocco, and king +of Fez and Sus, have made it evident to us that they have +sustained great and grievous losses, and are likely to sustain +greater if it should not be prevented. In tender consideration +whereof, and because diverse merchandize of the same countries +are very necessary and convenient for the use and defence of this +our realm, &c. Wherefore we give and grant to the said earls, +&c. by themselves, their factors or servants, and none +others, for and during the space of twelve years, the whole +freedom and liberty of the said trade, any law, &c. to the +contrary in any way notwithstanding. The said trade to be free of +all customs, subsidies or other duties, during the said period to +us, our heirs and successors, &c. Witness ourself at +Westminster, the 5th July, in the 27th year of our reign.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 305: Here are enumerated forty merchants of +London, as members of the Barbary company in conjunction with the +two earls.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p><i>Narrative.</i></p> + +<p>Upon an incorporation granted to the company of Barbary +merchants resident in London, I Henry Roberts, one of her +majesties sworn esquires of her person, was appointed messenger +and agent from her highness unto Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor +of Morocco and king of Fez and Sus. And, having received my +commission, instructions, and her majesties letters, I departed +from London, the 14th August 1585, in a tall ship called the +Ascension, in company with the Minion and Hopewell. We arrived in +safety at the port of Azaffi in Barbary on the 14th of September +following. The alcaide of the town, who is the kings chief +officer there, or as it were mayor of the place, received me with +all civility and honour, according to the custom of the country, +and lodged me in the best house in the town. From thence I +dispatched a messenger, which in their language is called a +<i>trottero</i>, to inform the emperor of my arrival; who +immediately sent a party of soldiers for my guard and safe +conduct, with horses for myself, and mules for my baggage and +that of my company or suite.</p> + +<p>Accompanied by Richard Evans, Edward Salcot, and other English +merchants resident in the country, and with my escort and +baggage, I came to the river <i>Tenisist</i>, within four miles +of the city of Morocco, and pitched my tents among a grove of +olive trees on the banks of that river, where I was met by all +the English merchants by themselves, and the French, Flemish, and +various other Christians, who waited my arrival. After we had +dined, and when the heat of the day was over, we set out about 4 +o'clock in the afternoon for the city, where I was lodged by +order of the emperor in a fair house in the <i>Judaria</i> or +jewry, the quarter in which the Jews have their abode, being the +best built and quietest part of the city.</p> + +<p>After I had rested there three days, I was introduced into the +kings presence, to whom I delivered my message and her majesties +letters, and was received with much civility. During three years +in which I remained there as her majesties agent and +<i>ligier</i>, or resident, I had favourable audiences from time +to time; as, whenever I had any business, I was either admitted +to his majesty himself or to his viceroy, the alcaide Breme +Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the principal +officer of the court. For various good and sufficient reasons, I +forbear to put down in writing the particulars of my service.</p> + +<p>After obtaining leave, and receiving an honourable reward from +the emperor, I departed from his court at Morocco the 18th of +August 1588, to a garden belonging to him called Shersbonare, +where he promised I should only stay one day for his letters. Yet +on one pretence or another, I was detained there till the 14th of +September, always at the kings charges, having 40 or 50 shot +attending upon me as my guard. At length I was conducted from +thence, with every thing requisite for my accommodation, to the +port of Santa Cruz, six days journey from Morocco, where our +ships ordinarily take in their lading, and where I arrived on the +21st of that month.</p> + +<p>I remained at Santa Cruz 43 days. At length, on the 2d +November, I embarked in company with one Marshok, a Reis or +captain, a gentleman sent along with me by the emperor on an +embassy to her majesty. After much foul weather at sea, we landed +on new-years day 1589, at St Ives in Cornwal, whence we proceeded +together by land to London. We were met without the city by 40 or +50 of the principal Barbary merchants all on horseback, who +accompanied us by torch light into the city on Sunday the 12th +January 1589, the ambassador and myself being together in a +coach.</p> + +<p><i>Edict of the Emperor of Morocco in favour of the English, +obtained by Henry Roberts</i>.</p> + +<p>In the name of the most merciful God, &c. The servant of +the Supreme God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor +appointed by God, emperor of the Moors, son of the emperor of the +Moors, the Shariffe, the Haceny, whose honour and estate may God +long increase and advance. This our imperial commandment is +delivered into the hands of the English merchants who reside +under the protection of our high court, that all men who see +these presents may understand that our high councils will defend +them, by the aid of God, from all that may injure or oppress them +in any way or manner in which they shall be wronged; and that +which way soever they may travel, no man shall take them captives +in these our kingdoms, ports, or other places belonging to us; +and that no one shall injure or hinder them, by laying violent +hands upon them, or shall give occasion that they be aggrieved in +any manner of way. And we charge and command all the officers of +our ports, havens, and fortresses, and all who bear authority of +any sort in our dominions, and likewise all our subjects +generally of all ranks and conditions, that they shall in no way +molest, offend, wrong, or injure them. And this our commandment +shall remain inviolable, being registered on the middle day of +the month Rabel of the year 996.</p> + +<p>The date of this letter agrees with the 20th of March 1587, +which I, Abdel Rahman el Catun, interpreter for his majesty, have +translated out of Arabic into Spanish, word for word as contained +therein.[306]</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 306: Besides this, Hakluyt gives copies in +Spanish and English of a letter from Mulley Hamet to the Earl of +Leicester, and of a letter from Queen Elizabeth to Mulley Hamet, +both of which are merely complimentary, or relate to unexplained +circumstances respecting one John Herman an English rebel, whose +punishment is required from the emperor of Morocco. He had +probably contraveened the exclusive privileges of the Barbary +company, by trading in Morocco.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XV.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James +Welsh</i>[307].</p> + +<p>This and the subsequent voyage to Benin were fitted out by +Messrs Bird and Newton, merchants of London, in which a ship of +100 tons called the Richard of Arundel and a pinnace were +employed, under the chief command of James Welsh, who wrote the +account of both voyages--<i>Astley</i>.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 307: Hakluyt, II. 613. Astley, I. +199.]</blockquote> + +<p>It seems not improbable that these voyages were intended as an +evasion of an exclusive privilege granted in May 1588 by Queen +Elizabeth, for trade to the rivers Senegal and Gambia, called +Senega and Gambra in Hakluyt. The boundaries of this exclusive +trade are described as beginning at the northermost part of the +river Senegal, and from and within that river all along the coast +of Guinea into the southermost part of the river Gambia, and +within that river also; and the reason assigned for this +exclusive grant is, that the patentees had already made one +voyage to these parts, and that the enterprizing a new trade must +be attended with considerable hazard and expence. The patentees +were several merchants of Exeter and other parts of Devonshire, +and one merchant of London, who had been instigated by certain +Portuguese resident in England to engage in that trade, and the +privilege is extended to ten years.[308]--E.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 308: See the patent at large in Hakluyt, +II. 610. London edition, 1810.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>On the 12th October 1588, weighing anchor from Ratcliff we +dropped down to Blackwall, whence we sailed next day; but owing +to contrary winds we did not reach Plymouth till the 25th +October, where we had to remain for want of a fair wind to the +14th of December, when we set sail and passed the Lizard that +night. Thursday the 2d January 1589, we had sight of the land +near Rio del Oro, making our lat. 22° 47' N. The 3d we saw +Cape Barbas, distant 5 leagues S.E. The 4th in the morning we had +sight of the stars called the <i>Croziers</i>. The 7th we had +sight of Cape Verd, making our lat. 14° 43' at 4 leagues off +shore. Friday 17th Cape Mount bore from us N.N.E., when we +sounded and had 50 fathoms water with a black ouse, and at 2 P.M. +it bore N.N.W. 8 leagues distant, when Cape Misurado bore E. by +S. Here the current sets E.S.E. along shore, and at midnight we +had 26 fathoms on black ouse. The 18th in the morning we were +athwart a land much resembling Cabo Verde, about 9 leagues beyond +Cape Misurado. It is a saddle-backed hill, and there are four or +five one after the other; and 7 leagues farther south we saw a +row of saddle-backed hills, all the land from Cape Misurado +having many mountains. The 19th we were off Rio de Sestos, and +the 20th Cape Baixos was N. by W. 4 leagues distant. In the +afternoon a canoe came off with three negroes from a place they +called Tabanoo. Towards evening we were athwart an island, and +saw many small islands or rocks to the southward, the current +setting from the south. We sounded and had 35 fathoms. The 21st +we had a flat hill bearing N.N.E. being 4 leagues from shore; and +at 2 P.M. we spoke a French ship riding near a place called +<i>Ratere</i>, there being another place hard bye called +Crua[309]. The Frenchman carried a letter from us on shore for Mr +Newton; and as we lay to while writing the letter, the current +set us a good space along shore to the S.S.E. The 25th we were in +the bight of a bay to the west of Cape Three-points, the current +setting E.N.E. The 31st January we were off the middle part of +Cape Three-points at 7 in the morning, the current setting to the +E. Saturday 1st February we were off a round foreland, which I +considered to be the easternmost part of Cape Three-points, +within which foreland was a great bay and an island in the +bay.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 309: Krou Sestra, nearly in lat. 5° +N.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 2nd February we were off the castle of Mina; and when the +third glass of the watch was run out, we spied under our larboard +quarter one of their boats with some negroes and one Portuguese, +who would not come on board. Over the castle upon some high +rocks, we saw what we thought to be two watch houses, which were +very white. At this time our course was E.N.E. The 4th in the +morning we were athwart a great hill, behind which within the +land were other high rugged hills, which I reckoned were little +short of <i>Monte Redondo</i>, at which time I reckoned we were +20 leagues E.N.E. from the castle of Mina; and at 11 o'clock A.M. +I saw two hills within the land, 7 leagues by estimation beyond +the former hills. At this place there is a bay, having another +hill at its east extremity, beyond which the land is very low. We +went this day E. N E. and E. by N. 22 leagues, and then E. along +shore. The 6th we were short of Villa Longa, and there we met a +Portuguese caravel. The 7th, being a fair temperate day, we rode +all day before Villa Longa, whence we sailed on the 8th, and 10 +leagues from thence we anchored again, and remained all night in +10 fathoms water. The 9th we sailed again, all along the shore +being clothed with thick woods, and in the afternoon we were +athwart a river[310], to the eastward of which a little way was a +great high bushy tree which seemed to have no leaves. The 10th we +sailed E. and E. by S. 14 leagues along shore, the whole coast +being so thick of woods that in my judgment a person would have +much difficulty in passing through them. Towards night we +anchored in 7 fathoms. The 11th we sailed E. by S. and 3 leagues +from shore we had only 5 fathoms water, all the wood along shore +being as even as if it had been clipt by gardeners sheers. After +running 2 leagues, we saw a high tuft of trees on a brow of land +like the head of a porpoise. A league farther on we had a very +low head land full of trees; and a great way from the land we had +very shallow water, on which we hauled off to seaward to get +deeper water, and then anchored in 5 fathoms, athwart the mouth +of the river <i>Jayo</i>. The 12th we sent the pinnace and the +boat to land with the merchants, and they did not return till +next morning. The shallowest part of this river is toward the +west, where there is only 4-1/2 fathoms, and it is very +broad.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 310: Rio de +Lagoa--<i>Hakluyt</i>.--Probably that now called Lagos, in long. +2° 40' E. from Greenwich, in the Bight of +Benin.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Thursday the 13th we set sail going S.S.E. along shore, the +trees being wonderfully even, the east shore being higher than +the west shore[311]. After sailing 18 leagues we had sight of a +great river, called Rio de Benin, off which we anchored in 3-1/2 +fathoms, the sea being here very shallow two leagues from the +main[312]. The 15th we sent the pinnace and boat with the +merchants into the river; and as we rode in shallow water, we +made sail with the starboard tacks aboard till we came to 5 +fathoms water, where we anchored having the current to the +westwards. The west part of the land was high-browed, much like +the head of a Gurnard, and the eastermost land was lower, having +three tufts of trees like stacks of corn. Next day we only saw +two of these trees, having removed more to the eastwards. We rode +here from the 14th of February till the 14th of April, having the +wind always at S.W.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 311: This is only to be understood as +implying that the shore was now higher in the eastern part of the +voyage along the coast, than formerly to the west on the coast of +Mina; the east shore and the west shore referring to the bight or +bay of Benin.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 312: It is probable that the two rivers +mentioned in the text under the names of Rio de Lagoa and Rio de +Benin, are those now called the Lagos creek and the great river +Formosa, both in the negro kingdom of Benin.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 17th February our merchants weighed their goods and put +them aboard the pinnace to go into the river, on which day there +came a great current out of the river setting to the westwards. +The 16th March our pinnace came on board with Anthony Ingram the +chief factor, bringing 94 bags of pepper and 28 elephants teeth. +All his company were sick. The 19th our pinnace went again into +the river, having the purser and surgeon on board; and the 25th +we sent the boat up the river again. The 30th our pinnace came +from Benin with the sorrowful news that Thomas Hemstead and our +captain were both dead. She brought with her 159 serons or bags +of pepper, besides elephants teeth. In all the time of our +remaining off the river of Benin, we had fair and temperate +weather when the wind was at S.W. from the sea; but when the wind +blew at N. and N.E. from the land, it then rained with thunder +and lightning, and the weather was intemperately hot.</p> + +<p>The 13th of April 1589, we began our voyage homeward, and the +27th of July we spoke a ship called the Port belonging to London, +giving us good news of England. The 9th September we put into +Catwater, where we remained till the 28th, owing to sickness and +want of men. The 29th we sailed from Plymouth, and arrived at +London on the 2d October 1589.</p> + +<p>The commodities we carried out in this, voyage were linens and +woollen cloths, iron work of sundry kinds, manillios or bracelets +of copper, glass beads and coral. Those we brought home were +pepper, elephants teeth, palm oil, cloth made of cotton very +curiously woven, and cloth made of the bark of the palm tree. +Their money consists of pretty white shells, as they have no gold +or silver. They have also great store of cotton. Their bread is +made of certain roots called <i>Inamia</i>, as large as a mans +arm, which when well boiled is very pleasant and light of +digestion. On banian or fish days, our men preferred eating these +roots with oil and vinegar to the best stock-fish[313]. There are +great quantities of palm trees, out of which the negroes procure +abundance of a very pleasant white wine, of which we could +purchase two gallons for 20 shells. The negroes have plenty of +soap, which has the flavour of violets. They make very pretty +mats and baskets, also spoons of ivory very curiously wrought +with figures of birds and beasts.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 313: It is obvious that the banian or +meager days, still continued in the British navy, are a remnant +of the meager days of the Roman catholic times, when it was +deemed a mortal sin to eat flesh. Stock-fish are, however now +abandoned, having been found to promote scurvy.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Upon this coast we had the most terrible thunder and +lightning, which used to make the deck tremble under our feet, +such as I never heard the like in any other part of the world. +Before we became accustomed to it, we were much alarmed, but God +be thanked we had no harm. The natives are very gentle and +courteous; both men and women going naked till they are married, +after which they wear a garment reaching from the middle down to +the knees. Honey was so plentiful, that they used to sell our +people earthen pots of comb full of honey, the size of two +gallons for 100 shells. They brought us also great store of +oranges and plantains, which last is a fruit which grows on a +tree, and resembles our cucumbers, but is very pleasant eating. +It pleased God of his merciful goodness to give me the knowledge +of a means of preserving water fresh with little cost, which +served us six months at sea; and when we came to Plymouth it was +much wondered at by the principal men of the town, who said there +was not sweeter water in all Plymouth[314]. Thus God provides for +his creatures, unto whom be praise, now and <i>for ever more</i>, +amen.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 314: This preservative is wrought by +casting a handful of bay-salt into a hogshead of water, as the +author told me.--<i>Hakluyt</i>. + +<p>The Thames water soon putrifies on board ships in long +voyages; but afterwards throws down a sediment and becomes +perfectly sweet pleasant and wholesome; insomuch that it is often +bought from ships which have been to India and back. Putrid water +at sea is purified or rendered comparatively sweet by forcing +streams of air through it by what is called an air pump. Water +may be preserved sweet on long voyages, or restored when putrid, +by means of pounded charcoal.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION XVI.</p> + +<p><i>Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter from +Anthony Ingram the chief Factor, written from Plymouth to the +Owners, dated 9th September, the day of arriving at +Plymouth</i>[315].</p> + +<p>Worshipful Sirs! The account of our whole proceedings in this +voyage would require more time than I have, and a person in +better health than I am at present, so that I trust you will +pardon me till I get to London.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 315: Hakluyt, II. 616. Astley, I. +202.]</blockquote> + +<p>Departing from London in December 1588, we arrived at our +destined port of Benin on the 14th of February following, where +we found not water enough to carry our ship over the bar, so that +we left her without in the road. We put the chiefest of our +merchandise into the pinnace and ships boat, in which we went up +the river to a place called <i>Goto</i>[316], where we arrived on +the 20th, that place being the nearest to Benin to which we could +go by water. From thence we sent negro messengers to certify the +king of our arrival, and the object of our coming. These +messengers returned on the 22d with a nobleman to conduct us to +the city of Benin, and with 200 negroes to carry our merchandise. +On the 23d we delivered our commodities to the kings factor, and +the 25th we came to the great city of Benin, where we were well +entertained. The 26th we went to court to confer with the king, +but by reason of a solemn festival then holding we could not see +him; yet we spoke with his <i>veador</i>, or chief man who deals +with the Christians, who assured us that we should have every +thing according to our desires, both in regard to pepper and +elephants teeth.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 316: Goto or Gato is a negro town on the +northern branch of the Rio Formoso, about 45 miles in a straight +line from the mouth of the river, and about 85 miles short of the +town of Benin. This branch or creek is probably the river of +Benin of the text.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We were admitted into the kings presence on the 1st of March, +who gave us like friendly assurances respecting our trade; and +next day we went again to court, when the <i>veador</i> shewed us +a basket of green pepper and another of dry in the stalks. We +desired to have it plucked from the stalks and made clean, which +he said would require some time to get done, but should be +executed to our satisfaction, and that by next year it should be +all in readiness for us, as we had now come unexpectedly to their +country, to which no Christians had traded for pepper in the +reign of the present king. Next day they sent us 12 baskets full, +and continued to send more daily till the 9th March, by which +time we had made up 64 serons of pepper and 28 elephants teeth. +By this time, as our constitutions were unused to the climate of +Benin, all of us were seized with fevers; upon which the captain +sent me down to Goto with the goods we had collected. On my +arrival there, I found all the men belonging to our pinnace sick, +so that they were unable to convey the pinnace and goods to the +ship; but fortunately the boat came up to Goto from the ship +within two hours after my arrival, to see what we were about, so +that I put the goods into the boat and went down to the ship: But +by the time I had got on board several of our men died, among +whom were Mr Benson, the copper, and the carpenter, with three or +four more, and I was in so weak a state as to be unable to return +to Benin. I therefore sent up Samuel Dunne and the surgeon, that +he might let blood of them if it were thought adviseable; but on +their arrival they found the captain and your son William Bird +both dead, and Thomas Hempstead was so very weak that he died two +days after.</p> + +<p>In this sorrowful state of affairs they returned with all +speed to the ship, with such pepper and elephants teeth as they +had got, as will appear by the cargo. At their coming away; the +<i>veador</i> told them he would use all possible expedition to +procure them more goods if they would remain longer; but the +sickness so increased among us, that by the time our men came +back we had so many sick and dead, that we looked to lose our +ship, lives, country, and all. We were so reduced that it was +with much difficulty we were able to heave our anchors; but by +Gods blessing we got them up and put to sea, leaving our pinnace +behind, on the 13th of April. After which our men began to +recover and gather strength. Sailing between the Cape de Verd +islands and the Main, we came to the Azores on the 25th of July; +and here our men began again to fall sick, and several died, +among whom was Samuel Dunn, those who remained alive being in a +sad state. In the midst of our distress, it pleased God that we +should meet your ship the <i>Barke Burre</i> on this side the +North Cape, which not only kept company with us, but sent us six +fresh men on board, without whose assistance we must have been in +a sad condition. By this providential aid we are now arrived at +Plymouth, this 9th September; and, for want of better health at +this present. I must refer you for farther particulars till my +arrival in London.--Yours to command,</p> + +<p>ANTHONY INGRAM.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVII.</p> + +<p><i>Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in +1590</i>[317].</p> + +<p>In the employment of the same merchants, John Bird and John +Newton, and with the same ship as in the former voyage, the +Richard of Arundel, accompanied by a small pinnace, we set sail +from Ratclif on the 3d September 1590, and came to Plymouth Sound +on the 18th of that month. We put to sea again on the 22d, and on +the 14th October got sight of Fuertaventura, one of the Canary +islands, which appeared very rugged as we sailed past. The 16th +of October, in the lat. of 24° 9' N. we met a prodigious +hollow sea, such as I had never seen before on this coast; and +this day a monstrous great fish, which I think is called a +<i>gobarto</i>[318], put up his head to the steep-tubs where the +cook was shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would +have carried away. The 21st, being in lat. 18° N. we had a +<i>counter-sea</i> from the north, having in the same latitude, +on our last voyage, encountered a similar sea from the south, +both times in very calm weather. The 24th we had sight of Cape +Verd, and next day had a great hollow sea from the north, a +common sign that the wind will be northerly, and so it proved. +The 15th November, when in lat. 6° 42' N. we met three +currents from west to north-west, one after the other, with the +interval of an hour between each. The 18th we had two other great +currents from S.W. The 20th we saw another from N.E. The 24th we +had a great current from S.S.W. and at 6 P.M. we had three +currents more. The 27th we reckoned to have gone 2-1/2 leagues +every watch, but found that we had only made <i>one</i> league +every watch for the last 24 hours, occasioned by heavy billows +and a swift current still from the south. The 5th December, on +setting the watch, we cast about and lay E.N.E. and N.E. and here +in lat. 5° 30' our pinnace lost us wilfully. The 7th, at +sunset, we saw a great black spot on the sun; and on the 8th, +both at rising and setting we saw the like, the spot appearing +about the size of a shilling. We were then in lat. 5° N. and +still had heavy billows from the south.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 317: Hakluyt, II. 618. Astley, I. +203.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 318: In a side note, Astley conjectures +this to have been a great shark.]</blockquote> + +<p>We sounded on the 14th December, having 15 fathoms on coarse +red sand, two leagues from shore, the current setting S.E. along +shore, and still we had heavy billows from the south. The 15th we +were athwart a rock, somewhat like the <i>Mewstone</i> in +England, and at the distance of 2 leagues from the rock, had +ground in 27 fathoms. This rock is not above a mile from the +shore, and a mile farther we saw another rock, the space between +both being broken ground. We sounded off the second rock, and had +ground at 20 fathoms on black sand. We could now see plainly that +the rocks were not along the shore, but at some distance off to +sea, and about 5 leagues farther south we saw a great bay, being +then in lat. 4° 27' N. The 16th we met a French ship +belonging to Harfleur, which robbed our pinnace: we sent a letter +by him. This night we saw another spot on the sun at his going +down. Towards evening we were athwart the mouth of a river, right +over which was a high tuft of trees. The 17th we anchored in the +mouth of the river, when we found the land to be Cape Palmas, +there being a great ledge of rocks between us and the Cape, a +league and half to sea, and an island off the point or foreland +of the Cape. We then bore to the west of the Cape, and as night +came on could see no more of the land, except that it trended +inwards like a bay, in which there ran a stream or tide as it had +been the Thames. This was on the change day of the moon.</p> + +<p>The 19th December, a fair temperate day, with the wind S. we +sailed east, leaving the land astern of us to the west, all the +coast appearing low like islands to the east of Cape Palmas, and +trending inwards like a great bay or sound. We went east all +night, and in the morning were only three or four leagues from +shore. The 20th we were off Rio de las Barbas. The 21st we +continued along shore; and three or four leagues west of Cape +Three Points, I found the bay to be set deeper than it is laid +down by four leagues. At 4 P.M. the land began to shew high, the +first part of it being covered by palm trees. The 24th, still +going along shore, the land was very low and full of trees to the +water side. At noon we anchored off the Rio de Boilas, where we +sent the boat towards the shore with our merchants, but they +durst not put into the river, because of a heavy surf that broke +continually on the bar. The 28th we sailed along shore, and +anchored at night in seven fathoms, to avoid being put back by a +current setting from E.S.E. from <i>Papuas</i>.</p> + +<p>At noon on the 29th we were abreast of Ardrah, and there we +took a caravel, the people belonging to which had fled to the +land. She had nothing in her except a small quantity of palm oil +and a few roots. Next morning our captain and merchants went to +meet the Portuguese, who came off in a boat to speak with them. +After some communing about ransoming the caravel, the Portuguese +promised to give for her some bullocks and elephants teeth, and +gave us then one tooth and one bullock, engaging to bring the +rest next day. Next day being the 1st January 1591, our captain +went a-land to speak with the Portuguese, but finding them to +dissemble, he came on board again, when presently we unrigged the +caravel and set her on fire before the town. We then set sail and +went along the coast, where we saw a date tree, the like of which +is not on all that coast, by the water side. We also fell a +little aground at one place. Thus we went on to <i>Villalonga</i> +where we anchored. The 3d we came to Rio de Lagoa, or Lagos +Creek, where our merchants went to land, finding 3 fathoms on the +bar, but being late they did not go in. There is to the eastward +of this river a date tree, higher than all the other trees +thereabouts. Thus we went along the coast, anchoring every night, +and all the shore was full of trees and thick woods. The morning +of the 6th was very foggy, so that we could not see the land; but +it cleared up about three in the afternoon, when we found +ourselves off the river Jaya; and finding the water very shallow, +we bore a little out to seawards as we had done in the former +voyage, and came to anchor in five fathoms. We set sail again +next day, and came about noon abreast the river of Benin, where +we anchored in four fathoms.</p> + +<p>The 10th our captain went to land with the boat at 2 P.M. All +this week it was very foggy every day till 10 o'clock A.M. and +hitherto the weather had been as temperate as our summer in +England. This day we anchored in the road in 4 fathoms, the west +point bearing from us E.N.E. The 21st, being a fair temperate +day, Mr Hassald went up to the town of Gato to hear news of our +captain. The 23d came the caravel[319] in which was Samuel, +bringing 63 elephants teeth and three bullocks. The 28th was a +fair temperate day, but towards night we had much rain with +thunder and lightning. This day our boat came on board from Gato. +The 24th February, we took in 298 serons or bags of pepper, and 4 +elephants teeth. The 26th we put the rest of our goods on board +the caravel, in which Mr Hassald went up to Gato. The 5th March +the caravel came again, bringing 21 serons of pepper and 4 +elephants teeth. The 9th April our caravel came again on board +with water for our return voyage, and this day we lost our +shallop or small boat. The 17th was a hazy and rainy day, and in +the afternoon we saw three great water spouts, two to larboard +and one right a-head, but by the blessing of God they came not to +our ship. This day we took in the last of our water for sea +store, and on the 26th we victualled our caravel to accompany us. +The 27th we set sail on our voyage homewards.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 319: It is not mentioned how they came by +this caravel.--Astl. I. 204. b. Probably the pinnace that +attended them in the voyage, for the purpose of going up the +shallow rivers.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 24th May we were 37 leagues south of Cape Palmas. The 1st +July we got sight of Brava, one of the Cape Verd islands, bearing +east 7 leagues off. The 13th August we spoke the queens ship, of +which Lord Howard was admiral and Sir Richard Grenville +vice-admiral. They made us keep company till the night of the +15th, lying all the time a hull in waiting for prizes, 30 leagues +S.W. from the island of Flores. That night we got leave to +depart, accompanied by a fliboat laden with sugar from the island +of San Thome which had been taken by the queens ship, and of +which my lord admiral gave me strict charge not to part with her +till safe harboured in England. The 23d the N.E. part of the +island of Corvo bore from us E. by S. 6 leagues distant. The 17th +September we fell in with a ship belonging to Plymouth bound from +the West Indies. Next day we had sight of another sail; and this +day died Mr Wood one of our company. The 23d we spoke the Dragon +belonging to my Lord Cumberland, of which <i>master</i> Ivie was +<i>maister</i>[320]. The 2d October we met a ship belonging to +Newcastle coming from Newfoundland, out of which we got 300 +couple of <i>Newland</i> fish. The 13th we put into Dartmouth, +where we staid till the 12th December, when we sailed with a west +wind, and by the blessing of God we anchored on the 18th December +1591, at Limehouse in the river Thames, where we discharged 589 +sacks of pepper, 150 elephants teeth, and 32 barrels of palm +oil.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 320: This distinction of master and maister +often occurs in these early voyages.--Astl. I. 205. +a.]</blockquote> + +<p>The commodities we carried out on this my second voyage were, +broad cloth, kersies, bays, linen cloth, unwrought iron, copper +bracelets, coral, hawks bells, horse-tails, hats, and the like. +This voyage was more comfortable to us than the former, because +we had plenty of fresh water and that very sweet. For even yet, +being the 7th June 1592, the water we brought out of Benin on the +1st of April 1591, is as clear and good as any fountain can +yield. In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues within half a degree +of the equator, where we found the weather more temperate than at +our anchorage on the coast of Benin. Under the line we killed +many small dolphins, and many other good fish, which were very +refreshing to us; and the fish never forsook us till we were to +the north of the Azores: But God be thanked we met with several +ships of our own country, during the five months we were at sea, +which were great comfort to us, having no consort.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVIII.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the Rivers +Senegal and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591</i>[321].</p> + +<p>PREVIOUS REMARKS [322].</p> + +<p>In virtue of her majestys most gracious charter, given in the +year 1588, being the 30th of her reign, certain English merchants +were privileged to trade, in and from the river of Senega or +Senegal, to and in the river of Gambra or Gambia on the western +coast of Africa. The chiefest places of trade on that coast, in +and between these rivers are: 1. <i>Senegal</i> river, where the +commodities are hides, gum, elephants teeth, a few grains or +pepper, ostrich feathers, ambergris, and some gold. 2. +<i>Beseguiache</i>[323], a town near Cape Verd, and ---- +leagues[324] from the river Senegal. The commodities here are +small hides and a few teeth. 3. <i>Rufisque</i>, or <i>Refisca +viejo</i>, a town 4 leagues from Beseguiache, producing small +hides and a few teeth now and then. 4. <i>Palmerin</i>, a town 2 +leagues from Rufisque[325], having small hides and a few +elephants teeth occasionally. 5. <i>Porto d'Ally</i>, or +<i>Portudale</i>, a town 5 leagues from Palmerin, having small +hides, teeth, ambergris, and a little gold; and many Portuguese +are there. 6. <i>Candimal</i>, a town half a league from +Portudale, having small hides and a few teeth now and then. 7. +<i>Palmerin</i>[326], a town 3 leagues from Candimal, with +similar commodities. 8. <i>Jaale</i> or <i>Joala</i>, 6 leagues +beyond Palmerin, its commodities being hides, wax, elephants +teeth, rice, and some gold, for which it is frequented by many +Spaniards and Portuguese, 9. <i>Gambia river</i>, producing rice, +wax, hides, elephants teeth, and gold.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 321: Hakluyt, III. 2. Astley, I. +242.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 322: In Astley, these previous remarks are +stated to have been written by Richard Rainolds; but in the +original collection of Hakluyt no such distinction is made, only +that in the text Richard Rainolds states himself to have written +the account of the voyage.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 323: Or Barzaguiche, by which name the +natives call the island of Goree; the town of that name being on +the opposite shore of the continent.--Astl, I. 242. +c.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 324: At this place the editor of Astley's +Collection supplies 28 leagues, in the text between brackets: But +Cape Verd is 39 leagues from the southern mouth of the Senegal, +and Goree is 6 leagues beyond Cape Verd. Near the situation +pointed out for Beseguiache, modern maps place two small towns or +villages named Dakar and Ben.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 325: A league north from Rufisque in modern +maps is a place called Ambo; about 1-1/2 league farther north, +one named Canne; and near 2 leagues south, another named +Yenne.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 326: We have here two towns called Palmerin +within a few leagues, perhaps one of them may be wrong named in +the text.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The French have traded thither above thirty years from Dieppe +in New-haven[327], commonly with four or five ships every year, +of which two small barks go up the river Senegal. The others are +wont, until within these four years that our ships came thither, +to ride with their ships in Portudale, sending small shalops of +six or eight tons to some of the before-named places on the sea +coast. They were generally as well beloved and as kindly treated +by the negroes as if they had been natives of the country, +several of the negroes going often into France and returning +again, to the great increase of their mutual friendship. Since we +frequented the coast, the French go with their ships to Rufisque, +and leave us to anchor a Portudale. The French are not in use to +go up the river Gambia, which is a river of secret trade and +riches concealed by the Portuguese. Long since, one Frenchman +entered the river in a small bark, which was surprised, betrayed, +and taken by the Portuguese. In our second voyage in the second +year of our trade[328], about forty Englishmen were cruelly slain +or captured, and most or all of their goods confiscated, by the +vile treachery of the Portuguese, with the consent of the negro +kings in Portudale and Joala. On this occasion only two got back, +who were the merchants or factors. Likewise, by the procurement +of Pedro Gonzalves, a person in the service of Don Antonio one of +the officers of the king of Portugal, Thomas Dassel and others +had been betrayed, if it had not pleased the Almighty to reveal +and prevent the same.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 327: Havre de Grace is probably here +meant--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 328: Hence it appears that the relation in +the text was the third voyage of the English exclusive company, +in the third year of their patent, but we find no account of the +other two beyond what is now mentioned. It appears, however from +Kelly's ship being at the same time upon the coast, that others +as well as the patentees carried on this trade.--Astl. I. 242. +d.]</blockquote> + +<p>From the south side of the river Senegal, all along the sea +coast to Palmerin is one kingdom of the Negroes, the king of +which is named Melick Zamba[329], who dwells about two days +journey inland from Rufisque.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 329: Melick; or Malek, in Arabic signifies +king.--Astl. I. 242. e.]</blockquote> + +<p><i>The Voyage.</i></p> + +<p>On the 12th of November 1591, I, Richard Rainolds and Thomas +Dassel, being factors in a ship called the Nightingale of London, +of 125 tons, accompanied by a pinnace of 40 tons called the +Messenger, arrived near Cape Verd at a small island called the +<i>Isle of Liberty</i>. At this island we set up a small pinnace +in which we are in use to carry our goods to land in the course +of our traffic; and in the mean time Thomas Dassel went in the +large pinnace to traffic with the Spaniards or Portuguese in +Portudale or Joale. Over against this island of Liberty +[<i>Goree</i>] there is a village of the negroes called +Beseguiache, the alcaide or governor of which came on board, with +a great train in a number of canoes, to receive the kings duties +for anchorage and permission to set up our pinnace. He was much +pleased that we had no Portuguese in our ships, saying that we +should be always better thought of by the king and people of that +country if we never brought any Portuguese, but came of ourselves +as the French do always. To secure his favour, I gave him and his +company very courteous entertainment, and upon his entreaty, +having sufficient hostages left on board, I and several others +went to the land along with him. At this time a war subsisted +between this governor and the governor of a neighbouring +province; but upon our arrival a truce was entered into for some +time, and I with my companions were conducted through among the +contending parties belonging to both provinces, to the house of +the governor of Beseguiache, where we were hospitably entertained +after their manner, and having received some presents returned +safely on board. Next day the alcaide came again on board, +desiring me to send some iron and other commodities in the boat +to barter with the negroes, and also requested me to remove with +the ship to Rufisque, which I did accordingly. I observed one +thing, that a number of negroes, armed with bows and poisoned +arrows, poisoned darts, and swords, attended the landing of the +governor in warlike array, because the hostile tribe had come +there to view our ship, taking advantage of the truce. These his +armed attendants for the most part approached him in a kneeling +posture, and kissed the back of his hand.</p> + +<p>On the 17th of November, finding no French ship had yet come +out, I left the anchorage at the island [<i>Goree</i>], and went +to the road of Rufisque, where the interpreters of the alcaide +came on board and received from me the kings duties for free +trade with the negroes, with whom I every day exchanged my iron +and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth, finding the +people very friendly and tractable. Next day I went about three +miles inland to the town of Rufisque, where I was handsomely +received and treated by the alcaide, and especially so by a young +noble named <i>Conde Amar Pattay</i>[330], who presented me with +an ox, and some goats and kids, for my company, assuring me that +the king would be glad to hear of the arrival of a Christian +ship, calling us <i>blancos</i> or white men, and more especially +that we were English. Every day the young <i>conde</i> came to +the sea-side with a small company of horsemen, feasting me with +much courtesy and kindness. On the 5th of December, he and his +train came on board to view the ship, which to them seemed +wonderful, as a thing they had seldom seen the like of. He then +told me that a messenger sent to the king to notify our arrival +was returned, and that the king was much rejoiced that the +English had brought a ship to trade in his ports; and as I was +the first Englishman who had brought a ship there, he promised +that I and any Englishman hereafter might be sure of being well +treated, and of receiving good dealings in his country. The +<i>conde</i> farther requested, in the kings name and his own, +that before my final departure from the coast, I might return to +the road of Rufisque, to confer with him for our better +acquaintance, and for the establishment of stable friendship +between them and the English, which I agreed to. Having shewn him +and his train every civility in my power, he went on shore, on +which I proposed to have given him a salute, but he desired the +contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and noise of the +guns, which they greatly admired.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 330: In the name or title of this negro +chief or noble may be recognized the Portuguese or Spanish +<i>conde</i>, and the Arabic <i>amir</i> or +<i>emir</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 13th of December I weighed anchor from before Rufisque, +and went to Porto d'Ally, which is in another kingdom, the king +of which is called Amar Malek, being son to Malek Zamba the other +king, and has his residence a days journey and a half inland from +Porto d'Ally. When we had anchored, the governors of the town, +who were the kings kinsmen, and all the other officers, came on +board to receive the kings duty for anchorage and liberty to +trade, all of whom seemed much pleased that we had no Portuguese +on board, saying that it was the kings pleasure we should bring +none of that nation, whom they considered as a people devoid of +truth[331]. They complained of one Francisco de Costa, a servant +of Don Antonio, who had often, and particularly the former year, +abused their king Amar Malek, promising to bring him certain +things out of England which he had never done, and supposed that +might be his reason for not coming this voyage. They said +likewise that neither the Portuguese nor Spaniards could abide +us, but always spoke to the great defamation and dishonour of +England. They also affirmed that on the arrival of a ship called +the Command, belonging to Richard Kelley of Dartmouth, one Pedro +Gonzalves, a Portuguese, who came in that ship from Don Antonio, +reported to them that we were fled from England, and had come to +rob and commit great spoil on the coast, and that Thomas Dassel +had murdered Francisco de Acosta since we left England, who was +coming in our ship with great presents for their king from Don +Antonio, desiring on our arrival that they should seize our goods +and ourselves secretly. They assured us however that they had +refused to do this, as they disbelieved the report of Gonzalves, +having often before been abused and deceived by such false and +slanderous stories by the Portuguese. Their king, they said, was +extremely sorry for the former murder of our people, and would +never consent to any such thing in future, holding the Portuguese +and Spaniards in utter abhorrence ever since, and having a much +better opinion of us and our nation than these our enemies wished +them to entertain. I gave them hearty thanks for their good +opinion, assuring them that they should always find a great +difference between our honour, and the dishonourable words and +actions of our enemies, and then paid them the customary duties. +As this was a chief place for trade, I told them that I intended +to wait upon their king that I might give him certain presents +which I had brought out of England, on purpose to strengthen the +friendship between their nation and ours.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 331: From this and other passages of the +present journal, it appears that the English used to carry a +Portuguese along with them in their first voyages to the coast of +Africa, whether from choice or by agreement with the government +of Portugal does not clearly appear: and that, finding the +inconvenience of this custom, they began now to lay it aside. +This seems to have provoked the king of Portugal, who proposed to +ruin the English trade by means of these agents or +spies.--<i>Astl</i>. I. 214. b.]</blockquote> + +<p>All this time, Thomas Dassel was with our large pinnace at the +town of Joala, in the dominions of king Jocoel Lamiockeric, +trading with the Spaniards and Portuguese at that place. The +before-mentioned Pedro Gonzalves, who had come out of England, +was there also along with some English merchants, employed in the +service of Richard Kelley. As Gonzalves had not been able to +accomplish his treacherous purposes against Dassel at Porto +d'Ally, where I remained, he attempted, along with other +Portuguese who were made privy to his design, to betray Dassel at +this town of Joala, and had seduced the chiefs among the negroes, +by means of bribes, to concur in his wicked and most treacherous +intentions. These, by the good providence of God, were revealed +to Thomas Dassel by Richard Cape, an Englishman, in the service +of Richard Kelley; on which Thomas Dassel went on board a small +English bark called the Cherubim of Lyme, where a Portuguese +named Joam Payva, a servant of Don Antonio, declared that Thomas +Dassel would have been betrayed long before, if he and one +Garcia, a Portuguese, who lived at Joala, would have concurred +with Pedro Gonzalves. Upon this warning, Thomas Dassel contrived +next day to get three Portuguese on board the pinnace, two of +whom he sent on shore, and detained the third named Villanova as +an hostage, sending a message that if they would bring Gonzalves +on board next day by eight o'clock, he would release Villanova; +but they did not. Dassel likewise got intelligence, that certain +Portuguese and negroes were gone post by land from Joala to Porto +d'Ally, with the view of having me, Richard Rainolds, and my +company detained on shore; and, being doubtful of the negro +friendship, who were often wavering, especially when overcome by +wine, he came with his pinnace and the Portuguese hostage to +Porto d'Ally on the 24th December, for our greater security, and +to prevent any treacherous plan that might have been attempted +against us in the roads by the Portuguese. He was no sooner +arrived beside our large ship the Nightingale in the road of +Porto d'Ally, than news was brought him from John Baily, servant +to Anthony Dassel, that he and our goods were detained on shore, +and that twenty Portuguese and Spaniards were come there from +Joala along with Pedro Gonzalves, for the purpose of getting +Villanova released. After a conference of two or three days, held +with the negro chiefs and the Spaniards and Portuguese, the +negroes were in the end convinced how vilely Pedro Gonzalves had +behaved; and as he was in their power, they said he ought to +suffer death or torture for his villany, as an example to others; +but we, in recompence of his cruel treachery, pitied him and +shewed mercy, desiring the negroes to use him well though +undeserving; upon which the negro chiefs brought him on board the +pinnace to Thomas Dassel, to do with him as he thought proper. +Owing to some improper language he had used of certain princes, +Gonzalves was well buffetted by a Spaniard at his coming off from +the shore, and had been slain if the natives had not rescued him +for our sakes.</p> + +<p>When I went on shore to release Villanova, Pedro Gonzalves +confessed to Thomas Dassel, that he had concerted with some +negroes and Portuguese about detaining Dassel and the goods on +shore; but that he had acted nothing on this subject without +authority from his king, contained in certain letters he had +received at Dartmouth from London, after our departure from the +Thames, occasioned by our presuming to trade to Guinea without a +servant of the king of Portugal; and declared likewise that he +had power or authority from Francisco de Costa, a Portuguese, +remaining in England, to detain the goods of Anthony Dassel in +Guinea. By consent of Francis Tucker, John Browbeare, and the +other factors of Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonzalves +came from England, it was agreed that we should detain Gonzalves +in our ships until their departure, to avoid any other mischief +that he might contrive. Therefore, on 9th January 1592, he was +delivered to go for England in the same ship that brought him, +being all the time he remained in our ship, well and courteously +treated by me, though much against the will of our mariners, who +were much disgusted at seeing one who had been nourished and +relieved in our country, seeking, by villanous means, to procure +the destruction of us all.</p> + +<p>Although the Spaniards and Portuguese are dissemblers and not +to be trusted, yet when they saw how the subjects of Amar Malek +befriended and favoured us, and that it would be prejudicial to +their trade if we were any way injured, they renounced their evil +intentions against us, shewing detestation of him who had been +the cause of it, and promised to defend us and our affairs in all +faithfulness for the future; desiring us, as the negro king had +done already, to bring no more Portuguese with us from England, +for they esteemed one bar of iron as more valuable than twenty +Portuguese, and more serviceable towards the profitable trade +which had been of late carried on by us and the French; whereas +the Portuguese, whom we were in use to bring with us, endeavoured +all they could to do us injury, and even to hurt all parties +concerned in the trade.</p> + +<p>At the beginning of these broils, Amar Malek had sent his +chief secretary with three horses for me, Richard Rainolds; but I +refused going, on account of the disturbances, though I might +have had negroes of condition left as hostages for my safety; yet +I transmitted the customary presents for the king. When he +understood the reason of my not coming to his residence, he was +very sorry and much offended at the cause, and immediately issued +a proclamation, commanding that no injury should be done to us in +his dominions by his own people, neither suffered to be done by +the Spaniards or Portuguese; and declaring, if any of the +neighbouring negro tribes should confederate with the Spaniards +and Portuguese to molest us, that he and his subjects should be +ready to aid and defend us. Thus there appeared more kindness and +good will towards us in these ignorant negroes, than in the +Spaniards and Portuguese.</p> + +<p>None of the Spaniards or Portuguese are in use to trade up the +river Senegal, except one Portuguese named <i>Ganigogo</i> who +dwells far up that river, where he has married the daughter of +one of the kings. In the towns of Porto d'Ally and Joala, which +are the places of chief trade on this coast, and at Cauton and +Cassan in the river Gambia, there are many Spaniards and +Portuguese who have become resident by permission of the negroes, +and carry on a valuable trade all along the coast, especially to +the Rio San Dominica and Rio Grande, which are not far distant +from the Gambia, to which places they transport the iron which +they purchase from us and the French, exchanging it for <i>negro +slaves</i>, which are transported to the West Indies in ships +that come hither from Spain. By order of the governor and renters +of the castle of Mina, and of all those places on the coast of +Guinea where gold is to be had, these residents have a place +limited for them in the river Gambia, beyond which they must not +go under pain of death and confiscation of their goods; as the +renters themselves send their own barks at certain times up the +river, to those places where gold is to be had. In all those +places hereabout, where we are in use to trade, the Spaniards and +Portuguese have no castle or other place of strength, merely +trading under the licence and safe conduct of the negroes. Most +of the Spaniards and Portuguese who reside in those parts are +banished men or fugitives, who have committed heinous crimes; and +their life and conversation is conformable to their conditions, +as they are the basest and most villainously behaved persons of +their nation that are to be met with in any part of the +world.</p> + +<h2><a name="chapter3-8" id="chapter3-8">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h2> + +<p>SOME MISCELLANEOUS EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH.</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>The present chapter is rather of an anomalous nature, and +chiefly consists of naval expeditions against the Spaniards and +Portuguese, scarcely belonging in any respect to our plan of +arrangement: yet, as contained mostly in the ancient English +collection of Hakluyt, and in that by Astley, we have deemed it +improper to exclude them from our pages, where they may be +considered in some measure as an episode. Indeed, in every +extensively comprehensive plan, some degree of anomaly is +unavoidable. The following apology or reason given by the editor +of Astley's collection for inserting them in that valuable work, +may serve us likewise on the present occasion; though surely no +excuse can be needed, in a national collection like ours, for +recording the exploits of our unrivalled naval defenders.</p> + +<p>"For want of a continued series of trading voyages to Guinea, +we shall here insert an account of some remarkable achievements +by the English against the Spaniards and Portuguese; who, being +greatly alarmed to find out merchants extending their commerce, +and trading to those parts of the world which they pretended a +right of engrossing to themselves, began to treat our ships very +severely, wherever they had the superiority; and when they wanted +force, endeavoured to surprise them by treachery, never scrupling +to violate the most solemn oaths and engagements to compass their +designs. For this reason the English merchant ships were obliged +to go to sea armed and in company; by which means they not only +prevented the outrages of these faithless enemies, but often +revenged the injuries done to others of their countrymen. At +length, the resentment of the nation being inflamed by their +repeated treacheries and depredations, the English began to send +out fleets to annoy their coasts and disturb their navigation. Of +these proceedings, we propose to give a few instances in this +chapter, which may suffice to shew the noble spirit that +prevailed in these early times."--<i>Astl</i>. I. 194.</p> + +<p>SECTION I.</p> + +<p><i>Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in Spain, in +1585</i>[332].</p> + +<p>It is not unknown to the world, what dangers our English ships +have lately escaped from, how sharply they have been entreated, +and how hardly they have been assaulted; insomuch that the valour +of those who managed and defended them is worthy of being held in +remembrance. Wherefore, the courageous attempt and valiant +enterprize of the tall ship named the Primrose of London, from +before the town of Bilboa, in the province of Biscay in Spain, +(which ship the corregidore of that province, accompanied by 97 +Spaniards, offered violently to arrest, yet was defeated of his +purpose, and brought prisoner into England,) having obtained +renown, I have taken in hand to publish the truth thereof, that +it may be generally known to the rest of our English ships; that, +by the good example of this gallant exploit, the rest may be +encouraged and incited in like extremity to act in a similar +manner, to the glory of the realm and their own +honour.--<i>Hakluyt</i>, II, 597.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 332: Hakluyt, II. 537. Astley, +I.194.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Upon Wednesday the 26th of May 1585, while the ship Primrose +of 150 tons was riding at anchor off the bay of Bilboa, where she +had been two days, there came on board a Spanish pinnace, in +which were the corregidore and six others, who seemed to be +merchants, bringing cherries with, them, and spoke in a very +friendly manner to the master of the ship, whose name was Foster. +He received them courteously, giving them the best cheer he +could, with beer, beef, and biscuit. While thus banqueting, four +of the seven departed in the pinnace for Bilboa; the other three +remaining, and seeming much pleased with their entertainment. Yet +Mr Foster was suspicious of some evil designs, and gave secret +intimation to his people that he was doubtful of the intentions +of these men, but said nothing to his guests by which they could +any way surmise that he distrusted them. Soon afterwards there +came a shipboat in which were seventy persons, seemingly +merchants and the like of Biscay, and a little behind came the +pinnace in which were twenty-four other persons, as the Spaniards +afterwards confessed. On reaching the Primrose, the corregidore +and three or four of his men went on board that ship; but on +seeing such a multitude, Mr Foster desired that no more might +come on aboard which was agreed to: Yet suddenly all the +Spaniards left their boat and boarded the Primrose, all being +armed with rapiers and other weapons which they had brought +secretly in the boat, and had even a drum along with them to +proclaim their expected triumph.</p> + +<p>On getting on board, the Spaniards dispersed themselves over +the ship, some below deck, others entering the cabins, while the +most part remained in a body as if to guard their prize. Then the +corregidore, who had an officer along with him bearing a white +rod in his hand, desired Mr Foster to yield himself as a prisoner +to the king of Spain; on which he called out to his men that they +were betrayed. At this time some of the Spaniards threatened Mr +Foster with their daggers in a furious manner, as if they would +have slain him, yet they had no such purpose, meaning only to +have taken him and his men prisoners. Mr Foster and his men were +amazed at this sudden assault, and were greatly concerned to +think themselves ready to be put to death; yet some of them, much +concerned for their own and Mr Fosters danger, and believing +themselves doomed to death if landed as prisoners, determined +either to defend themselves manfully or to die with arms in their +hands, rather than to submit to the hands of the tormentors[333]; +wherefore they boldly took to their weapons, some armed with +javelins, lances, and boar-spears, and others with five calivers +ready charged, being all the fire-arms they had. With these they +fired up through the gratings of the hatches at the Spaniards on +deck, at which the Spaniards were sore amazed not knowing how to +escape the danger, and fearing the English had more fire-arms +than they actually possessed. Others of the crew laid manfully +about among the Spaniards with their lances and boar-spears, +disabling two or three of the Spaniards at every stroke. Then +some of the Spaniards urged Mr Foster to command his men to lay +down their arms and surrender; but he told them that the English +were so courageous in the defence of their lives and liberties, +that it was not in his power to controul them, for on such an +occasion they would slay both them and him. At this time the +blood of the Spaniards flowed plentifully about the deck; some +being shot between the legs from below, the bullets came out at +their breasts; some were cut in the head, others thrust in the +body, and many of them so sore wounded that they rushed faster +out at one side of the ship than they came in at the other, +tumbling fast overboard on both side with their weapons, some +falling into the sea, and others into their boats, in which they +made all haste on shore. But though they came to the ship in +great numbers, only a small number of them returned, yet it is +not known how many of them were slain or drowned. On this +occasion only one Englishman was slain named John Tristram, and +six others wounded; but it was piteous to behold so many +Spaniards swimming in the sea, and unable to save their lives, of +whom four who had got hold of some part of the ship, were rescued +from the waves by Mr Foster and his men, whose bosoms were found +stuffed with paper to defend them from the shot, and these four +being wounded, were dressed by the English surgeon. One of these +was the corregidore himself, who was governor over an hundred +cities and towns, his appointments exceeding six hundred pounds a +year. This strange incident took place about six o'clock in the +evening; after they had landed upwards of twenty tons of goods +from the Primrose, which were delivered at Bilboa by John Barrell +and John Brodbank, who were made prisoners on shore.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 333: This seems to allude to their fears of +the Inquisition, if made prisoners.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After this valiant exploit, performed by 28 Englishmen against +97 Spaniards, Mr Foster and his men saw that it were vain for +them to remain any longer; wherefore they hoisted their sails and +came away with the rest of their goods, and arrived safely by the +blessing of God near London, on the 8th June 1585. During their +return towards England, the corregidore and the other Spaniards +they had made prisoners offered 500 crowns to be set on shore +anywhere on the coast of Spain or Portugal; but as Mr Foster +would not consent, they were glad to crave mercy and remain on +board. On being questioned by Mr Foster as to their reason for +endeavouring thus to betray him and his men, the corregidore +assured him it was not done of their own accord, but by the +command of the king of Spain; and calling for his hose, which +were wet, he took out the royal commission authorising and +commanding him to do what he had attempted, which was to the +following purport:</p> + +<p>"Licentiate de Escober, my corregidore of my lordship of +Biscay. Seeing that I have caused a great fleet to be equipped in +the havens of Lisbon and Seville, that there is required for the +soldiers, armour, victuals, and ammunition, and that great store +of shipping is wanted for the said service: I therefore require +you, on sight of this order, that with as much secrecy as may be, +you take order for arresting all the shipping that may be found +on the coast and in the ports of the said lordship, particularly +all such as belong to Holland, Zealand, Esterland, Germany, +England, or other provinces and countries that are in rebellion +against me; excepting those of France, which, being small and +weak, are thought unfit for the present service. And being thus +arrested and staid, you shall take special care, that such +merchandise as are on board these ships be taken out, and that +all the armour, arms, ammunition, tackle, sails, and provisions +be bestowed in safe custody, so that none of the ships and men +may escape, &c. Done at Barcelona, the 29th May 1585."</p> + +<p>In this gallant exploit is to be noted, both the great courage +of the master, and the love of the mariners to save their master; +likewise the great care of Mr Foster to save as much as he could +of the goods of his owners, although by this conduct he may never +more frequent those parts, without losing his own life and those +of his people, as they would assuredly, if known, subject +themselves to the sharp torments of their <i>Holy house</i>. As +for the king of Spain pretending that the English were in +rebellion against him, it is sufficiently well known even to +themselves, with what love, unity, and concord our ships have +ever dealt with them, being always at least as willing to shew +pleasure and respect to their king and them, as they have been to +deal hospitably by the English.--<i>Hakl.</i></p> + +<p>SECTION II.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West +Indies</i>[334].</p> + +<p>Upon the knowledge of the embargo laid by the king of Spain in +1585, upon the English ships, men, and goods found in his +country, having no means to relieve her subjects by friendly +treaty, her majesty authorised such as had sustained loss by that +order of embargo to right themselves by making reprisals upon the +subjects of the king of Spain; for which she gave them her +letters of reprisal, to take and arrest all ships and +merchandises they might find at sea or elsewhere, belonging to +the subjects of that King. At the same time, to revenge the +wrongs offered to her crown and dignity, and to resist the +preparations then making against her by the king of Spain, her +majesty equipped a fleet of twenty-five sail of ships, and +employed them under the command of Sir Francis Drake, as the +fittest person in her dominions, by reason of his experience and +success in sundry actions.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 334: Church. Collect. III. +155.]</blockquote> + +<p>It is not my intention to give all the particulars of the +voyages treated of, but merely to enumerate the services +performed, and the mistakes and oversights committed, as a +warning to those who may read them, to prevent the like errors +hereafter. As this voyage of Sir Francis Drake was the first +undertaking on either side in this war, for it ensued immediately +after the arrest of our ships and goods in Spain, I shall deliver +my opinion of it before I proceed any farther. One impediment to +the voyage was, that to which the ill success of several others +that followed was imputed, viz. the want of victuals and other +necessaries fit for so great an expedition; for had not this +fleet met with a ship of Biscay, coming from Newfoundland with +fish, which relieved their necessities, they had been reduced to +great extremity. In this expedition Sir Francis Drake sailed in +the Elizabeth Bonadventure; captain Frobisher, in the Aid was +second in command; and captain Carlee was lieutenant-general of +the forces by land, Sir Francis having the supreme command both +as admiral and general.</p> + +<p>The services performed in this expedition were, the taking and +sacking of St Domingo in Hispaniola, of Carthagena on the +continent of America, and of St Justina in Florida, three towns +of great importance in the West Indies. This fleet was the +greatest of any nation, except the Spaniards, that had ever been +seen in these seas since their first discovery; and, if the +expedition had been as well considered of before going from home, +as it was happily performed by the valour of those engaged, it +had more annoyed the king of Spain than all the other actions +that ensued during that war. But it seems our long peace had made +us incapable of advice in war; for had we kept and defended those +places when in our possession, and made provision to have +relieved them from England, we had diverted the war from Europe; +for at that time there was no comparison betwixt the strength of +Spain and England by sea, by means whereof we might have better +defended these acquisitions, and might more easily have +encroached upon the rest of the Indies, than the king of Spain +could have aided or succoured them. But now we see and find by +experience, that those places which were then weak and +unfortified, are since fortified, so that it is to no purpose for +us to attempt annoying the king of Spain now in his dominions in +the West Indies. And, though this expedition proved fortunate and +victorious, yet as it was father an awakening than a weakening of +the king of Spain, it had been far better wholly let alone, than +to have undertaken it on such slender grounds, and with such +inconsiderable forces[335].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 335: It must be acknowledged that the +present section can only be considered as a species of +introduction or prelude to an intended narrative of an +expedition: Yet such actually is the first article in Sir William +Monson's celebrated Naval Tracts, as published in the Collection +of Churchill; leaving the entire of the narrative an absolute +blank. Nothing could well justify the adoption of this +inconclusive and utterly imperfect article, but the celebrity of +its author and actor: For Sir William Monson, and the editor of +Churchill's Collection, seem to have dosed in giving to the +public this <i>Vox et preterea nihil</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION III.</p> + +<p><i>Cruizing Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, in 1586, +written by John Evesham</i>[336].</p> + +<p>This voyage was performed by two barks or pinnaces, the +Serpent of 35 tons, and the Mary Sparke of Plymouth of 50 tons, +both belonging to Sir Walter Raleigh, knight. Leaving Plymouth on +the 10th June 1586, we directed our course in the first place for +the coast of Spain, and thence for the islands called the Azores, +in which course we captured a small bark, laden with sumach and +other commodities, in which was the Portuguese governor of St +Michael's Island, with several other Portuguese and Spaniards. +Sailing thence to the island of Gracioso, westward of Tercera, we +descried a sail to which we gave chase, and found her to be a +Spaniard. But at the first, not much respecting whom we took, so +that we might enrich ourselves, which was the object of our +expedition, and not willing it should be known what we were, we +displayed a white silk ensign in our maintop, which made them +believe that we were of the Spanish navy laying in wait for +English cruizers; but when we got within shot, we hauled down our +white flag, and hoisted the St Georges ensign, on which they fled +as fast as they were able, but all in vain, as our ships sailed +faster than they; wherefore they threw overboard all their +ordnance and shot, with many letters and the chart of the straits +of Magellan, which lead into the south sea, immediately after +which we took her, finding on board a Spanish gentleman named +Pedro Sarmiento, who was governor of the straits of Magellan, +whom we brought home to England, and presented to the queen our +sovereign.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 336: Hakluyt; II. 606. Astley, I. 196. The +command of this expedition is attributed by the editor of +Astley's Collection to captain Whiddon, on the authority of the +concluding sentence.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>After this, while plying off and on about the islands, we +espied another sail to which we gave chase, during which our +admiral sprung his main-mast; yet in the night our vice-admiral +got up with and captured the chase, which we found was laden with +fish from Cape Blanco on which we let her go for want of hands to +bring her home. Next day we descried two vessels, one a ship and +the other a caravel, to which we gave chase, on which they made +with all haste for the island of Gracioso, where they got to +anchor under protection of a fort; as having the wind of us we +were unable to cut them off from the land, or to get up to attack +them with our ships as they lay at anchor. Having a small boat +which we called a <i>light horseman</i>, there went into her +myself and four men armed with calivers, and four others to row, +in which we went towards them against the wind. On seeing us row +towards them, they carried a considerable part of their +merchandise on shore, and landed all the men of both vessels; and +as soon as we got near, they began to fire upon us both from +their cannon and small arms, which we returned as well as we +could. We then boarded one of their ships, in which they had not +left a single man; and having cut her cables and hoisted her +sails, we sent her off with two of our men. The other seven of us +then went very near the shore and boarded the caravel, which rode +within stones throw of the shore, insomuch that the people on the +land threw stones at us; yet in spite of them, we took possession +of her, there being only one negro on board. Having cut her +cables and hoisted her sails, she was so becalmed under the land +that we had to tow her off with our boat, the fort still firing +on us from their cannon, while the people on shore, to the number +of about 150, continually fired at us with muskets and calivers, +we answering them with our five muskets. At this time the shot +from my musket, being a bar-shot, happened to strike the gunner +of the fort dead, while he was levelling one of his great guns; +and thus we got off from them without loss or wound on our part. +Having thus taken five[337] sail in all, we did as we had done +with the ship with the fish, we turned them off without hurting +them, save that we took from one of them her mainmast for our +admiral, and sent her away with all our Spanish and Portuguese +prisoners, except Pedro Sarmiento, three other principal persons, +and two negroes, leaving them within sight of land, with bread +and water sufficient to serve them ten days.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 337: Four only are mentioned in the text; +and it appears that they only sent away at this time the first +taken ship, in which they had captured +Sarmiento.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We now bent our course for England, taking our departure from +off the western islands in about the latitude of 41° N. and +soon afterwards one of our men descried a sail from the foretop, +then ten sail, and then fifteen sail. It was now concluded to +send off our two prizes, by manning of which we did not leave +above 60 men in our two pinnaces. When we had dispatched them, we +made sail towards the fleet we had discovered, which we found to +consist of 24 sail in all; two of them being great caraks, one of +1200 and the other of 1000 tons, and 10 galeons, all the rest +being small ships and caravels, laden with treasure, spices, and +sugars. In our two small pinnaces we kept company with this fleet +of 24 ships for 32 hours, continually fighting with them and they +with us; but the two huge caraks always kept between their fleet +and us, so that we were unable to take any one of them; till at +length, our powder growing short, we were forced to give over, +much against our wills, being much bent upon gaining some of +them, but necessity compelling us by want of powder, we left +them, without any loss of our men, which was wonderful, +considering the disparity of force and numbers.</p> + +<p>We now continued our course to Plymouth, where we arrived +within six hours after our prizes, though we sent them away forty +hours before we began our homeward course. We were joyfully +received, with the ordnance of the town, and all the people +hailed us with willing hearts, we not sparing our shot in return +with what powder we had left. From thence we carried our prizes +to Southampton, where our owner, Sir Walter Raleigh, met us and +distributed to us our shares of the prizes.</p> + +<p>Our prizes were laden with sugars, elephants teeth, wax, +hides, Brazil-wood, and <i>cuser?</i> as may be made manifest by +the testimony of me, John Evesham, the writer hereof, as likewise +of captains Whiddon, Thomas Rainford, Benjamin Wood, William +Cooper master, William Cornish master, Thomas Drak corporal, John +Ladd gunner, William Warefield gunner, Richard Moon, John Drew, +Richard Cooper of Harwich, William Beares of Ratcliff, John Row +of Saltash, and many others.</p> + +<p>SECTION IV.</p> + +<p><i>Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir Francis +Drake in 1587</i>[338].</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>The title of this article at large in Hakluyt is, A brief +relation of the notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake, +upon the Spanish fleet prepared in the road of Cadiz; and of his +destroying 100 sail of barks; passing from thence all along the +coast of Spain to <i>Cape Sacre</i>, where also he took certain +forts; and so to the mouth of the river of Lisbon; thence +crossing over sea to the isle of St Michael, where he surprised a +mighty carak called the St Philip, coming from the East Indies, +being the first of that kind ever seen in England.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 338: Hakl. II. 607. Astl. I. +197.]</blockquote> + +<p>The editor of Astleys Collection says, that this relation +seems to have been taken from a letter, written by one who was in +the expedition to a friend; and thinks that it is not unlike the +manner of Sir Walter Raleigh.--E.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Being informed of mighty naval preparations in Spain for the +invasion of England, her Majesty queen Elizabeth, by the good +advice of her grave and prudent council, thought it expedient to +use measures to prevent the same; for which purpose she caused a +fleet of some thirty sail to be equipped, over which she +appointed as general Sir Francis Drake, of whose many former good +services she had sufficient proof. She accordingly caused four +ships of her royal navy to be delivered to him, the Bonaventure, +in which he went general; the Lion, under the command of Mr +William Borough, comptroller of the navy; the Dreadnought, +commanded by Mr Thomas Venner; and the Rainbow, of which Mr Henry +Bellingham was captain[339]. Besides these four ships, two of her +majestys pinnaces were appointed to serve as tenders or advice +boats. To this fleet, there were added certain tall ships +belonging to the city of London, of whose special good service +the general made particular mention, in his letters to the +queen.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 339: Sir William Monson in his Naval +Tracts, in Churchills Collection, III. 156, gives a short account +of this expedition. By him the admiral ship is called the +Elizabeth Bonaventure, and Sir William Burroughs is called vice +admiral. From a list given by Sir William Monson of the royal +navy of England left by queen Elizabeth at her death, (Church. +Coll. III. 196.) the Bonaventure appears to have been of the +burden of 600 tons, carrying 50 pieces of cannon and 250 men, 70 +of whom were mariners, and the rest landsmen. The Lion and +Rainbow of 500 tons each, with the same number of guns and men as +the Bonaventure. The Dreadnought of 400 tons, 20 guns, 200 men, +50 of them seamen.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This fleet sailed from Plymouth Sound, towards the coast of +Spain, in April 1587. The 16th of that month, in latitude of +40° N. we met two ships belonging to Middleburg, in Zealand, +coming from Cadiz, by which we were acquainted that vast +abundance of warlike stores were provided at Cadiz and that +neighbourhood, and were ready to be sent to Lisbon. Upon this +information, our general made sail with all possible expedition +thither, to cut off and destroy their said forces and stores, and +upon the 19th of April entered with his fleet into the harbour of +Cadiz; where at our first entering we were assailed by six +gallies over against the town, but which we soon constrained to +retire under cover of their fortress. There were in the road at +our arrival sixty ships, besides sundry small vessels close under +the fortress. Twenty French ships fled immediately to Puerta +Real, followed by some small Spanish vessels that were able to +pass the shoals. At our first coming, we sunk a ship belonging to +Ragusa of 1000 tons, very richly laden, which was armed with 40 +brass guns. There came two other gallies from Port St Mary, and +two more from Puerta Real, which shot freely at us, but +altogether in vain, so that they were forced to retire well +beaten for their pains. Before night we had taken 30 of their +ships, and were entire masters of the road in spite of the +gallies, which were glad to retire under the protection of the +fort. Among the captured ships was one quite new, of +extraordinary size, being above 1200 tons burden, belonging to +the Marquis of Santa Cruz, high admiral of Spain. Five were ships +of Biscay, four of which were taking in stores and provisions +belonging to the king of Spain for his great fleet at Lisbon, +which we burnt. The fifth was of about 1000 tons, laden with iron +spikes, nails, hoops, horse shoes, and other things of a similar +kind, for the West Indies, which we likewise set on fire. We also +took a ship of 250 tons, laden with wines on the kings account, +which ship we carried with us to sea, when we took out the wines +for our own use, and then set her on fire. We took three fliboats +of 300 tons each, laden with biscuit, one of which we set on +fire, after taking out half her loading, and took the other two +with us to sea. We likewise fired ten ships, which were laden +with wine, raisins, figs, oil, wheat, and the like. The whole +number of ships which we then burnt, sunk, or brought away, +amounted to 30 at the least, and by our estimation to the burden +of 10,000 tons. Besides these, there were about 40 ships at +Puerta Real, not including those that fled from Cadiz.</p> + +<p>We found little ease during our stay in the road of Cadiz, as +the enemy were continually firing at us from the gallies, the +fortress, and the shore, being continually employed in planting +new batteries against us in all convenient situations; besides +which, finding they could not defend their ships any longer, they +set them on fire that they might come among us, so that at the +tide of flood we had much ado to defend ourselves: Yet was this a +pleasant sight to behold, as we were thereby relieved from the +great labour and fatigue of discharging the provisions and stores +belonging to the enemy into our ships. Thus, by the assistance of +the Almighty, and the invincible courage and good conduct of our +general, this perilous but happy enterprize was achieved in one +day and two nights, to the great astonishment of the king of +Spain, and the so great vexation of the Marquis of Santa Cruz, +the high admiral, that he never had a good day after, and in a +few months, as may justly be supposed, he died of extreme grief. +Having thus performed this notable service, we came out from the +road of Cadiz on Friday morning, the 21st of April, having +sustained so small loss as is not worth mentioning.</p> + +<p>After our departure, the ten gallies which were in the road of +Cadiz came out after us, as if in bravado, playing their ordnance +against us. At this time the wind scanted, upon which we cast +round again, and made for the shore, coming to anchor within a +league of the town; and there, for all their vapouring, the +gallies allowed us to ride in quiet. Having thus had experience +of a galley fight, I can assure you that the four ships of her +majesty which we had with us would make no scruple to fight with +twenty gallies, if all alone, and not being occupied in guarding +others. There never were gallies that had better place and +opportunity of advantage to fight against ships; yet were they +forced to retire from us while riding at anchor in a narrow gut, +which we were obliged to maintain till we had discharged and +fired their ships, which we could only do conveniently upon the +flood tide, at which time the burning ships might drive clear of +us. Being thus provisioned for several months with bread and wine +at the enemies cost, besides what we had brought with us from +England, our general dispatched captain Crosse to England with +his letters, giving him farther in charge to relate all the +particulars of this our first enterprize to her majesty.</p> + +<p>We then shaped our course to Cape Sacre[340], and in our way +thither we took at several times near 100 ships, barks, and +caravels, laden with hoops, galley oars, pipe staves, and other +stores belonging to the king of Spain, intended for furthering +his preparations against England, all of which we set on fire and +destroyed, setting all their men on shore. We also spoiled and +destroyed all the fishing boats and nets thereabouts, to their +great annoyance, and as we suppose to the entire overthrow of +their rich Tunny fishing for that year. We came at length to Cape +Sagres, where we landed; and the better to enjoy the harbour at +our ease[341], we assailed the castle of Sagres and three other +strong holds, some of which we took by storm and others by +surrender. From thence we came before the harbour of Lisbon or +mouth of the Tagus, where lay the Marquis of Santa Cruz with his +fleet of gallies, who seeing us chase his ships on shore, and +take and carry away his barks and caravels, was obliged to allow +us to remain quietly at our pleasure, and likewise to depart, +without exchanging a single shot. When our general sent him word +that he was ready to combat with him, the marquis refused his +challenge, saying that he was not then ready, neither had he any +such commission from his sovereign.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 340: Cape St Vincent, or rather Punta de +Sagres, one of the head lands of that great +promontory.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 341: Probably the harbour of Figuera in +Algarve, a town near Cape Sagres.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Thus having his challenge refused by the marquis, and seeing +no more good to be done on the coast of Spain, our general +thought it improper to spend any more time there; and therefore +with consent of his chief officers[342], he shaped his course +towards the island of St Michael, within 20 or 30 leagues of +which he had the good fortune to fall in with a Portuguese carak, +called the San Philippo, being the same ship which had carried +out to the Indies three Japanese princes who had been in +Europe[343]. The carak surrendered without resistance, and being +the first that had ever been taken on the homeward voyage from +India, the Portuguese took it for a bad omen, especially as she +had the kings own name. Our general put all the people belonging +to this carak into certain vessels well provided with provisions, +and sent them courteously home to their own country. The riches +of this prize seemed so great to the whole fleet, as in truth +they were, that every one expected to have sufficient reward of +their labour, and thereupon it was unanimously resolved to return +to England, which we happily did, and arrived safe the same +summer in Plymouth with our whole fleet and this rich booty, to +our own profit and due honour, and the great admiration of the +whole kingdom.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 342: According to Sir William Monson, +Church. Col. III. 156. Sir Francis Drake went upon this +expedition to conciliate the merchant adventurers, to whom most +of the ships of his squadron belonged.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 343: Sir William Monson, in the place +quoted above, says he had intelligence of this carak having +wintered at Mosambique, and being now expected +home.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>It may be here noted, that the taking of this carak wrought +two extraordinary effects in England; as in the first place it +taught others that caraks were no such bugbears but that they +might be easily taken, as has been since experienced in taking +the Madre de Dios, and in burning and sinking others; and +secondly in acquainting the English nation more particularly with +the exceeding riches and vast wealth of the East Indies, by which +themselves and their neighbours of Holland have been encouraged, +being no less skillful in navigation nor of less courage than the +Portuguese, to share with them in the rich trade of India, where +they are by no means so strong as was formerly supposed.</p> + +<p>SECTION V.</p> + +<p><i>Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish Armada in +1588</i>[344].</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the great hurt and spoil made by Sir Francis +Drake in Cadiz roads the year before, by intercepting some part +of the preparations intended for the great navy of the king of +Spain, he used his utmost endeavours to be revenged this year, +lest by longer delay his designs might be prevented as before; +wherefore he arrested all ships, men, and necessaries that were +wanting for his fleet, compelling every one to serve him in his +great expedition. He appointed for general of this his so called +Invincible Armada, the duke of Medina Sidonia, who was employed +on this occasion more for his high birth and exalted rank, than +for any experience in sea affairs; for so many dukes, marquises, +and earls had volunteered on this occasion, that it was feared +they might repine if commanded by a person of lower quality than +themselves. They departed from Lisbon on the 19th of May 1588, +with the greatest pride and glory, and with less doubt of victory +than ever had been done by any nation. But God, angry with their +insolence, turned the event quite contrary to their +expectation.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 344: Church. Col. III. 157.]</blockquote> + +<p>The directions given by the king of Spain to his general, the +duke of Medina Sidonia, were to repair, as wind and weather might +allow, to the road of Calais in Picardy, there to wait the +arrival of the prince of Parma and his army, and on their meeting +they were to open a letter containing their farther instructions. +He was especially commanded to sail along the coasts of Brittany +and Normandy in going up the channel, to avoid being discovered +by the English; and, if he even met the English fleet, he was in +no case to offer them battle, but only to defend himself in case +of attack. On coming athwart the North Cape[345] the duke was +assailed with contrary wind and foul weather, by which he was +forced to take shelter in the <i>Groyne</i>, or bay of Corunna, +where part of his fleet waited for him.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 345: Perhaps Cape Ortegal may be here +meant, being the most northern head land of Spain, and not far +from Corunna, called the Groyne in the text.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When about to depart from Corunna, the duke got intelligence +from an English fisherman, that our fleet had lately been at sea, +but had put back again and discharged most of their men, as not +expecting the Spanish armada this year. This intelligence +occasioned the duke to alter his resolutions, and to disobey the +instructions given him by the king; yet this was not done without +some difficulty, as the council was divided in opinion, some +holding it best to observe the kings commands, while others were +anxious not to lose the opportunity of surprising our fleet at +unawares, when they hoped to burn and destroy them. Diego Flores +de Valdes, who commanded the squadron of Andalusia, and on whom +the duke most relied, because of his judgment and experience in +maritime affairs, was the main cause of persuading to make the +attempt upon our ships in harbour, and in that design they +directed their course for England.</p> + +<p>The first land they fell in with was the Lizard, being the +most southerly point of Cornwall, which they mistook for the +Ram-head off Plymouth; and as the night was at hand, they tacked +out to sea, laying their account to make an attempt upon our +ships in Plymouth next morning. In the mean time, while thus +deceived in the land, they were discovered by captain Fleming, a +pirate or freebooter who had been roving at sea, and who knowing +them to be the Spanish fleet, repaired in all haste to Plymouth, +and gave notice to our fleet then, riding at anchor, as +follows:</p> + +<p>THE ENGLISH FLEET[346].</p> + +<pre> +<i>Ships. Commanders. Tons. Guns. Men.</i> + The Ark Royal The Lord Admiral 800 32 400 + Revenge Sir F. Drake, vice admiral + Victory Sir J. Hawkins, rear admiral 800 52 400 + Lion Lord Thomas Howard 500 80 250 + Bear Lord Sheffield 900 40 500 + Elizabeth-Jonas Sir Robert Southwell 900 40 500 + Triumph Sir Martin Frobisher 1000 40 500 + Hope Captain Crosse 600 30 250 + Bonaventure ---- Reyman 600 30 250 + Dreadnought ---- George Beeston 400 20 200 + Nonparielle ---- Thomas Fenner 500 50 250 + Swiftsure ---- William Fenner 400 20 200 + Rainbow Lord Henry Seymour + Vauntguard Sir William Wentworth + Mary-Rose Captain Fenton + Antilope Sir Henry Palmer 350 16 160 + Foresight Captain Baker 300 16 160 + Aid ---- John Wentworth + Swallow ---- Richard Hawkins 330 16 160 + Tiger ---- William Wentworth 200 12 100 + Scout ---- Ashley 120 8 66 + Bull + Tremontanny 8 70 + Acatice 100 8 60 + Charles, pinnace Captain Roberts + Moon ---- Clifford + Spy ---- Bradbury 50 5 40 + Noy +</pre> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 346: This list, as given by Sir William +Monson in the present article, contains only the names of the +ships and commanders; the other circumstances enumerated, +tonnage, guns, and men, are added from a list of the royal navy +of England at the death of queen Elizabeth, which will be given +hereafter.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Immediately on receiving the intelligence brought by Fleming, +the lord admiral got out his ships to sea with all possible +expedition; so that before the Spaniards could draw near +Plymouth, they were welcomed at sea by the lord admiral and his +fleet, who continued to fight with them till they came to anchor +at Calais. The particulars of the fight and its success I +purposely omit, being things so well known[347].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 347: This surely is a poor excuse for +omitting the glorious destruction of the Spanish Armada; yet in a +Collection of Voyages, it were improper to attempt supplying even +this great omission, by any composition of our own; as it may be +found in the historians of the time.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>While this great armada was preparing, her majesty had +frequent and perfect intelligence of the designs of the +Spaniards; and knowing that the king of Spain intended to invade +England by means of a mighty fleet from his own coast, she caused +her royal navy to be fitted out under the conduct of the lord +high admiral of England, whom she stationed at Plymouth as the +fittest place for attending their coming. Knowing however, that +it was not the Armada alone which could endanger the safety of +England, as it was too weak for any enterprise on land, without +the assistance of the Prince of Parma and his army in Flanders, +she therefore appointed thirty ships of the Hollanders to lie at +anchor off Dunkirk, where the prince and his army were to have +embarked in flat bottomed boats, which were built on purpose and +all in readiness for the expedition to England. Thus by the wise +precautions of the queen, the prince was effectually prevented +from putting to sea with his flat boats; but in truth neither his +vessels nor his army were in readiness, which caused the king of +Spain to be jealous of him ever after, and is supposed to have +hastened his end.</p> + +<p>Although her majesty had taken the most vigilant precautions +to foresee and prevent all dangers that might threaten from sea, +yet did she not deem herself and country too secure against the +enemy by these means, and therefore prepared a royal army to +receive them in case of landing. But it was not the will of God +that the enemy should set foot on England, and the queen became +victorious over him at sea with small hazard, and little +bloodshed of her subjects. Having thus shewn the designs of the +Spaniards, and the course pursued by the queen to prevent them, I +propose now to consider the errors committed on both +sides[348].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 348: Our readers are requested to remember +that these are the reflections of Sir William Monson, a +contemporary.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Nothing could appear more rational or more likely to happen, +after the Duke of Medina Sidonia had got intelligence of the +state of our navy, than a desire to surprise them at unawares in +harbour; since he well knew, if he had taken away or destroyed +our strength at sea, that he might have landed when and where he +pleased, which is a great advantage to an invading enemy: Yet, +admitting it to have had the effect he designed, I see not how he +is to be commended for infringing the instructions he had +received from his sovereign. That being the case, it is easy to +appreciate what blame he deserved for the breach of his +instructions, when so ill an event followed from his rashness and +disobedience. It was not his want of experience, or his laying +the blame on Valdes, that excused him at his return to Spain, +where he certainly had been severely punished, had not his wife +obtained for him the royal favour.</p> + +<p>Before the arrival in Spain of the ships that escaped from the +catastrophe of this expedition, it was known there that Diego +Flores de Valdes had persuaded the duke to infringe the royal +instructions. Accordingly, the king had given strict orders in +all his ports, wherever Valdes might arrive, to apprehend him, +which was executed, and he was carried to the castle of +Santander, without being permitted to plead in his defence, and +remained there without being ever seen or heard of afterwards; as +I learned from his page, with whom I afterwards conversed, we +being both prisoners together in the castle of Lisbon. If the +directions of the king of Spain had been punctually carried into +execution, then the armada had kept along the coast of France, +and had arrived in the road of Calais before being discovered by +our fleet, which might have greatly endangered the queen and +realm, our fleet being so far off at Plymouth. And, though the +Prince of Parma had not been presently ready, yet he might have +gained sufficient time to get in readiness, in consequence of our +fleet being absent. Although the prince was kept in by the thirty +sail of Hollanders, yet a sufficient number of the dukes fleet +might have been able to drive them from the road of Dunkirk and +to have possessed themselves of that anchorage, so as to have +secured the junction of the armada and the land army; after which +it would have been an easy matter for them to have transported +themselves to England. What would have ensued on their landing +may be well imagined.</p> + +<p>But it was the will of HIM who directs all men and their +actions, that the fleets should meet, and the enemy be beaten, as +they were, and driven from their anchorage in Calais roads, the +Prince of Parma blockaded in the port of Dunkirk, and the armada +forced to go about Scotland and Ireland with great hazard and +loss: Which shews how God did marvellously defend us against the +dangerous designs of our enemies. Here was a favourable +opportunity offered for us to have followed up the victory upon +them: For, after they were beaten from the road of Calais, and +all their hopes and designs frustrated, if we had once more +offered to fight them, it is thought that the duke was determined +to surrender, being so persuaded by his confessor. This example, +it is very likely, would have been followed by the rest. But this +opportunity was lost, not through the negligence or backwardness +of the lord admiral, but through the want of providence in those +who had the charge of furnishing and providing for the fleet: +For, at that time of so great advantage, when they came to +examine into the state of their stores, they found a general +scarcity of powder and shot, for want of which they were forced +to return home; besides which, the dreadful storms which +destroyed so many of the Spanish fleet, made it impossible for +our ships to pursue those of them that remained. Another +opportunity was lost, not much inferior to the other, by not +sending part of our fleet to the west of Ireland, where the +Spaniards were of necessity to pass, after the many dangers and +disasters they had endured. If we had been so happy as to have +followed this course, which was both thought of and discoursed of +at the time, we had been absolutely victorious over this great +and formidable armada. For they were reduced to such extremity, +that they would willingly have yielded, as divers of them +confessed that were shipwrecked in Ireland.</p> + +<p>By this we may see how weak and feeble are the designs of men, +in respect of the great Creator; and how indifferently he dealt +between the two nations, sometimes giving one the advantage +sometimes the other; and yet so that he only ordered the +battle.</p> + +<p>SECTION VI.</p> + +<p><i>Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish Armada, at +Anstruther in Scotland, in 1588</i>[349].</p> + +<p>However glorious and providential the defeat and destruction +of the <i>Invincible Armada</i>, it does not belong to the +present work to give a minute relation of that great national +event. It seems peculiarly necessary and proper, however, in this +work, to give a very curious unpublished record respecting the +miserable fate of the Spanish armada, as written by a +contemporary, the Reverend James Melville, minister of +Anstruther, a sea-port town on the Fife, or northern, shore of +the Frith of Forth.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 349: From MS. Memoirs of James Melville, a +contemporary.]</blockquote> + +<p>James Melville, who was born in 1556, and appears to have been +inducted to the living of Anstruther only a short time before the +year 1588, left a MS. history of his own life and times, +extending to the year 1601. Of this curious unpublished +historical document, there are several copies extant, +particularly in the splendid library of the Faculty of Advocates, +and in that belonging to the Writers to the Signet, both at +Edinburgh. The present article is transcribed from a volume of +MSS belonging to a private gentleman, communicated to the editor +by a valued literary friend. It had formerly belonged to a +respectable clergyman of Edinburgh, and has the following notice +of its origin written by the person to whom it originally +belonged.</p> + +<p>"The following History of the Life of James Melville, was +transcribed from an old MS. lent to me by Sir William Calderwood +of Poltoun, one of the Judges of the Courts of Session and +Justiciary, who had it among other papers that belonged to his +grand-uncle, Mr David Calderwood, author of Altare Damascenum, +History, &c."</p> + +<p>This MS. so far as it contains the Life of James Melville, +extends to 360 folio pages; of which the present article occupies +about three pages, from near the bottom of p. 184. to nearly the +same part of p. 187. The orthography seems to have been +considerably modernized by the transcriber, but without changing +the antiquated words and modes of expression. Such of these as +appeared difficult to be understood by our English readers, are +here explained between brackets.--E.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>That winter, [1587-8] the King [James VI. of Scotland] was +occupied in commenting of the Apocalyps, and in setting out +sermons thereupon, against the papists and Spaniards; and yet, by +a piece of great oversight, the papists practiced never more +busily in this land, and [nor] made greater preparation for +receiving of the Spaniards, nor [than] that year. For a long +time, the news of a Spanish navy and army had been blazed abroad; +and about the lambastyde of the year 1588, this island had found +a fearful effect thereof, to the utter subversion both of kirk +and policy, if God had not wonderfully watched over the same, and +mightily foughen and defeat that army, by his souldiers the +elements, which he made all four most fiercely till afflict them, +till almost utter consumption. Terrible was the fear, peircing +were the preachings, earnest zealous and fervent were the +prayers, sounding were the sighs and sabs, and abounding were the +tears, at that fast and general assembly keeped at Edinburgh, +when the news were credibly told, sometimes of their landing at +Dunbar, sometimes at St Andrews and in Tay, and now and then at +Aberdeen and Cromerty firth: and, in very deed, as we knew +certainly soon after, the Lord of armies, who rides upon the +wings of the wind, the Keeper of his own Israel, was in the mean +time convying that monstrous navy about our coasts, and directing +their hulks and galliasses to the islands, rocks and sands, +whereupon he had distinat their wrack and destruction.</p> + +<p>For, within two or three moneths thereafter, early in the +morning by break of day, one of our baillies[350] came to my bed +side, saying, but not with fray [fear], "I have to tell you news, +Sir: There is arrived within our harbour this morning, a shipfull +of Spaniards, but not to give mercy; but to ask." And so shews me +that the commander had landed, and he had commanded them to their +ship again, and the Spaniards had humbly obeyed. He therefore +desired me to rise and hear their petition with them. Up I got +with diligence, and, assembling the honest men of the town, came +to the tolbooth[351], and after consultation taken to hear them +and what answer to make, there presented us a very venerable man +of big stature, and grave and stout countenance, grey haired and +very humble like, who, after much and very low courtesie, bowing +down with his face near the ground, and touching my shoe with his +hand, began his harangue in the Spanish tongue, whereof I +understood the substance; and, I being about to answer in Latin, +he having only a young man with him to be his interpreter, [who] +began and told over again to us in good English.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 350: The baillies of towns in Scotland are +equivalent to aldermen in England. The author here refers to the +town of Anstruther, a sea port town of Fife, on the northern +shore of the Firth of Forth, of which he was minister. There are +two Anstruthers, easter and wester, very near each other, and now +separate parishes; but it does not appear to which of these the +present historical document refers: Perhaps they were then +one.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 351: The town-house; but now generally +applied to signify the prison, then, and even now, often attached +to the town hall.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The sum was, That king Philip his master had rigged out a navy +and army to land in England, for just causes to be avenged of +many intollerable wrongs which he had received of that nation. +But God, for their sins, had been against them, and by storm of +weather had driven the navy <i>by</i> [past] the coast of +England, and him with certain captains, being the general of +twenty hulks, upon an isle of Scotland called the Fair isle, +where they had made shipwrack, and were, so many as had escaped +the merciless seas and rocks, more nor [than] six or seven weeks +suffered great hunger and cold, till conducting that bark out of +Orkney, they were come hither as to their special friends and +confederates, to kiss the kings majesties hand of Scotland, and +herewith he <i>becked</i> [bowed] even to the <i>yeard</i> +[ground]; and to find relief and comfort thereby to himself, +these gentlemen, captains, and the poor souldiers, whose +condition was for the present most miserable and pitiful.</p> + +<p>I answered this much in sum, That, howbeit neither our +friendship, which could not be great, seeing their king and they +were friends to the greatest enemy of Christ, the pope of Rome, +and our king and we defied him, nor yet their cause against our +neighbours and special friends of England, could procure any +benefit at our hands for their relief or comfort; nevertheless +they should know by experience that we were men, and so moved by +human compassion, and christians of better religion <i>nor</i> +[than] they, which should <i>kythe</i> [appear manifest] in the +fruits and effects plain contrary to theirs: For, whereas our +people, resorting among them in peaceable and lawful affairs of +merchandise, were violently taken and cast in prison, their goods +and <i>gier</i> [chattels] confiscate, and their bodies committed +to the cruel flaming fire for the cause of religion, they should +find nothing amongst us but Christian pity and works of mercy and +alms, leaving to God to work in their hearts concerning religion +as it pleased him. This being truly reported again to him by his +townsmen, with great reverence he gave thanks and said, "He could +not make answer for their <i>kirk</i> [church], and the laws and +order thereof, only for himself, that there were divers Scotsmen +who knew him, and to whom he had shewn courtesy and favour at +Calice[352], and as he supposed some of this same town of +Anstruther."</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 352: <i>Calice</i> in this passage, and +<i>Calais</i> in one subsequent, certainly means Cadiz in Spain; +which to this day is often called <i>Cales</i> by English +mariners.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>So [I] shewed him that the bailies had granted him licence, +with the captains, to go to their lodging for their refreshment, +but to none of their men to land, till the overlord of the town +were advertised, and understood the kings majesties mind +<i>anent</i> [concerning] them. Thus with great courtesie he +departed.</p> + +<p>That night the <i>laird</i> [lord of the manor] being +advertised, came; and, on the morn, with a good number of the +gentlemen of the countrey round about, gave the said general and +the captains <i>presence</i>, [audience] and after the same +speeches in effect as before, received them in his house, and +suffered the souldiers to come a land and ly altogether to the +number of thirteen score, for the most part young beardless men, +<i>silly</i>, [weak] travelled, and hungered; to the which, one +day or two <i>kail pottage</i>[353] and fish was given; for my +advice was conform to the prophet Elizeus [Elisha] his to the +king of Israel in Samaria, <i>Give them bread and water, +&c.</i></p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 353: A mess formerly much used in Scotland +among the commons, being a kind of soup maigre, composed of +<i>kail</i>, a species of greens or coleworts, boiled in water, +and thickened with oat-meal, grits, or shelled +barley.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The names of the commanders were Jan [Juan] Gomes de Medina, +general of twenty hulks, captain Patricio, captain de Lagaretto, +captain de Luffera, captain Mauretio, and Seingour Serrano. But +verily all the while, my heart melted within me for desire of +thankfulness to God, when I remembered the prideful and cruel +natural temper of the people, and how they would have used us, in +case they had landed with their forces among us, and the +wonderful work of Gods mercy and justice in making us see them, +the chief commanders of them, to make such due-gard [submission] +and courtesie to poor seamen, and their souldiers, so abjectly, +to beg alms at our doors and in our streets.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, they knew not of the wrack of the rest, but +supposed that the rest of the army was safely returned [to +Spain,] till one day I got in St Andrews, in print, the wrack of +the gallies in particular, with the names of the principal men, +and how they were used, in Ireland and our Highlands, in Wales +and other parts of England. The which, when I recorded to Jan +Gomes, by particular and special names, he cried out for grief, +<i>bursted and grat</i> [burst into tears.] This Jan Gomes shewed +great kindness to a ship of our town, which he found arriested at +<i>Calais</i>[354] at home coming, <i>rode</i>[355] to court for +her, and made great <i>russe</i> [praise] of Scotland to his +king, took the honest men to his house, and inquired for the +laird of Anstruther, for the minister, and his host, and sent +home many commendations: But we thanked God in our hearts, that +we had seen them in that form.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 354: This must signify Cadiz, as mentioned +before.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 355: Perhaps ought to have been +<i>wrote</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>SECTION VII.</p> + +<p><i>A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the Earl of +Cumberland</i>[356].</p> + +<p>We learn from Hakluyt, II. 647, that this narrative was +written by Mr Edward Wright, an eminent mathematician and +engineer, who was the real author of that admirable invention for +charts, commonly called <i>Mercators projection</i>, but +unjustly, as Mr Wright complains in his work entitled <i>Vulgar +Errors</i>, where he charges Mercator with plagiarism. From the +narrative, Mr Wright appears to have been engaged in the +expedition and on board the Victory[357].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 356: Hakluyt, II. 647. Churchill, III. 161. +Astley, I. 206.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 357: Astley, I. 206. a.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>The right honourable the Earl of Cumberland, intending to +cruize against the enemy, prepared a small fleet of four ships +only[358] at his own charges, one of which was the Victory[359] +belonging to the queens royal navy. The others were the Meg and +Margaret, two small ships, one of which was soon obliged to be +sent home as unable to endure the sea, besides a small caravel. +Having assembled about 400 men, sailors and soldiers, with +several gentlemen volunteers, the earl and they embarked and set +sail from Plymouth Sound on the 28th June 1589, accompanied by +the following captains and gentlemen. Captain Christopher Lister, +an officer of great resolution, Captain Edward Careless, <i>alias +Wright</i>, who had been captain of the Hope in Sir Francis +Drakes expedition to the West Indies against St Domingo and +Carthagena; Captain Boswel, Mr Mervin, Mr Henry Long, Mr +Partridge, Mr Norton; Mr William Monson, afterwards Sir +William[360], who was captain of the Meg and vice-admiral, and Mr +Pigeon, who was captain of the caravel.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 358: Sir William Monson, in Churchills +collection, says there were <i>five</i> ships; and indeed we find +a fifth, called the Saucy Jack, mentioned in the +narrative.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 359: The Victory was of 800 tons, carrying +32 guns and 400 men; of whom, according to Sir William Monson, +268 were mariners, and 100 sailors, the remaining 32 being +probably soldiers, or as we now call them marines. The +distinction between mariners and sailors is not obvious; perhaps +what are now called ordinary and able seamen,--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 360: Sir William Monson was author of some +curious Naval Tracts, giving an account of the Royal Navy of +England in the reigns of Queen Elizabeth and James I. which are +preserved in Churchills Collection, Vol. III. pp. +147--508.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>About three days after our departure from Plymouth, we met +with three French ships, one of which belonged to Newhaven[361], +and another to St Maloes; and finding them to be leaguers[362], +and therefore lawful prizes, we took them, and sent two of them +home to England with all their loading, being mostly fish from +Newfoundland, having first distributed among our ships as much of +the fish as they could find stowage room for; and in the third +ship we sent all the prisoners home to France. On that day and +the next we met some other ships, but finding them belonging to +Rotterdam and Embden, bound for Rochelle, we dismissed them. On +the 28th and 29th, we met several of our English ships returning +from an expedition to Portugal, which we relieved with victuals. +The 13th July, being in sight of the coast of Spain in lat. +39° N. we descried eleven ships, on which we immediately +prepared to engage them, sending the Meg commanded by Captain +Monson to ascertain what and whence they were. On the approach of +the Meg some shots were exchanged, and as their admiral and +vice-admiral displayed their flags, we perceived that some +fighting was likely to follow. Having therefore prepared for +battle, we made all haste towards them, always taking care to get +to windward, and between ten and eleven o'clock A.M. we came up +with them in the Victory, when they all yielded after a slight +resistance. The masters all came on board our admiral, and shewed +their several passports from Hamburg, Lubeck, Bremen, Pomerania, +and Calais. They had certain bags of pepper and cinnamon, which +they confessed to belong to a Jew in Lisbon, which they had +charge of to deliver to his factor in their country; and finding +this to be lawful prize by their own confession, the same was +taken and divided among our whole company, the value being +estimated at L.4500, at two shillings the pound[363]. We +dismissed these ships on the 17th of July, but seven of their +men, having volunteered as sailors in our fleet, were taken to +reinforce our crew. After this we held on our course for the +Azores or Western islands.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 361: Probably that port now called Havre de +Grace.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 362: Alluding to the <i>Catholic +League</i>, then in alliance with Spain, and in rebellious +opposition to their lawful sovereign, for the purpose of +excluding the king of Navarre, afterwards Henry IV. from the +crown of France.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 363: Sir William Monson, who gives a short +account of this expedition in the Naval Tracts already quoted, +says that spices to the value of L.7000 were taken out of these +vessels.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the morning of the 1st August we got sight of St Michael, +one of the eastermost of the Azores, towards which we made sail +all that day; and, putting up a Spanish flag at our maintop that +we might not be suspected for enemies, we approached at night to +the chief town and road of the island, where we espied three +ships and some other vessels at anchor, all of which we +determined to take during the darkness of the night. Accordingly +about ten or eleven o'clock P.M. our boats were sent well manned +to cut their cables and hawsers and tow them out to sea. On +coming to them, one of the largest of these ships was found to be +the Falcon of London, commanded by a Scots pilot who passed her +off as his own. But our men let loose three other smaller ships, +which they towed towards us, most of their men leaping overboard +and swimming on shore with loud outcries, which were answered +from the town, which was all in an uproar on hearing what was +going forwards. The castle discharged some shots at our boats, +but being unable to see them by reason of the darkness, did us no +harm. The Scotsman too, to make the Spaniards believe him their +friend, fired a few shots in the air. Shortly after, he and some +others came on board our admiral, offering their services. The +three ships brought out were laden with wine and sallad oil from +Seville. The same day our caravel chaced a Spanish caravel on +shore, which carried letters by which we learnt that the caraks +had departed from the island of Tercera eight days before.</p> + +<p>The 7th of August we got sight of a small ship which we chased +towards Tercera with our pinnace, the weather being calm, and +overtook her towards evening, when we found in her 30 tons of +good Madeira wine, besides woollen cloth, silk, taffeta, and +other goods. Coming on the 14th to the island of Flores, it was +determined to take in fresh water, and such fresh provisions as +the island afforded; wherefore manning our boats with about 120 +men, we rowed towards the shore, where the inhabitants, who were +assembled at the watering-place, hung out a flag of truce, and we +did the like. On coming to them, the earl gave them to +understand, by means of his Portuguese interpreter, that he was a +friend to their king Don Antonio, and came not with any intention +to injure them, meaning only to procure water and fresh +provisions, by way of exchange for oil wine and pepper, to which +they readily agreed, and sent off some of their people +immediately for beeves and sheep. In the meantime we marched +southwards to their town of Santa Cruz, whence all the +inhabitants had fled and carried off every thing of value. On +demanding the reason of this, they answered it proceeded from +fear, and that they always did so on the appearance of any ships +near their coast. That part of the island was mostly composed of +large rocky hills and barren mountains, and was little inhabited, +being apt to be molested by ships of war; and even Santa Cruz, +one of their principal towns, was all in ruins, having been burnt +about two years before by some English ships of war, according to +what we were told by the inhabitants. As we were rowing towards +the Victory in the evening, a huge fish pursued us for nearly two +miles, mostly distant about a spear length from the stern of the +boat, and sometimes so near as to touch. The tips of his fins at +the gills, appearing often above water, were by estimation four +or five yards asunder, and his jaws gaping a yard and half wide, +put us in fear he might overset our pinnace; but God be thanked, +by rowing as hard as we could, we escaped.</p> + +<p>When we were about the island of Flores, we got notice from a +small vessel called the Drake[364], that the caraks were at +Tercera, of which news we were very glad, and made sail thither +with all the speed we could. By the way we came to Fayal road on +the 27th August after sunset, where we saw some ships at anchor, +towards which Captains Lister and Monson were sent in the skiff +to see what they were, and lest any mischance should befall our +boat, we sent in likewise the Saucy Jack and the small caravel; +but as the wind was off shore, these vessels were not able to set +up to where the Spanish ships were anchored. The skiff went on +however, and endeavoured to board a ship of 250 tons, which +carried 14 pieces of ordnance, and continued fighting with her +for an hour, till our other boats came up to the rescue and aid +of the skiff. A fresh boarding was then attempted, by one boat on +the quarter and another on the bow, when we entered on one side +while all the Spaniards leapt overboard on the other side, except +Juan de Palma the captain, and two or three more. This ship was +moored close to the castle, which fired at us all the time; but +the only one wounded on the occasion was the master of our +caravel, who had the calf of one of his legs shot away. This ship +was from St Juan de Puerto Rico, laden with sugar ginger and +hides. After we had towed her clear of the castle, our boats went +in again and brought out five other small ships; one laden with +hides, another with elephants teeth, grains[365], cocoa-nuts, and +goats skins, come from Guinea; another with woad, and two with +dog-fish, which two last were set adrift as of no value, but all +the other four were sent for England on the 30th of August. At +the taking of these prizes there were consorted with us some +other small men of war, as Master John Davis, with his ship, +pinnace, and boat; Captain Markesburie with his ship, whose owner +was Sir Walter Raleigh; and the bark of Lyme, which also was +consorted with us before.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 364: Sir William Monson says, from an +English man of war.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 365: Guinea Pepper.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The last of August we came in sight of Tercera in the morning, +being about nine or ten leagues from shore, when we espied a +small boat under sail coming towards us, which seemed strange at +such a distance from land and no ship in sight; but on coming +near, we found it to contain eight Englishmen, who had been +prisoners in Tercera, and had committed themselves to the sea in +this open boat in hopes to escape. Their mainyard consisted of +two pipe-staves tied together by the ends, and they had no other +provisions than what they had been able to carry off in their +pockets and bosoms. When taken on board the Victory, they gave us +certain assurance that the caraks had left Tercera about a week +before. Being thus without any hopes of taking the caraks, it was +resolved to return for Fayal, intending to surprise the town; but +till the 9th of September, we had either the wind so contrary, or +such calm weather, that in all that time we scarcely made nine or +ten leagues way, lingering up and down near the island of +Pico.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon of the 10th September, we came again to Fayal +road; upon which the earl sent Captain Lister, with a person from +Graciosa whom Captain Monson had taken some time before, and some +others, carrying a message to Fayal. He was met by some of the +inhabitants in a boat, who were brought by Captain Lister to my +lord, who gave them their choice, either to allow him to take +possession of the platform or fort, when he and his company would +remain quietly there for some space, without injury, till the +inhabitants had compounded for the ransom of their town; or else +to stand the chance of war. With this message they returned on +shore; but those who had charge of the fort said, that it was +contrary to their allegiance and the oath they had taken to king +Philip, to deliver up their garrison without endeavouring to +defend it. Upon this, the earl gave orders for all the boats of +the different ships to be manned and armed, and he soon +afterwards landed with all his men on the sandy beach under the +side of a hill, about half a league from the fort. Certain troops +both horse and foot were seen on the top of the hill, and two +other companies appeared to oppose us with displayed ensigns, one +on the shore in front of the town, which marched towards our +landing place as if they meant to attack us; while the other was +seen in a valley to the south of the fort, as if coming to assist +in defending the town; and at the same time, the garrison in the +fort fired upon us briskly from their cannon. In spite of all +these demonstrations of resistance, having first marshalled his +men in proper order, my lord marched along the sandy beach +towards the fort, passing between the sea and the town for +something more than a mile; and as the shore became rocky, so as +to render any farther progress in that direction extremely +difficult, he entered the town, and marched through the streets +unopposed to the fort, these companies of the enemy, that seemed +at first resolved to resist his progress, being soon dispersed. +Those in the fort likewise fled at our approach, leaving my lord +and his men to scale the walls and gain possession, without any +resistance. In the meantime the ships continued to batter the +town and fort, until they saw the <i>red cross</i> of England +floating from the walls.</p> + +<p>Fayal is the principal town of this island, and is situated +directly over against the high and mighty mountain of +<i>Pico</i>, towards the north-west from that mountain, from +which it is divided by a narrow sea or strait, which at that +place is some two or three leagues broad, between the islands of +Fayal and Pico. This town contained about 300 houses, which were +handsomely and strongly built of stone and lime, their roofs +being double covered with hollow tyles, much like those used in +England, only that they are less at one end than at the other. +Almost every house had a cistern or well in a garden behind, in +which likewise there were vines with ripe grapes, forming +pleasant arbours or shady walks; and in every garden there grew +some tobacco, then hardly known, but now commonly used in +England, with which the women of the place were then in use to +stain their faces, to make them look young and fresh. In these +gardens there likewise grew pepper, both Indian and common, +fig-trees with fruit both white and red, peach-trees rather of +humble growth, oranges, lemons, quinces, potatoes, and other +fruits and roots. Sweet wood, which I think is cedar, is very +common in that island, and is used both for building and +fuel.</p> + +<p>Having possessed himself of the town and fort, my lord issued +orders that none of the soldiers or mariners should enter into +any of the houses for plunder, and was especially careful that +none of the churches or religious houses should suffer injury of +any kind, all of which were preserved from violation by the +appointment of guards for their protection. But the rest of the +town, either from the want of that precaution, or owing to the +cupidity of our people, was rifled and ransacked by the soldiers +and mariners, who scarcely left a single house unsearched, taking +out of them every thing that struck their fancy or seemed worth +carrying away, such as chests of sweet wood, chairs, clothes, +coverlets, hangings, bedding, and the like; besides many of our +people ranged the country in search of plunder, where some of +them were wounded by the inhabitants. The friery at this place +contained Franciscan friars, not one of whom was able to speak +pure Latin. It was built in 1506 by a friar of that order +belonging to Angra in the island of Tercera. The tables in its +hall or refectory had seats only on one side, and was always +covered, as if ever ready for feasting. We continued in the town +from the Wednesday afternoon, at which time we took possession, +until the Saturday night, when the inhabitants agreed to pay 2000 +ducats for its ransom, which was mostly paid in church plate. In +the fort there were 58 pieces of iron ordnance, 23 of which, +according to my remembrance, were mounted upon carriages, and +placed between baricadoes or merlins on a platform by the sea +side. Taking away all the ordnance, we set the platform on fire. +On the Sunday following, my lord had invited as many of the +inhabitants as chose to dine with him on board the Victory, save +only Diego Gomez the governor, who only came once to confer about +the ransom. Only four came, who were well entertained, and were +afterwards honourably dismissed with the sound of drums and +trumpets, and a salute from our cannon. To these persons my lord +delivered a letter subscribed by himself, requesting all other +Englishmen to abstain from any farther molestation of the place, +save only to take such water and provisions as might be +necessary.</p> + +<p>The day after we came to Fayal, being the 11th September, two +men came to us from Pico, who had been prisoners in that island; +and we also set a prisoner at liberty who had been sent thither +from St Jago, being cousin to a servant of Don Antonio king of +Portugal, then residing in England. On Monday we sent our boats +on shore for fresh water, having now abundance running down the +hills in consequence of heavy rain the night before, which +otherwise had been hard to be got. Next day we sent again on +shore to complete our stock of water, which was not then so +easily brought off, by reason of a strong gale, which increased +so much in the afternoon that we did not think it safe to ride so +near the land, for which reason we weighed anchor, and stood N.W. +by W. along the coast of Fayal. Some of the inhabitants came on +board this day, who told us that the wind usually blew strong at +W.S.W. at this time of the year on this coast. While near St +Georges Island we saw a huge fish of a black colour right ahead +of our ship, a little under water, or rather even with its +surface, on which the sea broke in such manner that we supposed +it a rock; and as we were going directly stem on, we were in +great fear for a time how to avoid the seeming danger, till at +length we saw it move out of our way.</p> + +<p>It lightened much in the night of the 16th September, which +was followed by heavy rains and violent gales till the 21st. On +the 23d we returned to Fayal road, to weigh an anchor which we +had left in our haste to depart. We went on shore to the town, +whence many of the people ran away, or were preparing to depart +with their goods, till assured by my lord that they had nothing +to fear, as we only came for fresh water and other necessaries, +for all of which they should be paid to their satisfaction. We +then went quietly about the town, purchasing such things as we +needed as peaceably as if we had been in England; and the people +helped us to fill our water casks, for which they received what +satisfied them. We were forced by a heavy tempest to depart on +the 25th, before we had completed our water; and the tempest came +on so suddenly that my lord himself had to raise the people from +their beds to weigh the anchors, himself assisting at the +capstans, and cheering the men with wine. Next day, the caravel +and the Saucy Jack were sent to the road of St Michaels to see +what was there, and we followed on the 27th, plying to and fro; +but by contrary winds on the 28th, 29th, and 30th, we were driven +to leeward, and could not get near the island. The 1st October, +we sailed along the island of Tercera, and at Cape Brazil, near +Angra, the strongest town of that island, we espied some boats +going towards the town, which we attempted to intercept; but +being near land, they ran on shore and escaped.</p> + +<p>Coming near Graciosa in the afternoon, my lord sent Captain +Lister on shore, to inform the islanders that he only wanted +water, wine, and some fresh provisions, and would not otherwise +trouble them. They sent back word that they could give no +positive answer, until the governors of the island had consulted +on the subject, and desired therefore to send for an answer next +day. The 2d October, early in the morning, we dispatched our +long-boat and pinnace, with 50 or 60 men, together with the +Margaret and Captain Davis in his ship to protect them, as we now +wanted our other consorts; but when our people endeavoured to +land, they were fired at by the islanders, who would not permit +them to go on shore, several troops of armed men being drawn up +to oppose us with displayed ensigns. Our boats rowed along shore, +seeking some place where they might land, without the enemy +having too much advantage, our ships and boats firing all the +while upon the islanders. No convenient place being found for +landing, we were under the necessity of retiring without any +answer, as had been promised. After some negociation and delay, +they agreed to let us have sixty butts of wine, together with +fresh provisions to refresh our men; but declared we could not +have water, having little or none for themselves, except what +they had saved in tanks or cisterns, insomuch that they would +rather give us two tons of wine than one of water. They requested +that our soldiers might not come on shore, as they would +themselves bring all they had promised to the water side; which +request was granted, one of their messengers remaining on board +as an hostage for the fulfilment of their promise, while the +other went ashore with our empty casks and some of our men to +assist in filling them and bringing them away, with such other +provision as was promised.</p> + +<p>The Margaret, the ship of Captain Davis, and another belonging +to Weymouth remained at anchor before the town, to take in our +wine and provisions. This ship of Weymouth came to us only the +day before, having taken a rich prize said to be worth sixteen +thousand pounds, and brought us news that the West India fleet +had not yet gone past, but was shortly expected. We put to sea in +the Victory, and on Saturday the 4th October, we took a French +ship of St Maloes, a city belonging to the league, laden with +fish from Newfoundland, which had been forced to cut away her +mast in a tempest, and was now bound to Gracioso for repairs. +Taking out her principal people, we put some of our own mariners +and soldiers on board, and sent her off for England. At night on +the following Sunday, having received all the supplies promised +us at Gracioso, we parted from the islanders in a friendly +manner, and saluted them with our ordnance.</p> + +<p>The three next days we plyed to and fro among these western +islands, having very rough weather. On Thursday night, being +driven to within three or four leagues of Tercera, we saw fifteen +sail of the West India fleet going into the haven of Angra in +that island; but, though we lay as close to windward as possible +during the four following days, we were unable to get near them. +At this time we lost sight of our French prize, which was not +able to lay so close to the wind as our ships, and heard no more +of her till our return to England, where she arrived safe. +Getting at length on the fifth day near the mouth of Angra +harbour, we inclined to have run among the West India fleet, on +purpose to have cut out some of them if possible; but this +enterprize was deemed too hazardous, considering the strength of +the place, as the ships were hauled close to the town on our +approach, under protection of the castle of Brazil on one side, +having 25 pieces of ordnance, and a fort on the other side with +13 or 14 large brass cannon. Besides which, on nearing the land, +the wind proved too scanty for the attempt.</p> + +<p>On Thursday the 14th October, we sent our boat into the road +of Angra to take the soundings, and to endeavour to find some +proper place for us to anchor, beyond the shot of the castle and +within shot of some of the ships, that we might either force them +to come out to us or sink them where they lay. Our boat found a +fit place for us, but the wind would not suffer us to get to it; +and besides, if we had anchored there, it was more likely that +they would have run their ships on shore, to save their lives and +liberties and some of their goods, than have resigned all to us +by coming out. We therefore discharged a few guns at them, but +our shot fell far short; upon which we departed, as it was not +likely they would come out while we watched before the mouth of +the harbour, or remained within sight. We accordingly put to sea, +where we cruized for five days, sending a pinnace to watch them +close in shore but out of sight, to bring us word when they set +sail. After some time the pinnace brought us notice that all the +ships had taken down their sails and struck their top-masts, so +that we concluded they would remain till sure of our departure. +Wherefore, having heard there were some Scots ships at St +Michael, we sailed thither on the 20th October, and found there +one Scots <i>roader</i>, and two or three more at Villa-franca, +the next road, a league or two east from St Michaels. From these +we received five or six butts of wine and some fresh water, but +by no means sufficient to serve our wants. The 21st October, we +sent our long-boat on shore to procure fresh water at a brook a +short way west from Villa-franca; but the inhabitants came down +with about 150 armed men, having two ensigns displayed, and our +boat was forced to return without water, having spent all its +powder in vain, and being unable to prevail against such great +odds.</p> + +<p>Learning that the island of St Mary was a place of no great +strength, we made sail for that place, intending to take in water +there, and to go thence to the coast of Spain. On the Friday +following, my lord sent captain Lister and captain Amias Preston, +afterwards Sir Amias, with our long-boat and pinnace, with +between 60 and 70 arquebusiers, carrying a friendly letter to the +islanders, desiring leave to procure water, in exchange for which +he engaged to do them no harm. Captain Preston had come on board +the Victory not long before from his own ship, which lost company +with us in the night, so that he was under the necessity of +remaining with us. We departed from the Victory in our boats +about nine in the morning, rowing for the land, and by three in +the afternoon had got within a league or two of the shore, being +then four or five leagues from the Victory, and our men sore +spent with hard rowing. At this time we perceived, to our great +joy, two ships at anchor close under the town; upon which we +shifted six or seven of our men into the boat belonging to +captain Davis, being too much crowded, and retaining about 20 +arquebusiers in the pinnace, we made towards these two ships with +all possible haste.</p> + +<p>While proceeding towards them, we saw several boats passing +between the <i>roaders</i>[366] and the shore, and many men in +their shirts swimming and wading on shore, who, as we afterwards +learnt, were endeavouring to get the ships fast aground; and the +inhabitants were at the same time busied in preparing to defend +the ships and themselves against us. On coming near them, captain +Lister commanded the trumpets to be sounded, but prohibited any +firing till farther orders; yet some of the people, either not +hearing, or disregardful of these orders, began firing as soon as +the trumpets sounded, though with small injury to the islanders, +who mostly lay under the cover of trenches or other means of +defence. Captain Lister then urged on the rowers, who began to +shrink at the shot from the enemy which flew thick about their +ears, and was himself the first to board one of the ships which +lay farther from shore than the other, while we speedily +followed, still plying the enemy with our shot, and having cut +her cables and hawsers, we towed her out to sea. In the mean +time, captain Davis came up in his boat, and boarded the other +ship, both having been abandoned by their crews; but, as she was +quite fast aground, he was under the necessity of quitting her, +exposed to shot and stones even from the shore. At this time, the +towns-people made an attempt to capture captain Davis and his +boats crew, which were but few in number; but they joined us, and +we jointly towed off our prize, which was a ship from Brazil +laden with sugar. In this exploit we had two men slain and +sixteen wounded, while it is probable that the enemy suffered +small loss, as they were mostly sheltered behind stone walls, +many of which were built above one another on the end of the hill +on which the town stands, between two vallies. On the top of the +hill they had some large cannon, from which they fired leaden +bullets, one only of which went through the side of our prize, +but did no other injury.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 366: This uncommon word seems merely to +signify, ships lying at anchor in an open road.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Next day we made another attempt to get fresh water at this +island, but as we were ignorant of the landing-place, where we +found many inconveniences and disadvantages, we were unable to +effect our purpose. Wherefore we departed on the night of the +25th October for the island of St George, in quest of fresh +water, and got there on the 27th. Observing a stream of water +running down into the sea, the pinnace, and long-boat were sent +under captains Preston and Manson, by whom a letter was sent by +my lord to the islanders, desiring leave to take water quietly, +and no farther injury should be done them. On getting to the +shore, our men found some of the poor islanders hid among the +rocks, being afraid of us. On the 29th, our boats returned with +fresh water, bringing only six tons to the Victory, alleging they +could get no more; thinking, as was afterwards supposed, as he +had only 12 tons of water and wine, that my lord would now return +direct for England, as many of our men greatly desired. My lord, +was very unwilling to do this, and meant next day to have taken +in more water, but from the roughness of the sea, and the wind +freshening, and owing to the unwillingness of the people, no more +water was procured: yet my lord would not return with so much +provision unspent, especially as the expedition had not hitherto +produced such fruits as might reasonably satisfy himself and +others. Wherefore, with consent of the whole ships companies, it +was agreed to go for England by way of the coast of Spain, to +endeavour to make more captures, the whole people being reduced +to half allowance of water, except such as were sick or wounded, +who were to have whole allowance. On Saturday, the 31st October, +as the Margaret was very leaky, she was sent off direct for +England in charge of the Brazil ship, and in them our sick and +wounded men were sent home; but captain Monson was taken out of +the <i>Megge</i> into the Victory[367].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 367: In the commencement of this voyage, +the Meg and Margaret are named as distinct ships, one of which is +said to have been sent home soon after, as unfit for sea. In this +passage the Margaret and Megge are evidently different names for +the same ship.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We now shaped our course for the coast of Spain, having the +wind fair and large, which had seldom been the case hitherto. On +the 4th November we saw a sail right before us, to which we gave +chase, and coming up with her about 3 P.M. we took possession of +her, being a ship of about 110 tons burden, from +<i>Pernambucke</i> or Fernambucco, in Brazil, bound for Portugal, +having on board 410 chests of sugar, and 50 quintals of Brazil +wood, each quintal being 100 pounds weight. We took her in lat. +29° N. about 200 leagues west from Lisbon. Captain Preston +was sent on board the prize, who brought her principal people +into the Victory, certain of our seamen and soldiers being +appointed to take charge of her. The Portuguese reported, that +they had seen another ship that day before them about noon; +wherefore, when all things were properly disposed respecting our +prize, we left her under the charge of captain Davis, with whom +likewise we left our long-boat, taking his smaller boat with us, +and made all sail due east after this other ship, leaving orders +for captain Davis and the prize to follow us due east, and if he +had not sight of us next morning, to bear away direct for +England. Next morning we could not see the vessel of which we +were in chase, neither was the prize or the ship of captain Davis +to be seen.</p> + +<p>On the 6th November, being then in lat. 38° 30' N. and +about 60 leagues west from Lisbon, captain Preston descried a +sail early in the morning two or three leagues a-head of us, +which we came up with about 8 or 9 o'clock A.M. She was lastly +from St Michaels, but originally from Brazil laden with sugar. +While employed shifting the prisoners into the Victory, one of +our men in the main-top espied another sail some three or four +leagues a-head, on which we immediately sent back our boat with +men to take charge of the prize, and made all sail in chase, so +that we overtook the other ship about 2 P.M. She made some +preparation to resist us, hanging many hides all round her sides, +so that musquetry could not have injured her; but by the time we +had fired two cannon shot at her, she lowered her sails and +surrendered. She was of between 300 and 400 tons, bound from +Mexico and St John de Lowe, (San Juan de Ulloa) her cargo +consisting of 700 dry hides; worth 10s. apiece, six chests of +cochineal, every chest holding 100 pounds weight, and every pound +worth L. 1, 6s. 8d., besides which she had several chests of +sugar, some packages of China ware, with some wrought plate and +silver in coin. The captain was an Italian, a grave, wise, and +civil person, who had to the value of 25,000 ducats adventure in +this ship. He and some of the principal Spanish prisoners were +taken on board the Victory; and captain Lister was sent into the +prize, with some 20 of our best mariners, soldiers, and sailors. +In the meantime our other prize came up with us, and having now +our hands full, we joyfully shaped our course for England, as we +had so many Portuguese, Spanish, and French prisoners, that we +could not well have manned any more prizes with safety to +ourselves. Wherefore, about 6 P.M. when our other prize came up, +we made sail for England. But as our two prizes were unable to +keep up with us without sparing them many of our own sails, our +ship rolled and wallowed so that it was both exceedingly +troublesome, and put our main-mast in great danger of being +carried away. Having accordingly acquainted them with these +circumstances, and taken back our sails, we directed them to keep +their course following us, so as to make for Portsmouth.</p> + +<p>We took this last prize in lat. 39° N. about 46 leagues +west from the Rock of Lisbon. She was one of the 16 ships we saw +going into the harbour of Angra in the island of Tercera on the +8th October. Some of the prisoners taken from this ship told us, +that while we were plying off and on before that harbour in +waiting for their coming out, three of the largest of these ships +were unloaded of all their treasure and merchandize, by order of +the governor of Tercera, and were each manned with 300 soldiers, +on purpose to have come out and boarded the Victory; but by the +time these preparations were made, the Victory was gone out of +sight.</p> + +<p>We now went merrily before the wind with all the sails we +could carry, insomuch that between the noons of Friday and +Saturday, or in 24 hours, we sailed near 47 leagues, or 141 +English miles, although our ship was very foul, and much grown +with sea grass, owing to our having been long at sea. This quick +sailing made some of our company expect to be present at the +tilting on the queens birth-day at Whitehall, while others were +flattering themselves with keeping a jolly Christmas in England +from their shares in the prizes. But it was our lot to keep a +cold Christmas with the Bishop and his Clerks, rocks to the +westwards of Scilly; for soon after the wind came about to the +east, the very worst wind for us which could blow from the +heavens, so that we could not fetch any part of England. Upon +this our allowance of drink, before sufficiently scanty, was now +still farther curtailed, owing to the scarcity in our ship, each +man being confined to half a pint of cold water at a meal, and +that not sweet. Yet this was an ample allowance in comparison, as +our half pint was soon reduced to a quarter, and even at this +reduced rate our store was rapidly disappearing, insomuch that it +was deemed necessary for our preservation to put into some port +in Ireland to procure water. We accordingly endeavoured to do +this, being obliged, when near that coast, to lie to all night, +waiting for day light; but when it appeared we had drifted so far +to leeward in the night that we could fetch no part of Ireland, +we were therefore constrained to return again, with heavy hearts, +and to wait in anxious expectation till it should please God to +send us a fair wind either for England or Ireland.</p> + +<p>In the mean time we were allowed for each man two or three +spoonfuls of vinegar at each meal, having now no other drink, +except that for two or three meals we had about as much wine, +which was wrung out of the remaining lees. Under this hard fare +we continued near a fortnight, being only able to eat a very +little in all that time, by reason of our great want of drink. +Saving that now and then we enjoyed as it were a feast, when rain +or hail chanced to fall, on which occasions we gathered up the +hail-stones with the most anxious care, devouring them more +eagerly than if they had been the finest comfits. The rain-drops +also were caught and saved with the utmost careful attention; for +which purpose some hung up sheets tied by the four corners, +having a weight in the middle, to make the rain run down there as +in a funnel into some vessel placed underneath. Those who had no +sheets hung up napkins or other clouts, which when thoroughly wet +they wrung or sucked to get the water they had imbibed. Even the +water which fell on the deck under foot, and washed away the +filth and soil of the ship, though as dirty as the kennel is in +towns during rain, was carefully watched and collected at every +scupper-hole, nay, often with strife and contention, and caught +in dishes, pots, cans, and jars, of which some drank hearty +draughts, mud and all, without waiting for its settlement or +cleansing. Others cleaned it by filtrating, but it went through +so slowly that they could ill endure to wait so long, and were +loath to lose so much precious liquid. Some licked the water like +dogs with their tongues from the decks, sides, rails, and masts +of the ship. Others, that were more ingenious, fastened girdles +or ropes about the masts, daubing tallow between these and the +mast, that the rain might not run down between; and making one +part of these girdles lower than the rest, fixed spouts of +leather at these lower parts, that the rain running down the +masts might meet and be received at these spouts. He who was +fortunate enough to procure a can of water by these means, was +sued to, and envied as a rich man.</p> + +<p><i>Quem pulchrum digito monstrari, et dicere hic est</i>.</p> + +<p>Some of the poor Spaniards who were prisoners, though having +the same allowance with our own men, often begged us for the love +of God to give them as much water as they could hold in the +hollow of their hands: And, notwithstanding our own great +extremity, they were given it, to teach them some humanity, +instead of their accustomed barbarity both to us and other +nations. Some put leaden bullets into their months, to slack +their thirst by chewing them. In every corner of the ship, the +miserable cries of the sick and wounded were sounding lamentably +in our ears, pitifully crying out and lamenting for want of +drink, being ready to die, yea many dying for lack thereof. +Insomuch, that by this great extremity we lost many more men than +in all the voyage before; as before this, we were so well and +amply provided for, that we lived as well and were as healthy as +if we had been in England, very few dying among us; whereas now, +some of our men were thrown overboard every day.</p> + +<p>The 2d of December 1589 was with us a day of festival, as it +then rained heartily, and we saved some considerable store of +water, though we were well wet for it, and that at midnight, and +had our skins filled with it besides. This went down merrily, +although it was bitter and dirty, with washing the ship, but we +sweetened it with sugar, and were happy to have our fill. Besides +our other extremities, we were so tossed and turmoiled with +stormy and tempestuous weather, that every man had to hold fast +his can or dish, and to fasten himself by the ropes, rails, or +sides of the ship, to prevent falling on the deck. Our main-sail +was torn from the yard, and blown away into the sea; and our +other sails so rent and torn that hardly any of them remained +serviceable. The raging waves and foaming surges of the sea came +rolling upon us in successive mountains, breaking through the +waste of the ship like a mighty river; although in fine weather +our deck was near twenty feet above water. So that we were ready +to cry out, with the royal prophet, Psalm 107, verses 26 and 27. +"They mount up to heaven, and go down again to the depths: Their +soul is melted because of trouble. They reel to and fro, and +stagger like a drunken man, and are at their wits end." In this +extremity of foul weather, the ship was so tossed and shaken, +that, by its creaking noise, and the leaking which was now more +than ordinary, we were in great fear that it would have shaken +asunder, and had just cause to pray, a little otherwise than the +poet, though marring the verse, yet mending the meaning:</p> + +<p>Deus maris et caeli, quid enim nisi vota supersunt;<br> + Solvere quassatae parcito membra ratis.</p> + +<p>Yet it pleased God of his infinite goodness to deliver us out +of this danger. We made a new main-sail, which we fastened to the +yard, and repaired our other damages as well as we could. This +was hardly done when we were reduced to as great extremity as +before, so that we had almost lost our new main-sail, had not +William Antony, the master of our ship, when no one else would +venture for fear of being washed overboard, by crawling along the +main-yard, then lowered close down upon the rails, and with great +danger of drowning, gathered it up out of the sea and fastened it +to the yard; being in the mean time often ducked overhead and +ears in the sea. So terrible were these storms, that some of our +company, who had used the sea for twenty years, had never seen +the like, and vowed, if ever they got safe to land, that they +would never go to sea again.</p> + +<p>At night on the last day of November, we met with an English +ship, and because it was too late that night, it was agreed that +they were to give us two or three tons of wine next morning, +being, as they said, all the provision of drink they had, save +only a butt or two which they must reserve for their own use: +But, after all, we heard no more of them till they were set on +ground on the coast of Ireland, where it appeared they might have +spared us much more than they pretended, as they could very well +have relieved our necessities, and had sufficient for themselves +remaining to bring them to England. The first of December we +spoke with another English ship, and had some beer out of her for +our urgent necessities, but not sufficient to carry us to +England, wherefore we were constrained to put into Ireland, the +wind so serving. Next day we came to an anchor under the land, +not far from the S. Kelmes, under the land and wind, where we +were somewhat more quiet. But as that was not a safe place to +ride in, we endeavoured next morning to weigh our anchor, when +having some of our men hurt at the capstan, we were forced to +leave it behind, holding on our course for Ventrie Haven, [Bantry +Bay?] where we safely arrived the same day, and found that place +a safe and convenient harbour for us, so that we had just cause +to sing with the Psalmist, <i>They that go down to the sea in +ships</i>, &c.</p> + +<p>As soon as we had anchored, my lord went forthwith on shore, +and presently after brought off fresh provisions and water; such +as sheep, pigs, fowls, &c. to refresh his ships company, +though he had lately been very weak himself, and had suffered the +same extremity with the rest: For, in the time of our former +want, having only a little water remaining by him in a pot, it +was broken in the night and all the water lost. The sick and +wounded were soon afterwards landed and carried to the principal +town, called <i>Dingenacush</i>[368], about three miles distant +from the haven, and at which place our surgeons attended them +daily. Here we well refreshed ourselves, while the Irish harp +sounded sweetly in our ears, and here we, who in our former +extremity were in a manner half dead, had our lives as it were +restored.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 368: Called otherwise Dingle Icouch by the +editor of Astleys collection.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>This Dingenacush is the chief town in all that part of +Ireland, consisting but of one street, whence some smaller ones +proceed on either side. It had gates, as it seemed, in former +times at either end, to shut and open as a town of war, and a +castle also. The houses are very strongly built, having thick +stone walls and narrow windows, being used, as they told us, as +so many castles in time of troubles, among the wild Irish or +otherwise. The castle and all the houses in the town, except +four, were taken and destroyed by the Earl of Desmond; these four +being held out against him and all his power, so that he could +not win them. There still remains a thick stone wall, across the +middle of the street, which was part of their fortification. Some +of the older inhabitants informed us, that they were driven to +great extremities during their defence, like the Jews of old when +besieged by the Roman emperor Titus, insomuch that they were +constrained by hunger to feed on the carcasses of the dead. +Though somewhat repaired, it still remains only the ruins of +their former town. Except in the houses of the better sort, they +have no chimnies, so that we were very much incommoded by the +smoke during our stay at that place. Their fuel is turf, which +they have very good, together with whins or furze. As there grows +little wood hereabout, building is very expensive; as also they +are in want of lime, which they have to bring from a far +distance. But they have abundance of stone, the whole country +appearing entirely composed of rocks and stones, so that they +commonly make their hedges of stone, by which each mans ground is +parted from his neighbour. Yet their country is very fruitful, +and abounds in grass and grain, as appears by the abundance of +cattle and sheep; insomuch that we had very good sheep, though +smaller than those of England, for two shillings, or five groats +a-piece, and good pigs and hens for threepence each.</p> + +<p>The greatest want is of industrious and husbandly inhabitants, +to till and improve the ground; for the common sort, if they can +only provide sufficient to serve them from hand to mouth, take no +farther care. Good land was to be had here for fourpence an acre +of yearly rent. They had very small store of money among them, +for which reason, perhaps, they doubled and trebled the prices of +every thing we bought, in proportion to what they had been before +our arrival. They have mines of alum, tin, brass, and iron; and +we saw certain natural stones, as clear as crystal, and naturally +squared like diamonds. That part of the country is full of great +mountains and hills, whence run many pleasant streams of fine +water. The native hardiness of the Irish nation may be conceived +from this, that their young children, even in the midst of +winter, run about the streets with bare legs and feet, and often +having no other apparel than a scanty mantle to cover their +nakedness. The chief officer of their town is called the +sovereign, who hath the same office and authority among them with +our mayors in England, having his Serjeants to attend upon him, +and a mace carried before mm as they have. We were first +entertained at the sovereigns house, which was one of the four +that withstood the Earl of Desmond in his rebellion.</p> + +<p>They have the same form of common prayer, word for word, that +we have, only that it is in Latin. On Sunday, the sovereign goeth +to church having his Serjeant before him, and accompanied by the +sheriff and others of the town. They there kneel down, every one +making his prayers privately by himself. They then rise up and go +out of the church again to drink. After this, they return again +to church, and the minister makes prayers. Their manner of +baptising differs somewhat from ours, part of the service +belonging to it being in Latin and part in Irish. The minister +takes the child on his hands, dipping it first backwards and then +forwards, over head and ears into the cold water even in the +midst of winter. By this the natural hardiness of the people may +appear, as before specified. They had neither bell, drums, nor +trumpet, to call the parishioners together, but wait for the +coming of the sovereign, when those that have devotion follow +him. Their bread is all baked in cakes, and the bakers bake for +all the town, receiving a tenth part for their trouble. We had of +them some ten or eleven tons of beer for the Victory; but it +acted as a severe purge upon all who drank it, so that we chose +rather to drink water.</p> + +<p>Having provided ourselves with fresh water, we set sail from +thence on the 20th December, accompanied by Sir Edward Dennie and +his lady, with two young sons. In the morning of that day, my +lord went on shore to hasten the dispatch of some fresh water for +the Victory, and brought us news that sixty Spanish prizes were +taken and brought to England. For two or three days after we +sailed, we had a fair wind; but it afterwards scanted, so that we +were fain to keep a cold Christmas with the bishop and his +clerks, as I said before. After this, meeting with an English +ship, we received the joyful news that ninety-one Spanish prizes +were come to England; and along with that, the sorrowful +intelligence that our last and best prize was cast away on the +coast of Cornwal, at a place the Cornish men call +<i>Als-efferne</i>, that is Hell-cliff, where Captain Lister and +all the people were drowned, except five or six, half English and +half Spaniards, who saved their lives by swimming. Yet much of +the goods were saved and preserved for us, by Sir Francis +Godolphin and other worshipful gentlemen of the country. My lord +was very sorry for the death of Captain Lister, saying that he +would willingly have lost all the fruits of the voyage to have +saved his life.</p> + +<p>The 29th December we met another ship, from which we learned +that Sir Martin Frobisher and Captain Reymond had taken the +admiral and vice-admiral of the fleet we had seen going into the +haven of Tercera; but that the admiral had sunk, in consequence +of much leaking, near the Eddystone, a rock over against Plymouth +sound, all the people however being saved. We were likewise +informed by this ship, that Captain Preston had captured a ship +laden with silver. My lord took his passage in this last ship to +land at Falmouth, while we held on our course for Plymouth.</p> + +<p>Towards night we came near the Ram-head, the next cape +westwards from Plymouth sound, but we feared to double it in the +night, by reason of the scantness of the wind: so we stood out to +seawards for half the night, and towards morning had the wind +more large. But we made too little to spare thereof; partly for +which reasons and partly mistaking the land, we fell so much to +leeward that we could not double the cape. For this reason we +turned back again and got into Falmouth haven, where we grounded +in 17 feet water; but as it was low ebb, the sea ready again to +flow, and the ground soft, we received no harm. Here we gladly +set our feet again on the long desired English ground, and +refreshed ourselves by keeping part of Christmas on our native +soil.</p> + +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> + +<p><i>Valiant Sea Fight, by Ten Merchant Ships of London against +Twelve Spanish Gallies in the Straits of Gibraltar, on the 24th +April</i> 1590[369].</p> + +<p>In 1590, sundry ships belonging to the merchants of London, +some freighted for Venice, some for Constantinople, and some to +divers other parts, met on their homeward course within the +Straits of Gibraltar, having escaped all danger hitherto. The +first of these was the Salomon, belonging to Mr Alexander Barnam +of London, and Messrs Bond and Tweed of Harwich, which had sailed +on the first of February last. The second was the Margaret and +John, belonging to Mr Wats of London. The third was the Minion; +the fourth the Ascension; the fifth the Centurion, belonging to +Mr Cordal; the sixth the Violet; the seventh the Samuel; the +eighth the Crescent; the ninth the Elizabeth; the tenth the +Richard belonging to Mr Duffield. All these ships, being of +notable and approved service, and coming near the mouth of the +Straits hard by the coast of Barbary, they descried twelve tall +gallies bravely furnished, and strongly provided with men and +ammunition of war, ready to intercept and seize them. Being +perceived by our captains and masters, we made speedy preparation +for our defence, waiting the whole night for the approach of the +enemy.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 369: Hakluyt, II. 660.]</blockquote> + +<p>Next morning early, being Tuesday in Easter week, the 24th of +April 1590, we had service according to our usual custom, praying +to Almighty God to save us from the hands of the tyrannous +Spaniards, whom we justly imagined and had always found to be our +most mortal enemies on the sea. Having finished our prayers, and +set ourselves in readiness, we perceived them coming towards us, +and knew them indeed to be the Spanish gallies, commanded by +Andrea Doria, viceroy for the king of Spain in the Straits of +Gibraltar, and a notable enemy to all Englishmen. When they came +near us, they <i>waved us amain</i> for the king of Spain, and in +return we waved them amain for the Queen of England[370]; at +which time it pleased the Almighty so to encourage our hearts, +that the nearer they came we the less feared their great strength +and huge number of men; they having to the amount of two or three +hundred in each galley. It was concluded among us, that our four +largest and tallest ships should be placed in the rear, the +weaker and smaller ships going foremost; and so it was performed, +every one of us being ready to take part in such successes as it +should please God to send.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 370: This waving amain seems to have been +some salutation of defiance, then usual at sea.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The gallies came upon us very fiercely at the first encounter, +yet God so strengthened us that, even if they had been ten times +more, we had not feared them at all. The Salomon, being a hot +ship with sundry cast pieces in her, gave the first shot in so +effectual a manner on their headmost galley, that it shared away +so many of the men that sat on one side of her, and pierced her +through and through, insomuch that she was ready to sink: Yet +they assaulted us the more fiercely. Then the rest of our ships, +especially the four chiefest, the Salomon, Margaret and John, +Minion, and the Ascension, gave a hot charge upon them, and they +on us, commencing a hot and fierce battle with great valour on +both sides, which continued for the space of six hours. About the +commencement of this fight, our fleet was joined by two Flemish +vessels. Seeing the great force of the gallies, one of these +presently struck his sails and yielded to the enemy; whereas, had +they exerted themselves on our side and in their own defence, +they needed not to have been taken in this cowardly manner. The +other was ready also to have yielded immediately, and began to +lower his sails: But the trumpeter of that ship drew his +faulcion, and stepping up to the pilot at the helm, vowed that he +would put him instantly to death, if he did not join and take +part with the English fleet: This he did, for fear of death, and +by that means they were defended from the tyranny which they had +otherwise assuredly found among the Spaniards.</p> + +<p>When we had continued the fight somewhat more than six hours, +God gave us the upper hand, so that we escaped the hands of so +many enemies, who were constrained to flee into harbour to +shelter themselves from us. This was the manifest work of God, +who defended us in such sort from all danger, that not one man of +us was slain in all this long and fierce assault, sustaining no +other damage or hurt than this, that the shrouds and back-stays +of the Salomon, which gave the first and last shot, and sore +galled the enemy during the whole battle, were clean shot away. +When the battle ceased, we were constrained for lack of wind to +stay and waft up and down, and then went back again to +<i>Tition</i> [Tetuan] in Barbary, six leagues from Gibraltar, +where we found the people wondrously favourable to us; who, being +but Moors and heathen people, shewed us where to find fresh water +and all other necessaries. In short, we had there as good +entertainment as if we had been in any place in England. The +governor favoured us greatly, to whom we in return presented such +gifts and commodities as we had, which he accepted of very +graciously: And here we staid four days.</p> + +<p>After the cessation of the battle, which was on Easter +Tuesday, we remained for want of wind before Gibraltar till the +next morning, being all that time becalmed, and therefore +expected every hour that they would have sent out a fresh force +against us: But they were in no condition to do so, all their +gallies being so sore battered that they durst not come out of +harbour, though greatly urged thereunto by the governor of that +town; but they had already met with so stout resistance, that +they could not be prevailed on to renew the fight.</p> + +<p>While we were at Tetuan, we received a report of the hurt we +had done the gallies; as we could not well discern any thing +during the fight, on account of the great smoke. We there heard +that we had almost spoiled those twelve gallies, which we had +shot clean through, so that two of them were on the point of +sinking; and we had slain so many of their men, that they were +not able to fit out their gallies any more all that year. After +going to Tetuan, we attempted three several times to pass the +straits, but could not: Yet, with the blessing of God, we came +safely through on the fourth attempt; and so continued on our +voyage with a pleasant breeze all the way to the coast of +England, where we arrived on the beginning of July 1590.</p> + +<p>SECTION IX.</p> + +<p><i>A valiant sea fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, in +April</i> 1591, <i>by the Centurion of London, against five +Spanish gallies</i>.</p> + +<p>In the month of November 1590, sundry ships belonging to +different merchants of London sailed with merchandise for various +ports within the Straits of Gibraltar; all of which, having fair +wind and weather, arrived safe at their destined ports. Among +these was the Centurion of London, a very tall ship of large +burden, yet but weakly manned, as appears by the following +narrative.</p> + +<p>The Centurion arrived safe at Marseilles, on her outward bound +voyage, where, after delivering her goods, she remained better +than five weeks, taking in lading, and then intended to return to +England. When she was ready to come away from Marseilles, there +were sundry other ships of smaller burden at that place, the +masters of which intreated Robert Bradshaw of Limehouse, the +master of the Centurion, to stay a day or two for them till they +could get in readiness to depart, saying that it were far better +for them all to go in company for mutual support and defence, +than singly to run the hazard of falling into the hands of the +Spanish gallies in the Straits. On which reasonable persuasion, +although the Centurion was of such sufficiency as might have been +reasonably hazarded alone, yet she staid for the smaller ships, +and set out along with them from Marseilles, all engaging +mutually to stand by each other, if they chanced to fall in with +any of the Spanish gallies.</p> + +<p>Thus sailing altogether along the coast of Spain, they were +suddenly becalmed upon Easter-day in the Straits of Gibraltar, +where they immediately saw several gallies making towards them in +a very gallant and courageous manner. The chief leaders and +soldiers in these gallies, were bravely apparelled in silken +coats, with silver whistles depending from their necks, and fine +plumes of feathers in their hats. Coming on courageously, they +shot very fast from their calivers upon the Centurion, which they +boarded somewhat before ten o'clock A.M. But the Centurion was +prepared for their reception, and meant to give them as sour a +welcome as they could; and having prepared their close quarters +with all other things in readiness, called on God for aid, and +cheered one another to fight to the last. The Centurion +discharged her great ordnance upon the gallies, but the little +ships her consorts durst not come forward to her aid, but lay +aloof, while five of the gallies laid on board the Centurion, to +whom they made themselves fast with their grappling irons, two on +one side and two on the other, while the admiral galley lay +across her stern. In this guise the Centurion was sore galled and +battered, her main-mast greatly wounded, all her sails filled +with shot holes, and her mizen mast and stern rendered almost +unserviceable. During this sore and deadly fight, the trumpeter +of the Centurion continually sounded forth the animating points +of war, encouraging the men to fight gallantly against their +enemies; while in the Spanish gallies there was no warlike music, +save the silver whistles, which were blown ever and anon. In this +sore fight, many a Spaniard was thrown into the sea, while +multitudes of them came crawling up the ships sides, hanging by +every rope, and endeavouring to enter in: Yet as fast as they +came to enter, so courageously were they received by the English, +that many of them were fain to tumble alive into the sea, +remediless of ever getting out alive. There were in the Centurion +48 men and boys in all, who bestirred themselves so valiantly and +so galled the enemy, that many a brave and lusty Spaniard lost +his life. The Centurion was set on fire five several times, with +wild-fire and other combustibles thrown in for that purpose by +the Spaniards; yet by the blessing of God, and the great and +diligent foresight of the master, the fire was always +extinguished without doing any harm.</p> + +<p>In every one of these five gallies there were about 200 +soldiers; who, together with the great guns, spoiled, rent, and +battered the Centurion very sorely; shot her mainmast through, +and slew four of her men, one of whom was the masters mate. Ten +other persons were hurt by splinters. But in the end, the +Spaniards had almost spent their shot, so that they were obliged +to load with hammers and the chains of their galley-slaves, yet, +God be praised, the English received no more harm. At length, +sore galled and worn out, the Spaniards were constrained to +unfasten their grapplings and sheer off; at which time, if there +had been any fresh ship to aid and succour the Centurion, they +had certainly sunk or taken all those gallies. The Dolphin lay +aloof and durst not come near, while the other two small ships +fled away. One of the gallies from the Centurion set upon the +Dolphin; which ship went immediately on fire, occasioned by her +own powder, so that the ship perished with all her men: But +whether this was done intentionally or not, was never known. +Surely, if she had come bravely forward in aid of the Centurion, +she had not perished.</p> + +<p>This fight continued five hours and a half, at the end of +which time both parties were glad to draw off and breathe +themselves; but the Spaniards, once gone, durst not renew the +fight. Next day, indeed, six other gallies came out and looked at +the Centurion, but durst on no account meddle with her. Thus +delivered by the Almighty from the hands of their enemies, they +gave God thanks for the victory, and arrived not long after safe +at London. Mr John Hawes merchant, and sundry others of good note +were present in this fight.</p> + +<p>SECTION X.</p> + +<p><i>Sea-fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man of war, +commanded by Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish men of +war</i>, 31st August 1591. <i>Written by Sir Walter +Raleigh</i>[371].</p> + +<p>PRELIMINARY DISCOURSE[372].</p> + +<p>Because the rumours are diversely spread, as well in England +as in the Low Countries and elsewhere, of this late encounter +between her majestys ships and the armada of Spain; and that the +Spaniards, according to their usual manner, fill the world with +their vain-glorious vaunts, making great shew of victories, when +on the contrary themselves are most commonly and shamefully +beaten and dishonoured, thereby hoping to possess the ignorant +multitude by anticipating and forerunning false reports: It is +agreeable with all good reason, for manifestation of the truth, +to overcome falsehood and untruth, that the beginning, +continuance, and success of this late honourable encounter by Sir +Richard Grenville, and others her majestys captains, with the +armada[373] of Spain, should be truly set down and published, +without partiality or false imaginations. And it is no marvel +that the Spaniards should seek, by false and slanderous +pamphlets, <i>advisos</i>, and letters, to cover their own loss, +and to derogate from others their due honours, especially in this +fight being far off; seeing they were not ashamed, in the year +1588, when they purposed the invasion of this land, to publish in +sundry languages in print, great victories in words, which they +pretended to have obtained against this realm, and spread the +same in a most false sort over all parts of France, Italy, and +other countries. When, shortly after it was happily manifested in +very deed to all nations, how their navy, which they termed +<i>invincible</i>, consisting of 140 sail of ships, not only of +their own kingdom, but strengthened with the greatest argosies, +Portugal caraks, Florentines, and huge hulks of other countries, +were by 80 of her majestys own ships of war, and a few belonging +to our own merchants, by the wise, valiant, and advantageous +conduct of the lord Charles Howard, high admiral of England, +beaten and shuffled together, even from the Lizard in Cornwall, +first to Portland where they shamefully left Don Pedro de Valdes +with his mighty ship: from Portland to Calais, where they lost +Hugo de Moncado with the gallies of which he was captain: and +from Calais driven by squibs from their anchors, were chased out +of sight of England, round about Scotland and Ireland. Where for +the sympathy of their barbarous religion, hoping to find succour +and assistance, a great part of them were crushed against the +rocks, and those others that landed, being very many in number, +were notwithstanding broken, slain, and taken, and so sent from +village to village, coupled in halters, to be shipped for +England. Where her majesty, of her princely and invincible +disposition, disdaining to put them to death, and scorning either +to retain or entertain them, they were all sent back again into +their countries, to witness and recount the worthy achievements +of their invincible and dreadful navy: of which, the number of +soldiers, the fearful burden of their ships, the commanders names +of every squadron, with all their magazines of provisions were +put in print, as an army and navy irresistible and disdaining +prevention. With all which so great and terrible ostentation, +they did not, in all their sailing about England, so much as sink +or take one ship, bark, pinnace, or cock-boat of ours, or ever +burnt so much as one sheep-cot of this land. When, as on the +contrary, Sir Francis Drake, with only 800 soldiers, not long +before landed in their Indies, and forced San Jago, Santo +Domingo, Carthagena, and the forts of Florida.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 371: Hakluyt, II. 668. Astley, I. +216.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 372: This preliminary discourse, by the +famous Sir Walter Raleigh, is given from Hakluyt without +alteration, except in orthography.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 373: Armada is a general word, signifying +in Spanish a ship of war or a fleet or squadron. Generally in +English it has been limited to the invincible armada, or powerful +fleet fitted out by Philip II. in the vain hope of conquering +England.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>And after that, Sir John Norris marched from Peniche in +Portugal with a handful of soldiers to the gates of Lisbon, being +above 40 English miles: Where the earl of Essex himself, and +other valiant gentlemen, braved the city of Lisbon, encamping at +the very gates: from whence, after many days abode, finding +neither promised parley nor provision wherewith to batter, they +made their retreat by land, in spite of all their garrisons both +of horse and foot. In this sort I have a little digressed from my +first purpose, only by the necessary comparison of their and our +actions: the one covetous of honour, without vaunt or +ostentation; the other so greedy to purchase the opinion of their +own affairs, and by false rumours to resist the blasts of their +own dishonours, as they will not only not blush to spread all +manner of untruths, but even for the least advantage, be it but +for the taking of one poor adventurer of the English, will +celebrate the victory with bonefires in every town, always +spending more in faggots than the purchase they obtained was +worth. Whereas, we never thought it worth the consumption of two +billets, when we have taken eight or ten of their Indian ships at +one time, and twenty of their Brazil fleet. Such is the +difference between true valour and vain ostentation, and between +honourable actions and frivolous vain-glorious boasting. But to +return to my purpose:</p> + +<p>NARRATIVE.</p> + +<p>The Lord Thomas Howard, with six of her majestys ships, six +victuallers of London, the bark Raleigh, and two or three +pinnaces, riding at anchor near Flores, one of the western +islands called the Azores, on the last of August 1591, in the +afternoon, had intelligence by one captain Middleton, of the +approach of the Spanish armada. This Middleton, being in a very +good sailing ship, had kept them company for three days before, +of good purpose, both to discover their force, and to give the +lord admiral advice of their approach. He had no sooner +communicated the news, when the Spanish fleet hove in sight; at +which time, many belonging to our ships companies were on shore +in the island of Flores, some providing ballast for the ships, +others filling water, and others refreshing themselves from the +land with such things as they could procure either for money or +by force. Owing to this, our ships were all in confusion, +pestered, rummaging, and every thing out of order, very light for +want of ballast; and what was most of all to their disadvantage, +the half of the men in every ship was sick and unserviceable. For +in the Revenge, there were ninety sick; in the Bonaventure, not +so many in health as could hand her mainsail, insomuch, that +unless twenty men had been taken from a bark of Sir George Careys +which was sunk, and appointed into her, she had hardly been able +to get back to England. The rest of the ships for the most part +were in little better state.</p> + +<p>The names of her majestys ships were as follows: The Defiance, +admiral, the Revenge, vice-admiral, the Bonaventure commanded by +captain Crosse, the Lion by George Fenner, the Foresight by +Thomas Vavasour, and the Crane by Duffild. The Foresight and +Crane were small ships, the other four were of the middle size. +All the others, except the bark Raleigh, commanded by captain +Thin, were victuallers, and of small or no force. The approach of +the Spanish fleet being concealed by means of the island, they +were soon at hand, so that our ships had scarce time to weigh +their anchors, and some even were obliged to slip their cables +and set sail. Sir Richard Grenville was the last to weigh, that +he might recover the men who were a land on the island, who had +otherwise been lost. The lord Thomas Howard, with the rest of the +fleet, very hardly recovered the wind, which Sir Richard was +unable to do; on which his master and others endeavoured to +persuade him to cut his main sail and cast about, trusting to the +swift sailing of his ship, as the squadron of Seville was on his +weather bow. But Sir Richard absolutely refused to turn from the +enemy, declaring he would rather die than dishonour himself, his +country, and her majestys ship, and persuaded his company that he +would be able to pass through the two squadrons in spite of them, +and force those of Seville to give him way. This he certainly +performed upon divers of the foremost, who, as the sailors term +it, sprang their luff, and fell under the lee of the Revenge. The +other course had certainly been the better, and might very +properly have been adopted under so great impossibility of +prevailing over such heavy odds; but, out of the greatness of his +mind, he could not be prevailed on to have the semblance of +fleeing.</p> + +<p>In the meantime, while Sir Richard attended to those ships of +the enemy that were nearest him and in his way, the great San +Philip being to windward of him, and coming down towards him, +becalmed his sails in such sort that his ship could neither make +way nor feel the helm, so huge and high was the Spanish ship, +being of fifteen hundred tons, and which presently laid the +Revenge on board. At this time, bereft of his sails, the ships +that had fallen under his lee, luffed up and laid him on board +also, the first of these that now came up being the vice-admiral +of the Biscay squadron, a very mighty and puissant ship, +commanded by Brittandona. The San Philip carried three tier of +ordnance on a side, and eleven pieces in each tier, besides eight +pieces in her forecastle chase, and others from her stern-ports. +After the Revenge was thus entangled by the huge San Philip, four +others laid her on board, two to larboard and two to starboard. +The fight thus began at three in the afternoon, and continued +very terribly the whole of that evening. But the great San +Philip, having received a discharge from the lower tier of the +Revenge, loaded with cross-bar shot, shifted herself with all +diligence from her side, utterly disliking this her first +entertainment. Some say the San Philip foundered, but we cannot +report this for a truth, not having sufficient assurance. Besides +the mariners, the Spanish ships were filled with companies of +soldiers, some having to the number of two hundred, some five +hundred, and others as far even as eight hundred. In ours, there +were none besides the mariners, except the servants of the +commanders, and some few gentlemen volunteers.</p> + +<p>After interchanging many vollies of great ordnance and small +shot, the Spaniards deliberated to enter the Revenge by boarding, +and made several attempts, hoping to carry her by the multitudes +of their armed soldiers and musketeers, but were still repulsed +again and again, being on every attempt beaten back into their +own ships or into the sea. In the beginning of the fight, the +George Noble of London being only one of the victuallers, and of +small force, having received some shot through her from the +Spanish <i>armadas</i>, fell under the lee of the Revenge, and +the master of her asked Sir Richard what he was pleased to +command him; on which Sir Richard bad him save himself as he best +might, leaving him to his fortune. After the fight had thus +continued without intermission, while the day lasted, and some +hours of the night, many of our men were slain and hurt; one of +the great galeons of the armada and the admiral of the hulks both +sunk, and a great slaughter had taken place in many of the other +great Spanish ships. Some allege that Sir Richard was very +dangerously hurt almost in the beginning of the fight, and lay +speechless for a time ere he recovered: But two men belonging to +the Revenge, who came home in a ship of Lyme from the islands, +and were examined by some of the lords and others, affirmed, that +he was never so much wounded as to forsake the upper deck till an +hour before midnight, and being then shot in the body by a musket +ball, was shot again in the head as the surgeon was dressing him, +the surgeon himself being at the same time wounded to death. This +also agrees with an examination of four other returned mariners +of the same ship, taken before Sir Francis Godolphin, and sent by +him to master William Killegrue of her majestys privy +chamber.</p> + +<p>To return to the fight: As the Spanish ships which attempted +to board the Revenge were wounded and beaten off, so always +others came up in their places, she never having less than two +mighty galeons by her sides and close on board her; so that ere +morning, from three o'clock of the day before, she had been +successively assailed by no less than fifteen several armadas or +great ships of war; and all of them had so ill approved their +entertainment, that, by break of day, they were far more willing +to hearken to a composition, than hastily to make any more +assaults or entries for boarding. But as the day advanced, so our +men decreased in number, and as the light grew more and more, by +so much more increased the discomforts of our men. For now +nothing appeared in sight but enemies, save one small ship called +the Pilgrim, commanded by Jacob Whiddon, who hovered all night to +see what might be the event; but, bearing up towards the Revenge +in the morning, was hunted like a hare among so many ravenous +hounds, yet escaped.</p> + +<p>All the powder of the Revenge was now spent to the very last +barrel, all her pikes broken, forty of her best men slain, and +most part of the rest wounded. In the beginning of the fight, she +had 90 of her men lying sick on the ballast in the hold, and only +100 capable of duty, a small crew for such a ship, and a weak +garrison to resist so mighty an army. By this brave hundred was +the whole of this hot fight sustained, the volleys, boardings, +assaults, and entries, from fifteen great ships of war all full +of men, besides those which had cannonaded her from a distance. +On the contrary, the Spanish ships were always supplied with +fresh soldiers from the several squadrons of this vast fleet, and +had all manner of arms and powder at will; while to our men there +remained no hope or comfort, no supply either of ships, men, +weapons, or powder. The masts were all beaten overboard; all her +tackle was cut asunder; her upper works all battered to pieces, +and in effect evened with the water, nothing but the hull or +bottom of the ship remaining, nothing being left over-head for +flight or for defence.</p> + +<p>Finding his ship in this distress, and altogether unable for +any longer resistance, after fifteen hours constant fighting +against fifteen great ships of war which assailed him in turns, +having received by estimation 800 shot of great ordnance, besides +many assaults and entries; and considering that he and his ship +must now soon be in possession of the enemy, who had arranged +their ships in a ring round about the Revenge, which was now +unable to move any way, except as acted on by the waves; Sir +Richard called for his master gunner, whom he knew to be a most +resolute man, and commanded him to split and sink the ship, that +nothing of glory or victory might remain to the enemy, who with +so great a navy, and in so long a time, were unable to take her. +They had fifty-three ships of war, and above 10,000 men, and had +been engaged against this single ship for fifteen hours. At the +same time, Sir Richard endeavoured to prevail upon as many of the +company as he could influence, to commit themselves to the mercy +of God, and not of their enemies, since they had like valiant men +repulsed so many enemies, urging them not now to obscure their +honour and that of their nation, for the sake of prolonging their +lives a few days. The master gunner and various others of the +crew readily assented to this desperate resolution; but the +captain and master were quite of an opposite opinion, and +conjured Sir Richard to desist from his desperate proposal; +alleging that the Spaniards would be as ready to agree to a +capitulation as they to offer it; and begged him to consider, +that there still were many valiant men still living in the ship, +and others whose wounds might not be mortal, who might be able to +do acceptable service to their queen and country hereafter. And, +although Sir Richard had alleged that the Spaniards should never +have the glory of taking one ship of her majesty, which had been +so long and valiantly defended; they answered, that the ship had +six feet water in her hold, and three shot holes under water, +which were so weakly stopped, that she must needs sink with the +first labouring of the sea, and was besides so battered and +bruised, that she could never be removed from the place.</p> + +<p>While the matter was thus in dispute, Sir Richard refusing to +listen to any reasons, the captain won over the most part to his +opinion, and the master was conveyed on board the Spanish +general, Don Alfonso Baçan. Finding none of his people +very ready to attempt boarding the Revenge again, and fearing +lest Sir Richard might blow up both them and himself, as he +learned from the master his dangerous disposition; Don Alfonso +agreed that all their lives should be saved, the ships company +sent to England, and the better sort to pay such reasonable +ransom as their estate could bear, all in the meantime to be free +from prison or the gallies. He so much the rather consented to +these terms, lest any farther loss or mischief might accrue to +themselves, and for the preservation of Sir Richard, whose +notable valour he greatly honoured and admired. On receiving this +answer, in which the safety of life was promised; the common +sort, now at the end of their peril, mostly drew back from the +proposal of Sir Richard and the master gunner, it being no hard +matter to dissuade men from death to life. Finding himself and +Sir Richard thus prevented and mastered by the majority, the +master gunner would have slain himself with his sword, but was +prevented by main force, and locked up in his cabin.</p> + +<p>Then the Spanish general sent many boats on board the Revenge, +and several of her men, fearing Sir Richards disposition, stole +away on board the general and other ships. Thus constrained to +submit, Sir Richard was desired by a message from Alfonso +Baçan to remove from the Revenge, as it was filled with +blood and the bodies of the slain, and with wounded men, like a +slaughter-house. Sir Richard gave for answer, that he might do +now with his body what he pleased; and while removing from the +ship, he fainted away, and on recovering he requested the company +to pray for him. The Spanish general used Sir Richard with all +humanity, leaving no means untried that tended towards his +recovery, highly commending his valour and worthiness, and +greatly bewailing his dangerous condition; seeing that it was a +rare spectacle, and an instance of resolution seldom met with, +for one ship to withstand so many enemies, to endure the +batteries and boardings of so many huge ships of war, and to +resist and repel the assaults and entries of such numbers of +soldiers. All this and more is confirmed, by the recital of a +Spanish captain in that same fleet, who was himself engaged in +this action, and, being severed from the rest in a storm, was +taken by the Lion, a small ship belonging to London, and is now +prisoner in London.</p> + +<p>The general commanding this great armada, was Don Alphonso +Baçan, brother to the Marquis of Santa Cruz. Britandona +was admiral of the squadron of Biscay. The Marquis of Arumburch +[Aremberg] commanded the squadron of Seville. Luis Coutinho +commanded the hulks and flyboats. There were slain and drowned in +this fight, as the before-mentioned Spanish captain confessed, +near a thousand of the enemy, with two special commanders, Don +Luis de San Juan, and Don George de Prunaria de Mallaga, besides +others of special account whose names have not yet been reported. +The admiral of the hulks and the Ascension of Seville were both +sunk at the side of the Revenge. One other ship, which got into +the road of San Miguel, sank there also; and a fourth ship had to +run on shore to save her men. Sir Richard, as it is said, died +the second or third day on board the general, much bewailed by +his enemies; but we have not heard what became of his body, +whether it were committed to the sea or buried on land. The +comfort remaining to his friends is, that he ended his life +honourably, having won great reputation for his nation and his +posterity, and hath not outlived his honour.</p> + +<p>For the rest of her majestys ships, that entered not into the +fight like the Revenge, the reasons and causes were these: There +were of them only six in all, two whereof were only small ships; +and they could be of no service, as the Revenge was engaged past +recovery. The island of Flores was on one side; 53 sail of +Spanish ships were on the other, divided into several squadrons, +all as full of soldiers as they could contain. Almost one half of +our men were sick and unable to serve; the ships were grown foul, +<i>unroomaged</i>[374], and hardly able to bear any sail for want +of ballast, having been six months at sea. If all the rest of the +ships had entered into the action, they had been all lost; for +the very hugeness of the Spanish ships, even if no other violence +had been offered, might have crushed them all into shivers +between them; by which the loss and dishonour to the queen had +been far greater, than any injury the enemy could have sustained. +It is nevertheless true, that the Lord Thomas Howard would have +entered between the squadrons of the enemy, but the others would +on no account consent; and even the master of his own ship +threatened to leap into the sea, rather than conduct the admirals +ship and the rest to be a certain prey to the enemy, where there +was no hope or possibility of victory or even of defence. In my +opinion, such rashness would have ill assorted with the +discretion and trust of a general, to have committed himself and +his charge to assured destruction, without any hope or likelihood +of prevailing, thereby to have diminished the strength of her +majestys navy, and to have increased the pride and glory of the +enemy.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 374: This singular antiquated sea term may +signify, not in sailing <i>trim</i>.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The Foresight, one of her majestys vessels, commanded by +Thomas Vavasour, performed a very great service, and staid two +hours as near the Revenge as the weather would permit, not +forsaking the fight till well nigh encompassed by the squadrons +of the enemy, and then cleared himself with great difficulty. The +rest gave diverse vollies of shot, and engaged as far as the +place and their own necessities permitted, so as to keep the +weather-gage of the enemy, till night parted them.</p> + +<p>A few days after this fight, the prisoners being dispersed +among the Spanish ships of war and ships from the Indies, there +arose so great a storm from the W. and N.W. that all the fleet +was dispersed, as well the fleet of the Indies then come to them +as the rest of the armada that had attended their arrival, of +which 14 sail, together with the Revenge having 200 Spaniards on +board of her, were cast away upon the island of St Michael. Thus +they honoured the obsequies of the renowned Revenge, for the +great glory she had achieved, not permitting her to perish alone. +Besides these, other 15 or 16 of the Spanish ships of war were +cast away in this storm upon the other islands of the Azores: +And, of an 100 sail and more of the fleet of the Indies, which +were expected this year in Spain, what with the loss sustained in +this tempest, and what before in the bay of Mexico and about the +Bermuda islands, above 70 were lost, including those taken by our +London ships; besides one very rich ship of the Indies, which set +herself on fire being boarded by the Pilgrim, and five others +taken by the ship belonging to Mr Wats of London between the +Havannah and Cape St Antonio. On the 4th of November this year, +we had letters from Tercera, affirming that 3000 dead bodies had +been thrown upon that island from the perished ships, and that +the Spaniards confessed to have lost 10,000 men in this storm, +besides those who perished between the main and the islands. Thus +it hath pleased God to fight for us, and to defend the justice of +our cause, against the ambitious and bloody pretences of the +Spaniards, who seeking to devour all nations are themselves +devoured: A manifest testimony how unjust and displeasing are +their attempts in the sight of God, who hath been pleased to +witness, by the evil success of their affairs, his mislike of +their bloody and injurious designs, purposed and practised +against all Christian princes, over whom they seek unlawful and +ungodly rule and supreme command.</p> + +<p>A day or two before this terrible catastrophe, when some of +our prisoners desired to be set on shore on the Azores islands, +hoping to be thence transported into England, and which liberty +had been formerly promised by the Spanish general; one Morice +Fitz John, (son of old John of Desmond, a notable traitor, who +was cousin-german to the late earl of Desmond,) was sent from +ship to ship to endeavour to persuade the English prisoners to +serve the king of Spain. The arguments he used to induce them +were these. Increase of pay to treble their present allowance; +advancement to the better sort; and the free exercise of the true +catholic religion, ensuring the safety of all their souls. For +the first of these, the beggarly and unnatural behaviour of those +English and Irish rebels that served the king of Spain in that +action was a sufficient answer; for so poor and ragged were they, +that, for want of apparel, they stripped the poor prisoners their +countrymen of their ragged garments, worn out by six months +service, not even sparing to despoil them of their bloody shirts +from their wounded bodies, and the very shoes from their feet; a +noble testimony of their rich entertainment and high pay. As to +the second argument, of hope of advancement if they served well +and continued faithful to the king of Spain; what man could be so +blockishly ignorant ever to expect promotion and honour from a +foreign king, having no other merit or pretension than his own +disloyalty, his unnatural desertion of his country and parents, +and rebellion against his true prince, to whose obedience he is +bound by oath, by nature, and by religion? No! such men are only +assured to be employed on all desperate enterprizes, and to be +held in scorn and disdain even among those they serve. That ever +a traitor was either trusted or advanced I have never learnt, +neither can I remember a single example. No man could have less +becomed the office of orator for such a purpose, than this Morice +of Desmond: For, the earl his cousin, being one of the greatest +subjects in the kingdom of Ireland, possessing almost whole +counties in his large property, many goodly manors, castles, and +lordships, the county palatine of Kerry, 500 gentlemen of his own +family and name ready to follow him, all which he and his +ancestors had enjoyed in peace for three or four hundred years: +Yet this man, in less than three years after his rebellion and +adherence to the Spaniards, was beaten from all his holds, not so +many as ten gentlemen of his name left living, himself taken and +beheaded by a gentleman of his own nation, and his lands given by +parliament to her majesty and possessed by the English. His other +cousin, Sir John Desmond, taken by Mr John Zouch; and his body +hung up over the gates of his native city to be devoured by +ravens. The third brother, Sir James, hanged, drawn, and +quartered in the same place. Had he been able to vaunt of the +success of his own house, in thus serving the king of Spain, the +argument might doubtless have moved much and wrought great +effect: the which, because he happened to forget, I have thought +good to remember in his behalf.</p> + +<p>As for the matter of religion, to which he adverted, it would +require a separate volume, were I to set down how irreligiously +they cover their greedy and ambitious pretences with that veil of +pretended piety. But sure I am, there is no kingdom or +commonwealth in all Europe that they do not invade, under +pretence of religion, if it be reformed. Nay if it even be what +they term catholic, they pretend a title, as if the kings of +Castile were the natural heirs of all the world. Thus between +both, no kingdom is exempted from their ambition. Where they dare +not invade with their own forces, they basely entertain the +traitors and vagabonds of all nations; seeking by their means, +and by their runagate Jesuits, to win other parts to their +dominion, by which they have ruined many noble houses and others +in this land, extinguishing their lives and families. What good, +honour, or fortune, any one hath ever yet achieved through them, +is yet unheard of. If our English papists will only look to +Portugal, against which they have no pretence of religion; how +their nobility are imprisoned and put to death, their rich men +made a prey, and all sorts of people reduced to servitude; they +shall find that the obedience even of the Turk is ease and +liberty, compared to the tyranny of Spain. What have they done in +Sicily, in Naples, in Milan, in the low countries? Who hath there +been spared even for religion? It cometh to my remembrance of a +certain burgher at Antwerp, whose house was entered by a company +of Spanish soldiers when they sacked that city. He besought them +to spare him and his goods, being a good catholic, and therefore +one of their own party and faction. The Spaniards answered, they +knew him to be of a good conscience in himself; but his money, +plate, jewels, and goods, were all heretical, and therefore good +prize. So they abused and tormented the foolish Fleming, who +thought that an <i>Agnus Dei</i> had been a sufficient safeguard +against all the force of that holy and charitable nation.</p> + +<p>Neither have they at any time, as they protest, invaded the +kingdoms of Mexico and Peru and elsewhere, being only led thereto +to reduce the people to Christianity, not for gold or empire: +Whereas, in the single island of Hispaniola, they have wasted and +destroyed thirty hundred thousand of the natives, besides many +millions else in other places of the Indies: a poor and harmless +people, created of God, and might have been won to his service, +as many of them were, even almost all whom they endeavoured to +persuade thereto. The story of these their enormities, has been +written at large by Bartholomew de las Casas[375], a bishop of +their own nation, and has been translated into English and many +other languages, under the title of <i>The Spanish Cruelties</i>. +Who therefore would repose trust in such a nation of ravenous +strangers, and more especially in those Spaniards, who more +greedily thirst after the blood of the English, for the many +overthrows and dishonours they have received at our hands; whose +weakness we have discovered to the world, and whose forces, at +home, abroad, in Europe, in the Indies, by sea and by land, even +with mere handfuls of men and ships on our sides, we have +overthrown and dishonoured? Let not therefore any Englishman, of +what religion soever, have other opinion of these Spaniards or +their abettors, but that those whom they seek to win of our +nation, they esteem base and traiterous, unworthy persons, and +inconstant fools; and that they use this pretence of religion, +for no other purpose but to bewitch us from the obedience due to +our natural prince, hoping thereby to bring us in time under +slavery and subjection, when none shall be there so odious and +despised, as those very traitors who have sold their country to +strangers, forsaking their faith and obedience, contrary to the +laws of nature and religion, and contrary to that humane and +universal honour, not only of Christians but of heathen and +unbelieving nations, who have always sustained every degree of +labour, embracing even death itself, in defence of their country, +their prince, and their commonwealth.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 375: He was bishop of Chiapa in New Spain, +and computes the Indians destroyed by the Spaniards in about +fifty years, at no fewer than twenty millions.--Astley, I. 221. +a.]</blockquote> + +<p>To conclude, it hath ever to this day pleased God to prosper +and defend her majesty, to break the purposes of her malicious +enemies, to confound the devices of forsworn traitors, and to +overthrow all unjust practices and invasions. She hath ever been +held in honour by the worthiest kings, served by faithful +subjects, and shall ever, by the favour of God, resist, repell, +and confound all attempts against her person and kingdom. In the +mean time, let the Spaniards and traitors vaunt of their success; +while we, her true and obedient subjects, guided by the shining +light of her virtues, shall always love, serve, and obey her, to +the end of our lives.</p> + +<p>SECTION XI</p> + +<p><i>Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain this +year 1591; with the number that perished, according to the +examination of certain Spaniards, lately taken and brought to +England[376].</i></p> + +<p>The fleet of New Spain, at their first gathering together, +consisted of 52 sail. The admiral and vice-admiral ships were +each of 600 tons burden. Four or five of the ships were of 900 +and 1000 tons each; some were of 400 tons, and the smallest of +200. Of this fleet 19 were cast away, containing by estimation +2600 men, which happened along the coast of New Spain, so that +only 33 sail came to the Havannah.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 376: Hakluyt, II. 670.]</blockquote> + +<p>The fleet of Terra Firma, at its first departure from Spain, +consisted of 50 sail, bound for Nombre de Dios, where they +discharged their loading, and returned thence for their health +sake to Carthagena, till such time as the treasure they were to +take in at Nombre de Dios were ready. But before this fleet +departed, some were gone by one or two at a time, so that only 23 +sail of this fleet arrived at the Havannah.</p> + +<p>There met at the Havannah,</p> + +<pre> + 33 sail from New Spain, + 23 from the Terra Firma, + 12 belonging to San Domingo, + 9 from Honduras. +</pre> + +<p>Thus 77 ships joined and set sail from the Havannah, on the +17th of July 1591, according to our account, and kept together +till they arrived in the lat. of 35° N. which was about the +10th of August. There the wind, which had been at S.W. changed +suddenly to N. so that the sea coming from the S.W. and the wind +violent from the N. they were put in great extremity, and then +first lost the admiral of their fleet, in which were 500 men; and +within three or four days after, another storm rising, five or +six others of their largest ships were cast away with all their +men, together with their vice-admiral.</p> + +<p>In lat. 38° N. and about the end of August, another great +storm arose, in which all their remaining ships, except 48, were +lost. These 48 ships kept together till they came in sight of the +islands of Corvo and Flores, about the 5th or 6th of September, +at which time they were separated by a great storm; and of that +number, 15 or 16 sail were afterwards seen by three Spanish +prisoners, riding at anchor under Tercera, while 12 or 14 more +were observed to bear away for San Miguel. What became of them +after these Spaniards were taken, cannot yet be certified; but +their opinion is, that very few of this fleet escaped being +either taken or cast away. It has been ascertained of late by +other means of intelligence, that of this whole fleet of 123 +sail, which should have come to Spain this year, there have only +25 yet arrived. This note was extracted from the examinations of +certain Spanish prisoners, brought to England by six of the +London ships, which took seven of these men from the +before-mentioned fleet of the Indies near the islands of the +Açores.</p> + +<p>SECTION XII.</p> + +<p><i>Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in 1591, by a +feet of London ships sent with supplies to the Lord Thomas +Howard. Written by Captain Robert Flicke</i>[377].</p> + +<p>PRELIMINARY REMARKS[378].</p> + +<p>The following voyage is extracted from a letter, dated at +Plymouth the 24th of October 1591, and sent thence by Captain +Flicke to Messrs Thomas Bromley, Richard Staper, and ---- +Cordall, three of the contractors, as we apprehend, for the +ships, and is titled, "Concerning the success of a part of the +London supplies sent to the isles of the Azores to my Lord Thomas +Howard." In this letter no mention is made of the number of ships +employed, nor of the names of more than two captains besides +Flicke, namely, <i>Brothus</i> and <i>Furtho</i>, the latter of +whom was bearer of the letter. We also find the name of four of +the ships; the Costly, Centurion, Cherubim, and the Margaret and +John, but not the names of their commanders, neither the name of +the ship in which Flicke sailed, and which, for distinctions +sake, we call the admiral. These omissions may be excuseable in a +private letter, written only to acquaint the merchants of +particulars they had not before learnt, and not designed as a +formal narrative of the voyage to be laid before the public. As +these, however, are essential to narratives of this kind, it +might have been expected of Mr Hakluyt to have supplied such +defects. We may judge, however, that the number of ships was +seven, as in the preceding account of the fleet of the Indies, +six London ships are mentioned as having fallen in with it, which +were probably those separated from the admiral or commodore, +which ship will make the seventh.--<i>Astley.</i></p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 377: Hakluyt, II. 671. Astley, I. +221.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 378: Astley, I. 221.]</blockquote> + +<p>NARRATIVE[379].</p> + +<p>Worshipful, my hearty commendations to you premised.--By my +last letter, dated 12th August from this place, I advertised you +particularly of the accidents which had befallen our fleet till +then. It now remains to relate our exertions for accomplishing +our orders for endeavouring to join my Lord Thomas Howard, and +the success we have had. We departed from hence on the 17th +August, the wind not serving before. Next day I summoned a +council by signal, on which the captains and masters of all the +ships came on board, when I acquainted them with my commission, +confirmed by the lords of her majestys council, and with the +advertisement of Sir Edward Denny, that my lord had determined to +remain 60 leagues west of Fayal, spreading his squadron north and +south between 37° 30' and 38° 30' north. But, if we did +not there find him, we were to repair to the islands of Flores +and Corvo, where a pinnace would purposely wait our coming till +the last day of August; with the intent, after that day, to +repair to the coast of Spain, about the heighth of the rock +[<i>of Lisbon?</i>], some twenty or thirty leagues off shore. +This being advisedly considered, and having regard to the +shortness of time occasioned by our long delay at this place, and +the uncertainty of favourable weather for us, it was generally +concluded, as the best and surest way to meet my lord, to bear up +for the heighth of <i>the rock</i>, without making any stay upon +the coast, and thence to make directly for the foresaid islands, +which was accordingly fully agreed to and performed.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 379: In pursuance of our uniform plan, of +drawing from the original sources, this article is an exact +transcript from Hakluyt, only modernizing his antiquated language +and orthography, and not copied from the abridgement of +Astley.--.E]</blockquote> + +<p>The 28th of August we had sight of the Burlings, and being on +the 29th athwart of Peniche, and having a favourable wind, we +directed our course west for the Azores, without making any stay +off the coast of Portugal. The 30th we met the Red Rose, Captain +Royden, formerly called the Golden Dragon, which had separated +from my lord in a storm. He informed us of 50 sail of the king of +Spains armada having sailed for the islands, but could not give +us any intelligence of my lord, otherwise than supposing him to +remain about the islands, wherefore we continued our course, the +wind remaining favourable. The 4th of September we had sight of +Tercera, and ranged along all the islands, both on their south, +and north sides, for the space of four days, during which time we +met with no ships whatever, so that we could learn no +intelligence, either of my lord or of the fleet of the Indies; +wherefore we directed our course to the west of Fayal, according +to the instructions of Sir Edward Denny. When plying to the +westwards on the 11th, we descried a sail from our main-top, and +by two or three in the afternoon raised her hull, but the weather +fell so calm that we could not fetch her. I therefore sent off my +skiff well manned, and furnished with shot and swords, the +Cherubim and the Margaret and John doing the like. Upon this the +sail stood off again, and on the approach of night our boats lost +sight of her and so returned. During this pursuit the Centurion +was left astern, so that we missed her next morning, and spent +all that day plying up and down in search of her: And, as all our +ships were directed, in case of separation by stress of weather +or other mischance, to meet and join at Flores, we, according to +the instructions of Sir Edward Denny, proceeded for the purpose +of finding my Lord Thomas Howard, and being in the heighth +appointed, and not able to remain there in consequence of extreme +tempests, which forced us to the isles of Flores and Corvo, which +we made on the 14th in the morning, and there rejoined the +Centurion. She informed us, that on the 12th day, being the same +on which she lost us, she had met 45 sail of the fleet of the +Indies.</p> + +<p>The same night, in consequence of this intelligence, we came +to anchor between Flores and Corvo, and next morning at +day-break, I convened a council of all the captains and masters +on board my ship, by a signal flag. For satisfying our desire to +learn some intelligence of my lord, as also for the purpose of +procuring a supply of water, it was thought good to send our +boats on shore armed, under the command of Captain Brothus; +besides which, it was agreed, after our departure thence, to +range along the south sides of the islands, that we might either +procure some intelligence of my lord, or fall in with the fleet +of the Indies; and, in case of missing both objects, to direct +our course for Cape St Vincent. The boats being sent on shore, +according to this determination, it chanced that the Costely, +which rode outermost at our anchoring ground, having weighed to +bring herself nearer among us to assist in protecting our boats, +discovered two sail in opening the land, which we in the +road-stead could not perceive. Upon this she fired a shot of +warning, which caused us to <i>wave</i> all our boats back; and +before they could recover their ships, the two ships seen by the +Costely appeared to us, on which we made all sail towards them, +and in a happy hour as it pleased God. We had no sooner cleared +the land and spoken one of them, which was a bark belonging to +Bristol, also seeking my lord ineffectually at the place +appointed, when so violent a storm arose that we had been in +great danger of perishing if we had continued in the road. This +storm continued in its utmost violence for sixty hours, during +which I was separated from all our fleet except the Cherubim, and +Costely, which continued in company. After it subsided, sailing +in among the islands, I viewed the road of Fayal, and finding no +roaders there, I went thence for the isle of Tercera.</p> + +<p>On the 19th day of September in the morning, coming to +Tercera, and intending to edge into the road, a tempest arose and +so scanted the wind that we could not get in. Being accordingly +driven to leeward, we fell in among some of the fleet of the +Indies, which had been dispersed by the storm, and driven from +the road. Upon this our ship and the two others then with me gave +several chases, by which we parted company. Following up my +chase, we made her strike and yield about noon, when she turned +out to be a Portuguese, laden with hides, sarsa-parilla, and +<i>anile</i> [Indigo.] At this instant we espied another, and +taking our prize with us, followed and captured her before night. +She was called the Conception, commanded by Francisco Spinola, +and was laden with cochineal, raw hides, and certain raw silk: +And as the sea was so tempestuous that we could in no way board +her, neither by boats nor from the ship, so we kept her under our +lee till a fit opportunity. That same night, a little before day, +another ship joined company with us, supposing us and our two +prizes to belong to their fleet, which we dissembled till +morning.</p> + +<p>In the morning of the 20th, this new sail being somewhat shot +a-head of us, and being anxious for the safe keeping of the two +former, we purposed to cause our two prizes put out more sail, so +as to keep near us while chasing the third, as our master +insisted that they would follow us; owing to which, by the time +we had caused this new one to yield, and had sent men on board to +take possession, the Conception being far astern, and having got +the wind of us, stood off with all her sails, so that we were +forced to make a new chase after her, and had not the wind +enlarged upon us we had lost her. The whole of this day was spent +in this new pursuit, before we recovered her, and brought +ourselves again in company with our other prizes; by which we +lost the opportunity of that day, during which the weather served +for boarding the Portuguese prize, which was in great distress, +making request of us to take them on board, as they were ready to +sink, as we could well perceive by their pumping incessantly, and +in our judgment she went down that night.</p> + +<p>On the 21st the Conception sprung a leak also, which gained +upon her notwithstanding every effort at the pumps, so that she +could not be kept long above water. So I took out of her 42 +chests of cochineal and silk, leaving her to the sea with 11 feet +water in her hold, and 4700 hides. The other prize, which we have +brought into harbour, is the Nuestra Sennora de los Remedios, +Francisco Alvares captain, laden with 16 chests of cochineal, +certain fardels [or bales] of raw silk, and about 4000 hides. +Upon the discharge of the goods, your honours shall be +particularly advertised of the same. In boarding our prizes, such +was the disorder of our men, that, besides rifling the persons of +the Spaniards, they broke open the chests and purloined what +money was in them; although I had given notice of my intention of +going on board in person, to have taken a just account thereof in +presence of three or four witnesses, putting the whole in safe +custody, pursuant to the articles made in this behalf. And +whereas certain sums of money taken from our men, which they had +thus purloined and embezzled, together with other parcels brought +on board my ship, amounting to 2129 pesos and a half, all of +which the company demanded to have shared among them as due +pillage, I refused this demand, and read to them openly at the +mast the articles confirmed by my lord treasurer and my lord +admiral, by which they ought to be directed in these things, +declaring that it was not in my power to dispose thereof until +the same were finally determined at home. Thereupon they +mutinied, and grew at length to such fury, that they declared +they would have it or else would break down the cabin. Seeing +them ready to execute this threat, I was forced to yield, lest +the great number of Spaniards we had on board might have taken +the opportunity of rising against us; which, indeed, after the +brawls of our men were appeased, they actually endeavoured to +have done.</p> + +<p>By the last advice from Castile, the general of the king of +Spains armada, lately put to sea, is ordered to join his fleet +with that of the Indies, and to remain at Tercera till the 15th +of October, waiting for six <i>pataches</i> with seven or eight +millions of the royal treasure expected by that time: otherwise +they are to wait their coming from the Havannah till January +next, or until the kings farther pleasure shall be made known. +These pataches are said to be of 300 tons burden each, carrying +30 pieces of brass cannon, and are also reported to sail in a +superior manner to any other ships. Before their coming to +Flores, there perished of the fleet of the Indies eleven sail, +among which was the admiral, and not one roan saved. It is +likewise supposed by the Spaniards, that the storms we +encountered at Flores and Tercera must have destroyed many more +of them, of which indeed we were partly eye-witnesses. On the +whole, therefore, what by the seas and our men of war, of the 75 +sail that came from the Havannah, I presume one half will not +arrive in Spain.</p> + +<p>On the night of the 11th October, we came to anchor in +Plymouth sound, and got up next morning with our prize into +Catwater, for which God be praised: For so vehement a storm +arose, that our prize was forced to cut away her main-mast, +otherwise, her ground tackle being bad, she had been driven on +shore by the violence of the storm. This was the main cause which +induced me to put in here, where I now propose to discharge the +goods without farther risk, and have certified thus much to my +lord admiral, and therewith desire to receive the directions of +my lords of the council together with yours, as my lord Thomas +Howard is not yet returned. How the rest of our consorts, which +separated from us, may have sped, or what prizes they may have +taken, of which there is much hope by reason of the scattering of +the West India fleet, I am as yet unable to say any thing. And +thus, waiting your answer, and referring for all other matters to +captain Furtho, the bearer hereof, I make an end, at Plymouth +this 24th of October 1591.</p> + +<p>Your Worships loving Friend,<br> + ROBERT FLICKE.</p> + +<p>SECTION XIII.</p> + +<p><i>Exploits of the English in several Expeditions and cruizing +Voyages from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John Huighen van +Linschoten</i>[380].</p> + +<p>PRELIMINARY REMARKS.</p> + +<p>The entire title of this article in Hakluyts Collection is, "A +large testimony of John Huighen van Linschoten, Hollander, +concerning the worthy exploits achieved by the right honourable +the Earl of Cumberland, by Sir Martine Frobisher, Sir Richard +Grenville, and diverse other English captains, about the isles of +the Azores, and upon the coasts of Spain and Portugal, in the +years 1589, 1590, 1591, &c. recorded in his excellent +discourse of voyages to the East and West Indies, cap. 96, 97, +and 99." Of this article, the Editor of Astley gives the +following account.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 380: Hakluyt, II. 674. Astley, I. +225.]</blockquote> + +<p>"The author, John Huighen van Linschoten, left Goa with a +fleet of ships, viz. The Santa Maria, Nuestra Sennora de la +Concepçao, the San Christopher admiral, the San Thome +which was the largest and most richly laden, and the Santa Cruz +in which Linschoten sailed. It was extracted by Hakluyt from the +96th, 97th, and 99th chapters of the first book of Linschotens +Voyages in English, beginning at p. 171. This section is intended +as a supplement to the English cruizing voyages already inserted, +which fall within the period mentioned in the title; and is the +more material, as the memoirs it contains not only confirm the +most material facts related in these preceding voyages, but give +a satisfactory account of many things which are there but +imperfectly related, often continuing the history which in these +breaks off abruptly, and bringing to light some remarkable +achievements of our countrymen, of which otherwise no mention +could be found in our voluminous naval transactions.</p> + +<p>"We are persuaded the reader will feel a secret joy in +contemplating the great figure this nation made in these heroic +times; owing to that universal zeal to promote the commerce and +glory of England, which then prevailed among the ministers of the +crown, as well as the people at large. We presume likewise, that +this pleasure will be not a little enhanced by the consideration +that these particulars were written by a foreigner, who is held +in great reputation for his judgment and fidelity, and who has +sounded the praise of our countrymen even beyond what has been +done by our own historians. On the other hand, the reader will be +no less concerned to find what immense treasures some of our +adventurers lost, by unaccountably missing the fleets of which +they went in search, when at the same time they were so near +them, that it seemed almost impossible they should escape. This +shews, after all, how uncertain is the meeting of ships at sea, +and that two great fleets may sail almost close to one another, +without having the least suspicion."--<i>Astley.</i></p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>The 22d of July 1589, about evening, being near the islands of +Flores and Corvo, we perceived three ships making towards us, +which came from under the land and put us in great fear, for they +came close to our admiral and shot diverse times at him and at +another ship of our company, whereby we perceived them to be +English, for they bore the English flag at their main-tops, but +none of them seemed above 60 tons burden. About evening they +followed after us, and all night bore lanterns with candles +burning at their sterns, although the moon shined. That night we +passed hard by the island of Fayal; and next morning, being +between the isle of St George on our right and the small isle of +Graciosa on our left, we espied the three English ships still +following us. They consulted together, upon which one of them +sailed backwards, as if one ship had followed after us without +company, and for a time that ship was out of sight; but in no +long time afterwards, it returned to the other two, when they +consulted again, and came all three together against our ship, +because we were to leeward of all our ships, having the island of +St George on one side instead of a sconce, [fort] thinking so to +deal with us as to force us to run on shore, to which we were +very near. In that manner they came bravely towards us, with +their flags displayed, sounding their trumpets, and sailed at +least three times about us, discharging at us their muskets and +calivers and some pieces of great ordnance, doing us no harm in +the hull of our ship, but spoiled all our sails and ropes, and so +plagued us that no man durst put forth his head. When we shot off +a piece of ordnance, we had at the least an hours work to load it +again, there being a great noise and cry in our ship, as if we +had been all cast away, whereupon the English began to mock us, +calling out to us with many taunting words.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, the other ships that were in company with us +hoisted all their sails, doing their best to bear away for +Tercera, and not looking once behind them to help us, as not +caring for us, but doubting they would be too late thither, and +thinking they did enough if they could save themselves, whereby +it may be easily seen what kind of company they keep with each +other, and what kind of order is among them. In the end, finding +small advantage against us, and little knowing in what fear we +were, and also because we were not far from Tercera, the English +left us; on which we were not a little rejoiced, as thinking +ourselves risen from death to life, though we were not yet well +assured nor void of fear, till we got to anchor in the road of +Tercera, under the protection of the Portuguese fort, towards +which we made all possible sail. On the other hand, we were still +in great doubt, not knowing the situation of the island, or +whether they were our friends or enemies; and we were so much the +more doubtful, because we found no man of war there, nor any +caravels of advice from Portugal as we expected, to have convoyed +us home, or given us intelligence, as they usually do in that +country. And, because the English had been so victorious in those +parts, we suspected that it went not well with Spain. The +inhabitants of Tercera were no less fearful than we, for on +seeing our fleet they thought us to have been English, and that +we came to over-run the island, because the three English ships +came in along with us and had wound up their flags; upon which +the islanders sent out two caravels to us that lay there, with +advice from the king for such India ships as should come +there.</p> + +<p>Those caravels came to view us, and perceiving what we were +made after us; upon which the English ships left us and made +towards the caravels, because the caravels thought them friends +and shunned them not, as supposing them of our company: But we +shot three or four times, and made signs to them that they should +make towards the island, which they presently did. On perceiving +that, the Englishmen made out to sea: and then the caravels sent +on board us, saying that the people of the island were all in +arms, having received advice from Portugal, that Sir Francis +Drake was in readiness, and meant to come to the islands. They +likewise brought us news of the overthrow of the Spanish armada +which had gone against England, and that the English had been at +the gates of Lisbon; for which reason it win the king's commands +that we should put into the island of Tercera, and remain there +under the protection of its castle, till we received further +orders, as it was then thought too dangerous for us to continue +our voyage to Lisbon. These news put all our fleet in great fear, +making us look upon each other as not knowing what to do or say; +as it was dangerous for us to put into the road, which lies open +to the sea, so that although they had the kings commands for so +doing, the India ships durst not anchor there, but only used to +come thither, standing off and on, and sending their boats a-land +for such necessaries as they wanted, without coming to anchor. +But now necessity compelled us to this measure, owing to our +fears for the three small English ships, also because of the +kings orders, and because we understood that the Earl of +Cumberland was not far from these islands with sundry ships of +war. We made therefore a virtue of necessity, and entering the +road of Tercera, anchored close under the castle, in waiting for +orders from the king to pursue our voyage, it being then the 24th +of July or St Jameses day.</p> + +<p>The 12th of August, the Earl of Cumberland, with six or seven +ships of war, sailed past the island of Tercera; and to our great +good fortune passed out of sight. We then set out in all haste, +and, for our greater security, took along with us 400 Spaniards +of those who were in garrison in the island, and made sail for +Lisbon with a favourable wind, so that in eleven days we arrived +in the river Tagus with great joy and triumph. For, had we been +one day longer of getting into the river, we had all been taken +by Captain Drake, [Sir Francis Drake] who came before Cascais +with 40 ships, at the very time when we cast anchor in the Tagus +under the guard of several gallies.</p> + +<p>While I remained in Tercera, the Earl of Cumberland came to St +Marys to take in fresh water and other victuals; but the +inhabitants would not suffer him to have it, and wounded both the +earl himself and several of his men, so that they were forced to +depart without having any thing. Likewise, while I was at +Tercera, the same earl came to the island of Graciosa, where he +went to land in person with seven or eight others, demanding +certain beasts, poultry, and other victuals, with wine and fresh +water, which they willingly gave him, after which he departed +without doing any injury, for which the inhabitants were very +thankful, praising his courtesy and faithfulness to his promise. +The earl came likewise at that time to Fayal, where at the first +they begun to resist him; but by reason of some controversy among +themselves, they let him land, when he razed the castle, throwing +all the cannon into the sea, and took with him certain caravels +and ships that lay in the road, with all such provisions as he +wanted, and then departed. Thereupon, the king caused the +principal actors in that transaction to be punished, and went +thither a company of soldiers, which went from Tereera, with all +kind of warlike ammunition and great shot, rebuilding the cattle +the better to defend the island, and no more trusting to the +Portuguese inhabitants.</p> + +<p>The 9th of October 1589[381], there arrived in Tereera +fourteen ships from the Spanish West Indies, laden with +cochineal, hides, gold, silver, pearls, and other rich wares. +When they departed from the harbour of the Havannah, they were +fifty in company; of which eleven sunk in the channel [of +Florida] by reason of foul weather, and all the rest were +scattered and separated from each other in a storm. Next day +there came another ship of the same fleet, which sailed close +under the island endeavouring to get into the road; when she was +met by an English whip that had not above three cast pieces [of +ordnance], while the Spaniards had twelve. They fought a long +while together, which we in the island could distinctly see. The +governor of the island sent out two boats filled with musketeers +to aid the Spanish ship; but before they could get up to her +assistance; the English had shot her below water, so that we saw +her sink into the sea with all her sails up, and she entirely +disappeared. The Englishmens boat saved the Captain and about +thirty others, but not one pennyworth of the goods, which were to +the value of 200,000 ducats, in gold, silver, and pearls. All the +rest of the crew were drowned, to the number of about fifty +persons, among whom were some friars and women, whom the English +could not save. The English set all the people they had saved on +shore, and then sailed away. The 27th of the same month of +October 1589, these fourteen ships sailed from Tercera, for +Seville; and on coming to the coast of Spain, they were all taken +by some English ships that watched for them, two only excepted +which made their escape, all the rest being carried to +England.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 381: In Hakluyt, all that now follows is +marked as extracted from the 99th chapter of +Linschoten.]</blockquote> + +<p>About this time, the earl of Cumberland, with one of the +queens ships and five or six others, kept hovering about the +islands, and came oft-times close to the island of Tercera, and +to the road of Angra, so near that the people on land could +easily count all the men on his decks, and could even distinguish +one from another; they of the island not once shooting at them, +which they might easily have done, as they were often within +musket-shot of the town and fort. He continued in these parts for +the space of two months, sailing round about the islands, and +landed in Graciosa and Fayal, as I have already mentioned. He +took several ships and caravels, which he sent off to England, so +that the people of the islands durst not put forth their heads. +At one time, about three or four days after the earl had been at +the island of Fayal, and was departed from thence, there arrived +there six ships of the Indies, the general of which was one +<i>Juan Dorives</i>, which landed in that island four millions of +gold and silver[382]. Then, being much in fear of the English, +and having refreshed themselves with all speed, they set sail and +arrived safe at San Lucar, without meeting an enemy, to the great +good luck of the Spaniards and bad fortune of the English; for, +within less than two days after the gold and silver was again +laden into the Spanish ships, the earl of Cumberland sailed past +the island again; so that if he had once got sight of these +valuable ships, without doubt he had got them all, as the +Spaniards themselves confessed.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 382: The denomination is not mentioned, +perhaps <i>pezos</i>, or what we call dollars.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In the month of November, two great ships arrived in Tercera, +being the admiral and vice-admiral of the fleet laden with +silver, which had been separated from the fleet in a great storm, +and were in great jeopardy and distress, ready to sink, being +forced to use all their pumps, and so terrified, that they wished +a thousand times to have met the English, to whom they would +willingly have given all the silver, and every thing they had on +board, only to preserve their lives. Although the earl still +hovered about the islands, yet did he not meet with these ships, +which got with much labour and difficulty into the road of Angra, +where with all speed they unladed and landed about five millions +in silver, all in great pieces or ingots of 8 or 12 great pounds, +so that the whole quay lay covered with plates and chests of +silver, full of pieces of eight rials, most wonderful to behold: +Each million being worth ten hundred thousand ducats, besides +gold, pearls, and other precious stones, which were not +registered. The admiral and chief commander of these ships, and +of the whole fleet to which they belonged, was <i>Alvaro Flores +de Quin Quiniones</i>, who was sick of the Neapolitan disease, +and was brought to land; and of which malady he died soon +afterwards at Seville. He had with him the kings commission under +the great seal, giving him full authority as general and +commander in chief upon the seas, over all fleets and ships, and +in all places, lands, and islands, on shore wherever he came; +wherefore the governor of Tercera shewed him much honour, and +between them it was concerted, seeing the weakness of the ships +and the danger from the English, that they should send the ships +first empty of treasure to Seville or Lisbon, under a guard of +soldiers, when the king might give orders afterwards to fetch the +silver home under safe convoy. The said admiral Alvaro Flores +staid there, under colour of taking care of the silver, but +chiefly because of his disease and fear of the English. He had +for his part alone, above the value of 50,000 ducats in pearls, +which he shewed us, and sought to sell or barter them with us for +spices or bills of exchange. These two ships sailed from Tercera +with three or four hundred men, including those who came with +them from the Indies and soldiers; but while at sea in a storm, +the admiral split and sunk outright, not one man being saved; and +the vice-admiral, after cutting away her masts, ran aground hard +by Setubal, where she broke in pieces, some of the men saving +themselves by swimming, who brought the news of all the rest +being drowned.</p> + +<p>In the same month of November 1589, there came two great ships +out of the Spanish Indies, and when within half a mile of the +road of Tercera, they were met with by an English ship which +fought them both together for a long while, and took them both. +About seven or eight months before, there came an English ship to +Tercera, pretending to be a Frenchman come for traffic, and began +to load woad, but being discovered was confiscated to the king, +both ship and cargo, and the men all made prisoners, yet were +allowed to roam up and down to get their livings, by labouring +like slaves, being considered in as safe custody in the island at +large as if in a prison. But at length, upon a Sunday, they all +went behind the hills called <i>Bresil</i>, where they found a +fishing boat, in which they rowed out to sea to the ships of the +Earl of Cumberland, who chanced for their good fortune to come to +the island, and anchored with his ships about half a mile from +the road of Angra, close to two small islands about a bare shot +from the shore of Tercera, which are full of goats, deer, and +sheep, belonging to the inhabitants of Tercera. These sailors +knew this well, wherefore they rowed to these islands in their +boats, whence they took as many goats and sheep as they needed, +which was well seen by those of the town and main island, but +they durst not go forth to hinder them. By this exploit, there +only remained behind the master and merchant of the detained +English ship. This master had a brother-in-law in England, who, +on hearing of his brothers imprisonment, got a licence from the +queen to fit out a ship, with which to endeavour to recover his +losses by cruizing against the Spaniards, by which to redeem his +brother from imprisonment in Tercera, and it was he who took the +two Spanish ships before the town: The before-mentioned merchant, +who was my intimate acquaintance, was standing on the shore along +with me, looking at them at the time. When these ships were +taken, which were worth 300,000 ducats, the brother sent all the +men on shore, except only two of the principal gentlemen, whom he +kept to give in exchange for his brother; and by the pilot of one +of the captured ships he sent a letter to the governor of +Tercera, offering to send the two gentlemen on shore if his +brother were delivered up, otherwise he would carry them +prisoners into England, which indeed he did, as the governor +would not deliver up his brother, saying the gentlemen might make +that suit to the king of Spain. We invited that Spanish pilot to +supper with us, and the Englishmen likewise, when he related to +us the particulars of the fight, much commending the order and +manner in which the English fought, as also their courteous +behaviour to him: But, in the end, the English merchant stole +away in a French ship, without paying any ransom.</p> + +<p>In January 1590, there arrived one ship alone at Tercera from +the Spanish West Indies, bringing news that a fleet of an hundred +sail, which had set out from the Indies, were driven by a storm +on the coast of Florida, where they were all cast away, vast +riches and many men being lost, and she alone had escaped with +the news. Thus by account, of 200 ships which were certainly +known to have sailed out of New Spain, San Domingo, Havannah, +Cabo Verde, Brazil, Guinea, &c. in the year 1589, for Spain +and Portugal, not above 14 or 15 of them arrived safe, all the +rest having either been foundered, cast away, or taken. In the +same month of January, there came to Tercera from Seville, 15 or +16 ships, mostly fliboats of the Low Countries, and some ships of +Britanny, that were arrested in Spain. These came out full of +soldiers and well provided with guns and ammunition, to lade home +the silver that lay in Tercera, and to bring home Alvaro Flores +into Spain, by order of the king. As at this time of the year +there are always great storms about these islands, the +above-mentioned ships durst not enter the road of Tercera, for it +then blew so great a storm that some of the ships, which had +entered the road, had been forced to cut away their masts, and +were in much danger of being lost, and among these a ship of +Biscay was actually driven upon the coast and dashed to pieces, +but all the men were saved. The other ships were obliged to keep +to sea and to separate from each other, allowing themselves to +drive at the mercy of the winds and waves till the 15th of March, +as in all that time they had not one day of good weather in which +to anchor, so that they endured much distress, heartily cursing +both the silver and the island.</p> + +<p>When this storm was passed, they fell in with an English ship +of about 40 tons, which by reason of the heavy wind could not +hoist all her sails, so that they took her. Hoisting her English +ensign on the stern of their admiral, the ships came now as +proudly into the road-stead of Tercera as if they had defeated +the whole navy of England: But, just as their admiral was +entering the road, trickt out with the English flag on his stern, +there came by chance two English ships past the island, which +paid her so well for her bravity, that she had to cry out +<i>misericordia</i>. Had she been a mile farther out, the English +ships doubtless would have taken her; but getting under the guns +of the fortress, which began to play upon the English ships, they +were forced to leave her and put farther out to sea, after having +slain five or six of the Spaniards.</p> + +<p>The Englishmen taken in the small ship were put under hatches, +coupled together in irons; and, after they had been three or four +days prisoners, a Spanish ensign in the ship, who had a brother +slain in the armada that went against England, took a fancy to +revenge his brothers death, and to shew his own manhood on these +captives; whereupon, taking a poinard, he stabbed six of them to +the heart as they sat below in irons. Two others of them +perceiving this atrocious action, clasped each other about the +body, and leapt into the sea, where they were drowned. This +infamous act was much disliked by all the Spaniards, so that the +assassin was carried prisoner to Lisbon; upon which the king of +Spain commanded him to be sent to England, that the queen might +use him according to her pleasure; which sentence, at the earnest +request of the friends of the murderer, was commuted to an order +for his being beheaded; but on Good Friday, when the cardinal was +going to mass, the captains and commanders made such intercession +for him, that he was finally pardoned. I thought good to note +this incident, that the bloody and dishonourable minds of the +Spaniards to those who were under subjection to them, might be +made manifest.</p> + +<p>The same two English ships, which followed the Spanish admiral +till he took shelter under the guns of the fort, put out to sea, +where they met with the only remaining vessel of that fleet which +had been scattered in the storm, all the rest being now in the +road. This small ship they took, sending all me men on shore +unhurt; but it they had known what had been done to the English +captives, I believe they would have taken vengeance, as many an +innocent soul afterwards paid for the atrocity of the Spanish +ensign. The ship now taken by the English, was the same which had +been formerly confiscated at Tercera, and was sold to the +Spaniards that then came from the Indies, who sailed in her to +San Lucar; where it also was arrested by the duke, and appointed +to go along with the others, to fetch the silver from Tercera, as +it was a good sailer; but it was the meanest of all that fleet. +By this means, it was taken from the Spaniards and carried to +England, where the owners got it again when they least +expected.</p> + +<p>On the 19th March 1590, having laden the kings silver and +received Alvaro Flores with his company, and good provision of +necessaries, warlike ammunitions and soldiers, the +before-mentioned 19 ships sailed from Tercera, firmly resolved, +as they set forth, to fight valiantly to the last man, before +they would yield or lose their riches. Though they intended to +make for San Lucar, the wind forced them to Lisbon, as if willing +to keep them there in safety, although Alvaro Flores would have +persisted in forcing his way to San Lucar against the wind and +weather. But, constrained by adverse wind, and importunately +urged by the mariners, who protested they would require their +losses and damages from him, he consented to put in at Lisbon, +whence the silver was conveyed by land to Seville. At this time, +there lay 20 English ships off Cape St Vincent, to watch for this +fleet; so that if they had gone forwards for Sun Lucar, which +they certainly had done if the wind had been fair, they must have +fallen into the hands of the English: They may say, therefore, +that the wind lent them a fortunate voyage on this occasion. If +the English had met them, they had surely been in great danger, +and possibly few of them had escaped, on account of the fear +which they were then in of the English; as fortune, or God +rather, was then wholly against them, which was enough to make +the Spaniards out of heart, and to inspire the English with the +greater boldness; for being victorious, they were stout and +valiant, and seeing all their enterprizes successful, they were +become lords and masters of the sea, and needed to care for no +man, as well appears from this short narrative.</p> + +<p>On the 7th of August 1590, a fleet of 20 English ships +appeared off Tercera, five of them being ships belonging to the +queen, of which one Martin Frobisher was general, as we +afterwards learnt. They came purposely to watch for the fleet of +the Spanish West Indies, and for the India ships, and the ships +of the other countries in the West. This put the islanders in +great fear, especially those of Fayal, where the English sent a +trumpeter to the governor, to ask certain supplies of wine, +flesh, and other provisions for their money. This request was not +only refused, but they shot the messenger and slew him, which +gave the English much displeasure, so that they sent another +message desiring them to look to themselves and keep sure guard, +as they meant to come and visit them per force. The governor sent +back for answer, that he was there in behalf of the king of +Spain, and would do his best to keep them out, as in duty bound; +but nothing was done after all, though the people of Fayal were +in great fear, sending to Tercera for aid, whence they had some +barks with powder and other ammunition of war, with some Biscuit +and other necessary provisions.</p> + +<p>The 30th of August, certain news came from Portugal, that 80 +ships had sailed from <i>the Groin</i>, (Corunna) laden with +victuals, ammunition of war, money, and soldiers, bound for +Britanny in aid of the catholic leaguers of France against the +king of Navarre. At this time likewise, two Netherland hulks, +when half seas over on their way from Portugal to Tercera, were +met by four English ships belonging to the queen, commanded by +Sir John Hawkins, by whom they were stopped; but he let them go +again uninjured. According to the report of these Netherlanders, +each of these ships carried 80 pieces of ordnance. They reported +likewise, that Captain Drake (Sir Francis) lay with 40 English +ships in the channel, watching for the fleet from Corunna; and +that ten other English ships lay off Cape St Vincent, that if any +ships escaped Frobisher at the islands, they might intercept +them. These tidings greatly alarmed the islanders, lest if the +English failed of catching the Spanish fleet, and got nothing by +them, they might fall upon the islands, that they might not go +home empty handed; whereupon they held strict watch, sending home +advice to the king of what intelligence they had.</p> + +<p>The 1st September, there came a Portuguese ship from +Pernambuco in Brazil to the island of St Michael, with news, that +the admiral of the Portuguese fleet from the East Indies, having +missed St Helena, was forced to put into Pernambuco, though +expressly forbidden by the king under a heavy penalty, because of +the worms in that haven which greatly spoil the ships. The same +ship, in which was the Admiral Bernardin Ribero, sailed the +former year 1589 from Lisbon for India with five ships in her +company, four only of which got to India, the fifth being never +heard of, so that she was believed lost. The other four returned +safe into Portugal, though the admiral was much spoiled, as he +met two English ships, which fought him a long while and slew +many of his men, yet he escaped from them at last. The 5th of the +same month, there arrived at Tercera a caravel belonging to +Corvo, bringing 50 men who had been spoiled by the English, who +set them ashore on the island of Corvo. They had been taken in a +ship coming from the Spanish West Indies, and reported that the +English had taken four other West India ships, and a caravel +having the king of Spains letters of advice for the Portuguese +ships coming from the East Indies; and that, including those they +had taken, the English had at least 40 ships together, so that +nothing could escape them; therefore, that the Portuguese ships +coming from India durst not put into the islands, but took their +course between 40° and 42° of N. latitude, whence they +shaped their course for Lisbon, shunning likewise Cape St +Vincent, as otherwise they could not look for safety, the sea +being quite full of English ships. Wherefore, the king advised +that the fleet now at Havannah in the Spanish West Indies, and +ready to sail for Spain, should remain till the next year, +because of the great danger of falling into the hands of the +English. This was no small charge and hindrance to the fleet, as +the ships that remain long at the Havannah consume themselves and +in a manner eat up one another, from the great number of their +people, and the great scarcity and dearness of every thing at +that place; wherefore many of the ships adventured rather to +hazard themselves singly for the voyage than to stay there; all +of which fell into the hands of the English, and many of their +men were brought to Tercera: So that we could see nothing else +for a whole day but spoiled men set on shore, some from one ship +and some from another, it being pitiful to see and hear them all, +cursing the English and their own bad fortunes, with those who +had been the cause of provoking the English to war, and +complaining of the small remedy and order taken therein by the +officers of the king of Spain.</p> + +<p>The 19th of the same month of September, a caravel arrived at +Tercera from Lisbon, bringing one of the kings officers to cause +lade the goods that were saved from the Malacca ship, and for +which we had so long tarried there, and to send them to Lisbon. +At the same time Don Alonso de Baçan sailed from Corunna +for the Azores with 40 great ships of war, to wait for the fleets +from the Spanish and Portuguese Indies, which, along with our +Malacca goods when laden, he was to convoy to the Tagus. But, +when he had been some days at sea, always with a contrary wind, +only two of his ships could get to the islands, all the rest +being scattered. When these two ships arrived at Tercera and did +not find the fleet, they immediately returned in search of it. In +the mean time the king changing his mind, sent orders for the +commercial ships to remain in the Indies, and for Don Alonso +Baçan to return to Corunna, which he did accordingly, +never once coming near the Azores except the two ships already +mentioned; for he well knew that the English lay near Corvo, but +would not visit them, and so returned to Corunna. Thus our goods +from Malacca remained unshipped, and were trussed up again, +having to wait some other opportunity.</p> + +<p>The 23d October in this same year 1590, a caravel came from +Portugal to Tercera, bringing advice that of the five ships which +sailed in that year from Lisbon for the East Indies, four of them +had returned to Portugal after being four months at sea: the +admiral ship, in which was the viceroy Mathias de Albuquerque, +having only got to India after being eleven months at sea without +ever seeing land, as was afterwards learnt by news over-land, +having arrived in great misery at Malacca. In this ship there +died 280 men during the voyage out, according to a note sent by +the viceroy to the cardinal at Lisbon, with the names and +sirnames of every man, likewise giving a narrative of the voyage, +and the misery they had endured. This obstinate perseverance was +entirely occasioned by the anxiety of Albuquerque not to lose the +government of Portuguese India, as he had sworn to lose his life +or arrive in India, which indeed he did to the great danger and +loss of his company, many of whom paid with their lives, and that +chiefly owing to want of provisions. Albuquerque knew well, +however, if he had returned to Portugal with the other ships, +that he would have been deprived of his government, as the people +began already to murmur at his proud and lofty demeanour. Among +other instances of his pride, he caused to be painted over his +gallery, the figure of Fortune and his own picture, with a staff +standing by, as if threatening Fortune, with this motto, <i>Quero +que vencas</i>; that is, <i>I will have thee to +overcome</i>[383]. When this was read by the cardinal and other +gentlemen, who accompanied him on board out of respect, they +thought it an instance of foolish arrogance: But this is no +strange matter among the Portuguese, as they above all others +<i>must let the fool peep out of their sleeves</i>, especially +when in authority. I knew Mathias de Albuquerque in India, when a +military officer, then beloved of all men and behaving himself +courteously to all, so that he was unanimously desired to be +their viceroy. But, having received his patent with full power +and authority, he so much changed from his former behaviour, +that, by reason of his pride, all began to fear and curse him, +even before his departure from Lisbon, such charges being often +seen in many men, when advanced to high state and +dignity[384].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 383: De Faria says, "The season was so far +advanced when he set out, that it was generally believed he would +not accomplish the voyage. But he caused himself to be painted on +his colours standing on Fortune; and, setting these up in his +ship, declared he would perform the voyage in spite of her, and +did so" As De Faria does not reflect upon him for this, it may be +presumed, he thought it merely an indication of an heroic +disposition.--Astley, I. 231. a.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 384: De Faria gives a very advantageous +character of this viceroy, saying that he was one of the most +deserving of those who enjoyed that high station. He left 80,000 +ducats in the treasury, besides jewels of Ceylon of great value. +He thought no one could cheat him; yet, on purpose to undeceive +him, a soldier drew his pay three several times by as many names. +He was of middle stature, and lame of one foot, but not so in +disposition and manners, being a good Christian and well-bred +gentleman.--Astley, I. 231, b.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 20th January 1591, news was brought from Portugal to +Tercera, that the English had taken a ship sent by the king to +the Portuguese Indies, carrying advice to the viceroy of the +return of the four ships to Portugal; which captured ship was +stuffed full of goods, in consequence of their return, besides +having 500,000 ducats in ryals of eight. It sailed from Lisbon in +November 1590, and fought the English a long time, but had at +length to yield, and was carried to England, where all the men +were set free and returned to Lisbon, at which place the captain +was thrown into prison, but afterwards justified himself and was +released, as he told me personally. The English took, at the same +time, a ship coming from the Mina, laden with gold, and two ships +laden with pepper and other spices, bound for Italy, their pepper +only being worth 170,000 ducats. All these rich prizes were +carried clear off into England.</p> + +<p>In July 1591, an earthquake commenced in the island of +Tercera, which continued from the 26th of that month to the 12th +of August, or 18 days, during all which time no person durst +remain within a house, but all fled into the fields in terrible +consternation, fasting and praying almost incessantly. Many +houses fell down, and in particular a town called Villa Franca +was almost utterly destroyed, all its houses and cloisters thrown +down, and several people slain. In some places the ground rose +up, the cliffs were removed from their places, and even some +hills were thrown down and levelled with the adjoining plains. +The earthquake was so violent, that the ships in the road and in +the adjoining sea, were shaken as if the whole earth had been +agitated to its centre. In one place a fountain sprung from the +ground, whence clear water flowed in abundance for four days, and +then ceased. All this time a noise was heard under ground as of +thunder, or as if all the devils in hell had been assembled +there, by which many died of fear. Four several times the island +of Tercera shook with such violence as if it had turned upon its +foundations, yet was it not overwhelmed. Earthquakes are common +in these islands, as about 20 years before there happened just +such an earthquake, when a hill, close to the town of Villa +Franca, fell down and buried all the town with earth, by which +many people were overwhelmed and slain.</p> + +<p>The 25th of August, the kings armada from Ferrol arrived in +Tercera, consisting of 30 ships of war belonging to Biscay, +Portugal, and Spain, together with 10 Dutch fliboats that were +pressed at Lisbon into the service, besides other small vessels +and <i>pataxos</i> to serve as advice-boats, and to scour the +seas for intelligence. This fleet came to wait for and convoy the +ships from the Spanish Indies; and the fliboats were for the +purpose of bringing home to Lisbon our goods that were saved in +the lost ship from Malacca. This fleet arrived at the island of +Corvo on the 13th of September[385], where the English then lay +waiting for the fleet from the Spanish Indies, with a squadron of +about 16 ships. Some or most of the Spanish ships were already +come to the Azores, and the English were in great hopes to have +taken them: But, on perceiving the Spanish fleet of war to be so +strong, the lord Thomas Howard, who was admiral of the English, +gave orders to his fleet not to assail the Spaniards, and on no +account to separate from him without special orders[386]. Yet the +vice-admiral, Sir Richard Grenville, in his ship the Revenge, +bore into the Spanish fleet, and shot among them doing much harm, +thinking that the rest of the English ships would have followed +him, which they did not, but left him there and sailed away, the +reason of which could not be known. Perceiving this, the +Spaniards boarded the Revenge with 7 or 8 ships, but she bravely +withstood them all, fighting with them at the least 12 hours +without ceasing, and sunk two of them, one a double fliboat of +600 tons, and admiral of the fliboats, the other a ship of +Biscay. In the end, however, in consequence of the overwhelming +number that came against her, the Revenge was taken, but to the +heavy loss of the Spaniards, who lost in the fight, either slain +or drowned, above 400 men, while 100 of the English were slain. +Sir Richard was himself wounded in the brain, of which he +afterwards died.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 385: It is probable, from this date, that +the arrival of the fleet at Tercera on the 25th August, as above, +is an error; and that it only then left Ferrol; on its voyage for +Tercera.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 386: See the English account of these +events in the immediately preceding section.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Sir Richard, after the Revenge yielded, was carried on board +the San Paulo, the ship in which was Don Alonso de Baçan, +the admiral of the Spanish fleet, where his wounds were dressed +by the Spanish surgeons, but Don Alonso would neither see nor +speak to him. All the other captains went to visit and comfort +him in his hard fortune, wondering at his courage and constancy, +as he shewed no signs of faintness, not even changing colour: +But, feeling his death approaching, he spoke in Spanish to the +following purport: "Here die I Richard Grenville, with a joyous +and quiet mind, having ended my life as a true soldier ought to +do, fighting for my country, my queen, my religion, and my +honour: so that my soul most joyfully departeth from this body, +and shall always leave behind the everlasting fame of a true and +valiant soldier, having done my duty as became me." When he had +finished these, or such like words, he gave up the ghost with +great and unshaken courage, no man being able to perceive the +least sign of concern. This sir Richard Grenville was a great and +rich gentleman of England, having large yearly revenues, but of a +daring and intrepid disposition, and much affected to warlike +enterprize; insomuch that he voluntarily offered his services to +the queen. He had performed many valiant deeds, and was greatly +feared among the islands, his intrepidity being well known to +all. He was, however, of a severe and rigid character, so that +his own people feared and hated him for his fierceness, and spoke +very hardly of him. For, when they in the Revenge first fell in +among the Spanish fleet, they had their mainsail in readiness, +and might possibly have got away, as it was one of the best +sailing ships of the English; and, as the master perceived that +the rest of the squadron had left them, and did not follow up to +their support, he gave orders to <i>cut the mainsail</i>, that +they likewise should make off: But sir Richard threatened him and +all the rest of the crew, that if any man laid hold of the +mainsail with that intent, he would cause him to be hung up +immediately; so that in fact they were compelled to fight, and in +the end were taken. He was of so hardy a complexion, that, while +among the Spanish officers, while at dinner or supper with them, +he would swallow three or four bumpers of wine, and then by way +of bravado, crush the glasses between his teeth and swallow them, +so that the blood ran out of his mouth, yet without any apparent +harm to him. This was told me by several credible persons, who +had often stood by and beheld him.</p> + +<p>The Englishmen who remained alive in the Revenge, as the +captain of the soldiers, the master, and others, were distributed +among the different ships by which she was taken. On taking +possession of her, a fight had almost taken place between the +Biscaineers and Portuguese who boarded her, both claiming the +honour of having boarded first, so that there grew a great noise +and quarrel among them, one seizing the chief ensign, and the +other the flag, the captains and every one holding their own. The +ships which had laid her on board were altogether out of order, +and sore shattered, having many of their men hurt, so that they +had to come to Tercera to be repaired. On their arrival, I and my +chamber companion, desirous to hear the news, went on board one +of the twelve apostles, or great ships of Biscay, whose captain +was <i>Bartandono</i>[387], who had been general of the +Biscaineers in the great armada that went against England. On +seeing us, he called us into his gallery, where he received us +courteously, being then at dinner along with the English captain, +who was dressed in a suit of black velvet, but could not tell us +any thing, as he could speak no other language but English and +Latin, which last Bartandono could speak a little. The English +captain was permitted by the governor of Tercera to land with his +sword by his side, and was in our lodging visiting the Englishman +who belonged to the ship of which the sailors escaped, as I +related before. This captain wrote a letter, in which he related +all the particulars of the fight, and left it with that English +merchant who resided in the lodging with us, to forward it to the +lord admiral of England. The captain went afterwards to Lisbon, +where he was honourably received, and sent, to Setubal, whence he +sailed for England with the other prisoners. The master likewise +of the Revenge came on shore, with licence from Bartandono, and +lived in the same lodgings with us. He had at the least 10 or 12 +wounds, in his head and body, of which he afterwards died on his +voyage from the islands to Lisbon.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 387: Named Britandona in the foregoing +section.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The Spanish navy remained at the Azores till the end of +September, to assemble all the fleet together, which in the end +amounted to the number of 140 sail in all, including the ships of +war and those of the Indies. When all ready to sail, there arose +suddenly so violent a storm, that the islanders declared nothing +like it had been seen in the memory of man. The sea raged with +such fury as if it would have swallowed up the islands, the waves +rising higher than the cliffs, so that it was amazing to behold +them, and living fish were thrown upon the land. The storm lasted +for seven or eight successive days, veering about to every point +of the compass at least twice or three times during its +continuance, with a continual tempestuous force most terrible to +behold, even by us who were on shore, much more to those who were +on the sea, and exposed to its fury. During this dreadful storm, +above 12 ships were dashed to pieces on the coasts and rocks of +the island of Tercera all round about, so that nothing was to be +heard but weeping, lamenting, and wailing, now a ship being +broken in pieces in one place, then another at a different place, +and all the men drowned. For 20 days after the storm, nothing +else was done but fishing for dead men that were continually +driving on shore. Among the rest, the Revenge was cast away on a +ledge of rocks near the isle of Tercera, where she split to +pieces and sunk, having in her 70 men, Gallegos and Biscaineers +and others, with some of the captive English, one only of whom +got upon the rock alive, having his head and body all wounded. +Being brought on shore, he told us the sad tidings, and desired +to be shriven, after which he presently died. The Revenge had in +her several fine brass pieces of artillery, which were all sunk +in the sea; but the islanders had great hopes of weighing them up +next summer.</p> + +<p>Among those ships that were cast away about Tercera, was one +of those fliboats which had been arrested in Portugal for the +kings service, named the White Dove, the master of which was one +Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland, having in her 100 +soldiers, as was the case in all the rest. Being overruled by the +Spanish captain, so that he could not be master of his own ship, +he was sailing about at the mercy of the winds and waves, and +came at length in sight of Tercera, whereupon the Spaniards, +thinking all their safety consisted in putting into the roads, +compelled the master and pilot to make towards the island; and +when they remonstrated, saying they would certainly be cast away +and all destroyed, the Spanish captain called him a drunkard and +heretic, and striking him with a staff, commanded him to do as he +was ordered. Seeing this, the master said, "Well then, since it +is your desire to be cast away, I can lose but one life." He then +made sail for the land, which was on that side of the island +where there is nothing but rocks and stones as high as mountains, +most terrible to behold. Several of the inhabitants stood on the +cliffs with long ropes, having bundles of cork fastened to one +end, to throw down to the men, that they might lay hold of them +and save their lives. Few of them, however, got near enough for +this, as most of them were dashed to pieces before they could +reach the rocks forming the wall-like shore. At this time, when +approaching the rocks, the master, who was an old man, called his +son who sailed with him, and having embraced and taken a last +farewell, the good old father desired his son to take no note of +him, but to seek and save himself. "Son, said he, thou art young, +and mayst have some hope of saving thy life; but I am old and it +is no great matter what becomes of me." Thus, shedding many +tears, as may well be conceived in such a situation, the ship +struck the rocks and went in pieces, the father and son falling +into the sea on different sides of the vessel, each laying hold +on what came first to hand, but to no purpose. The sea was so +high and furious, that all were drowned, except fourteen or +fifteen who saved themselves by swimming, with their legs and +arms half broken and sore hurt. Among these was the Dutch masters +son and four other Dutch boys; all the rest of the Spaniards and +sailors, with captain and master, being drowned. What heart so +hard as not to melt at so grievous a sight, especially +considering the beastly and ignorant insolence of the Spaniards? +From this instance, it may be conceived how the other ships sped, +as we indeed partly beheld, and were informed by those few who +were saved, some of whom were our countrymen.</p> + +<p>On the other islands the loss was no less than at Tercera, two +ships were cast away on the island of St George; two on Pico; +three on Graciosa. Besides those, there were seen everywhere +round about, many pieces of broken ships and other things, +floating towards the islands, with which the sea was everywhere +covered, most pitiful to behold. Four ships were cast away on the +island of St Michael, and three more were sunk between Tercera +and St Michael, from which not one man was saved, though they +were seen and heard to cry out for aid. All the rest were +dismasted and driven out to sea, all torn and rent; so that of +the whole armada and merchant ships, 140 in all, only 32 or 33 +arrived in Spain and Portugal, and these with great pain, misery +and labour, not any two together, but this day one, to-morrow +another, and next day a third. All the rest were cast away about +the Azores islands, or foundered at sea, whereby may be judged +what loss was incurred; as the loss was esteemed greater by many, +than had been sustained in the great armada that went against +England. It may very well be considered that this terrible +disaster was a just judgment of God against the Spaniards; and it +may truly be said that the taking of the Revenge was justly +revenged against them, not by the force of men, but by the power +of God. Some of the people in Tercera said openly, that they +verily believed God would consume them, and that he had taken +part with the Lutherans and heretics. They alleged farther, that +so soon as they had thrown the body of Sir Richard Grenville +overboard, they verily believed, as he had a devilish faith and +religion, therefore all the devils loved him: For he instantly +sunk to the bottom of the sea, and down into hell, where he +raised up all the devils to revenge his death; and that they +brought these great storms and tempests upon the Spaniards, +because they only maintained the Catholic and true Romish +religion. Such and the like blasphemies did they utter openly and +continually, without being reproved of any one for their false +opinions.</p> + +<p>Of their fleet which sailed from New Spain, 50 in all, 35 were +cast away or foundered at sea, so that 15 only escaped. Of the +San Domingo fleet, 14 were cast away coming through the channel +from Havannah, the admiral and vice-admiral being of the number. +Two ships, coming from the Terra Firma, laden with gold and +silver, were taken by the English; and before the fleet under Don +Alonso de Baçan came to Corvo, at the least 20 ships, +coming from San Domingo, India, Brazil, &c. had been taken at +different times by the English, all of which were sent to +England.</p> + +<p>Section XIV.</p> + +<p><i>Cruizing voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir John +Burrough, Knight</i>[388]</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>THE title of this section as here given from Astleys +Collection, is by no means accurate, as the service performed by +Burrough forms only one prominent portion of the present +narrative. The expedition which it relates was fitted out and +commanded by the memorable Sir Walter Raleigh, and the entire +title of this relation, as given by Hakluyt, is as follows: "A +true report of the honourable service at sea, performed by Sir +John Burrough, knight, lieutenant-general of the fleet prepared +by the honourable Sir Walter Raleigh, knight, lord warden of the +stanneries of Cornwal and Devon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara +of Biscay, a ship of 600 tons, was taken, and two East India +Caraks, the Santa Cruz and the Madre de Dios were forced; the one +burnt, and the other taken and brought into Dartmouth, the 7th +September 1592."</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 388: Hakluyt, III. 9. Astley, I. +245.]</blockquote> + +<p>Even this long title does not clearly describe the narrative, +as Sir Walter Raleigh actually sailed on the expedition. But it +is not necessary to extend this observation, as the story will +sufficiently explain itself. The editor of Astleys collection, +alleges that Sir Walter Raleigh seems to have been the author of +this article.--E.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Having received a commission from the queen for an expedition +to the West Indies, Sir Walter Raleigh used the utmost diligence +in making all necessary preparations, both in the choice of good +ships and sufficient men and officers, as the performance +sufficiently evinced. His ships were 14 or 15 in number; of which +the two principal belonged to the queen, called the Garland and +Foresight The rest either belonged to himself or his friends, or +to the adventurers of London. As for the gentlemen who went with +him as officers, they were so well qualified in courage, +experience and discretion, that the greatest prince might think +himself happy in being served by the like. The honour of +lieutenant-general [vice-admiral] was conferred upon Sir John +Burrough, a gentleman every way worthy of that command, by his +many good and heroic qualities; with whom, after Sir Walter +returned, was joined in commission Sir Martin Frobisher; who, for +his great skill and knowledge in maritime affairs, had formerly +held employments of similar or greater importance. The rest of +the captains, sailors and soldiers were men of notable +resolution, and who for the most part had before given sufficient +proof of their valour, in sundry services of the like nature.</p> + +<p>With these ships thus manned, Sir Walter Raleigh departed +towards the west country, there to provide such farther +necessaries as were needful for the expedition. The wind blew +long from the west, quite contrary to his intended course, by +which he was wind-bound many weeks, the fittest season for his +purpose being thereby lost, his victuals much consumed, and the +minds of his people greatly changed. When her majesty came to +understand how crossly all this went, she began to call the +propriety of this expedition in question, as the 6th of May was +come before Sir Walter could put to sea. Sir Martin Frobisher +came to him the next day, in a pinnace of the lord admiral called +the Disdain, and brought her majestys letters of recal, with +orders to leave the fleet under the command of Sir John Burrough +and Sir Martin Frobisher. But, finding his honour so far engaged, +that he saw no means to save his reputation or content his +friends who had adventured great sums on fitting out the +expedition, Sir Walter pretended to understand the queens letters +as if they had left it to his choice either to return or proceed; +wherefore he would in no case leave his fleet, now under +sail.</p> + +<p>Continuing therefore his course to sea, he met within a day or +two some ships newly come from Spain, among which was a ship +belonging to Monsieur Gourdon, governor of Calais, on board of +which was one Mr Nevil Davies an Englishman, who had endured a +long and miserable captivity of twelve years, partly in the +inquisition, and had now by good fortune made his escape, and was +on his way home. Among other things, this man reported that there +was little good to be done or expected this year in the West +Indies, as the king of Spain had sent express orders to all the +ports both of the islands and the main, that no ships were to +sail that year, nor any treasure to be shipt for Spain. Yet did +not this unpleasant intelligence induce Sir Walter to desist from +his proceedings; till, on Thursday the 11th of May, a tempest of +great violence, when he was athwart Cape Finister, so scattered +the greater part of his fleet, and sunk his boats and pinnaces, +that Sir Walter, who was in the Garland belonging to her majesty, +was in danger of foundering.</p> + +<p>Upon this, considering that the season of the year was too far +gone for the enterprize he meditated against Panama, having been +detained by contrary winds on the coast of England from February +till May, in which time he had expended three months victuals, +and considering that to cruize upon the Spanish coast or at the +islands for the homeward bound East or West India ships, was a +mere work of patience, he gave directions to Sir John Burrough +and Sir Martin Frobisher, to divide the fleet in two parts. Sir +Martin, with the Garland, Captain George Clifford, Captain Henry +Thin, Captain Grenville and others, to lie off the south cape, on +purpose to oblige the Spanish fleet to remain on their own coast; +while Sir John Burrough, with Captain Robert Crosse, Captain +Thomson and others, should go to cruize off the Azores for the +caraks or any other Spanish ships coming from Mexico or other +parts of the West Indies. These intentions took effect +accordingly: For the Spanish admiral, having intelligence of the +English fleet being on the coast, attended to the defence of the +southern parts of Spain, keeping as near Sir Martin Frobisher as +he could, to hinder the success of any thing he might undertake, +and thereby neglected the safe conduct of the caraks.</p> + +<p>Before the fleet separated, they met with a great ship of +Biscay on the coast of Spain, called the Santa Clara of 600 tons, +which was taken after a stout resistance. She was freighted with +all sorts of small iron ware, as horse shoes, nails, +ploughshares, iron bars, spikes, bolts, locks, gimbols, &c. +and valued by us at 6000 or 7000 pounds, though worth treble that +value to them. This ship was on her way to San Lucar, to take in +there some farther articles of freight for the West Indies; and +being first rummaged, was sent off for England. Our fleet then +sailed towards the south cape of St Vincent; and while near the +rock of Lisbon, Sir John Burrough in the Roebuck espied a sail +far off to which he gave chace. Being a fliboat and a quick +sailer, she drew him far to the south before he could fetch her, +but at last, she came under his lee and struck sail. The master +gave information, that a great fleet was prepared at Cadiz and +San Lucar, destined according to report for the West Indies; but +the real object of this armament was this: Having received notice +that Sir Walter Raleigh was fitted out with a strong force for +the West Indies, the king of Spain had provided this great fleet +to oppose him; but, in the first place, as the East India caraks +were expected, this fleet was to convoy them home. But, as he +persuaded himself, if Sir Walter went to the West Indies, the +Azores would only have a few small ships of war to infest them, +his orders to Don Alonzo de Baçan, brother to the Marquis +of Santa Cruz, and general of his armada, were to pursue the +fleet of Sir Walter Raleigh whatever course he went, and to +attack him wherever he could find him.</p> + +<p>Our men soon found this to be true, for, not long after the +capture of the fliboat, as Sir John Burrough sailed back again to +rejoin his fleet, he discovered the Spanish fleet to seaward; +which, espying him between them and the shore, made themselves +sure of carrying him into a Spanish harbour. For this purpose, +they spread themselves in such sort before him, that his danger +was very great, as his course to seawards was utterly impeded, +and the land being hostile could yield him no relief. In this +extremity, putting his trust in God and his good ship, he thrust +out from among them with all sail, and in spite of their force +and notable cunning to intercept him, got clear off. Having thus +got clear, and finding the coast so well guarded by this fleet, +and knowing it were only folly to expect meeting with Sir Martin +Frobisher, who knew of the armada as well as himself, and would +be sure to avoid them, he began to shape his course directly for +the Azores, according to the orders of Sir Walter Raleigh, and +soon came in sight of St Michael, running so near the town of +Villa Franca, that he could easily discern the ships that lay +there at anchor. He intercepted several small vessels, both here +and between St Georges and Pico in his course to Flores, but +could get no intelligence from them for his purpose.</p> + +<p>Arriving before Flores on Thursday the 21st June towards +evening, then only accompanied by captain Caufield and the master +of his ship, the rest not being yet arrived, be made towards the +shore in his boat, where he found all the inhabitants of Santa +Cruz, a village or small town of that island, under arms, and +drawn up to oppose his landing. Having no intention of committing +hostilities, Sir John shewed a white flag in token of amity, +which was answered by the islanders, upon which a friendly +conference ensued, and hostages were taken on both sides, the +captain of the town for them, and captain Caufield for us; so +that whatever our people wanted and that place could supply, as +fresh water, victuals, or the like, was freely granted by the +inhabitants, and our people had leave to refresh themselves on +shore without restraint, as long and as often as they pleased. At +this place Sir John Burrough was informed, that they had no +expectation of any fleet coming from the West Indies; but that +only three days before his arrival, a carak had passed by from +the East Indies for Lisbon, and that there were four more behind +all of one convoy. Being very glad of this news, Sir John +embarked immediately, having at this time in his company only a +small bark of Bristol, belonging to one Mr Hopkins.</p> + +<p>In the meanwhile, part of the English ships that Sir John had +left on the coast of Spain drew towards the Azores; and Sir John +very soon got sight of one of the caraks. The same evening he +descried two or three of the earl of Cumberlands ships, whereof +one Mr Norton was captain, which had descried the carak and +pursued in the track she was following for the islands, but no +way could be made by either party, as it was almost a dead calm. +In this dilemma, on purpose to discover her force, burden, and +countenance, Sir John took his boat and rowed three miles towards +her, to make her out exactly; and on his return, having consulted +with his officers, it was resolved to board her in the morning. A +heavy storm arose in the night, which forced them to weigh +anchor, yet did they bear up amain against the weather, not to +lose the carak. In the morning, being very near the shore, our +men could perceive the carak close to the land, and the +Portuguese using their utmost endeavour to convey whatever they +could from her on shore. Seeing our men making all haste to come +upon her, the Portuguese forsook her, but first, that nothing +might be left for our men, they set her on fire, that neither the +glory of victory nor the benefit of the ship and cargo might +remain to the English. And, lest the English might find means to +extinguish the fire, and thereby to preserve a part of the cargo, +being in number 400 well armed men, they entrenched themselves on +shore as near as possible to the carak, to keep our men aloof +till the fire might consume the carak and all her contents.</p> + +<p>Seeing this, Sir John landed with an hundred of his men, many +of whom had to swim on shore or wade more than breast high; and +having easily dispersed those who guarded the shore, he no sooner +approached the entrenchment but the Portuguese fled, leaving as +much as the fire had spared to reward the pains of our men. Among +others taken at the entrenchment, were a Portuguese called +Vincent Fonseca, purser of the carak, with two of her cannoneers, +one a German, and the other a Hollander; who, refusing to give +any account voluntarily of what was asked, were threatened with +torture, and then confessed that within fifteen days three other +caraks would certainly arrive at the same island, there being +five caraks in the fleet at their departure from Goa, the Buen +Jesus admiral, Madre de Dios, San Bernardo, San Christophoro, and +Santa Cruz, that now on fire. They had especial orders from the +king of Spain, not in any case to touch at St. Helena, where the +Portuguese caraks used always till now to refresh on their way +from the East Indies, procuring water and fresh, provisions. The +reason of this order was, that the king was informed the English +men of war meant to lie there in wait for them. If therefore, +their necessities should drive them to seek supply any where, +they were commanded to put in at Angola on the coast of Africa, +and only to remain there so long as was necessary to take in +water, that they might avoid the inconvenience of infections, to +which that hot country is dangerously liable. The last rendezvous +appointed for them was the island of Flores, where they were +assured of a naval force meeting them and convoying them to +Lisbon.</p> + +<p>On receiving this intelligence, Sir John held a council with +Captains Norton, Downton, and Abraham Cocke, commanding three +ships of the Earl of Cumberland, Mr Thomson of Harwich, captain +of the Dainty, belonging to Sir John Hawkins, one of Sir Walter +Raleighs fleet, Captain Christopher Newton of the Golden Dragon, +newly come from the West Indies, and others. To these he +communicated the intelligence he had just got from the foresaid +examination, and what great presumptions of truth appeared in +their story; and wishing, since God and their good fortune had so +opportunely brought them together, that they might unite their +utmost endeavours to bring these Orientals under the lee of +English obedience. Upon this it was mutually agreed not to part +company or leave these seas, till time and opportunity should +enable them to put their consultations into execution. Next day +her majestys ship Foresight, Sir Robert Cross, joined them, and +he, being informed of the matter, entered heartily on this +service. Then Sir John, with all these ships, went 6 or 7 leagues +to the west of Flores, spreading them out in a line from north to +south, each ship at least two leagues distant from each other, by +which order they were able to discover two whole degrees of the +sea.</p> + +<p>They lay in this manner from the 29th of June to the 3d of +August, when Captain Thomson in the Dainty had first sight of the +huge carak called the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest +belonging to the crown of Portugal. Having the start of the rest, +and being an excellent sailor, the Dainty began the combat +something to her cost, by the slaughter and hurt of several of +her men. Within a little Sir John Burrough came up to second her +in the Roebuck, belonging to Sir Walter Raleigh, and saluted the +Madre de Dios with great shot, continuing the fight within +musket-shot, assisted by Captains Thomson and Newport, till Sir +Robert Cross came up, who was vice-admiral and was to leeward, on +which Sir John asked his opinion what was best to be done. Sir +Robert said, if she were not boarded she would reach the shore +and be set on fire, as had been done with the other. Wherefore +Sir John Burrough concluded to grapple her, and Sir Robert Cross +engaged to do so likewise at the same moment, which was done +accordingly. After some time in this situation, Sir John +Burroughs ship received a shot of a <i>cannon perier</i>[389] +under water; and, being ready to sink, desired Sir Robert to fall +off, that he also might clear himself and save his ship from +sinking. This was done with much difficulty, as both the Roebuck +and Foresight were so entangled that they could not clear +themselves.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 389: Probably a large stone +ball.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>That same evening, finding the carak drawing near the land, +Sir Robert Crosse persuaded his consorts to board her again, as +otherwise there were no hopes of taking her. After many fears and +excuses, he at last encouraged them, and then went athwart her +bows all alone, and so hindered her sailing, that the rest had +time to get up to the attack before she could make the land. So, +towards evening, after Sir Robert had fought her three hours +singly, two of the Earl of Cumberlands ships came up, and then +they and Sir Robert Crosse carried her by boarding with very +little loss, as Sir Robert by this time had broken their courage, +and made the assault easy for the rest. Having disarmed the +Portuguese, and bestowed them for better security as prisoners +into the other ships, Sir Robert had now time to contemplate the +proportions of this vast carak, which did then, and may still +provoke the admiration of all men not accustomed to such a sight. +But though this first view afforded our men sufficient +admiration, yet the pitiful sight of so many bodies slain and +mangled drew tears from their eyes, and induced them to lend aid +to those miserable people, whose limbs were sore torn by the +shot, and their bodies agonized by a multitude of wounds. No man +could almost step but upon a dead carcass or a bloody floor, but +especially about the helm, where many of them had been slain +while endeavouring to steer, as it required the united strength +of twelve or fourteen men at once to move the rudder, and some of +our ships beating in at her stern with their ordnance, often slew +four or five labouring on each side of the helm at one shot, +whose places were immediately supplied by fresh hands, and as our +artillery incessantly plied them with continual vollies, much +blood was necessarily spilt in that place.</p> + +<p>Moved with compassion for their misery, our general +immediately sent them his own surgeons, withholding no possible +aid or relief that he or his company could supply. Among those +whom this chance of war had rendered most deplorable, was Don +Fernando de Mendoça, grand captain and commander of this +mighty carak, descended of the house of Mendoça in Spain, +but having married in Portugal, lived there as one of that +nation. He was a gentleman well striken in years, of comely +personage and good stature, but of hard fortune. In the course of +his services against the Moors he had been twice taken prisoner, +and both times ransomed by the king. In a former return voyage +from the East Indies, he was driven upon the <i>Baxos</i> or +sands of <i>India</i>, near the coast of Sofala, being then +captain of a carak which was lost, and himself fell into the +hands of the infidels on shore, who kept him in a long and +rigorous captivity. Once more, having great respect for him, and +willing to mend his fortune, the king had given him the conduct +of this huge carak, in which he went from Lisbon as admiral of +the India fleet, and had returned in that capacity, but that the +viceroy embarked in the Bon Jesus, and assumed that rank in +virtue of his late office. Not willing to add too severely to the +affliction of this man, Sir John Burrough freely dismissed Don +Fernando and most of his followers, giving them some vessels for +that purpose, with all necessary provisions.</p> + +<p>Having dispatched this business, Sir John Burrough had leisure +to take such a survey of the goods in his prize, as the +convenience of the seas would admit; and seeing many inclined to +commit spoil and pillage, he very prudently seized upon the whole +in the name of her majesty. He then made a cursory inspection of +the cargo, and perceived that the wealth would be fully +answerable to expectation, and would be more than sufficient to +content both the desires of the adventurers, and the fatigues and +dangers of the captors. I cannot here refrain from acknowledging +the great favour of God to our nation, by putting this rich prize +into our hands, thereby manifestly discovering the secrets and +riches of the trade of India, which had hitherto lain strangely +bidden and cunningly concealed from our knowledge, only a very +imperfect glimpse of it being seen by a few, while it is now +turned into the broad light of full and perfect knowledge. Whence +it would appear to be the will of God for our good, if only our +weakness would so apprehend it, that we should participate in +those East Indian treasures, by the establishment of a lawful +traffic, to better our means of advancing the true religion and +the holy service of God.</p> + +<p>This carak, in the judgment of those most experienced, was of +not less than 1600 tons burden, 900 of which were stowed full of +rich merchandize; the remainder being allowed partly for the +ordnance, which were 32 pieces of brass cannon of all sorts, and +partly to the ships company, passengers, and victuals, which last +could not be a small quantity, considering the length of the +voyage, and that there were between six and seven hundred persons +on board. To give a taste as it were of the commodities, it may +suffice to give a general enumeration of them, according to the +catalogue made out at Leadenhall, London, on the 15th September +1592. After the jewels, which were certainly of great value, +though they never came to light, the principal wares consisted of +spices, drugs, silks, calicoes, quilts, carpets, and colours, +&c. The spices were pepper, cloves, mace, nutmegs, cinnamon, +green ginger. The drugs, benzoin, frankincense, gallinga, +mirabolans, socotorine aloes, camphor. The silks, damasks, +taffetas, sarcenets, <i>altobassos</i> or counterfeit cloth of +gold, unwrought China silk, sleaved silk, white twisted silk, and +curled cypress. The calicoes were book-calicoe, calicoe-lawns, +broad white calicoes, fine starched calicoes, coarse white +calicoes, brown broad calicoes, brown coarse calicoes. There were +also canopies, and coarse diaper towels, quilts of coarse +sarsenet, and of calico, and carpets like those of Turkey. +Likewise pearls, musk, civet, and ambergris. The rest of the +wares were many in number, but less in value; as elephants teeth, +porcelain vessels of China, coco nuts, hides, ebony as black as +jet, bedsteads of the same, curious cloth made of the rind of +trees, &c. All which piles of merchandize, being valued at a +reasonable rate by men of approved judgment, amounted to no less +than 150,000 pounds Sterling, which being divided among the +adventurers, of whom her majesty was the chief, was sufficient to +content all parties.</p> + +<p>The cargo being taken out, and the goods reloaded on board ten +of our ships to be sent to London, one Mr Robert Adams, a man of +excellent skill, took the exact bigness, height, length, breadth, +and other dimensions of this huge vessel, that these might be +preserved according to the exact rules of geometrical +proportions, both for present knowledge and transmission to +posterity, omitting nothing which either his art could +demonstrate, or any mans judgment think worthy of being known. +After an exact survey of the whole frame, he found the extreme +length, from the beak head to the stern, where a lantern was +erected, 165 feet. The breadth, in the second close deck, of +which she had three, but this the broadest, was 46 feet 10 +inches. At her departure from Cochin in India, her draught of +water was 31 feet; but at her arrival in Dartmouth, not above 26, +being lightened 5 feet during her voyage by various causes. She +contained 7 several stories; viz. one main orlop, three close +decks, one forecastle, and a spar deck of two floors each. The +length of the keel was 100 feet, of the main-mast 121 feet, and +its circumference at the partners was 10 feet 7 inches. The +main-yard was 106 feet long. By this accurate mensuration, the +hugeness of the whole is apparent, and far beyond the mould of +the largest ships used among us, either for war or cargo.</p> + +<p>Don Alonso de Baçan, having a greater fleet, and yet +suffering these two great caraks to be lost, the Santa Cruz +burnt, and the Madre de Dios taken, was disgraced by the king of +Spain for his negligence.</p> + +<p>SECTION XV.</p> + +<p><i>The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with quicksilver and +the Popes bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas White</i>.[390]</p> + +<p>While returning from Barbary in the Amity of London, and in +the latitude of 36° N. at 4 in the morning of the 26th of +July 1592, Captain White got sight of two ships at the distance +of three or four leagues. Giving immediate chace, he came within +gun-shot of them by 7 o'clock; and by their boldness in shewing +Spanish colours, he judged them rather to be ships of war than +laden with merchandize; indeed, by their own confession +afterwards, they made themselves so sure of taking him, that they +debated among themselves whether it were better for them to carry +his ship to San Lucar or Lisbon. After waving each other amain, +the Spaniards placed themselves in order of battle, a cables +length before the other, when the fight began, both sides +charging and firing as fast as they were able, at the distance of +a cables length, for the space of five hours. In this time, the +Amity received 32 great shots in her hull, masts, and sails, +besides at least 500 iron muskets and arquebuses, which were +counted after the fight.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 390: Astley, I. 249. The editor of Astleys +collection gives no notice of the source whence he procured this +narrative. The Spanish ships with quicksilver are usually called +<i>azogue</i> or <i>assogue</i> ships; the word assogue +signifying quicksilver.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Finding them to make so stout a resistance, Captain White +attempted to board the Biscaian, which was foremost; and after +lying on board about an hour, plying his ordnance and small shot, +he <i>stowed all her men</i>[391]. At this time, the other +vessel, which was a fliboat, thinking Captain White had boarded +her consort with all his men, <i>bore room with him</i>[392], +intending to have laid him close on board, so as to entrap him +between both ships, and place him between two fires. Perceiving +this intention, he fitted his ordnance in such sort as to get +quit of her, so that she boarded her consort, and both fell from +him. Mr White now kept his loof, hoisted his main-sails, and +weathering both ships, came close aboard the fliboat, to which he +gave his whole broadside, by which several of her men were slain, +as appeared by the blood running from her scuppers. After this he +tacked about, new charged all his ordnance, and coming round +again upon both ships, ordered them to yield or he would sink +them outright. One of them being shot between wind and water, +would have complied, but the other called him a traitor; on which +Captain White called out, that if he also did not presently +yield, he would sink him first. Intimidated by this threat, they +both hung out white flags and yielded; yet refused to strike +their own sails, as they had sworn not to strike to any +Englishman.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 391: This expression seems to mean, that he +forced them to run below.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 392: That is, bore down upon +him.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>He then commanded the captains and masters to come on board +the Amity, where they were examined and placed in safe custody; +after which he sent some of his own men on board both ships to +strike the sails and man them. There were found in both, 126 +persons alive, with eight dead bodies, besides those that had +been cast overboard. This victory was obtained by 42 men and a +boy, of whom two were slain and three wounded. The two prizes +were laden with 1400 chests of quicksilver, marked with the arms +of Castile and Leon, besides a vast quantity of bulls or +indulgences, and ten packs of gilded missals and breviaries, all +on the kings account. Also an hundred tons of excellent wine, +intended for the supply of the royal fleet; all of which Captain +White brought shortly afterwards to Blackwall in the river +Thames.</p> + +<p>By this capture of quicksilver, the king of Spain lost for +every quintal a quintal of silver, that should have been +delivered to him by the mine-masters in Peru, amounting in value +to L.600,000. There were likewise 2,072,000 bulls for living and +dead persons, intended for the use of New Spain, Yucatan, +Guatimala, Honduras, and the Philippine islands, taxed at two +ryals each; besides 18,000 bulls at four ryals; amounting in all +to L.107,700: So that the total loss to the king of Spain was +L.707,700, not reckoning the loss and disappointment by the +mass-books and wine.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVI.</p> + +<p><i>Narrative of the Destruction of a great East India Carak, +in 1594, written by Captain Nicholas. Downton</i>[393].</p> + +<p>In the latter end of the year 1593, the right honourable the +earl of Cumberland, at his own charges and those of his friends, +fitted out three ships of equal size and rates, having each the +same quantity of provisions and the same number of men. These +were, the Royal Exchange, which went as admiral, commanded by +Captain George Cave; the May-flower, vice-admiral, commanded by +Captain William Anthony; and the Sampson, which my lord was +pleased to commit to me, Nicholas Downton. In all the three ships +there were embarked 420 men of all sorts, or 140 in each. Besides +these, there, was a pinnace: called the Violet, or +<i>Why-not-I.</i></p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 393: Hakluyt, III. 14. Astley, I +250.]</blockquote> + +<p>Our instructions were sent to us at Plymouth, and we were +directed to open them at sea. The 6th of April 1594, we set sail +from Plymouth sound, directing our course for the coast of Spain. +The 24th, being then in lat. 43° N; we divided ourselves east +and west from each other, on purpose to keep a good look out, +with orders from our admiral to close up again at night. In the +morning of the 27th, we descried the May-flower and the little +pinnace, in company with a prize they had taken belonging to +Viana in Portugal, and bound for Angola. This vessel was about 28 +tons burden, having 17 persons on board, with some 12 tons of +wine, which we divided among our ships, together with some rusk +in chests and barrels, 5 bales of coarse blue cloth, and some +coarse linen for negroes shirts; all of which goods were divided +among our fleet. The 4th of May, we had sight again of our +pinnace and the admirals shallop, which had taken three +Portuguese caravels, two of which we sent away and kept the +third. The 2d June we came in sight of St Michaels. The 3d we +sent off our pinnace, which was about 24 tons burden, together +with the small caravel we had taken off the Burlings, to range +about the anchorages of the Azores, trying to make captures of +any thing they could find, appointing them to meet with us at a +rendezvous 12 leagues W.S.W. from Fayal. Their going from us +served no purpose, and was a misfortune, as they omitted joining +us when appointed, and we also missed them when they might have +been of much service.</p> + +<p>The 13th of June we fell in with a mighty carak from the East +Indies, called <i>Las cinquellagues</i>, or the five wounds. The +May-Flower was in sight of her before night, and I got up with +her in the evening. While I had ordered our men to give her a +broadside, and stood carefully examining her strength, and where +I might give council to board her in the night when the admiral +came up, I received a shot a little above the belly, by which I +was rendered unserviceable for a good while after, yet no other +person in my ship was touched that night. Fortunately, by means +of one captain Grant, an honest true-hearted man, nothing was +neglected though I was thus disabled. Until midnight, when the +admiral came up, the May-Flower and the Sampson never desisted +from plying her with our cannon, taking it in turns: But then +captain Cave wished us to stay till morning, when each of us was +to give her three broadsides, and then lay her on board; but we +long lingered in the morning till 10 o'clock, before we attempted +to board her.</p> + +<p>The admiral then laid her on board amid ships, and the +May-Flower came up on her quarter, as if to take her station +astern of our admiral on the larboard side of the carak; but the +captain of the May-Flower was slain at the first coming up, on +which his ship fell astern on the <i>outlicar</i>[394] of the +carak, a piece of timber, which so tore her foresail that they +said they could not get up any more to fight, as indeed they did +not, but kept aloof from us all the rest of the action. The +Sampson went aboard on the bow of the carak, but had not room +enough, as our quarter lay on the bow of the Exchange, and our +bow on that of the carak. At the first coming up of the Exchange, +her captain Mr Cave was wounded in both legs, one of which he +never recovered, so that he was disabled from doing his duty, and +had no one in his absence that would undertake to lead his +company to board the enemy. My friend, captain Grant, led my men +up the side of the carak; but his force being small, and not +being manfully seconded by the crew of the Exchange, the enemy +were bolder than they would have been, so that six of my men were +presently slain, and many more wounded; which made those that +remained return on board, and they would never more give the +assault. Some of the Exchanges men did very well, and I have no +doubt that many more would have done the like, if there had been +any principal men to have led them on, and not to have run into +corners themselves. But I must allow that the carak was as well +provided for defence as any ship I have seen; and perhaps the +Portuguese were encouraged by our slackness, as they plied our +men from behind barricades, where they were out of danger from +our shot. They plied us also with wildfire, by which most of our +men were burnt in some parts of their body; and while our men +were busied in putting out the fire, the enemy galled them sore +with small arms and darts. This unusual casting of wildfire did +much dismay many of our men, and caused them greatly to hang +back.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 394: Probably a boom or outrigger for the +management of the after-sails.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Finding that our men would not again board, we plied our great +ordnance at them, elevated as much as possible, as otherwise we +could do them little harm. By shooting a piece from our +forecastle, we set fire to a mat at the beak head of the enemy, +which kindled more and more, communicating from the mat to the +boltsprit, and thence to the top-sail-yard; by which fire the +Portuguese abaft were much alarmed, and began to make show of a +parley: But their officers encouraged them, alleging that the +fire could be easily extinguished, on which they again stood +stiffly to their defence; yet at length the fire grew so strong, +that I plainly saw it was beyond all help, even if she had +yielded to us. We then wished to have disentangled ourselves from +the burning carak, but had little hope of success; yet we plied +water with great diligence to keep our ship safe. At this time I +had little hope but our ship, myself, and several of our wounded +men must have been all destroyed along with the carak. Most of +our people indeed might have saved themselves in boats on board +our consorts. When we were at the worst, by Gods providence our +spritsail-yard with the sail and ropes, which were fast entangled +with the spritsail-yard of the carak, were so burned that we fell +away, with the loss of some of our sails. The Exchange also, +being farther aft and more distant from the fire, was more easily +cleared, and fell off abaft.</p> + +<p>As soon as God had put us out of danger, the fire caught hold +of the forecastle of the carak, where I think there was great +store of benzoin, or some such combustible matter, for it flamed +and flowed over the carak, which was almost in an instant all +over in flames. The Portuguese now leapt over-board in great +numbers, and I sent captain Grant with the boat, bidding him use +his discretion in saving them. He brought me on board two +gentlemen. One of them was an old man named Nuno Velio Pereira, +who had been governor of Mozambique and Sofala in the year 1582, +and had since been governor of a place of importance in the East +Indies. The ship in which he was coming home was cast away a +little to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, whence he travelled +by land to Mozambique, and got a passage in this carak. The other +was named Bras Carrero, who was captain of a carak that was cast +away at Mozambique, and came likewise as a passenger in this +ship. Also three men of the inferior sort; but only these two +gentlemen we clothed and brought home to England. The rest, and +others which were saved by our other boats, were all set on shore +on the island of Flores, except two or three negroes, one of whom +was a native of Mozambique, and the other of the East Indies.</p> + +<p>This fight took place in the open sea, 6 leagues to the +southward of the sound or channel between Fayal and Pico. The +people whom we saved informed us, that the cause of the carak +refusing to yield was, that she and all her goods belonged to the +king, being all that had been collected for him that year in +India, and that the captain of her was greatly in favour with the +king, and expected to have been made viceroy of India at his +return. This great carak was by no means lumbered, either within +board or on deck, being more like a ship of war than a merchant +vessel; and, besides her own men and guns, she had the crew and +ordnance that belonged to another carak that was cast away at +Mozambique, and the crew of another that was lost a little way to +the east of the Cape of Good Hope. Yet, through sickness caught +at Angola, where they watered, it was said she had not now above +150 white men on board, but a great many negroes. They likewise +told us there were three noblemen and three ladies on board; but +we found them to disagree much in their stories. The carak +continued to burn all the rest of that day and the succeeding +night; but next morning, on the fire reaching her powder, being +60 barrels, which was in the lowest part of her hold, she blew up +with a dreadful explosion, most of her materials floating about +on the sea. Some of the people said she was larger than the Madre +de Dios, and some that she was less. She was much undermasted and +undersailed, yet she went well through the water, considering +that she was very foul. The shot we made at her from the cannon +of our ship, before we laid her on board, might be seven +broadsides of six or seven shots each, one with another, or about +49 shots in all. We lay on board her about two hours, during +which we discharged at her about 20 sacre shots. Thus much may +suffice for our dangerous conflict with that unfortunate +carak.</p> + +<p>On the 30th of June, after traversing the seas, we got sight +of another huge carak, which some of our company took at first +for the great San Philippo, the admiral of Spain; but on coming +up with her next day, we certainly perceived her to be a carak. +After bestowing some shots upon her, we summoned her to yield, +but they stood stoutly on their defence, and utterly refused to +strike. Wherefore, as no good could be done without boarding, I +consulted as to what course we should follow for that purpose; +but as we, who were the chief captains, were partly slain and the +rest wounded in the former conflict, and because of the murmuring +of some disorderly and cowardly fellows, all our resolute +determinations were crossed: To conclude in a few words, the +carak escaped our hands. After this, we continued to cruize for +some time about Corvo and Flores, in hopes of falling in with +some ships from the West Indies; but, being disappointed in this +expectation, and provisions falling short, we returned for +England, where I arrived at Portsmouth on the 28th of August +1594.</p> + +<p>SECTION XVII.</p> + +<p><i>List of the Royal Navy of England of the demise of Queen +Elizabeth</i>[395].</p> + +<p>The following list of the royal navy of England, as left in +good condition by Queen Elizabeth at her death in 1603, was +written by Sir William Monson, a naval officer of that and the +two following reigns, "By which, he observes, she and her realm +gained honour, by the exploits and victories they and her +subjects obtained." It would occupy too much space to give a +contrasted list of the royal navy in the present year, 1813; but +which our readers can easily obtain from the monthly lists +published at London.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 395: Church. Collect. III. +196.]</blockquote> + +<pre> + Men in Men at Of which + Names of Ships. Tonnage. Harbour. Sea. Mariners. Sailors. Guns. + Elizabeth-Jonas, 900 30 500 340[A] 120[A] 40 + Triumph, 1000 30 500 340 120 40 + White Bear, 900 30 500 340 120 40 + Victory, 800 17 400 268 100 32 + Ark Royal, 800 17 400 268 100 32 + Mere Honour, 800 17 400 268 100 32 + St Matthew, 1000 30 500 340 120 40 + St Andrew, 900 17 400 268 100 32 + Due Repulse, 700 16 350 230 90 30 + Garland, 700 16 300 190 80 30 + Warspite, 600 12 300 190 80 30 + Mary-Rose, 600 12 250 150 70 30 + Hope, 600 12 250 150 70 30 + Bonaventure, 600 12 250 150 70 30 + Lion, 500 12 250 150 70 30 + Nonpareille, 500 12 250 150 70 30 + Defiance, 500 12 250 150 70 30 + Rainbow, 500 12 250 150 70 30 + Dreadnought, 400 10 200 130 50 20 + Antilope, 350 10 160 114 30 16 + Swiftsure, 400 10 200 130 50 20 + Swallow, 380 10 160 114 30 16 + Foresight, 300 10 160 114 30 16 + Tide, 250 7 120 88 20 12 + Crane, 200 7 100 76 20 12 + Adventure, 250 7 120 88 20 12 + Quittance, 200 7 100 76 20 12 + Answer, 200 7 100 76 20 12 + Advantage, 200 7 100 70 20 12 + Tiger, 200 7 100 70 20 12 + Tremontain, 6 70 52 10 8 + Scout, 120 6 66 48 10 8 + Catis, 100 5 60 42 10 8 + Charles, 70 5 45 32 7 6 + Moon, 60 5 40 30 5 5 + Advice, 50 5 40 30 5 5 + Spy, 50 5 40 30 5 5 + Merlin, 45 5 35 26 4 5 + Sun, 40 5 30 24 2 4 + Synnet[B] 20 2 + George Hoy, 100 10 + Penny-rose Hoy, 80 8 + +</pre> + +<blockquote>[Footnote A: The difference between mariners and +sailors is not obvious: Perhaps the former were what are now +called ordinary, and the latter able seamen. Besides, the numbers +of both these united, do not make up the whole compliment of men +at sea: Perhaps the deficiency, being 40 in the largest ships of +this list, was made up by what were then called <i>grummets:</i> +servants, ship-boys, or landsmen.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote B: This name ought probably to have been +the Cygnet.]</blockquote> + +<h2><a name="chapter3-9" id="chapter3-9">CHAPTER IX.</a></h2> + +<p>EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO THE EAST INDIES, BEFORE THE +ESTABLISHMENT OF AN EXCLUSIVE COMPANY.</p> + +<p>SECTION I.</p> + +<p><i>Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by Thomas +Stevens</i>[396].</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>We now begin to draw towards India, the following being the +first voyage we know of, that was performed to that country by +any Englishman. Though Stevens was only a passenger in the ship +of another nation, yet the account he gave of the navigation was +doubtless one of the motives that induced his countrymen to visit +India a few years afterwards in their own bottoms. Indeed the +chief and more immediate causes seem to have been the rich +caraks, taken in the cruizing voyages against the Spaniards and +Portuguese about this time, which both gave the English some +insight into the India trade, and inflamed their desire of +participating in so rich a commerce.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 396: Hakluyt, II, 581. Astley, I. +191.]</blockquote> + +<p>The account of this voyage is contained in the following +letter from Thomas Stevens, to his father Thomas Stevens in +London: In this letter, preserved by Hakluyt, several very good +remarks will be found respecting the navigation to India, as +practised in those days; yet no mention is made in the letter, as +to the profession of Stevens, or on what occasion he went to +India. By the letters of Newberry and Fitch[397], which will be +found in their proper place, written from Goa in 1584, it appears +that he was a priest or Jesuit, belonging to the college of St +Paul at that place; whence it may be concluded that the design of +his voyage was to propagate the Romish religion in India. In a +marginal note to one of these letters, Hakluyt intimates that +<i>Padre</i> Thomas Stevens was born in Wiltshire, and was +sometime of New College Oxford. He was very serviceable to +Newberry and Fitch, who acknowledge that they owed the recovery +of their liberty and goods, if not their lives, to him and +another <i>Padre</i>. This is also mentioned by Pyrard de la Val, +who was prisoner at Goa in 1608, at which time Stevens was rector +of Morgan College in the island of +Salcet[398]."--<i>Astley.</i></p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 397: In Hakluyts Collection, new edition, +II. 376. et seq.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 398: Purchas his Pilgrims, II. +1670.]</blockquote> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>After most humble commendations to you and my mother, and +craving your daily blessing, these are to certify you of my being +alive, according to your will and my duty. I wrote you that I had +taken my journey from Italy to Portugal, which letter I think +came to your hands, in which hope I have the less need to tell +you the cause of my departing, which in one word I may express, +by naming <i>obedience</i>. I came to Lisbon towards the end of +March, eight days before the departure of the ships, so late +that, if they had not been detained about some important affairs, +they had been gone before our arrival; insomuch that others were +appointed to go in our stead, that the kings intention and ours +might not be frustrated. But on our sudden arrival, these others +did not go, and we went as originally intended.</p> + +<p>The 4th of April, five ships departed for Goa, in which, +besides mariners and soldiers, there were a great number of +children, who bear the sea much better than men, as also do many +women. I need not tell you, as you may easily imagine the +solemnity of setting out, with sound of trumpets and discharges +of cannon, as they go forth in a warlike manner. The 10th of the +same month we came in sight of Porto Sancto near Madeira, where +an English ship set upon ours, now entirely alone, and fired +several shots which did us no harm: But when our ship had run out +her largest ordnance, the English ship made away from us. This +English ship was large and handsome, and I was sorry to see her +so ill occupied, as she went roving about the seas, and we met +her again at the Canaries, where we arrived on the 13th of the +same month of April, and had good opportunity to wonder at the +high peaked mountain in the island of Teneriffe, as we beat about +between that island and Grand Canary for four days with contrary +winds, and indeed had such evil weather till the 14th of May, +that we despaired of being able to double the Cape of Good Hope +that year. Yet, taking our course between Guinea and the Cape de +Verd islands, without seeing any land at all, we arrived at the +coast of Guinea, as the Portuguese call that part of the western +coast of Africa in the torrid zone, from the lat. of 6° N. to +the equinoctial; in which parts they suffer so much by extreme +heats and want of wind, that they think themselves happy when +past it. Sometimes the ships stand quite still and becalmed for +many days, and sometimes they go on, but in such a manner that +they had almost as good stand still. The atmosphere on the +greatest part of this coast is never clear, but thick and cloudy, +full of thunder and lightening, and such unwholesome rain, that +the water on standing only a little while is full of animalculae, +and by falling on any meat that is hung out, fills it immediately +with worms.</p> + +<p>All along that coast, we oftentimes saw a thing swimming in +the water like a cocks comb but much fairer, which they call a +<i>Guinea ship</i>[399]. It is borne up in the water by a +substance almost like the swimming bladder of a fish in size and +colour, having many strings from it under water, which prevent it +from being overturned. It is so poisonous, that one cannot touch +it without much danger. On this coast, between the sixth degree +of north latitude and the equator, we spent no less than thirty +days either in calms or contrary winds. The 30th of May we +crossed the line with great difficulty, directing our course as +well as we could to pass the promontory[400], but in all that +gulf of Guinea, and all the rest of the way to the Cape, we found +such frequent calms that the most experienced mariners were much +astonished. In places where there always used to be horrible +tempests, we found most invincible calms, which were very +troublesome to our ships, which being of the greatest size cannot +go without good winds; insomuch that when it is almost an +intolerable tempest for other ships, making them furl all their +sails, those large ships display their sails to the wind and sail +excellent well, unless the waves be too furious, which seldom +happened in our voyage. You must understand that, when once past +the line, they cannot go direct for the Cape the nearest way, +but, according to the wind, must hold on as near south as they +can till in the latitude of the Cape, which is 35° 30' S. +They then shape their course to the east, and so get round the +Cape. But the wind so served us at 33 degrees, that we directed +our course thence for the Cape.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 399: Otherwise called, by the English +sailors, a Portuguese man-of-war.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 400: The Cape of Good Hope must be here +meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>You know that it is hard to sail from east to west, or the +contrary, because there is no fixed point in all the sky by which +they can direct their course, wherefore I shall tell you what +help God hath provided to direct them. There is not a fowl that +appeareth, neither any sign in the air or in the sea, that have +not been written down by those who have formerly made these +voyages; so that partly by their own experience, judging what +space the ship was able to make with such and such a wind, and +partly by the experience of others recorded in the books of +navigations which they have, they guess whereabouts they may be +in regard to longitude, for they are always sure as to latitude. +But the greatest and best direction of all is, to mark the +variation of the needle or mariners compass; which, in the +meridian of the island of St Michael, one of the Azores in the +same latitude with Lisbon, points due north, and thence swerveth +so much towards the east, that, between the foresaid meridian and +the extreme south point of Africa, it varieth three or four of +the thirty-two points. Again, having passed a little beyond the +cape called <i>das Agulias</i>, or of the Needles, it returneth +again towards the north; and when it hath attained that, it +swerveth again toward the west proportionally, as it did before +eastwards.</p> + +<p>In regard to the first mentioned signs from fowls: The nearer +we came to the coast of Africa, the more kinds and greater number +of strange fowls appeared; insomuch that, when we came within not +less than thirty leagues, almost 100 miles, and 600 miles as we +thought from any other land, as good as 3000 fowls of sundry +kinds followed our ship; some of them so great, that, when their +wings were opened, they measured seven spans from point to point +of their wings, as the sailors said. It is a marvellous thing to +think how God hath so provided for these fowls in so vast an +expanse of sea, that they are all fat. The Portuguese have named +them all, according to some obvious property. Thus they call some +<i>rushtails</i>, because their tails are small and long like a +rush, and not proportionate to their bodies; some +<i>fork-tails</i>, because their tails are very broad and forked; +others again <i>velvet-sleeves</i>, because their wings are like +velvet, and are always bent like a mans elbow. This bird is +always welcome, as it appears nearest the Cape. I should never +have an end, were I to tell you all particulars, but shall touch +on a few that may suffice, if you mark them well, to give cause +for glorifying God in his wonderful works, and in the variety of +his creatures.</p> + +<p>To say something of fishes: In all the places of calms, and +especially in the burning zone near the line, there continually +waited on our ship certain fishes, called <i>tuberones</i>[401] +by the Portuguese, as long as a man, which came to eat such +things as might fall from the ship into the sea, not even +refusing men themselves if they could light upon any, and if they +find any meat hung over into the sea, they seize it. These have +waiting upon them continually six or seven, small fishes, having +blue and green bands round their bodies, like finely dressed +serving men. Of these two or three always swim before the shark, +and some on every side, [whence they are called <i>pilot +fish</i>, by the English mariners.] They have likewise other +fishes [called <i>sucking fish</i>] which always cleave to their +bodies; and seem to feed on such superfluities as grow about +them, and they are said to enter into their bodies to purge them, +when needful. Formerly the mariners used to eat the sharks, but +since they have seen them devour men, their stomachs now abhor +them; yet they draw them up with great hooks, and kill as many of +them as they can, thinking thereby to take a great revenge. There +is another kind of fish almost as large as a herring, which hath +wings and flieth, and are very numerous. These have two enemies, +one in the sea and the other in the air.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 401: Evidently sharks, from the account of +them.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>That in the sea is the fish called <i>albicore</i>, as large +as a salmon, which follows with great swiftness to take them; on +which this poor fish, which cannot swim fast as it hath no fins, +and only swims by the motion of its tail, having its wings then +shut along the sides of its body, springeth out of the water and +flieth, but not very high; on this the albicore, though he have +no wings, giveth a great leap out of the water, and sometimes +catcheth the flying fish, or else keepeth in the water, going +that way as fast as the other flieth. When the flying fish is +weary of the air, or thinketh himself out of danger, he returneth +to the water, where the albicore meeteth him; but sometimes his +other enemy, the sea-crow, catcheth him in the air before he +falleth.</p> + +<p>With these and the like sights, but always making our +supplications to God for good weather and the preservation of our +ship, we came at length to the south cape of Africa, the ever +famous Cape of Good Hope, so much desired yet feared of all men: +But we there found no tempest, only immense waves, where our +pilot was guilty of an oversight; for, whereas commonly all +navigators do never come within sight of land, but, contenting +themselves with signs and finding the bottom, go their course +safe and sure, he, thinking to have the winds at will, shot nigh +the land; when the wind, changing into the south, with the +assistance of the mountainous waves, rolled us so near the land +that we were in less than 14 fathoms, only six miles from <i>Capo +das Agulias</i>, and there we looked to be utterly lost. Under us +were huge rocks, so sharp and cutting that no anchor could +possibly hold the ship, and the shore was so excessively bad that +nothing could take the land, which besides is full of +<i>tigers</i> and savage people, who put all strangers to death, +so that we had no hope or comfort, but only in God and a good +conscience. Yet, after we had lost our anchors, hoisting up our +sails to try to get the ship upon some safer part of the coast, +it pleased God, when no man looked for help, suddenly to fill our +sails with a wind off the land, and so by good providence we +escaped, thanks be to God. The day following, being in a place +where they are always wont to fish, we also fell a fishing, and +caught so many, that they served the whole ships company all that +day and part of the next. One of our lines pulled up a coral of +great size and value; for it is said that in this place, which +indeed we saw by experience, that the corals grow on the rocks at +the bottom of the sea in the manner of stalks, becoming hard and +red.</p> + +<p>Our day of peril was the 29th of July. You must understand +that, after passing the Cape of Good Hope, there are two ways to +India, one within the island of Madagascar, or between that and +Africa, called the Canal of Mozambique, which the Portuguese +prefer, as they refresh themselves for a fortnight or a month at +Mozambique, not without great need after being so long at sea, +and thence in another month get to Goa. The other course is on +the outside of the island of St Lawrence or Madagascar, which +they take when they set out too late, or come so late to the Cape +as not to have time to stop at Mozambique, and then they go on +their voyage in great heaviness, because in this way they have no +port; and, by reason of the long navigation, and the want of +fresh provisions and water, they fall into sundry diseases. Their +gums become sore, and swell in such a manner that they are fain +to cut them away; their legs swell, and all their bodies become +sore, and so benumbed that they cannot move hand nor foot, and so +they die of weakness; while others fall into fluxes and agues, of +which they die. This was the way we were forced to take; and, +although we had above an hundred and fifty sick, there did not +die above seven or eight and twenty, which was esteemed a small +loss in comparison with other times. Though some of our +fraternity were diseased in this sort, thanks be to God I had +good health the whole way, contrary to the expectation of many: +May God send me as good health on the land, if it may be to his +glory and service. This way is full of hidden rocks and +quicksands, so that sometimes we dared not sail by night; but by +the goodness of God we saw nothing all the way to hurt us, +neither did we ever find bottom till we came to the coast of +India.</p> + +<p>When we had again passed the line to the northward, and were +come to the third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming +that were as red as if they had been boiled; but this was no sign +of land. About the eleventh degree, and for many days, more than +ten thousand fishes continually followed, or were round about our +ship, of which we caught so many that we eat nothing else for +fifteen days, and they served our turn well; for at this time we +had no meat remaining, and hardly any thing else to eat, our +voyage drawing nigh to seven months, which commonly is performed +in five, when they take the inner passage. These fishes were no +sign of land, but rather of deep sea. At length two birds were +caught of the hawk tribe, which gave our people great joy, +thinking they had been birds of India, but we found afterwards +that they were from Arabia; and when we thought we had been near +India, we were in the latitude of Socotoro, an island near the +mouth of the Red Sea. Here God sent us a strong wind from the +N.E. or N.N.E. on which they bore away unwillingly toward the +east, and we ran thus for ten days without any sign of land, by +which they perceived their error. Hitherto they had directed +their course always N.E. desiring to increase their latitude; but +partly from the difference of the needle, and most of all because +the currents at that time carried us N.W. we had been drawn into +this other danger, had not God sent us this wind, which at length +became more favourable and restored us to our right course.</p> + +<p>These currents are very dangerous, as they deceive most +pilots, and some are so little curious, contenting themselves +with ordinary experience, that they do not take the trouble of +seeking for new expedients when they swerve, neither by means of +the compass nor by any other trial. The first sign of approaching +land was by seeing certain birds, which they knew to be of India; +the second was some sedges and boughs of palm-trees; the third +was snakes swimming at the surface of the water, and a certain +substance which they called <i>money</i>, as round and broad as a +groat-piece, and wonderfully printed or stamped by nature, as if +it had been coined money. These two last signs are so certain, +that they always see land next day, if the wind serve; which we +did next day, when all our water, for you know they have no beer +in these parts, and victuals began to fail us.</p> + +<p>We came to Goa the 24th day of October, and were there +received in a most charitable manner. The natives are tawny, but +not disfigured in their lips and noses, like the Moors and Kafrs +of Ethiopia. The lower ranks go for the most part naked, having +only a clout or apron before them of a span long and as much in +breadth, with a lace two fingers breadth, girded about with a +string, and nothing more; and thus they think themselves as well +dressed as we, with all our finery. I cannot now speak of their +trees and fruits, or should write another letter as long as this; +neither have I yet seen any tree resembling any of those I have +seen in Europe, except the vine, which here grows to little +purpose, as all their wines are brought from Portugal. The drink +used in this country is water, or wine made from the coco +palm-tree. Thus much must suffice for the present; but if God +send me health, I shall have opportunity to write you once again; +but the length of this letter compelleth me now to take my leave, +with my best prayers for your most prosperous health. From Goa, +the 10th November 1579.--Your loving Son,</p> + +<p>THOMAS STEVENS.</p> + +<p>SECTION II.</p> + +<p><i>Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, Merchant of +London, and others, in 1583</i>[402].</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION</p> + +<p>We learn from the following journal, that the present +expedition was undertaken at the instigation, and chiefly at the +expence of Sir Edward Osborne, Knight, and Mr Richard Staper, +citizens and merchants of London. Besides Fitch, the author of +the narrative, Mr John Newbery, merchant, William Leedes +jeweller, and James Story painter, were engaged in the +expedition. The chief conduct of this commercial enterprize +appears to have been confided to John Newbery; and its object +appears to have been, to extend the trade, which the English +merchants seem to have only recently established through Syria, +by Aleppo, Bagdat and Basora, to Ormus and perhaps to Goa, in +imitation of the Italians, so as to procure the commodities of +India as nearly as possible at first hand. In the prospect of +being able to penetrate into India, and even into China, Newbery +was furnished with letters of credence or recommendation, from +Queen Elizabeth to Zelabdim Echebar, stiled king of Cambaia, who +certainly appears to have been Akbar Shah, emperor of the Mogul +conquerors of Hindostan, who reigned from 1556 to 1605; and to +the emperor of China. The promoters of this enterprise, seem to +have been actuated by a more than ordinary spirit of research for +those times, by employing a painter to accompany their commercial +agents. It is farther presumable that the promoters of the +expedition, and their agents, Newbery and Fitch, were members of +the Turkey company; and though the speculation turned out +unsuccessful, owing to causes sufficiently explained in the +narrative and its accompanying documents, it is obviously a +prelude to the establishment of the English East India Company; +which, from small beginnings, has risen to a colossal height of +commercial and sovereign grandeur, altogether unexampled in all +history.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 402: Hakluyt, II. 382.]</blockquote> + +<p>Hakluyt gives the following descriptive title of this +uncommonly curious and interesting narrative: "The voyage of Mr +Ralph Fitch, merchant of London, by the way of Tripolis in Syria +to Ormus, and so to Goa in the East India, to Cambaia, and all +the kingdom, of Zelabdim Echebar the great Mogor, to the mighty +river Ganges, and down to Bengala, to Bacola and Chonderi, to +Pegu, to Imahay in the kingdom of Siam, and back to Pegu, and +from thence to Malacca, Zeilan, Cochin, and all the coast of the +East India; begun in the year of our Lord 1583, and ended in +1591: wherein the strange rites, manners, and customs of those +people, and the exceeding rich trade and commodities of those +countries, are faithfully set down and diligently described, by +the foresaid Mr Ralph Fitch."</p> + +<p>Hakluyt has prefaced this journal, by several letters +respecting the journey, from Mr Newbery, and one from Mr Fitch, +and gives by way of appendix an extract from Linschoten, +detailing the imprisonment of the adventurers at Ormus and Goa, +and their escape, which happened while he was at Goa, where he +seems to have materially contributed to their enlargement from +prison. These documents will be found in the sequel to the +narrative of Mr Fitch.</p> + +<p>It must not however be concealed, that the present journal has +a very questionable appearance in regard to its entire +authenticity, as it has obviously borrowed liberally from that of +Cesar Frederick, already inserted in this work, Vol. VII. p. +142-244. It seems therefore highly probable, that the journal or +narrative of Fitch may have fallen into the hand of some +ingenious <i>book-maker</i>, who wished to increase its interest +by this unjustifiable art. Under these circumstances, we would +have been led to reject this article from our collection, were +not its general authenticity corroborated by these other +documents, and by the journal of John Eldred, who accompanied +Newbery and Fitch to Basora. A part of the striking coincidence +between the journals of Cesar Frederick and Ralph Fitch might +have arisen from their having visited the same places, and nearly +by the same route, only at the distance of 20 years; Frederick +having commenced his journey in 1563, and Newbery and Fitch +theirs in 1588. Some of the resemblances however could only have +been occasioned by plagiarism.</p> + +<p>It is very difficult to conceive how Fitch, after his +imprisonment at Goa, and escape from thence under surety to the +Portuguese viceroy, should have ventured in the sequel to visit +the Portuguese settlements in Ceylon, Cochin, Calicut, Goa even, +Chaul, and Ormuz, on his way home again by Basora, Bagdat, Mosul, +&c. to Aleppo and Tripoli. These parts of his journal, and +his excursions to the north of Pegu, certainly have a suspicious +appearance. It is possible that he may have described these +several routes, historically, in his own journal; and that some +book-maker, into whose hands his papers may have fallen, chose to +give these a more interesting appearance, by making Fitch the +actor in what he only described on the authority of others. It is +strange that these circumstances should not have occurred to +Hakluyt, as the narrative of Fitch is inserted in his collection +immediately following that of Cesar Frederick. Yet with these +obvious faults, the relation of Fitch is interesting, as the +first direct attempt of the English to open a trade with India; +and so far at least, its authenticity is unquestionable, being +corroborated by other documents that are not liable to the +smallest suspicion.--E.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>In the year 1583, I Ralph Fitch of London, merchant, being +desirous to see the countries of the Eastern India, went in +company with Mr John Newbery, merchant, who had been once before +at Ormus, together with William Leedes, jeweller, and James +Story, painter; being chiefly set forth by the right worshipful +Sir Edward Osburn, knight, and Mr Richard Staper, citizens and +merchants of London. We shipped ourselves in a ship called the +Tiger of London, in which we went to Tripoly in Syria, whence we +went with the caravan to Aleppo in seven days. Finding good +company at Aleppo, we went from thence to Birra [Bir,] which is +two days and a half journey with camels.</p> + +<p>Bir is a small town, but abounding in provisions, near which +runs the river Euphrates. We here purchased a boat, and agreed +with a master and boatmen to carry us to Babylon [Bagdat]. These +boats serve only for one voyage, as the stream is so rapid that +they cannot return. They carry passengers to a town called +Felugia [Feluchia], where the boat has to be sold for very little +money, what cost fifty pieces at Bir bringing only seven or eight +at that place. From Bir to Feluchia is a journey of sixteen days; +but it is not good for one boat to go alone, as if it should +chance to break, it would be difficult to save the goods from the +Arabs, who are always robbing thereabouts, and it is necessary to +keep good watch in the night, when the boat is made fast, as the +Arabs are great thieves, and will swim on board to steal your +goods, and then flee away. Against them a musket is a good +weapon, as they are much afraid of fire-arms. Between Bir and +Feluchia, there are certain places on the Euphrates where you +have to pay custom, being so many <i>medins</i> for a <i>some</i> +or camels load, together with certain quantities of raisins and +soap, which are for the sons of <i>Aborise</i>, who is lord of +the Arabs and of that great desert, and hath some villages on the +river. Feluchia, where the goods coming from Bir are unladed, is +a small village, from whence you go to Bagdat in one day.</p> + +<p>Babylon, or Bagdat, is not a very large town, but is very +populous, and much frequented by strangers, being the centre of +intercourse between Persia, Turkey, and Arabia, caravans going +frequently from it to these and other countries. It is well +supplied with provisions, which are brought from Armenia down the +river Tigris, upon rafts made of goat skin bags blown full of +wind, over which boards are laid, on which the goods are loaded. +When these are discharged, the skin bags are opened and emptied +of air, and are then carried back to Armenia on camels to serve +again. Bagdat belonged formerly to Persia, but is now subject to +the Turks. Over against Bagdat, on the other side of the Tigris, +is a very fair village, to which there is a passage across from +Bagdat by a long bridge of boats, connected by a vast iron chain +made fast at each side of the river. When any boats have to pass +up or down the river, a passage is made for them by removing some +of the boats of this bridge.</p> + +<p>The Tower of Babel is on this side of the Tigris towards +Arabia, about seven or eight miles from Bagdat, being now ruined +on all sides, and with the ruins thereof hath made a little +mountain, so that no shape or form of a tower remains. It was +built of bricks dried in the sun, having canes and leaves of the +palm-tree laid between the courses of bricks. It stands in a +great plain between the Tigris and Euphrates, and no entrance can +be any where seen for going into it.</p> + +<p>Near the river Euphrates, two days journey from Bagdat, in a +field near a place called <i>Ait</i>, there is a hole in the +ground which continually throws out boiling pitch accompanied by +a filthy smoke, the pitch flowing into a great field which is +always full of it. The <i>Moors</i> call this opening the mouth +of hell; and on account of the great abundance of the pitch, the +people of the country daub all their boats two or three inches +thick with it on the outside, so that no water can enter them. +These boats are called <i>danec</i>. When there is plenty of +water in the Tigris, the boats may go down from Bagdat to Basora +in eight or nine days; but when the water is low it requires a +longer time.</p> + +<p>In times past, Basora belonged to the Arabs, but is now +subject to the Turks. Yet there are some Arabs that the Turks +cannot subdue, as they occupy certain islands in the great river +Euphrates, which the Turks have never been able to conquer. These +Arabs are all thieves, and have no settled dwelling, but remove +from place to place with their camels, horses, goats, wives, +children, and household goods. They wear large blue gowns; their +wives having their ears and noses full of copper and silver +rings, and wear copper rings on their legs. Basora is near the +head of the gulf of Persia, and drives a great trade in spiceries +and drugs, which come from Ormus. The country round produces +abundance of white rice and dates, with which they supply Bagdat +and all the country, sending likewise to Ormus and India. I went +from Basora to Ormus, down the gulf of Persia, in a ship made of +boards sewed together with <i>cayro</i>, which is a thread made +of the husks of coco-nuts, and having certain canes, or leaves, +or straw, sewed upon the seams between the boards, so that these +vessels leak very much. Having Persia on our left hand, and +Arabia on our right, we passed many islands, and among others the +famous isle of Baharin, or Bahrain, from which come the best and +roundest orient pearls.</p> + +<p>Ormus is an island about 25 or 30 miles in circuit, which is +perhaps the most arid and barren island in the world, as it +produces nothing but salt, all its water, wood, provisions, and +every other necessary, coming from Persia, which is about 12 +miles distant; but all the other islands thereabout are very +fertile, and from them provisions are sent to Ormus. The +Portuguese have here a castle near the sea, with a captain and a +competent garrison, part of which dwell in the castle and part In +the town; in which likewise dwell merchants from all nations, +together with many Moors and Gentiles. This place has a great +trade in spices, drugs, silk, cloth of silk, fine tapestry of +Persia, great store of pearls from Bahrain, which are the best of +all pearls, and many horses from Persia which supply all India. +Their king is a Moor, or Mahomedan, who is chosen by the +Portuguese, and is entirely under subjection to them. Their women +are very strangely attired, wearing many rings set with jewels on +their ears, noses, necks, arms, and legs, and locks of gold and +silver in their ears, and a long bar of gold upon the sides of +their noses. The holes in their ears are worn so wide with the +weight of their jewels, that one may thrust three fingers into +them.</p> + +<p>Very shortly after our arrival at Ormus we were put into +prison, by order of Don Mathias de Albuquerque, the governor of +the castle, and had part of our goods taken from us; and on the +11th October, he shipped us from thence, sending us to the +viceroy at Goa, who at that time was Don Francisco de +Mascarenhas. The ship in which we were embarked belonged to the +captain, who carried in it 124 horses for sale. All goods carried +to Goa in a ship wherein there are horses pay no duties; but if +there are no horses, you then pay eight in the hundred for your +goods. The first city of India at which we arrived on the 5th +November, after passing the coast of <i>Zindi</i>, [Sindi] was +named Diu, which stands in an island on the coast of the kingdom +of Cambaia, or Gujrat, and is the strongest town belonging to the +Portuguese in those parts. It is but small, yet abounds in +merchandise, as they here load many ships with different kinds of +goods for the straits of Mecca or the Red Sea, Ormus, and other +places; these ships belong both to Christians and Moors, but the +latter are not permitted to pass unless they have a Portuguese +licence. Cambaietta, or Cambay, is the chief city of that +province, being great and populous and well built for a city of +the gentiles. When there happens a famine the natives sell their +children for a low price. The last king of Cambaia was sultan +Badur, who was slain at the siege of Diu, and shortly after the +capital city was reduced by the great <i>Mogor</i>, [Mogul] who +is king of Agra and Delhi, forty days journey from thence. Here +the women wear upon their arms, a vast number of ivory rings, in +which they take so much pride that they would rather go without +their meat than want their bracelets.</p> + +<p>Going from Diu, we came to <i>Damaun</i>, the second town of +the Portuguese in the country of Cambaia, forty leagues from Diu. +This place, which has no trade but in corn and rice, has many +villages under its jurisdiction, which the Portuguese possess +quietly during peace, but in time of war they are all occupied by +the enemy. From Damaun we passed to <i>Basaim</i>, [Baseen] and +from thence to <i>Tanna</i> in the island of Salsette, at both +which places the only trade is in rice and corn. The 10th +November we arrived at <i>Chaul</i> on the firm land, at which +place there are two towns, one belonging to the Portuguese and +the other to the Moors. That of the Portuguese is nearest the +sea, commanding the bay, and is walled round; and a little above +it is the Moors town, subject to a king called <i>Xa-Maluco</i>. +At this place is a great trade for all Kinds of spices, drugs, +silk, raw and manufactured, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, much +China work, and a great deal of sugar made from the nut called +<i>gagara</i>, [coco]. The tree on which it grows is called the +<i>palmer</i>, and is the most profitable tree in the world. It +always bears fruit, and yields wine, oil, sugar, vinegar, +cordage, coals, or fuel; of the leaves are made thatch for +houses, sails for ships, and mats to sit or lie on; of the +branches are made houses, and brooms wherewith they sweep them; +of the wood ships. The wine issues from the top of the tree, and +is procured thus: They cut a branch, binding it hard, and hang an +earthen pot under the cut end, which they empty every evening and +morning; and still[403] the juice, putting raisins into it, by +which it becometh strong wine in a short time. Many ships come +here from all parts of India, and from Ormus and Mecca, so that +there are many Moors and Gentiles at this place. The natives have +a strange superstition, worshipping a cow, and having cows dung +in great veneration, insomuch that they paint or daub the walls +of their houses with it. They kill no animal whatever, not so +much as a louse, holding it a crime to take away life. They eat +no flesh, living entirely on roots, rice, and milk. When a man +dies, his living wife is burnt along with his body, if she be +alive; and if she will not, her head is shaven, and she is ever +after held in low esteem. They consider it a great sin to bury +dead bodies, as they would engender many worms and other vermin, +and when the bodies were consumed these worms would lack +sustenance; wherefore they burn their dead. In all Guzerat they +kill nothing; and in the town of Cambay they have hospitals for +lame dogs and cats, and for birds, and they even provide food for +the ants.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 403: I am apt to suspect the word +<i>still</i> here used, is only meant to imply fermentation, not +distillation--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which +their viceroy resides and holds his court. It stands in an island +about 25 or 30 miles in circumference, being a fine city and very +handsome for an Indian town. The island is fertile and full of +gardens and orchards, with many palmer trees, and several +villages. Here are many merchants of all nations. The fleet which +sails every year from Portugal, consisting of four, five, or six +great ships, comes first here, arriving mostly in September, and +remaining there forty or fifty days. It then goes to Cochin, +where the ships take in pepper for Portugal. Often one ship loads +entirely at Goa, and the rest go to Cochin, which is 100 leagues +to the south. Goa stands in the country of Adel Khan, which is +six or seven days journey inland, the chief city being Bisapor. +[Bejapoor.]</p> + +<p>On our arrival in Goa we were thrown into prison, and examined +before the justice, who demanded us to produce letters, [of +licence?] and charged us with being spies; but they could prove +nothing against us. We continued in prison till the 22d December, +when we were set at liberty, putting in surety for 2000 ducats +not to depart from the town. Our surety was one Andreas Taborer, +who was procured for us by father Stevens, an English Jesuit whom +we found there, and another religious man, a friend of his. We +paid 2150 ducats into the hands of Andreas Taborer, our surety, +who still demanded more; on which we petitioned the viceroy and +justice to order us our money again, seeing they had it near five +months, and could prove nothing against us. But the viceroy gave +us a sharp answer, saying, we should be better sifted ere long, +and that they had other matter against us. Upon this we +determined to attempt recovering our liberty, rather than run the +risk of remaining as slaves for ever in the country, and besides +it was said we were to have the <i>strapado</i>. Wherefore, on +the 5th of April 1585 in the morning, we removed secretly from +Goa; and getting across the river, we travelled two days on foot +in great fear, not knowing the way, as having no guide, and not +daring to trust any one.</p> + +<p>One of the first towns we came to is called <i>Bellergan?</i> +where there is a great market of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, and +many other precious stones. From thence we went to +<i>Bejapoor</i>, a very large city, where the king keeps his +court, in which there are many Gentiles, who are gross idolaters, +having their idols standing in the woods, which they call +pagodas. Some of these are like a cow, some like a monkey, some +like a buffalo, others resemble a peacock, and others like the +devil. In this country are many elephants, which they employ in +their wars. They have great abundance of gold and silver, and +their houses are lofty and well built. From thence we went to +<i>Galconda</i>, the king of which is called <i>Cutub de +lashach</i>. In this country, in the kingdom of Adel Khan, and in +the Decan, those diamonds are found which are called of the +<i>old water</i>. Golconda is a pleasant fair town, having good +and handsome houses of brick and timber, and it abounds with +excellent fruits and good water. It is here very hot, and both +men and women go about with only a cloth bound about their +middles, without any other clothing. The winter begins here about +the last of May.</p> + +<p>About eight days journey from thence is a sea port called +Masulipatan, toward the gulf of Bengal, to which many ships come +out of India, Pegu, and Sumatra, richly laden with spiceries, +pepper, and other commodities. The country is very fruitful. From +thence I went to <i>Servidone?</i> which is a fine country, its +king being called the <i>king of bread</i>. The houses here are +all built of loam and thatched. The country contains many Moors +and Gentiles, but there is not much religion among them. From +thence I went to <i>Bellapore</i>, and so to <i>Barrampore</i>, +which is in the country of <i>Zelabdim Echebar</i> the great +<i>Mogor</i>. In this place their money is of silver, round and +thick, to the value of twenty-pence. It is a great and populous +country; and in their winter, which is in June, July, and August, +there is no passing the streets except on horseback, the waters +are so high. In this country they make great quantities of cotton +cloth, both white and painted, and the land produces great +abundance of corn and rice. In the towns and villages through +which we passed, we found many marriages celebrated between boys +of eight or ten years old, and girls of five or six. These +youthful couples did ride both on one horse, very bravely +dressed, and were carried about the streets with great piping and +playing, after which they returned home and banqueted on rice and +fruits, dancing most of the night, and so ended the marriage, +which is not consumated till the bride be ten years old. We were +told they married their children thus young, because when a man +dies his wife is burnt along with him; and by this device they +secure a father-in-law, in case of the fathers death, to assist +in bringing up the children that are thus early married, thus +taking care not to leave their sons without wives, or their +daughters without husbands.</p> + +<p>From thence we went to <i>Mandoway?</i> a very strong town, +which was besieged for twelve years by Echebar before he could +reduce it. It stands on a very great high rock, as do most of +their castles, and is of very great circuit. From thence we went +to <i>Vgini?</i> and <i>Serringe?</i> where we overtook the +ambassador of Zelabdim Echebar, attended by a prodigious retinue +of men, elephants, and camels. In this district there is a great +trade carried on in cotton, and cloths made of cotton, and great +store of drugs. From thence we went to Agra, passing many rivers +which were much swollen by the rains, so that in crossing them we +had often to swim for our lives[404].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 404: In this route from Masulipatan to +Agra, there are several places of which the names are so +disfigured as to be unintelligible. Barrampore and Mandoway, are +probably Burhampore and Candwah in the northern part of Candeish; +Vgini and Serringe, may he Ougein and Seronge in +Malwa.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Agra is a very great and populous city built of stone, having +large and handsome streets, upon a fine river which falls into +the gulf of Bengal, and has a strong and handsome castle with a +broad and deep ditch. It is inhabited by many Moors and Gentiles, +the king being Zelabdim Echebar, called for the most part the +great <i>Mogor</i>. From thence we went to <i>Fatepore</i>, where +the king ordinarily resides and holds his court, which is called +<i>Derican</i>. This town is larger than Agra, but the streets +and houses are by no means so good, but it is inhabited by a vast +multitude of people, both Moors and Gentiles. In Agra and +Fatepoor, the king is said to have 1000 elephants, 30,000 horses, +1400 tame deer, 800 concubines, and such numbers of ounces, +tigers, buffaloes, game-cocks, and hawks as is quite incredible. +Agra and Fatepoor are two great cities, either of them larger +than London, and very populous, at the distance of 12 miles from +each other[405]. The whole road between these places is one +continued market of provisions and other articles, and is +constantly as full of people as a street or market in a great and +populous town. These people have many fine carts, many of which +are richly carved and gilt, having two wheels, and are drawn by +two little bulls, not much larger than our biggest English dogs, +which run with these carts as fast as any horse, carrying two or +three men in each cart: They are covered with silk or fine cloth, +and are used like our coaches in England. There is a great resort +of merchants to this place from Persia and all parts of India, +and vast quantities of merchandise, such as silks, cloths, and +precious stones, diamonds, rubies, and pearls. The king is +dressed in a white <i>cabie</i> made like a shirt, and tied with +strings on one side, having a small cloth on his head, often +coloured red and yellow. None enter into his apartments, except +the eunuchs who have charge of his women.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 405: Futtipoor, certainly here meant, is +now a place of small importance about 20 miles west from +Agra.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We remained in Fatepore till the 28th of September 1585, when +Mr John Newbery took his journey towards Lahore, intending to go +from thence through Persia to Aleppo or Constantinople, whichever +he could get the readiest passage to; and he directed me to +proceed to Bengal and Pegu, promising me, if it pleased God, to +meet me at Bengal within two years with a ship from England[406]. +I left William Leades the jeweller at Fatepore, in the service of +the king Zelabdim Achebar, who gave him good entertainment, +giving a house and five slaves, with a horse, and six S.S. in +money daily. I went from Agra to <i>Satagam</i> in Bengal, in +company with 180 boats loaded with <i>salt</i>, opium, +<i>hinge</i>, lead, carpets, and various other commodities, down +the river <i>Jemena</i>, [Jumna]; the chief merchants being +Moors.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 406: In Purchas his Pilgrims, I. 110, is +the following notice respecting Mr Newberry: "Before that," +meaning his journey along with Fitch, "he had travelled to Ormus +in 1580, and thence into the Continent, as may appear in fitter +place by his journal, which I have, passing through the countries +of Persia, Media, Armenia, Georgia, and Natolia, to +Constantinople; and thence to the Danube, through Walachia, +Poland, Prussia, and Denmark, and thence to +England."]</blockquote> + +<p>In this country they have many strange ceremonies. The +bramins, who are their priests, come to the water having a string +about their necks, and with many ceremonies lave the water with +both their hands, turning the string with both their hands in +several manners; and though it be never so cold, they wash +themselves regularly at all times. These gentiles eat no flesh, +neither do they kill any thing, but live on rice, butter, milk, +and fruits. They pray in the water naked; and both dress and eat +their food naked. For penance, they lie flat on the earth, then +rise up and turn themselves round 30 or 40 times, lifting their +hands to the sun, and kiss the earth with their arms and legs +stretched out; every time they lie down making a score on the +ground with their fingers, that they may know when the prescribed +number of prostrations is finished. Every morning the Bramins +mark their foreheads, ears, and throats, with a kind of yellow +paint or earth; having some old men among them, who go about with +a box of yellow powder, marking them on the head and neck as they +meet them. Their women come in troops of 10, 20, and 30 together +to the water side singing, where they wash themselves and go +through their ceremonies, and then mark themselves, and so depart +singing. Their daughters are married at ten years of age, and the +men may have seven wives each. They are a crafty people, worse +than the Jews. When they salute one another, they say, +<i>Rame</i>, <i>rame</i>.</p> + +<p>From Agra I came to <i>Prage</i>[407], where the river Jumna +enters into the mighty Ganges, and there loses its name. The +Ganges comes out of the north-west, and runs east to discharge +its waters into the gulf of Bengal. In these parts there are many +tigers, and vast quantities of partridges and turtle-doves, +besides many other kinds of birds. There are multitudes of +beggars in these countries, called <i>Schesche</i>, which go +entirely naked. I here saw one who was a monster among the rest. +He had no clothes whatever, his beard being very long, and the +hair of his head was so long and plentiful, that it covered his +nakedness. The nails on some of his fingers were two inches long, +as he would cut nothing from him; and besides he never spake, +being constantly accompanied by eight or ten others, who spoke +for him. If any one spoke to him, he laid his hand on his breast +and bowed, but without speaking, for he would not have spoken to +the king.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 407: At the angle of junction between the +rivers Jumna and Ganges, the city of Allahabad is now +situated.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>We went from <i>Prage</i> down the Ganges, which is here very +broad, and abounds in various wild-fowl, as swans, geese, cranes, +and many others, the country on both sides being very fertile and +populous. For the most part the men have their faces shaven, but +wear the hair of their heads very long; though some have their +crowns shaved, and others have all their heads shaven except the +crown. The water of the river Ganges is very sweet and pleasant, +having many islands, and the adjoining country is very fertile. +We stopt at <i>Bannaras</i>, [Benares], a large town in which +great quantities of cotton-cloths are made, and sashes for the +moors. In this place all the inhabitants are gentiles, and the +grossest idolaters I ever saw. To this town the gentiles come on +pilgrimages out of far distant countries. Along the side of the +river there are many fair houses, in all or most of which they +have ill favoured images made of stone or wood; some like lions, +leopards, or monkeys; some like men and women; others like +peacocks; and others like the devil, having four arms and four +hands. These all sit cross-legged, some with one thing in their +hands, and others with other things; and by break of day or +before, numbers of men and women come out of the town to these +places, and wash in the Ganges. On mounds of earth made for the +purpose, there are divers old men who sit praying, and who give +the people three or four straws, which they hold between their +fingers when they bathe in the Ganges; and some sit to mark them +in the forehead: And the devotees have each a cloth with a small +quantity of rice, barley, or money, which they give to these old +men when they have washed. They then go to one or other of the +idols, where they present their sacrifices. When they have +finished their washings oblations and charities, the old men say +certain prayers by which they are all sanctified.</p> + +<p>In divers places there stand a kind of images, called +<i>Ada</i> in their language, having four hands with claws; and +they have sundry carved stones on which they pour water, and lay +thereon some rice, wheat, barley and other things. Likewise they +have a great place built of stone, like a well, with steps to go +down, in which the water is very foul and stinking, through the +great quantity of flowers which are continually thrown into the +water: Yet there are always many people in that water, for they +say that it purifies them from their sins, because, as they +allege, God washed himself in that place. They even gather up the +sand or mud from the bottom, which they esteem holy. They never +pray but in the water, in which they wash themselves over head, +laving up the water in both hands, and turning themselves about, +they drink a little of the water three times, and then go to the +idols which stand in the houses already mentioned. Some take of +the water, with which they wash a place of their own length, and +then lie down stretched out, rising and lying down, and kissing +the ground twenty or thirty times, yet keeping their right foot +all the time in the same place. Some make their ceremonies with +fifteen or sixteen pots, little and great, ringing a little bell +when they make their mixtures, ten or twelve times. They make a +circle of water round about their pots and pray, divers sitting +by them, and one in particular who reaches the pots to them; and +they say certain words many times over the pots, and when they +have done, they go to their idols, before which they strew their +sacrifices, which they think very holy, and mark many of those +who sit by in the foreheads, which they esteem highly. There +sometimes come fifty or even an hundred together, to wash at this +well, and to sacrifice to these idols.</p> + +<p>In some of these idol houses, there are people who stand by +them in warm weather, fanning them as if to cool them; and when +they see any company coming, they ring a little bell which hangs +beside them, when many give them alms, particularly those who +come out of the country. Many of these idols are black and have +brazen claws very long, and some ride upon peacocks, or on very +ill-favoured fowls, having long hawks bills, some like one thing +and some like another, but none have good faces. Among the rest, +there is one held in great veneration, as they allege be gives +them all things, both food and raiment, and one always sits +beside this idol with a fan, as if to cool him. Here some are +burned to ashes, and some only scorched in the fire and thrown +into the river, where the dogs and foxes come presently and eat +them. Here the wives are burned along with the bodies of their +deceased husbands, and if they will not, their heads are shaven +and they are not afterwards esteemed.</p> + +<p>The people go all naked, except a small cloth about their +middles. The women have their necks, arms, and ears decorated +with rings of silver, copper, and tin, and with round hoops of +ivory, adorned with amber stones and many agates, and have their +foreheads marked with a great red spot, whence a stroke of red +goes up the crown, and one to each side. In their winter, which +is in May, the men wear quilted gowns of cotton, like to our +counterpanes, and quilted caps like our grocers large mortars, +with a slit to look out at, tied beneath their ears. When a man +or woman is sick and like to die, they are laid all night before +the idols, either to help their sickness or make an end of them. +If they do not mend that night, the friends come and sit up with +them, and cry for some time, after which they take them to the +side of the river, laying them on a raft of reeds, and so let +them float down the river.</p> + +<p>When they are married the man and woman come to the water +side, where there is an old bramin or priest, a cow and calf, or +a cow with calf. Then the man and woman, together with the cow +and calf, go into the river, giving the old bramin a piece of +cloth four yards long, and a basket cross bound, in which are +sundry things. The bramin lays the cloth on the back of the cow, +after which he takes hold of the end of the cows tail, and says +certain words. The woman has a brass or copper pot full of water; +the man takes hold of the bramin with one hand, and the woman +with the other, all having hold of the cow by the tail, on which +they pour water from the pot, so that it runs on all their hands. +They then lave up water with their hands, and the bramin ties the +man and woman together by their clothes[408]. When this is done, +they go round about the cow and calf, and then give some alms to +the poor, who are always present, and to the bramin or priest +they give the cow and calf, after which they go to several of the +idols, where they offer money, lying down flat on the ground +before the idol, and kissing the earth several times, after which +they go away. Their chief idols are black and very ugly, with +monstrous mouths, having their ears gilded and full of jewels, +their teeth and eyes of gold, silver, or glass, and carrying +sundry things in their hands. You may not enter into the houses +where they stand with your shoes on. In these houses there are +lamps continually burning before the idols.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 408: This tying of new married folks +together by the clothes, was used by the Mexicans in old +times.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Benares I went down the Ganges to <i>Patenaw</i>, [Patna] +passing many fair towns and a very fertile country, in which way +many great rivers enter the Ganges, some as large as itself, by +which it becomes so broad that in time of the rains you cannot +see across. The scorched bodies which are thrown into the water +swim on the surface, the men with their faces down, and the women +with theirs up. I thought they had tied some weight to their +bodies for this purpose, but was told no such thing was done. +There are many thieves in this country, who roam up and down like +the Arabs, having no fixed abode. Here the women are so decked +with silver and copper that it is strange to see them, and they +wear so many rings on their toes that they cannot use shoes. Here +at Patna they find gold in this manner: They dig deep pits in the +earth, and wash the earth in large holes, and in these they find +gold, building the pits round about with bricks, to prevent the +earth from falling in.</p> + +<p>Patna is a long and large town, being formerly a separate +kingdom, but is now under subjection to the great Mogor. The men +are tall and slender, and have many old people among them. The +houses are very simple, being made of earth and covered with +straw, and the streets are very large. There is here a great +trade in cotton and cotton cloth, likewise great quantities of +sugar, which is carried to Bengal and India, much opium, and +other commodities. He that is chief here under the king is called +<i>Tipperdas</i>, and is held in much estimation by the people. +Here in Patna I saw a dissembling prophet, who sat on a horse in +the market-place, making as if he were asleep, and many of the +people came and touched his feet with their hands, which they +then kissed. They took him for a great man, but in my opinion he +was only a lazy lubber, whom I left sleeping there. The people of +these countries are much given to these dissembling +hypocrites.</p> + +<p>From Patna I went to <i>Tanda</i> in the land of +<i>Gouren</i>[409], which is in the country of Bengal. This is a +place of great trade in cotton and cotton cloth, formerly a +kingdom, but now subject to the great Mogor. The people are great +idolaters, going naked with only a cloth about their middles, and +the country hath many tigers, wild buffaloes, and wild fowl. +<i>Tanda</i> is about a league from the river Ganges, as in times +past the river flowed over its banks in the rainy season, and +drowned a considerable extent of country with many villages, and +so it yet remains, and the old bed of the river still remains +dry, by which means the city now stands at a distance from the +water. From Agra I was five months coming down the Jumna and the +Ganges to Bengal, but it may be sailed in much shorter time.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 409: In our modern maps Tanda and the +country or district of Gouren are not to be found; but the ruins +of <i>Gour</i>, which may have some reference to Gouren, are laid +down in lat. 24° 52' N. long. 88° 5' E. about seven miles +from the main stream of the great Ganges, and ten miles south +from the town of Maida.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>I went from Bengal into the country of <i>Couche</i>[410], +which is 25 days journey north from Tanda. The king is a Gentile, +named <i>Suckel Counse</i>. His country is very extensive, and +reaches to within no great distance of Cauchin China, whence they +are said to procure pepper. The port is called <i>Cacchegate</i>. +All the country is set with bamboos or canes made sharp at both +ends, and driven into the earth, and they can let in the water +and drown the country above knee-deep, so that neither men nor +horses can pass; and in case of any wars, they poison all the +waters. The people are all Gentiles, who kill nothing, having +their ears marvellously great and a span long, which they draw +out by various devices when young. They have much silk and musk, +and cloth made of cotton. They have hospitals for sheep, goats, +dogs, cats, birds, and all kinds of living creatures, which they +keep when old and lame until they die. If a man bring any living +creature into this country, they will give money for it or other +victuals, and either let it go at large or keep it in their +hospitals. They even give food to the ants. Their small money is +almonds[411], which they often eat.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 410: This seemeth to be Quicheu, accounted +by some among the provinces of China.--<i>Hakluyt</i>. + +<p>The name of this country is so excessively corrupt, and the +description of the route so vague, that nothing can be made out +of the text at this place with any certainty. It is merely +possible that he may have gone into Bootan, which is to the north +of Bengal.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 411: In Mexico they likewise use the cacao +fruit, or chocolate nut, for small money, which are not unlike +almonds.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote> + +<p>From thence I returned to <i>Hugeli</i>, [Hoogly in Bengal] +which is the place where the Portuguese have their residence in +Bengal, being in lat. 23° N[412]. About a league from it is +<i>Satagan</i>[413], called by the Portuguese <i>Porto +Piqueno</i>, or the little port. We went through the wilderness, +because the right way was infested by robbers. In passing through +the country of Gouren we found few villages, being almost all +wilderness, in which were many buffaloes, wild swine, and deer, +with many tigers, the grass being everywhere as tall as a man. +Not far from Porto Piqueno, to the south-westwards, and in the +country of <i>Orixa</i>, is a sea-port called <i>Angeli</i>[414]. +It was formerly a separate kingdom, the king being a great friend +to strangers; but was afterwards taken by the king of Patna, who +did not enjoy it long, being himself conquered by the king of +Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia, Zelabdim Echebar. Orissa is six days +journey south-westwards from <i>Satagan</i>. In this place there +is much, rice, and cloth made of cotton; likewise great store of +cloth made of grass, which they call <i>Yerva</i>, resembling +silk, of which they make excellent cloth, which is sent to India +and other places[415]. To this haven of <i>Ingelly</i> there come +many ships every year out of India, Negapatnam, Sumatra, Malacca, +and many other places, and load from hence great quantities of +rice, much cotton cloths, sugar and long pepper, and great store +of butter and other provisions for India[416]. Satagan is a very +fair city for one belonging to the Moors, and is very plentiful +in all things. In Bengal they have every day a great market or +fair, called <i>chandeau</i>, in one place or other, and they +have many boats called <i>pericose</i>, with which they go from +place to place to buy rice and many other things. These boats are +rowed by 24 or 26 oars, and are of great burden, but are quite +open. The gentiles hold the water of the Ganges in great +reverence; for even if they have good water close at hand, they +will send for water from the Ganges at a great distance. If they +have not enough of it to drink, they will sprinkle a little of it +upon themselves, thinking it very salutary.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 412: More accurately 22° 55' 20" N. and +long. 88° 28' E. Hoogly stands on the western branch of the +Ganges, called the Hoogly river, about twenty miles direct north +from Calcutta.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 413: We thus are enabled to discover nearly +the situation of Satagan or Satigan, to have been on the Hoogly +river, probably where Chinsura now stands, or it may have been +Chandernagor.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 414: Injelly, at the mouth of a small river +which falls into the Hoogly, very near its discharge into the bay +of Bengal. Injelly is not now considered as in Orissa, but in the +district of Hoogly belonging to Bengal, above forty miles from +the frontiers--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 415: A similar cloth may be made of the +long grass which grows in +Virginia.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 416: India seems always here limited to the +Malabar coast.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From Satagan I travelled by the country of the King of +Tippara, or <i>Porto Grande</i>[417]. The <i>Mogores</i> or +<i>Mogen</i> [Moguls] have almost continual wars with Tiperah; +the Mogen of the kingdom of <i>Recon</i> and <i>Rame</i>, are +stronger than the King of Tiperah, so that Cittigong or Porto +Grande is often under the dominion of the king of +<i>Recon</i>[418]. There is a country four days journey from +<i>Couche</i> called <i>Bottanter</i>[419], the principal city of +which is <i>Bottia</i>, and the king is called <i>Dermain</i>. +The people are tall, strong, and very swift. Many merchants come +here out of China, and it is said even from Muscovy and Tartary, +to purchase musk, <i>cambals</i>, agates, silk, pepper, and +saffron, like the saffron of Persia[420]. This country is very +great, being not less than three months journey in extent, and +contains many high mountains, one of them so steep and high that +it may be perfectly seen at the distance of six days +journey[421]. There are people on these mountains having ears a +span long, and they call such as have not long ears asses. They +say that from these mountains <i>they see ships sailing on the +sea</i>, but know not whence they come nor whither they go. There +are merchants who come out of the east from under the sun, which +is from China, having no beards, who say their country is warm; +but others come from the north, on the other side of the +mountains, where it is very cold. These merchants from the north +are apparelled in woollen cloth and hats, with close white hose +or breeches and boots, who come from Muscovy or Tartary. These +report that they have excellent horses in their country, but very +small; some individuals possessing four, five, or six hundred +horses and cattle. These people live mostly on milk and flesh. +They cut off the tails of their cows, and sell them very dear, as +they are in high request in those parts. The rump is only a span +long, but the hair is a yard in length. These tails are used for +show, to hang upon the heads of elephants, and are much sought +after in Pegu and China.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 417: Perhaps this ought to have been, by +the country of Tipera <i>to</i> Porto Grande. Porto Grande, +formerly called Chittigong, is now called Islamabad, and is in +the district of Chittigong, the most easterly belonging to +Bengal.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 418: Aracan is certainly here meant by +<i>Recon</i>; of <i>Rame</i> nothing can be made, unless Brama, +or Birmah be meant.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 419: <i>Bottanter</i> almost certainly +means Bootan. Of <i>Bottia</i> we know nothing, but it is +probably meant to indicate the capital. <i>Dermain</i> may +possibly be some corruption of <i>Deb raja</i>, the title of the +sovereign. It is obvious from this passage, that <i>Couche</i> +must have been to the south of Bootan, and was perhaps +Coch-beyhar, a town and district in the north-east of Bengal, +near the Bootan frontier.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 420: The saffon of Persia of the text may +perhaps mean <i>turmeric</i>. The cambals may possibly mean +camblets.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 421: These seem to be the mountains of +Imaus, called Cumao by the natives.--<i>Hakluyt</i>. + +<p>The Himmaleh mountains, dividing Bootan from Thibet, said to +be visible from the plains of Bengal at the distance of 150 +miles.--E.]</p> +</blockquote> + +<p>From Chittigong in Bengal, I went to <i>Bacola</i>[422], the +king of which country is a Gentile of an excellent disposition, +who is particularly fond of shooting with a gun. His country is +large and fertile, having great abundance of rice, and +manufactures much silk, and cloths of cotton. The houses of this +city are good and well built, with large streets. The people go +naked, except a cloth round their waists, and the women wear many +silver hoops about their necks and arms, and rings of silver, +copper, and ivory about their legs. From thence I went to +<i>Serrepore</i> upon the Ganges, the king or rajah of which is +called Chondery. They are all hereabouts in rebellion against the +great Mogul, for there are so many rivers and islands that they +escape from one to another, so that his horsemen cannot prevail +against them. Great store of cotton cloth is made here. +<i>Sinnergan</i> is a town six leagues from <i>Serrepore</i>, +where the best and finest cotton cloth of all the east is +made[423]. The chief king of all those countries is called +Isa-khan, being supreme over all the other kings or rajahs, and +is a great friend to the Christians. Here, as in most parts of +India, the houses are very small and covered with straw, having a +few mats hung round the walls and over the door-way, to keep out +tigers and foxes. They live on rice, milk, and fruits, eating no +flesh and killing no animals; and though many of them are very +rich, their sole article of dress is a small cloth before them. +From hence they send great quantities of cotton cloths and much +rice, all over India, Pegu, Malacca, Sumatra, and other +places.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 422: Perhaps Pucouloe, a place of some size +near Davas between the Ganges and Burhampooter +rivers.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 423: Serampoor on the Hoogly river agrees +at least in sound with the Serrepore of the text; but, from the +context, I rather suspect Serrepore to have stood among the +numerous islands of the great eastern Ganges, in the province of +Dava, and near the junction of the Ganges and Burhampooter or +Megna rivers. Of Sinnergan I can make nothing, only that it must +have stood in the same district.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>I went from Serrepore the 28th of November 1586 for Pegu, in a +small ship or foist, commanded by one Albert Caravallos, and +sailing down the Ganges, we passed by the island of Sundiva, +Porto grande, or Chittigong, in the country of Tiperah, and the +kingdom of Recon and Mogen[424], leaving all on our left hand, +our course being south by east, with the wind at north-west, +which brought us to the bar of Negrais in Pegu. Had we met with a +foul wind, we must have thrown many things overboard, for we were +so lumbered with people and goods, even on the deck, that there +was scarce a place to sit down upon. From Bengal to Pegu is 90 +leagues. We entered the bar of Negrais, [at the mouth of the +western branch of the river of Ava], which is an excellent bar, +having four fathoms water where shallowest. Three days afterwards +we came to Cosmin, a very pretty town, pleasantly situated and +abounding in all things. The people are tall and well disposed; +the women white, round faced, and having small eyes. The houses +are high built, set upon great high posts, and they go up to them +by means of ladders for fear of the tigers, which are very +numerous. The country is very fertile, abounding in great figs, +oranges, coconuts, and other fruits. The land is very high on the +sea coast, but after getting within the bar, it is very low and +much intersected with rivers, so that they go everywhere in +boats, which they call <i>paraos</i>, in which many of them dwell +with their wives and children.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 424: Recon has already been supposed to be +Aracan, which is now quite obvious; but in what manner Mogen may +refer to Ava, the next country to the south, does not +appear.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>From the bar of Negrais to the city of Pegu, is ten days +journey by the rivers. We went from <i>Cosmin</i> to Pegu in +paraos or boats, and passing up the river we came to +<i>Medon</i>, a very pretty town, having a wonderful number of +paraos, for they dwell in them, and hold markets on the water. In +rowing up and down with their commodities in these boats, they +have a great <i>sombrero</i> or umbrella over their heads, to +defend them from the sun, as broad and round as a great cart +wheel, made of the leaves of the coco or the fig tree, which are +very light. From Medon we went to Dela, where there are 18 or 20 +great long houses, where they tame and keep many elephants +belonging to the king, as elephants are caught in the wilderness +near this place. From Dela we went to <i>Cirian</i>, [Siriam] a +good town having an excellent sea-port, to which come many ships +from Mecca, Malacca, Sumatra, and other places; and there the +ships discharge their cargoes, and send up their goods in paraos +to Pegu. From Siriam we went to <i>Macao</i>, a pretty town, +where we left the boats, and in the morning taking +<i>delingeges</i>, which are a kind of couches made of cords and +quilted cloth, carried on a <i>stang</i>, or long pole, by three +or four men, we came to Pegu the same day.</p> + +<p>Pegu is a great strong and fair city, having walls of stone +and great ditches all round about. It consists of two towns, the +old and the new. In the old town dwell all the stranger +merchants, and very many native merchants, and all the goods are +sold in the old town, which is very large, and hath many +extensive suburbs all round about it, all the houses being of +bamboo canes and covered with straw. In your house, however, you +have a warehouse, which they call a <i>godown</i>, built of +bricks, in which to keep your goods, as often the city takes +fire, and four or five hundred houses are burnt down, so that +these <i>godowns</i> are very useful to save your goods. The king +with all his nobility and gentry dwell in the new town, which is +a great and populous city, entirely square with fair walls, and a +great ditch all round about full of water, in which are many +crocodiles. It has twenty gates, five on each side of the square, +all built of stone. There are also many turrets for centinels, +made of wood and splendidly gilded. The streets are the +handsomest I ever saw, all as straight as a line from one gate to +the other, and so broad that ten or twelve men may ride abreast +through them. On both sides, at every door, there are palmer +trees planted, which bear coco-nuts, and which make a fine shew +as well as a commodious shade, so that the people may walk all +day in the shade. The houses are of wood, covered with tiles.</p> + +<p>The palace of the king stands in the middle of this city, and +is walled and ditched all round, all the houses within being of +wood very sumptuously gilded, and the fore-front is of very rich +workmanship, all gilded in a very costly manner. The pagoda, or +house in which his idols stand, is covered with tiles of silver, +and all the walls are gilt over with gold. Within the first gate +of the palace is a very large court, on both sides of which are +the houses for the king's elephants, which are wonderfully large +and handsome, and are trained for war and for the king's service. +Among the rest, he has four white elephants, which are a great +rarity, no other king having any but he; and were any other king +to have any, he would send for it, and if refused would go to war +for it, and would rather lose a great part of his kingdom than +not have the elephant. When any white elephant is brought to the +king, all the merchants in the city are commanded to go and visit +him, on which occasion each individual makes a present of half a +ducat, which amounts to a good round sum, as there are a vast +many merchants, after which present you may go and see them at +your pleasure, although they stand in the king's house. Among his +titles, the king takes that of king of the white elephants. They +do great honour and service to these white elephants, every one +of them having a house gilded with gold, and getting their food +in vessels of gilt silver. Every day when they go to the river to +wash, each goes under a canopy of cloth of gold or silk, carried +by six or eight men, and eight or ten men go before each, playing +on drums, <i>shawms</i>, and other instruments. When each has +washed and is come out of the river, he has a gentleman to wash +his feet in a silver basin, which office is appointed by the +king. There is no such account made of the black elephants, be +they never so great, and some of them are wonderfully large and +handsome, some being nine cubits high.</p> + +<p>The king has a very large place, about a mile from Pegu, for +catching wild elephants, in a great grove or wood, having a fair +court in the middle. There are many huntsmen, who go into the +wilderness with she-elephants, trained for the purpose, each +huntsman having five or six which are anointed with a certain +ointment to entice the wild males to follow them. When they have +brought a wild elephant within their snares, the hunters send +word to the town, on which many horsemen and footmen go out, and +force the wild elephant to enter into a narrow way leading to the +inner inclosure, and when the he and she are in, then is the gate +shut upon them. They then get the female out, and when the male +finds himself alone and entrapped, he cries out and sheds tears, +running against the enclosure, which is made of strong trees, and +some of them break their tusks in endeavouring to force their way +out. The people then goad him with pointed canes, till they force +him into a narrow stall, in which he is securely fastened with +strong ropes about his body and legs, and is left there for three +or four days without food or drink. Then they bring a female to +him, with food and drink, and unbind the ropes, and he becomes +tame in three or four days. When they take the elephants to war, +they fix a frame of wood on their backs with great ropes, upon +which sit four or six men, who fight with guns, bows and arrows, +darts, and other weapons; and it is said that the elephant's hide +is so thick that a musket ball will not pierce them, except in +some tender place.</p> + +<p>The weapons of these people are very bad, their swords being +short and blunt at the points. They have arquebusses also, but +they shoot very badly with them. The king keeps great state, +sitting in public twice every day, having all his nobles, which +they call <i>shemines</i>, sitting on each side at a good +distance, and a numerous guard on the outside of all, so that the +hall, or court is very large. If any one wish to speak to the +king, he maketh three profound reverences, when he enters, in the +mid way, and when he comes near the king; at each of these he +kneels down, holds his hands above his head, and bows with his +head to the ground three times. He then sits down to speak to the +king, and if favoured is allowed to come near, within three or +four paces, but otherwise is made to sit at a greater distance. +When the king goes to war he is accompanied by a great military +force. While I was in Pegu, he went to Odia, in the kingdom of +Siam, with 300,000 men and 5000 elephants. His particular guard +was 30,000. When the king rides abroad, he is accompanied by a +strong guard and many nobles, and often rides on an elephant +having a great castle on its back superbly gilded; sometimes he +travels on a great frame of wood like a horse-litter, having a +small house or canopy upon it, covered over head, and open at the +sides, which is all splendidly gilded with gold, and adorned with +many rubies and sapphires, of which he hath an infinite store, as +a vast many of them are found in this country. This couch or +litter is called <i>serrion</i> in their language, and is carried +on the shoulders of 16 or 18 men. On these occasions, there is +much triumphing and shouting made before the king, by great +numbers of men and women.</p> + +<p>This king has little force by sea, having very few ships. He +has houses quite full of gold and silver, both of which are often +coming in to him, but very little goes out again, so that he +makes little account of it, and this vast treasury is always open +to inspection, in a great walled court with two gates, which are +always open to all men. In this court there are four houses very +richly gilded and covered with leaden roofs, in each of which is +a pagod or idol, of huge stature and vast value. In the first of +these houses is the image of a king, all in gold, having a golden +crown on his head richly set with large rubies and sapphires, and +round about are the images of four children all in gold. In the +second house is the image of a man in silver, of prodigious size, +as high as a house, insomuch that the foot is as long as the +stature of a man. This figure is in a sitting posture, having a +crown on its head, richly adorned with precious stones. In the +third house is the statue of a man in brass, still larger than +the former, with a rich crown on its head. In the fourth house is +another brazen statue, still larger than the former, having also +a crown on its head richly adorned with jewels. In another court +not far from this, there are four other pagodas or idols of +wonderful size, made of copper, which were formed in the places +in which they now stand, being of such enormous size that they +could not be removed. These stand in four separate houses, and +are gilded all over except their heads, which resemble +black-a-moors. The expences of these people in gilding their +images are quite enormous. The king has only one wife, but above +300 concubines, by whom he is said to have 80 or 90 children. He +sits in judgment every day, on which occasion the applicants use +no speech, but give up their supplications in writing, being upon +long slips of the leaves of a tree, a yard long and about two +inches broad, written with a pointed iron or stile like a bodkin. +He who gives in his application, stands at some distance carrying +a present. If his application is to be complied with, his present +is accepted and his request granted; but if his suit be denied he +returns home with his present.</p> + +<p>There are few commodities in India which serve for trade at +Pegu, except opium of Cambaia, painted cottons from San Thome or +Masulipatam, and white cloth of Bengal, vast quantities of which +are sold here. They bring likewise much cotton yarn, dyed red +with a root called <i>saia</i>, which never loses its colour, a +great quantity of which is sold yearly in Pegu at a good profit. +The ships from Bengal, San Thome, and Masulipatam, come to the +bar of Negrais and to Cosmin. To Martaban, another sea-port in +the kingdom of Pegu, many ships come from Malacca, with +sandal-wood, porcelains, and other wares of China, camphor of +Borneo, and pepper from Acheen in the island of Sumatra. To +Siriam, likewise a port of Pegu, ships come from Mecca with +woollen cloth, scarlet, velvets, opium, and other goods.</p> + +<p>In Pegu there are eight brokers called <i>tareghe</i>, which +are bound to sell your goods at the prices they are worth, +receiving as their fee two in the hundred, for which they are +bound to make good the price, because you sell your goods on +their word. If the broker do not pay you on the day appointed, +you may take him home to your house and keep him there, which is +a great shame for him. And, if he do not now pay you immediately, +you may take his wife, children, and slaves, and bind them at +your door in the sun; for such is the law of the country. Their +current money is of brass, which they call <i>ganza</i>, with +which you may buy gold, silver, rubies, musk, and all other +things. Gold and silver is reckoned merchandise, and is worth +sometimes more and sometimes less, like all other wares, +according to the supply and demand. The ganza or brass money goes +by weight, which they call a <i>biza</i>; and commonly this biza +is worth, in our way of reckoning, about half a crown or somewhat +less. The merchandises in Pegu are, gold, silver, rubies, +sapphires, spinels, musk, benzoin, frankincense, long pepper, +tin, lead, copper, <i>lacca</i>, of which hard sealing-wax is +made, rice, wine made of rice, [<i>aruck</i>,] and some sugar. +The elephants eat sugar canes in great quantities, or otherwise +they might make abundance of sugar.</p> + +<p>They consume many canes likewise[425], in making their +<i>varellas</i> or idol temples, of which there are a prodigious +multitude, both large and small. These are made round like a +sugar loaf, some being as high as a church, and very broad +beneath, some being a quarter of a mile in compass. Within these +are all of earth, faced round with stone. In these +<i>varellas</i> they consume a vast quantity of gold, as they are +all gilded aloft, and some from top to bottom; and they must be +newly gilded every ten or twelve years, because the rain washes +off the gold, as they all stand exposed to the weather. Were it +not for the prodigious quantities of gold consumed in this +manner, it would be very plentiful and cheap in Pegu. About two +days journey from Pegu there is a <i>varella</i> or pagoda called +<i>dogonne</i>, of wonderful bigness, gilded all over from top to +bottom, to which the inhabitants of Pegu go in pilgrimage; and +near it is a house where their talapoins or priests preach to the +people. This house is fifty five paces long, and hath three +<i>pawnes</i> or covered walks in it, the roof being supported by +forty great gilded pillars, which stand between the walks. It is +open on all sides, having a vast number of small gilded pillars, +and the whole is gilded both within and without. Round about this +there are many fair houses for the pilgrims to dwell in, and many +goodly houses in which the talapoins preach, which are all full +of idols or images, both male and female, all gilded with gold. +This, in my opinion, is the fairest place in the world. It stands +very high, having four roads leading to it, all planted on each +side with fruit-trees, so that the people walk in the shade in +all these avenues, which are each above two miles long. When the +grand festival of this varella approaches, one can hardly pass +any way, on account of the great throngs of people, both by land +and water, as they flock from all parts of the kingdom of Pegu to +be present at the festival.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 425: Surely the bamboo, not the sugar cane. +It may be noticed, that almost the whole of this account of Pegu +seems to have been borrowed from the relation of Cesar +Frederick.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In Pegu, there are many priests or talapoins, as they are +called, who preach against all abuses, and many people resort to +hear them. When they enter into the <i>kiack</i>, that is to say +the holy place or temple, there is a great jar of water at the +door, having a cock or ladle, and there they wash their feet. +They then walk in, and lift their hands to their heads, first to +the preacher, and then to the sun, after which they sit down. The +talapoins are strangely apparelled, having a brown +<i>cambaline</i> or thin cloth next their body, above which is +another of yellow many times doubled or folded over their +shoulders, and these two are girded round them by a broad girdle. +They have a skin of leather hung by a string round their necks, +on which they sit, bare headed and bare footed, as they wear no +shoes. Their right arms are all bare, and they carry a large +<i>sombrero</i> or umbrella over their heads, which protects them +from the sun in summer, and from the rain in winter.</p> + +<p>Before taking their orders, the talapoins go to school till, +twenty years old or more, and then go before a head talapoin +appointed for the purpose, called a <i>rowli</i>, who is the most +learned of the order, who examines them many times, whether they +will leave their friends, foregoing the company of women, and +assume the habit of a talapoin. If any one be content, he is made +to ride through the streets on a horse, very richly apparelled, +accompanied by many drums and trumpets, to shew that he is about +to quit the riches and vanity of the world. A few days +afterwards, he is again carried through the streets, on a thing +like a horse litter, called <i>serion</i>, mounted on the +shoulders of ten or twelve men, and dressed in the habit of a +talapoin, preceded by drums and instruments of music, and +accompanied by many talapoins and all his friends. He is thus +carried to his house without side of the town, and is there +left.</p> + +<p>Every individual talapoin has his own house, which is very +small, set upon six or eight posts, and to which they have to go +up by a ladder of twelve or fourteen staves. Their houses are +mostly by the road sides, and among the trees in the woods. They +go about, having a great pot of wood or fine earthen ware +covered, and hung by a broad belt from their shoulder, with which +they beg their victuals, being rice, fish, and herbs. They never +ask any thing, but come to the doors, when the people presently +give them, some one thing and some another, all of which they put +into their pot, saying they must feed on their alms and be +contented. Their festivals are regulated by the moon, their +chiefest being at the new moon, when the people send rice and +other things to the <i>kiack</i> or church which they frequent, +where all the talapoins belonging to it meet and eat the victuals +that are sent. When the talapoins preach, many of their hearers +carry gifts to them in the pulpit, while preaching, a person +sitting beside the preacher to receive these gifts, which are +divided between them. So far as I could see, they have no other +ceremonials or religious service, except preaching.</p> + +<p>From Pegu I went to <i>Jamahey</i>, in the country of the +<i>Langeiannes</i>, whom we call <i>Jangomes</i>, which is +twenty-five days journey north from Pegu[426], in which journey I +passed through many fertile and pleasant countries, the whole +being low land, with many fine rivers; but the houses are mean +and bad, being built of canes and covered with straw. This +country has great numbers of wild elephants and buffaloes. +<i>Jamahey</i> is a large handsome town, well peopled, and the +houses are well built of stone, with broad streets. The men are +strong and well made, having a cloth about their middles, +bareheaded and with bare feet, as in all these countries they +wear no shoes. The women are much fairer than those of Pegu. In +all these countries they have no wheat, living entirely on rice, +which they make into cakes. To Jamahey there come many merchants +out of China, bringing great store of musk, gold, silver, and +many Chinese manufactures. They have here such great abundance of +provisions, that they do not take the trouble to milk the +buffaloes as they do in other places. Here there is great +abundance of copper and benzoin.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 426: The names here used are so corrupted +as to be utterly unintelligible. Twenty-five days journey north +from the city of Pegu, or perhaps 500 miles, would lead the +author into the northern provinces of the Birman empire, of which +the geography is very little known, perhaps into Assan: Yet the +<i>Langeiannes</i> may possibly refer to <i>Lang-shang</i> in +Laos, nearly west from Pegu. <i>Jamahey</i> may be <i>Shamai</i>, +in the north of Laos; near the N.W. frontier of +China.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>In these countries, when people are sick, they make a vow to +offer meat to the devil in case of recovery; and when they +recover, they make a banquet, with many pipes and drums and other +musical instruments, dancing all night, and their friends bring +gifts of coco-nuts, figs, arecas, and other fruits, and with much +dancing and rejoicing they offer these to the devil, giving him +to eat, and then drive him out. While dancing and playing, they +often cry and hallow aloud, to drive the devil away. While sick, +a talapoin or two sit every night by the sick person, continually +singing, to please the devil, that he may not hurt them. When any +one dies, he is carried on a great frame of wood like a tower, +having a covering or canopy made of canes all gilded, which is +carried by fourteen or sixteen men, preceded by drums, pipes, and +other instruments, and being taken to a place out of the town, +the body is there burned. On this occasion, the body is +accompanied by all the male friends, relations, and neighbours of +the deceased; and they give the talapoins or priests many mats +and much cloth. They then return to the house, where they feast +for two days. After this, the widow, with all her neighbours +wives, and female friends, goes to the place where her husband +was burnt, where they sit a certain time lamenting, and then +gather up all the pieces of bones which have not been burnt to +ashes, which they bury; they then return home, and thus make an +end of mourning. On these occasions, the male and female +relations shave their heads, which is only done for the death of +a friend, as they greatly esteem their hair.</p> + +<p><i>Caplan</i>, the place where the rubies, sapphires and +spinels are found, is six days journey from Ava in the kingdom of +Pegu. There are here many great hills out of which they are dug, +but no person is allowed to go to the pits, except those employed +in digging. In Pegu, and in all the countries of Ava, +Langeiannes, Siam, and of the Birmans, the men wear little round +balls in their privities, some having two and some three, being +put in below the skin, which is cut for that purpose, one on one +side and another on the other, which they do when 25 or 30 years +of age. These were devised that they might not abuse the male +sex, to which shocking vice they were formerly much addicted. It +was also ordained, that the women should not have more than three +cubits of cloth in their under garments, which likewise are open +before, and so tight, that when they walk they shew the leg bare +above the knee.</p> + +<p>The <i>bramas</i>, or birmans of the kings country, for the +king is a birman, have their legs or bellies, or some other part +of their body according to their fancy made black by pricking the +skin, and rubbing in <i>anile</i> or indigo, or some other black +powder, which continues ever after; and this is considered as a +great honour, none being allowed to do this but the birmans who +are of kin to the king. Those people wear no beards, but pull out +the hair from their faces with small pincers made for the +purpose. Some leave 16 or 20 hairs growing together, some on one +part of the face and some on another, and pull out all the rest; +every man carrying his pincers with him, and pulling out the +hairs as fast as they appear. If they see a man with a beard they +wonder at him. Both men and women have their teeth black; for +they say a dog has white teeth, and therefore they have theirs +black. When the Peguers have a law-suit that is difficult to +determine, they place two long canes upright in the water where +it is very deep, and both parties go into the water beside the +poles, having men present to judge them; they both dive, and he +who remains longest under water gains his suit.</p> + +<p>The 10th of January, I went from Pegu to Malacca, passing many +of the sea-ports of Pegu, as Martaban, the island of <i>Tavi</i> +whence all India is supplied with tin, Tanaserim, the island of +Junkselon, and many others. I came on the 8th of February to +Malacca, where the Portuguese have a castle near the sea. The +country without the town belongs to the Malays, who are a proud +kind of people, going naked with a cloth about their waists, and +a small roll of cloth round their heads. To this place come many +ships from China, the Moluccas, Banda, Timor, and many other +islands of the Javas, bringing great store of spices, drugs, +diamonds, and other precious stones. The voyages to many of these +islands belong to the captain of Malacca, so that no one can go +there without his licence, by which he draws large sums of money +every year. The Portuguese at Malacca are often at war with the +king of Acheen in the island of Sumatra; from whence comes great +store of pepper and other spices yearly to Pegu, Mecca, and other +places.</p> + +<p>When the Portuguese go from Macao in China to Japan, they +carry much white silk, gold, musk, and porcelain, and bring from +thence nothing but silver. A great carak goes on this voyage +every year, and brings from thence about 600,000 crusadoes: and +all this silver of Japan, and 200,000 more which they bring +yearly from India, they employ to great advantage in China, +whence they bring gold, musk, silk, copper, porcelains, and many +very costly articles richly gilded. When the Portuguese go to +Canton in China to trade, they are only permitted to remain there +a certain number of days. When they enter the gates of the city, +they have to set down their names in a book, and when they go out +at night must put out their names, as they are not allowed to +remain in the town all night, but must sleep in their boats. When +their time of stay is expired, if any one remain, he is liable to +be imprisoned and very ill used, as the Chinese are very +suspicious and do not trust strangers; and it is even thought +that the king of China does not know of any strangers being +admitted into his dominions. It is likewise credibly reported, +that the people of China see their king very seldom, or not at +all, and may not even look up to the place where he sits. When he +goes abroad, he is carried in a great chair or <i>serion</i>, +splendidly gilded, on which is made a small house with a lattice +to look through, so that he cannot be seen but may see about him. +While he is passing, all the people kneel with their faces to the +ground, holding their hands over their heads, and must not look +up till he is past.</p> + +<p>In China, when in mourning, the people wear white thread shoes +and straw hats. A man mourns two years for his wife, the wife +three years for her husband, the son a year for his father, and +two years for his mother. During the whole time of mourning the +dead body is kept in the house, the bowels being taken out, +filled with <i>chaunam</i> or lime, and put into a coffin. When +the time expires, it is carried out with much playing and piping, +and burned. After this they pull off their mourning weeds, and +may marry again when they please. All the people of China, Japan, +and Cochin-china, write downwards, from the top of the page to +the bottom using a fine pencil made of dogs or cats hair.</p> + +<p><i>Laban</i> is an island among the Javas, whence come the +diamonds of <i>the new water</i>. They are there found in the +rivers, as the king will not allow them to be dug for in the +rock. <i>Jamba</i> is another island among the Javas, from whence +also diamonds are brought. In this island the king has a mass of +earth growing in the middle of the river, which is gold; and when +he is in want of gold, they cut part of this earth and melt it, +whereof cometh gold. This mass of earth is only to be seen once a +year, in the month of April, when the water is low. <i>Bima</i> +is another island among the Javas, where the women labour as our +men do in England, and the men keep the house or go where they +will[427].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 427: All the names of these islands among +the Javas, or isles of Sunda are unintelligibly +corrupt.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>The 28th of March 1588, I returned from Malacca to Martaban, +and thence to Pegu, where I remained the second time till the +17th of September, and then went to Cosmin where I took shipping; +and escaping many dangers from contrary winds, it pleased God +that we arrived in Bengal in November. I had to remain there, for +want of a passage, till the 3d February 1589, when I embarked for +Cochin. In this voyage we suffered great hardships for want of +water; for the weather was very hot, and we were many on board, +merchants and passengers, and we had many calms. It pleased God +that we arrived in Ceylon on the 6th of March, where we staid +five days, to furnish ourselves with water and necessary +provisions.</p> + +<p>Ceylon is a beautiful and fertile island, yet by reason of +continual wars with the king, every thing is very dear, as he +will not suffer any thing to be brought to the castle belonging +to the Portuguese, so that they are often in great want of +victuals, and they are forced to bring their provisions every +year from Bengal. The king is called rajah and is very powerful, +for he comes sometimes against Columbo, where the Portuguese have +their fort, with 100,000 men and many elephants. But they are all +naked people, though many of them are excellent marksmen with +their muskets. When the king talks with any man, he stands on one +leg, setting the other foot on his knee, with his sword in his +hand; as, according to their customs the king never sits. He is +dressed in a fine painted cotton cloth wrapped about his middle; +his hair long and bound about his head with a small fine cloth, +and all the rest of his body naked. His guard is a thousand men, +which stand round about him. They are all Chingalese, who are +said to be the best kind of the Malabars. They have very large +ears, as the larger they are the more honourable they are +esteemed, some being a span long. They burn the wood of the +cinnamon tree, which gives a pleasant scent. In this island there +is great store of rubies, sapphires, and spinels of the best +kind, but the king will not allow the inhabitants to dig for +them, lest they should tempt his enemies to make war upon him and +deprive him of his dominions. There are no horses in this +country, but many elephants, which are not so large as those of +Pegu, which are of prodigious size; yet it is said all other +elephants are afraid of those of Ceylon, and refuse to fight +them, though small. The women of this island wear a cloth round +their middles, reaching only to the knees, all the rest of their +bodies being bare. Both men and women are black and very little. +Their houses are small, being constructed of the branches of the +palmer or coco tree, and covered with the leaves of the same +tree.</p> + +<p>The 11th of March we departed from Ceylon and doubled Cape +Comorin. Not far from thence, between Ceylon and the main-land of +India at Negapatnam, they fish for pearls every year, whence all +India, Cambaya, and Bengal are supplied. But these pearls are +<i>not so orient</i> [are not so round or of so fine a water] as +those of Bahrain in the gulph of Persia. From Cape Comorin we +went to Coulan, a fort of the Portuguese, whence comes great +store of pepper for Portugal, as frequently one of the caraks is +laden here. We arrived at Cochin on the 22d of March, where we +found the weather very warm, and a great scarcity of provisions, +as neither corn nor rice grows here, having mostly to be supplied +from Bengal. They have here very bad water, as the river is far +off; and by this bad water many of the people are like lepers, +and many have their legs swollen as big as a mans waist, so that +they can hardly walk. The people here are Malabars, of the race +of the Nairs of Calicut, who differ much from the other Malabars. +These have their heads very full of hair, bound up with a string, +above which is a great bush of hair. The men are tall and strong, +and excellent archers, using a long bow and long arrows, which +are their best weapons; yet they have some fire-arms among them, +which they handle very badly.</p> + +<p>In this country pepper grows, being trained up a tree or pole. +It is like our ivy berry, but something longer, like an ear of +wheat. At first the bunches are green, but as they become ripe +they are cut off and dried. The leaf is much smaller and thinner +than that of ivy. The houses of the inhabitants are very small, +and are covered with the leaves of the coco-tree. The men are of +moderate stature, but the women very little; all black, with a +cloth about their middles, hanging down to their hams, all the +rest of their bodies being naked. They have horribly great ears, +with many rings set with pearls and other stones. All the pepper +sold in Calicut, and the coarse cinnamon [cassia] grow in this +country. The best cinnamon comes from Ceylon, and is peeled from +fine young trees. They have here many palmers, or coco-nut trees, +which is their chief food, as it yields both meat and drink, +together with many other useful things, as I said formerly.</p> + +<p>The nairs belonging to the Samorin or king of Calicut, which +are Malabars, are always at war with the Portuguese, though their +sovereign be at peace with them; but his people go to sea to rob +and plunder. Their chief captain is called <i>Cogi Alli</i>, who +hath three castles under his authority. When the Portuguese +complain to the Samorin, he pretends that he does not send them +out, but he certainly consents to their going. They range all +along the coast from Ceylon to Goa, and go in parties of four or +five paraos or boats together, in each of which are fifty or +sixty men, who immediately board every vessel they come up with, +doing much harm on that coast, and every year take many foists +and barks belonging to the Portuguese. Besides the nairs, many of +the people in these paraos are Moors. The dominions of the +Samorin begin twelve leagues from Cochin and reach to near +Goa.</p> + +<p>I remained in Cochin eight months, till the 2d of November, +not being able to procure a passage in all that time; whereas if +I had arrived two days sooner I should have got a passage +immediately. From Cochin I went to Goa, which is an hundred +leagues; and after remaining three days I went to Chaul, sixty +leagues from Goa. I remained twenty-three days at Chaul, making +all necessary preparations for the prosecution of my voyage. I +then sailed for Ormus, four hundred leagues from Goa, where I had +to wait fifty days for a passage to Basora.</p> + +<p>From Basora I went up the Euphrates and Tigris to Babylon or +Bagdat, being drawn up most of the way by the strength of men, +hauling by a long rope. From Bagdat I went by land to Mosul, +which stands near the scite of the ancient Nineveh, which is all +ruinated and destroyed. From Mosul I travelled to Merdin in +Armenia, where a people called <i>Cordies</i> or Curds now dwell. +I went thence to Orfa, a fair town having a fair fountain full of +fish, where the Mahometans hold many opinions, and practice many +ceremonies in reference to Abraham, who they allege once dwelt +there. From thence I went to Bir, where I crossed the Euphrates, +and continued my journey to Aleppo; whence, after staying some +months for a caravan, I went to Tripolis in Syria. Finding an +English ship there, I had a prosperous voyage to London, where by +the blessing of God I arrived safe on the 29th of April 1591, +having been eight years absent from my native country.</p> + +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Before ending this my book, I have thought right to declare +some things which are produced in India and the countries farther +east[428].</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 428: This account of the commodities of +India so very much resembles that already given in the +perigrinations of Cesar Frederick, Vol. VII. p. 204, as to seem +in a great measure borrowed from it, though with some +variations.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Pepper grows in many parts of India, especially about Cochin; +much of it growing wild in the fields among the bushes without +cultivation, and is gathered when ripe. When first gathered it is +green, but becomes black by drying in the sun. Ginger is found in +many parts of India, growing like our garlic, the root being the +ginger. Cloves come from the Molucca islands, the tree resembling +our bay. Nutmegs and mace grow together on the same tree, and +come from the island of Banda, the tree being like our +walnut-tree, but smaller. White sandal wood comes from the island +of Timor. It is very sweet scented, and is in great request among +the natives of India, who grind it up with a little water, and +then anoint their bodies with it, as a grateful perfume. Camphor +is esteemed very precious among the Indians, and is sold dearer +than gold, so that I think none of it comes to Christendom. That +which is compounded comes from China: But the best, which grows +in canes, comes from the great island of Borneo.</p> + +<p>Lignuo aloes are from Cochin China. Benjamin, or Benzoin, +comes from Siam and Jangomes[429]. Long pepper grows in Bengal, +Pegu, and the Javas. Musk comes from Tartary[430], Amber[431] is +supposed by most to come out of the sea, as it is all found on +the shore.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 429: In Cesar Fredericks peregrinations, +Benzoin is said to come from Siam and <i>Assi</i>, or Assam, +which confirms the conjecture already made, of Langeiannes and +the Jangomes referring to Assam.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 430: Fitch here repeats the ridiculous, +story respecting the fabrication of musk, already given by Cesar +Frederick.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 431: Certainly Ambergris, the origin of +which from the Spermaceti whale has been formerly noticed in this +work.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Rubies, sapphires and spinels are found in Pegu. Diamonds are +found in several places, as in Bisnagur, Agra, Delhi, and the +Javan islands. The best pearls come from the isle of Bahrein in +the gulf of Persia; and an inferior sort from the fisheries near +Ceylon, and from Ainan, a large island off the southern coast of +China. Spodium and many other drugs come from Cambaia or Gujrat, +commonly called Guzerat.</p> + +<p>SECTION III.</p> + +<p><i>Supplement to the Journey of Fitch</i>[432].</p> + +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> + +<p>In Hakluyt's collection, p. 235--376, are given letters from +queen Elizabeth to Akbar Shah, Mogul emperor of Hindostan, called +there Zelabdim Echebar, king of Cambaia, and to the king or +emperor of China, dated 1583. These are merely complimentary, and +for the purpose of recommending John Newbery and his company to +the protection and favour of these eastern sovereigns, in case of +visiting their dominions; and need not therefore be inserted in +this place. The following articles however, are of a different +description, consisting of several letters from John Newbery and +Ralph Fitch to different friends in England; and of an extract +from the work of John Huighen Van Linschoten, who was in Goa in +December 1583, upon their arrival at that emporium of the +Portuguese trade in India, affording a full confirmation of the +authenticity of the expedition thus far.--E.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 432: Hakluyt, II. 375--381. and +399--402.]</blockquote> + +<p>No. 1.--<i>Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt +of Oxford, author of the Voyages, &c.</i></p> + +<p>Right well beloved, and my assured good friend, I heartily +commend me unto you, hoping that you are in good health, &c. +After we set sail from Gravesend on the 13th of February, we +remained on our coast till the 11th of March, when we sailed from +Falmouth, and never anchored till our arrival in the road of +Tripoli in Syria, on the 30th of April. After staying fourteen +days there, we came to this place, Aleppo, on the 20th of this +present month of May, where we have now been eight days, and in +five or six days, with Gods help, we go from hence towards the +Indies. Since my arrival at Tripoli, I have made diligent +inquiry, both there and here, for the book of Cosmography of +Abulfeda Ismael, but cannot hear of it. Some say that it may +possibly be had in Persia; but I shall not fail to make inquiry +for it both in Babylon and Balsara, [Bagdat and Basora] and if I +can find it in either of these places, shall send it you from +thence. The letter which you gave me to copy out, which came from +Mr Thomas Stevens in Goa, as also the note you gave me of Francis +Fernandez the Portuguese, I brought away with me inadvertantly +among other writings; both of which I now return you +inclosed.</p> + +<p>Great preparations are making here for the wars in Persia; and +already is gone from hence the pacha of a town called +<i>Rahemet</i>, and shortly after the pachas of Tripoli and +Damascus are to follow; but they have not in all above 6000 men. +They go to a town called <i>Asmerome</i>, [Erzerum] three days +journey from Trebesond, where they are to meet with sundry +captains and soldiers from Constantinople and other places, to go +altogether into Persia. This year many men go for these wars, as +has been the case every year since they began, now about eight +years, but very few return again; although they have had the +advantage over the Persians, and have won several castles and +strong holds in that country.</p> + +<p>Make my hearty commendations to Mr Peter Guillame, Mr Philip +Jones, Mr Walter Warner, and all the rest of our friends. Mr +Fitch sends his hearty commendations; and so I commit you to the +tuition of Almighty God, whom I pray to bless and keep you, and +send us a joyful meeting. From Aleppo, the 28th of May 1583.</p> + +<p>Your loving friend to command in all that I may, JOHN +NEWBERY.</p> + +<p>No. 2.--<i>Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of +London</i>.</p> + +<p>My last was sent you on the 25th of February last from Deal +out of the Downs, after which, in consequence, of contrary winds, +we remained on the coast of England till the 11th March, when we +sailed from Falmouth. The 13th the wind came contrary with a +great storm, by which some of our goods were wet; but, God be +thanked, no great hurt was done. After this, we sailed with a +fair wind within the Straits, continuing our voyage and anchoring +no where till the 30th of April, when we arrived in the road of +Tripoli in Syria, which was a good passage, God make us thankful +for it. We left Tripoli on the 14th of this month of May, and +arrived here at Aleppo on the 20th; and with Gods help we begin +our voyage to-morrow for Bagdat and Basora, and so to India.</p> + +<p>Our friend Mr Barret, commendeth him to you, and sent you a +<i>ball</i> [bale?] of nutmegs in the Emanuel, for the small +trifles you sent him, which I hope you have long since received. +He has also by his letter informed you how he sold these things, +whereof I say nothing, neither having seen the account nor +demanded it; for, ever since our coming hither, he has been +constantly occupied about the dispatch of the ship and about our +voyage, and I likewise in purchasing things here to carry to +Basora and India. We have bought coral to the value of 1200 +ducats, amber for 400, and some soap and broken glass and other +small matters, which I hope will serve well for the places we are +going to. All the rest of the account of the bark Reinolds was +sent home in the Emanuel, which amounted to 3600 ducats, being +L.200 more than they were rated; as Mr Staper rated them at +L.1100, and it is L.1300; so that our part is L.200, besides such +profit as it shall please God to send thereof; wherefore you +would do well to speak to Mr Staper for the account.</p> + +<p>If you could resolve to travel for three or four years, I +would advise you to come here, or to go to Cairo, if any go +there. For we doubt not, if you were to remain here three or four +months, you would like the place so well, that I think you would +not desire to return in less than three or four years; as, were +it my chance to remain in any place out of England, I would +choose this before all other that I know. My reason is, that the +place is healthful and pleasant, and the profits good; and +doubtless the profits will be better hereafter, things being +carried on in an orderly manner. In every ship, the fourth part +of her cargo should come in money, which would help to put off +the rest of our commodities at a good price. It were also proper +that two good ships should come together, for mutual assistance, +in which case the danger of the voyage would be as little as from +London to Antwerp.</p> + +<p>Mr Giles Porter and Mr Edmund Porter went from Tripoli in a +small bark to Jaffa, the same day that we came from thence, which +was the 14th of this month of May, so that I have no doubt they +are long since in Jerusalem. God send them and us a safe return. +At this instant, I have received the account from Mr Barret, and +the rest of the rings, with 22 ducats and 2 medins in ready +money; so there remaineth nothing in his hands but a few books, +and I left certain small trifles with Thomas Bostocke, which I +pray you to demand. From Aleppo, the 29th May 1583.</p> + +<p>No. 3.--<i>Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same</i>.</p> + +<p>My last was of the 29th May from Aleppo, sent by George Gill, +purser of the Tiger. We left that place on the 31st, and came to +Feluchia, which is one days journey from Babylon [Bagdat,] on the +19th of June. Yet some of our company came not hither till the +30th of June, for want of camels to carry our goods; for by +reason of the great heats at this time of the year, camels are +very hard to be got. Since our coming here we have found very +scanty sales, but are told our commodities will sell well in +winter, which I pray God may be the case. I think cloth, kersies, +and tin have never been here so low as now. Yet, if I had here as +much ready money as our goods are worth, I would not doubt to +make a very good profit of the voyage here and at Basora, and as +it is, with Gods help, there will be reasonable profit made of +the adventure. But, with half money and half commodities, the +best sort of spices and other merchandise from India, may be +bought at reasonable rates, while without money there is very +little to be done here at this time to purpose. Two days hence, +God willing, I purpose going from hence to Basora, and from +thence I must necessarily go to Ormus, for want of a man who +speaks the Indian tongue. While at Aleppo, I hired two Nazarenes, +one of whom has been twice in India, and speaks the language +well; but he is a very lewd fellow, wherefore I will not take him +with me.</p> + +<p>The following are the prices of wares, as they are worth here +at present: Cloves and mace the <i>bateman</i>, 5 ducats; +cinnamon, 6 ducats, and very little to be had; ginger, 40 medins; +pepper, 75 medins; turbetta[433], 50 medins; neel [or indigo,] +the <i>churle</i> 70 ducats: the churle is 27-1/2 rotils of +Aleppo; silk, much better than that which comes from Persia, +11-1/2 ducats the bateman, each bateman being 7 pounds 5 ounces +English. From Bagdat this 20th July 1583.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 433: Most likely turmeric, anciently called +turbith vegetable, in contradistinction to turbith mineral, so +named from its yellow colour resembling turbith or +turmeric.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>No. 4.--<i>Letter from, John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and +William Scales at Basora</i>.</p> + +<p>Time will not permit to give you an account of my voyage after +my departure from you. But on the 4th day of this present +September, we arrived here at Ormus; and the 10th day I and the +rest were committed to prison. The middle of next month, or +thereabout, the captain proposes sending us all in his ship to +Goa. The cause for which we have been imprisoned is said to be, +because we brought letters from Don Antonio: But the truth is, +Michael Stropene is the only cause, through letters written to +him by his brother from Aleppo. God knows how we may be dealt +with at Goa; and therefore, if you our masters can procure that +the king of Spain may send his letters for our release, you would +do us great good, for they cannot with any justice put us to +death, though it may be that they will cut our throats, or keep +us long in prison. Gods will be done.</p> + +<p>All the commodities I brought to this place had been well +sold, if this trouble had not come upon us. You shall do well to +send a messenger in all speed by land from Basora to Aleppo, to +give notice of this mischance, even though it may cost 30 or 40 +crowns, that we may be the sooner released, and I shall thereby +be the better able to recover again what is now like to be lost. +From prison in Ormus, this 21st September 1583.</p> + +<p>No. 5.--<i>Letter Mr J. Newbery to Messrs Eldred and +Scales</i>.</p> + +<p>The bark of the Jews is arrived here two days ago, by which I +am sure you wrote; but your letters are not likely to come to my +hands. The bringer of this hath shewed me very great courtesy, +for which I pray you to shew him what favour you can. About the +middle of next month, I think we shall depart from hence: God be +our guide. I think Andrew will go by land to Aleppo; and I pray +you to further him what you may: But, if he should not go, then I +pray you to dispatch a messenger in all speed. I can say no more, +but beg you to do for me what I should do for you in the like +case. From prison in Ormus, the 24th September 1583.</p> + +<p>No. 6.--<i>Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore</i>.</p> + +<p>My last from Ormus certified you what had happened to me +there, with the rest of my company; as in four days after our +arrival we were all committed to prison, except one Italian, who +came with me from Aleppo, whom the captain never examined, except +asking what countryman he was; but I believe Michael Stropene, +who accused us, had informed the captain of him. The first day of +our arrival at Ormus, this Stropene accused us of being spies for +Don Antonio, besides diverse other lies; yet if we had been of +any other country than England, we might freely have traded with +them. Although we be Englishmen, I know no reason why we may not +as well trade from place to place as the natives of other +countries; for all nations may and do come freely to Ormus, as +Frenchmen, Flemings, Germans, Hungarians, Italians, Greeks, +Armenians, Nazarenes, Turks, Moors, Jews, and Gentiles, Persians, +and Muscovites. In short, there is no nation they seek to +trouble, but only ours; wherefore it were contrary to all justice +and reason that they should suffer all nations to trade with +them, and forbid us. Now indeed I have as great liberty as those +of any other nation, except it be to leave the country, which as +yet I desire not. But hereafter, and I think ere long, if I shall +be desirous to go from hence, that they will not refuse me +licence. Before we were suffered to come out of prison, I was +forced to put in sureties for 2000 pardaos, not to depart from +hence without licence of the viceroy; and except this, we have +now as much liberty as any one, for I have got back our goods, +and have taken a house in the chiefest street called the <i>Rue +drette</i>, where we sell our goods.</p> + +<p>There were two causes which moved the captain of Ormus to +imprison us, and afterwards to send us to Goa. The first was +because Michael Stropene had most falsely accused us of many +matters. The other was, because when Mr Drake was at the Molucca +islands, he caused two pieces of cannon to be fired at a +Portuguese galeon belonging to the king, at least so they allege. +But of these things I did not know when at Ormus. In the same +ship which brought us to Goa, came the chief justice of Ormus, +called the veedor general of that place, who had been there three +years, so that his time was expired. This veedor is a great +friend to the captain of Ormus, and sent for me into his chamber, +one day after coming here to Goa, and began to demand many things +at me, to which I made answers. Among other things, he said that +Mr Drake had been sent out of England with many ships, and had +gone to Molucca where he loaded cloves, and finding a Portuguese +galeon there belonging to the king, had shot two pieces of his +great ordnance against her. Perceiving this grieved them much, I +asked if they meant to be revenged on me for what had been done +by Mr Drake: To which he answered no; though his meaning was +yes.</p> + +<p>He said moreover, that the captain of Ormus had sent me to +Goa, that the viceroy might learn the news from me respecting Don +Antonio, and whether he were in England or not; and that it might +possibly be all for the best my being sent hither; which I trust +in God may so fall out, though contrary to his expectation and +intention: For, if it had not pleased God to influence the minds +of the archbishop, and two padres or Jesuits of the college of St +Paul, to stand our friends, we might have rotted in prison. The +archbishop is a very good man, who has two young men in his +service, one called Bernard Borgers born in Hamburgh, and the +other named John Linscot[434], a native of Enkhuysen, who did us +especial service; for by them the archbishop was often reminded +of our case. The two good fathers who laboured so much for us +were padre Mark, a native of Bruges in Flanders, and padre Thomas +Stevens[435], born in Wiltshire in England. I chanced likewise to +fall in with here a young man, Francis de Rea, who was born in +Antwerp, but was mostly brought up in London, with whom I became +acquainted in Aleppo, who also has done me much service.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 434: John Huighen van Linschoten, the +author of the book respecting the East Indies, formerly quoted, +and from which a second quotation will be given in this +supplement.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 435: This is he whose letter to his father +from Goa has been already inserted, and who was sometime of New +College in Oxford.--Hakluyt.]</blockquote> + +<p>We remained many days in prison at Ormus, and were a long +while at sea coming hither. Immediately on our arrival at this +place we were sent to prison, whence next day we were brought +before the chief justice or veedor, to be examined, after which +we were remanded to prison. When we had been thirteen days in +prison, James Storie, the painter who accompanied us, went into +the monastery of St Paul, where he remains, being made one of the +company, which life he seems to like[436]. Upon St Thomas day, +12th December, 22 days after our arrival here, I was liberated +from prison, and the next day Ralph Fitch and William Bets[437] +came out.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 436: It will appear afterwards that he did +not continue.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 437: In the narrative of Fitch no such name +occurs, but William Leedes jeweller, is named as one of the +party. Perhaps he ought to have been named by Fitch, William Bets +of Leeds.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>If these troubles had not occurred, I think I was in a fair +way of making as good a voyage as was ever made with such a sum +of money. Many of our things I sold very well, both here and at +Ormus while in prison, although the captain of Ormus wished me to +have sold all I had before I embarked; so, by his permission, I +went sundry times from the castle in the mornings, accompanied by +officers, and sold things, and returned again at night to prison. +They wrote down every thing that I sold; and at my embarking, the +captain directed me to deliver all my money and goods into the +hands of the <i>scrivano</i> or purser of the ship, which I did, +and the scrivano left an acknowledgement with the captain, that +myself with the money and goods should be delivered up to the +veedor general in India. But on our arrival here, the veedor +would not meddle with either money or goods, seeing that no crime +was substantiated against us: Wherefore the goods remained in the +ship nine or ten days after our arrival; and then, as the ship +was to sail from thence, the scrivano sent the goods on shore, +where they remained a day and a night without any one to receive +them. In the end, they permitted the bearer of this letter to +receive them, who put them into a house which he hired for me, in +which they remained four or five days. When afterwards they ought +to have delivered the money, it was ordered by the <i>veedor</i>, +that both the money and goods should be given into the custody of +the <i>positor</i>, where they remained for fourteen days after I +was liberated from prison.</p> + +<p>When in Aleppo, I bought a fountain of silver gilt, six +knives, six spoons, and one fork, all trimmed with coral, for 25 +chekins, which the captain of Ormus took to himself and only paid +20 pardaos, or 100 larines, though they were worth there or here +at Goa 100 chekins. Also he had five emeralds set in gold, worth +five or six hundred crowns, for which he only paid 100 pardaos. +He likewise took 19-1/2 pikes of cloth, which cost 20 shillings +the pike at London, and was worth 9 or 10 crowns the pike at +Ormus, for which he only paid 12 larines. He also had two pieces +of green kersie, worth 24 pardaos each; besides divers other more +trifling articles which he and the officers took at similar +inferior prices, and some for nothing at all. But the real cause +of all was Michal Stropene, who came to Ormus without a penny, +and is now worth thirty or forty thousand crowns, and is grieved +that any stranger should trade there but himself. But that shall +not avail him; for I trust yet to go both hither and thither, and +to buy and sell as freely as he or any other.</p> + +<p>There is a great deal of good to be done here in divers of our +commodities; and likewise there is much profit to be made with +the commodities of this country, when carried to Aleppo. It were +long for me to write, and tedious for you to read, all the +incidents which have occurred to me since we parted; but the +bearer is able to inform you of every thing that has befallen me +since my arrival in Ormus. It is my intention to remain here in +Goa; wherefore, if you write me, you may send your letters to +some friend in Lisbon, to be forwarded from thence by the India +ships. Let your direction, therefore be in Portuguese or Spanish, +by which they will the more readily reach me.--From Goa, this +20th of January 1584.</p> + +<p>No, 7.--<i>Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard +Poore</i>.</p> + +<p>Loving friend, &c. Since my departure from Aleppo, I have +not written you, because at Bagdat I was ill of flux, and +continued in all the way thence to Basora, which was twelve days +journey down the Tigris, when we had extremely hot weather, bad +fare, and worse lodging, all of which increased my disease; +besides which our boat was pestered with people. During eight +entire days I hardly eat any thing, so that if we had been two +days longer on the water, I verily believe I had died. But, +thanks be to God, I presently mended after coming to Basora. We +remained there fourteen days, when we embarked for Ormus, where +we arrived on the 5th of September, and were put in prison on the +9th of the same month, where we continued till the 11th of +October, and were then shipt for this city of Goa, in the ship +belonging to the captain of Ormus, with 114 horses[438], and +about 200 men. Passing by Diu and Chaul, at which place we landed +on the 20th November, we arrived at Goa on the 29th of that +month, where, for our better entertainment, we were committed to +a fair strong prison, in which we continued till the 22d of +December. It pleased God, that there were two padres there who +befriended us, the one an Englishman named Thomas Stevens, the +other a Fleming named Marco, both Jesuits of the college of St +Paul. These good men sued for us to the viceroy and other +officers, and stood us in such good stead as our lives and goods +were worth: But for them, even if we had escaped with our lives, +we must have suffered a long imprisonment.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 438: In the narrative of Fitch, called 124, +which might easily be mistaken either way in +transcription.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When we had been fourteen days in prison, they offered us +leave to go at large in the town, if we would give sureties, for +2000 ducats, not to depart the country without the licence of the +viceroy. Being unable to procure any such, the before mentioned +friendly fathers of St Paul procured sureties for us. The +Italians are much offended and displeased at our enlargement, and +many wonder at our delivery. James Storie the painter has gone +into the cloister of St Paul, as one of their order, and seems to +like the situation. While we were in prison, both at Ormus and +here, a great deal of our goods were pilfered and lost, and we +have been at great charges in gifts and otherwise, so that much +of our property is consumed. Of what remains, much will sell very +well, and for some we will get next to nothing. The viceroy is +gone to Chaul and Diu as it is said to win a castle of the Moors, +and it is thought he will return about Easter; when I trust in +God we shall procure our liberty, and have our sureties +discharged. It will then, I think, be our best way for one or +both of us to return, as our troubles have been very great, and +because so much of our goods have been spoiled and lost: But if +it should please God that I come to England, I will certainly +return here again. It is a charming country, and extremely +fruitful, having summer almost the whole year, but the most +delightful season is about Christmas. The days and nights are of +equal length throughout the whole year, or with very little +difference; and the country produces a most wonderful abundance +of fruit. After all our troubles we are fat and in good health, +for victuals are plentiful and cheap. I omit to inform you of +many strange things till we meet, as it would be too long to +write of them. And thus I commit you to God, &c. From Goa in +the East Indies, 25th January 1584.</p> + +<p>No. 8.--<i>The Report of John Huighen van Linschoten, +concerning the imprisonment of Newbery and Fitch; which happened +while he was at Goa</i>.</p> + +<p>In the month of December 1583, four Englishmen arrived at +Ormus, who came by way of Aleppo in Syria, having sailed from +England by the Mediterranean to Tripoli, a town and haven in +Syria, where all ships discharge their wares and merchandise for +Aleppo, to which they are carried by land, which is a journey of +nine days. In Aleppo there reside many merchants and factors of +all nations, as Italians, French, English, Armenians, Turks, and +Moors, every one following his own religion, and paying tribute +to the grand Turk. It. is a place of great trade, whence twice +every year there go two <i>cafilas</i> or caravans, containing +great companies of people and camels, which travel to India, +Persia, Arabia, and all the adjoining countries, dealing in all +kinds of merchandise both to and from these countries, as I have +already declared in another part of this book.</p> + +<p>Three of these Englishmen were sent by the company of English +who reside in Aleppo, to see if they might keep any factors at +Ormus, and so traffic in that place, as the Italians do, that is +the Venetians, who have their factors in Ormus, Goa, and Malacca, +and trade there, both for pearls and precious stones, and for +other wares and spices of these countries, which are carried +thence over-land to Venice. One of these Englishmen, Mr John +Newbery, had been once before in the said town of Ormus, and had +there taken good information of the trade; and on his advice the +others were then come hither along with him, bringing great store +of merchandise; such as cloths, saffron, all kinds of drinking +glasses and haberdashery wares, as looking-glasses, knives, and +such like stuff; and to conclude, they brought with them every +kind of small wares that can be thought of.</p> + +<p>Although these wares amounted to great sums of money, they +were yet only as a shadow or colour, to give no occasion of +mistrust or suspicion, as their principal intention was to +purchase great quantities of precious stones, as diamonds, +pearls, rubies, &c. to which end they brought with them a +great sum of money in silver and gold, and that very secretly, +that they might not be robbed of it, or run into danger on its +account[439]. On their arrival at Ormus, they hired a shop and +began to sell their wares; which being noticed by the Italians, +whose factors reside there as I said before, and fearing if these +Englishmen got good vent for their commodities, that they would +become residents and so daily increase, which would be no small +loss and hindrance to them, they presently set about to invent +subtle devices to hinder them. To which end, they went +immediately to the captain of Ormus, who was then Don Gonzalo de +Menezes[440], saying that these Englishmen were heretics come to +spy the country, and that they ought to be examined and punished +as enemies, for a warning to others. Being friendly to these +Englishmen, as one of them had been there before and had given +him presents, the captain could not be prevailed upon to injure +them, but shipped them with all their wares for Goa, sending them +to the viceroy, that he might examine and deal with them as he +thought good.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 439: This seems a mere adoption of the +rumours of the Italians; as Newbery distinctly complains of the +want of cash, by which he might have made very profitable +purchases in Aleppo, Bagdat, and Basora.--E.]</blockquote> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 440: The captain of the castle of Ormus is +named Don Mathias de Albuquerque by Fitch.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>Upon their arrival at Goa, they were cast into prison, and +were in the first place examined whether or not they were good +Christians. As they could only speak very bad Portuguese, while +two of them spoke good Dutch, having resided several years in the +low countries, a Dutch Jesuit who was born at Bruges in Flanders, +and had resided thirty years in India, was sent to them, to +undermine and examine them; in which they behaved so well, that +they were holden and esteemed for good and Catholic Christians; +yet were they still suspected, as being strangers and Englishmen. +The Jesuits told them that they would be sent prisoners into +Portugal, and advised them to leave off their trade in +merchandise, and to become Jesuits; promising in return to defend +them from all their troubles. The cause of thus earnestly +persuading them was this: The Dutch Jesuit had been secretly +informed that they had great sums of money, and sought to get +that for the order; as the first vow and promise made on becoming +a Jesuit is, to procure and advance the welfare of the order by +every possible means. Although the Englishmen refused this, +saying that they were quite unfit for such matters, yet one of +them, a painter, who came with the other three to see the country +and seek his fortune, and was not sent by the English merchants, +partly through fear, and partly from want of means to relieve +himself from prison, promised to become a Jesuit. And although +the fathers knew that he was not one of those who had the +treasure, yet, because he was a painter, of whom there are few in +India, and that they had great need of one to paint their church, +which would cost them great charges to bring from Portugal, they +were very glad of him, and hoped in time to get all the rest, +with all their money, into their fellowship.</p> + +<p>To conclude, they made this painter a Jesuit, and he continued +some time in their college, where they gave him plenty of work to +perform, and entertained him with all the favour and friendship +they could devise, all to win the rest to become their prey. But +the other three remained in prison in great fear, because they +did not understand any who came to them, neither did any one +understand what they said. They were at last informed of certain +Dutchmen who dwelt with the archbishop, and were advised to send +for them, at which they greatly rejoiced, and sent for me and +another Dutchman, desiring us to come and speak with them, which +we presently did. With tears in their eyes, they complained to us +of their hard usage, explaining to us distinctly, as is said +before, the true cause of their coming to Ormus, and praying us +for God's sake to help them to their liberty upon sureties, +declaring themselves ready to endure whatever could be justly +ordained for them, if they were found to be otherwise than they +represented, or different from other travelling merchants who +sought to profit by their wares.</p> + +<p>Promising to do our best for them, we at length prevailed on +the archbishop to deliver a petition for them to the viceroy, and +persuaded him to set them at liberty and restore their goods, on +condition of giving security to the amount of 2000 pardaos, not +to depart the country without licence. Thereupon they presently +found a citizen who became their surety in 2000 pardaos, to whom +they paid in hand 1300, as they said they had no more money; +wherefore he gave them credit for the rest, seeing that they had +great store of merchandise, through which he might at any time be +satisfied, if needful. By these means they were delivered out of +prison, on which they hired a house, and began to open shop; so +that they sold many of their goods, and were presently well known +among the merchants, as they always respected gentlemen, +especially such as bought their wares, shewing them much honour +and courtesy, by which they won much credit, and were beloved of +all men, so that all favoured them, and were ready to shew them +favour. To us they shewed great friendship, and for our sakes the +archbishop favoured them much, and gave them good countenance, +which they well knew how to increase by offering him many +presents, although he would not receive them, as he never +accepted gift or present from any person. They behaved themselves +in all things so discreetly, that no one carried an evil eye or +evil thought towards them. This did not please the Jesuits, as it +hindered what they still wished and hoped for; so that they still +ceased not to intimidate them by means of the Dutch Jesuit, +intimating that they would be sent prisoners to Portugal, and +counselling them to become Jesuits in the cloister of St Paul, +when they would be securely defended from all troubles. The +Dutchman pretended to give them this advice as a friend, and one +who knew certainly that it was so determined in the viceroy's +council, and that he only waited till the ship sailed for +Portugal; using this and other devices to put them in fear, and +so to effect their purpose.</p> + +<p>The Englishmen durst not say any thing to the contrary, but +answered that they would remain as they were yet a little while +and consider their proposal, thus putting the Jesuits in hopes of +their compliance. The principal of these Englishmen, John +Newbery, often complained to me, saying that he knew not what to +think or say of these things, or how they might get rid of these +troubles. In the end, they determined with themselves to depart +from Goa; and secretly, by means of other friends, they employed +their money in the purchase of precious stones, which they were +the better able to effect as one of them was a jeweller, who came +with them for that purpose. Having concluded on this step, they +durst not make it known to any one, not even to us, although they +used to consult us on all occasions and tell us every thing they +knew.</p> + +<p>On one of the Whitson holidays, they went out to recreate +themselves about three miles from Goa, in the mouth of the river, +in a country called <i>Bardez</i>[441], taking with them a supply +of victuals and drink. That they might not be suspected, they +left their house and shop, with same of their wares unsold, in +the charge of a Dutch boy whom we had procured for them, and who +remained in their house, quite ignorant of their intentions. When +in Bardez, they procured a <i>patamer</i>, one of the Indian +post-boys or messengers who carry letters from place to place, +whom they hired as a guide. Between Bardez and the main-land +there is only a small river, in a manner half dry, which they +passed over on foot, and so travelled away by land, and were +never heard of again; but it is thought they arrived in Aleppo, +though no one knows: with certainty. Their great dependence is +upon John Newbery, who can speak the Arabian language, which is +used in all these countries, or at least understood, being as +commonly known in all the east as French is with us.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 441: Bardes is an island a short way north +from the island of Goa, and only divided from the main-land by a +small river or creek.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>On the news of their departure being brought to Goa, there was +a great stir and murmuring among the people, as all much +wondered. Many were of opinion that we had counselled them to +withdraw, and presently their surety seized on the remaining +goods, which might amount to the value of 200 pardaos; and with +that and the money he had received of the Englishmen, he went to +the viceroy, and delivered it to him, the viceroy forgiving him +the rest. This flight of the Englishmen grieved the Jesuits +worst, as they had lost so rich a prey, which they made +themselves secure of. The Dutch Jesuit came to ask us if we knew +of their intentions, saying, if he had suspected as much he would +have dealt differently by them, for he had once in his hands a +bag of theirs, in which were 40,000 <i>veneseanders</i>, [442], +each worth two pardaos, at the time when they were in prison. But +as they had always given him to believe he might accomplish his +desire of getting them to profess in the Jesuit college, he had +given them their money again, which otherwise they would not have +come by so easily, or peradventure never. This he said openly, +and in the end he called them heretics, spies, and a thousand +other opprobrious names.</p> + +<blockquote>[Footnote 442: This word <i>veneseander</i>, or +venetiander, probably means, a Venetian chekin.--E.]</blockquote> + +<p>When the English painter, who had become a Jesuit, heard that +his countrymen were gone, and found that the Jesuits did not use +him with so great favour as at first, he repented himself; and +not having made any solemn vow, and being counselled to leave +their house, he told them that he made no doubt of gaining a +living in the city, and that they had no right to keep him +against his inclination, and as they could not accuse him of any +crime, he was determined not to remain with them. They used all +the means they could devise to keep him in the college, but he +would not stay, and, hiring a house in the city, he opened shop +as a painter, where he got plenty of employment, and in the end +married the daughter of a mestee, so that he laid his account to +remain there as long as he lived. By this Englishman I was +instructed in all the ways, trades, and voyages of the country +between Aleppo, and Ormus, and of all the rules and customs +observed in the overland passage, as also of all the towns and +places on the route. Since the departure of these Englishmen from +Goa, there have never arrived any strangers, either English or +others, by land, except Italians, who are constantly engaged in +the overland trade, going and coming continually.</p> + +<h2>END OF VOLUME SEVENTH.</h2> + +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 13287 ***</div> +</body> +</html> + |